A-Aṇ
At
Ad
An
Ap
Ab
Am-Av
As-Ah
Ā
I
Ī
U-Un
Up
Ub-Uh
Ū
E
O ŋ
K-Kā
Ki-Kv
Kh
G Gh Ṅ
C Ch J Jh Ñ
Ṭ Ṭh
Ḍ Ḍh Ṇ
T-Tā
Ti-Tv
Th
D
Dh
N-Ni
Nī-Nh
P-Pā
Pi-Po
Ph
B Bh
M
Y
R
L
Ḷ Ḷh
V-Vā
Vi
Vī-Vy
S-Sā
Si-Sū
Se-Sv
H
____ _ _ _____ _ ____ _ _ _
| _ \ __ _| (_) |_ _|____ _| |_ / ___| ___ ___(_) ___| |_ _ _( )___
| |_) / _` | | | | |/ _ \ \/ / __| \___ \ / _ \ / __| |/ _ \ __| | | |// __|
| __/ (_| | | | | | __/> <| |_ ___) | (_) | (__| | __/ |_| |_| | \__ \
|_| \__,_|_|_| |_|\___/_/\_\\__| |____/ \___/ \___|_|\___|\__|\__, | |___/
|___/
___ ___ ____ ___ __
/ _ \___ _/ (_)___/ __/__ ___ _/ (_)__ / /
/ ___/ _ `/ / /___/ _// _ \/ _ `/ / (_-</ _ \
/_/ \_,_/_/_/ /___/_//_/\_, /_/_/___/_//_/
/___/
___ __ _
___/ (_)___/ /_(_)__ ___ ___ _______ __
/ _ / / __/ __/ / _ \/ _ \/ _ `/ __/ // /
\_,_/_/\__/\__/_/\___/_//_/\_,_/_/ \_, /
/___/
It is somewhat hard to realize, seeing how important and valuable the work has been, that when ROBERT CAESAR CHILDERS published, in 1872, the first volume of his Pali Dictionary, he only had at his command a few pages of the canonical Pali books. Since then, owing mainly to the persistent labours of the Pali Text Society, practically the whole of these books, amounting to between ten and twelve thousand pages, have been made available to scholars. These books had no authors. They are anthologies which gradually grew up in the community. Their composition, as to the Vinaya and the four Nikayas (with the possible exception of the supplements) was complete within about a century of the Buddha's death; and the rest belong to the following century. When scholars have leisure to collect and study the data to be found in this pre- Sanskrit literature, it will necessarily throw as much light on the history of ideas and language as the study of such names and places as are mentioned in it (quite inci- dentally) has already thrown upon the political divisions, social customs, and economic conditions of ancient India.
Some of these latter facts I have endeavoured to collect in my 'Buddhist India' and perhaps the most salient discovery is the quite unexpected conclusion that, for about two centuries (both before the Buddha's birth and after his death), the para- mount power in India was Kosala -- a kingdom stretching from Nepal on the North to the Ganges on the South, and from the Ganges on the West to the territories of the Vajjian confederacy on the East. In this, the most powerful kingdom in India; there had naturally arisen a standard vernacular differing from the local forms of speech just as standard English differs from the local (usually county) dialects. The Pali of the canonical books is based on that standard Kosala vernacular as spoken in the 6thand 7th centuries B. C. It cannot be called the 'literary' form of that vernacular, for it was not written at all till long afterwards. That vernacular was the mother tongue of the Buddha. He was born in what is now Nepal, but was then a district under the suzer- ainty of Kosala and in one of the earliest Pali documents he is represented as calling himself a Kosalan.
When, about a thousand years afterwards, some pandits in Ceylon began to write in Pali, they wrote in a style strikingly different from that of the old texts. Part of that difference is no doubt due simply to a greater power of fluent expression unhampered by the necessity of constantly considering that the words composed had to be learnt by heart. When the Sinhalese used Pali, they were so familiar with the method of writing on palmleaves that the question of memorizing simply did not arise. It came up again later. But none of the works belonging to this period were intended to be learnt. They were intended to be read.
On the other hand they were for the most part reproductions of older material that had, till then, been preserved in Sinhalese. Though the Sinhalese pandits were writing in Pali, to them, of course, a dead language, they probably did their thinking in their own mother tongue. Now they had had then, for many generations, so close and intimate an intercourse with their Dravidian neighbours that Dravidian habits of speech had crept into Sinhalese. It was inevitable that some of the peculiarities of their own tongue, and especially these Dravidanisms, should have influenced their style when they wrote in Pali. It will be for future scholars to ascertain exactly how far this influence can be traced in the idioms and in the order of the arrangement of the matter of these Ceylon Pali books of the fifth and sixth centuries A. D.
There is no evidence that the Sinhalese at that time knew Sanskrit. Some centuries afterwards a few of them learnt the elements of classical Sanskrit and very proud they were of it. They introduced the Sanskrit forms of Sinhalese words when writing 'high' Sinhalese. And the authors of such works as the Dathavansa, the Saddhammo- payana, and the Mahabodhivansa, make use of Pali words derived from Sanskrit - that is, they turned into Pali form certain Sanskrit words they found either in the Amara--kosa, or in the course of their very limited reading, and used them as Pali. It would be very desirable to have a list of such Pali words thus derived from Sanskrit. It would not be a long one.
Here we come once more to the question of memory. From the 11th cent. onwards it became a sort of fashion to write manuals in verse, or in prose and verse, on such subjects as it was deemed expedient for novices to know. Just as the first book written in Pali in Ceylon was a chain of memoriter verses strung together by very indifferent Pali verses, so at the end we have these scarcely intelligible memo- riter verses meant to be learned by heart by the pupils.
According to the traditions handed down among the Sinhalese, Pali, that is, the language used in the texts, could also be called Magadhi. What exactly did they mean by that? They could not be referring to the Magadhi of the Prakrit grammarians, for the latter wrote some centuries afterwards. Could they have meant the dialect spoken in Magadha at the date when they used the phrase, say, the sixth century A. D.? That could only be if they had any exact knowledge of the different vernaculars of North India at the time. For that there is no evidence, and it is in itself very improbable. What they did mean is probably simply the language used by Asoka, the king of Magadha. For their traditions also stated that the texts had been brought to them officially by Asoka's son Mahinda; and not in writing, but in the memory of Mahinda and his companions. Now we know something of the language of Asoka. We have his edicts engraved in different parts of India, differing slightly in com- pliance with local varieties of speech. Disregarding these local differences, what is left may be considered the language of head--quarters where these edicts were cer- tainly drafted. This 'Magadhi' contains none of the peculiar characteristics we associate with the Magadhi dialect. It is in fact a younger form of that standard Kosalan lingua franca mentioned above.
Now it is very suggestive that we hear nothing of how the king of Magadha became also king of Kosala. Had this happened quietly, by succession, the event would have scarcely altered the relation of the languages of the two kingdoms. That of the older and larger would still have retained its supremacy. So when the Scottish dynasty succeeded to the English throne, the two languages remained distinct, but English became more and more the standard.
However this may be, it has become of essential importance to have a Dictionary of a language the history of whose literature is bound up with so many delicate and interesting problems. The Pali Text Society, after long continued exertion and many cruel rebuffs and disappointments is now at last in a position to offer to scholars the first instalment of such a dictionary.
The merits and demerits of the work will be sufficiently plain even from the first fasciculus. But one or two remarks are necessary to make the position of my colleague and myself clear.
We have given throughout the Sanskrit roots corresponding to the Pali roots, and have omitted the latter. It may be objected that this is a strange method to use in a Pali dictionary, especially as the vernacular on which Pali is based had never passed through the stage of Sanskrit. That may be so; and it may not be possible, historically, that any Pali word in the canon could have been actually derived from the corresponding Sanskrit word. Nevertheless the Sanskrit form, though arisen quite independently, may throw light upon the Pali form; and as Pali roots have not yet been adequately studied in Europe, the plan adopted will probably, at least for the present, be more useful.
This work is essentially preliminary. There is a large number of words of which we do not know the derivation. There is a still larger number of which the derivation does not give the meaning, but rather the reverse. It is so in every living language. Who could guess, from the derivation, the complicated meaning of such words as 'conscience', 'emotion', 'disposition'? The derivation would be as likely to mislead as to guide. We have made much progress. No one needs now to use the one English word 'desire' as a translation of sixteen distinct Pali words, no one of which means precisely desire. Yet this was done in Vol. X of the Sacred Books of the East by MAX MULLER and FAUSBOLL 1 The same argument applies to as many concrete words as abstract ones. Here again we claim to have made much advance. But in either case, to wait for perfection would postpone the much needed dictionary to the Greek kalends. It has therefore been decided to proceed as rapidly as possible with the completion of this first edition, and to reserve the proceeds of the sale for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be.
We have to thank Mrs. STEDE for valuable help in copying out material noted in my interleaved copy of Childers, and in collating indexes published by the Society; Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS for revising certain articles on the technical terms of psychology and philosophy; and the following scholars for kindly placing at our disposal the material they had collected for the now abandoned scheme of an international Pali Dictionary:
Prof. STEN KONOW. Words beginning with S or H. (Published in J P T S.
1909 and 1907, revised by Prof. Dr. C ANDERSEN).
Dr. MABEL H. BODE. B, Bh and M.
Prof.DUROISELLE. K.
Dr. W.H.D. ROUSE. C--N
In this connection I should wish to refer to the work of Dr. EDMOND HARDY. When he died he left a great deal of material; some of which has reached us in time to be made available. He was giving his whole time, and all his enthusiasm to the work, and had he lived the dictionary would probably have been finished before the war. His loss was really the beginning of the end of the international undertaking.
Anybody familiar with this sort of work will know what care and patience, what scholarly knowledge and judgment are involved in the collection of such material, in the sorting, the sifting and final arrangement of it, in the adding of cross references, in the consideration of etymological puzzles, in the comparison and correction of various or faulty readings, and in the verification of references given by others, or found in the indexes. For all this work the users of the Dictionary will have to thank my colleague, Dr. WILLIAM STEDE. It may be interesting to notice here that the total number of references to appear in this first edition of the new dictionary is estimated to be between one hundred and fifty and one hundred and sixty thousand. The Bavarian Academy has awarded to Dr. STEDE a personal grant of 3100 marks for his work on this Dictionary.
Chipstead, Surrey. July, 1921. T. W. RHYS DAVIDS.
A. List of the Chief Books Consulted for Vocabulary (with Abbreviations). 1. PALI BOOKS.
1a Canonical.
Anguttara--Nikaya 5 vols. P T Niddesa II Culla P T S. 1918 S. 1885-1900 (A). (Nd2).
Apadana P.T.S. 1925 (Ap). Patisambhidamagga 2 vols. P T S. 1905, 1907 (Ps).
Buddha--Vansa P T S. 1882 (Bu). Peta--Vatthu P T S. 1889 (Pv).
Cariya--Pitaka P T S. 1882 Puggala--Pannatti P T S. 1883 (Cp.). (Pug).
Dhammapada P T S. 1914 (Dh). Sanyutta--Nikaya 5 vols. P T S. 1884-1898 (S).
Dhamma--Sangani P T S. 1885 Sutta--Nipata P T S. 1913 (Sn). (Dhs).
Digha--Nikaya 3 vols. P T S. Thera--therigatha P T S. 1883 (D). (Th 1) &(Th 2).
Dukapatthana, P.T.S. 1906 Tikapatthana, 3 vols. P.T.S. (Dukp). 1921--23 (Tikp).
Iti--vuttaka P T S. 1890 (It.). Udana P T S. 1885 (Ud).
Katha--Vatthu 2 vols. P T S. Vibhanga P T S. 1904 (Vbh). 1894, 95 (Kvu).
Khuddaka--Patha P T S. 1915 Vimana--Vatthu P T S. 1886 (Kh). (Vv).
Majjhima--Nikaya 3 vols. P T S. Vinaya--Pitaka 5 vols. London 1887-1902 (M). 1879-83 (Vin).
Niddesa I Maha 2 vols. P T S. 1916, 17 (Nd1).
1b Post-Canonical.
Atthasalini, P T S. 1897 Netti--Pakarana, P T S. 1902 (DhsA). (Nett).
Buddhadatta's Manuals, P T S. Panca--gati--dipana, J P T S. 1915 (Bdhd). 1884 (Pgdp).
Dathavansa, J P T S. 1884 Peta--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. (Davs). 1894 (PvA).
Dhammapada Commentary, 4 vols. Puggala--Pannatti Commentary, J P T S. 1906--14 (DhA). P T S. 1914 (Pug A).
Dipavansa, London 1879 (Dpvs). Saddhammopayana, J P T S. 1887 (Sdhp).
Jataka, 6 vols. London 1877--96 Sumangala--Vilasini, vol. I, P (J). T S. 1886 (DA I).
Khuddaka--Patha Commentary, P T Manoratha--purani P.T.S. 1924 S. 1915 (KhA). (AA);
Khuddhasikkha, J.T.P.S. 1883 Papanca Sudani, pt. I, P.T.S. (Khus). 1922 (MA).
Mahavansa, P T S. 1908 (Mhvs). Samanta--pasadikaP.T.S. 1924 (Sam. Pas. or Vin A).
Sutta--Nipata Commentary, 2 Sammoha--Vinodani, P.T.S. 1923 vols. P T S. 1916--17 (SnA). (VbhA).
Therigatha Commentary, P T S. Vimana--Vatthu Commentary, P T 1891 (ThA). S. 1901 (VvA).
Maha--Bodhi--Vansa, P T S. 1891 Visuddhi--Magga, 2 vols. P T S. (Mhbv). 1920-21 (Vism).
Milindapanha, London 1880 Yogavacara's Manual, P.T.S. (Miln). 1896 (Yog).
Mulasikkha, J.P.T.S. 1883 (Muls).
Note. The system adopted in quotations of passages from Pali text is that proposed in J P T S. 1909, pp. 385--87, with this modification that Peta--vatthu (Pv) is quoted by canto and verse, and Culla--Niddesa (Nd2) by number of word in "Explanatory Matter".
2. BUDDHIST SANSKRIT.
Avadana--sataka, ed. J. S. Speyer (Bibl. Buddhica III), 2 vols., St. Petersbourg 1906. (Av. s.). Divyavadana, ed. Cowell & Neil, Cambridge 1886. (Divy). Jataka--mala, ed. H. Kern (Harvard Or. Ser. I), Boston 1891. (Jtm). Lalita--vistara, ed. S. Lefmann, I. Halle 1902. (Lal. V.). Maha--vastu, ed. E. Senart, 3 vols., Paris 1882--1897. (Mvst). Siksa--samuccaya. Ed. C. Bendall, St. Petersburg, 1902 (siks). The ed. of Lalitavistara which I have used, and from which I quote, is the Calcutta ed. (1877), by Rajendralala Mitra (Bibl. Indica), and not Lefmann's.
3. TRANSLATIONS.
Buddh. Manual of Psychological Ethics (trsl. of the Dhamma--sangani) by Mrs. Rhys Davids (R. As. Soc. Trsl. Fund XII), London 1900. (Dhs trsl.). Compendium of Philosophy (trsl. of the Abhidhamm' attha--sangaha) by S. Z. Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1910. (Cpd.). Dialogues of the Buddha, trsl. by T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, London I. 1899; II. 1910; III. 1921. (Dial.). Expositor (trsl. of the Attha--salini), by Maung Tin, P T S. Trsl. 1920, 21. Kathavatthu trsl. ("Points of Controversy), by Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1915. (Kvu trsl.). Kindred Sayings (Sanyutta Nikaya I), by Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1917. (K S.). Mahavansa trsl. by W. Geiger, P T S. Trsl. 1912. Manual of a Mystic (Yogavacara), trs. by F. L. Woodward, P T S. Trsl. 1916. (Mystic). Neumann, K. E., Lieder der Monche und Nonnen, Berlin 1899. Psalms of the Brethren (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1913. Psalms of the Sisters (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1909. Questions of Milinda (trsl. T. W. Rhys Davids), S B E. vols. 35, 36. (Miln). Vinaya Texts (trsl. Rhys Davids & Oldenberg), S B E. vols. 13, 17, 20. (Vin T.). Neumann, Die Reden Gotamo Buddha's (Mittlere Sammlung), Vols. I to III 2 1921. Human Types, P.T.S. trsl. 1924 (Pug trsl.) and insert accordingly on p. xi under B 1. Path of Purity, P.T.S. trsl. 1923, 1st pt. (Vism. Trsl.).
4. GRAMMATICAL & OTHER LITERATURE; PERIODICALS, ETC.
Abhidhanappadipika, ed. W. Subhuti, Colombo1 1883. (Abhp.). Andersen, D., A Pali Reader, 2 pts; Copenhagen 1901, 1907. Aufrecht, Th., Halayudha's Abhidhana--ratna--mala, London 1861. Brugmann, K., Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogerm. Sprachen, Strass- burg 1902. Childers, R. C., A Dictionary of the Pali Language, London 1874. Brahmana (Br.). Dhatupatha & Dhatumanjusa, ed. Andersen & Smith, Copenhagen 1921 (Dhtp, Dhtm). Satapatha--Brahmana (trsl. J. Eggeling) (Sat. Br.) SBE vols. Geiger, W., Pali Literatur und Sprache, Strassburg 1916. (Geiger, P. Gr.). Grassmann, W., Worterbuch zum Rig Veda, Leipzig 1873. Journal of the American Oriental Society (J A O S.). Journal Asiatique, Paris (J.As.) Journal of the Pali Text Society (J P T S.). Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London (J R A S.). Kaccayana--ppakarana, ed. & trsl. Senart (J. As. 1871) (Kacc). Kern, H., Toevoegselen op 't Woordenboek van Childers; 2 pts (Verhandelingen Kon. Ak. van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam N. R. XVI, 5), Amsterdam 1916. (Toev.). Kuhn's Zeitschrift fur vergleichende Sprachforschung (K Z.). Mahavyutpatti, ed. Mironow (Bibl. Buddhica XIII) St. Petersbourg 1910, 11. (Mvyut). Muller, Ed., Simplified Grammar of the Pali Language, London 1884. Trenckner, V., Notes on the Milindapanho, in J P T S. 1908, 102 sq. Uhlenbeck, H., Kurzgefasstes Etym. Worterbuch d. Altindischen Sprache, Am- sterdam 1898. Walde, A., Lateinisches Etymologisches Worterbuch, Heidelberg2 1910. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Leipzig 1847 sq. (Z D M S.). Kirfel, W. Kosmographie der Inder, Bonn & Leipzig 1920.
B. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
1. Titles of Books (the no refers to section of A).
A Anguttara 1a
Mhbv Mahabodhi--vansa1 b
Abhp Abhidhanappadipika 4
Mhvs Mahavansa 1b
Ap Apadana 1a
Miln Milinda--panha 1b
AvS. Avadana--Sataka 2
M Vastu Maha--vastu 2
Bdhd Buddhadatta 1
Mvyut Mahavyutpatti 4
Brethren: see Psalms 3
Mystic: see Manual 3
BR. Boehtlingk and Roth.
Nd1 Mahaniddesa 1a
Dukp Dukapatthana 1a.
Nd2 Cullaniddesa 1a
Bu Buddha--vansa 1a
Nett Netti--pakarana1 b
Cp Cariya--pitaka 1a
Patth Patthana: see Duka & 1a.
Cpd Compendium 3 Tika
D Digha1a Pgdp Pancagati--dipana 1b
Davs Datha--vansa 1b Ps Patisambhida--magga 1a
Dh Dhammapada 1a Pug Puggala--pannatti 1a
Dhs Dhammasangani 1a Pv Petavatthu 1a
Dhs trsl. Atthasalini 3 S Sanyutta1 a
Divy Divyavadana 2 S B E Sacred Books of the 3
East
Dpvs Dipavansa 1b
Sdhp Saddhammopayana 1b
Dhtm Dhatumanjusa 4.
Siks Siksasamuccaya 2
Dhtp Dhatupatha 4.
Sisters: see Psalms 3
Halayudha: see Aufrecht 4
Sn Sutta--nipata 1a
It Itivuttaka 1a
Th 1 Theragatha1 a
J Jataka 1b
Th 2 Therigatha 1a
J A O S. Journal AmerOrSoc 4
Tikp Tikapatthana 1a.
J As. Journal Asiatique4
Toev. Toevoegselen 4
J P T S. Journal Pali Text Soc 4
Ud Udana 1a
J R A S. Journal Royal Asiatic 4
Soc Vbh Vibhanga 1a
Jtm Jatakamala 2 VbhA Sammoha--Vinodani 1b.
Kacc Kaccayana 4 Vin Vinaya 1a
Kh Khuddakapatha 1a VismTrsl. Path of Purity 3
K S Kindred Sayings3 Vism Visuddhi--magga 1b
Kvu Kathavatthu 1a Vv Vimanavatthu 1a
K Z Kuhn's Zeitschrift 4 Zeitschrift der
Z D M G. Deutschen 4
LalV. Lalita Vistara2 Morgenlandischen
Gesell-schaft
M Majjhima 1a
2. General & grammatical terms.
in comb. with
a orig. original
A Title-letter (ly)
(e.g. DhA)=
Commentary P. Pali
(on Dh).
part. particle
abl. ablative form. formation
pass. passive
abs. absolute(ly) fr. from
perf. perfect
abstr. abstract freq. frequently,
frequentative pers. personal
acc. accusative
fut. future pl. plural
act. active
Gall. Gallic pop. popular
add. addition
gen. genitive poss. possessive
adj. adjective
ger. gerund pot. potential
adv. adverb
Ger. German pp. past
Ags. Anglo--Saxon participle
Goth. Gothic
aor. aorist ppr. present
Gr. Greek participle
appl. applied
gram. grammaratical prec. preceding
art. article
grd. gerundive pred. predicative
attr. attribute
ibid. at the same pref. prefix
Av. Avesta passage
prep. preposition
BB Burmese MSS id. the same
pres. present
bef. before id. p. identical passage
pret. preterite
BSk. Buddhist i. e. that is
Sanskrit Prk. Prakrit
i. g. in general
Commentary prob. probably
C (& (when cited imper. imperative
Cy) in expln of a pron. pronoun
Text impers. impersonal
passage). pt. part
impf. imperfect
caus. causative P T S. Pali Text
Ind. Index Society
cert. certain
ind. indicative q. v. quod vide
coll. collective (which see)
indecl. indeclinable
comb combined, ref. reference,
combination indef. indefinite referred
comparative, inf. infinitive refl. reflexive
comp. comparison,
composition instr. instrumental rel. relation,
relative
cond. conditional interr. interrogative
sep. separate
cons. consonant intrs. intransitive (ly)
corr. correct(ed) iter. iterative sg. singular
correl. correlation, Lat. Latin Sk. Sanskrit
correlative
l. c. loco citato sq. and
cp. compare following
lit. literal(ly),
cpd. compound literary SS. Singhalese
MSS.
dat. dative Lit. Lithuanian
ster. stereotype
den. denominative loc. locative
suff. suffix
der. derived, m. masculine
derivation sup. superlative
med. medium (middle)
des. desiderative sub voce
N. Name s. v. (under the
dial. dialect(ical) word
n. noun, note mentioned)
diff. different
nom. nominative syn. synonym
dist. distinct, (ous)
distinguished Np. Name of person
T. Text
E. English Npl. Name of place
trans. transitive
e. g. for instance nt. neuter
trsl. translated,
encl. enclitic num. numeral translation
ep. epithet Obulg. Old--bulgarian t. t. technical
term
esp. especially Ohg. Old--high--german
t. t. technical
etym. etymology Oicel. Old--icelandic g. term in
grammar
exc. except Oir. Old--irish
v. verse
excl. exclamation, onom. onomatopoetic
exclusive var. variant,
opp. opposed, opposite various
expl. explanation,
explained ord. ordinal, ordinary var. various
lect. reading
f. feminine
voc. vocative
fig. figurative
(ly) Wtb. Worterbuch
foll. following
3. Typographical
*(s)quel indicates a (reconstructed or conjectured) Indogermanic root. [There should be an inverted breve below'u']
*Sk means, that the Sanskrit word is constructed after the Pali word; or as Sk. form is only found in lexicographical lists.
a [There should be a circumflex above the 'a'] the cap over a vowel indicates that the a is the result of a syncope a + a (e. g. khuddanukhudda), whereas a [There should be a macron above the 'a'] represents the proper a, either pure or contracted with a preceding a (khinasava = khina + asava).
represents the head--word either as first ( --) or second (-- )part of a compound; sometimes also an easily supplemented part of a word.
> indicates an etymological relation or line of development between the words mentioned.
~ and [This should be a double tilde] ; means "at similar" or "at identical, parallel passages".
The meaning of all other abbreviations may easily be inferred from the context.
-- 1 --
A -- 1 the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akko- sati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). -- Best to be classed here is the a -- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā -- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā -- nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā -- majjapa = majjapa) J vi.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya) J vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) J vi.552.
A
A -- 2 (an -- before vowels) [Vedic a -- , an -- ; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n -- ; Lat. *en -- , in -- ; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un -- ; Oir. an -- , in -- ] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na -- , nir -- and vi -- . Often we find it opp. to sa -- . Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. -- Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) -- a -- (â) in redupl. formations like bhavâ -- bhava see ā4.
A
A -- 3 [Vedic a -- ; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaŋ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e) -- ; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a -- is the a -- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.).
A
A -- 4 the sound a (a -- kāra) J vi.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311.
Aŋsa
Aŋsa1 [Vedic aŋsa; cp. Gr. w)_mos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. aŋse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aŋsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA i.312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaŋsa at It 22). -- atīt'aŋse in former times, formerly D ii.224; Th 2, 314. mettaŋsa sharing friendship (with) A iv.151 = It 22 = J iv.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahiŋsā). -- Disjunctive ekena aŋsena . . . ekena aŋsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A i.61. From this: ekaŋsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaŋsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaŋsa. -- paccaŋsena according to each one's share A iii.38. puṭaŋsena with a knapsack for provisions D i.117; A ii 183; cp. DA i.288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages. -- kūṭa "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin iii.127; DhA iii.214; iv.136; VvA 121. -- vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. ˚vaddhaka, ˚bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. ˚bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. ˚bandhana, C. v. l. ˚vaṭṭaka); DhA iii.452.
Aŋsa
Aŋsa2 [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur˚ four -- cornered, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚, soḷas˚ etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat˚ with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 (= kubbara -- phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima -- aŋsā VvA 265).
Aŋsi
Aŋsi (f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu /s sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge (= aŋsa2) Vv 782 (= aŋsa -- bhāga VvA 303).
Aŋsu
Aŋsu [cp. Sk. aŋśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin iii.224. -- mālin, sun Sāsv 1.
Akaṭa
Akaṭa (adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206.
Akampiyatta
Akampiyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354.
Akalu
Akalu (cp. agalu) an ointment J iv.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluŋ; C. expls as kālâkaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); vi.144 (˚candana -- vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu˚); Miln 338 (˚tagara -- tālīsaka -- lohita -- candana).
Akāca
Akāca (adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D ii.244; Sn 476; J v.203.
Akācin
Akācin (adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka -- arcin shining as the sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading.
Akāsiya
Akāsiya (adj. -- n.) [a + kāsika?] "not from the Kāsī -- country" (?); official name of certain tax -- gatherers in the king's service J vi.212 (akāsiya -- sankhātā rāja -- purisā C.).
Akiccakāra
Akiccakāra (adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A ii.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA i.296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151.
Akiriya
Akiriya (adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J iii.530 (˚rūpa = akattabba -- rūpa C.); Miln 250.
Akilāsu
Akilāsu (adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382.
Akissava
Akissava at S i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana.
Akutobhaya
Akutobhaya (adj.) see ku˚.
Akuppa
Akuppa (adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu iii.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin i.11 (akuppā me ceto -- vimutti) = S ii.239; Vin ii.69; iv.214; D iii.273; M i.205, 298; S ii.171; A iii.119, 198; Miln 361.
Akuppatā
Akuppatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th 1, 364.
Akka
Akka [cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow -- wort M i.429 (˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant). -- nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 (vv. ll. agga˚ & akkha˚). -- vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 (cp. akkha -- vāṭa).
Akkanta
Akkanta [pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A i.8; J i.71; Miln 152; DhA i.200.
Akkandati
Akkandati [ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S iv.206.
Akkamana
Akkamana (nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J i.62.
Akkamati
Akkamati [ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J i.7, 279; ThA 9; -- to rise Vin iii. 38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. iii.72. -- pp. akkanta (q. v.).
Akkuṭṭha
Akkuṭṭha (adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J vi.187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha -- vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa -- vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above).
Akkula
Akkula (adj.) [= ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula.
-- 2 --
Akkosa
Akkosa [ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA ii.61. -- vatthu always as dasa a˚ -- vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J i.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA i.212; iv.2.
Akkosaka
Akkosaka (adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A ii.58; iii.252; iv.156; v.317; PvA 251.
Akkosati
Akkosati [to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J i.191; ii.416; iii.27; DhA i.211; ii.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin ii.296; DhA iv.2; PvA 10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J iii.212 (= akkosi DhA i.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. vi.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli -- gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). -- pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.).
Akkha
Akkha1 [Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D ii.96; S v.6; A i.112; J i.109, 192; v.155 (akkhassa phalakaŋ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaŋ viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. -- akkhaŋ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S iv.177; Miln 367. -- chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S i.57; Miln 67. -- bhagga with a broken axle J v.433. -- bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA i.375; PvA 277.
Akkha
Akkha2 [Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D i.6 (but expld at DA i.86 as ball -- game: guḷakīḷa); S i.149 = A v.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto ayaŋ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J i.379 (kūṭ˚ a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J v.116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha3. -- dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma -- nagare). -- dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D ii.348; iii.183; M iii.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). -- vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J iv.81. (? read akka -- ).
Akkha
Akkha3 (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha.
Akkhaka
Akkhaka [akkha1 + ka] the collar -- bone Vin iv.213 (adhak- khakaŋ); y.216.
Akkhaṇa
Akkhaṇa [a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ i.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D iii.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D iii.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa. -- vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as durepātin a. A i.284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā); ii.170 sq. (id.), 202; iv.423, 425; J ii.91 (expld as either "avirādhita -- vedhī" or "akkhaṇaŋ vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), iii.322; iv.494 (C. explns aviraddha -- vedhin vijju -- ālokena vijjhana -- samattha p. 497). In other combn at J i.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); v.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin). In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read akṣuṇa˚; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). - Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an -- ; akkhaṇa in the meaning of "lightning" (J ii.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence.
Akkhata
Akkhata (adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- acc. akkhataŋ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ) & Pv iv.111 (nessāmi taŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ); see VvA 351 & PvA 272.
Akkhaya
Akkhaya (adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhaya- paṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21.
Akkhara
Akkhara (adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D iii.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D i.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DA i.247 = SnA 477) <-> pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A i.72 = iii.107 = S ii.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana) of poetry S i.38. To know the context of the a˚ the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA iv.70). Later: akkharaŋ a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J ii.90; iv.7 (likhitāni written), 489; vi.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1. -- cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. -- pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A iii.223 = Sn p. 105. -- piṇḍa "word -- ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA iv.70 (= akkharānaŋ sannipāto Dh 352).
Akkharikā
Akkharikā (f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D i.7; Vin ii.10; iii.180. So expld at DA i.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables.
Akkhāta
Akkhāta (adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A i.34 (dur˚ ); ii.195; iv.285, 322; v.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718.
Akkhātar
Akkhātar one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story -- teller S i.11, 191; iii.66; Sn 167.
Akkhāti
Akkhāti [ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv iv.163; cond. akkhissaŋ Sn 997; J vi.523. -- Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaŋ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu iii.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S i.11; It 53. -- pp. akkhāta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati.
Akkhāna
Akkhāna (nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D i.6 (= DA i.84: Bhārata -- Rāmāyanādi); iii.183; M i.503; iii.167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm˚). The 5th Veda J v.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaŋ; C: itihāsapañcamaŋ vedacatukkaŋ). -- The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.).
-- 3 --
Akkhāyika
Akkhāyika (adj.) relating, narrating J iii.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature -- lore D i.8; Miln 316.
Akkhāyin
Akkhāyin (adj.) telling, relating, announcing S ii.35; iii.7; J iii.105.
Akkhi
Akkhi (nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye & wind -- ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaṇika] the eye M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn 197, 608; J i.223, 279; v.77; vi.336; Pv ii.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA i.475; DhA ii.26; iii.196 (˚īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. -- In combn with sa -- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. ( -- ˚) akkha3 (q.v.). -- añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA iii.354. -- kūpa the socket of the eye J iv.407. -- gaṇḍa eye -- protuberance, i. e. eye -- brow (?) J vi.504 (for pamukha T.). -- gūtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. -- gūthaka id. Sn 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta -- ttaca -- maŋsasadiso a˚ -- gūthako SnA 248). -- chidda the eye -- hole SnA 248. -- dala the eye -- lid DA i.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. -- pāta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. -- pūra an eye -- full, in akkhipūraŋ assuŋ (assu?) an eye full of tears J vi.191. -- mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (= ˚gūtha C.). -- roga eye disease DhA i.9.
Akkhika
Akkhika1 ( -- ˚) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (añjan˚ with eyes anointed); DhA iv.98 (aḍḍh˚ with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 ( tamb˚ red -- eyed). -- an˚ having no eyes DhA i.11.
Akkhika
Akkhika2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J i.208. -- hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M i.383 (corresp. with aṇḍahāraka).
Akkhitta
Akkhitta1 see khitta.
Akkhitta
Akkhitta2 (adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J iii.255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.).
Akkhin
Akkhin (adj.) = akkhika J iii.190 (mand˚ softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb˚ red -- eyed); DhA i.11.
Akkhobbha
Akkhobbha (adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21.
Akkhobhana
Akkhobhana (adj) = akkhobbha J v.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.).
Akkhohiṇī
Akkhohiṇī (f.) [= akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J v.319; vi.395.
Akhaṇḍaphulla
Akhaṇḍaphulla see khaṇḍa.
Akhāta
Akhāta (adj.) not dug: see khāta.
Akhetta
Akhetta barren -- soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. ˚ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J iv.371.
Agati
Agati see gati. -- ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D iii.228 (4: chanda˚, dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚); A ii.18 sq., J iv.402; v.98, 510; PvA 161.
Agada
Agada [Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counter- poison J i.80 (˚harīṭaka ); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA i.67; DhA i.215; PvA 198 (= osadhaŋ).
Agaru
Agaru (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S i.94, 229; ii.90) Vin. i.25; iv.17, D i.51; DhA i.39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D i.89; Sn p. 51.
Agalu
Agalu [cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś i.24, and akalu.
Agāra
Agāra (nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a -- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state" D i.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172ii. See also S i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ nikkhanta); M ii.55 (agāraŋ ajjhāvasatā); Sn 274, 805 (˚ŋ āvasati), and with pabbajita D i.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv ii.1317. -- (b.) of a "rājā cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agāraŋ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviŋ imaŋ adaṇḍena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaŋ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D ii.16; Sn 1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin i.15; D i.102 (BB. has v. l. agyâgāra, but DA i.270 expl. as dānâgāra); A i.156, 281; ii.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J i.51, 56; iii.392; Dpvs. i.36. -- 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv ii.25 (= anāvāsa PvA 80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā) Sn 376. See also agga2. -- 3. ˚āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- āgantuk˚ reception hall for strangers or guests S iv.219; v.21. -- itth˚ lady's bower S i.58, 89. -- kūṭ˚ a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S ii.103. 263; iii.156; iv.186; v.43; A i.230; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21. -- koṭṭh˚ storehouse, granary D i.134 (cp. DA i.295); S i.89. -- tiṇ˚ a house covered with grass S iv.185; A i.101. -- bhus˚ threshing shed, barn A i.241. -- santh˚ a council hall D i.91; ii.147; S iv.182; v.453; A ii.207; iv.179 sq. -- suññ˚ an uninhabited shed; solitude S v.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A i.241 (v. l. for bhusâgāra); iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437; v.88, 109, 323 sq.
Agāraka
Agāraka (nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M i.450; J vi.81.
Agārika
Agārika (adj.) 1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚ etc. D i.166 = A i.295 = ii.206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin i.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin i.272. See also āgārika.
Agārin
Agārin (adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th i,1009; J iii.234. -- f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī VvA 225); Pv iii.43 (id. PvA 194).
Agāriya = agārika
Agāriya = agārika, a layman M i.504 (˚bhūta). -- Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraŋ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin i.15; M i.16; ii.55, 75; A i.49; D iii.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv ii.1316; DA i.112.
-- 4 --
Agga
Agga1 (adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs iv.13 (sangahaŋ first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J i.52 (˚sākhā). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232 (agga -- m -- agga) most excellent, D ii.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A ii.17 = Pv iv.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaŋ] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D ii.15; S iii.83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always -- ˚); as ār˚ point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus˚ tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ˚ id PvA 241; dum˚ top of a tree J ii.155; dhaj˚ of a banner S i.219; pabbat˚ of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh˚ of a branch PvA 157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as -- ˚; e. g. dum˚ the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan˚ plenty D iii.164; madhur˚ S i.41, 161, 237; bhav˚ the best existence S iii.83; rūp˚ extraordinary beauty J i.291; lābh˚ highest gain J iii.127; sambodhi -- y -- agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbaññuta -- ñāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first -- fruits ( panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ SnA 270. sukh˚ perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaŋ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D i.124; S iii.156, 264; A ii.17 (Tathāgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamādo); Miln 183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh˚ from alms); Vbh 423 (vass˚ by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A ii.201 (opp. mūle at the root); J iv.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit˚ with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J ii.153 (ukkh˚); iii.126 (kūp˚). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad˚ (foll. by tad˚) from what time, since what date D i.152; ii.206; & ajja -- t -- agge from this day, after today D i.85; M i.528; A v.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś ii.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin ii.212. -- angulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J vi.404. -- āsana main seat DA i.267. -- upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D ii.6. -- kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80. -- kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 (= seṭṭh˚ PvA 199). -- ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D iii.225 (porāṇa +), A ii.27 sq.; iv.246, Kvu 341. -- danta one who is most excellently self -- restrained (of the Buddha) Th i.354. -- dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -- dvāra main door J i.114. -- nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221. -- nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229. -- nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. -- nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. -- pakatimant of the highest character J v.351 (= aggasabhāva). -- patta having attained perfection D iii.48 sq. -- pasāda the highest grace A ii.34; It 87. -- piṇḍa the best oblation or alms i.141; M i. 28; ii.204. -- piṇḍika receiving the best oblations J vi.140. -- puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -- purohita chief or prime minister J vi.391. -- phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J i.148; Pv iv.188; PvA 230. -- bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla˚), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D i.5; DA i.81. -- magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. -- mahesi the king's chief wife, queen -- consort J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88; DhA i.199; PvA 76. -- rājā the chief king J vi.391; Miln 27. -- vara most meritorious, best Dpvs vi.68. -- vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs iv.13. -- vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142.
Agga
Agga2 (nt.) (only -- ˚) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān˚ a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J iii.470; iv.379, 403; vi.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salāk˚ a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J i.123, VvA 75.
Aggatā
Aggatā (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre -- eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (˚ŋ gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guṇaggataŋ gatā). -- (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D i.80; iii.224.
Aggatta
Aggatta (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre -- eminence PvA 9, 89.
Aggavant
Aggavant (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A i.70, 243.
Aggalu
Aggalu see agalu.
Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā
Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a) rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross -- bar Vin i.290; D i.89 (˚ŋ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross -- bar; a. = kavāṭa DA i.252); A iv.359 (id.); S. iv.290; A i.101 = 137 = iv.231. (phusit˚ with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin iv.47; J. v.293 (˚ŋ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross -- bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); J i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71 (˚ŋ datvā); Vin iv.121. -- dāna putting in a gusset J i.8. -- phalaka the post or board, in which the cross -- bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) M iii.95. -- vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120, 148. -- sūci bolting pin M i.126.
Aggi
Aggi [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin ii.120 (fire in bathroom); M i.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S iv.185, 399 (sa -- upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA iii.71); J i.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102; iii.55; iv.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ + udake temanaŋ). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A iv.45: aggiŋ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiŋ jāleti (kindle) J ii.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J i.294; nibbāpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S ii.85; M i.487; J i.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) J i.61; Miln 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A i.136, 199; PvA 20. udar˚ the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kapp˚uṭṭhān˚ the universal conflagration J iii.185; dāv˚ a wood or jungle fire J i.212; naḷ˚ the burning of a reed J vi.100; padīp˚ fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire -- god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J i.285, 494; ii.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J i.285; ii.43. Aggiŋ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jaṭilā
-- 5 --
aggī paricaritukāmā); A v.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihuttaŋ paric˚ ThA 136); Dh 107; J i.494; DhA ii.232. aggiŋ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A ii.207; often combd. with aggihuttaŋ paricarati, e. g. S i.166; Sn p. 79. aggiŋ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko J yi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika); aggissa ādhānaŋ A iv.41. -- 3. (ethical, always -- ˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚, moh˚, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S iv.19; A iv.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D iii.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind˚ the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh˚ the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh˚ of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār˚ burning remorse PvA 60; sok˚ burning grief ib. 41. Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini -- samaŋ jalitaŋ 668 (= samantato jali taŋ aggiŋ Sn A 480); aggini -- samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Sn A 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa; otherwise as adj. agginiŋ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert. -- agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24; iv.109; D i.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agāra); M i.501; A v.234, 250. -- khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire -- brand S ii.85; A iv. 128; Th 2, 351 (˚samākāmā); J iv.139; vi.330; Ps i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Miln 304. -- gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. -- ja fire -- born J v.404 (C; text aggijāta). -- ṭṭha fire -- place J v.155. -- ṭṭhāna fire -- place Vin ii.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -- daḍḍha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv i.74. -- dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust A i.178. -- nikāsin like fire J iii.320 (suriya). -- nibbāna the extinction of fire J i.212. -- pajjota fire -- light A ii.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda˚, suriya˚, a˚, paññā˚). -- paricaraṇa ( -- ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA i.199. -- paricariyā fire -- worship DhA ii.232; Sn A 291 (pāri˚) 456. -- paricārika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). -- sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, 49 = ii.210; i.139; ii.154. -- sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayoguḷa). -- hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin i.33, 36 = J i.83; Vin i.246 = Sn 568 (˚mukha -- yañña); S i.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J iv.211; vi.525; ThA 136 (= aggi); DhA iv.151 (˚ŋ brāhmaṇo namati). -- huttaka (nt.) fire -- offering J vi.522 (= aggi -- jūhana C.). -- hotta = ˚hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB ˚hutta). -- homa fire -- oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D i.9 (= aggi -- jūhana DA i.93).
Aggika
Aggika (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jaṭilaka); D ii.339 sq. (jaṭila); S i.166 (brāhmaṇa).
Aggha
Aggha [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J iv.138; v.414; vi.209; Pv ii.118. See also mahâraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J v.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA iii.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J v.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA iv.216. -- agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D ii.240; J iv.396 = 476. -- kāraka a valuator J i.124. -- pada valuableness J v.473 (˚lakkhaṇaŋ nāma mantaŋ).
Agghaka
Agghaka (adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of ( -- ˚) Mhvs 30, 77. an˚ priceless Mhvs 30, 72.
Agghati
Agghati (intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve J i.112 (satasahassaŋ; aḍḍhamāsakaŋ); vi.174, 367 (padarajaŋ); DhA iii.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaŋ nâgghati (nâgghanti) soḷasiŋ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156; S i.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nânubhoti VvA 104), 437; J v.284. -- Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J i.124; iv.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya.
Agghanaka
Agghanaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226; J i.61 (satasahass˚), 112; DA i.80 (kahāpaṇ˚); DhA iii.120 (cuddasakoṭi˚); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. ˚ikā J i.178 (satasahass˚).
Agghaniya
Agghaniya (adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] pri- celess, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192.
Agghāpanaka
Agghāpanaka [fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J i.124, 125; v.276 (˚ika).
Agghāpaniya
Agghāpaniya (adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator J iv.137.
Agghika
Agghika (nt.) ( -- ˚) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese ägä "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph˚) 34, 73 (ratan˚) 34, 76 ( dhaj˚); Dāvs i.39 (pupphamay˚); v.51 (kusum˚).
Agghiya
Agghiya (adj. -- n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valu- able, precious, worth J vi.265 (maṇi); DhA ii.41 (ratan˚ of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J v.324 = vi.516; Dpvs vi.65; vii.4.
Agha
Agha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S i 22; M i.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha); A ii.128 (id.); J v.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J vi.507 (agha -- m -- miga = aghakara m. C.). -- bhūta a source of pain S iii.189 (+ agha & salla).
Agha
Agha2 (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M i.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a -- kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaŋvutā andhakārā D ii.12; S v.454, and BSk. aghasaŋvṛta M Vastu i.240, adj. dark M Vastu i.41; ii.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D ii.12; S v.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehāsaŋ gama VvA 78); J iv.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.). -- gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. -- gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S i.67 = Miln 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaŋ).
Aghata
Aghata at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha -- gata or (prefer- ably) with v. l. as aggha -- gataŋ, or (with Neumann) as agghaŋ agghatānaŋ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191.
Aghammiga
Aghammiga [to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J vi.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.
Aghavin
Aghavin (adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 (= dukkhita SnA 489).
-- 6 --
Anka
Anka1 = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; ˚karana branding J iv.366, 375. See also anketi.
Anka
Anka2 [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J v.322 = vi.218 (v. l. BB anga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses ( ankena vahati) Vin ii.114; D ii.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one's lap); M ii.97 (ankena vahitvā); Th 1, 299; J i.262 (anke nisinna); ii.127, 236; vi.513; DhA i.170 ( ankena vahitvā) PvA 17 (nisīdāpeti).
Ankita
Ankita [pp. of anketi] marked, branded J i.231 (cakkan- kitā Satthu padā); ii.185 (˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears).
Ankura
Ankura [cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J ii.105; vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (˚vaṇṇa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43.
Ankusa
Ankusa [Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J i.9 (˚pacchi hook & basket); v.89 = vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚), 529 (= phalānaŋ gaṇhanatthaŋ ankusaŋ). <-> (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin ii.196 (+ kasā); J vi.489; ThA 173 (ovādaŋ ankusaŋ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc˚ beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka. -- gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.<-> driver's hook M ii.94 (sippa). -- gaha an eleph. -- driver Dh 326.
Ankusaka
Ankusaka [see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J iii.22. -- 2. an eleph. -- driver's hook J iii.431. -- yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J ii.68 (+ pacchi).
Anketi
Anketi [Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J i.451 lakkhaṇena); ii.399. -- pp. ankita, q. v.
Ankola
Ankola [dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J vi.535. Cp. next.
Ankolaka
Ankolaka = ankola J iv.440; v.420.
Anga
Anga (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger -- ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. ˚sambhāra); uttam˚anga the reproductive organ J v.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. ˚paccanga), as sabbanga -- kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangī PvA 189) and in redupln. anga -- m -- angāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (˚ehi naccamāna); Pv ii.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath˚ the vows of the fast J i.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents A ii.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭhɔ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha -- sāsana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D i.113 sq., 117 (iminā p˚ angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA i.281 expls tena kāra<-> ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha -- pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA i.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J i.3 (sabbanga -- sampanna nagaraŋ a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. <-> In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. A i.115; cattāri sotapannassa a -- D iii.227 = A iv.405 sq.; pañcanga -- vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga -- samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla -- kkhandha, see kkhandha ii.A d) S i.99 = A i.161; v.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) D i.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D i.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S iii.83; Kh iv.10 = KhA 88; cp. M i.446 (dasahɔ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaŋ angaŋ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraŋ the interest in the outside world). A i.16 sq. = S v.101 sq.; It 9. rañño angaŋ an asset or profit for the king M i.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M i.492; A iv.411; Sdhp 455, 456; iminā p˚ angena for that reason M ii.168. -- In compn. with verbs angi˚ (angī˚): angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA i.313; cp. samangi ( -- bhūta). -- jāta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191 (of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; J ii.359; Miln 124. -- paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M i.81; J vi -- 20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripuṇṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangavatī PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA i.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M i.395; sabbanga -- paccangāni all limbs Miln 148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu -- seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal M i.133 (˚e daseyya), 366; J i.20; iv.324 (chinditvā). -- paccangatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh˚). -- paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D i.34 (sabbanga -- peccangī); PvA 189. -- rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚). -- laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. -- vāta gout Vin i.205. -- vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D i.9 (see expl. at DA i.93); J i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune -- telling); ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J ii.200; v.284; ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J ii.21, 250; v.458. -- vekalla bodily deformity DhA ii.26. -- sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA i.92. -- sambhāra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S i.135; Miln 41. -- hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J vi.538.
Angaṇa
Angaṇa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218; J i.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa -- ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); ii.243, 290, 357; Dāvs i.27. -- cetiy˚ an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. rāj˚ the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J i.124, 152; ii.2; DhA ii.45. -- ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J i.249, 421. -- pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J ii.200.
Angaṇa
Angaṇa2 [prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A v.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Sn 279); D i.76; M i.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A ii.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata<->
-- 7 --
raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA iii.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87.
Angada
Angada [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J v.9, 410 (citt˚, adj. with manifold bracelets).
Angadin
Angadin (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J v.9.
Angāra
Angāra (m. nt.) [Vedic angāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A iii.97, 380, 407; J i.73; iii.54, 55; v.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul˚ the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S iv.324 (see under kula). -- kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA i.261. -- kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA i.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. -- kammakara a charcoal burner J vi.209. -- kāsu a charcoal pit M i.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J i.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA i.442; Sdhp 208. -- pacchi a basket for ashes DhA iv.191. -- pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A i.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (˚āropaṇa); Sdhp 208. -- maŋsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. -- masi ashes DhA iii.309. -- rāsi a heap of burning coal J iii.55.
Angāraka
Angāraka (adj.) [cp. Sk. angāraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA i.95; cp. J i.73.
Angārika
Angārika a charcoal -- burner J vi.206 (= angāra -- kamma- kara p. 209).
Angārin
Angārin (adj.) [to angāra] (burning) like coal, of bright- red colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J i.87 (dumā trees in full bloom).
Angika
Angika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ (see dve), catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q. v.
Angin
Angin (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga -- paccangin). -- f. anginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226).
Anguṭṭha
Anguṭṭha [cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin iii.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. -- 2. the great toe J ii.92; Mhvs 35, 43. -- pada thumb -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52, cp. PvA 198.
Anguṭṭhaka
Anguṭṭhaka = anguṭṭha J iv.378; v.281; pād˚ the great toe S v.270.
Angula
Angula [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M i.395 (vankɔ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. anguliṇ); A iii.6 (id.); J v 70 (goṇ˚ adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī). -- 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger -- breadth, an inch Vin ii.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh˚); DhA iii.127 (ek˚). -- aṭṭhi (? cp. anga -- laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA i.93. -- anguli fingers and toes DhA iii.214. -- antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Miln 180; DhA iii.214.
Angulika
Angulika (nt.) [= angulī] a finger J iii.13 (pañc˚); v.204 (vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika.
Angulī & Anguli
Angulī & Anguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angulī & ˚i; see anga] a finger A iv.127; Sn 610; J iii.416; iv.474; v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA ii.59; iv.210; SnA 229. -- patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = iv.110; D i.91 = A iv.343. -- pada finger -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J v.67. -- muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106; J iv.498; v.439, 467. -- sanghaṭṭana˚ = poṭha DA i.256.
Anguleyyaka
Anguleyyaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger -- ring J ii.444 (= nikkha).
Acankama
Acankama (avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga).
Acittaka
Acittaka (adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA ii.42. -- 2. without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J iv.58 (C. for acetasā).
Acittikata
Acittikata (adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra] not well thought of Miln 229.
Acira
Acira see cira & cp. nacira.
Acela
Acela (adj. -- n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti -- Buddhist naked ascetic D i.161, 165; iii.6, 12, 17 sq.; S i.78; J v.75.
Acelaka
Acelaka = acela D i.166; iii.40; A i.295; ii.206; iii.384 (˚sāvaka); J iii.246; vi.229; Pug 55; DhA iii.489.
Acc
Acc -- 1. a + c˚, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. -- 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci.
Accagā
Accagā [ati + agā] 3rd sg. pret. of ati -- gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at DhA iv.494); Dh 414.
Accankusa
Accankusa (adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga).
Accatari
Accatari see atitarati.
Accati
Accati [Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 (accayittha, pret.) -- pp accita, q. v.
Accanta
Accanta (adj. -- & adv. ˚ -- ) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J i.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. <-> 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S i.130 (˚ŋ hataputtāɔ mhi); iii.13 = A i.291 sq.; v.326 sq. (˚niṭṭha, ˚yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). -- 3. (˚ -- ) exceedingly, extremely, very much A i.145 (˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (˚suddhi = param ttha -- accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (˚ruci); Dh 162 (˚dussīlya = ekanta˚ DhA iii.153).
Accaya
Accaya [from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin i.25; D ii.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam˚ when I shall be dead); M i.438 (temās˚ after 3 months); S i.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaŋ māsānaŋ), p. 110 (rattiyā); J i.253 (ekāha -- dvīh˚), 291 (katipāh˚ after a few days); PvA 47 (katipāh˚), 82 (dasamās˚), 145 (vassasatānaŋ). -- (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur -- accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Sn 945 (= dur -- atikkamanīya SnA 568), of sanga Sn 948: taṇhā Dh 336; sota It 95. -- (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence), 167 (id.); ii.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maŋ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) D i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DA i.236); A i.54; M i.438 (id.); accayaŋ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315; A i.103; ii.146 sq.; ˚ŋ deseti to confess the transgression S i.239; ˚ŋ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at D i.85 = (Vin ii.192; M i.438 etc.). In the
-- 8 --
same sense accaya -- paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution J v.380; accayena desanaŋ paṭigaṇhāti J i.379; accayaŋ khamati to forgive Miln 420.
Accasara
Accasara (adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ), influ- enced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self -- sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S i.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J iv.6 (+ atisara); DhA iv.230 (= expecting too much). -- 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) M i.304; S v.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin.
Accasarā
Accasarā (f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, self- surity Vbh 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā.
Accasari
Accasari [fr. ati + sṛ] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J v.70.
Accasārin
Accasārin (adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at SnA 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi).
Accahasi
Accahasi [fr. ati + hṛ] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J iii.484 (= ativiya āhari C.).
Accâbhikkhaṇa
Accâbhikkhaṇa (˚ -- ) [ati + abhikkhaṇa] too often J v.233 (˚saŋsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha).
Accāraddha
Accāraddha (adj. adv.) [ati + āraddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21.
Accāyata
Accāyata (adj.) [ati + āyata] too long A iii.375.
Accāyika
Accāyika (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J vi.549, 553. -- 2. urgent, pressing M i.149 (karaṇiyan business) ii.112; J i.338; v.17 ˚ŋ (nt.) hurry DhA i.18. See also acceka.
Accāvadati
Accāvadati [ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224, 263; S ii.204 sq.; J v.433 (v. l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v. l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?).
Accāsanna
Accāsanna (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).
Accâhita
Accâhita (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J iv.46 = v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.).
Acci
Acci & (in verse) accī (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to ṛc, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A iv.103; v.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11); J v.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dīpɔ); Sdhp 250.
Accikā
Accikā (f.) [fr. acci] a flame M i.74; S ii.99.
Accita
Accita [pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J vi.180.
Accimant
Accimant (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J v.266; vi.248; Vv 388.
Accibandha
Acci -- bandha (adj.) [= accibaddha?] at Vin i.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa -- kedāra -- baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts ii.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi -- baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields.
Accuggacchati
Accuggacchati [ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D ii.38; A v.152 (in simile of lotus).
Accuggata
Accuggata (adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA ii.65. -- 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J vi.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.).
Accuṇha
Accuṇha (adj.) [ati + uṇha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA ii.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati -- uṇha.
Accuta
Accuta (adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. ˚ŋ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) A iv.295, 327; Sn 204, 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA iii.321); Sdhp 47.
Accupaṭṭhapeti
Accupaṭṭhapeti at J v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccu- paṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for).
Accupati
Accupati at J iv.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.).
Accussanna
Accussanna (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin ii.151.
Acceka
Acceka = accāyika, special; ˚cīvara a spccial robe Vin iii.261; cp. Vin Texts i.293.
Acceti
Acceti [ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahorattā). -- 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkhaŋ). -- Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J vi.17 (sūlasmiŋ; C. āvuṇeti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.).
Accogāḷha
Accogāḷha (adj.) [ati + ogāḷha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A iv.282, 287, 323 sq.
Accodaka
Accodaka (nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. ano- daka no water) DhA i.52.
Accodara
Accodara (nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J iv.279 (C. ati -- udara).
Accha
Accha1 (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier -- Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin i.206 (˚kañjika); D i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DA i.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka -- rahada); M i.100; S ii.281 (˚patta); iii.105 (id.); A i.9; J ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DA i.113 (yāgu). -- odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. ˚odikā Vv 412 = 602.
Accha
Accha2 [Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin i.200; A iii.101; J v.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J vi.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.).
Accha
Accha3 = akkha2 (a die) see acci -- bandha.
Accha
Accha4 (adj.) [Ved. ṛkṣa] hurtful, painful, bad DhA iv.163 (˚ruja).
Acchaka
Acchaka = accha2, a bear J v.71.
Acchati
Acchati [Vedic āsyati & āste, ās; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289; A ii.15; It 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisīdati VvA 298); PvA 4. -- 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1, 936; J iv.306. -- 3. to be, behave, live Vin ii.195; D i.102; S i.212; Vv 112; Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88; DhA i.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiŋ
-- 9 --
karitvā a. (= aggiŋ karoti) D i.102; aggiŋ paricaranto a. (= aggiŋ paricarati) DA i.270; tantaŋ pasārento a. (= tantaŋ pasāreti) DhA i.424. -- Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin iv.308; DhA i.424.
Acchanna
Acchanna (adj.) [pp. of acchādeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J jii.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D i.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa).
Acchambhin
Acchambhin (adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undis- mayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); J vi.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin.
Accharā
Accharā1 (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa -- vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger -- tips: 1. (lit.) accharaŋ paharati to snap the fingers J ii.447; iii.191; iv.124, 126; v.314; vi.366; DhA i.38, 424. -- As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger -- tips, a pinch J v.385; DhA ii.273 (˚gahaṇamattaŋ); cp. ekacchara -- matta DhA ii.274. -- 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ek˚acchara -- kkhaṇe in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA i.43; VvA 329. -- sanghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, ˚matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) A i.10, 34, 38; iv.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaŋ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaŋ). -- sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J iii.127.
Accharā
Accharā2 (f.) [Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M i.253 (pl. accharāyo) ii.64; Th 2, 374 (= devaccharā ThA 252); J v.152 sq. (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA iii.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev˚); Miln 169; Sdhp 298.
Accharika
Accharika (nt. or f.?) [fr. accharā2] in ˚ŋ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) A iv.265.
Acchariya
Acchariya (adj. -- nt.) [cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. -- The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha -- ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa -- yoggaŋ that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda -- leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā -- yoggan ti acchariyaŋ accharaŋ paharituŋ yuttan ti attho DA i.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D ii.155; M i.79; iii.118, 125, 144 (an˚); S iv.371; A i.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA iii.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an˚). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J i.223, 279; iv.138; vi.94 (a. vata bho); DhA iv.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaŋ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D i.2, 60, 206, 210; ii.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M iii.118, 125; A iv.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta -- (citta -- )jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50. -- See also acchera & accheraka.
Acchādana
Acchādana (nt.) [fr. acchādeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. -- fig. protection, sheltering J i.307.
Acchādanā
Acchādanā (f.) [= prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. -- Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss?
Acchādeti
Acchādeti [ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchā- dayati jīvitena to keep alive Av. Ś, i.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover, to clothe, to put on D i.63 = It 75; J i.254; iii.189; iv.318; Pug 57; Pv i.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DA i.181 (= paridahitvā); PvA 49, 50. -- fig. to envelop, to fill J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air). -- pp. acchanna (q. v.).
Acchi
Acchi at S iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.).
Acchijja
Acchijja (v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S i.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi.
Acchidda
Acchidda see chidda.
Acchindati
Acchindati [ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 (sayaŋ a. to appropriate); J ii.422; iii.179; iv.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. -- ger. acchinditvā J ii.422; DhA i.349; PvA 241 (sayaŋ); & acchetvā M i.434. Caus. ii. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224, 247.
Acchinna
Acchinna (adj.) [ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278, 303; J ii.78; iv.45; v.212.
Acchiva
Acchiva [*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J vi.535.
Acchupeti
Acchupeti [ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 (aggaḷaŋ) ii.112.
Acchecchi
Acchecchi [Sk. acchaitsīt] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taṇhaŋ M i.122; S i.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); iv.105, 207. It 47; A iii.246, 445; DhA iv.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati -- ejin (ejā), acchecchi = ati -- icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor.
Acchejja
Acchejja = a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati.
Acchedana
Acchedana (nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J vi.544.
Acchera
Acchera (adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous S i.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398.
Accheraka
Accheraka (adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J i.279; Bu i.9 (pāṭihīraŋ).
Aja
Aja [Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a he- goat, a ram D i.6, 127; A ii.207; J i.241; iii.278 sq.; v.241; Pug 56; PvA 80. -- eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep D i.5, 141; A ii.42 sq., 209; J i.166; vi.110; Pug 58. As pl. ˚ā S i.76; It 36; J iv.363. -- pada goat -- footed M i.134. -- pāla goatherd, in ˚nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds' Nigrodha -- tree" Vin i.2 sq. Dpvs i.29 (cp. M Vastu iii.302). -- pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38. -- lakkhaṇa "goat -- sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D i.9 (expld. DA i.94 as "evarūpānaŋ ajānaŋ mansaŋ khāditabbaŋ evarūpānaŋ na khāditabban ti"). -- laṇḍikā (pl.) goats' dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats' dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J i.419; DhA ii.70; PvA 282. -- vata "goats' habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J iv.318. aja -- pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161.
-- 10 --
Ajaka
Ajaka a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154. -- f. ajikā J iii.278 & ajiyā J v.241.
Ajagara
Ajagara [aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goat- eater"] a large snake (rock -- snake?), Boa Constrictor J vi.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA iii.60. Also as ajakara at J iii.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64).
Ajacca
Ajacca (adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J iii.19; vi.100.
Ajajjara
Ajajjara see jajjara.
Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra
Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra see jaddhu.
Ajamoja
Ajamoja [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin -- seed VvA 186.
Ajā
Ajā (f.) a she -- goat J iii.125; iv.251.
Ajānana
Ajānana (˚ -- ) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J v.199 (˚bhāva); vi.177 (˚kāla).
Ajina
Ajina (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats' skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D i.167; Sn 1027; J i.12, 53; iv.387; v.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M i.343; S iv.118; A ii.207; Sn 249 (= kharāni a˚ -- cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.). -- khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D i.167; S i.117; A i.240, 295; ii.206; Vin i.306; iii.34; J vi.569. -- paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; D i.7 (= ajina -- cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA i.87); A i.181. -- sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina -- camma -- sāṭī DhA iv.156) Dh 394 = J i.481 = iii.85.
Ajini
Ajini aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v.
Ajiya = ajikā
Ajiya = ajikā (see ajaka).
Ajira
Ajira (nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ajīraka
Ajīraka (nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J i.404; ii.181, 291; iii.213, 225.
Ajeyya & Ajjeyya
Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] - (a) not to be taken by force Kh viii.8 (cp. KhA 223). <-> (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J v.509.
Ajeyya
Ajeyya2 (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J vi.323.
Ajja & Ajjā
Ajja & Ajjā (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a˚ being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to -- day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J i.279; iii.425 (read bahutaŋ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv i.117 (= idāni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. <-> Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja -- tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18; D i.85; DA i.235. -- kālaŋ (adv.) this morning J vi.180; -- divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23.
Ajjatana
Ajjatana (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, to- day's, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J ii.409. -- dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17; PvA 171 & passim.
Ajjatā
Ajjatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S i.83 (v. l. ajjeva).
Ajjati
Ajjati [Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.).
Ajjava
Ajjava (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D iii.213; A i.94; ii.113; iii.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J iii.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an˚); SnA 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.).
Ajjavatā
Ajjavatā (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, up- rightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā).
Ajjita
Ajjita [pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98.
Ajjuka
Ajjuka [*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35; DA i.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka).
Ajjukaṇṇa
Ajjukaṇṇa [*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera To- mentosa J vi.535 (nn).
Ajjuṇho
Ajjuṇho (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja -- juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin i.25; iv.80.
Ajjuna
Ajjuna [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J vi.535; DhA i.105 (˚rukkha).
Ajjh
Ajjh -- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.
Ajjhagā
Ajjhagā [adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S i.12 (vimānaŋ); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiŋ; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jātimaraṇaŋ); Dh 154 (taṇhānaŋ khayaŋ); Vv 327 (visesaŋ attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataŋ santiŋ; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati).
Ajjhatta
Ajjhatta (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & ˚interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. <-> D i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna), 70 = A ii.210; v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaŋ = niyakajjhattaŋ attano santāne ti attho DA i.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S i.70, 169; ii..27 (kathaŋ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaŋ dukkhaŋ); iii.180 (id.); iv.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; v.74 (ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ ajjhattaŋ susaṇṭhitaŋ suvimuttaŋ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A i.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); ii.158. (sukhadukkhaŋ), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhittaŋ), 57 (itthindriyaŋ), 299 (cittaŋ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); v 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); v.338 (id.); Ps i.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaŋ DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arūˊpasaññī). -- adv. ˚ŋ inwardly, personally (in contrast -- pair ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. ˚bahiddhā) A i.284; ii.171; iv.305; v.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350). -- ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. -- cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388. -- bahiddhā inside & outside, personal -- external, mutual, interacting S ii.252 sq.; iii.47; iv.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -- rata with inward joy D ii.107 = S v.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Th 1, 981; A iv.312; DhA iv.90 (= gocarɔ ajjhatta -- sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna -- bhāvanāya rata). -- rūpa one's own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opp. bahiddhā -- rūpa & ajjh˚ -- bah˚ r.). -- saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A i.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. -- santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattānaŋ rāgādīnaŋ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). -- samuṭṭhāna originating from within J i.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā˚).
-- 11 --
Ajjhattika
Ajjhattika (adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaŋ vuccati cittaŋ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. -- M i.62; S i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā); iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni); v.101 (anga); A i.16 (anga); ii.164 (dhātuyo); iii.400 (āyatanāni); v.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh iv. (= KhA 82); J iv.402 (bāhira -- vatthuŋ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaŋ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq.
Ajjhapara
Ajjhapara S v.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.).
Ajjhappatta
Ajjhappatta (& Ajjhapatta) [adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J ii.450; vi.566 (p; C. attano santikaŋ patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J ii.59; v.198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); J iii.296 (p. C. sampatta); v.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta).
Ajjhabhavi
Ajjhabhavi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, over- power, overcome S i.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J ii.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati.
Ajjhabhāsi
Ajjhabhāsi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S iv.117 (gāthāhi); Kh v. = Sn p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA 56, 90.
Ajjhabhu
Ajjhabhu (3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjayaŋ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi.
Ajjhayana
Ajjhayana (nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena.
Ajjhavodahi
Ajjhavodahi 3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J v.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt).
Ajjhāgāre
Ajjhāgāre (adv.) [adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra] at home, in one's own house A i.132 = It 109; A ii.70.
Ajjhācarati
Ajjhācarati [adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct one- self according to Vin ii.301; M i.523; Miln 266. -- 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J iv.231 (aññam -- aññaŋ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati.
Ajjhācāra
Ajjhācāra [to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika's or Saŋghādisesa's) Vin i.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, i.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J i.396; v.327 (˚cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln 127 (an˚).
Ajjhāciṇṇa
Ajjhāciṇṇa [pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin ii.80 sq., 301.
Ajjhājīva
Ajjhājīva [adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha).
Ajjhāpajjati
Ajjhāpajjati [adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin iv.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.).
Ajjhāpatti
Ajjhāpatti (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚).
Ajjhāpana
Ajjhāpana1 (nt.) [fr. Caus. ii. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225.
Ajjhāpana
Ajjhāpana2 (nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflag- ration J vi.311.
Ajjhāpanna
Ajjhāpanna [pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D i.245; iii.43; S ii.270; A iv.277, 280; v.178, 181. an˚ guiltless, innocent Vin i.103; D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A iv.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna.
Ajjhāpīḷita
Ajjhāpīḷita [adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tor- mented PvA 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst).
Ajjhābhava
Ajjhābhava [cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predo- minance J ii.357.
Ajjhābhavati
Ajjhābhavati [adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J ii.357.
Ajjhāyaka
Ajjhāyaka [cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J vi.209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D i.88, 120; iii.94; A i.163; iii.223; Sn 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J i.3; vi.201, 498; DA i.247.
Ajjhāruha
Ajjhāruha (& ˚rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A iii.63 sq. = S v.96; J iii.399.
Ajjhārūḷha
Ajjhārūḷha (adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J iii.399.
Ajjhārūhati
Ajjhārūhati [adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S i.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings i.285).
Ajjhāvadati
Ajjhāvadati see accāvadati.
Ajjhāvara
Ajjhāvara [fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J v.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra.
Ajjhāvasatar
Ajjhāvasatar [n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D i.63 (agāraŋ).
Ajjhāvasati
Ajjhāvasati [adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraŋ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D ii.16; M i.353; Vin iv.224; J i.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. -- pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.).
Ajjhāvuttha
Ajjhāvuttha [cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; J i.145; ii.333; PvA 24 (˚ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita).
Ajjhāsaya
Ajjhāsaya [fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D ii.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J i.88, 90; ii.352; v.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dān˚ intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayânurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128.
Ajjhāsayatā
Ajjhāsayatā (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. loc.).
Ajjhāsita
Ajjhāsita [pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhān˚). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita.
Ajjhiṭṭha
Ajjhiṭṭha [pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden); D ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd2 16); J vi.292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA iv.100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an˚.
Ajjhupagacchati
Ajjhupagacchati [adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 (= sampaṭicchati ThA 285); J ii.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.).
Ajjhupagata
Ajjhupagata [pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A v.87, cp. 210; v.187 sq.
Ajjhupagamana
Ajjhupagamana (nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agree- ment, justification Vin ii.97, 104.
Ajjhupaharati
Ajjhupaharati [adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J ii.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.).
Ajjhupekkhati
Ajjhupekkhati [adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupek- ṣati] 1. to look on A i.257; Miln 275. -- 2. to look
-- 12 --
on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A iv.45 (kaṭṭhɔaggi, has to be looked after); PvA 149 (sisaŋ colaŋ vā). -- 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin ii.78 = iii.162, cp. J i.147; M i.155; ii.223; A iii.194, 435; J v.229; DhA iv.125.
Ajjhupekkhana
Ajjhupekkhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps i.16; ii.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA iv.3.
Ajjhupekkhitar
Ajjhupekkhitar [n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S v.69 (sādhukaŋ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227.
Ajjhupeti
Ajjhupeti [cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J iv.440.
Ajjheti
Ajjheti [Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati).
Ajjhena
Ajjhena (nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M iii.1; J ii.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); iii.114 (= japa); v.10 (pl. = vede); vi.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mantɔ). -- kujja (˚kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286.
Ajjhesati
Ajjhesati (adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA iv.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin ii.200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita.
Ajjhesanā
Ajjhesanā (f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin i.6 = D ii.38 = S i.138; J ii.327 (better v. l. ajjhena).
Ajjhesita
Ajjhesita [pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha).
Ajjhokāsa
Ajjhokāsa [adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in loc. ajjho- kāse in the open Vin i.15; S i.212; DhA iv.100.
Ajjhogāḷha
Ajjhogāḷha [pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M i.457; S i.201; Miln 348.
Ajjhogāhati
Ajjhogāhati (& ˚gāheti) [Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D i.101 (vanaŋ), 222 (samuddaŋ); M i.359, 536; A iii.75, 368; iv.356; v.133; Vin iii.18; J i.7; Nd1 152 (ogāhati +); Miln 87 (samuddaŋ); 300 (vanaŋ). -- pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati.
Ajjhoṭhapeti
Ajjhoṭhapeti [adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA 148 (gāmaŋ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti.
Ajjhotthata
Ajjhotthata [pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J i.363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410; v.91 (= adhipanna); DhA i.278; PvA 55; Dāvs v.5.
Ajjhottharati
Ajjhottharati [adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111; J i.61, 72, 73; Miln 296, 336; Dh i.264; Pass. ˚tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A iii.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.).
Ajjhopanna
Ajjhopanna (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old -- standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi -- opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M i.162, 173, 369; A i.74; ii.28; iii.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA i.59; as v. l.: D i.245. <-> 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA i.59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D i.245; iii.43, 46; S. ii.194, 270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A v.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M i.162; A iii.242; Ud 75, 76.
Ajjhobhavati
Ajjhobhavati [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi˚] to overcome, overpower, destroy J ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.).
Ajjhomaddati
Ajjhomaddati [adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A iv.191, 193.
Ajjhomucchita
Ajjhomucchita [pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A iii.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.).
Ajjholambati
Ajjholambati [adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S iii 137; M iii.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.
Ajjhosa
Ajjhosa = ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S iv.73; Th 1, 98, 794.
Ajjhosati
Ajjhosati [adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M i.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviŋ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. ˚etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.).
Ajjhosāna
Ajjhosāna (nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D ii.58 sq.; iii.289; M i.498 (+ abhinandana); S iii.187; A i.66; ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā).
Ajjhosāya
Ajjhosāya [ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M i.266; S. iv.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa.
Ajjhosita
Ajjhosita [cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S ii.94 (+ mamāyita); A ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaŋ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). -- an˚ S iv.213; v.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita).
Ajjhohata
Ajjhohata [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaŋ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).
Ajjhoharaṇa
Ajjhoharaṇa (nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A v.324; J vi.213.
-- 13 --
Ajjhoharaṇiya
Ajjhoharaṇiya (adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J vi.258; DhA i.284.
Ajjhoharati
Ajjhoharati [Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M i.245; J i.460; ii.293; vi.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) -- pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.).
Ajjhohāra
Ajjhohāra [Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233; Miln 176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J v.462.
Añcati
Añcati J i.417, read añchati (see next).
Añchati
Añchati [in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aŋchāvei = añchati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaŋ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M i.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚); Th 1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l. aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at J i 417 for udakaŋ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaŋ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence.
Añja
Añja (adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J i.192.
Añjati
Añjati1 [= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita, ānañja -- ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa.
Añjati & Añjeti
Añjati2 & Añjeti [= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S ii.281; J iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. ii. añjāpeti DhA i.21. <-> pp. añjita (q. v.).
Añjana
Añjana (nt.) [from añjati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note). -- 1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla); D i.7, 12; DA i.98 (khār˚); 284; DhA iii.354 (akkhi˚ eye -- salve). -- 2. glossy, jet -- black J i.194; ii.369; v.416. The reading añjana at A iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaŋ. See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 (= añjana -- nāḷi ThA 267); DhA ii.25. -- akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. -- upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203; ii.112. -- cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA 13. -- nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. -- rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J i.331. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D ii.18 (lomāni); J i.138 (kesā), 194; ii.369; PvA 258 (vana).
Añjanī
Añjanī (f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203, 204; ii.135; iv.168; M ii.65 = Th 1, 773.
Añjanisalākā
Añjanisalākā (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203; ii.135; J iii.419.
Añjaya
Añjaya (adj.) [from añjati1] straight J iii.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?
Añjali
Añjali [cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha -- samodhāna -- samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliŋ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188; D i.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) ˚ŋ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J i.54; DhA iv.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmiŋ on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) ˚ŋ karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J i.17; PvA 50, and añjalikata id. Pv ii.1220. Cp. pañjali -- kamma respectful salutation, as above A i.123; ii.180; iv.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA i.32. -- karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D iii.5; A ii.34; iii.36; iv.13 sq.; It 88.
Añjalikā
Añjalikā (f.) [= añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha -- samodhāna samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa -- visiṭṭhānaŋ apacayānaŋ akāsiŋ).
Añjasa
Añjasa [Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D i.235; J i.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pañjasa.
Añjita
Añjita [Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J i.77 (su -- añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjitɔakkha).
Añña
Añña (pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attānaŋ), 165; J i.151 (opp. attano); ii.333 (aññaŋ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttariŋ nt. Nd2 17); else J i.294. aññaŋ kiñci (indef.) anything else J i.151. yo añño every other, whoever else J i.256. -- 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J i.254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin i.15; Miln 40; etc. <-> 2. reciprocative añño aññaŋ, aññamaññaŋ, aññoññaŋ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaŋ Dh 165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu ii.436), as pron.: n'ālaŋ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D i.56 = S iii 211. n'aññamaññassa dukkhaŋ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti (approach each other) M i.86 = Nd2 199. ˚ŋ agāravo viharati A iii.247. dve janā ˚ŋ ghātayiŋsu (slew each other) J i.254. aññamaññaŋ hasanti J v.111; ˚ŋ musale hantvā J v.267. ˚ŋ daṇḍâbhigāṭena PvA 58; or adj.: aññamaññaŋ veraŋ bandhiŋsu (established mutual enmity) J ii.353; ˚ŋ piyasaŋvāsaŋ vasiŋsu J ii.153; aññamaññaŋ accayaŋ desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA i.57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaŋ paṭibaddha citta ahesuŋ (in love with each other) J iii.188; or ˚ -- : aññamañña -- paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps ii.49, 58. <-> (c.) aññoñña (˚ -- ) J v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaŋ jīvaŋ . . aññaŋ sarīraŋ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D i.157; M i.430; A v.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā D i.187. Thus also in phrase aññena aññaŋ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter -- charges); D i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aññaŋ kayiramānaŋ aññena sambharati). <-> anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self -- same, identical M i.256 (= ayaŋ). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (˚posin; opp. paraŋ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds. -- ādisa different J vi.212, ˚tā difference PvA 243. -- khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another
-- 14 --
faith (see khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non -- Buddhist.; D iii.115; M i.494, 512; P ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228; v.6, 27 sq.; A i.65, 240; ii.176; iv.35 sq.; Vin i.60; J i.93; ii.415. -- diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña -- khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para˚) Sn 55, 213, 364. -- mano (an˚) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). -- vāda holding other views, an˚ (adj.) Dpvs iv.24. -- vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36. -- vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent -- minded Vin iv.269; DhA iii.352, 381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA i.181. -- saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S iii.42 = v.154. -- sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825.
Aññatama
Aññatama (pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14.
Aññatara
Aññatara (pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J i.221, 253; ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S iv.180 = A iv.461.
Aññattha
Aññattha (adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J i.291; ii.154; DhsA 163; DhA i.212; iii.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14.
Aññatra
Aññatra (adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J v.252; Pv iv.162. In compn. also = añña˚, e. g. aññatra -- yoga (adj.) following another discipline D i.187; M i.487. -- As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo -- pakkamena D i.168; kiŋ karaṇīyaŋ a. dhammacariyāya S i.101; ko nu aññatram -- ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā -- mattena SnA 555). -- kiŋ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D i.90 (vusitavā -- mānī k. a. avusitattā); S i.29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.).
Aññathatta
Aññathatta (nt.) [aññathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S iii.37; iv.40; A i.153; iii.66; Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. -- 2. difference J i.147; It 11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2; S iii.91; iv.329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M i.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J i.33 (cittaŋ); PvA 195 (cittassa).
Aññathā
Aññathā (adv.) [añña + thā] in a different manner, other- wise, differently S i.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps ii.104 (= tatha). -- bhāva (1) a different existence A ii.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D i.36; S ii.274; iii.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. -- bhāvin based on difference S iii.225 sq.; iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36.
Aññadatthu
Aññadatthu (adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all -- round, absolutely (ekaŋsa -- vacane nipāto DA i.111) only, at any rate D i.91; ii.284; Sn 828 (na hɔ aññadatthɔ atthi pasaŋsa -- lābhā, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaŋsa -- lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd1 168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114. -- dasa sure -- seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D i.18; iii.135, 185; A ii.24; iii.202; iv.89, 105; It 15.
Aññadā
Aññadā (adv.) [añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S iv.285; J v.12; DhA iv.125.
Aññā
Aññā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. xxxiii.) M i.445; S i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭhɔeva dhamme), 133, 237; A iii.82, 143, 192; v.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh vii.11; Miln 334. -- aññaŋ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183; S ii.51 sq., 120; iv.139; v.222; J i.140; ii.333. See also arahatta. -- atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114. -- ārādhana the attainment of full insight M i.479. -- indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. -- citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S ii.267; A iii.437. -- paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238. -- vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta -- vimokkho).
Aññāṇa
Aññāṇa (nt.) [a + ñāṇa] ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e.
Aññāṇaka
Aññāṇaka (nt.) [Demin. of aññāṇa] ignorance Vin iv.144.
Aññāṇin
Aññāṇin (adj.) [a + ñāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA iii.106.
Aññāta
Aññāta1 [pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an˚ what is not known, in phrase anaññāta -- ññassāmīɔ tɔ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191. -- mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A iii.175 sq.; Th 1, 953.
Aññāta
Aññāta2 [a + ñāta] unknown, see ñāta.
Aññātaka
Aññātaka1 [a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA i.222.
Aññātaka
Aññātaka2 (adj.) [Demin. of aññāta2] unknown, unrecog- nisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise J i.14; iii.116; v.102.
Aññātar
Aññātar [n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D ii.286; M i.169; S i.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561.
Aññātāvin
Aññātāvin (adj. -- n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291. -- indriya (˚tāvɔ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā).
Aññātukāma
Aññātukāma (adj.) [ā + jñātuŋ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A iii.192. See ājānāti.
Aññāya
Aññāya [ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S i.24; A iii.41; Dh 275, 411.
Aññoñña
Aññoñña see añña B 2 c.
Añhamāna
Añhamāna [Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expls. by āhārayamāna.
Aṭaṭa
Aṭaṭa [BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A v.173 = Sn p. 126.
Aṭaṇaka
Aṭaṇaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J v.105 (˚gāvī).
Aṭanī
Aṭanī (f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min.
-- 15 --
Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357); DhA i.234; J ii.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three -- legged stand. See also Vin Texts ii.53.
Aṭala
Aṭala (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M ii.155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S i.226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaṇangaṇ -- ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings i.291) trsls. "buskined shoes".
Aṭavī
Aṭavī (f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non -- Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J i.306; ii.117; iii.220; DhA i.13; PvA 277. <-> 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J vi.55 (= aṭavicorā C.). -- rakkhika guardian of the forest J ii.335. -- sankhepa at A i.178 = iii.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. ˚sankopa "inroad of savage tribes".
Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa1 [cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watch- tower Vin i.140; DA i.209.
Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa2 [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224; J ii.2, 75; iv.129 (˚ŋ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ŋ tīreti to see a suit through); vi.336.
Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa3 [Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th 2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA 270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA 271); J iv.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often -- ˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M i.463; Miln 32; chāt˚ tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; iii.100; J i.293; sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23. -- ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; S ii.255; J i.265; ii.117; Miln 357; PvA 285.
Aṭṭaka
Aṭṭaka [Demin. of aṭṭa1] a platform to be used as a watch- house on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173; ii.416; iii.322, 372; DA i.209.
Aṭṭāna
Aṭṭāna at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315).
Aṭṭāla
Aṭṭāla [from aṭṭa] a watch -- tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th 1, 863; J iii.160; v.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA iii.488.
Aṭṭālaka
Aṭṭālaka [Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J ii.94, 220, 224; vi.390, 433; Miln 66, 81.
Aṭṭita
Aṭṭita (& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv ii.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J ii.436; iv.85 (v. l. addhita); v.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205. <-> See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.
Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati
Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati [Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e. g. D i.213 (+ jigucchati); S i.131; M i.423; Pv i.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin ii.292; J i.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps i.159. <-> Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th 2, 140. -- pp. aṭṭita & addita.
Aṭṭiyana
Aṭṭiyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA ii.179.
Aṭṭha
Aṭṭha1 [Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in -- a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning "a couple" aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva -- k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA i.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaŋ dāpesi VvA 75 = DhA iii.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaŋ Vv 348. a. vattha -- yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a therā PvA 32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb -- aṭṭhakaŋ dānaŋ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA ii.45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭhɔ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA ii.41; aṭṭh -- aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi VvA 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt -- aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J i.86; J ii.101; VvA 264 (saŋvaccharā years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J i.483; iv.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. -- In distances: a. karīsā DhA ii.80; iv.217; PvA 258; a. usabhā J iv.142. <-> (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataŋ 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a -- ˚sata -- sahassa -- vibhava DhA iv.7. But aṭṭhasata at S iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J v.377. -- aṭṭha sahassaŋ 8000 J v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiŋsa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti -- koṭivibhava DhA iii.129; PvA 196; asīti hatthɔ ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asīti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika -- buddhadhammā: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J vi.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis J i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana, riches); DhA ii.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini -- sankhāsenā J vi.395. a. vatthū Vin ii.204. -- 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln 140. -- 38 aṭṭhatiŋsā Miln 359 (rājaparisā). -- 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaŋ vassāni Sn 289. -- 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th 1, 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi -- tasitā vitakkā); J i.64 (turiya -- satasahassāni) <-> 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15) Sn 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. ˚aŋsa and ˚angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaŋ manussabhāvaŋ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA iv.3. -- aŋsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D i.76 = M iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln 282 (maṇiratanaŋ subhaŋ jātimantaŋ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J vi.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataŋsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha -- soḷasadvattiŋsādi -- aŋsavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv
-- 16 --
iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -- anga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast -- day A i.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasaŋ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaŋ uposathaŋ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga -- samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś i.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402, where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī -- ādīhi aṭṭhahɔ angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king D i.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D ii.211; J i.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś i.149. -- angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhangɔ uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D i.156, 157, 165; M i.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh iv.; Vin i.10; Nd2 485; DA i.313; DhA iii.402. -- angula eight finger -- breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). -- aḍḍha (v. l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (˚pāda) J vi.354, see also aḍḍha1. -- nakha having eight nails or claws J vi.354 (: ekekasmiŋ pāde dvinnaŋ dvinnaŋ khurānaŋ vasena C.). -- nava eight or nine DhA iii.179. -- pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D i.6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross -- plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada -- katā kesā); J ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross -- plaiting). -- padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin i.297; ii.150. -- pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J v.377; vi.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight -- legged animal. -- mangala having eight anspicious signs J v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -- vanka with eight facets, lit. eight -- crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J vi.388. -- vidha eightfold Dhs 219.
Aṭṭha
Aṭṭha2 see attha.
Aṭṭhaka
Aṭṭhaka (adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni); VvA 75 = DhA iii.104 (˚bhatta). -- 2. ˚ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antarɔaṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, 288 (see Vin Texst i.130n); M i.79; A i.136; Miln 396; J i.390. -- 3. ˚ŋ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh˚ eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara.
Aṭṭhama
Aṭṭhama (num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A i.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A i.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.).
Aṭṭhamaka
Aṭṭhamaka = aṭṭhama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln 291 (att˚ self -- eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243 -- 251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps ii.193 (+ sotāpanna).
Aṭṭhāna
Aṭṭhāna (nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rub- bing -- post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing -- place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin ii.315).
Aṭṭhi˚
Aṭṭhi˚1 [= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti -- kata (for citta˚), angi -- bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi -- kata (besides manasā -- k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katvā: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D ii.204; M i.325, 445; S i.112 sq. = 189, 220; v.76; A ii.116; iii.163; J i.189; v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaŋ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaŋ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, ayaŋ no attho adhigantabbo evaŋ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna).
Aṭṭhi
Aṭṭhi2 (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)s- tra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] <-> 1. a bone A i.50; iv.129; Sn 194 (˚nahāru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J i.70; iii.26, 184; vi.448 (˚vedhin); DhA iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (˚camma -- nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J ii.104. -- kankala [Sk. ˚kankāla] a skeleton M i.364; cp. ˚sankhalika. -- kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J v.406. -- kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA i.387. -- camma bones and skin J ii.339; DhA iii.43; PvA 68 -- taca id. J ii.295. -- maya made of bone Vin ii.115. -- miñjā marrow A iv.129; DhA i.181; iii.361; KhA 52. -- yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S i.206. -- sankhalikā [B. Sk. ˚śakalā Sp. Av. Ś i.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika˚] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA iii.479; PvA 152. -- sanghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA ii.28; PvA 206. -- sañcaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. -- saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Th 1, 18. -- saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101.
Aṭṭhika
Aṭṭhika1 (nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M iii.92; J i.265, 428; vi.404; PvA 41. -- 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA ii.53 (tāl˚); Mhvs 15, 42. -- sankhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A iii.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -- saññā the idea of a skeleton S v.129 sq.; A ii.17; Dhs 264.
Aṭṭhika
Aṭṭhika2 at PvA 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika.
Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita1 see ṭhita.
Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita2 [ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J ii.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.).
Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita3 see atthika.
Aṭṭhilla
Aṭṭhilla at Vin ii.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone.
Aḍḍha
Aḍḍha1 (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upaḍḍha (q. v.) is always used. -- akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA iv.98. -- aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) S ii.222 (˚ratana); J vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha). -- aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA iii.367. -- uḍḍha [cp.
-- 17 --
Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J i.82; iv.180; v.417, 420; DhA i.87; Mhvs 12, 53. -- ocitaka half plucked off J i.120. -- karīsa ( -- matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aṭṭha -- karīsa). -- kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa A v.83. -- kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); J v.447 (a˚ -- kāsigaṇikā for a -- ˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚ -- k˚ -- gaṇikā viya na bahunnaŋ piyā manāpā). -- kumbha a half ( -- filled) pitcher Sn 721. -- kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross -- seam Vin i.287. -- kosa half a room, a small room J vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara C.). -- gāvuta half a league J vi 55. -- cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A iii.52), a half āḷha of rice. -- tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA 66 (māsā); J i.49, 206, 255 (˚sata 250). Cp. next. -- teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2 Vin iv.117; J ii.129 (˚sata); DA i.173 (v. l. BB for ˚tiya); DhA i.95 (˚sata), 279; PvA 20 (˚sahassa). -- telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin i 243, 247; D ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA iii.369. -- daṇḍaka a short stick M i.87 = A i.47; ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. -- duka see ˚ruka. -- nāḷika ( -- matta) half a nāḷi -- measure full J vi.366. -- pallanka half a divan Vin ii.280. -- bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga VvA 61); Pv i.115. -- maṇḍala semi -- circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287. -- māna half a māna measure J i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaŋ nāḷinaŋ nāmaŋ C.). -- māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚); A v.85; J iii.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin iv.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. -- māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J i.111. -- māsika halfmonthly Pug 55. -- muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -- yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; ii.146. Acc. to Vin T. i.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha "like a Garuḷa bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. -- yojana half a yojana (in distance) J v.410; DA i.35 (in expln. of addhāna -- magga); DhA i.147; ii.74. -- rattā midnight A iii.407 (˚aŋ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaŋ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaŋ VvA 315); J i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (id.). -- ratti = ˚rattā VvA 255, 315 (= majjhimayāma -- samaya); PvA 155. -- ruka (v. l. ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji -- ṭhapanaŋ "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". -- vivata (dvāra) half open J v.293.
Aḍḍha
Aḍḍha2 (adj.) [Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well -- to -- do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta -- jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D i.115, 134, 137; iii.163; Pug 52; DhA i.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (˚kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA i.281 (= issara); DhA ii.37 (˚kula); Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (id.), 561.
Aḍḍhaka
Aḍḍhaka (adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J iv.495; Pv ii.82 (= mahāvibhava PvA 107).
Aḍḍhatā
Aḍḍhatā (f.) [abstr. to aḍḍha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316.
Aṇa
Aṇa [Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin i.6 = S i.137, 234 = D ii.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A ii.69; J v.481; ThA 245.
Aṇu
Aṇu (adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D i.223; S i.136; v.96 (˚bīja); Sn 299 (anuto aṇuŋ gradually); J iii.12 (= appamattaka); iv.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. ˚matta. -- thūla (aṇuŋthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA i.282), 409 = Sn 633; J iv.192; DhA iv.184. -- matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M iii.134; A ii.22); Dpvs iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at D i.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA i.181; Sdhp 347. -- sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3.
Aṇuka
Aṇuka (adj.) = aṇu Sn 146, KhA 246.
Aṇḍa
Aṇḍa (nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa] 1. an egg Vin iii.3; S ii.258; M i.104; A iv.125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin iii.106. -- 3. (in camm˚) a water -- bag J i.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69). -- kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = M i.104; A iv.126, 176. -- cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J iv.364, 366. -- ja 1. born from eggs S iii.241 (of snakes); M i.73; J ii.53 = v.85; Miln 267. -- 2. a bird J. v.189. -- bhārin bearing his testicles S ii.258 = Vin iii.100. -- sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. -- hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M i.383.
Aṇḍaka
Aṇḍaka1 (nt.) = aṇḍa, egg DhA i.60; iii.137 (sakuṇ˚).
Aṇḍaka
Aṇḍaka2 (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M i.286; A v.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J iii.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396.
Aṇṇa
Aṇṇa (food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa.
Aṇṇava
Aṇṇava (nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M i.134; S i.214; iv.157 (mahā udak˚); Sn 173 (fig. for saŋsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (id.); v.159 (mah˚); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah˚). -- 2. a stream, river J iii. 521; v.255.
Aṇha
Aṇha [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as -- ˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q. v.
Atakkaka (adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J yi.21.
Ataccha
Ataccha (nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D i.3; J vi.207.
Ati
Ati (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. ii.3) J vi.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahitaŋ C. = accāhitaŋ T.). II. as prefix, meaning. -- 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimāpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. -- 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans -- ; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond. -- Also with
-- 18 --
verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin. -- 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). -- (a) with nouns & adj.: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving; ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near; deva a super -- god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient; ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. <-> (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively. III. A peculiar use of ati is its' function in reduplication -- compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e. g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkâticakkaŋ mañcâtimañcaŋ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360 (Bdhgh); J ii.331; iv.81; DhA iv.61. -- devâtideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānâtimāna all kinds of conceit; vankâtivanka crooked all over J i.160. -- IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati -- jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti. Note The contracted (assimilation -- ) form of ati before vowels is acc -- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atīva.
Atiambila
Ati -- ambila (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA ii.85.
Atiarahant
Ati -- arahant [ati + arahant] a super -- Arahant, one who sur- passes even other Arahants Miln 277.
Atiissara
Ati -- issara (adj.) very powerful(?) J v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin).
Atiuṇha
Ati -- uṇha (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (˚ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).
Atiuttama
Ati -- uttama (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80.
Atiudaka
Ati -- udaka too much water, excess of water DhA i.52.
Atiussura
Ati -- ussura (adj.) only in loc. ˚e (adv.) too soon after sun- rise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early).
Atieti
Ati -- eti [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta.
Atikata
Atikata (pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A i.62.
Atikaddhati
Atikaddhati [ati + kaḍḍhati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17.
Atikaṇha
Atikaṇha (adj.) [ati + kaṇha] too black Vin iv.7.
Atikaruṇa
Atikaruṇa (adj.) [ati + karuṇa] very pitiful, extremely mis- erable J i.202; iv.142; vi.53.
Atikassa
Atikassa (ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya] pul- ling (right) through J v.173 (rajjuŋ, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti˚).
Atikāla
Atikāla [ati + kāla] in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā).
Atikkanta
Atikkanta [pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J ii.128 (tīṇi saŋvaccharāni); DhA iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed). -- mānusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrānta -- mānuṣyaka M Vastu iii.321.
Atikkantikā
Atikkantikā (f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, over- stepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122.
Atikkama
Atikkama [Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.
Atikkamaṇaka
Atikkamaṇaka (adj.) [atikkamaṇa + ka] exceeding J i.153.
Atikkamati
Atikkamati [ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to be superior to. -- J iv.141; Dh 221 (Pot. ˚eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome D ii.13 (an˚); SnA 568 (dur˚). ger. atikkamma D ii.12 (surpassing); It 51 (māradheyyaŋ, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaŋ); Pug 17; J i.162 (raṭṭhaŋ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagāmaŋ beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -- pp. atikkanta (q. v.).
Atikkameti
Atikkameti [Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J i.151.
Atikkhippaŋ
Atikkhippaŋ (adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin ii.284.
Atikhaṇa
Atikhaṇa (nt.) [ati + khaṇa(na)] too much digging J ii.296.
Atikhāta
Atikhāta (nt.) = prec. J ii.296.
Atikhiṇa
Atikhiṇa (adj.) [ati + khīṇa] in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā).
Atiga
Atiga ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, sur- mounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga˚); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha˚); Nd1 100 (= atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.).
Atigacchati
Atigacchati [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accagā (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; D i.85; S ii.205; DA i.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accaguŋ It 93, 95.
Atigāḷeti
Atigāḷeti [ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi -- gālayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J vi.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷha
Atigāḷha (adj.) [ati + gāḷha 1] very tight or close, inten- sive J i.62. Cp. atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷhita
Atigāḷhita [pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated, destroyed J v.401 (= atipīḷita C.).
Atighora
Atighora (adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285.
Aticaraṇa
Aticaraṇa (nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159.
Aticarati
Aticarati [ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215; PvA 57. -- 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J i.496. Cp. next.
Aticaritar
Aticaritar [n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A ii.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); iv.66 (T. aticarittā).
-- 19 --
Aticariyā
Aticariyā (f.) [ati + cariyā] transgression, sin, adultery D iii.190.
Aticāra
Aticāra [from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra VvA 72).
Aticārin
Aticārin (adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress S ii.259; iv.242; D iii.190; A iii.261; Pv ii.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110.
Aticitra
Aticitra (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28.
Aticca
Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasataŋ atikkamitvā Nd1 120). -- 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J v,424; VvA 72,
Aticchati
Aticchati [*Sk. ati -- ṛcchati, ati + ṛ, cp. aṇṇava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] J iii.462; DhA iv.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. ˚atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. -- Caus. aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J iii.462. <-> Cp. icchatā.
Aticchatta
Aticchatta [ati + chatta] a "super" -- sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2.
Atitāta
Atitāta (adj.) [ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta] well -- born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajāta).
Atitarati
Atitarati [ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S iv.157 = It 57 (˚āri).
Atituccha
Atituccha (adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430.
Atituṭṭhi
Atituṭṭhi (f.) [ati + tuṭṭhi] extreme joy J i.207.
Atitula
Atitula (adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tulaŋ atīto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455).
Atitta
Atitta (adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J i.440; Dh 48.
Atittha
Atittha (nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fording- place". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way J i.343; iv.379; vi.241; DhA iii.347; DA i.38.
Atithi
Atithi [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D i.117 (= āgantuka -- navaka pāhuṇaka DA i.288); A ii.68; iii.45, 260; J iv.31, 274; v.388; Kh viii.7 (= nɔ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= āgantuka).
Atidāna
Atidāna (nt.) [ati + dāna] too generous giving, an exces- sive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130.
Atidāruṇa
Atidāruṇa (adj.) [Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73.
Atiditthi
Atiditthi (f.) [ati + diṭṭhi] higher doctrine, super know- ledge (?) Vin i.63 = ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi -- diṭṭhi?)
Atidivā
Atidivā (adv.) [ati + divā] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena); S i.200; A iii.117.
Atidisati
Atidisati [ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304.
Atidīgha
Atidīgha (adj.) [ati + dīgha] too long, extremely long J iv. 165; Pv ii.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa).
Atidukkha
Atidukkha [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca PvA 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech.
Atidūra
Atidūra (adj.) [ati + dūra] very or too far Vin i.46; J ii.154; Pv ii.965 = DhA iii.220 (vv. ll. suvidūre); PvA 42 (opp. accāsanna).
Atideva
Atideva [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S i.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi˚); Miln 277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devâtideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a.
Atidhamati
Atidhamati [ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J i.283; pp. atidhanta ibid.
Atidhātatā
Atidhātatā [ati + dhāta + ta] oversatiation J ii.193.
Atidhāvati
Atidhāvati [ati + dhāvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S iii.103; iv.230; M iii.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21.
Atidhonacārin
Atidhonacārin [ati + dhonacārin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA iii.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129.
Atināmeti
Atināmeti [BSk. atināmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nāmeti] to pass time A i.206; Miln 345.
Atiniggaṇhāti
Atiniggaṇhāti [ati + niggaṇhāti] to rebuke too much J vi.417.
Atinicaka
Atinicaka (adj.) [ati + nīcaka] too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68.
Atineti
Atineti [ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaŋ).
Atipaṇḍita
Atipaṇḍita (adj. [ati + paṇḍita] too clever DhA iv.38.
Atipaṇḍitatā
Atipaṇḍitatā (f.) [abstr. of atipaṇḍita] too much clever- ness DhA ii.29.
Atipadāna
Atipadāna (nt.) [ati + pa + dāna] too much alms -- giving Pv ii.943 (= atidāna PvA 130).
Atipapañca
Atipapañca [ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J i.64; ii.93.
Atipariccāga
Atipariccāga [ati + pariccāga] excess in liberality DhA iii.11.
Atipassati
Atipassati [ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M iii.132 (nāgaŋ).
Atipāta
Atipāta [ati + pat] attack, only in phrase pāṇâtipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DA i.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Sn 242; Kh ii. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc.
Atipātin
Atipātin (adj. -- n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); PvA 27 (pāṇ˚).
Atipāteti
Atipāteti [Denom. fr. atipāta] to destroy S v.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimāpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripāteti.
Atipīṇita
Atipīṇita (adj.) [ati + pīṇita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA v.70.
-- 20 --
Atipīḷita
Atipīḷita [ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J v.401 (= atigāḷhita).
Atippago
Atippago (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually ellip- tical = it is too early (with inf. carituŋ etc.) D i.178; M i.84; A iv.35.
Atibaddha
Atibaddha [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J i.192 = Vin iv.5.
Atibandhati
Atibandhati [ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J i.191 sq. -- pp. atibaddha q. v.
Atibahala
Atibahala (adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J vi.365.
Atibāḷha
Atibāḷha (adj.) [ati + bāḷha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. ˚ŋ too much D i.93, 95; M i.253.
Atibāheti
Atibāheti [ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati] to drive away, to pull out J iv.366 (= abbāheti).
Atibrahmā
Atibrahmā [ati + brahmā] a greater Brahma, a super -- god Miln 277; DhA ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.).
Atibrūheti
Atibrūheti [ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi -- bṛṇhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J v.361 (= mahāsaddaŋ nicchāreti).
Atibhaginiputta
Atibhagini -- putta [ati + bh. -- p.] a very dear nephew J i.223.
Atibhāra
Atibhāra [ati + bhāra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati).
Atibhārita
Atibhārita (adj.) [ati + bhārita] too heavily weighed, over- loaded Vtn iv.47.
Atibhāriya
Atibhāriya (adj.) too serious DhA i.70.
Atibhuñjati
Atibhuñjati [ati + bhuñjati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153.
Atibhutta
Atibhutta (nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135.
Atibhoti
Atibhoti [ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J i.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti C.).
Atimaññati
Atimaññati [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dh 365, 366; J ii.347; Pv i.76 (˚issaŋ, v. l. ˚asiŋ = atikkamitvā avamaññiŋ PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609.
Atimaññanā
Atimaññanā (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122.
Atimanāpa
Atimanāpa (adj.) [ati + manāpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirūpa).
Atimanorama
Atimanorama (adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J i.60.
Atimanohara
Atimanohara (adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46.
Atimanda(ka)
Atimanda(ka) (adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488.
Atimamāyati
Atimamāyati [ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J ii.316.
Atimahant
Atimahant (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J i.221; PvA 75.
Atimāna
Atimāna [Sk. atimāna, ati + māna] high opinion (of one- self), pride, arrogance, conceit, M i.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1 233), 942, 968; J vi.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaññanā.
Atimānin
Atimānin (adj.) [fr. atimāna] D ii.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an˚) 244; KhA 236.
Atimāpeti
Atimāpeti [ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaŋ atimāpeti (with v. l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill D i.52 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DA i.159 (: pāṇaŋ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M i.404, 516; S iv.343; A iii.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v. l. pāteti); Dh 246 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DhA iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaŋ upacchindati).
Atimukhara
Atimukhara (adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chat- terbox J i.418; DhA ii.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid.
Atimuttaka
Atimuttaka [Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = M i.32; Miln 338.
Atimuduka
Atimuduka (adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J i.262.
Atiyakkha
Atiyakkha (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J vi.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka).
Atiyācaka
Atiyācaka (adj.) [ati + yācaka] one who asks too much Vin iii.147.
Atiyācanā
Atiyācanā (f.) [ati + yācanā] asking or begging too much Vin iii.147.
Atirattiŋ
Atirattiŋ (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidivā] late in the night, at midnight J i.436 (opp. atipabhāte).
Atirassa
Atirassa (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidīgha) Vin iv.7; J vi.457; VvA 103.
Atirājā
Atirājā [ati + rājā] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA ii.60; Miln 277.
Atiriccati
Atiriccati [ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126.
Atiritta
Atiritta (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an˚ applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301; iv.82 sq., 85.
Atiriva
Atiriva (ati -- r -- iva) see ativiya.
Atireka
Atireka (adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin i.255; J i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA ii.98. -- cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289. -- pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47.
Atirekatā
Atirekatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607.
Atirocati
Atirocati [ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to out- shine, to surpass in splendour D ii.208; Dh 59; Pv ii.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA i.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati); iii.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati).
Ativankin
Ativankin (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J i.160 (van- kâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.).
Ativaṇṇati
Ativaṇṇati [ati + vaṇṇati] to surpass, excel D ii.267.
Ativatta
Ativatta [pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava˚); Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); J v.84 (bhaya˚); Miln 146, 154.
Ativattati
Ativattati [ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaŋ nɔ); S ii.92 (saŋsāraŋ); iv.158 (id.) It 9 (saŋsāraŋ) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J i.58, 280; iv.134; vi.113, 114; PvA 276. -- pp. ativatta (q. v.).
Ativattar
Ativattar1 [Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vacati; cp. ativākya] one who insults or offends J v.266 (isīnaŋ ativattāro = dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.).
-- 21 --
Ativattar
Ativattar2 [Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vattati] one who over- comes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76).
Ativasa
Ativasa (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA ii.79).
Ativassati
Ativassati [ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin ii.240.
Ativākya
Ativākya (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (= aṭṭha -- anariyavohāra -- vasena pavattaŋ vītikkama -- vacanaŋ DhA iv.3); J vi.508.
Ativāta
Ativāta [ati + vāta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277.
Ativāyati
Ativāyati [ati + vāyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385).
Ativāha
Ativāha [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha] car- rying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character); J v.433. -- Cp. ativāhika.
Ativāhika
Ativāhika [fr. ativāha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J v.471, 472 (˚purisa).
Ativikāla
Ativikāla (adj.) [ati + vikāla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D i 108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DA i.277).
Ativijjhati
Ativijjhati [Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details M i.480; S v.226; A ii.178.
Ativiya
Ativiya (adv.) [Sk. atīva] = ati + iva, orig. "much -- like" like an excess = excessive -- ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q. v.); -- (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D ii.264 (v. l. SS. atīva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; <-> (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J i.61, 263; DhA ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139.
Ativisā
Ativisā (f.) [Sk. ativiṣā] N. of a plant Vin i.201; iv.35.
Ativissaṭṭha
Ativissaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + vissaṭṭha] too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J v.204.
Ativissāsika
Ativissāsika (adj.) [ati + vissāsika] very, or too confiden- tial J i.86.
Ativissuta
Ativissuta (adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473.
Ativeṭheti
Ativeṭheti [ati + veṣṭ, cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101; J v.452 ( -- ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.).
Ativela
Ativela (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. ˚ŋ a very long time; excessively D i.19 (= atikālaŋ aticiran ti attho DA i.113); M i.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J iii.103 = Nd1 504.
Atilīna
Atilīna (adj.) [ati + līna] too much attached to worldly matters S v.263.
Atilūkha
Atilūkha (adj.) [ati + lūkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409.
Atiloma
Atiloma (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J vi.457 (opp. aloma).
Atisañcara
Atisañcara (˚cāra?) [ati + sañcāra] wandering about too much Miln 277.
Atisaṇha
Atisaṇha (adj.) [ati + saṇha] too subtle DhA iii.326.
Atisanta
Atisanta (adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496.
Atisambādha
Atisambādha (adj.) [ati + sambādha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68; cp. atinīcaka. <-> f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow J i.7.
Atisaya
Atisaya [cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī] superiority, distinc- tion, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dāvs ii.62.
Atisayati
Atisayati [ati + śī] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Miln 336 (+ atikkamitvā).
Atisara
Atisara (adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J iv.6; cp. atisāra.
Atisarati
Atisarati [ati + sṛ] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); J v.70 and atisari J iv.6. <-> ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) D i.222; S iv.94; A i.145; v.226, 256; Sn 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.).
Atisāyaŋ
Atisāyaŋ (adv.) [ati + sāyaŋ] very late, late in the evening J v.94.
Atisāra
Atisāra [fr. ati + sṛ, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55 (sâtisāra), 326 (id.); S i.74; M iii.237; Sn 889 (atisāraŋ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J v.221 (dhamm˚), 379; DhA i.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara.
Atisithila
Atisithila (adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A iii.375.
Atisīta
Atisīta (adj.) [ati + sīta] too cold DhA ii.85.
Atisītala
Atisītala (adj.) [ati + sītala] very cold J iii.55.
Atihaṭṭha
Atihaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + haṭṭha] very pleased Sdhp 323.
Atiharati
Atiharati [ati + hṛ] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209; iv.264; S i.89; J i.292; v.347. <-> Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin ii.181; iii.18; Miln 66; DhA iv.77. <-> See also atihita.
Atihita
Atihita [ati + hṛ, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vīhi).
Atihīna
Atihīna (adj.) [ati + hīna] very poor or destitute A iv.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogāḷha).
Atihīḷeti
Atihīḷeti [ati + hīḍ] to despise J iv.331 (= atimaññati C.).
Atīta
Atīta (adj. -- n.) [Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atītaŋ addhānaŋ in the time which is past S iii.86; A iv.219; v.32. -- Pv ii.1212 (atītānaŋ, scil. attabhāvāuaŋ, pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. -- (b) nt. the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time J i.98 etc. atītaŋ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jātaka J i.213, 218, 221 etc. -- S i.5 (atītaŋ nânusocati); A iii.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. atītânāgate in past & future S ii.58; Sn 373; J vi.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atītɔ -- anāgata -- paccuppanna (this the usual order) D iii.100, 135; S ii.26, 110, 252; iii.19, 47, 187; iv.4 sq.; 151 sq.; A i.264 sq., 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata,
-- 22 --
e. g. PvA 100. -- 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S i.97 (maraṇaŋ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera -- bhaya˚); A ii.21; iii.346 (sabbasaŋyojana˚); Sn 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaŋ atīta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) -- 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhammaŋ). -- aŋsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho ThA 233) D ii.222; iii.275; Th 2, 314. -- ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041.
Atīradassin
Atīradassin (adj. -- n.) [a + tīra + dassin] not seeing the shore J i.46; vi.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) J v.75 (nāvā). Cp. D i 222.
Atīva
Atīva (indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J ii.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc.
Ato
Ato (adv.) [Sk. ataḥ] hence, now, therefore S i.15; M i.498; Miln 87; J v.398 (= tato C.).
Atoṇa
Atoṇa [etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191.
Atta
Atta1 [ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d -- to; cp. Sk. ātta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta -- daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S i.236; iv.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Attaŋ pahāya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd i.82, 90, 107, 352; ii.271; SnA 523; DhA iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaŋ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91).
Atta
Atta2 see attan.
Atta
Atta3 [Sk. akta, pp. of añjati] see upatta.
Attan
Attan (m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic ātman, not to Gr. a)\nemos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm]. -- I. Inflection. (1) of attan -- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaŋ D i.13, 185; S i.24; Sn 132, 451. -- gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). -- instr. abl. attanā S i.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA ii.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attanā see below iii.1 C. -- loc. attani S v.177; A i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181; M i.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an˚). -- (2) of atta -- (a -- stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaŋ Dh 379. -- instr. attena S iv.54. -- abl. attato S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336. Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251 -- 255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D i.31. Seven other theories D i.34. Three others D i.186/7. A ʻ soul ʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S iv.54 = Kvu 67; Vin i.14; M i.138. See also M i.233; iii.265, 271; S ii.17, 109; iii.135; A i.284; ii.164, 171; v.188; S iv.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma, puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma -- rūpa. 2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. S i.71, 169; iii.120; A i.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaŋ S i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A i.89; Sn 709. Acc. attaŋ Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A i.149; iii.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attanā S i.57 = Dh 66; S i.75; ii.68; A i.53; iii.211; iv.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S iv.307; v.354; A i.297; ii.99, 218; iii.81; J i.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D ii.147; ˚catuttha with himself as fourth M i.393; A iii.36; ˚pañcama Dpvs viii.2; ˚sattama J i.233; ˚aṭṭhama VvA 149 (as atta -- naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Miln 291. anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca -- (1) as noun: S iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin); A ii.52 = Ps ii.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā, the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dh 279; Ps ii.37, 45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaŋ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taŋ anattā); DhA iii. 406 (˚lakkhaṇa). -- (2) as adj. (pred.): S iv.152 sq.; S iv.166; S iv.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin i.13 = S iii.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S iii.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86; S iii.133; iv.28, 401. -- attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J iv.56, 96; otherwise as atta -- d -- attha, e. g. Sn 284. -- atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. -- âdhipaka master of oneself, self -- mastered A i.150. -- adhipateyya selfdependence, self -- reliance, independence A i.147. -- âdhīna independent D i.72. -- ânudiṭṭhi speculation about souls S iii.185; iv.148; A iii.447; Sn 1119; Ps i.143; Vbh 368; Miln 146. -- ânuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dh 209; DhA iii.275. -- ânuvāda blaming oneself A ii.121; Vbh 376. -- uññā self -- humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att -- avaññā). -- uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 (= attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144. -- kata self -- made S i.134 (opp. para˚). -- kāma love of self A ii.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S i.75. -- kāra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahaŋkāra) D i.53 (opp. para˚); A iii 337 (id.) DA i.160; as nt. at J v.401 in the sense of service (self -- doing", slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -- kilamatha self -- mortification D iii.113; S iv.330; v.421; M iii.230. -- garahin self -- censuring Sn 778. -- gutta selfguarded Dh 379. -- gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, self -- care A ii.72. -- ghañña self -- destruction Dh 164. -- ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (pāpa). -- ñū knowing oneself A iv.113, cp. D iii.252. -- (n) tapa self -- mortifying, self -- vexing D iii.232 = A ii.205 (opp. paran˚); M i.341, 411; ii.159; Pug 55, 56. -- daṇḍa see atta1. -- danta selfrestrained, self -- controlled Dh 104, 322. -- diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA 523, 527. -- dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña˚) D ii.100 = iii.42; S v.154; Sn 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaŋ katvā SnA 416). -- paccakkha only in instr. ˚ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J v.119. -- paccakkhika eye -- witness J v.119. -- paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94, 96. -- paṭilābha acquisition of a personality D i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -- paritāpana self -- chastisement, mortification D iii.232 = A ii.205; M i.341; PvA 18, 30. -- parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110. -- paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353. -- bhāva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. Ś i.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms); S v.442 (bodily appearance); A i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature); ii.17 (creature); DhA ii.64, 69 (appearance); SnA 132 (personality). -- (2) life, rebirth A i.134 sq.; iii.412;
-- 23 --
DhA ii.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ŋ pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185; iii.105; D iii.231; M iii.46; S ii.255, 272, 283; iii.144; A ii.159, 188; iii.122 sq. -- (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J i.61. -- rūpa "of the form of self", self -- like only in instr. ˚ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S iv.97; A ii.120. -- vadha self -- destruction S ii.241; A ii.73. -- vāda theory of (a persistent) soul D iii.230; M i.66; D ii.58; S ii.3, 245 sq.; iii.103, 165, 203; iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps i.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavādic" doctrine see Index to Saŋyutta Nikāya. -- vyābādha personal harm or distress self -- suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para˚) M i 369; S iv.339 = A i.157; A ii.179. -- vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. -- sañcetanā self -- perception, self -- consciousness (opp. para˚) D iii.231; A ii.159. -- sambhava originating from one's self S i.70; A iv.312; Dh 161 (pāpa); Th 1, 260. -- sambhūta arisen from oneself Sn 272. -- sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A ii.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132. -- saraṇa see ˚dipa. -- sukha happiness of oneself, self -- success Dpvs i.66, cp. ii.11. -- hita personal welfare one's own good (opp. para˚) D iii.233; A ii.95 sq. -- hetu for one's own sake, out of self -- consideration Sn 122; Dh 328.
Attaniya
Attaniya (adj.) [from attā] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul -- like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M i.138 = Kvu 67; M i.297; ii.263; S iii.78 (yaŋ kho anattaniyaŋ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd2 680 F; S iv.82 = iii.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S iv.168; v.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff.
Attamana
Attamana [atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka -- mano DA i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manatā mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D i.3, 90 (an˚); ii.14; A iii.337, 343; iv.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upaṭṭhita -- satt DhA iv.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (= tuṭṭha -- mano haṭṭha -- mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an˚); Miln 18; DA i.52; DhA i.89 (an˚ -- dhātuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano).
Attamanatā
Attamanatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M i.114; A i.276; iv.62; Pug 18 (an˚); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an˚); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an˚).
Attāṇa
Attāṇa (adj.) [a + tāṇa] without shelter or protection J i.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285.
Attha
Attha1 (also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from ṛ, arti & ṛṇoti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well -- being M i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S iv.94 (id.); S i.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A ii.46 (atthassa patti); S i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (id.); iv.347 (˚ŋ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying, cp. attha -- bhañjanaka); A i.61 (˚ŋ anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); A v.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. attā better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param˚ gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituŋ SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61); PvA 30 (atthaŋ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena). -- dat. atthāya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e. g. D iii.211 sq.; It 79. -- Kh viii.1 (to my benefit); Pv i.43 (= upakārāya PvA 18), ii.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6. Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J i.256 (= vaḍḍhiŋ C.); iii.394 (id.); Pv iv.14 (= dhanaŋ PvA 219). -- Often as -- ˚: att˚ , one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par˚ and ubhay˚ (see above) S ii.29; v.121; A i.158, 216; iii.63 sq.; iv.134; Sn 75 (att-aṭṭha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta -- d -- attha); uttam˚ the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA iv.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param˚ id. Nd2 26; sad˚ one's own weal D ii.141; M i.4; S ii.29; v.145; A i.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the meaning, in spirit"? see sāttha) D i.62; S v.352; A ii.147; iii.152; Nd2 316. -- 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need); J i.254; iii.126, 281; iv.1; DhA i.398 (nɔ atthi etehɔ attho I have no use for them); VvA 250; PvA 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). -- 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh -- uppatti and aṭṭha -- kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4. -- S iii.93 (atthaŋ vibhajati explain the sense); A i.23 (id.), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ŋ ācikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 (˚ŋ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (˚ŋ akkhāti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); DhA ii.82; iii.175; KhA 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 (˚ŋ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA i.65; DhA iv.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. -- 4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A i.69; v.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca SnA 333); It 84 (duṭṭho atthaŋ na jānāti dhammaŋ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhāsitatthañ cɔ eva desanādhammañ ca); J ii.353; vi.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yenɔ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attanā), J i.411 (atthaŋ vā kāraṇaŋ vā reason and cause); DhA ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(; PvA 11 (ayaŋ hɔ ettha attho this is the reason why). -- 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S ii.36 (ekena -- padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J i.151 (taŋ atthaŋ the matter); ii.160 (imaŋ a. this); vi.289 (taŋ atthaŋ pakāsento); PvA 6 (taŋ atthaŋ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaŋ atthaŋ what had been said), 82 (id.). -- (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa atthaŋ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. -- 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the
-- 24 --
sake of, in order to, for J i.254 dhanɔ atthāya for wealth, kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54; DhA ii.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. -- (b) acc. atthaŋ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (id.); i.253; ii.128; Dpvs vi.79; DhA i.397; PvA 32 (dassan˚ in order to see), 78, 167, etc. -- (c) abl. atthā J iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.). -- (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc. anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S i.103; ii.196 (anatthāya saŋvattati); A iv.96 (˚ŋ adhipajjati) It 84 (˚janano doso ill -- will brings discomfort); J i.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA ii.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. -- 2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A v.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka DhA ii.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahitaŋ). -- akkhāyin showing what is profitable D iii.187. -- attha riches J vi.290 (= atthabhūtaŋ atthaŋ C.). -- antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma -- dhara (q. v.). -- abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S i.87 (see abhisamaya). -- uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs v.37. -- upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma -- savanna) M iii.175; A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126. -- uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J i.89; DA i.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pāḷito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. -- kāma (adj.) (a) well -- wishing, a well -- wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma, e. g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) S i.140, 197, 201 sq.; A iii.143; D iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakāmo); J i.241; Pv iv.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an˚). <-> (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S i.44; PvA 112. <-> -- kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J v.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in N. of Com. -- kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149; Miln 321. -- karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aṭṭa˚) D ii.20; S i.74 (judgment hall?). -- kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A ii.230. -- kāmin = ˚kāma, well -- wishing Sn 986 (devatā atthakāminī). -- kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain D iii.186. -- kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). -- cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S i.23 (narānaŋ = "working out man's salvation"). -- caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D i.107 (= hitakāraka DA i.276); J ii.87; iii.326; iv.230; vi.369. -- cariyā useful conduct or behaviour D iii.152, 190, 232; A ii.32, 248; iv.219, 364. -- ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) D iii.252; A iii.148; iv.113 sq. -- dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitânupassin SnA 373). -- dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) J vi.286 (but expld. by C. as "saṇha -- sukhuma -- pañña" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -- desanā interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm˚). -- dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J ii.105; DhA ii.71. -- pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A ii.189; iii.356; Dh 100. -- paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma˚ of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps i.132; ii.150; Vbh 293 sq. -- paṭisaŋvedin experiencing good D iii.241 (+ dhamma˚); A i.151; iii.21. -- baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. -- bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA iii.356 (paresaŋ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -- majjha of beautiful waist J v.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). -- rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd2 466; Ps ii.88, 89. -- vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D ii.285; M i.464; ii.120; iii.150; S ii.202; iii.93; iv.303; v.224; A i.61, 77, 98; ii.240; iii.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kāraṇa DhA iii.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. -- vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. -- vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. -- vādin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla˚ bhūta˚ dhamma˚ D i.4; iii.175; A i.204; ii.22, 209; Pug 58; DA i.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). -- saŋvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis PvA 1. -- saŋhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D i.189; S ii.223; iv.330; v.417; A iii.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena saŋhitaŋ SnA 500); Pug 58. -- sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps i.105. -- siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J i.402; PvA 63.
Attha
Attha2 (nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as ˚ -- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 (= vināsaŋ natthibhāvaŋ gacchati DhA iii.324), 384 (= parikkhayaŋ gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi -- sesāya nibbāna -- dhātuyā nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. -- atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. -- atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D i.34, 37, 183; S iv.327; A iii.326; Ps ii.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. -- atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J i.101 (suriyass' atthagamanā at sunset) DA i.95 (= ogamana). -- attha -- gāmin, in phrase udayɔ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. -- atthaŋ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). -- Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA i.86; iii.127. -- Cp. also abbhattha.
Attha
Attha3 pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.).
Atthata
Atthata [pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with ( -- ˚) Vin i.265; iv.287; v.172 (also ˚an); A iii.50; PvA 141.
Atthatta
Atthatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 ( -- ˚).
Atthara
Atthara [fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D i.7.
Attharaka
Attharaka [= atthara] a covering J i.9; DA i.87. -- f. ˚ikā a layer J i.9; v.280.
Attharaṇa
Attharaṇa (nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291; A ii.56; iii.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22.
Attharati
Attharati [ā + stṛ] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254; v.172; J i.199; v.113; vi.428; Dh i.272. -- pp. atthata (q. v.). -- Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread J v.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69.
-- 25 --
Atthavant
Atthavant (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S i.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172.
Atthāra
Atthāra [cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin v.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin ii.87 (covering).
Atthi
Atthi [Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/ -- e)sti/; Lat. sum -- est; Goth. im -- ist; Ags. eom -- is E. am -- is] to be, to exist. <-> Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J i.151; iii.55, and amhi M i.429; Sn 694; J ii.153; Pv i.102; ii.82. <-> 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J ii.160 (ɔsi); iii.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. -- 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J i.278. Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e. g. J i.280; ii.2; iii.55. -- 1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J ii.128. 2nd pl. attha J ii.128; PvA 39, 74 (āgatɔ attha you have come). <-> 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= saŋvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J ii.353; PvA 7, 22 -- Imper. atthu Sn 340; J i.59; iii.26. -- Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv ii.88, and assaŋ [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaŋ PvA 64). -- 2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv ii.87. -- 3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] D ii.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); J i.262; PvA 13, and assa D i.135, 196; ii.154; A v.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv ii.324; 924. -- 1st pl. assu PvA 27. <-> 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuŋ PvA 231). -- Aor. 1st sg. āsiŋ [Sk. āsaŋ] Sn 284; Pv i.21 (= ahosiŋ PvA 10); ii.34 (= ahosiŋ PvA 83). -- 3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Sn 994. -- 3rd āsuŋ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). <-> Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J i.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J i.150 (loc. evaŋ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q. v.) J i.266; iv.138. -- bhāva state of being, existence, being J i.222, 290; ii.415; DhA ii.5; iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not).
Atthika
Atthika (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D i.55 (˚vāda); M ii.212 (aṭṭhita); A iii.219 sq. (idaŋ atthikaŋ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaŋ, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (aṭṭhita; Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a -- ṭhita); J v.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pug A v.4 by kalyāṇāya). -- 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of ( -- ˚), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A ii.199 (uday˚ desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth); J i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA i.70 (atthikā those who like to). -- anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J v.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.). -- bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A v.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120.
Atthikavant
Atthikavant (adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D i.90 (atthikaŋ assa atthī ti DA i.255).
Atthitā
Atthitā (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva] state of being, existence, being, reality M i.486; S ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135; J v.110 (kassaci atthitaŋ vā natthitaŋ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. -- Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so DhA iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143.
Atthin
Atthin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant˚, vād˚.
Atthiya
Atthiya (adj.) ( -- ˚) [= atthika] having a purpose or end S iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?); A v.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att˚ having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiyaŋ on account of what).
Atra
Atra (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J i.414 = iv.5 (in expln. of atriccha).
Atraja
Atraja (adj.) [Sk. *ātma -- ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika p. Nd2 448. -- J i.135; iii.103 = Nd1 504; J iii.181; v.465; vi.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57.
Atriccha
Atriccha (adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J i.414 = iv.4; iii.206.
Atricchā
Atricchā (f.) [Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a. -- tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J iv.5, 327.
Atricchatā
Atricchatā (f.) [see atricchā] excessive lust J. iii.222.
Atha
Atha (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D ii.2; iii.152, 199 (athâparaŋ etad avoca); M i.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athâparaŋ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J ii.158; Pv ii.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. -- 2. after negative clauses: but M i.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; D i.141, 167, 174; A v.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na -- atha kho na neither -- nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J i.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv i.41; ii.14. athā vā pi Sn 917, 921.
Athabbaṇa
Athabbaṇa [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA i.247 = SnA 447 (˚veda). -- (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa= sahatthivejja, with the elephant -- healer or doctor). See also āthabbaṇa.
Atho
Atho (indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adver- sative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S i.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J i.83; ii.185; iv.495; It 106; Kh viii.7; Pv iv.315; PvA 251 (atho ti nipātamattaŋ avadhāraṇ -- atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv ii.320; KhA 166.
Ada (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to ad, see adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.] eating S iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); J ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.).
Adaka
Adaka (adj.) = ada J v.91 (purisâdaka man -- eater).
Adana
Adana (nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J v.374 (v.l. modana).
Adasaka
Adasaka (adj.) see dasā.
Adāsa
Adāsa [prob. = adaŋsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J iv.466.
-- 26 --
Adiṭṭhā
Adiṭṭhā [a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J iv.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); v.219.
Adinna
Adinna (pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn' ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa -- sīla see sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī); D i.4 (= parassa haraṇaŋ theyyaŋ corikā ti vuttaŋ hoti DA i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M i.361; It 63; Kh ii., cp. KhA 26. -- adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin i.85; D i.138; Sdhp 78.
Adu
Adu (or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduŋ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = DhA i.31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. ādu); J v.330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaŋ karohī ti). See also ādu.
Aduŋ
Aduŋ nt. of pron. asu.
Adūsaka
Adūsaka (adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J v.143 (= nirapa- rādha C.); vi.84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn 312.
Adūsiya
Adūsiya = adūsaka J v.220 (= anaparādha C.).
Adeti
Adeti [Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J v.31, 92, 197, 496; vi.106. pot. adeyya J v.107, 392, 493.
Adda
Adda1 [cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J i.244 (˚singivera).
Adda & Addā
Adda2 & Addā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a.
Adda
Adda3 (adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J iv.353; vi.309; Miln 346. -- âvalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S iv.187 (kūṭāgāra); M i.86=Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo). See also addha2. The reading allâvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered."
Addakkhi
Addakkhi 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b.
Addasā
Addasā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a.
Addā & Addāyanā
Addā & Addāyanā at Vbh 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya.
Addāyate
Addāyate [v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J iv.351. See also allīyati.
Addi
Addi [Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs ii.13.
Addita
Addita (pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J i.21; ii.407; iii.261; iv.295; v.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281.
Addha
Addha1 (num.) [= aḍḍha, q. v.] one half, half (˚ -- ) D i.166 (˚māsika); A ii.160 (˚māsa); J i.59 (˚yojana); iii. 189 (˚māsa).
Addha
Addha2 (adj.) [= adda3, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaŋ attānaŋ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha).
Addhan
Addhan (in cpds. addha˚) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. -- Cases: nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaŋ, loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J iv.384 = v.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. ˚addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by ākāsa -- patha -- sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha -- pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala -- magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half -- way", i. e. on full -- moon -- day. He rejects the expln. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D iii.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ (acc.) a very long time A ii.1, 10 (dighaŋ addhānaŋ saŋsāraŋ); Sn 740 (dīghaŋ addhāna saŋsāra); Dh 207 (dīghaŋ addhāna socati); J i.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā S i.78; A ii.118; PvA 28. -- āyu duration of life A ii.66 (dīghaŋ ˚ŋ a long lifetime. -- gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin ii.188; D i.48 (cp. DA i.143); M i.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. -- gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S i.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J iii.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302.
Addhā
Addhā (adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D i.143; J i.19 (a. ahaŋ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaŋ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; iii.340; v.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps ii.21 (ekaŋsa -- vacanaŋ nissaŋsaya -- vacanaŋ etc.) addhā hi J iv. 399; Pv iv.15 2.
Addhaneyya
Addhaneyya (adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting J v.507 (an˚).
Addhaniya
Addhaniya (adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. <-> 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D iii.211; J i.393 (an˚) vi.71. See also addhaneyya.
Addhariya
Addhariya [Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacri- ficing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D i.237 (brāhmaṇa).
Addhāna
Addhāna (nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhānaŋ = ciraŋ). Usually in phrase atītaŋ (anāgataŋ etc.) addhānaŋ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D i.200; S i.140; A v.32; Miln 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aŋ); PvA 75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaŋ addhānaŋ Pv i.105. Also in phrase addhānaŋ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S iv.110; J ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C). -- daratha exhaustion from travelling DA i.287. -- magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D i.1, 73, 79; M i.276 (kantār˚); DA i.35 (interpreted as "addhayojanaŋ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha -- yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -- parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. -- vemattatā difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ āyuvemattatā).
-- 27 --
Addhika
Addhika [fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA i.298 (= pathāvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J i.6 (v. l. ˚iddhika 262; DhA ii.26.
Addhita
Addhita at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB).
Addhin
Addhin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh 90.
Addhuva
Addhuva see dhuva.
Adrūbhaka
Adrūbhaka see dubbha.
Advejjhatā
Advejjhatā see dvejjhatā.
Adha˚
Adha˚ in cpds. like adhagga see under adho.
Adhamma
Adhamma see dhamma.
Adhama
Adhama (adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (narâdhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dh 78 (purisa˚); J iii.151 (miga˚); v.394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387.
Adhara
Adhara (adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip).
Adhi
Adhi [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a˚ + suffix -- dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n -- qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to]. A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman "this self here" (see C 1 b). B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.<-> cpd., like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi + ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super" -- (adhideva a super -- god, cp. ati -- deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (ajjhāvasati "to dwell here -- in" = āvasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). -- In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far -- fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. Cp. also ati iv. C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; ˚kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention; ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon; ˚vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur -- nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana "lying in", inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi -- jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta "in an extreme measure", ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship; ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best; ˚sīla thorough character or morality. -- (b) with verbs (in double pref. -- cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination); ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati "to look all along over" = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire. Note. The contracted (assimilation -- )form of adhi before vowels is ajjh -- (q. v.).
Adhika
Adhika (adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extra- ordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA i.141, 222; Dpvs v.32 (an˚); DhA iii.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA ii.7; iii.176; nt. ˚ŋ as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimattaŋ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun -- determination), e. g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana -- sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J i.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J v.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa -- satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sâdhika.
Adhikata
Adhikata (adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. com- missioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA 124). -- 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma˚). <-> 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+ vimātijāta).
Adhikaraṇa
Adhikaraṇa (nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, super- vision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. <-> 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D ii.59 ( -- ˚: in consequence of); S ii.41; v.19. Esp. acc. ˚ŋ as adv. ( -- ˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaŋ); S iv.339 (rāga˚); Miln 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaŋ why, on account of what J iv.4 (= kiŋkāraṇaŋ) yatvâdhikaraṇaŋ (yato + adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D i.70 = A i.113 = ii.16 = D iii.225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta˚ kicca˚ "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin ii.88; iii.164; iv.126, 238; M ii.247. <-> Often ref.: Vin ii.74; S iv.63 = v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.); A i.53 (case), 79; ii.239 (vūpasanta); v.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaŋ karoti to raise a dispute M i.122 ˚ŋ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261. -- kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (f. ˚ikā); A iii.252. -- samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D iii.254; M ii.247; A i.99; iv.144.
Adhikaraṇika
Adhikaraṇika [fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A v.164, 167.
Adhikaraṇī
Adhikaraṇī (f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J iii.285; Dāvs iii.16 sq.; DhsA 263.
Adhikāra
Adhikāra [cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, adminis- tration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55; J i.56;
-- 28 --
vi.251; Miln 60, 115, 165; PvA 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927); DhA ii.41.
Adhikārika
Adhikārika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Bdhgh).
Adhikuṭṭanā
Adhikuṭṭanā (f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executi- oner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA 287.
Adhikusala
Adhikusala (adj.) [adhi + kusala] in ˚ā dhammā "items of higher righteousness" D iii.145.
Adhikodhita
Adhikodhita (adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J v.117.
Adhigacchati
Adhigacchati [adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D i.229 (vivesaŋ) M i.140 (anvesaŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find); S i.22 (Nibbānaŋ); ii.278 (id.); A i.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santiŋ); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv i.74 (nibbutiŋ = labhati PvA 37); iii.710 (amataŋ padaŋ). opt. adhigaccheyya D i.224 (kusalaŋ dhammaŋ); M i.114 (madhu -- piṇḍikaŋ); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. ˚gantvā D i.224; J i.45 (ānisaŋse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA 60). grd. ˚gantabba It 104 (nibbāna). cond. ˚gacchissaŋ Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū J i.256 (vyasanaŋ) & ajjhāgamuŋ S i.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. <-> pp. adhigata (q. v.).
Adhigaṇhāti
Adhigaṇhāti [adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S i.87 = DA i.32; D iii.146; S iv.275; A iii.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv ii.962 = DhA iii.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It 20. -- pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.).
Adhigata
Adhigata [pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, con- quered, attained, found J i.374; VvA 135.
Adhigatavant
Adhigatavant (adj. -- n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbānaŋ).
Adhigama
Adhigama [fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D iii.255; S ii.139; A ii.148; iv.22, 332; v.194; J i.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207.
Adhigameti
Adhigameti [adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30.
Adhiggahīta
Adhiggahīta [pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; over- powered, taken by (instr.), possessed J iii.427 (= anuggahīta C.); v.102; vi.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98.
Adhiciṇṇa
Adhiciṇṇa only at S iii.12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa.
Adhicitta
Adhicitta (nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70; D iii.219; M i.451; A i.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (˚sikkhā); Dh 185 (= aṭṭha -- samāpattisankhāta adhika -- citta DhA iii.238).
Adhiceto
Adhiceto (adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty -- minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = DhA iii.384.
Adhicca
Adhicca1 [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J iii.218, 327 = iv.301; iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); vi.213; Miln 164.
Adhicca
Adhicca2 (˚ -- ) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: ˚āpattika guilty without intention M i.443; ˚uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J v.171 = vi.315 (expld. at J v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena) ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D i.28 = Ud 69; D iii.33, 138; S ii.22 -- 23 (sukhadukkhaŋ); A iii.440 (id.); Ps i.155; DA i.118 (= akāraṇa˚).
Adhicca
Adhicca3 (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S v.457.
Adhijeguccha
Adhijeguccha (nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D i.174, 176.
Adhiṭṭhaka
Adhiṭṭhaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J v.427 (surā˚).
Adhiṭṭhāti
Adhiṭṭhāti (adhiṭṭhahati) [Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J iii.278 (ger. ˚āya); DhA iv.183 (ger. ˚hitvā); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. ˚āhi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin i.115 (inf. ˚ṭhātuŋ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. ˚ṭhātabba) J i.80 (aor. ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (v. l. ati˚ C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA i.34; iv.201 (ger. ˚hitvā); PvA 23 (aor. ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S ii.17; A i.115 sq.; J i.50; PvA 209 (ger. ˚ṭhāya). -- pp. adhiṭṭhita (q. v.).
Adhiṭṭhāna
Adhiṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self -- determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); J i.23; v.174; Ps i.108; ii.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M i.136; iii.31, 240; S ii.17; iii.10, 135, 194. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) applying oneself to, bent on A iii.363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devānaŋ); PvA 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode].
Adhiṭṭhāyaka
Adhiṭṭhāyaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚ Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta˚ DhA i.393.
Adhiṭṭhita
Adhiṭṭhita (adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaŋ ṭhānaŋ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA 269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin i.57; S v.278 (svɔâdhiṭṭhita); PvA 141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariyaŋ).
Adhideva
Adhideva [adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M ii.132; A iv.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva.
Adhipa
Adhipa [Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J ii.369; iii.324; v.393; Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52; VvA 314.
Adhipaka
Adhipaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A i.150 (atta˚ loka˚ dhamma˚).
Adhipajjati
Adhipajjati [adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A iv.96 (anatthaŋ); pp. adhipanna.
Adhipaññā
Adhipaññā (f.) [adhi + paññā] higher wisdom or know- ledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219 (˚sikkhā); A i.240; ii.92 sq., 239; iii.106 sq., 327; iv.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps i.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11, 244; Pug 61.
-- 29 --
Adhipatati
Adhipatati [adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J iv.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaŋ atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta.
Adhipatana
Adhipatana (nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271.
Adhipati
Adhipati (n. -- adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J iv.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA i.36 (= seṭṭha). <-> 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chandaŋ adhipatiŋ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka˚ heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60.
Adhipateyya
Adhipateyya (nt.) A i.147; iii 33 = S iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.
Adhipatthita
Adhipatthita [pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D i.120.
Adhipanna
Adhipanna [cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by ( -- ˚), a victim of (c. loc.) S i.72, Th 2, 345 (kāmesu); Sn 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J iii.38, 369; iv.396; v.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27.
Adhipāṭimokkha
Adhipāṭimokkha (nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ +); M ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva).
Adhipāta
Adhipāta1 [adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚ head -- splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 ˚vipāta).
Adhipāta
Adhipāta2 [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taŋkāraṇā a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā).
Adhipatikā
Adhipatikā (f.) [fr. adhipāta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipāta2).
Adhipāteti
Adhipāteti [Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J iv.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti).
Adhippagharati
Adhippagharati [adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284.
Adhippāgā
Adhippāgā 3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J v.59.
Adhippāya
Adhippāya [adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish desire S i.124; v.108; A ii.81; iii.363 (bhoga˚); v.65; J i.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. ( -- ˚) desiring PvA 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). -- adhippāyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (kīḷ for fun).
Adhippāyosa
Adhippāyosa [adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, pe- culiarity, special meaning M i 46; S iii.66; iv.208; A i.267; iv.158; v.48 sq.
Adhippeta
Adhippeta [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D i.120; ii.236; VvA 312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J iii.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164.
Adhippetatta
Adhippetatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52.
Adhibādheti
Adhibādheti [adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti).
Adhibrahmā
Adhibrahmā [adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M ii.132.
Adhibhavati
Adhibhavati [adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S iv.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A v.248, 282 (˚bhoti); J ii.336; V.30. -- aor. adhibhavi J ii.80. 3. pl. adhibhaŋsu S iv.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.).
Adhibhāsati
Adhibhāsati [adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195; S i.103; iv.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90.
Adhibhū
Adhibhū (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn 684 (miga˚; v. l. abhi˚).
Adhibhūta
Adhibhūta [cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S iv.186.
Adhimatta
Adhimatta (adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. ˚ŋ extremely M i.152, 243; S iv. 160; A ii.150; iv.241; J i.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv ii.36 (= adhikataraŋ PvA 86); DhA ii.85; cp. PvA 281.
Adhimattata
Adhimattata (nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A ii.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200).
Adhimana
Adhimana (n. -- adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). <-> (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J iv.433 (= pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; v. l. ˚māna).
Adhimāna
Adhimāna [adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M ii.252; A v.162 sq.
Adhimānika
Adhimānika (adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A v.162, 169, 317; DhA iii.111.
Adhimuccati
Adhimuccati [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S iii.225; iv.185; A iv.24, 145 sq., 460; v.17; Pug 63. <-> 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin i.209 (aor. ˚mucci); D i.106; S i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya); It 43; DA i.275. <-> 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA i.214, 316; J iv.272; v.103; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. <-> 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J iv.172; v.103, 429; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. <-> pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S v.409 (cittaŋ devesu a.).
Adhimuccana
Adhimuccana (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190.
Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita
Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy -- form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M ii.223 (an˚); S i.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. ˚muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, v. l. ˚muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.
Adhimuccitar
Adhimuccitar [n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A iii.165 (v. l. ˚mucchitā).
Adhimutta
Adhimutta (adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś i.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon ( -- ˚ or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183; A v.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (˚citta); Nd2 33; J i.370 (dān˚) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dān˚).
Adhimutti
Adhimutti (f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D i.174; A v.36; Ps i.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA i.44, 103; Sdhp 378.
-- 30 --
Adhimuttika
Adhimuttika (adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S ii.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D i.2.
Adhimokkha
Adhimokkha [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M iii.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.
Adhiyita
Adhiyita see adhīyati.
Adhiroha
Adhiroha [fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur˚ hard to ascend Miln 322.
Adhivacana
Adhivacana (nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrî- bute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D ii.62; M i.113, 144, 460; A ii.70, 124; iii.310; iv.89, 285, 340; It 15, 114; Sn p. 218; J i.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340. -- patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D ii.68; S iii.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51.
Adhivattati
Adhivattati [adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S i.101; A ii.32.
Adhivattha
Adhivattha (adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin i.28; S i.197; J i.223; ii.385; iii.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J vi.370.
Adhivara
Adhivara (adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an˚ unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiṭṭha).
Adhivāsa
Adhivāsa [fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to hold out Th 1, 111.
Adhivāsaka
Adhivāsaka (& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agree- able, enduring, patient Vin iv.130; M i.10, 526; A ii.118; iii.163; v.132; J iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77.
Adhivāsana
Adhivāsana (nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A iii.31; DhA i.33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M i.10; J ii.237; iii.263; iv.307; v.174.
Adhivāsanatā
Adhivāsanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an˚).
Adhivāseti
Adhivāseti [Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J i.254; ii.352; iii.277. -- 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D ii.128, 157; J i.46; iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17; D i.109 (cp. DA i.277); S iv.76; DhA i.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J i.254.
Adhivāha
Adhivāha [fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S iv.70 (dukkha˚); A i.6; Th 1, 494.
Adhivāhana
Adhivāhana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. ˚ī Th 1, 519.
Adhivimuttatta
Adhivimuttatta (nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J v.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. ˚muttata).
Adhivimokkhatta
Adhivimokkhatta (nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261.
Adhivutti
Adhivutti (f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhi- vadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti -- p. at all passages) D i.13 (expld. by adhivacana -- pada DA i.103); M ii.228; A v.36.
Adhivuttha
Adhivuttha see adhivattha.
Adhisayana
Adhisayana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (mañcaŋ).
Adhisayita
Adhisayita [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; S iii.153.
Adhisīla
Adhisīla (nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta -- sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisïla˚ Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219; A iii.133; iv.25; DhA i.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla.
Adhiseti
Adhiseti [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita.
Adhīna
Adhīna (adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D i.72 (atta˚ & para˚ ); J iv.112; DA i.217; also written ādhīna J v.350. See also under para.
Adhīyati
Adhīyati & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270; S i.202 (dhammapadāni); J iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458; DhA iii.446 (adhīyassu). -- ger. adhīyitvā J iv.75; adhiyānaŋ J v.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D i.96.
Adhunā
Adhunā (adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D ii.208; Vin ii.185 (kālakata); Miln 155; Dāvs ii.94. -- āgata a new comer M i.457; J ii.105. -- âbhisitta newly or just anointed D ii.227. -- uppanna just arisen D ii.208, 221.
Adhura
Adhura (nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J iv.241.
Adho
Adho (adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher -- ; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaŋ "above" and tiriyaŋ "across", describing the 3 dimensions. -- uddhaŋ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaŋ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167; with uddhaŋ & tiriyaŋ at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaŋ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh˚. -- akkhaka beneath the collar -- bone Vin iv.213. -- agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh˚ expld. by uparima -- danta C.). -- kata turned down, or upside down J i.20; vi.298. -- gata gone by, past. Adv. ˚ŋ since (cp. uddhaŋ adv. later or after) J vi.187 (ito māsaŋ adhogataŋ since one month ago). -- gala (so read for T. udho˚) down the throat PvA 104. -- mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; M i.132, 234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha VvA 78). -- bhāga the lower part (of the body) M i.473; DhA i.148. -- virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha˚ of an emetic) D i.12; DA i.98 (= adho dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ); DhsA 404. -- sākhaŋ (+ uddhamūlaŋ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA i.75. -- sira (adj.) head downward J iv.194. -- siraŋ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaŋsiraŋ) J vi.298 (= siraŋ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -- sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J i.233; v.472 (˚ka).
An -- form of the neg. prefix a -- before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ see the positive.
Ana
Ana -- negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts ii.113.
Anajjhiṭṭha
Anajjhiṭṭha (adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, un- asked Vin i.113; Pv i.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J iii.165 has anavhāta; Th 2, 129 ayācita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta).
Anaṭi
Anaṭi [An, Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA i.124 (in def. of bāla); DA i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa.
Anabhāva
Anabhāva [ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaŋ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at S ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M i.487; S iv.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A i.135, of evil passions A i.137, 184, 218; ii.214 of pride A ii.41,
-- 31 --
of craving A ii.249, of the bonds A iv.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D iii.326) and in the Iti -- vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaŋ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd i.90; and Nd2 under pahīna.
Anabbhita
Anabbhita (adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242; Pv i.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has ayācita & at J iii.165 anavhāta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita).
Anabhuṇṇatatā
Anabhuṇṇatatā (f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156.
Anabhijjhā
Anabhijjhā (f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D iii.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277.
Anabhijjhālū
Anabhijjhālū (adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D iii.82; Pug 40.
Anabhijjhita
Anabhijjhita (adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201).
Anabhinandati
Anabhinandati etc. see abhi˚ etc.
Anabhirata
Anabhirata (adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J i.61 (naccâdisu).
Anabhirati
Anabhirati (f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatis- faction, discontent D i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289; J iii. 395; DA i.111.
Anabhiraddha
Anabhiraddha (adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin iv.236.
Anabhiraddhi
Anabhiraddhi (f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D i.3 (= kopassɔetaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52).
Anabhisambhuṇamāna
Anabhisambhuṇamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisam- bhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268).
Anamatagga
Anamatagga (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit -- agga ThA 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṃsāra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S ii.178, 187 sq. = iii.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga -- pariyāya at DhA ii.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA i.11; ii.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga -- system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra].
Anamha
Anamha (adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana -- mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J iii. 223 (˚kāle = ārodana -- kāle C.).
Anaya
Anaya [a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin ii.199; S iv.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362.
Anariya
Anariya (adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10; D iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (˚dhamma); Pug 13. -- See ariya.
Anala
Anala (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M i.455; J ii.326 = iv. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). <-> 3. ˚ŋ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S i.15 (kāmesu).
Anavaya
Anavaya (adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D i.88 (= anūna paripūra -- kārin DA i.248); A iii.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10).
Anavosita
Anavosita (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Anasana
Anasana (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an -- aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D iii.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324).
Anasitvāna
Anasitvāna [ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J iv.371.
Anasuyyaŋ
Anasuyyaŋ [Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grum- bling J iii.27 (v. l. for anusuyyaŋ T.).
Anasuropa
Anasuropa [an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341.
Anasūyaka
Anasūyaka (adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J ii.192.
Anassaka
Anassaka (adj.) either an -- assaka or a -- nassaka (q. v.).
Anassana
Anassana (nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] im- perishableness, freedom from waste J iv.168.
Anassāvin
Anassāvin (adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549).
Anassāsika
Anassāsika (adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M i.514; S ii.191.
Anassuŋ
Anassuŋ 1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaŋ) I have heard M i.393.
Anāgata
Anāgata (adj.) [an + āgata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. D iii.100 sq., 134 sq., 220, 275; M iii.188 sq.; S i.5; ii.283; A iii.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J iv.159; vi.364; Dhs 1039, 1416.
Anāgamana
Anāgamana (nt.) [an + āgamana] not coming, not returning J i 203, 264.
Anāgāmitā
Anāgāmitā (f.) [anāgāmin + tā] the state or condition of an Anāgāmin S v.129, 181, 285; A iii.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A iii.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40.
Anāgāmin
Anāgāmin (adj. -- n.) [an + āgāmin] one who does not return, a Never -- Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saŋyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (D i.156; ii.92; iii.107; M ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200 -- 2, the five Indriyas; A i.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, ii 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D ii.92 nine others, of
-- 32 --
whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called anāgāmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saŋyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saŋyojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69. -- phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293; ii.240; iv.29; D i.229; ii.227, 255; S iii.168; v.411; A i.23, 44; iii.272 sq.; iv.204, 276, 372 sq. -- magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b.
Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā
Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā see agāra & agāriyā.
Anāghāta
Anāghāta [an + āghāta] freedom from anger or ill -- will Vin ii.249.
Anācāra
Anācāra [an + ācāra] misconduct, immorality J ii.133; iii. 276; adj. anācārin Pug 57.
Anājāniya
Anājāniya (adj.) [an + ājāniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M i.367.
Anādara
Anādara [an + ādara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. -- (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 (= ādaravirahita SnA 290).
Anādaratā
Anādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. anādara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā).
Anādariya
Anādariya (nt.) [fr. anādara] disregard, disrespect Vin i.176; iv.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359.
Anādā
Anādā [ger. of an + ādiyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.).
Anādāna
Anādāna (adj.) [an + ādāna] free from attachment (opp. sādāna) A ii.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094; Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dh 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa DhA iv.70), 396, 406, 421.
Anāditvā
Anāditvā [ger. of an + ādiyati] not taking up, not heeding J iv.352 (v. l. for T. anādiyitvā).
Anādiyitvā
Anādiyitvā [ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120; J iv.352; DhA i.41. See also ādiyati.
Anānu
Anānu -- represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu- (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: ˚tappaŋ (ppr.) not regretting J v.492; ˚puṭṭha questioned Sn 782 (= apucchita SnA 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable D ii.273 (v. l. anu˚).
Anāpāthagata
Anāpāthagata (adj.) [an + āpātha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M i.174.
Anāpāda
Anāpāda (adj.) [an + āpāda] unmarried (of a woman) J iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata -- pariggahā).
Anāpucchā
Anāpucchā see āpucchati.
Anābādha
Anābādha (adj.) [an + ābādha] safe and sound VvA 351.
Anāmata
Anāmata (adj.) [an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J ii.56 (= asusāna -- ṭṭhāna C.); DhA ii.99.
Anāmanta
Anāmanta (˚ -- ) [an + āmanta] without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J vi.226; ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; A iii.259.
Anāmaya
Anāmaya (adj.) [an + āmaya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74), 177.
Anāmasita
Anāmasita (adj.) [an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati] not touched, virgin -- VvA 113 (˚khetta).
Anāmassa
Anāmassa (adj.) [grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya] not to be touched J ii 360 (C. anāmāsitabba).
Anāyatana
Anāyatana (nt.) [an + āyatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla C.).
Anāyasa
Anāyasa (adj.) [an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaŋ VvA 335).
Anāyāsa
Anāyāsa (adj.) [an + āyāsa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008.
Anārambha
Anārambha [an + ārambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 (= nibbāna SnA 507).
Anārādhaka
Anārādhaka (adj.) [an + ārādhaka] one who fails, unsuc- cessful Vin i.70.
Anāriya
Anāriya (adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya).
Anālamba
Anālamba (adj.) [an + ālamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiṭṭha; expld. at SnA 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra).
Anālaya
Anālaya [an + ālaya] aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya).
Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika
Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika (adj.) [an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addha2] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda M i.450; ii.178 (v. l. BB. anāḷiya); A iii.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; J v.96.
Anāvaṭa
Anāvaṭa (˚ -- ) [an + āvaṭa] not shut; in ˚dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness D iii.191.
Anāvattin
Anāvattin (adj. -- n.) [an + āvattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti -- dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D i.156 (cp. DA i.313); iii.132; Pug 16 sq., 62.
Anāvasūraŋ
Anāvasūraŋ (adv.) [an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun -- down J v.56 (= anatthangata -- suriyaŋ C.) cp. Sk. utsūra.
Anāvāsa
Anāvāsa (adj. -- n.) [an + āvāsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22, 33; J ii.77.
Anāvikata
Anāvikata etc. see āvikata.
Anāvila
Anāvila (adj.) [an + āvila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D i.84 (= nikkaddama DA i.226); iii.269, 270; Sn 637 (= nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA iv.192); Th 2, 369 (āvilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479.
Anāvuttha
Anāvuttha (adj.) [an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati] not dwelt in D .ii50.
Anāsaka
Anāsaka (adj.) [an + āsaka] fasting, not taking food S iv.118. f. ˚ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh 141 (= bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77).
Anāsakatta
Anāsakatta (nt.) [abstr. of anāsaka] fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Anāsava
Anāsava (adj.) [an + āsava] free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv ii.615; VvA 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava.
-- 33 --
Anāsasāna
Anāsasāna (adj.) [an + āsasāna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to āsasāna. Expld by kañci rūpâdi -- dhammaŋ nâsiŋsati SnA 365.
Anāhāra
Anāhāra (adj.) [an + āhāra] being without food M i.487; Sn 985.
Anikkaḍḍhanā
Anikkaḍḍhanā (f.) [a + nikkaḍḍhanā] not throwing out or expelling J iii.22.
Anikkasāva
Anikkasāva (adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J ii.198 = v.50; DhA i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva).
Anikhāta
Anikhāta (adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J vi.109 (˚kūla; C. agambhīrā).
Anigha
Anigha see nigha1 and īgha.
Anicchā
Anicchā (f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. ˚a without desires, not desiring Sn 707.
Aniñjana
Aniñjana (nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15.
Aniñjita
Aniñjita (adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, un- shaken Th 1, 386.
Aniṭṭhangata
Aniṭṭhangata see niṭṭhā2.
Aniṭṭhita
Aniṭṭhita see niṭṭhita.
Anitthi
Anitthi (f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh -- itthi).
Anindi
Anindi -- [the compn. form of nindā] in ˚ḷocana (with) fault- less eyes J vi.265.
Anindita
Anindita (adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J iv.106 (˚angin of blameless body or limbs).
Anibbisaŋ
Anibbisaŋ [ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= taŋ ñāṇaŋ avindanto DhA iii.128).
Animisa
Animisa (adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana).
Aniyata
Aniyata (adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112; ii.287; D iii.217.
Aniyamita
Aniyamita (adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231.
Anila
Anila [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J iv.119 (˚patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594.
Anirākata
Anirākata (adj.) [a + nirākata] see nirankaroti.
Anissara
Anissara (adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713.
Anissukin
Anissukin (adj.) [an + issukin, see also an -- ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D iii.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin).
Anīka
Anīka (nt.) [Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *og&uarc; (see), cp. Gr. o)/ mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle -- array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467). -- agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakāya senāmukha SnA 384). -- ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard D iii.64, 148; J v.100; vi.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. -- dassana troop -- inspection D i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DA i.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senābyūha +).
Anīgha
Anīgha see nigha1 and cp. īgha.
Anīti
Anīti (f.) [an + īti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A iv.238; Miln 323 (abl. ˚ito).
Anītika
Anītika (adj.) [fr. anīti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162; S iv.371; Sn 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304.
Anītiha
Anītiha (adj.) [an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaŋ] not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A ii.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M i.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J i.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28).
Anu
Anu1 (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. <-> Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaŋ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaŋ for one year or yearly; a. saŋvaccharaŋ id. -- (b) More freq. w. loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S iv.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaŋ in every cell Vin i.80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J ii.382. B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well -- defined meaning ("along"), as such also as 1st component of pref. -- cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, + vi, + saŋ. -- As base, i. e. 2nd part of a pref. -- cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam -- anu˚. The prefix saŋ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. ˚loma, ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along towards". -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch˚ follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received, ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear -- guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saŋcarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (esp. with ˚ppa˚), e. g. anu -- ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after, ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaŋkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be -- or Ger. be -- , also Lat. ad -- and con -- . Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. ˚kampā com -- passion, ˚kiṇṇa be -- set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be -- singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with, ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be -- guard, ˚litta be -- smeared or an -- ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con -- sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. ˚kūla being to will, ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al -- lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a -- greement, ˚madati ap -- preciate, ˚rūpa = con -- form, ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad -- vise, com -- mand etc. -- III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship, ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -- share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. -- (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaŋ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting ( -- comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of
-- 34 --
small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padânupadaŋ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaŋ, buddhânubuddha, vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu -- gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu -- kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja. Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to ˚ânu˚, never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahânubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an -- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚.
Anu
Anu2 (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D i.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anuŋ thūlaŋ). See aṇu.
Anukankhin
Anukankhin (adj.) [fr. anu + kānkṣ] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya˚).
Anukantati
Anukantati [anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hatthaŋ = phāleti DhA iii.484).
Anukampaka
Anukampaka & ˚ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity ( -- ˚ or c. loc.) D iii.187; S i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157; A iv.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba -- bhūta˚); Pv i.33 (= kārunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakāma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satthā sattesu a.).
Anukampati
Anukampati [anu + kampati] to have pity on, to com- miserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S i.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv ii.16 (= anuddayaŋ karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (taŋ), 62 (pitaraŋ), 104. -- pp. anukampita (q. v.).
Anukampana
Anukampana (nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88.
Anukampā
Anukampā (f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D i.204; M i.161; ii.113; S i.206; ii.274 (loka˚); iv.323; v.259 sq.; A i.64, 92; ii.159; iii.49; iv.139; Pug 35. -- Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of D iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); J iii.280; PvA 47, 147.
Anukampita
Anukampita (adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gra- tified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv iii.230.
Anukampin
Anukampin (adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita˚ full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv iii.76. sabbapāṇa -- bhūta -- hita˚ id. S iv.314; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba -- bhūta˚ S i.25, 110; A ii.9; It 102.
Anukaroti
Anukaroti [anu + kṛ] to imitate, "to do after" A i.212; J i.491; ii.162; DhA iv.197. -- ppr. anukabbaŋ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚). -- Med. anukubbati S i.19 = J iv.65. <-> See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2.
Anukassati
Anukassati [anu + kassati, kṛṣ] 1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D ii.255 (silokaŋ). -- 2. [Sk. ava -- kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
Anukāma
Anukāma (adj.) [anu + kāma] responding to love, loving in return J ii.157.
Anukāra
Anukāra [cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39.
Anukārin
Anukārin (adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32.
Anukiṇṇa
Anukiṇṇa [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara -- gaṇa˚).
Anukubba
Anukubba (adj.) ( -- ˚) [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anu- karoti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J ii.205 (kicca˚).
Anukubbati
Anukubbati see anukaroti.
Anukula
Anukula freq. spelling for anukūla.
Anukulaka
Anukulaka (adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish).
Anukūla
Anukūla (adj.) [anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312. -- bhava complaisance, willingness Vva 71. -- yañña a propitiative sacrifice D i.144 (expld. at DA i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan).
Anukkaṇṭhati
Anukkaṇṭhati [an + ukkaṇṭhati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto J v.10; and pp. ˚ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13.
Anukkaṇṭhana
Anukkaṇṭhana (nt.) [an + ukkaṇṭhana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J vi.4.
Anukkama
Anukkama [to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession J i.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. -- 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M i.446; Sn 622 (sandānaŋ saha˚).
Anukkamati
Anukkamati [anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (maggaŋ). -- 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S i.24, Th 1, 194.
Anukkhipati
Anukkhipati [anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. xi.6 (vaṭṭaŋ).
Anukkhepa
Anukkhepa [anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin i.285.
Anukhaṇati
Anukhaṇati [anu + khaṇati] to dig after or further J v.233.
Anukhuddaka
Anukhuddaka (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda˚ whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = D ii.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144.
Anuga
Anuga ( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or fol- lowed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 ( vasa˚ in the power of), 791 (ejā˚ = abhibhūta Sn 527), 1095 (Māra<-> vasa˚ = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ejā˚); J iii.224 (vasa˚ = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3.
Anugacchati
Anugacchati [anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (˚gacchanto); aor. ˚gamāsi Vin i.16, & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvagū Sn 586 (vasaŋ = vasaŋ gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J i.53; v.370. <-> pp. anugata (q. v.).
Anugata
Anugata (adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with ( -- ˚), being a victim of, suffering M i.16; D iii.85, 173 (parisā); A ii.185 (sota˚, v. l. anudhata); J ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369; Nd2 32 (taṇhā˚); PvA 102 (nāmaŋ mayhaŋ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚).
Anugati
Anugati (f.) ( -- ˚) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhânugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug 33; DhA iv.39.
-- 35 --
Anugama
Anugama [fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to be followed J iv.65.
Anugāmika
Anugāmika (adj.) going along with, following, accompa- nying; resulting from, consequential on Kh viii.8 (nidhi, a treasure acc. a man to the next world); J iv.280 (˚nidhi); Miln 159 (parisā); PvA 132, 253 (dānaŋ nāma ˚aŋ nidānan ti).
Anugāmin
Anugāmin (adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 (= anuyutta).
Anugāyati
Anugāyati [anu + gāyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D i.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugāyissaŋ); Miln 120.
Anugāhati
Anugāhati [anu + gāhati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611.
Anugijjhati
Anugijjhati [anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J iii.207; iv.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. ˚giddhā (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati.
Anugiddha
Anugiddha [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952; Th 1, 580.
Anuggaṇha
Anuggaṇha (adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 ˚sīla.
Anuggaṇhataka
Anuggaṇhataka (adj.) [= anugganha] compassionate, com- miserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka).
Anuggaṇhana
Anuggaṇhana (nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403.
Anu(g)gaṇhāti
Anu(g)gaṇhāti [anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D i.53 (vācaŋ; cp. DA i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J ii.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.).
Anuggaha
Anuggaha1 [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S ii.11; iii.109; iv.104; v.162; A i.92, 114; ii.145; iv.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J i.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104.
Anuggaha
Anuggaha2 (adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd1 330).
Anuggahīta
Anuggahīta (& ˚ita) [pp. of anuggaṇhāti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M i.457; S ii.274; iii.91; iv.263; A iii.172; J iii.428.
Anuggāhaka
Anuggāhaka (adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S iii.5; v.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help).
Anugghāṭeti
Anugghāṭeti [an + ugghāṭeti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kavāṭaŋ).
Anugghāta
Anugghāta [an + ugghāta] not shaking, a steady walk J vi.253.
Anugghātin
Anugghātin (adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J vi.252; Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i); VvA 36.
Anughāyati
Anughāyati [anu + ghāyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandhaŋ).
Anucankamati
Anucankamati [anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D i.235; M i.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. ˚āpeti M i.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu i.350.
Anucankamana
Anucankamana (nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J i.7.
Anucarati
Anucarati [anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita (q. v.)
Anucarita
Anucarita ( -- ˚) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, ac- companied by, pervaded with D i.16, 21 (vīmaŋsa˚ = anuvicarita DA i.106); M i.68 (id.); Miln 226.
Anuciṇṇa
Anuciṇṇa (pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = It 86 (pamādaŋ); J i 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs iv.9. -- 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J iv.286.
Anucintana
Anucintana (nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164.
Anucinteti
Anucinteti [anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S i.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti).
Anuccangin
Anuccangin see anujjangin.
Anucchavika
Anucchavika (& ˚ya) (adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J i.58, 62, 126, 218; ii.5; iv.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA i.203, 390; ii.55, 56; VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13.
Anucchiṭṭha
Anucchiṭṭha (adj.) [see ucchiṭṭha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3 (vv. ll. anucciṭṭha).
Anujagghati
Anujagghati [anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D i.91; DA i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256).
Anujavati
Anujavati [anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J vi.452 (= anubandhati).
Anujāta
Anujāta (adj.) [anu + jāta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijāta +, opp. avajāta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J vi.380; DhA i.129; Dāvs ii.66.
Anujānāti
Anujānāti [anu + jānāti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225; A ii.197; Pv iv.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. -- 2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83; ii.301: Sn 982. <-> grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed A ii.197; pp. anuññāta (q. v.) Caus. anujānāpeti J i.156.
Anujīvati
Anujīvati [anu + jīvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J iv.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaŋ laddhaŋ (C.). -- pp. anujīvata (q. v.).
Anujīvita
Anujīvita (nt.) [pp. of anujīvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 (= jīvitaŋ SnA 545).
Anujīvin
Anujīvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. anujīvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A i.152; iii.44; J iii.485; Dāvs v.43.
Anujju
Anujju (adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. ˚angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. ˚ī Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 (= kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīrā C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangī, C. aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i. e. snake J iv.330; ˚bhūta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293.
Anujjuka
Anujjuka = anujju J iii.318.
Anujjhāna
Anujjhāna (nt.) [anu + jhāna] meditation, reflection, intro- spection Miln 352 (˚bahula).
Anuññāta
Anuññāta (adj.) [pp. of anujānāti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D i.88; J i.92; ii.353, 416; Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA i.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81.
Anuññātatta
Anuññātatta (nt.) [abstr. to anuññāta] being permitted, permission J ii.353.
Anuṭṭhaka
Anuṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. an + uṭṭhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033.
-- 36 --
Anuṭṭhahati
Anuṭṭhahati [anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti, see ˚tiṭṭhati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. -- pp. anuṭṭhita (q. v.).
Anuṭṭhahāna
Anuṭṭhahāna (adj.) [ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 (= anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto DhA iii.409).
Anuṭṭhātar
Anuṭṭhātar [n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) SnA 169 (= viriya -- tejavirahita).
Anuṭṭhāna
Anuṭṭhāna (nt.) [an + uṭṭhāna] "the not getting up", in- activity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarīra -- paṭijagganaŋ akaronto DhA iii.347).
Anuṭṭhita
Anuṭṭhita [pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D ii.103; S iv. 200; A iii.290 sq.; iv.300; J ii.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata).
Anuṭṭhubhati
Anuṭṭhubhati [formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA i.138.
Anuṭṭhurin
Anuṭṭhurin v. l. at SnA 569, see niṭṭhurin.
Anuḍasati
Anuḍasati [anu + ḍasati] to bite J vi.192.
Anuḍahati
Anuḍahati [anu + ḍahati] to burn over again, burn tho- roughly, fig. to destroy, consume J ii.330; vi.423. Pass. ˚ḍayhati J v.426. -- Also spelt ˚dahati, e. g. at S iv. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488.
Anuḍahana
Anuḍahana (nt.) [fr. anuḍahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d).
Anuṇṇata
Anuṇṇata (adj.) [uṇṇata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhaccaŋ nâpajjeyya SnA 492).
Anutappati
Anutappati [anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J i.113; iv.358; v.492 (ppr. an -- anutappaŋ); Dh 67, 314; Pv ii.942; DhA ii.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A i.22, 77; iii.294, and anutāpiya A iii.46 (an˚).
Anutāpa
Anutāpa [fr. anu + tāpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra VvA 180); DhsA 384.
Anutāpin
Anutāpin (adj.) [fr. anutāpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115.
Anutāpiya
Anutāpiya grd. of anutappati, q. v.
Anutāḷeti
Anutāḷeti [anu + taḷeti] to beat J ii.280.
Anutiṭṭhati
Anutiṭṭhati [anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 (= anugacchati); PvA 78.
Anutīre
Anutīre (adv.) [anu + tīre, loc. of tīra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 (= tīra -- samīpe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b.
Anuttara
Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga DhA i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA i.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc.
Anuttariya
Anuttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superi- ority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚) at D iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚, lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚) at D iii.250, 281; A i.22; iii.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps i.5. Cp. M i.235; A v.37. See also ānuttariya.
Anuttāna
Anuttāna (adj.) [an + uttāna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J vi.247.
Anutthunā
Anutthunā (f.) [fr. anutthunāti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.).
Anutthunāti
Anutthunāti [anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D iii.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J iii.115; v.346, 479; DhA iii.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience).
Anutrāsin
Anutrāsin (adj.) [an + utrāsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864.
Anuthera
Anuthera [anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212 (therânutherā Th. & next in age).
Anudadāti
Anudadāti [anu + dadāti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375.
Anudayati
Anudayati (to sympathise with) see under anuddā.
Anudassita
Anudassita [pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119.
Anudahati
Anudahati see anuḍahati.
Anudiṭṭha
Anudiṭṭha [pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedi- cated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiṭṭha = asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha PvA 50).
Anudiṭṭhi
Anudiṭṭhi (f.) [anu + diṭṭhi] an "after -- view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D i.12; M ii.228; S iii.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA i.103. attânudiṭṭhi (q. v.) a soul -- speculation.
Anudisati
Anudisati [anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). -- pp. anudiṭṭha (q. v.).
Anudisā
Anudisā (f.) [anu + disā] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D i.222; S i.122; iii.124.
Anudīpeti
Anudīpeti [anu + dīpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammâ- dhammaŋ).
Anudūta
Anudūta [anu + dūta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19, 295; DhA ii.76, 78.
Anudeva
Anudeva see anvadeva.
Anuddayatā
Anuddayatā (f.) [abstr. to anuddayā] sympathy with ( -- ˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚ kindness to or sympathy with other people S ii.218; v.169 (T. anudayatā); A iii.184; It 72; Vbh 356.
Anuddayā
Anuddayā (& anudayā) (f.) [anu + dayā] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196; S i.204; ii.199; iv.323; A ii.176; iii.189; Pug 35 (anukampā); J i.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya˚ e. g. ˚sampanna full of mercy J i.151, 262; PvA 66.
Anuddā
Anuddā (f.) [contracted form of anuddayā] = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaŋ "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā).
Anuddhaŋseti
Anuddhaŋseti [anu + dhaŋseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaŋ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111; M i.26; S i.186; A i.266; ii.126; iii. 393 sq. -- pp. anuddhasta (q. v.).
Anuddhata
Anuddhata (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca -- virahita SnA 549, cp. anuṇṇata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA iv.93); Vv 648; Pug 59.
Anuddharin
Anuddharin (adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 (= anussukin SnA 569) see niṭṭhurin.
-- 37 --
Anuddhasta
Anuddhasta (adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaŋseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M i.462 (citta); A ii.126 (id.).
Anudhamma
Anudhamma [anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammânudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu iv. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. iv. Freq. in phrase dh˚ -- ânudh˚ -- paṭipanna "one who masters the completeness of the Dh.", e. g. S ii.18; iii.163; It 81; Ps ii.189. -- 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaŋ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234; D i.161; M i.368, 482; S ii.33; iii.6; iv.51; v.7. See further M iii.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S ii.81, 108; A ii.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA i.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51).
Anudhammatā
Anudhammatā (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, con- formity to the Dhamma A ii.46; Ps i.35, 36.
Anudhāreti
Anudhāreti [anu + dhāreti] to hold up DA i.61 (chattaŋ), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamāna.
Anudhāvati
Anudhāvati [anu + dhāvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M i.474; S i.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372.
Anudhāvin
Anudhāvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. anudhāvati] one who runs after S i.9, 117.
Anunadī
Anunadī( -- tire) along the bank of the river S iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A).
Anunamati
Anunamati [anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow).
Anunaya
Anunaya [fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D iii.254 (˚saŋyojana); A iv.7 sq. (id.) M i.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322.
Anunayana
Anunayana (nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362.
Anunāsika
Anunāsika (adj.) [anu + nāsā + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ŋ; in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ŋ VvA 114, 253, 275, 333.
Anunīta
Anunīta (adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S iv.71; Sn 781.
Anunetar
Anunetar [n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or con- ciliates Ps ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā).
Anuneti
Anuneti [anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q. v.).
Anupa
Anupa see anūpa.
Anupakampati
Anupakampati [anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41.
Anupakkama
Anupakkama [an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195.
Anupakkuṭṭha
Anupakkuṭṭha (adj.) [an + upak˚] blameless, irreproachahle D i.113; Vin iv.160; Sn p. 115; DA i.281.
Anupakkhandati
Anupakkhandati [anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D i.122 (= anupavisati DA i.290); ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati); M i.151, 469; S iii.113; Vism 18.
Anupakhajjati
Anupakhajjati [den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhan- dati] to encroach, intrude Vin v.163.
Anupagacchati
Anupagacchati [anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D i.55 (anupeti +).
Anupaghāta
Anupaghāta [an + upaghāta] not hurting Dh 185 (anūpa˚ metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anupacita
Anupacita (adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56.
Anupacināti
Anupacināti [an + upacināti] not to observe or notice J v.339 (= anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviṇāti).
Anupajagghati
Anupajagghati [anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A i.198 (v. l. anusaŋ˚).
Anupajjati
Anupajjati [anu + pad] to follow, accompany J iv.304. - pp. anupanna (q. v.).
Anupañcāhaŋ
Anupañcāhaŋ (adv.) [anu + pañcā + ahaŋ] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasāhaŋ).
Anupaññatti
Anupaññatti (f.) [anu + paññatti] a supplementary regula- tion or order Vin ii.286; v.2 sq.
Anupaṭipāti
Anupaṭipāti (f.) [anu + paṭipāti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā); DhA iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244.
Anupaṭṭhita
Anupaṭṭhita (adj.) [anu + pa + ṭhita] setting out after, following, attacking J v.452.
Anupatati
Anupatati [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.). -- 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = M i.364; S i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkhā); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). <-> pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin.
Anupatita
Anupatita [pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, op- pressed by ( -- ˚) S ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamāda˚).
Anupatitatta
Anupatitatta (nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of ( -- ˚) SnA 339.
Anupatta
Anupatta (anuppatta) [pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anu- prāpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D i.87 -- 111; ii 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv iv.166; PvA 59 (dukkhaŋ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo -- anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin ii.188; D i.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149.
Anupatti
Anupatti (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accom- plishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S i.46, 52.
Anupathe
Anupathe at J v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga -- mahāmaggānaŋ antare.
Anupada
Anupada [cp. Sk. anupadaŋ adv., anu + pada] 1. the "after- foot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupadaŋ katheti). -- 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma -- vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation M iii.25; ˚vaṇṇanā word -- by -- word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. ˚ŋ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J ii.230 (tassânupadaŋ agamāsi); vi.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padânupadaŋ (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J iii. 504; vi.555; DhA i.69; ii.38.
Anupadātar
Anupadātar (anuppadātar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D i.4 (cp. DA i.74); A ii.209.
Anupadāna
Anupadāna (anuppadāna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dāna, cp. anu- padeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of ( -- ˚) D i.12 (cp. DA i.98; both read anuppādāna); J iii.205; Miln 315.
-- 38 --
Anupadinna
Anupadinna (anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512.
Anupadeti
Anupadeti (anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadāti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuŋ); M i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadāti i.3); Miln 210 (˚deti). fut. ˚dassati (see dadāti i.1); D iii.92; S iv.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A iii.43; Sn 983. ger. ˚datvā SnA 35. inf. ˚dātuŋ A i.117. pp. ˚dinna (q. v.).
Anupaddava
Anupaddava (adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anītika); iii.162; Dh 338; DhA iv.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva).
Anupadhāreti
Anupadhāreti [an + upadhār˚] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA iv.197; VvA 260.
Anupadhika
Anupadhika (adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attach- ment (see upadhi) Vin i 36 (anupadhīka); D. iii 112 (anupadhika opp. to sa -- upadhika); Sn 1057 (anūpadhīka T., but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa).
Anupanna
Anupanna, [pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (māradheyya˚).
Anupabandhati
Anupabandhati (anuppa˚) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. -- Caus. ˚āpeti ibid.
Anupabandhanatā
Anupabandhanatā (anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] non- stopping, not ceasing Miln 132.
Anupabandhanā
Anupabandhanā (anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanāha).
Anupabbajjā
Anupabbajjā (f.) [anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S v.67 = It 107.
Anupaya
Anupaya (adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S i.181 (akankha apiha +).
Anuparigacchati
Anuparigacchati [anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin iii.119; S i.75 (ger. ˚gamma); Sn 447 (aor. ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Sn A 393); J iv.267.
Anuparidhāvati
Anuparidhāvati [anu + pari + dhāvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. iii.150 (khīlan).
Anupariyāti
Anupariyāti [auu + pari + yāti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin ii.111; S i.102, 124; Th 1, 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv iii.34 (= anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (˚yāyitvā, ger.) 217.
Anupariyāya
Anupariyāya (adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti] going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city D ii.83 = S iv 194 = A v.195; A iv.107.
Anuparivattati
Anuparivattati [anu + pari + vṛt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaŋ); D i.240; PvA 97. -- 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). -- 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. iii.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Miln 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan).
Anuparivatti
Anuparivatti (f.) ( -- ˚) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, oc- cupation, connection with S iii.16.
Anuparivāreti
Anuparivāreti [anu + pari + vāreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin i.338; M i.153; DhA 1.55.
Anupariveṇiyaŋ
Anupariveṇiyaŋ [anu + pariveṇiyaŋ = loc. of pariveṇi] should be written anu pariveṇiyaŋ ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin i.80, 106.
Anuparisakkati
Anuparisakkati [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattati).
Anuparisakkana
Anuparisakkana (nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattana).
Anupariharati
Anupariharati [anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M i.306.
Anupalitta
Anupalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M i.319, 386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 (= lepānaŋ abhāvā SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353.
Anupavajja
Anupavajja (adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391.
Anupavattaka
Anupavattaka (anuppa˚) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaŋ) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka.
Anupavatteti
Anupavatteti (anuppa˚) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaŋ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S i.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti .
Anupavāda
Anupavāda [an + upavāda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; expld at DhA iii.238 as anupavādanañ c'eva anupavādāpanañ ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. ˚vādaka Pug 60, & ˚vādin M i.360.
Anupaviṭṭha
Anupaviṭṭha (anuppa˚) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangānadiŋ a. nadī: flowing into the G.).
Anupaviṭṭhatā
Anupaviṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. to anupaviṭṭha] the fact of having entered Miln 257.
Anupavisati
Anupavisati [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh i.290; VvA 42 (= ogāhati). -- pp. ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.) <-> Caus. ˚paveseti (q.v.).
Anupavecchati
Anupavecchati (anuppa˚) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati); D i.74 (= pavesati DA i.218); ii.78; M i.446; iii.133; A ii.64; iii.26 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); J v.394; Sn 208 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28.
Anupaveseti
Anupaveseti [anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 (= ˚pavecchati).
Anupasankamati
Anupasankamati1 [anu + pa + saŋkamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179.
Anupasankamati
Anupasankamati2 [an + upasank˚] not to go to. not to approach DhA ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati).
Anupasaṇṭhapanā
Anupasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [an + upasaṇṭhapanā] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā.
Anupassaka
Anupassaka (adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420.
Anupassati
Anupassati [anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps i.57, 187; Sn A 505.
-- 39 --
Anupassanā
Anupassanā (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S v.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps i.10, 20, 96; ii.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚.
Anupassin
Anupassin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S ii.84 sq., v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps i.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.
Anupahata
Anupahata1 [anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274.
Anupahata
Anupahata2 (adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda).
Anupāta
Anupāta [of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A i.161 (vāda˚).
Anupātin
Anupātin (adj.) [fr. anupāta] 1. following, indulging in J iii.523 (khaṇa˚). -- 2. attacking, hurting J v.399.
Anupādaŋ
Anupādaŋ (adv.) [anu + pāda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaŋ at the head).
Anupādā
Anupādā [ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya] anupādā- niya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati.
Anupādāna & Anupādi
Anupādāna & Anupādi see upādāna & upādi.
Anupāpita
Anupāpita [pp. of anupāpeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252.
Anupāpuṇāti
Anupāpuṇāti (anuppā˚) [anu + pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain, get to, find S i.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 (= ˚pāpuṇitvā PvA 123). -- pp. anupatta (q. v.). -- Caus. anupāpeti (q. v.).
Anupāpeti
Anupāpeti [Caus. of anupāpuṇāti] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J vi.88; Cp. xi. 4 (aor. anupāpayi); Miln 276. -- pp. anupāpita (q. v.).
Anupāya
Anupāya [an + upāya] wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405.
Anupāyāsa
Anupāyāsa see upāyāsa.
Anupālaka
Anupālaka (adj.) [anu + pālaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474.
Anupālana
Anupālana (nt.) [fr. anupāleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs iii.2.
Anupāleti
Anupāleti [anu + pāleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santatiŋ).
Anupāhana
Anupāhana (adj.) [an + upāhana] without shoes J vi.552.
Anupiya
Anupiya (anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I) iii.185; J ii.390; v.360; and ˚bhāṇitar id. Vbh 352.
Anupīḷaŋ
Anupīḷaŋ at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q. v.).
Anupucchati
Anupucchati [anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. -- pp. anupuṭṭha (q. v.).
Anupuṭṭha
Anupuṭṭha [pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 (= pucchita SnA 521).
Anupubba
Anupubba (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚ -- ninno etc.); D i.184; Sn 511; J v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dh 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā DhA iii.340); Pug 41, 64; J ii.2, 105; iii.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Sn 1000. <-> In compn. both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q. v.). -- kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice M i.446. -- nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra, & are enumd. as such at D iii.266, 290; A iv.409, 456; Ps i.35. -- vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase "saññā -- vedayitanirodha" (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D ii.156; iii.265, 290; A iv.410; Nd2 under jhāna; Ps i.5; Miln 176. -- sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M i.479; iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā).
Anupubbaka
Anupubbaka (adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbânupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaŋ kulānaŋ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).
Anupubbata
Anupubbata (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. ānupubbatā.
Anupubbikathā
Anupubbi -- kathā (f.) [anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi -- kathā] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon, regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna -- kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraŋ sīlaŋ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaŋ dīpana -- kathā" (DA i.277). Vin i.15, 18; ii.156, 192; D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA i.308; DhA i.6; Miln 228. -- The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228.
Anupekkhati
Anupekkhati [anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A iii.23. -- 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna). -- Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73.
Anupekkhanatā
Anupekkhanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupek- khatī] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372.
Anupeti
Anupeti [anu + pa + i] to go into D i.55 (+ anupagacchati) S iii.207; DA i.165.
Anupeseti
Anupeseti [anu + pa + iṣ] to send forth after Miln 36.
Anuposathikaŋ
Anuposathikaŋ see anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ.
Anuposiya
Anuposiya (adj.) [grd. of anu + puṣ] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318.
Anuppa˚
Anuppa˚ in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa˚.
Anuppadajjuŋ
Anuppadajjuŋ (S iii.131) see anupadeti.
Anuppanna
Anuppanna (˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) see uppanna etc.
Anuppīḷa
Anuppīḷa (adj.) [an + uppīḷa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J iii.443; v.378; VvA 351; PvA 161.
Anupharaṇa
Anupharaṇa (nt.) [anu + pharaṇa] flashing through, per- vading Miln 148.
Anuphusīyati
Anuphusīyati [anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J v.242 (himaŋ; C. pateyya).
Anubajjhati
Anubajjhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandh- ati (q. v.).
Anubaddha
Anubaddha [pp. of anubandhati] following, standing be- hind (piṭṭhito) D i.1, 226.
Anubandha
Anubandha [anu + bandh] bondage M iii.170; It 91.
Anubandhati
Anubandhati [anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J i.195; ii.230; vi.452 (= anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute
-- 40 --
for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. ˚bandhi J ii.154, 353; iii.504; PvA 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. ˚bandhitvā J i.254. grd. ˚bandhitabba M i.106. -- pp. anubaddha (q. v.).
Anubandhana
Anubandhana (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J vi.526 (˚dukkha).
Anubala
Anubala (nt.) [anu + bala] rear -- guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ŋ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125.
Anubujjhati
Anubujjhati [anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. ava- budhyate] to remember, recollect J iii.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse).
Anubujjhana
Anubujjhana (nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps i.18 (bujjhana +).
Anubuddha
Anubuddha [pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā); S i.137 (dhammo vimalenɔ ânubuddho) ii.203; iv.188; A ii.1; iii.14; iv.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhânubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B iv.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. -- 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA i.40. Cp. buddhânubuddha.
Anubodha
Anubodha [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recogni- tion, understanding S i.126 (?) = A v.46 (anubodhiŋ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S ii.92; iii.261; v.431; A ii.1; iv.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D i.12, 22; S i.136.
Anubodhati
Anubodhati [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiŋ A v.46 (?) = S i.126 (anubodhaŋ). -- Caus. ˚bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J vi.139 (˚ayamāna) -- pp. anubuddha (q. v.).
Anubodhana
Anubodhana (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps i.18 (bodhana +).
Anubbajati
Anubbajati [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J iv.399 (maggaŋ = pabbajati C.).
Anubbata
Anubbata (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J iii.521; vi.557.
Anubbillāvitatta
Anubbillāvitatta see ubbill˚.
Anubyañjana
Anubyañjana see anuvyañjana.
Anubrūhita
Anubrūhita [pp. of anubrūheti] strengthened with ( -- ˚), full of Ps i.167.
Anubrūheti
Anubrūheti [brūheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S i.178 (anubrūhaye); M iii.187 (id., so read for manu˚), Th 2, 163 (˚ehi); Cp. iii.12 (saŋvegaŋ anubrūhayiŋ aor.); J iii.191 (suññāgāraŋ). Often in phrase vivekaŋ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J i.9 (inf. ˚brūhetuŋ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dh 75 (˚brūhaye = ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya DhA ii.103). -- pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana.
Anubhaṇanā
Anubhaṇanā (f.) [anu + bhaṇana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā +).
Anubhavati & Anubhoti
Anubhavati & Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D i.129; ii.12 (˚bhonti); M ii.204; A i.61 (atthaŋ ˚bhoti to have a good result); J vi.97 (˚bhoma); Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaŋ); PvA 52 (˚issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaŋ to suffer pain, e.g. PvA i.1110 (˚bhonti); PvA 43, 68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). -- ppr. med. ˚bhavamāna J i.50; aor. ˚bhavi PvA 75 (sampattiŋ); ger. ˚bhavitvā J iv.1; PvA 4 (sampattiŋ), 67 (dukkhaŋ), 73 (sampattiŋ); grd. ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā PvA 109). <-> Pass. anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna PvA 8, 159 (mayā a. = anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna PvA 33 (dukkhaŋ). -- pp. anubhūta (q.v.).
Anubhavana
Anubhavana (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh -- ânubhavana -- lakkhanā vedanā "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita -- lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana -- lakkhaṇā ca); PvA 152 (kamma -- vipāka˚). Esp. in combn. with dukkha˚ suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J iv.3; Miln 181; DhA iv.75; PvA 52.
Anubhāga
Anubhāga [anu + bhāga] a secondary or inferior part, (after -- )share, what is left over Vin ii.167.
Anubhāyati
Anubhāyati [anu + bhāyati] to be afraid of J vi.302 (kissa nvɔ ânubhāyissaŋ, so read for kissânu˚).
Anubhāva
Anubhāva [fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, con- comitance" and found only in cpds. as -- ˚, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness, rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language. -- (1) anubhāva ( -- ˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S i.146 sq.; ii.274; iv.323; Sn p. 93; Pv ii.112; PvA 76. deva˚ of divine power or majesty D ii.12; devatā˚ id. J i.168; dibba˚ id. PvA 71, 110. rājā˚ kingly splendour, pomp D i.49; J iv 247; PvA 279 etc. -- anubhāvena (instr. -- ˚) in accordance with, by means of J ii.200 (angavijjā˚); PvA 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathânubhāvaŋ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S i.31; Vv 15 (= yathābalaŋ VvA 25). -- (2) ānubhāva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J v.10, 456; Pv ii.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also ānu˚.
Anubhāvatā
Anubhāvatā (f.) [= anubhāva + tā] majesty, power S i.156 (mahâ˚).
Anubhāsati
Anubhāsati [anu + bhāsati] to speak after, to repeat D i.104; Miln 345; DA i.273.
Anubhūta
Anubhūta [pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA ii.1218. nt. suffering, experience J i.254; Miln 78, 80.
Anubhūyamānatta
Anubhūyamānatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103.
Anuma
Anuma ( -- dassika) see anoma˚.
Anumagge
Anumagge at J v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b).
Anumajjati
Anumajjati [anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA i.276 (= anumasati). -- 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J vi.548; Miln 90. -- Pass. anumajjīyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428).
Anumajjana
Anumajjana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA i.63, 122.
Anumajjha
Anumajjha (adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J iv.192; v.387.
Anumaññati
Anumaññati [anu + maññati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. -- pp. anumata (q.v.).
-- 41 --
Anumata
Anumata [pp. of anumaññati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D i.99 (= anuññāta DA i.267); J v.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuññāta).
Anumati
Anumati (f.) [from anumaññati] consent, permission, agree- ment, assent, approval Vin ii.294, 301, 306; D. i.137, 143; Dpvs iv.47, Cf. v.18; DA i.297; VvA 17, PvA 114.
Anumatta
Anumatta see aṇu˚.
Anumasati
Anumasati [anu + masati] to touch D i.106 (= anumajjati DA i.276).
Anumāna
Anumāna [fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74.
Anumitta
Anumitta [anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J v.77.
Anumināti
Anumināti [cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi] to observe, draw an inference M i.97; PvA 227 (˚anto + nayaŋ nento). See also anumīyati.
Anumīyati
Anumīyati [Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S iii.36. Cp. anumināti.
Anumodaka
Anumodaka (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512.
Anumodati
Anumodati [anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S ii.54; A iii.50 (˚modanīya); iv.411; Dh 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna); It 78; Pv ii.919 (dānaŋ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti PvA 27); J ii.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modāhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. -- pp. anumodita (q.v.).
Anumodana
Anumodana (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): ˚ŋ datvā PvA 89; ˚ŋ katvā J i.91; DhA iii.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; ˚ŋ vatvā VvA 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ŋ karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraŋ ˚ŋ yāciŋsu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (˚atthaŋ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516.
Anumodita
Anumodita [pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77.
Anummatta
Anummatta (adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205.
Anuyanta
Anuyanta at A v.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaŋ attendance [anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin] or Sk. yantṛ ruler [yam], in which latter case anu -- yantṛ would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a -- stem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2).
Anuyāgin
Anuyāgin (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D i.142.
Anuyāta
Anuyāta [pp. of anuyāti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S ii.105 (magga); A v.236; It 29; Miln 217.
Anuyāti
Anuyāti (& anuyāyati) [anu + yā] 1. to go after, to follow J vi.49 (fut. ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaŋ anuyāyati = anugacchati C). -- 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (˚yāyati). -- pp. anuyāta (q. v.). See also anusaŋyāyati.
Anuyāyin
Anuyāyin (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (anânuyāyin); J vi.309; Miln 284.
Anuyuñjanā
Anuyuñjanā (f.) (& ˚yuñjana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyuñjati] application or devotion to ( -- ˚) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjanaŋ wrong spelling?)
Anuyuñjati
Anuyuñjati [anu + yuñjati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S i.25, 122 (˚yuñjan "in loving self -- devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); iii.154; iv.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamādaŋ = pavatteti DhA i.257), 247 (surāmeraya -- pānaŋ = sevati bahulīkaroti DhA iii.356); PvA 61 (kammaṭṭhānaŋ). -- 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin ii.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. ˚yuñjiyamāna PvA 192. -- pp. anuyutta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA iv.20.
Anuyutta
Anuyutta [pp. of anuyuñjati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D i.166, 167; iii. 232 = A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); S iii.153; iv.104; Sn 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaŋ = samāyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhān˚); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jāgariya˚), 206. -- 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A v.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka SnA 453).
Anuyoga
Anuyoga [Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devo- tion to ( -- ˚), execution, practice of ( -- ˚); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaŋ anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍanɔ ânuyogaŋ anuyutta); D iii.113 (attakilamathɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.). -- As adj. ( -- ˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D i.5; iii.107; M i.385; S i.182; iii.239; iv.330; v.320; A i.14; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J i.90 (padhānɔ ânuyogakiccaŋ); Vv 8438 (dhamma˚); Miln 348; DA i. 78, 104. -- 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Miln 10 (ācariyassa ˚ŋ datvā).
Anuyogavant
Anuyogavant (adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207.
Anuyogin
Anuyogin (adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to ( -- ˚) Dh 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self -- concentrated).
Anurakkhaka
Anurakkhaka (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J iv.192 (vaŋsa˚); vi.1 (id.).
Anurakkhaṇa
Anurakkhaṇa (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D iii.225 sq.; A ii.16 sq.; J i.133; Pug 12; Dpvs iv.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449.
Anurakkhati
Anurakkhati [anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J i.46; Pug 12. -- ppr. med.˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621.
Anurakkhā
Anurakkhā (f.) [= anurakkhaṇā] guarding, protection, preservation S iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā).
Anurakkhin
Anurakkhin (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J v.24.
Anurakkhiya
Anurakkhiya (adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur˚ difficult to guard Vin iii.149.
Anurañjita
Anurañjita [pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚).
-- 42 --
Anuratta
Anuratta (adj.) pp. of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattāraŋ); J i.297; Miln 146.
Anuravati
Anuravati [anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63.
Anuravanā
Anuravanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63.
Anuraho
Anuraho (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M i.27.
Anurujjhati
Anurujjhati [Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A iv.158; Dhs A 362. -- pp. anuruddha (q. v.).
Anuruddha
Anuruddha [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S iv.71, (anānuruddha).
Anurūpa
Anurūpa (adj.) [anu + rūpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with ( -- ˚) J i.91; vi.366 (tad˚); PvA 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning.
Anurodati
Anurodati [anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaŋ a.).
Anurodha
Anurodha [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satis- faction (opp. virodha) S i.111; iv.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; DhsA 362.
Anulapanā
Anulapanā (f.) [anu + lapanā, lap] scolding, blame, accusa- tion Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā).
Anulitta
Anulitta (adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J i.266; PvA 211.
Anulimpati
Anulimpati [anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (˚limpitabba). Caus. ˚limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (grd. ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment). -- pp. anulitta (q. v.).
Anulimpana
Anulimpana (nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394.
Anulepa
Anulepa [fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152.
Anulokin
Anulokin (adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing ( -- ˚) M i.147 (sīsa˚).
Anuloma
Anuloma (adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D ii.273 (anānuloma, q. v.) S iv.401; Ps ii.67, 70; DhA ii.208. -- nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148. -- ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA ii.208. -- paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin i.1; A iv.448.
Anulomika
Anulomika (& ˚ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agree- able; in proper order, adapted to ( -- ˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239; A i.106; iii.116 sq.; It 103 (sāmaññassa˚); Sn 385 (pabbajita˚); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65.
Anulometi
Anulometi [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372.
Anuḷāratta
Anuḷāratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + uḷāra] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24.
Anuvajja
Anuvajja (adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta SnA 396).
Anuvattaka
Anuvattaka (adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka˚). -- 2. following, siding with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.).
Anuvattati
Anuvattati [Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D ii.244; Vin ii.309 (Bdhgh.); iv.218; J i.125, 300; DA i.288; PvA 19. -- 2. to practice, execute Pv iv. 712. -- Caus. ˚vatteti (q. v.).
Anuvattana
Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with ( -- ˚), compliance, observance, obedience J i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78.
Anuvattin
Anuvattin (adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with ( -- ˚), obedient J ii.348 (f. ˚inī); iii.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma˚); Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla VvA 71); DhA ii.161.
Anuvatteti
Anuvatteti [anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakkaŋ: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.).
Anuvadati
Anuvadati [Sk. ava˚; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80, 88. -- grd. anuvajja (q. v.).
Anuvadanā
Anuvadanā (f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda +).
Anuvasati
Anuvasati [anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J ii.421. Caus. ˚vāseti to pass, spend (time) J vi.296. -- pp. ˚vuttha (q. v.).
Anuvassaŋ
Anuvassaŋ (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24.
Anuvassika
Anuvassika (adj.) [fr. anuvassaŋ] one who has (just) pas- sed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).
Anuvāceti
Anuvāceti [anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D i.104 (= tehi aññesaŋ vācitaŋ anuvācenti DA i.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhāseti.
Anuvāta
Anuvāta1 [anu + vā to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ŋ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaŋ). A i.226 (˚paṭivātaŋ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at J ii.382 "with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.).
Anuvāta
Anuvāta2 [anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus' garments (cīvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254, 297; ii.177; iv.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient).
Anuvāda
Anuvāda [fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5, 32; A ii.121 (atta˚, para˚); Vbh 376. -- 2. in combn. vādânuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B iv.) D i.161; M i.368. -- adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88 sq.; iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q. v.).
Anuvāsana
Anuvāsana (nt.) [fr. anuvāseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353.
Anuvāseti
Anuvāseti [anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. ˚vāsanīya ibid.; pp. ˚vāsita Miln 214.
Anuvikkhitta
Anuvikkhitta (adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S v.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa).
Anuvigaṇeti
Anuvigaṇeti [anu + vi + gaṇeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109.
-- 43 --
Anuvicarati
Anuvicarati [anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D i.235; J ii.128; iii.188; PvA 189 (= anupariyāti). -- Caus. ˚vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaŋ cetasā a.). -- pp. anuvicarita (q. v.).
Anuvicarita
Anuvicarita [pp. of anuvicāreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S iii.203 (manasā); DA i.106 (= anucarita).
Anuvicāra
Anuvicāra [anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra).
Anuvicinaka
Anuvicinaka [fr. anu + vicināti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365.
Anuvicinteti
Anuvicinteti [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D ii.203; S i 203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper. "marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhammaŋ ˚ayaŋ); J iii.396; iv.227; v.223 (dhammaŋ ˚cintayanto).
Anuvicca
Anuvicca [ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu -- v -- icca for anvicca), cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M i.301, 361 (v. l. ˚vijja); A ii.3, 84; v.88; Dh 229 (= jānitvā DhA iii.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditvā SnA 431); J i.459 (= jānitvā C.); iii.426; Pug. 49. -- kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M i.379 (= ˚viditvā C.) = A iv.185.
Anuvijjaka
Anuvijjaka [fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161.
Anuvijjati
Anuvijjati [anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. ˚vijjitiŋ J iii.506; ger. ˚viditvā Sn A 431, also ˚vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo). -- Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out J v.162. -- pp. anuvidita (q. v.).
Anuvijjhati
Anuvijjhati [anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J vi.439 -- 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA iii.380 (aparādhaŋ). -- pp. anuviddha (q. v.).
Anuvitakketi
Anuvitakketi [anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti D i.119; iii.242; S v.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A iii.383.
Anuvidita
Anuvidita [pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 (= anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu iii.398.
Anuviddha
Anuviddha (adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with ( -- ˚) VvA 278.
Anuvidhīyati
Anuvidhīyati [cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) M ii.105 = Th 1, 875; S iv.199; J ii.98; iii.357.
Anuvidhīyanā
Anuvidhīyanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati] acting according to, conformity with M i.43.
Anuviloketi
Anuviloketi [anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M i.339; Sn p. 140; J i.53; Miln 7 (lakaŋ), 21 (parisaŋ), 230.
Anuvivaṭṭa
Anuvivaṭṭa [anu + vivaṭṭa] an "after -- evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhuɔs dress: a sub -- vivaṭṭa (q. v.) Vin i.287 (vivaṭṭa +).
Anuvisaṭa
Anuvisaṭa (anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over S v.277 sq.; J iv.102.
Anuvuttha
Anuvuttha [pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita] living with, staying, dwelling J ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (id.).
Anuvejja
Anuvejja (adj.) in an˚ see anuvijjati.
Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana
Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana (e. g. Vin iv.15; J i.12) (nt.) [anu + vyañjana] accompanying (i. e. secondary) attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso "in detail"); M iii.126; S iv.168; A iv.279 (abl.); v.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400. -- gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D i.70 (cf. MVastu iii.52); iii.225; S iv.104; A i.113; ii.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351).
Anusaŋyāyati
Anusaŋyāyati [anu + saŋ + yāyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M i.209 (Bhagavantaŋ ˚itvā), J iv.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti.
Anusaŋvacchara
Anusaŋvacchara (adj.) [anu + saŋv˚] yearly DhA i.388 (nakkhattaŋ). Usually nt. ˚ŋ as adv. yearly, every year J i.68; v.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a.
Anusañcarati
Anusañcarati [anu + saŋ + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M i.279; S v.53, 301; J i.202; iii.502; PvA 279 (nagaraŋ). -- pp. anusañcarita (q. v.).
Anusañcarita
Anusañcarita [pp. of anusañcarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387.
Anusañceteti
Anusañceteti [anu + saŋ + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12.
Anusaññāti
Anusaññāti [either anu + saŋ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaŋyāti as short form of anusaŋyāyati, like anuyāti > anuyāyati of anu + saŋ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaŋyāti in same meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf. ˚saññātuŋ A i.68. (janapade).
Anusaṭa
Anusaṭa [Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ] sprinkled with ( -- ˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa VvA 36).
Anusatthar
Anusatthar [n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J iv.178 (ācariya +). Cp. anusāsaka.
Anusatthi
Anusatthi (f.) [Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana] admonition, rule, instruction J i.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347.
Anusandati
Anusandati [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati.
Anusandahati
Anusandahati [anu + saŋ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saŋ + dhā] to direct upon, to apply to A iv.47 sq. (cittaŋ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.).
Anusandhanatā
Anusandhanatā (f.) [= anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa).
Anusandhi
Anusandhi (f.) [fr. anu + saŋ + dhā] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiŋ ghaṭeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J i.106; 308; DhA ii.40, 47; etc.
-- 44 --
Anusampavankatā
Anusampavankatā (f.) [anu + saŋ + pavankatā; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa).
Anusaya
Anusaya [anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. iii.31; S. iii.130, iv.33, v.28 236; A. i.44; ii.157; iii.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānâbhinivesânusayā) S. ii.17; iii.10, 135, 161; A. v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. i.188; ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197; A i.132, iv.70 doubt at M. i.486 -- ignorance lust and hatred at S iv.205, M iii.285. At D iii.254, 282; S v.60; and A iv.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence -- forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps i.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs i.42.
Anusayita
Anusayita [pp. of anuseti, anu + śī] dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta˚ latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin.
Anusayin
Anusayin (adj.) [fr. anusaya] D ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain.
Anusarati
Anusarati [anu + sṛ] to follow, conform oneself to S iv. 303 (phalaŋ anusarissati BB, but balaŋ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). -- Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aññamaññaŋ a. anupeseti).
Anusavati
Anusavati at S ii.54 (āsavā na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & iv. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2.
Anusahagata
Anusahagata (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S iii.130; Kvu 81, see aṇu˚.
Anusāyika
Anusāyika (adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M ii.70 (ābādha, v. l. BB anussāyika); DhA i.431 (roga).
Anusāra
Anusāra [fr. anu + sṛ] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases ( -- ˚) anusārena (instr.) in consequence of, in accordance with, according to J i.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91.
Anusārin
Anusārin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in formula dhammânusārin saddhânusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D iii.254; M i.142, 479; S iii.225; v.200 sq.; A i.74; iv.10; Pug 15. -- Cp. also S i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (id.); J vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha˚).
Anusāreti
Anusāreti see anusarati.
Anusāsaka
Anusāsaka [fr. anusāsati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J ii.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar.
Anusāsati
Anusāsati [Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās] 1. to advise, ad- monish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin i.83; D i.135; ii.154; Dh 77, 159 (aññaŋ); J vi.368; cp. i.103; Pv ii.68; PvA 148. -- grd. anusāsiya Vin i.59; and ˚sāsitabba DhA iii.99. -- Pass ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200; Miln 186. -- 2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) S i.236 = Sn 1002 (paṭhaviŋ dhammenam -- anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); J ii.2; vi.517 (rajjassa = rajjaŋ C., i. e. take care of) DA i.246 (read ˚sāsantena); PvA 161 (rajjaŋ). -- pp. anusiṭṭha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati.
Anusāsana
Anusāsana (nt.) [Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās] advice, instruction, admonition D iii.107; A i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya, cp. anusāsanī); Miln 359.
Anusāsanī
Anusāsanī (f.) [fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S v.108; A ii.147; iii.87; v.24 sq., 49, 338; J v.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv iii.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81. -- pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin ii.200; D i.212, 214; iii.220; A i.170; v.327; J iii.323; Ps ii.227 sq.
Anusikkhati
Anusikkhati [Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. med. ˚amāna); S i.235; A iv. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vattaŋ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; J i.89; ii.98; iii.315; v.334; vi.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. -- Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [= Sk. anuśikṣayati] Miln 352.
Anusikkhin
Anusikkhin (adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M i. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii.324).
Anusiṭṭha
Anusiṭṭha (Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, ad- monished, advised; ordered, commanded M ii.96; J i.226; Pv ii.811; Miln 284, 349.
Anusibbati
Anusibbati [anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin iii.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.).
Anusuṇāti
Anusuṇāti [anu + śru] to hear; pret. anassuŋ [Sk. an- vaśruvaŋ] I heard M i.333.
Anusumbhati
Anusumbhati [anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J vi.76.
Anusuyyaŋ
Anusuyyaŋ [cp. Sk. anasūyaŋ] reading at J iii.27, see anasuyyaŋ.
Anusuyyaka
Anusuyyaka (adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. SnA 332); J ii.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); v.112.
Anuseṭṭhi
Anuseṭṭhi [anu + seṭṭhi] 1. an under -- seṭṭhi (banker, mer- chant) J v.384 (see anu B iii. a.). -- 2. in redupl. cpd. seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi (see anu B iv) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well -- to -- do families J vi.331.
Anuseti
Anuseti [anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S ii.65; iii.36; iv.208. -- 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M i.40, 108, 433; S ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) iv.188; A i.283; iii.246; Pug 32, 48. -- pp. anusayita (q. v.).
Anusocati
Anusocati [anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atītaŋ na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv i.127; ii.68; PvA 95.
Anusocana
Anusocana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65.
Anusota˚
Anusota˚ [anu + sota, in ˚ŋ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusotaŋ (adv.) along the stream or current, down -- stream A ii.12; J i.70 (opp. paṭisotaŋ against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto). -- gāmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A ii.5, 6 (opp. paṭi˚); Sn. 319 (= sotaŋ anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62.
-- 45 --
Anussati
Anussati (f.) [Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati -- ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Sangha˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚, i. e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D iii.250, 280 (cp. A i.211); A iii.284, 312 sq., 452; v.329 sq.; Ps i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna -- sati, maraṇa -- sati, kāyagatā -- sati, upasamânussati) at A i.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D i.81; S v.67 = It 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); A iii.284, 325, 452. Ps i.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat -- ânuttariya).
Anussada
Anussada (adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA iv.165 expls. with taṇhā -- ussāvâbhāva, vv. ll. ˚ussada˚); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara).
Anussaraṇa
Anussaraṇa (nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, me- mory, recollection It 107 (= anussati at id. p. S v.67); PvA 25, 29.
Anussarati
Anussarati [Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D ii.8, 53, 54 (jātito etc.); S iii.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaŋ); v.67 (dhammaŋ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaŋ); A i.25, 164 (pubbenivāsaŋ), 207 (Tathāgataŋ, Dhammaŋ etc.); iii.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaŋ), 418; v.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); It 82 (dhammaŋ), 98 (pubbenivāsaŋ); J i.167; ii.111; Dh 364; Pv i.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA i.257; KhA 213; DhA ii.84; iv.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. -- pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). -- Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J ii.147.
Anussaritar
Anussaritar [n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S v.197, 225 (saritar +); A v.25, 28.
Anussava
Anussava [anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.] hear- say, report, tradition M i.520; ii.211; S ii.115; iv.138; A i.26; J i.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (id.); iv.441; instr. ˚ena from hearsay, by report A ii.191 (cf. itihītihaŋ).
Anussavana
Anussavana (nt.) [anu + savana fr. śru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira -- saddo anussavane, from hearsay).
Anussavika
Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay M i.520; ii.211. Cp. anussutika.
Anussāvaka
Anussāvaka [fr. anussāveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74.
Anussāvana
Anussāvana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. anussāveti] a proclamation Vin i.317, 340; v.170, 186, 202 sq.
Anussāvita
Anussāvita [pp. of anussāveti] proclaimed, announced Vin i.103.
Anussāveti
Anussāveti [anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrā- vayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" AvŚ. i.102; ii.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.); ii.48 (saddaŋ a.). -- pp. anussāvita.
Anussuka
Anussuka (adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D iii.47, also anissukin and apalāsin.
Anussukita
Anussukita [an + ussuk˚] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka.
Anussuta
Anussuta1 (adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + sṛ] free from lust Dh 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada.
Anussuta
Anussuta2 [anu + suta, pp. of śru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S ii.9; Pug 14.
Anussutika
Anussutika (adj.) [fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DA i.106, 107.
Anussuyyaka
Anussuyyaka see anusuyyaka.
Anuhasati
Anuhasati [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA i.256.
Anuhīrati
Anuhīrati [for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ] to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna D ii.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram˚; glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).
Anūna
Anūna (adj.) [Vedic anūna, an + ūna] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J vi 273; Dpvs v.52; Miln 226; DA i.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya).
Anūnaka = anūna
Anūnaka = anūna Dpvs iv.34.
Anūnatā
Anūnatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anūna] completeness Cp. iii.611.
Anūpa
Anūpa (adj.) [Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. along- side of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (˚khetta); Miln 129 (˚khetta).
Anūpaghāta
Anūpaghāta [metrically for anupa˚] not killing, not mur- dering. Dh 185 (= anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anūpadhika
Anūpadhika for anu˚ in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi.
Anūpanāhin
Anūpanāhin (adj.) [an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa] not bearing ill -- will, not angry with J iv.463.
Anūpama
Anūpama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama).
Anūpalitta
Anūpalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta, with ū in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA iv.72.
Anūpavāda
Anūpavāda [an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 (= anupavādanañ cɔ eva anupavadāpanañ ca DhA iii.238).
Anūhata
Anūhata (adj.) [pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA iv.48).
Aneka
Aneka (adj.) (usually ˚ -- ) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (saŋvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn 688 (˚sākhā); Dh 153 (˚jātisāra); J iv.2; vi.366. -- pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin i.16; Sn p. 15. -- rūpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 (= anekavidha). -- vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA i.103. -- vihita various, manifold D i.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA i.103 (= anekavidha).
Anekaŋsā
Anekaŋsā (f.) [an + ekaŋsā] doubt Nd2 1.
Anekaŋsikatā
Anekaŋsikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anekaŋsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93.
Aneja
Aneja (adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D ii.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA iv. 194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha PvA 230).
Anedha
Anedha (adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J iv.26 (=anindhana).
Aneḷa
Aneḷa (adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus
-- 46 --
expld. at DA i.282, viz. elagalana -- virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vācā speech: "clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = D i.114 = S i.189; A ii.51, 97; iii.114, 195. Cp. also M Vastu iii. 322. -- ˚mūga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D iii.265; Sn 70 (= alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259.
Aneḷaka
Aneḷaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e. g. Av. Ś. i.187, 243; M Vastu i.339; iii.322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M ii.5; J vi.529.
Anesanā
Anesanā (f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S ii.194; J ii.86; iv.381; Miln 343, 401; DA i.169; DhA iv.34; Sdhp 392, 427.
Ano
Ano -- is a frequent form of compn. an -- ava, see ava.
Anoka
Anoka (nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S v.24 = A v.232 = Dh 87 (okā anokaŋ āgamma). <-> adj. homeless, free from attachment S i.176; Dh 87 (= anālaya DhA ii.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra -- sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaŋ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhāra -- viññānɔ ādīnaŋ anokāsabhūta). sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S iii.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anālaya -- cārin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka˚); DhA iv.174 (= anālaya -- cārin); Miln 386.
Anogha
Anogha in anogha -- tiṇṇa see ogha.
Anojaka = anojā
Anojaka = anojā Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā).
Anojagghati
Anojagghati at D i.91 is v. l. for anujagghati.
Anojā
Anojā (f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J vi.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J i.9 (˚dāma, a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (id.); DhA ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka).
Anottappa
Anottappa (nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D iii.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin.
Anottāpin & Anottappin
Anottāpin & Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D iii.252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug 20, 24.
Anodaka
Anodaka (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J i.307; DhA i.52; Sdhp 443.
Anodissaka
Anodissaka (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. ˚vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J i.81; ii 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka -- vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.
Anonamati
Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami -- daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ vv. ll., see Miln 427).
Anopa
Anopa see anūpa.
Anoma
Anoma (adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds. -- guṇa supreme virtue DA i.288. -- dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma˚); Vv 437. -- dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J i.228. -- nāma of perfect name S i.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). -- nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa -- viriyatāya a. VvA 284). -- pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahāpañña SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa -- pañña ThA 296), DhA i.31. -- vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn 686 J vi.202. -- viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353.
Anomajjati
Anomajjati [anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M i.80, 509; S v.216.
Anorapāra
Anorapāra (adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319.
Anoramati
Anoramati [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J iii.487; DhA iii.9 (ger. ˚itvā continually).
Anovassa
Anovassa (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J v.317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.).
Anovassaka
Anovassaka (adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211; iv.272; J i.172; ii.50; iii.73; DhA ii. 263; ThA 188.
Anosita
Anosita (adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 (= anajjhositaŋ Nd1 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaŋ ṭhānaŋ SnA 566).
Anta
Anta1 [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant -- ; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting -- point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S iv.368 (of Nibbāna); Sn 467; J ii.159. antaŋ karoti to make an end (of) Sn 283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā. -- loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J i.203 (vijay˚). -- 2. limit, border, edge Vin i.47; Dh 305 (van˚); J iii.188. -- 3. side: see ekamantaŋ (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaŋ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10; S ii.17; iii.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10; S ii.17; J i.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles (?), viz. sakkāya, s. -- samudaya, s. -- nirodha D iii.216, cp. A iii. 401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s. -- nirodhagāmini -- paṭipadā at S iii.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea -- side, country -- side ); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv ii.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vanânta e. g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Av. Ś. i.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. -- ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2. -- ânanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D i.22; DA i.115. -- ânantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D i.22 (see expln. at DA i.115); S iii.214, 258 sq.; Ps i.155. -- kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassɔa. (of the Buddha) M i.48, 531; A ii.2; iii.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A ii.163 (vijjāyɔ); Sn 1148 (pañhānɔ). -- -- kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S iv.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA iv.45. -- gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata). -- gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin i.172; D iii.45, 48 (an˚); S i.154; A i.154; ii.240; iii.130; Ps i.151 sq. -- gū one
-- 47 --
who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A iv.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. -- ruddhi at J vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -- vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J iii.159. -- saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D i.22, cp. DA i 115.
Anta
Anta2 (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākāsɔânañca and viññāṇɔânañca); D i.23, 34 = D iii.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (˚pañña); Dh 179, 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA iii.197); J i.178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J ii.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4. -- acc. as adv. in ekantaŋ extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka.
Anta
Anta3 (nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J i.66, 260 (˚vaddhi -- maŋsa etc.); Vism 258; DhA i.80. -- gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin i.275 (˚ābādha). -- guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S ii.270; A iv.132; Kh iii. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. -- mukha the anus J iv.402. -- vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258.
Antaka
Antaka [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin i.21; S i.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraṇa -- sankhāto antako DhA ii.366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA iii.434).
Antamaso
Antamaso (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. Ś. i.314; Divy 161] even Vin iii. 260; iv.123; D i.168; M iii.127; A v.195; J ii.129; DA i.170; SnA 35; VvA 155.
Antara
Antara (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraŋ difference. I. (Adj. -- n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as -- ˚ in cpds. āmis˚ with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303; dos˚ with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; PvA 78 (so read for des˚). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan˚ antaraŋ ṭhānaŋ PvA 139 139. -- 2. In noun -- function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīpɔ antara -- vāsin living on the island); DhA i.358 (kaṇṇa -- chidd˚ the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J v.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara -- dhāyati (for antaraŋ dhāyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraŋ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmiŋ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv i.1011 (dīghaŋ antaraŋ = dīghaŋ kālaŋ PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmiŋ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J v.287; Pug 55 (eḷaka -- m -- antaraŋ occasion of getting rain). S i.20, quoted DA i.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiŋ antaraŋ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiŋ kāraṇā. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this"; J vi.8 (assa antaraŋ na passiŋsu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antaraŋ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M iii.14; J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummāraŋ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J vi.56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaŋ karoti). II. In prep. use (˚ -- ) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaŋ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln 11. -- (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213; ˚dīpake in the centre of the island J i.240; ˚dvāre in the door J v.231; ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA 109; ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiŋ yeva a. during one meal J i 19 = DhA i.249; ˚bhattasmiŋ id. DhA iv.12; ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaŋ) = J i.218. III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D i.56; S iv.59, 73; J i.393; PvA 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA i.63, 358. -- loc. antare in, inside of, in between ( -- ˚ or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta); DhA iii.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.). -- abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA ii.86; iv.191; PvA 272. IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J iv.139; Miln 382 (solid; DhA i.397; PvA 63 (tadantaraŋ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara. -- atīta gone past in the meantime J ii.243. -- kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D i 54. -- kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 -- cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. -- cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S iv.173. -- bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J i.125. -- bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara -- raṭṭha) Vin iii.47 -- raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J v.135. -- vāsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -- vāsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94, 289; ii.272. Cf. next. -- sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.).
Antaraŋsa
Antaraŋsa [B.Sk. antarâŋsa; antara + aŋsa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J v.173 = vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihatɔ antaraŋso).
Antaraṭṭhaka
Antaraṭṭhaka (adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima -- pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka2). First phrase at Vin i.31, 288; iii 31; second at M i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta -- raṭṭhaka); A i.136 (in nom.); J i.390; Miln 396.
Antaradhāna
Antaradhāna (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. ˚dhāyana.
Antaradhāyati
Antaradhāyati [antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J i.119 = DhA i.248; DhA iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA 152, 217, (˚dhāyi), 245; VvA 48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J i.147; ii.415; PvA 123.
-- 48 --
Antaradhāyana
Antaradhāyana (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA iv.191. (v. l. ˚adhāna).
Antarayati
Antarayati [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in be- tween, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) J i.218.
Antarahita
Antarahita (adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D i.222. M i.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; ii.209; M ii.57.
Antarā
Antarā (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (˚ -- ) and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaŋ antarā ca Nāḷandaŋ between R. and N.). -- c. gen. & loc. Vin ii.161 (satthīnaŋ between the thighs, where id. p. at J i.218 has antara -- satthīsu); A ii.245 (satthīnaŋ. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. -- occasionally Miln 251. -- (3). (pref.) see cpds. -- kathā "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D ii.1, 8, 9; S i.79; iv.281; A iii.167; Sn p. 115; DA i.49 and freq. passim. -- gacchati to come in between, to prevent J vi.295. -- parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D iii.237; A i.233; Pug 16. -- magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J i.253; Miln 16; DhA ii.21; iii.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara˚). -- maraṇa premature death DhA i.409; PvA 136. -- muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.
Antarāpaṇa
Antarāpaṇa (nt.) [antarā + paṇa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J i.55; vi.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA i.181.
Antarāya
Antarāya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to ( -- ˚); prevention, bar; danger, accident to ( -- ). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112, 169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚, aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriŋsapa˚, jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā -- caura -- manuṣy -- amanuṣya -- vyāḍ -- agny -- udakaŋ. -- D i.3, 25, 26; A iii.243, 306; iv.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (= jīvit˚ DhA iii.431); J i.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA ii 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles) -- antarāyaŋ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin i.15; J vi.171; Vism 120; PvA 20. -- kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D i.227; S i.34; A i.161; Pv iv.322.
Antarāya
Antarāya2 (adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antarā Sn A 603.
Antarāyika
Antarāyika (adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = ii.272; M i.130; S ii.226; ThA 288.
Antarāyikin
Antarāyikin (adj. -- n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye).
Antarāḷa
Antarāḷa (nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs i.52; iii.53 (nabh˚).
Antarika
Antarika (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an˚. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka -- yojan˚ ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. -- 3. inside: see antarikā. -- anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, 212 (ān˚); iv.234.
Antarikā
Antarikā (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). <-> 2. the neighbourhood, region of ( -- ˚), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚); J i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace); A i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning).
Antalikkha
Antalikkha (nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari -- kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D ii.15; A iii.239; iv.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa -- saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166. -- ga going through the air A i.215. -- cara walking through the air Vin i.21; D i.17; S i.111; J v.267; DA i.110.
Antavant
Antavant (ādj.) [anta1 + ˚vant] having an end, finite D i.22, 31, 187; Ps i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. -- anantavant endless, infinite A v.193 (loka). See also loka.
Anti
Anti (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and -- , Ger. ant -- , ent -- ] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J v.399 (tavɔ antiŋ āgatā, read as tavɔ anti -- m -- āgatā; C. santikaŋ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikassɔ anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika.
Antika
Antika (adj. -- n.) -- 1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh viii.1. (odak˚); J vi.565 (antike loc. = anti near). -- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S i.130 (purisā etad -- antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons.
Antima
Antima (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D ii.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antimaŋ dehaŋ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarīraŋ antimaŋ dhāreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarīrɔ antima -- dhārin); Sdhp 278. -- dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara v. l.); VvA 163. -- dhārin = prec. S i.14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. -- vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i. 121, 135, 167, 320. -- sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S i.210 (Buddho a˚ -- sarīro); A ii.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA iv.166 (= koṭiyaŋ ṭhito attabhāvo).
Ante˚
Ante˚ (pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of -- aḥ to -- e, instead of the usual -- o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: ˚pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin i.75, 269; A v.81; J ii.125; iv.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; ˚purikā harem woman DhsA 403; ˚vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60; iii.25; S i.180; iv.136; J i. 166; ii.278; iii.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; ˚vāsin = ˚vāsika Vin iii.66; D i.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M iii.116; DA i.36.
Anto
Anto (indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚ -- ) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesanaŋ gata gone into the house J i.158; anto jālaŋ pavisati go into the net DhA iii.175; anto gāmaŋ pavisati to go into the village DhA ii.273; anto nagaraŋ pavisati DhA ii.89; PvA 47. -- (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J ii.182; gāme DhA ii.52; gehe DhA ii.84; nadiyaŋ J vi.278; nivesane J ii.323; vasse in the rainy season J iv.242; vimānasmiŋ Pv i.101; sattāhe inside of a week PvA 55.
-- 49 --
-- koṭisanthāra "house of the Golden Pavement" J iv.113. -- gadha (˚gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. -- jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D iii.61 (opp. to servants); A i.152; J vi.301; DA i.300. -- jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA iv.41. -- jālikata "in -- netted", gone into the net D i.45; DA i.127. -- nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA 18. -- nimugga altogether immersed D i.75; A iii.26. -- parisoka inner grief Ps i.38. -- pura = antepura J i.262. -- mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin iii.19. -- bhavika being inside Miln 95. -- rukkhatā being among trees J i.7. -- vasati to inhabit, live within S iv.136. -- vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J v.118. -- vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66. -- vihāra the inside of the V. DhA i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -- samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). -- soka inner grief Ps i.38.
Andu
Andu [cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = iii.249 (tiṇ˚); D i.245; J i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse); DhA iv.54 (˚bandhana).
Andha
Andha (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148; PvA 3. -- dark, dull, blinding M iii.151 (˚andhaŋ adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaŋ tamaḥ); DhA ii.49 (˚vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A i.128; Th 2, 394 (= bāla ThA 258). See cpds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla, ˚bhūta. -- ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena VvA 337). -- karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). -- kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; D ii.12; A i.56; ii.54; iii.233; J iii.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj˚ VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA i.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. -- tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S v.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andhaŋ tamaŋ); J vi.247. -- bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J i.246, 262; vi.337; DhA ii.43, 89; iii.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. -- bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S iv.21; A ii.72; J vi.139 (spelled ˚būta); Dh 59, 174 (= paññā -- cakkhuno abhāvena DhA iii.175). -- vesa "blind form", disguise J iii.418.
Andhaka
Andhaka [fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad -- fly Sn 20 (= kāṇa -- makkhikānaŋ adhivacanaŋ SnA 33).
Anna
Anna (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maŋsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns aparɔ aṇṇa and pubbɔ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubbɔ aṇṇaŋ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (aparɔ aṇṇaŋ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi. -- D i.7; A i.107, 132; ii.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J iii.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214. -- āpa food & water Sdhp 100. -- da giving food Sn 297. -- pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv i.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43.
Annaya
Annaya in dur˚ see anvaya.
Anvakāsi
Anvakāsi 3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
Anvakkhara
Anvakkhara (adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syl- table", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaŋ.
Anvagā
Anvagā 3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā J v.258.
Anvagū
Anvagū 3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S i.39; Sn 586.
Anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ
Anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ (adv.) [anu + aḍḍha + māsa] every fort- night, twice a month M ii.8; Vin iv.315 (= anuposathikaŋ); DhA i.162; ii.25.
Anvattha
Anvattha (adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, ans- wering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (˚saññābhāva).
Anvadeva
Anvadeva (adv.) [anva -- d -- eva with euphonic d.; like samma- d -- eva corresponding to Sk. anvag -- eva] behind, after, later D i.172; M iii.172; S v.1 (spelt anudeva); A i.11; v. 214; It 34.
Anvaya
Anvaya (n. -- adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D ii. 83 = iii.100; M i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of); S ii.58; D iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaŋ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly, according to = paccayā PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). -- 2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with ( -- ˚) D i.46 (tad˚); M i.238 (kāyo citt˚ acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an˚ inconsistent); It 79 (tass˚). -- dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuŋ DhA ii.173); Sn 243, 251 (= duviññāpaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293).
Anvayatā
Anvayatā (f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body).
Anvahaŋ
Anvahaŋ (adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dāvs iv.8.
Anvāgacchati
Anvāgacchati [anu + ā + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 (= anubandhi PvA 260). -- 2. to come back again J i.454 (ger. ˚gantvāna). -- pp. anvāgata (q. v.).
Anvāgata
Anvāgata [pp. of anvāgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J iv.385; v.4.
Anvādisati
Anvādisati [anu + ā + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 (= uddissa dehi PvA 80); iii.28 (= ādisa PvA 181).
Anvādhika
Anvādhika (adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻ half and half ʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up.
Anvāmaddati
Anvāmaddati [anu + ā + maddati] to squeeze, wring J iii. 481 (galakaŋ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaŋ maddi).
Anvāya
Anvāya [ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D i.13 (ātappaŋ by means of self -- sacrifice), 97 (saŋvāsaŋ as a result of their cohabitation); J i.56 (buddhiŋ), 127 (piyasaŋvāsaŋ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaŋ). Often in phrase vuddhiŋ anvāya growing up, e. g. J i.278; iii. 126; DhA ii.87.
Anvāyika
Anvāyika (adj. -- n.) [fr. anvāya] following; one who follows, a companion D iii.169; Nd2 59; J iii.348.
Anvārohati
Anvārohati [anu + ā + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J iv.465 (aor. anvāruhi).
-- 50 --
Anvāvassa
Anvāvassa at J v.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain.
Anvāviṭṭha
Anvāviṭṭha [pp. of anvāvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S i.114.
Anvāvisati
Anvāvisati [anu + ā + visati] to go into, to take posses- sion of, to visit M i.326; S i.67; Miln 156. -- pp. anvāviṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati.
Anvāsatta
Anvāsatta [pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A iv.356 (v. l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q. v.). See also foll.
Anvāsattatā
Anvāsattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anvāsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta A iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35).
Anvāsanna
Anvāsanna [pp. of anu + ā + sad] endowed with, pos- sessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v. l. ajjhāpanna), = A iv.356 which has anvāsatta.
Anvāssavati
Anvāssavati [anu + ā + savati, sru] to stream into, to attack, befall D i.70; A iii.99; Pug 20, 58.
Anvāhata
Anvāhata [pp. of anu + ā + han] struck, beaten; per- plexed Dh 39 (˚cetasa).
Anvāhiṇḍati
Anvāhiṇḍati [anu + ā + hiṇḍati] to wander to (acc.) A iv.374, 376 [BSk. same, e. g. Divy 68 etc.].
Anveti
Anveti [cp. anu + eti, from i] to follow, approach, go with Sn 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59); Dh 1 (= kāyikaŋ . . . dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA i.24), 2, 71, 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with v. l. BB at PvA 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed).
Anvesa
Anvesa [from next] seeking, searching, investigation, M i.140 (˚ŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find).
Anvesati
Anvesati [anu + esati] to look, for search, seek S i.112 (ppr. anvesaŋ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto). -- aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with v. l. PvA 99 as anventi of anveti).
Anvesin
Anvesin [anu -- esin] (adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Sn 965 (kusala˚).
Anha
Anha [Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha.
Apa˚ [Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. a)po/, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. <-> A compar. form fr. apa is apara "further away"] Well-defined directional prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base -- prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). <-> 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away; ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= a)potiqhmi, abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. <-> 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya˚ > vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra, ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta, ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati.
Apakaḍḍhati
Apakaḍḍhati [apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa -- karṣati] to draw away, take off, remove D i.180; iii.127; DhA ii.86. <-> Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti J i.342; iv.415; Miln 34. -- Cp. apakassati; & see pakattheti.
Apakata
Apakata [pp. of apakaroti] put off, done away, in ājīvik âpakata being without a living M i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata); Miln 279 (id.). At It 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v. l. ā˚ vakatā).
Apakataññu
Apakataññu (adj.) [a + pa + kataññu] ungrateful Vin ii.199.
Apakantati
Apakantati [apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati] to cut off Th 2, 217 (gale = gīvaŋ chindati ThA 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.).
Apakaroti
Apakaroti [apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning] to throw away, put off; hurt, offend, slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 (q. v.). -- pp. apakata (q. v.). Cp. apakāra.
Apakassati
Apakassati [Sk. apa -- & ava -- kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati] to throw away, remove Sn 281 (v.l. BB & SnA ava˚; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati SnA 311). -- ger. apakassa Sn ii.198 = Miln 389. See also apakāsati.
Apakāra & ˚ka
Apakāra & ˚ka [cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti] injury, mischief; one who injures or offends DhA iii.63; Sdhp 283.
Apakāsati
Apakāsati at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as "draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)". The v. l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh's expln. "parisaŋ ākaḍḍhanti". -- Cp. A iii.145 & see avapakāsati. The reading at the id. p. at A v.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati), which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati).
Apakiritūna
Apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 T (reading of C. is abhi˚) is explained ThA 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense "to cast off, reject", to which also belongs kirāta in meaning "cast off" i. e. man of a so -- called low tribe. See also avakirati 2.
Apakkamati
Apakkamati [cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J iii.27; Sdhp 294. -- aor. apakkami Pv iv.75; ger. apakkamitvā PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv ii.928.
Apagacchati
Apagacchati [apa + gam] to go away, turn aside DhA i.401 (˚gantvā). -- pp. apagata (q. v.).
Apagata
Apagata [pp. of apagacchati] 1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed It 112; PvA 39, 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata). -- 2. (˚ -- ) freq. as prefix, meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); J i.61 (˚vattha without clothes); PvA 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling). -- Cp. apakata.
Apagabbha
Apagabbha (adj.) [a + pa + gabbha] not entering another womb, i. e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3.
Apagama
Apagama [Sk. apagama] going away, disappearance Sdhp 508.
Apanga
Apanga (apānga) [Sk. apānga] the outer corner of the eye J iii.419 (asitâpangin black -- eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avanga at Vin ii.267, where the phrase avangaŋ karoti, i. e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as "avangadese adhomukhaŋ lekhaŋ karonti". According to Kern, Toev. 20, Bdhgh's expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of "a coloured mark upon the body" (cp. PW. apānga).
Apacaya
Apacaya [fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness), decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213; cp. J iii.342; S ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. ācaya); J iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati); Vbh 106, 319, 326, 330.
-- 51 --
-- gāmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A v.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505, 1014; Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156).
Apacāyati
Apacāyati [fr. apa -- ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D i.91 (pūjeti +); J iii.82. <-> Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2) A iv.245; ThA 72 (here to apacināti 1). -- pp. apacita (q. v.).
Apacāyana
Apacāyana (nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J i.220; v.326; DA i.256 (˚kamma); VvA 24 (˚ŋ karoti = añjalikaŋ karoti); PvA 104 (˚kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).
Apacāyika
Apacāyika (adj.) [fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka MVastu i.198; Divy 293] honouring, respecting J iv.94 (vaddha˚, cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka.
Apacāyin
Apacāyin (adj.) [fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaŋ apaciti karaṇena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J i.47, 132, 201; ii.299; v.325; Miln 206; Sdhp 549.
Apacāra
Apacāra [fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi -- carati] falling off, fault, wrong doing J vi.375.
Apacita
Apacita [pp. of apacayati or apacināti] honoured, wors- hipped, esteemed Th 1, 186; J ii.169; iv.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita VvA 39); 3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21.
Apaciti
Apaciti (f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J i.220; ii.435; iii.82; iv.308; vi.88; Miln 180, 234 (˚ŋ karoti), 377 (pūjana +); SnA 332 (˚karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana.
Apacināti
Apacināti [apa + cināti] 1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less S iii.89 (opp. ācināti); Th 1, 807; J iv.172 (apacinethɔ eva kāmāni = viddhaŋseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor. 3rd pl. apaciyiŋsu (to be read for upacciŋsu) at J vi. 187 (akkhīni a. "the eyes gave out") and Pot. pres. apace ThA 72 (on v.40). -- 2. [= apacayati] to honour, esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraŋ (?) v. l apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); M i.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Th 1, 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); J v.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v. l. anapavinati). -- pp. apacita (q.v.).
Apacca
Apacca [Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); S i.69 (an˚) Sn 991; DA i.254.
Apaccakkha
Apaccakkha (adj.) [a + paṭi + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Miln 46 sq.
Apacchapurima
Apacchapurima (adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J iii.295.
Apajaha
Apajaha (adj.) [a + pajaha] not giving up, greedy, miserly A iii.76 (v. l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha).
Apajita
Apajita (nt.) [pp. of apa + ji] defeat Dh. 105.
Apajjhāyati
Apajjhāyati [apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi -- dhyāyati] to muse, meditate, ponder, consider M i.334 (nijjhāyati +); iii.14 (id.).
Apaññaka
Apaññaka (adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs vi.29.
Apaṭṭhapeti
Apaṭṭhapeti [Caus. fr. apa -- tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof] to put aside, leave out, neglect J iv.308; v.236.
Apaṇṇaka
Apaṇṇaka (adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a -- praśna -- ka] certain, true, absolute M i.401, 411; A v.85, 294, 296; J i.104 (where expld as ekaŋsika aviruddha niyyānika).
Apanṇṇakatā
Apanṇṇakatā (f.) [abstr. of apaṇṇaka] certainty, absolu- teness S iv.351 sq.
Apatacchika
Apatacchika only in khārāpatācch˚ (q. v.) a kind of torture.
Apattha
Apattha1 (adj.) [Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2] thrown away Dh 149 (= chaḍḍita DhA iii.112).
Apattha
Apattha2 2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q. v.).
Apatthaṭa
Apatthaṭa = avatthaṭa covered Th 1, 759.
Apatthita & Apatthiya
Apatthita & Apatthiya see pattheti.
Apadāna
Apadāna (nt.) 1. [= Sk. apadāna] removing, breaking off, D iii.88. -- 2. [= Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition, instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice), 7 (id.) M i.96; A v.337 sq. (saddhā˚) Th 1, 47. -- 3. legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaŋ, that is ʻ the stories ʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues ii.3. -- Cp. also pariyāpadāna.
Apadisa
Apadisa [fr apa + diś] reference, testimony, witness DhA ii.39.
Apadisati
Apadisati [apa + disati] to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159; J i.215; iii.234; iv.203; Miln 270; DhA ii.39; Nett 93.
Apadesa
Apadesa [cp. Sk. apadeśa] 1. reason, cause, argument M i.287 (an˚). -- 2. statement, designation PvA 8. -- 3. pretext J iii.60; iv.13; PvA 154. Thus also apadesaka J vi.179.
Apadhāreti
Apadhāreti [Caus. of apa + dhṛ, cp. Sk. ava -- dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231] to observe, request, ask ThA 16.
Apanata
Apanata [pp. of apanamati] "bent away", drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata ("strained forth & strained aside" Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) M i.386; S i.28.
Apanamati
Apanamati [semantically doubtful] to go away Sn 1102 (apanamissati, v. l. apalām˚ & apagam˚; expld at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. -- pp. apanata (q. v.) <-> Caus. apanāmeti.
Apanāmeti
Apanāmeti [Caus. fr. apanamati] 1. to take away, remove M i.96 = A i.198 (kathaŋ bahiddhā a. carry outside); Kh viii.4 (= aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ gameti KhA 220). -- 2. [= Sk. ava -- namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaŋ); S i.226 (id.); J ii.287 (id., v. l. apanetvā); D i.126 (hatthaŋ, for salute).
Apanidahati
Apanidahati (& apanidheti) [apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding -- place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. a)poti(qhmi = Lat. abdo "do away"] to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti, ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati); PvA 215 (˚dhāya ger.). -- pp. apanihita. -- Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123.
Apanihita
Apanihita [pp. of apanidahati] concealed, in abstr. ˚ttaŋ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft PvA 216.
Apanīta
Apanīta [Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta] taken away or off. removed, dispelled PvA 39.
Apanudati & Apanudeti
Apanudati & Apanudeti [apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati] to push or drive away, remove, dispel; pres. apanudeti Miln 38. aor. apānudi Pv i.86 (= apanesi PvA 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi PvA 86); Dāvs i.8. ger. apanujja D ii.223. See also der. apanudana.
-- 52 --
Apanudana & Apanūdana
Apanudana & Apanūdana (nt.) [Sk. apanodana, fr. apa- nudati] taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148 = J i.94 (dukkha˚); Sn 252 (id.); PvA 114 (id.).
Apanuditar
Apanuditar [n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ] remover, dispeller D iii.148.
Apaneti
Apaneti [apa + nī] to lead away, take or put away, remove J i.62, 138; ii.4, 155 (aor. apānayi) iii.26; Miln 188, 259, 413; PvA 41, 74, 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63. Pass. apanīyati S i.176. -- pp. apanīta (q. v.).
Apapibati
Apapibati [apa + pibati] to drink from something J ii.126 (aor. apāpāsi).
Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati
Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati [apa + vi + ūh] to push off, remove, scrape away A iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv. ll. ˚bbūhitvā); J i.265 (paŋsuŋ). -- Caus. ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush J iv.349 (paŋsuŋ).
Apabyāma
Apabyāma see apavyāma.
Apamāra
Apamāra [Sk. apasmāra] epilepsy Vin i.93. Cp. apasmāra.
Apamārika
Apamārika (adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmārin] epileptic Vin iv.8, 10, 11.
Apayāti
Apayāti [Sk. apayāti, apa + yā] to go away J vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati). -- Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss M iii.176; S ii.119.
Apayāna
Apayāna (nt.) [Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti] going away, retreat D i.9 (opp. upa˚); DA i.95.
Apara
Apara (adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix -- ra = Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. a)pwte/rw farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April). Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next, second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D iii.190 (˚pajā another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (nɔ); J i.59 (aparaŋ divasaŋ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc˚ais); iv.3 (dīpa); PvA 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D iii 128. -- nt. aparaŋ what follows i. e. future state, consequence; future Vin i.35 (nâparaŋ nothing more); Sn 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases adverbially; aparaŋ (acc.) further, besides, also J i.256; iii.278; often with other part. like athâparaŋ & further, moreover Sn 974; and puna cɔ aparaŋ It 100; Miln 418 (so read for puna ca paraŋ) and passim; aparam pi Vism 9. -- aparena in future D iii.201. -- Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparâparaŋ (local) to & fro J i.265, 278; PvA 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on J ii.377; Miln 132 VvA 271; PvA 176 (= punappunaŋ). -- anta (aparanta) = aparaŋ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward J v.471; Miln 292 (janapada). (b.) future D i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DA i.118); M ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi -- thought of the future); S iii.46 (id.). -- âpariya (fr. aparâpara) ever -- following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma J v.106; Miln 108. -- bhāga the future, lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on J i.34, 262; iv.1; VvA 66.
Aparajju
Aparajju (adv.) [Sk. apare -- dyus] on the foll. day Vin ii.167; S i.186; Miln 48.
Aparajjhati
Aparajjhati [Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh] to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin ii.78 = iii.161; J v.68; vi.367; Miln 189; PvA 263. -- pp. aparaddha & aparādhita (q. v.).
Aparaṇṇa
Aparaṇṇa (nt.) [apara + aṇṇa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265; Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ +); iv.265, 267; A iv. 108, 112 (tila -- mugga -- māsā˚; opp. sāli -- yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaŋ nāma sūpeyyaŋ); J v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚). See also dhañña & harita.
Aparaddha
Aparaddha [pp. of aparajjhati] missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) D i.91, 103, 180; S i.103 (suddhimaggaŋ); Th 1, 78; Sn 891 (suddhiŋ = viraddha khalita Nd1 300); PvA 195.
Aparapaccaya
Aparapaccaya (adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja -- ppatta +); D i.110 (id.); M ii 41; M i.491; S iii.83; DA i.278 (= nâssa paro paccayo).
Aparājita
Aparājita (adj.) [Vedic aparājita; a + parājita] unconquered Sn 269; J i.71, 165.
Aparādha
Aparādha [fr. apa + rādh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116.
Aparādhika
Aparādhika (adj.) [fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin] guilty, offending, criminal J ii.117 (vāja˚); Miln 149 (issara˚), 189 (aparādhikatā).
Aparādhita
Aparādhita [pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J v.26 (so read for aparadhɔ ito).
Aparāyin
Aparāyin (adj.) [a + parāyin, cp. parāyana] having no sup- port J iii.386 (f. ˚ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā).
Apalāpin
Apalāpin see apalāsin [Sk. apalāpin "denying, concealing" different].
Apalāḷeti
Apalāḷeti [apa + lāḷeti] to draw over to Vin i.85.
Apalāyin
Apalāyin (adj.) [a + palāyin] not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); J iv.296; v.4 (where C. gives variant "apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho", which latter has v. l. apalāsinī & is expld. by C. as palāpa -- rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin.
Apalāsin
Apalāsin (adj.) [apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin, apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd2 introd. p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pug 22 as "yassa puggalassa ayaŋ paḷāso pahīno ayaŋ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī" does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv. ll.] either "not neglectful, pure, clean" (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff, cp. apalāyin at J v.4), or "not selfish, not hard, generous" (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin), or "brave, fearless, energetic" (= apalāyin) D iii.47, cp. Pug 22. See palāsin.
Apalibuddha & Apalibodha
Apalibuddha & Apalibodha [a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati] unobstructed, unhindered, free J iii. 381 (˚bodha); Miln 388; DhA iii.198.
Apalekhana
Apalekhana (nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava -- lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthâpalekhana "hand -- licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthâvalekhana M i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug 55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaŋ apalekhati).
Apalekhati
Apalekhati [apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati] to lick off Pug A 231 (hatthaŋ).
Apalepa
Apalepa in "so ɔpalepa patito jarāgharo" at Th 2, 270 is to be read as "so palepa˚". Morris's interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous.
Apalokana
Apalokana (nt.) [fr. apaloketi] permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3) Vin ii.89; iv.152.
Apalokita
Apalokita [pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita] 1. asked per- mission, consulted S iii.5. -- 2. (nt.) permission, consent, M i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaŋ apalokesi). -- 3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna S iv.370.
-- 53 --
Apalokin
Apalokin (adj.) [Sk. avalokin] "looking before oneself", looking at, cautious Miln 398.
Apaloketi
Apaloketi [BSk. ava -- lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M i.557 (v. l. for apaciṇāti, where J v.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. <-> 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10, 11; iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); M i.337; S iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaŋ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); J vi.298 (vājānaŋ); DhA i.67. -- pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & ˚lokin.
Apavagga
Apavagga [Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggâpavagga Dāvs ii.62; iii.75.
Apavattati
Apavattati [apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto] to turn away or aside, to go away J iv.347 (v. l. apasakkati).
Apavadati
Apavadati [apa + vadati] to reproach, reprove, reject, despise D i.122 (= paṭikkhipati DA i.290); S v.118 (+ paṭikkosati).
Apavahati
Apavahati [apa + vahati] to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Miln 324 (kaddamaŋ).
Apaviṭṭha
Apaviṭṭha at Pv iii 82 is to be read apaviddha (q. v.).
Apaviṇāti
Apaviṇāti is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac˚ 2). As v. l. at J v.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv. ll. are anuvi˚ & apavī˚; meaning "not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati "to take care of, to pay attention to" (c. acc.) at M i.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv. ll. to this passage (see M. i.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.
Apaviddha
Apaviddha [pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh] thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed S i.202; iii.143; Sn 200 (susānasmiŋ = chaḍḍita SnA 250); Th 1, 635 = Dh 292 (= chaḍḍita DhA iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiŋ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); J i.255; iii.426; yi.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366.
Apaviyūhati
Apaviyūhati see appabbūhati.
Apavīṇati
Apavīṇati see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti).
Apavyāma
Apavyāma [apa + vyāma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile S i.226 (v. l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabyākato, abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at DhA ii.36); DhA ii.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma). For further detail see apasavya.
Apasakkati
Apasakkati [apa + sakkati] to go away, to go aside J iv.347 (v. l. for apavattati); VvA 101; PvA 265 (aor. ˚sakki = apakkami).
Apasavya
Apasavya (adj.) [apa + savya] right (i. e. not left), con- trary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv. ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato), where C. expls. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaŋ katvā, "which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaŋ karoti to go on the right side" (Morris J P T S. 1886, 127). -- See apavyāma.
Apasāda
Apasāda [fr. apa + sad] putting down, blame, dispara- gement M iii.230.
Apasādita
Apasādita [pp. of apasādeti] blamed, reproached, disparaged S ii.219; SnA 541.
Apasādeti
Apasādeti [Caus. of apa + sad] 1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213, 263; J v.417 (= uyyojeti). -- 2. to depreciate, blame, disparage Vin iii.101; M iii.230 (opp. ussādeti); DA i.160. -- pp. apasādita (q. v.).
Apasmāra
Apasmāra [Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ] epilepsy, convulsion, fit J iv.84. Cp. apamāra.
Apassanto
Apassanto etc. see passati.
Apassaya
Apassaya [cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti] 1. support, rest ThA 258. -- 2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚ a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) M i.78; J i 493; iii.235. -- sâppassaya with a head rest J iv.299. -- pīṭhaka a chair with a head -- rest J iii.235.
Apassayika
Apassayika (adj.) [fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin -- ˚] reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚ one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) M i.78; J iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pug 55.
Apassita
Apassita [pp. of apasseti] 1. leaning against J ii.69 (tāla- mūlaŋ = nissāya ṭhita C.). -- 2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraŋ = nissita VvA 101); J iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita.
Apasseti
Apasseti [Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. -- 1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head -- rest). -- 2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or -- ˚) Vin iii.38; J i.214; PvA 189. -- pp. apassita (q. v.). -- See also avasseti.
Apassena
Apassena (nt.) [fr. apasseti] a rest, support, dependence M iii.127 (˚ka); D iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj. caturâpassena one who has the fourfold support viz. sankhāyɔ ekaŋ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti A v.30. -- phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab, head -- rest Vin i.48; ii.175, 209.
Apahattar
Apahattar [n. ag. to apaharati] one who takes away or removes, destroyer M i 447 = Kvu 528.
Apahara
Apahara [Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati] taking away, stealing, robbing J ii.34.
Apaharaṇa
Apaharaṇa (nt.) = apahara Miln 195.
Apaharati
Apaharati [apa + hṛ] to take away, remove, captivate, rob J iii.315 (aor. apahārayiŋ); Miln 413; DA i.38.
Apākaṭatā
Apākaṭatā (f.) [a + pākaṭa + tā] unfitness Miln 232 (v. l. apākatatta perhaps better).
Apākatika
Apākatika (adj.) [a + pākata + ika] not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed DhA ii.7. Cp. appakāra.
Apācīna
Apācīna (adj.) [Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i. e. opposite, dark] westerly, backward, below S iii.84; It 120 (apācīnaŋ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaŋ tiriyaŋ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch's, the vv. ll. are apācinaŋ; apācini, apāci & apāminaŋ, C. expls. by heṭṭhā).
Apāṭuka
Apāṭuka (adj.) [a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur] not open, sly, insidious Th 1, 940 (as v. l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "unscrupulous", by Neumann as "ohne Redlichkeit"). Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i. e. fraudulent. See also next.
Apāṭubha
Apāṭubha (adj.) [a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but
-- 54 --
without reason] = apāṭuka, i. e. sly, fraudulent J iv.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda -- virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt).
Apāda
Apāda (?) [apa + ā + dā] giving away in marriage J iv. 179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob. be āpāda = pariggaha).
Apādaka
Apādaka (adj.) [a + pāda + ka] not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = J ii.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at It 87 (v. l. apāda).
Apāna
Apāna (nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104 -- 112. See ānāpāna.
Apānakatta
Apānakatta (nt.) [a + pānaka + ttaŋ] "waterless state", living without drinking water J v.243.
Apāpaka
Apāpaka (adj.) [a + pāpaka] guiltless, innocent f. ˚ikā Vv 314; 326.
Apāpata
Apāpata (adj.) [apa + ā + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J iv.234 (aggiŋ).
Apāpurana
Apāpurana (nt.) [fr. apāpurati] a key (to a door) Vin i.80; iii.119; M iii.127. See also avāpuraṇa.
Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati
Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati [Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ, but Vedic only apa -- vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa -- ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpurɔ etaŋ Amatassa dvāraŋ: imper.; where id. p. S i.137 has avāpur˚, T., but v. l. apāpur˚); Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraŋ, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti). -- pp. apāruta (q. v.). -- Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati M Vastu ii.158] to be opened M iii.184 (v. l. avā˚); J i.63 (avā˚); Th 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati.
Apābhata
Apābhata [pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ cp. Vedic apa -- bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava˚] taken away, stolen J iii.54.
Apāya
Apāya [Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz. -- 1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya˚ = viyoga DhA iii.276). -- 2. loss (of property) D iii.181, 182; A ii. 166; iv.283; J iii.387 (atth˚). -- 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D i.74; A ii.166; iv.287. -- 4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D i.100. -- 5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati. All combined at D i.82; iii.111; A i.55; It 12, 73; Nd2 under kāya; & freq. elsewhere. -- apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saŋsāra S ii.92, 232; iv.158, 313; v.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya -- duggati -- vinipāta of an Arahant A iv.405; v.182 sq. -- See also foll. pass.: M iii.25 (anapāya); Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J iv.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati); PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta. -- gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering DhA iii.175; cp. ˚gamanīya id. Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā J iv.499. -- mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction (= vināsa -- mukha DA i.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin" D i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaŋ a˚ -- mukhāni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions); A ii.166; iv.283, 287. -- samudda the ocean of distress DhA iii 432. -- sahāya a spendthrift companion D iii.185.
Apāyika
Apāyika (adj.) [also as āpāyika (q. v.); fr. apāya] belonging to the apāyas or states of misery D i.103; iii.6, 9, 12; It 42; PvA 60 (dukkha).
Apāyin
Apāyin (adj.) [fr. apāya] going away J i.163 (aḍḍha- rattāvɔapāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -- an˚ not going away, i. e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dh 2; Th 1, 1041; Miln 72.
Apāra
Apāra (nt.) [a + pāra] 1. the near bank of a river J iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaŋ, C. paratīraŋ atiṇṇaŋ). -- 2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraŋ = Nibbāna) Sn 1129, 1130; Nd2 62; Dh 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni DhA iv.141). See pāra & cp. avara.
Apāraṇeyya
Apāraṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of paraneti + a˚] that which cannot be achieved, unattainable J vi.36 (= apāpetabba).
Apāruta
Apāruta [Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati] open (of a door) Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ Amatassa dvārā); D i.136 (= vivaṭa -- dvāra DA i.297); J i.264 (˚dvāra).
Apālamba
Apālamba ["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling out" (C.) S i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J vi.252 (v. l. upā˚; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake).
Apāhata
Apāhata [pp. of apa + hṛ] driven off or back, refuted, refused Sn 826 (˚smiŋ = apasādite vade SnA 541).
Api
Api (indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. e)/pi on to, o)/pi (o) /piqen behind, o)pi/ssa back = close at one's heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. <-> The assimil. form before vowels is app˚ (= Sk. apy˚). See further details under pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep. "towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover". -- 1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the night (q. v.) -- (b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. e) piqeto/s, epithet) put on to, (q. v.). -- 2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": -- (a) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate -- born Sn 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while Dh 106, 107; aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Sn 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) J v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma; see further under b appɔeva nāma). -- api -- api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et -- et Sk ca -- ca, meaning both . . . and, and . . . as well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app' ekacce . . . app' ekacce (and) some . . . and others, i. e. some . . . others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D i.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208, etc. -- app' ekadā "morever once" = sometimes Vin iv.178; S i.162; iv.111; J i.67; DhA iii.303, etc. -- (b) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also, moreover D i.96; Miln 25, 47. -- api ca kho moreover, and yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. -- api ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J i.253. -- api ssu so much so Vin ii.76. -- app' eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi D i.205 (sve pi upasaŋkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); M i.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) J v.421 (id., piyavācaŋ labheyyāma). -- (b) in interrog. -- dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasaŋ kulaputtaŋ passeyya do you not see . . . Vin i.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen . . . S i.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? J iii.26; api me pitaraŋ passatha do you then not see my father? PvA 38. -- Also combd. with other interr. part. e. g. api nu J. ii.415.
Apitika
Apitika (adj.) [a + pitika] fatherless J v.251.
-- 55 --
Apithīyati
Apithīyati [for apidhīyati; api + dhā] Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured J ii.158. See also pithīyati.
Apidahati
Apidahati [api + dhā, cp. Gr. e)piti(qhmi] to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, J v.60 (inf. apidhetuŋ). pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q. v.).
Apidhāna
Apidhāna (nt.) [Vedic apidhāna in same meaning] cover, lid Vin i.203, 204; ii.122. See apidahati.
Apiratte
Apiratte [read api ratte, see api 1 a] later in the night J vi.560.
Apilāpana
Apilāpana (nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37.
Apilāpanatā
Apilāpanatā (f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr. pilavati, plu), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16) "opposite of superficiality" (lit "not floating"); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16.
Apilāpeti
Apilāpeti [api + lap] "to talk close by", i. e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Miln 37 (sāpatheyyaŋ).
Apiḷandha
Apiḷandha (adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) "adorned with", or (with v. l. SS) as apiḷandhana; VvA 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.
Apiḷandhana
Apiḷandhana (nt.) [fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form piḷandhana, q. v.] that which is tied on, i.e. band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at VvA 279 by; a -- kāro nipātamattaŋ, pilandhanaŋ = ābhāraṇaŋ); J vi.472 (c. pilandhituŋ pi ayuttaŋ?).
Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati
Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati [Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati] to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) J v.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.) -- Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha.
Apiha
Apiha (adj.) [apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha] "unhankering" (Mrs Rh. D.) S i 181 (+ akankha; v. l. BB asita).
Apihālu
Apihālu (adj.) [a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a -- spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)] not hankering, free from craving, not greedy S i.187 = Th 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Sn 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at SnA 549 as apihana -- sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaŋ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita); cp. also Nd2 227).
Apihita
Apihita [pp. of apidahati] covered J iv.4.
Apuccaṇḍatā
Apuccaṇḍatā (f.) [a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā] "not being a rotten egg," i. e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness M i.357.
Apuccha
Apuccha (adj.) [a + pucchā] "not a question", i. e. not to be asked Miln 316.
Apekkha
Apekkha (adj.) [= apekkhā] waiting for, looking for S i.122 (otāra˚).
Apekkhati
Apekkhati 1. [Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ] to desire, long for, look for, expect Sn 435 (kāme nɔâpekkhate cittaŋ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); J iv.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Sn 59; J v.359. <-> 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider, refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to VvA 13. -- pp. apekkhita (q. v.).
Apekkhavant
Apekkhavant (adj.) [fr. apekkhā] full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214; S iii.16; Th 1, 558; J v.453 (= sataṇha); Sn A 76.
Apekkhā & Apekhā
Apekkhā & Apekhā (f.) [Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously, a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha] attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire, longing for (c. loc.) S i.77; iii.132; v.409 (mātā -- pitusu); Vin iv.214; Sn 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha SnA 76); J i.9, 141; Th 1, 558; Dh 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā DhA iv.56); Dhs 1059, 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa -- vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. ( -- ˚or in combn. with sa˚ and an˚), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚); S i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ A iii.258, 433; iv.60 sq.; an˚ without consideration, regardless, indifferent S v.164; A iii.252, 347, 434; Sn 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); J i.9. Cp. anapekkhin & apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā.
Apekkhita
Apekkhita [pp. of apekkhati] taken care of, looked after, considered J vi.142, 149 (= olokita C.).
Apekkhin
Apekkhin (adj.) [Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ] considering, regarding, expecting, looking for; usually neg. an˚ indifferent (against) = loc.) S i.16, 77; ii.281; iii.19, 87; Sn 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dh 346. Cp. apekkhavant.
Apeta
Apeta (adj.) [pp. of apeti] gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or ˚ -- ) Dh 9 (damasaccena); PvA 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚ -- in sense of "without, -- less", e. g. apeta -- kaddama free from mud, stainless Dh 95; ˚vattha without dress J v.16; ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dh 41; Th 2, 468; ˚viññāṇattaŋ senselessness, lack of feeling PvA 63.
Apetatta
Apetatta (nt.) [abstr. to apeta] absence (of) PvA 92.
Apeti
Apeti [apa + i, cp. Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. af -- iddja] to go away, to disappear D i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi); J i.292; Sn 1143 (= nɔ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). -- pp. apeta (q. v.).
Apetteyyatā
Apetteyyatā (f.) [a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly] in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother D iii.70 (cp. Dh 332 & DhA iv.34).
Apeyya
Apeyya (adj.) [a + peyya, grd. of pā] not to be drunk, not drinkable J vi.205 (sāgara).
Apesiya
Apesiya (nt.) [? of uncertain origin] a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka -- sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataŋ dvāra -- tthakanakaŋ).
Apesiyamāna
Apesiyamāna (adj.) [ppr. fr. a + peseti (q. v.)] not being in service Vin ii.177.
App'
App' in appɔ ekacce etc. see api.
Appa
Appa (adj.) [Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. a)lapa/zw (lapa/zw) to empty (to make little), a)lapadno/s weak; Lith. alpnas weak, alpstù to faint] small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of "very little = (next to) nothing" (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at VvA 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) D i.61 (opp. mahant, DA i.170 = parittaka); Sn 713, 775, 805, 896 (= appaka, omaka, thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306); Dh 174; J i.262; Pug 39. -- nt. appaŋ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles A ii.26 = It 102; A ii.138; Dh 20 (= thokaŋ eka -- vagga -- dvi -- vagga -- mattam pi DhA i.158), 224 (˚smiŋ yācito asked for little), 259. -- aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) J i.9; Pug 33; DhA iv.184. -- assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dh 186; alpa + ā + svād] of little taste or enjoyment, affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā) Vin ii.25 = M i.130 = A iii.97 = Nd2 71; Sn 61; Dh
-- 56 --
186 (= supina -- sadisatāya paritta -- sukha DhA iii 240); Th 2, 358 (= ThA 244); J ii.313; Vism 124. -- ātanka little (or no) illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā] D i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- ābādha same as appātanka (q. v.) D i.204; iii.166, 237; M ii.125; A i.25; ii.88; iii.30, 65 sq., 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health] A i.38. -- āyuka short lived D i.18; PvA 103, also as ˚āyukin Vv 416. -- āhāra taking little or no food, fasting M ii.5; Sn 165 (= ekāsana -- bhojitāya ca parimita -- bhojitāya ca SnA 207), also as ˚āhāratā M i.245; ii.5. -- odaka having little or no water, dry Sn 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha; expld. at VvA 334 as "appa -- saddo hɔ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya"); J i.70; DhA iv.12. -- kasira in instr. ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty D i.251; S v.51; Th 1, 16. -- kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Sn 144 (= appaŋ kiccaŋ assā ti KhA 241). -- gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Miln 252 (opp. sugandha). -- ṭṭha "standing in little"; i. e. connected with little trouble D i.143; A i.169. -- thāmaka having little or no strength, weak S iv.206. -- dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Sn 1134 (see Nd2 69; expld. by paritta -- pañña SnA 605). -- nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. VvA 334, as quoted above under ˚odaka) A v.15 (+ appasadda); Sn 338; Nd1 377; Miln 371. -- pañña, of little wisdom J ii.166; iii.223, 263. -- puñña of little merit M ii.5. -- puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107. -- phalatā bringing little fruit PvA 139. -- bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -- bhoga having little wealth, i. e. poor, indigent Sn 114 (= sannicitānaŋ ca bhogānaŋ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato SnA 173). -- maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -- matta little, slight, mean, (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2) A iii.275; J i.242; also meaning "contented with little" (of the bhikkhu) It 103 = A ii.27; f. ˚ā trifle, smallness, însignificance D i.91; DA i.55. -- mattaka small, insignificant, trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. A iii.275 & Vin iv.38, 155); D i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaŋ DA i.55); J i.167; iii.12 (= aṇu); PvA 262. -- middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412. -- rajakkha having little or no obtuseness D ii.37; M i.169; Sdhp 519. -- ssaka having little of one's own, possessing little A i.261; ii.203. -- sattha having few or no companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. -- sadda free from noise, quiet M ii.2, 23, 30; A v.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377); Pug 35; Miln 371. -- siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous J iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu -- antarāyiko). -- ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; S iv.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs 1327. -- harita having little or no grass S i.169; Sn p. 15 (= paritta -- harita -- tiṇa SnA 154).
Appaka
Appaka (adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. ˚ŋ adv. a little D ii.4; A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu); Dh 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū DhA ii. 160); Pv i.102 (= paritta PvA 48); ii.939; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appikā J i.228. -- instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA i.256. -- anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many S iv.46; Dh 144; Pv i.117 (= bahū PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read anappake pi for T. ˚appakeci; so also KhA 208).
Appakāra
Appakāra (adj.) [a + pakāra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J v.69 (= sarīrappakāra -- rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika.
Appakiṇṇa
Appakiṇṇa [appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa] little or not crowded, not overheaped A v.15 (C. anākiṇṇa).
Appagabbha
Appagabbha (adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S ii.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228 & KhA 232); Dh 245.
Appaccaya
Appaccaya [a + paccaya] 1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness D i.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52); iii.159; M i.442; A i.79, 124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J ii.277; Sn p. 92 (kapa + dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaŋ VvA 343); SnA 423 (= appatītaŋ domanassaŋ). -- 2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, 1437.
Appaṭi˚
Appaṭi˚ [a + paṭi˚] see in general under paṭi˚.
Appaṭikārika
Appaṭikārika (adj.) [a + paṭikārika] "not providing against", i. e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive J v.418 (spelling here & in C. appati˚).
Appaṭikopeti
Appaṭikopeti [a + paṭikopeti] not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) J v.173 (uposathaŋ).
Appaṭikkhippa
Appaṭikkhippa (adj.) [a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhi- pati] not to be refused J ii.370.
Appaṭigandhika & ˚iya
Appaṭigandhika & ˚iya (adj.) [a + paṭi + gandha + ika] not smelling disagreeable, i. e. with beautiful smell, scented, odorous J v.405 (˚ika, but C. ˚iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226.
Appaṭigha
Appaṭigha (adj.) [a + paṭigha] (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Sn 42 (see expld. at Nd2 239; SnA 88 expls. "katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a."). -- (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa: not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) D iii.217; Dhs 660, 756, 1090, 1443.
Appaṭicchavi
Appaṭicchavi (adj.) at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sam- patitacchavi (v. l.).
Appaṭibhāga
Appaṭibhāga (adj) [a + paṭibhāga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA i.423 (= anuttara).
Appaṭibhāṇa
Appaṭibhāṇa (adj.) [a + paṭibhāṇa] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; A iii.57; ˚ŋ karoti to intimidate, bewilder J v.238, 369.
Appaṭima
Appaṭima (adj.) [a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā] matchless, incomparable, invaluable Th 1, 614; Miln 239.
Appaṭivattiya
Appaṭivattiya (adj.) [a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt] (a) not to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be taken in meaning of b.). -- (b) irresistable J ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v. l. at J ii.245; otherwise as t.
Appaṭivāṇa
Appaṭivāṇa (nt.) [a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa -- form of vṛ, cp. Sk. prativāraṇa] non -- obstruction, not hindering, not opposing or contradicting A i.50; iii.41; v.93 sq.; adj. J i.326.
Appaṭivāṇitā
Appaṭivāṇitā (f.) [abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa] not being hindered, non -- obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiŋ" (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl. 358) A i.50, 95 = D iii.214 = Dhs 1367.
Appaṭivāṇī
Appaṭivāṇī (f.) [almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase] non -- hindrance, non -- restriction, free action, impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī S ii.132; v.440; A ii.93, 195; iii.307 sq.; iv.320; Nd2 under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654].
Appaṭivāṇīya
Appaṭivāṇīya (adj.) [grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; M Vastu iii.343] not to be obstructed, irresistible S i.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. "that source from whence there is no turning back"), Th 2, 55.
-- 57 --
Appaṭividdha
Appaṭividdha (adj.) [a + paṭi + viddha] "not shot through" i. e. unhurt J vi.446.
Appaṭivibhatta
Appaṭivibhatta (˚bhogin) (adj.) [a + paṭi + vibhatta] (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Bdhgh's expln.) A iii289; Miln 373; cp. Miln trsl. ii.292.
Appaṭivekkhiya
Appaṭivekkhiya [ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati] not ob- serving or noticing J iv.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.).
Appaṭisankhā
Appaṭisankhā (f.) [a + paṭisankhā] want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346.
Appaṭisandhika
Appaṭisandhika (and ˚iya) (adj.) [a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)] 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable, irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti PvA 66) = J iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuŋ na sakkā C.). <-> 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i. e. to rebirth J v.100 (˚bhāva).
Appaṭisama
Appaṭisama (adj.) [a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama M Vastu i.104] not having it's equal, incomparable J i.94 (Baddha -- sirī).
Appaṭissavatā
Appaṭissavatā (f.) [a + paṭissavatā] want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325.
Appaṇihita
Appaṇihita (adj.) [a + paṇihita] aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animittaŋ Vin iii.92, 93 = iv.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paṇihita.
Appatiṭṭha
Appatiṭṭha (adj.) [a + patiṭṭha] 1. not standing still S i.1. -- 2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Sn 173.
Appatissa
Appatissa (& appaṭissa) (adj.) [a + paṭi + śru] not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava A ii.20; iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa -- vāsa an unruly state, anarchy J ii.352. See also paṭissā.
Appatīta
Appatīta (adj.) [a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta] dis- satisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) J v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v. l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp. C. on p. 156); DA i.52; SnA 423.
Appaduṭṭha
Appaduṭṭha (adj.) [a + paduṭṭha] not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Sn 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. SnA 478); Dh 137 (= niraparādha DhA iii.70).
Appadhaŋsa
Appadhaŋsa (adj.) [= appadhaŋsiya, Sk. apradhvaŋsya] not to be destroyed J iv.344 (v. l. duppadhaŋsa).
Appadhaŋsika
Appadhaŋsika (& ˚iya) (adj.) [grd. of a + padhaŋseti] not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible D iii.175 (˚ika, v. l. ˚iya); J iii.159 (˚iya); VvA 208 (˚iya); PvA 117 (˚iya). Cp. appadhaŋsa.
Appadhaŋsita
Appadhaŋsita (adj.) [pp. of a + padhaŋseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229.
Appanā
Appanā (f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ, to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as psychol. t. t.) J ii.61 (˚patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, 21, 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg. as "ekaggaŋ cittaŋ ārammaṇe appeti"), 214 (˚jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii, 10, 53, 82, 347.
Appabhoti
Appabhoti (Appahoti) see pahoti.
Appamaññati
Appamaññati [appa + maññati] to think little of, to under- rate, despise Dh 121 (= avajānāti DhA iii.16; v. l. avapamaññati).
Appamaññā
Appamaññā (f.) [a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya] boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz. mettā karuŋā muditā upekkhā i. e. love, pity, sympathy, desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at D iii.223 (q. v. for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Ps i.84; Vbh 272 sq.; DhsA 195. By itself at Sn 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. SnA 417). See for further expln. Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā.
Appamatta
Appamatta1 (adj.) [appa + matta] see appa.
Appamatta
Appamatta2 (adj.) [a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati] not negligent, i. e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert, zealous M i.391 -- 92; S i.4; Sn 223 (cp. KhA 169), 507, 779 (cp. Nd1 59); Dh 22 (cp. DhA i.229); Th 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239).
Appamāda
Appamāda [a + pamāda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, con- scientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DA i.104); iii.30, 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; M i.477 (˚phala); S i.25, 86, 158, 214; ii.29, 132; iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A i.16, 50. (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ŋ garu -- karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334 (= sati -- avippavāsa -- sankhāta a. SnA 339); It 16 (˚ŋ pasaŋsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā), 74 (˚vihārin); Dh 57 (˚vihārin, cp. DhA i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata DhA iv.26); Dāvs ii. 35; KhA 142.
Appamāṇa
Appamāṇa (freq. spelled appamāna) (adj.) [a + pamāṇa] 1. "without measure", immeasurable, endless, boundless, unlimited, unrestricted all -- permeating S iv.186 (˚cetaso); A ii.73; v.63; Sn 507 (mettaŋ cittaŋ bhāvayaŋ appāmāṇaŋ = anavasesa -- pharaṇena SnA 417; cp. appamaññā); It 21 (mettā), 78; J ii.61; Ps ii.126 sq.; Vbh 16, 24, 49, 62, 326 sq.; Dhs 182, 1021, 1024, 1405; DhsA 45, 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60. -- 2. "without difference", irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) J i.165; ii.323.
Appameyya
Appameyya (adj.) [a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā] immeasurable, infinite, boundless M i.386; S v.400; A i.266; Th 1, 1089 (an˚); Pug 35; Miln 331; Sdhp 338.
Appavattā
Appavattā (f.) [a + pavattā] the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non -- continuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln 326.
Appasāda
Appasāda see pasāda.
Appassāda
Appassāda see appa.
Appahīna
Appahīna (adj.) [a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati] not given up, not renounced M i.386; It 56, 57; Nd2 70 D1; Pug 12, 18.
Appāṇaka
Appāṇaka (adj.) [a + pāṇa + ka] breathless, i. e. (1) holding one's breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) M i.243; J i.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; M Vastu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?]. (2) not holding anything breathing, i. e. inanimate, lifeless, not containing life Sn p. 15 (of water).
Appikā
Appikā (f.) of appaka.
Appiccha
Appiccha (adj.) [appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā] desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented, unpretentious S i.63, 65; A iii.432; iv.2, 218 sq., 229; v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Sn 628, 707; Dh 404; Pv iv.73; Pug 70.
Appicchatā
Appicchatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21; D iii.115; M i.13; S ii 202, 208 sq.; A i.12, 16 sq.; iii.219 sq., 448; iv.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Miln 242; SnA 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya -- dhutanga -- pariyatti -- adhigama -- vasena); PvA 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga -- dhammā at Vism 81.
-- 58 --
Appita
Appita (adj.) [pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e. g. prītyar- pitaŋ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169] 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Miln 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta). -- 2. brought to, put to, fixed on J vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at J v.36 & Vism 303.
Appiya & Appiyatā
Appiya & Appiyatā see piya etc.
Appekadā
Appekadā (adv.) see api 2 ax.
Appeti
Appeti [Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ, ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. a)rari/skw to put together, a(/rma chariot, a)/rqron limb, a)reth/ virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava] 1. (*er) to move forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Miln 70. -- 2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin ii.136, 137; J iii.34 (nimba -- sūlasmiŋ to impale, C. āvuṇāti); vi.17 (T. sūlasmiŋ acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C. āvuṇati); Miln 62 (dāruŋ sandhismiŋ); VvA 110 (saññāṇaŋ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages.
Appesakkha
Appesakkha (adj.) [acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā "being called lord of little"; Trenckner on Miln 65 (see p. 422) says: "appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expld. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it". Thus the etym. would be "having little association or friendship" and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk. forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e. g. at Av. Ś ii. 153; Divy 243] of little power, weak, impotent S ii.229; Miln 65; Sdhp 89.
Appoti
Appoti [the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp] to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo).
Appodaka
Appodaka see appa.
Appossukka
Appossukka (adj.) [appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e. g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr. ussuka] unconcerned, living at ease, careless, "not bothering", keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188; M iii.175, 176; S i 202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta sankasāya "living at ease, given to silence, resigned" Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); ii. 177 (id.); iv.178 (id.); Th 2, 457 (= nirussukka ThA 282); Sn 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72); Dh 330 (= nirālaya DhA iv.31); J i.197; iv.71; Miln 371 (a. tiṭṭhati to keep still); DA i.264.
Appossukkatā
Appossukkatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; D ii.36; Miln 232; DhA ii.15.
Apphuta
Apphuta (& apphuṭa) [Sk. *ā -- sphṛta for a -- sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D i.74 = M i.276 (pītisukhena).
Apphoṭā
Apphoṭā (f.) [fr. appoṭeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J vi.336.
Apphoṭita
Apphoṭita [pp. of apphoṭeti] having snapped one's fingers or clapped one's hands J ii.311 (˚kāle).
Apphoṭeti
Apphoṭeti [ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ] to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Miln 13, 20. pp. apphoṭita.
Aphusa
Aphusa [Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch] not to be touched Miln 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks "aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me").
Aphegguka
Aphegguka (adj.) [a + pheggu + ka] not weak, i. e strong J iii.318.
Abaddha [a + baddha] not tied, unbound, unfettered Sn 39 (v. l. and Nd2 abandha; expld -- by rajju -- bandhanɔ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha SnA 83).
Abandha
Abandha (n. -- adj.) [a + bandha] not tied to, not a follower or victim of It 56 (mārassa; v. l. abaddha).
Abandhana
Abandhana (adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433.
Ababa
Ababa [of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av. Ś i.4, 10 & see for further expln. of term SnA 476 sq.
Abala
Abala (adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa DhA i.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse).
Abbaje
Abbaje T. reading at A ii.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp. pabbajati), but is preferably with v. l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line).
Abbaṇa
Abbaṇa (adj.) [a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa] without wounds Dh 124.
Abbata
Abbata (n. -- adj.) [a + vata, Sk. avrata] (a) (nt.) that which is not "vata" i. e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Sn 839 (asīlata +); Nd1 188 (v. l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a -- vatta). SnA 545 (= dhutangavataŋ vinā. -- (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dh 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita DhA iii.391; vv. ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B. abbhuta, C. abbuta).
Abbaya
Abbaya in uday˚ at Miln 393 stands for avyaya.
Abbahati
Abbahati (& abbuhati) [the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp. bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Th 1, 404; J ii.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha). -- aor. abbahi J v.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) J iii.390 (v. l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but PvA 41 expls. nīhari) = DhA i.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaŋ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v. l. BB abbuḷhaŋ, SS avyahi; VvA 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A iii.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. -- ger. abbuyha Sn 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitvā; SnA 567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitvā); S i.121 (taṇhaŋ); iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). -- pp. abbuḷha (q. v.). -- Caus. abbāheti [Sk. ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out J iv.364 (satthaŋ abbāhayanti; v. l. abbhā˚); DhA ii.249 (asiŋ). ger. abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii 201 (bhisa -- muḷālaŋ) with v. l. BB aggahetvā, SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (vv. ll. aggahitvā & abbāhitvā). pp. abbūḷhita (q. v.).
Abbāhana
Abbāhana (nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA iii.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana; glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also abbuḷhana and abbhāhana.
Abbuda
Abbuda (nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning "swelling", the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda] 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2nd months after conception, the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz. kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. -- 2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294, 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a). -- 3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the "vast -- period"
-- 59 --
hell, cp. nirabbuda). S i.149 = A ii.3 (chattiŋsati pañca ca abbudāni); S i.152 = A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. SnA 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka -- nirayo nɔ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda -- gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); J iii.360 (sataŋ ninnahuta -- sahassānaŋ ekaŋ abbudaŋ). -- 4. a term used for "hell" in the riddle S i.43 (kiŋsu lokasmiŋ abhudaŋ "who are they who make a hell on earth" Mrs. Rh. D. The answer is "thieves"; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa -- karaṇaŋ.
Abbuḷhati
Abbuḷhati (?) & Abbuhati see abbahati.
Abbuḷhana
Abbuḷhana (nt.) [fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)] the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā -- sallassa abbuḷhanaŋ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, v. l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, v. l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana.
Abbūḷha
Abbūḷha (adj.) [Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati] drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed, destroyed. Most freq. in combn. ˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out D ii.283 (v. l. SS asammūḷha); Sn 593, 779 (= abbūḷhita -- salla Nd1 59; rāgâdi -- sallānaŋ abbūḷhattā a. SnA 518); J iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = DhA i.30. -- In other connection: M i.139 = A iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Th 1, 321; KhA 153 (˚soka).
Abbūḷhatta
Abbūḷhatta (nt.) [abstr. of abbūḷha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518.
Abbūḷhita
Abbūḷhita (& abbūhitta at J iii.541) [pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbūḷhita -- sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha); J iii.541 (uncertain reading; v. l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaŋ ṭhapitaŋ appaggharakaŋ kataŋ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?).
Abbeti
Abbeti [Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19] at J iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti.
Abbokiṇṇa
Abbokiṇṇa [= abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa] 1.filled M i.387 (paripuṇṇa +); DhA iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.). -- 2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted, constant, as ˚ŋ adv. in combn. with satataŋ samitaŋ A iv.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (v. l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vbh 320. -- 3. doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. iii.1, 3).
Abbocchinna
Abbocchinna see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna.
Abbohārika
Abbohārika (adj.) [a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati] not of legal or conventional status, i. e. -- (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91, 112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4). -- (b) uncommon, extraordinary J iii.309 (v. l. BB abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective).
Abbha
Abbha (nt.) [Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. "dark cloud"; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. a)fro\s scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. o)/ mbros rain, Oir ambu water]. A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A ii.53 = Vin ii.295 = Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon -- & sunshine, viz. abbhaŋ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134. S i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder -- cloud); J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi); Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla -- megha PvA 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & DhsA 317 (used in sense of adj. "dull"; DhsA expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta. -- kūṭa the point or summit of a storm -- cloud Th 1, 1064; J vi.249, 250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka -- sikhara VvA 12). -- ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud It 64; Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -- paṭala a mass of clouds DhsA 239. -- mutta free from clouds Sn 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dh 382). -- saŋvilāpa thundering S iv.289.
Abbhakkhāti
Abbhakkhāti [abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti] to speak against to accuse, slander D i.161 = A i.161 (an -- abbhakkhātu -- kāma); iv.182 (id.); J iv.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati.
Abbhakkhāna
Abbhakkhāna (nt.) [fr. abbhakkhāti] accusation, slander, calumny D iii.248, 250; M i.130; iii.207; A iii.290 sq.; Dh 139 (cp. DhA iii.70).
Abbhacchādita
Abbhacchādita [pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti] covered (with) Th 1, 1068.
Abbhañjati
Abbhañjati [abhi + añj] to anoint; to oil, to lubricate M i.343 (sappi -- telena); S iv.177; Pug 56; DhA iii.311 = VvA 68 (sata -- pāka -- telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same J i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata -- pāka -- telena ˚ayiŋsu); Caus. ii. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint J iii.372.
Abbhañjana
Abbhañjana (nt.) [fr. abbhañjati] anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205; iii.79; Miln 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; VvA 295.
Abbhatika
Abbhatika (adj.) [ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ] brought (to), procured, got, J vi.291.
Abbhatikkanta
Abbhatikkanta [pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta] one who has thoroughly, left behind J v.376.
Abbhatīta
Abbhatīta [pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta] emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by S ii.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. ˚ŋ what is gone or over, the past J iii.169. -- 2. passed away, dead M i.465; S iv.398; Th 1, 242, 1035. -- 3. transgressed, overstepped, neglected J iii.541 (saŋyama).
Abbhattha
Abbhattha (nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaŋ, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaŋ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3] = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaŋ gacchati "to go towards home", i. e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M i.115, 119; iii.25; A iv.32; Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576.
Abbhatthatā
Abbhatthatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abbhatta] "going towards setting", disappearance, death J v.469.
Abbhanumodati
Abbhanumodati [abhi + anu + modati] to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196; D i.143, 190; S iv.224; Miln 29, 210; DhA iv.102 (v. l. ˚ānu˚).
Abbhanumodana
Abbhanumodana (nt.) (& ˚ā f.) [fr. abbhanumodati] being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DA i.227; VvA 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218.
Abbhantara
Abbhantara (adj.) [abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with -- in, cp. abhi i.1 a] = antara, i. e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. ˚ŋ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚ -- ) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven); A iv.16 (opp. bāhira); Dh 394 (id.); Th 1, 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside); J iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango); Miln 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir -- abbhantara dhana); DhA ii.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v. l. abbhantare). <-> Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime, in between DhA ii.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or -- ˚) J i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaŋ); DhA ii.64 (v. l. antare), 92 (sattavass˚); PvA 48 (= anto).
Abbhantarika
Abbhantarika (adj. -- n.) [fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning] intimate friend, confidant, "chum" J i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 ("insider", opp. bāhiraka).
Abbhantarima
Abbhantarima (adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bāhirima) Vin iii.149; J v.38.
-- 60 --
Abbhākuṭika
Abbhākuṭika (adj.) [a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown] not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); D i.116, cp. DA i.287; DhA iv.8 (as v. l.; T. has abbhokuṭika).
Abbhāgata
Abbhāgata [abhi + ā + gata] having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi -- āgata, āgantuka VvA 24).
Abbhāgamana
Abbhāgamana (nt.) [abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyā- gama] coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221.
Abbhāghāta
Abbhāghāta [abhi + āghāta] slaughtering -- place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta).
Abbhācikkhati
Abbhācikkhati [Intens. of abbhākkhāti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D i.161; iii.248, 250; M i.130, 368, 482; iii.207; A i.161.
Abbhāna
Abbhāna (nt.) [abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; ii.33, 40, 162; A i.99. -- Cp. abbheti.
Abbhāmatta
Abbhāmatta (adj.) [abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous, monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta & abbhuŋ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius] monstrous, dreadful, enormous, "of the size of a large cloud" (thus C. on S i.205 & J iii.309) S i.205 = Th 1, 652 (v. l. abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = J iii.309 (v. l. ˚mutta).
Abbhāhata
Abbhāhata [abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han] struck, attacked, afflicted S i.40 (maccunā); Th 1, 448; Sn 581; J vi.26, 440; Vism 31, 232; DA i.140, 147; DhA iv.25.
Abbhāhana
Abbhāhana (nt.) [either = abbāhana or āvāhana] in udaka˚ the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh. on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka -- vāhana on p. 122).
Abbhita
Abbhita [pp. of abbheti] 1. come back, rehabilitated, rein- stated Vin iii.186 = iv.242 (an˚). -- 2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of "called" (an˚ uncalled), where id. p. at J iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Th 2, 129 ayācita.
Abbhu
Abbhu [a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuŋ, see also abbhāmatta] unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense J v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.).
Abbhuŋ
Abbhuŋ (interj.) [Vedic abhvaŋ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris J P T S. 1889, 201: abbhuŋ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta] alas! terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin ii. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as "utrāsa -- vacanam -- etaŋ"); M i.448. <-> See also abbhu & abbhuta.
Abbhukkiraṇa
Abbhukkiraṇa (nt.) [abhi + ud + kṛ] drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp. abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet).
Abbhukkirati
Abbhukkirati [abhi + ud + kirati] to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) D ii.172 (cakkaratanaŋ; neither with Morris J P T S. 1886, 131 "give up", nor with trsl. of J ii.311 "roll along"); J v.390; PvA 75. Cp. abbhokkirati.
Abbhuggacchati
Abbhuggacchati [abhi + ud + gacchati] to go forth, go out, rise into D i.112, 127; A iii.252 (kitti -- saddo a.); Pug 36. ger. ˚gantvā J i 88 (ākāsaŋ), 202; DhA iv.198. aor. ˚gañchi M i.126 (kittisaddo); J i.93. -- pp. abbhuggata.
Abbhuggata
Abbhuggata [pp. of abbhuggacchati] gone forth, gone out, risen D i.88 (kitti -- saddo a., cp. DhA i.146: sadevakaŋ lokaŋ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Sn p. 103 (kittisaddo).
Abbhuggamana
Abbhuggamana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. abbhuggacchati] going out over, rising over (c. acc.) PvA 65 (candaŋ nabhaŋ abbhuggamanaŋ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaŋ).
Abbhujjalana
Abbhujjalana (nt.) [abhi + ud + jalana, from jval] breathing out fire, i. e. carrying fire in one's month (by means of a charm) D i.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi -- jala -- nīharaṇaŋ DA i.97).
Abbhuṭṭhāti
Abbhuṭṭhāti (˚ṭṭhahati) [abhi + ud + sthā] to get up to, proceed to, D i.105 (cankamaŋ).
Abbhuṇṇata
Abbhuṇṇata [pp. of abbhunnamati] standing up, held up, erect J v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; v. l. abbhantara, is reading correct?).
Abbhuṇha
Abbhuṇha (adj.) [ahhi + uṇha] (a) very hot DhA ii.87 (v. l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA ii.67.
Abbhuta
Abbhuta1 (adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj. -- formation from abbhuŋ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuŋ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i. e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bhū ("unreal?") is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhayɔ āvahassɔ adhivacanaŋ DA i.43 & VvA 329) & expld. as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhūtaŋ ThA 233; abhūta -- pubbatāya abbhutaŋ VvA 191, 329; abhūta -- pubbaŋ DA i.43. -- 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (kiŋ ˚ŋ, combd. with lomahaŋsana); J iv.355 (id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaŋ vata vācaŋ bhāsasi = acchariyaŋ ThA 233); Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. -- 2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S iv.371, also in ˚dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaŋ and a part. of exclamation, viz, acchariyaŋ bho abbhutaŋ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying D i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D i.60; acch. bhante abbh. A ii.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J i.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316. -- Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things M iii.118, 125; A ii.130; iv.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya -- abbhutacitta -- jāta dumbfounded & surprised J i.88; DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50. -- dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.103; iii.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc.
Abbhuta
Abbhuta2 (nt.) [= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the "unknown"] a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaŋ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand, i. e. kahāpaṇa's or pieces of money) Vin iii.138; iv.5; J i.191; v.427; vi.192; PvA 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaŋ hotu J vi.193.
Abbhudāharati
Abbhudāharati [abhi + ud + ā + harati] to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) M ii.132.
Abbhudīreti
Abbhudīreti [abhi + ud + īreti] to raise the voice, to utter Th 2, 402; DA i.61; Sdhp 514.
Abbhudeti
Abbhudeti [abhi + ud + eti] to go out over, to rise A ii.50, 51 (opp. atthaŋ eti, of the sun). -- ppr. abbhuddayaŋ Vv 6417 (= abhi -- uggacchanto VvA 280; abbhusayaŋ ti pi pāṭho).
Abbhuddhunāti
Abbhuddhunāti [abhi + ud + dhunāti] to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaŋ uddhunāti VvA 278).
-- 61 --
Abbhunnadita
Abbhunnadita [pp. of abhi + ud + nadati] resounding, resonant Th 1, 1065).
Abbhunnamati
Abbhunnamati [abhi, + ud + namati] to, spring up, burst forth D ii.164. -- pp. abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q. v. <-> Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up, erect D i.120 (kāyaŋ one's body); A ii.245 (id.); D i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiŋ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down).
Abbhuyyāta
Abbhuyyāta [pp. of abbhuyyāti] marched against, attacked Vin i.342; M ii.124.
Abbhuyyāti
Abbhuyyāti [abhi + up + yāti of yā] to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack S i.82 (aor ˚uyyāsi). -- pp. abbhuyyāta (q. v.).
Abbhusūyaka
Abbhusūyaka (adj.) [abhi + usūyā + ka] zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in ( -- ˚) Pgdp 101.
Abbhussakati & ˚usukkati
Abbhussakati & ˚usukkati [abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sak- kati] to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaŋ abbhussakkamāno M i.317 = S iii.156 = It 20. -- See also S i.65; v.44; A i.242 (same simile); v.22 (id.).
Abbhussahanatā
Abbhussahanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha] instigation, incitement Vin ii.88.
Abbhusseti
Abbhusseti [abhi + ud + seti of śī] to rise; v. l. at Vv 6417 according to VvA 280: abbhuddayaŋ (see abbhudeti) abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho.
Abbheti
Abbheti [abhi + ā + i] to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento), 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba) -- pp. abbhita (q. v.). See also abbhāna.
Abbhokāsa
Abbhokāsa [abhi + avakāsa] the open air, an open & un- sheltered space D i.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DA i.180), 71 (=acchanna DA i.210), 89; M iii.132; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.437, v.65; Sn p. 139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) J i.29, 215; Pug 57.
Abbhokāsika
Abbhokāsika (adj.) [fr. abbhokāsa] belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. D i.167; M i.282; A iii.220; Vin v.131, 193; J iv.8 (+ nesajjika); Pug 69; Miln 20, 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaŋgas). See also Nd1 188; Nd2 587. -- anga the practice or system of the "campers -- out" Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi -- kankhā, cp. Nd1 188).
Abbhokiṇṇa
Abbhokiṇṇa [pp. of abbhokirati] see abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokirati
Abbhokirati [abhi + ava + kirati] to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi -- okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v. l. abbhuk˚). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa <-> pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokuṭika
Abbhokuṭika spelling at DhA iv.8 for abbhākuṭika.
Abbhokkiraṇa
Abbhokkiraṇa (nt.) [fr. abbhokirati] in naṭānaŋ a. "turnings of dancers" DA i.84 in expln of sobha -- nagarakaŋ of D i.6.
Abbhocchinna
Abbhocchinna (besides abbocch˚, q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2) [a + vi + ava + chinna] not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous J i.470 (v. l. abbo˚); vi.254, 373; Cp. i.63; Miln 72; Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb).
Abbhohārika
Abbhohārika see abbo˚.
Aby˚
Aby˚ see avy˚.
Abhabba
Abhabba (adj.) [a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning] impossible, not likely, unable D iii.13 sq., 19, 26 sq., 133; It 106, 117; Sn 231 (see KhA 189); Dh 32; J i 116; Pug 13. -- ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant's character: see D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set).
Abhabbatā
Abhabbatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unli- kelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191.
Abhaya
Abhaya (adj.) [a + bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dh 258. -- nt. abhayaŋ confidence, safety Dh 317, cp. DhA iii.491. For further refs. see bhaya.
Abhi
Abhi -- [prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. a)mfi/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir. imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat. ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg. Ags. bī = E. be -- . I. Meaning. -- 1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over -- coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against, on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i. e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1). Next to saŋ -- it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of "very much, greatly" as the first part of a double -- prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i. e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi -- vi -- ji (side by side with vi -- ji), abhi -- ā -- kkhā (side by side with ā -- kkhā), abhi -- anu -- mud (side by side with anu -- mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her -- bei -- kommen (for bei -- kommen), E. fill up (for fill); e. g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ C.), abbhatīta ("vorbei gegangen"), abbhantara ("with -- in", b -- innen or "in here"), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti ("fill up"), etc. (see also II. 1, c). II. Lit. Meaning. -- 1. As single pref.: (a) against, to, on to, at -- , viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home, abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on, ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at -- tack, ˚rūhati ascend, ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad -- dress, ˚sapati ac -- curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over, ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off -- spring, ˚jānāti know all over, ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over -- flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over. (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be -- (con -- ) and Ger. er -- , thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti "er -- kennen" ˚jāyati be -- get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati "er tönen", ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con -- template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in. -- 2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam -- abhi (which is, however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam -- ). III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying). -- 1. A single pref.: abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot, ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant, ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome (= adhika -- rūpa C.), ˚sambuddha wide and fully -- awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (= adhikaŋuddh˚ C.). -- As 1st part of a prep. -- cpd. (as modification -- pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi -- ud (abbhud -- ) ˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saŋ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚ . -- On its relation to pari, see pari˚, to ava see ava˚. IV. Dialectical Variation. -- There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati˚, adhi˚ and anu˚, since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings: abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi = up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the
-- 62 --
foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti; also as vv. ll. with abhi -- kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti, cp. atikkanta -- abhi˚ (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita, ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa P. abhi -- ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati.
Abhikankhati
Abhikankhati [abhi + kankhati] to desire after, long for, wish for S i.140, 198 (Nibbānaŋ); J ii.428; iv.10, 241; VvA 38, 283; ThA 244. -- pp. abhikankhita. Cp. BSk. abhikānkṣati, e. g. Jtm. p. 221.
Abhikankhanatā
Abhikankhanatā (f.) [abhi + kankhana + tā] wishing, longing, desire DA i.242.
Abhikankhita
Abhikankhita [pp. of abhikankhati] desired, wished, longed for VvA 201 (= abhijjhita).
Abhikankhin
Abhikankhin (adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of -- ˚) Th 2, 360 (sītibhāva˚).
Abhikiṇṇa
Abhikiṇṇa [pp. of abhikirati] 1. strewn over with ( -- ˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚). -- 2. overwhelmed, overcome, crushed by ( -- ˚) It 89 (dukkh˚; vv. ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = A i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa.
Abhikirati
Abhikirati -- 1. [Sk. abhikirati] to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1. -- 2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna] to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush S i.54; Th 1, 598; 2, 447 (ger. ˚kiritūna, reading of C. for T. apa˚, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dh 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaŋ abhikīrati = viddhaŋseti vikirati DhA i.255; v. l. atikirati); J iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaŋ = viddhaŋseti C.); vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); DhA i.255 (inf. ˚kirituŋ). -- pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2.
Abhikīḷati
Abhikīḷati [abhi + kìḷati] to play (a game), to sport Miln 359 (kīḷaŋ).
Abhikūjita
Abhikūjita [abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj] resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita.
Abhikkanta
Abhikkanta (adj. -- n.) [pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta] (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e. g. DA i.227 = KhA 114 = VvA 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya KhA) sundarɔ -- âbhirūpa -- abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed, gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya "wane"), in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142. 2. excellent, supreme (= sundara) Sn 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) D i.62, 74, 216; A ii.101; iii.350 sq.; v.140, 207 sq.; DA i.171 (= atimanāpatara). 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ŋ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (= abbhânumodana) D i.85, 110, 234; Sn p. 15, 24, etc. freq. 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa) Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142; Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (= atimanāpa abhirūpa PvA 71); KhA 115 (= abhirūpachavin). -- (b) (nt.) abhikkantaŋ (combd. with and opp. to paṭikkantaŋ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) D i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DA i.183); Vin iii.181; A ii.104, 106 sq.; VvA 6.
Abhikkama
Abhikkama going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); DhA iii.124 (˚paṭikkama).
Abhikkamati
Abhikkamati [Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati] to go forward, to proceed, approach D i.50 (=abhimukho kamati, gacchati, pavisati DA i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā<-> muŋ aor.); DhA iii.124 (evaŋ ˚itabbaŋ evaŋ paṭikkamitabbaŋ thus to approach & thus to withdraw). -- pp. abhikkanta (q. v.).
Abhikkhaṇa
Abhikkhaṇa1 (nt.) [fr. abhikkhanati] digging up of the ground M i.143.
Abhikkhaṇa
Abhikkhaṇa2 (nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha] only as acc. adv. ˚ŋ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaŋ VvA 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaŋ bahuso PvA 107); Pug 31; DhA ii.91.
Abhikkhaṇati
Abhikkhaṇati [abhi + khaṇati] to dig up M i.142.
Abhikkhipati
Abhikkhipati [abhi + khipati] to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.
Abhigajjati
Abhigajjati [abhi + gajjati from garj, sound -- root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. iii.108. <-> (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.
Abhigajjin
Abhigajjin (adj.) [fr. abhigajjati] warbling, singing, chat- tering Th 1, 1108, 1136.
Abhigamanīya
Abhigamanīya (adj.) [grd. of abhigacchati] to be approached, accessible PvA 9.
Abhigijjhati
Abhigijjhati [abhi + gijjhati] 1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Sn 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77). -- 2. to envy (acc.) S i.15 (aññam -- aññaŋ).
Abhigīta
Abhigīta [pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta] 1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaŋ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. "ersungen") S i.173 = Sn 81 = Miln 228. See SnA 151. -- 2. resounding with, filled with song (of birds) J vi.272 (= abhiruda).
Abhighāta
Abhighāta [Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta] (a) striking, slaying, killing PvA 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). <-> (b) impact, contact DhsA 312 (rūpa˚ etc.).
Abhicetasika
Abhicetasika (adj.) [abhi + ceto + ika] dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic˚ (of jhāna) M i.33, 356; iii.11; S ii.278; A ii.23; v.132. (Spelt. ābhi˚ at M i.33; A iii.114; Vin v.136). See Dial. iii.108.
Abhiceteti
Abhiceteti [abhi + ceteti] to intend, devise, have in mind J iv.310 (manasā pāpaŋ).
Abhicchanna
Abhicchanna (adj.) [abhi + channa] covered with, bedecked or adorned with ( -- ˚) J ii.48 (hema -- jāla˚, v. l. abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Sn 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24, cp. Nd2 365).
Abhicchita
Abhicchita (adj.) [abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita] desired J vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita).
Abhijacca
Abhijacca (adj.) [Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca] of noble birth J v.120.
Abhijaneti
Abhijaneti occasional spelling for abhijāneti.
Abhijappati
Abhijappati [abhi + jappati] to wish for, strive after, pray for S i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp. Kindred Sayings p. 180) = J iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiŋsati thometi; Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning abhigijjhati.
Abhijappana
Abhijappana (nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇŋa˚ DA i.97] in hattha˚ casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands D i.11; DA i.97.
Abhijappā
Abhijappā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā] praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā ii.; Dhs 1136.
-- 63 --
Abhijappin
Abhijappin (adj.) [fr. abhijappati] praying for, desiring A III.353 (kāma -- lābha˚).
Abhijalati
Abhijalati [abhi + jalati] to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto res- plendent PvA 189.
Abhijavati
Abhijavati [abhi + javati] to be eager, active Sn 668.
Abhijāta
Abhijāta (adj.) [abi + jāta] of noble birth, well -- born, S i.69; Vv 293; Miln 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth).
Abhijāti
Abhijāti (f.) [abhi + jāti] 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non -- Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour D i.53, 54; A iii.383 ff. (quoted DA i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at D iii.250, M ii.222, and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers. -- 2. Rebirth, descent, Miln 226.
Abhijātika
Abhijātika (adj.) [fr. abhijāti] belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale D iii.251 = A iii.348; Sn 563 = Th 1, 833; cp. J P T S. 1893, 11; in sense of "evil disposed or of bad character" at J v.87 (= kāḷaka -- sabhāva C.).
Abhijātitā
Abhijātitā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijāti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216.
Abhijāna
Abhijāna (nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijñāna] recognition, remem- brance, recollection Miln 78. See also abhiññā.
Abhijānāti
Abhijānāti [abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D i.143; S ii.58, 105, 219, 278; iii.59, 91; iv.50, 324, 399; v.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn 1117 (diṭṭhiŋ Gotamassa na a.); J iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (nɔābhijānāmi bhuttaŋ vā pītaŋ); Sdhp 550; etc. -- Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaññā Sn 917, 1059 (= jāneyyāsi SnA 592); aor. abhaññāsi Sn p. 16. -- ppr. abhijānaŋ S iv.19, 89; Sn 788 (= ˚jānanto C.), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva DhA iv.233; abhiññāya S iv.16; v.392; Sn 534 (sabbadhammaŋ), 743 (jātikkhayaŋ), 1115, 1148; It 91 (dhammaŋ); Dh 166 (atta -- d -- atthaŋ); freq. in phrase sayaŋ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self -- experience It 97 (v.l. abhiññā); Dh 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaŋ abhiññā D i.31 (+ sacchikatvā); S ii.217; It 97 (v.l. for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā -- vosita perfected by highest knowledge S i.167 = 175 = Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA iv.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaŋ abhiññapariññeyya S iv.29. -- grd. abhiññeyya S iv.29; Sn 558 (˚ŋ abhiññātaŋ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA iv.233. -- pp. abhiññāta (q. v.).
Abhijāyati
Abhijāyati [abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti] to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaŋ asukkaŋ Nibbānaŋ a. D iii.251; A iii.384 sq. At Sn 214 abhijāyati means "to behave, to be", cp. SnA 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati).
Abhijigiŋsati
Abhijigiŋsati [abhi + jigiŋsati] to wish to overcome, to covet J vi.193 (= jinituŋ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati; Th 1, 743 ("cheat"? Mrs Rh. D.; "vernichten" Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiŋsanatā.
Abhijighacchati
Abhijighacchati [abhi + jighacchati] to be very hungry PvA 271.
Abhijīvanika
Abhijīvanika (adj.) [abhi + jīvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin i.187 (sippa).
Abhijīhanā
Abhijīhanā (f.) [abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.).
Abhijeti
Abhijeti [abhi + jayati] to win, acquire, conquer J vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā).
Abhijoteti
Abhijoteti [abhi + joteti] to make clear, explain, illuminate J v.339.
Abhijjanaka
Abhijjanaka (adj.) [a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid] not to be broken, not to be moved or changed, uninfluenced J ii.170; DhA iii.189.
Abhijjamāna
Abhijjamāna (adj.) [ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati] that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are D i.78, 212; iii.112, 281; M i.34, 494; ii.18; A i.170, 255; iii.17; v.199; S ii 121; v.264. In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno. The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Ps ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla's note on that (PvA 169) is corrupt. At D i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻ not dividing (the water) ʼ; at D i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻ not sinking (in the water) ʼ.
Abhijjhā
Abhijjhā (f.) [fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna], covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) D i.70, 71 (˚āya cittaŋ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp. DA i.211 = abhijjhāto); M i.347 (id.); D iii.49, 71 sq., 172, 230, 269; S iv.73, 104, 188, 322 (adj. vigatɔâbhijjha), 343 (˚āyavipāka); A i.280; iii.92; v.251 sq.; It 118; Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya -- ganthā, q. v.); Nd2 taṇhā ii.1; Pug 20, 59; Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha); Vbh 195, 244 (vigatɔâbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13; DhA i.23; PvA 103, 282; Sdhp 56, 69. -- Often combd with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e. g. at D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.340; iii.2; A i.39, 296; ii.16, 152; iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351; Vbh 105, 193 sq. -- anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, 62. -- See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla.
Abhijjhātar
Abhijjhātar see abhijjhitar.
Abhijjhāti
Abhijjhāti [cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhij- jhāyati] to wish for (acc.), long for, covet S v.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya J vi.174 (= patthetvā C.). -- pp. abhijjhita.
Abhijjhāyati
Abhijjhāyati [Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti] to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Sn 301 (aor. abhijjhāyiŋsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiŋsu Sn A 320).
Abhijjhālū
Abhijjhālū (& ˚u) (adj.) [cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijj- hālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin. The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e. g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction] covetous D i.139; iii.82; Ṣ ii.168; iii.93; A i.298; ii.30, 59, 220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40.
Abhijjhiṭṭa
Abhijjhiṭṭa v. l. at DhA iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.
Abhijjhita
Abhijjhita [pp. of abhijjhāti] coveted, J. vi.445; usually neg. an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287; Sn 40 (= anabhipatthita Sn A 85; cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201).
Abhijjhitar
Abhijjhitar [n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M i.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v. l. ˚itar) = A v.265 (T. ˚itar, v. l. ˚ātar).
Abhiñña
Abhiñña (adj.) (usually -- ˚) [Sk. abhijña] knowing, pos- sessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one
-- 64 --
who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88; dandh˚ of sluggish intellect D iii.106; A ii.149; v.63 (opp. khipp˚); mah˚ of great insight S ii.139. -- Compar. abhiññatara S v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro).
Abhiññatā
Abhiññatā (f.) [fr. abhiññā] in cpd. mahā˚ state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge S iv.263; V.175, 298 sq.
Abhiññā
Abhiññā1 (f.) [fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti]. Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna. These conditions precedent are the Path (S v.421 = Vin i.10 = S iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (A v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (S v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. v.255). The contrary is three times stated; wrong -- doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D iii.131; A iii.325 sq. and v.216). Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2, the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others' thoughts (cp. thought -- reading); 4, recollecting one's previous births; 5, knowing other people's rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance). This list occurs only at D iii.281 as a list of abhiññās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññā's, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at D i.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. i.89 sq.); M i.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); A i.255, 258 = iii.17, 280 = iv.421. At S i.191; Vin ii.16; Pug 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā ("endowed with the 6 Apperceptions"). At S ii.216 we have five, and at S v.282, 290 six abhiññā's mentioned in glosses to the text. And at S ii.217, 222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also M ii.11; iii.96. It is from these passages that the list at D iii. has been made up, and called abhiññā's. Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd1 108, 328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd2 s. v. and N0. 466; Ps i.35; ii.156, 189; Vbh 228, 334; Pug 14; Nett 19, 20; Miln 342; Vism 373; Mhvs xix.20; DA i.175; DhA ii.49; iv.30; Sdhp 228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā -- vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yathɔ abhiññaṃ means ʻ as you please, according to liking, as you like ʼ, J v.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (˚abhiñña) see abhiñña.
Abhiññā
Abhiññā2 ger. of abhijānāti.
Abhiññāta
Abhiññāta [pp. of abhijānāti] 1. known, recognised Sn 588 (abhiññeyyaŋ ˚ŋ). -- 2. (well) -- known, distinguished D i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa -- kulaja DA i.252), 235; Sn p. 115.
Abhiññeyya
Abhiññeyya grd. of abhijānāti.
Abhiṭhāna
Abhiṭhāna (nt.) [abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others] a great or deadly crime. Only at Sn 231 = Kh vi.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as "matricide, parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl. 267. -- See also ānantarika.
Abhiṇhaŋ
Abhiṇhaŋ (adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaṇaŋ] repeat- edly, continuous, often M i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice); Sn 335 (˚saŋvāsa continuous living together); J i.190; Pug 32; DhA ii.239; VvA 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaṇaŋ). Cp. abhiṇhaso.
Abhiṇhaso
Abhiṇhaso (adv.) [adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ] always, ever S i.194; Th 1, 25; Sn 559, 560, 998.
Abhitakketi
Abhitakketi [abhi + takketi] to search for Dāvs v.4.
Abhitatta
Abhitatta [pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220; Miln 97, and ghamma˚ S ii.110, 118; Sn 1014; J ii.223; VvA 40; PvA 114.
Abhitāpa
Abhitāpa [abhi + tāpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke); M i.507 (mahā˚ very hot); Miln 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚, of niraya).
Abhitāḷita
Abhitāḷita [abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti] hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚).
Abhitiṭṭhati
Abhitiṭṭhati [abhi + tiṭṭhati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D ii.261; J vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.).
Abhitunna
Abhitunna (tuṇṇa) [not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v. l. under the disguise of (sok -- )âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S ii.20; Ps i.129 (dukkha˚), 164; J i.407; 509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268; Sdhp 281.
Abhito
Abhito (indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.]. -- 1. round about, on both sides J vi.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.), 539. -- 2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe VvA 275).
Abhitoseti
Abhitoseti [abhi + toseti] to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Sn 709 (= atīva toseti Sn A 496).
Abhitthaneti
Abhitthaneti [abhi + thaneti] to roar, to thunder J i.330, 332 = Cp. iii.107.
Abhittharati
Abhittharati [abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati] to make haste Dh 116 (= turitaturitaŋ sīghasīghaŋ karoti DhA iii.4).
Abhitthavati
Abhitthavati [abhi + thavati] to praise J i.89; iii.531; Dāvs iii.23; DhA i.77; PvA 22; cp. abhitthunati.
Abhitthavana
Abhitthavana (nt.) [fr. prec.] praise Th A 74.
Abhitthunati
Abhitthunati [abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati] to praise J i.17 (aor abhitthuniŋsu); cp. thunati 2. -- pp. ˚tthuta DhA i.88.
Abhida
Abhida1 (adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at M ii.34, 35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv. ll. abhidosa & abhidesa, Neumann trsl. "unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like "full, powerful" or unbroken, unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta "fearless"?") or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly?
Abhida
Abhida2 Only in the difficult old verse D ii.107 (= S v.263 = A iv.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203). Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke.
Abhidassana
Abhidassana (nt.) [abhi + dassana] sight, appearance, show J vi.193.
Abhideyya
Abhideyya in sabba˚ at PvA 78 is with v. l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaŋ.
Abhidosa
Abhidosa (˚ -- ) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata M i.170 = J i.81; ˚gata gone last night J vi.386 (= hiyyo paṭhama -- yāme C.).
-- 65 --
Abhidosika
Abhidosika belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Miln 291. See ābhi˚.
Abhiddavati
Abhiddavati [abhi + dru, cp. dava2] to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs iii.47.
Abhidhamati
Abhidhamati [abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi˚ & api -- dhamati] blow on or at A i.257.
Abhidhamma
Abhidhamma [abhi + dhamma] the "special Dhamma," i. e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64, 68; iv.144; iv.344. Coupled with abhivinaya, D iii.267; M i.272. -- 2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs v.37; PvA 140. See the detailed discussion at DA i.15, 18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.] -- kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, M i.214, 218; A iii.106, 392. See dhammakathā.
Abhidhammika
Abhidhammika see ābhidhammika.
Abhidhara
Abhidhara (adj.) [abhi + dhara] firm, bold, in ˚māna firm- minded Dh p. 81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135; not verified).
Abhidhāyin
Abhidhāyin (adj.) [abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98.
Abhidhāreti
Abhidhāreti [abhi + dhāreti] to hold aloft J i.34 = Bu iv.1.
Abhidhāvati
Abhidhāvati [abhi + dhāvati] to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195; S i.209; J ii.217; iii.83; DhA iv.23.
Abhidhāvin
Abhidhāvin (adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] "pouring in", rushing on, running J vi.559.
Abhinata
Abhinata [pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M i.386 (+ apanata); S i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D. "strained forth", cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata.
Abhinadati
Abhinadati [abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J vi.531. Cp. abhinādita.
Abhinandati
Abhinandati [abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D i.46 (bhāsitaŋ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M i.109, 458; S i.32 (annaŋ), 57, 14, (cakkhuŋ, rūpe etc.); A iv.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn 1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA i.160; DhA iii.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp. paṭikkosi) VvA 65 (vacanaŋ). -- pp. abhinandita (q. v.). <-> Often in combn. with abhivadati (q. v.).
Abhinandana
Abhinandana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā], pleasure, delight, enjoyment D i.244; M i.498; J iv.397.
Abhinandita
Abhinandita [pp. of abhinandati] only in an˚ not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure S iv.213 = It 38; S v. 319.
Abhinandin
Abhinandin (adj.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin] rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚), enjoying A ii.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatrɔâbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra -- tatrɔâbhinandinī M Vastu iii.332] Vin i.10; S v.421; Ps ii.147; Nett 72, etc.
Abhinamati
Abhinamati [abhi + namati] to bend. -- pp. abhinata (q.v.).
Abhinaya
Abhinaya [abhi + naya] a dramatic representation VvA 209 (sākhā˚).
Abhinava
Abhinava (adj.) [abhi + nava] quite young, new or fresh Vin iii.337; J ii.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha); ThA 201 (˚yobbana = abhiyobbana); PvA 40 (˚saṇṭhāna), 87 (= paccaggha) 155.
Abhinādita
Abhinādita [pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati] resounding with ( -- ˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) J vi.530 (= abhinadanto C.); PvA 157 (= abhiruda).
Abhinikūjita
Abhinikūjita (adj.) [abhi + nikūjita] resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) J v.232 (of the barking of a dog), 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita.
Abhinikkhamati
Abhinikkhamati [abhi + nikkhamati] to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Sn 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya -- vattho hutvā Sn A 117).
Abhinikkhamana
Abhinikkhamana (nt.) [abhi + nikkhamana] departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement, renunciation. Usually as mahā˚ the great renunciation J i.61; PvA 19.
Abhinikkhipati
Abhinikkhipati [abhi + nikkhipati] to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60.
Abhiniggaṇhanā
Abhiniggaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti] holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā).
Abhiniggaṇhāti
Abhiniggaṇhāti [abhi + niggaṇhāti] to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti M i.120; A v.230. -- Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā.
Abhinindriya
Abhinindriya [vv. ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal -- indriya not defective, perfect sense -- organ. He must have read ahīn˚. Abhi -- n -- indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya; We should read ahīn˚ throughout D i.34, 77, 186, 195. ii.13; M ii.18; iii.121; Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚).
Abhininnāmeti
Abhininnāmeti [abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439] to bend towards, to turn or direct to D i.76 (cittaŋ ñāṇa -- dassanāya); M i.234; S i.123; iv.178; Pug 60.
Abhinipajjati
Abhinipajjati [abhi + nipajjati] to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati); A iv.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati); Pug 67 (id.).
Abhinipatati
Abhinipatati [abhi + nipatati] to rush on (to) J ii.8.
Abhinipāta
Abhinipāta ( -- matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vbh 321 is expld. by āpātha -- matta [cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife].
Abhinipātana
Abhinipātana (nt.) [fr. abhi -- ni -- pāteti in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5764.
Abhinipātin
Abhinipātin (adj.) [abhi + nipātin] falling on io ( -- ˚) J ii.7.
Abhinipuṇa
Abhinipuṇa (adj.) [abhi + nipuṇa] very thorough, very clever D iii.167.
Abhinippajjati
Abhinippajjati [abhi + nippajjati] to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) M i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) = Nd2 99 (has n'âbhinippajjanti). -- Cp. abhinipphādeti.
Abhinippata
Abhinippata at J vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v. l. BB.).
Abhinippatta
Abhinippatta at Dhs 1035, 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta.
Abhinippanna
Abhinippanna (& ˚nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of ˚nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D ii.223 (siloka); J vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.).
-- 66 --
Abhinippīḷanā
Abhinippīḷanā (f.) [abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā).
Abhinippīḷeti
Abhinippīḷeti [abhi + nippīḷeti] to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti M i. 120; A v.230.
Abhinipphatti
Abhinipphatti (f.) [abhi + nipphatti] production, effecting D ii.283 (v. l. ˚nibbatti).
Abhinipphādeti
Abhinipphādeti [abhi + nipphādeti] to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform D i.78 (bhājana -- vikatiŋ); Vin ii.183 (iddhiŋ); S v.156, 255; Miln 39.
Abhinibbatta
Abhinibbatta [abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati] repro- duced, reborn A iv.40, 401; Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi˚ pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta); VvA 9 (puññɔânubhāva˚ by the power of merit).
Abhinibbattati
Abhinibbattati [abhi + nibbattati] to become, to be repro- duced, to result Pug 51. -- pp. abhinibbatta. -- Cp. B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate].
Abhinibbatti
Abhinibbatti (f.) [abhi + nibbatti] becoming, birth, rebirth, D i.229; ii.283 (v. l. for abhinipphatti) S ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (id.); iv.14, 215; A v.121; PvA 35.
Abhinibbatteti
Abhinibbatteti [abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of ˚nibbattati] to produce, cause, cause to become S iii.152; A v.47; Nd2 under jāneti.
Abhinibbijjati
Abhinibbijjati [either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nir- vidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr. ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt] to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Sn 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v. l. BB˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, SnA expls. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v. l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = A iv.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha, vv. ll. ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Th 2, 84.
Abhinibbijjhati
Abhinibbijjhati [abhi + nibbijjhati] to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3; M i.104 = S iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun -- Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234.
Abhinibbidā
Abhinibbidā (f.) [abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibb- hidā] disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as "padālanā -- paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa -- kosānaŋ"), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā).
Abhinibbuta
Abhinibbuta (adj.) [abhi + nibbuta] perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm' âbhinibbuta A i.142 = M iii.187; Sn 1087; Nd2 83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Sn 343 (= apariḍayhamāna -- citta SnA 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35.
Abhinibbhidā
Abhinibbhidā (f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4, C. on Nett 98). To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda M Vastu i.272, which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh.] the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4; M i.104; 357; Nett 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā.
Abhinimantanatā
Abhinimantanatā (f.) [abstr. to abhinimanteti] speaking to, adressing, invitation M i.331.
Abhinimanteti
Abhinimanteti [abhi + nimanteti] to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to D i.61 (āsanena).
Abhinimmadana
Abhinimmadana (nt.) [abhi + nimmadana] crushing, sub- duing, levelling out M iii.132; A iv.189 sq.
Abhinimmita
Abhinimmita [abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti] created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. VvA 79).
Abhinimmināti
Abhinimmināti [abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166] to create (by magic), produce, shape, make S iii.152 (rūpaŋ); A i.279 (oḷārikaŋ attabhāvaŋ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaŋ manomayaŋ); VvA 16 (mahantaŋ hatthi -- rāja -- vaṇṇaŋ). -- pp. abhinimmita (q. v.).
Abhiniropana
Abhiniropana (nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. abhiniropeti] fixing one's mind upon, application of the mind Ps i.16, 21, 30, 69, 75, 90; Vbh 87; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. ii.19). See also abhiropana.
Abhiniropeti
Abhiniropeti [abhi + niropeti] to implant, fix into (one's mind), inculcate Nett 33.
Abhinivajjeti
Abhinivajjeti [abhi + nivajjeti] to avoid, get rid of D iii. 113; M i.119, 364, 402; S v.119, 295, 318; A iii.169 sq.; It 81.
Abhinivassati
Abhinivassati [abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ] lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds).
Abhiniviṭṭha
Abhiniviṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi -- nivisati] "settled in", attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); PvA 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv iv.84).
Abhinivisati
Abhinivisati [abhi + nivisati] to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308, 309 (parāmasati +). -- pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa.
Abhinivesa
Abhinivesa [abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana] "settling in", i. e. wishing for, tendency towards ( -- ˚), inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to D iii.230; M i.136, 251; S ii.17; iii.10, 13, 135, 161, 186 (saŋyojana˚ iv.50; A iii.363 (paṭhavī˚, adj.); Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +); Pug 22; Vbh 145; Dhs 381, 1003, 1099; Nett 28; PvA 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71. -- Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e. g. S ii.17; Nd2 176, and in phrase idaŋ -- saccɔ âbhinivesa adherence to one's dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties: see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5.
Abhinisīdati
Abhinisīdati [abhi + nisīdati] to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29; iv.273; A v.188; Pug 67.
Abhinissaṭa
Abhinissaṭa (pp.) [abhi + nissaṭa] escaped Th 1, 1089.
Abhinihata
Abhinihata (pp.) [abhi + nihata] oppressed. crushed, slain J iv.4.
Abhinīta
Abhinīta (pp.) [pp. of abhi -- neti] led to, brought to, obliged by ( -- ˚) M i.463 = Miln 32 (rājā & cora˚); M i.282; S iii.93; Th 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga˚ "foredone with cramping pains" Mrs. Rk. D.); Pug 29; Miln 362.
Abhinīla
Abhinīla (adj.) [abhi + nīla] very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep -- black eyes D ii.18; iii.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. Ś i.367 & 370 abhinīla -- padma -- netra]; Th 2, 257 (nettā ahesuŋ abbinīla -- m -- āyatā).
Abhinīhanati
Abhinīhanati [abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid M i.119 (in phrase āṇiŋ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti).
Abhinīharati
Abhinīharati [abhi + nīharati] 1. to take out, throw out M i.119 (see abhinīhanati). -- 2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaŋ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti D i.76 (= tanninnaŋ tappoṇaŋ karoti DA i.220, 224; v. l. abhini˚) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Av. Ś ii.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, 49 to obtain? Ind.), 264 (take to burial), 542.
-- 67 --
Abhinīhāra
Abhinīhāra [abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīrɔ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see note on abhinīharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl. 242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S iii.267 sq. (˚kusala); A ii.189; iii.311; iv.34 (˚kusala); J i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps i.61 sq.; ii.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA i.392; ii.82 (kata˚).
Abhipattika
Abhipattika (adj.) [fr. abhipatti] one who has attained, attaining ( -- ˚), getting possession of S i.200 (devakañña˚).
Abhipatthita
Abhipatthita (pp.) [fr. abhipattheti] hoped, wished, longed for Miln 383; SnA 85.
Abhipattheti
Abhipattheti [abhi + pattheti] to hope for, long for, wish for Kh viii.10; SnA 320; DhA i.30. -- pp. abhipatthita (q. v.).
Abhipassati
Abhipassati [abhi + passati] to have regard for, look for, strive after A i.147 (Nibbānaŋ); iii.75; Sn 896 (khema˚), 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd1 308; Nd2 428; J vi.370.
Abhipāteti
Abhipāteti [abhi + pāteti] to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw J ii.91 (kaṇḍaŋ).
Abhipāruta
Abhipāruta (adj.) [abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati] dressed Miln 222.
Abhipāleti
Abhipāleti [abhi + pāleti] to protect Vv 8421, cp. VvA 341.
Abhipīḷita
Abhipīḷita (pp.) [fr. abhipiḷeti] crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, 279.
Abhipīḷeti
Abhipīḷeti [abhi + pīḷeti] to crush, squeeze Miln 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q. v.).
Abhipucchati
Abhipucchati [abhi + pucchati] Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask J iv.18.
Abhipūreti
Abhipūreti [abhi + pūreti] to fill (up) Miln 238; Dāvs iii. 60 (paŋsūhi).
Abhippakiṇṇa
Abhippakiṇṇa [pp. of abhippakirati] completely strewn (with) J i.62.
Abhippakirati
Abhippakirati [abhi + pakirati] to strew over, to cover (completely) D ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraŋ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); VvA 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). <-> pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q. v.).
Abhippamodati
Abhippamodati [abhi + pamodati] to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) M i.425; S v.312, 330; A v.112; J iii 530; Ps i.95, 176, 190.
Abhippalambati
Abhippalambati [abhi + palambati] to hang down M iii. 164 (olambati ajjholambati a.).
Abhippavassati
Abhippavassati [abhi + pavassati] to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Miln 8, 13, 36, 304; PvA 132 (v. l. ati˚); intrs. Miln 18 (pupphāni ˚iŋsu poured down). -- pp. abhippavuṭṭha.
Abhippavuṭṭha
Abhippavuṭṭha (pp.) [fr. abhippavassati] having rained, poured, fallen; trs. S v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni) = A v.127; intrs. M ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst).
Abhippasanna
Abhippasanna (adj.) [pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhi- prasanna] finding one's peace in (c. loc.), trusting in, having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin iii.43; D i.211 (Bhagavati) S i.134; iv.319; v.225, 378; A iii. 237, 270, 326 sq.; Sn p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu); PvA 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning.
Abhippasāda
Abhippasāda [abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Av. Ś 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda] faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 ("sense of assurance" trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96, 288; PvA 223.
Abhippasādeti
Abhippasādeti [Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhipra- sādayati Divy 68, 85, pp. abhiprasādita -- manāḥ Jtm 213, 220] to establish one's faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Th 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaŋ arahantamhi = cittaŋ pasādeti VvA 105).
Abhippāsāreti
Abhippāsāreti [abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389] to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde).
Abhippasīdati
Abhippasīdati [abhi + pasīdati] to have faith in D i.211 (fut. ˚issati). -- pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti.
Abhippaharaṇa
Abhippaharaṇa (nt.) [abhi + paharaṇa] attacking, fighting, as adj. f. ˚aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Sn 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ nippothanī antarāyakārī SnA 390).
Abhibyāpeti
Abhibyāpeti [abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp] to pervade Miln 251.
Abhibhakkhayati
Abhibhakkhayati [abhi + bhakkhayati] to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaŋ a.).
Abhibhava
Abhibhava [fr. abhibhavati] defeat, humiliation SnA 436.
Abhibhavati
Abhibhavati [abhi + bhavati] to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer S i.18, 32, 121 (maraṇaŋ); iv. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaŋ), 246, 249 (sāmikaŋ); J i.56, 280; PvA 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati). -- fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4. -- ger. abhibhuyya Vin i.294; Dh 328; It 41 (māraŋ sasenaŋ); Sn 45, 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā PvA 113 (= pasayha), 136. -- grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome PvA 57. -- Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) PvA 80, 103. -- pp. abhibhūta (q. v.).
Abhibhavana
Abhibhavana (nt.) [fr. abhibhavati] overcoming, vanquishing, mastering S ii.210 (v. l. BB abhipatthana).
Abhibhavanīyatā
Abhibhavanīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhi- bhavati] as an˚ invincibility PvA 117.
Abhibhāyatana
Abhibhāyatana (nt.) [abhibhū + āyatana] position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. ii.118; Exp. i.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. D ii.110; iii.260 (& 287); M ii.13; A i.40; iv.305, 348; v.61. Mentioned only at S iv.77 (6 stations); Ps i.5; Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247.
Abhibhāsana
Abhibhāsana (nt.) [abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās] enlightenment or delight ("light & delight" trsl.) Th 1, 613 (= tosana C.).
Abhibhū
Abhibhū (n. -- adj.) [Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhi- bhavati] overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of ( -- ˚) D iii.29; S ii. 284; Sn 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena -- pamaddana 561), 642. -- Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i. e. unvanquished Lord of all D i 18; iii.135 = Nd2 276; A ii.24; iv.94; It 122; cp. DA i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakoɔ ham asmīti).
Abhibhūta
Abhibhūta [pp. of abhibhavati] overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished D i.121; S i.137 (jāti -- jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra -- silokena); A i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); J i.189; PvA 14, 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (= pareta). Often neg. an˚ unconquered, e. g. Sn 934; Nd1 400; & see phrase under abhibhū.
Abhimangala
Abhimangala (adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) "benedicted", blessed Vin iii.187 = DhA i.409. Opp. avamangala.
Abhimaṇḍita
Abhimaṇḍita (pp. -- ˚) [abhi + maṇḍita] adorned, embel- lished, beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17.
Abhimata
Abhimata (adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1, 91.
-- 68 --
Abhimatthati
Abhimatthati (˚eti) & ˚mantheti [abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti] 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy M i.243 (sikharena muddhānaŋ ˚mantheti); S i.127; Dh 161 (v. l. ˚nth˚); J iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno); DhA iii.152 (= kantati viddhaŋseti). -- 2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiŋ; cp. Vedic agniŋ nirmanthati) M i.240.
Abhimaddati
Abhimaddati [Sk. abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd] to crush S i.102; A i.198; Sdhp 288.
Abhimana
Abhimana (adj.) [abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e. g. M Vastu iii.259] having one's mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Th 1, 1122; J vi.451.
Abhimanāpa
Abhimanāpa (adj.) [abhi + manāpa] very pleasing VvA 53 (where id. p. at PvA 71 has atimanāpa).
Abhimantheti
Abhimantheti see abhimatthati.
Abhimāra
Abhimāra [cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter] a bandit, bravo, robber J ii.199; DA i.152.
Abhimukha
Abhimukha (adj.) [abhi + mukha] facing, turned towards, approaching J ii.3 (˚ā ahesuŋ met each other). Usually -- ˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards D i.50 (purattha˚); J i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa -- rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚), 416 (Jetavana˚); DhA i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚); PvA 3 (kāma˚, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚). -- nt. ˚ŋ adv. to, towards J i.263 (matta -- vāraṇe); PvA 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adj.); DhA iii.310 (uttara˚).
Abhiyācati
Abhiyācati [abhi + yācati] to ask, beg, entreat Sn 1101, cp. Nd2 86.
Abhiyāti
Abhiyāti [Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā] to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) S i.216 (aor. abhiyaŋsu, v. l. SS abhijiyiŋsu); DhA iii.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v. l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p. VvA 68 reads pāyāsi with v. l. upāyāsi).
Abhiyujjhati
Abhiyujjhati [abhi + yujjhati from yudh] to contend, quarrel with J i.342.
Abhiyuñjati
Abhiyuñjati [abhi + yuj] to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one's share Vin iii.50; iv.304.
Abhiyoga
Abhiyoga [cp. abhiyuñjati] practice, observance Dāvs iv.7.
Abhiyogin
Abhiyogin (adj.) [fr. abhiyoga] applying oneself to, prac- tised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) D iii.168.
Abhiyobbana
Abhiyobbana (nt.) [abhi + yobbana] much youthfulness, early or tender youth Th 2, 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla ThA 211).
Abhirakkhati
Abhirakkhati [abhi + rakkhati] to guard, protect J vi.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati.
Abhirakkhā
Abhirakkhā (f.) [fr. abhirakkhati] protection, guard J i.204 (= ārakkhā 203).
Abhirata
Abhirata (adj.) ( -- ˚) [pp. of abhiramati] found of, indulging in, finding delight in A iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (id.), Sn 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚); J v.382 (dāna˚); PvA 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚).
Abhiratatta
Abhiratatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of, delighting in ( -- ˚) J v.254 (kāma˚).
Abhirati
Abhirati (f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚) S i.185; iv.260; A v.122; Dh 88. -- an˚ displeasure, discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; D i.17 (+ paritassanā); S i.185; v.132; A iii.259; iv.50; v.72 sq., 122; J iii.395; DA i.111; PvA 187.
Abhiratta
Abhiratta (adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J v.156; fig. very much excited or affected with ( -- ˚) Sn 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.).
Abhiraddha
Abhiraddha (adj.) [pp. of abhi + rādh] propitiated, satis- fied A iv.185 (+ attamana).
Abhiraddhi
Abhiraddhi (f.) [fr. abhiraddha] only in neg. an˚ displeasure, dislike, discontent A i.79; DA i.52 (= kopassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Abhiramati
Abhiramati [abhi + ram] to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Sn 718, 1085; J i.192; iii.189, 393; DhA i.119; PvA 3, 61, 145. -- ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. ˚ŋ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaŋ after one's liking, as much as he pleases, after one's heart's content Vin i.34; M i.170; Sn 53. <-> ppr. med. abhiramamāna J iii.188, PvA 162. -- pp. abhirata (q. v.). -- 2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q. v.).
Abhiramana
Abhiramana (nt.) [fr. abhiramati] sporting, dallying, amusing oneself PvA 16.
Abhiramāpana
Abhiramāpana (nt.) [fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati] causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure, making happy M iii.132 (gāmante).
Abhiramāpeti
Abhiramāpeti [Caus. II. fr. abhiramati] 1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure J iii.393. -- 2. to delight, amuse, divert J i.61. -- Cp. abhiramāpana.
Abhiravati
Abhiravati [abhi + ravati] to shout ont Bu ii.90 = J i.18 (v.99)
Abhirādhita
Abhirādhita [pp. of abhirādheti] having succeeded in, fallen to one's share, attained Th 1, 259.
Abhirādhin
Abhirādhin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. abhirādheti] pleasing, giving plea- sure, satisfaction J iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento C.).
Abhirādheti
Abhirādheti [abhi + rādheti] to please, satisfy, make happy J i.421; DA i.52. -- aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi VvA 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi VvA 282); J i.421; iii.386 (= paritosesi C.). -- pp. abhirādhita.
Abhiruci
Abhiruci (f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 (= ajjhāsaya).
Abhirucita
Abhirucita (adj.) [pp. fr. abhi + ruc] pleasing, agreeable, liked J i.402; DhA i.45.
Abhiruda
Abhiruda (adj. -- ˚) [Sk. abhiruta] resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Th 1, 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra -- koñca˚); J iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra -- koñca˚); vi.172 (id., = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra -- koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haŋsa -- koñca˚; = abhinādita PvA 157). -- The form abhiruta occurs at Th 1, 49.
Abhirūpa
Abhirūpa (adj.) [abhi + rūpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 (= dassaniyaɔ angapaccanga SnA 383); J i.207; Pug 52; DA i.281 (= aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa -- pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g. Vin i.268; D i.47, 114, 120; S ii.279; A ii.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA i.281 (compar.); PvA 46.
Abhirūḷha
Abhirūḷha [pp. of abhirūhati] mounted, gone up to, ascended J v.217; DhA i.103.
Abhirūhati
Abhirūhati (abhiruhati) [abhi + ruh] to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dh 321; Th 1, 271; J i.259; ii.388; iii.220; iv.138 (navaŋ); vi.272 (peculiar aor. ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DA i.253. -- ger. abhiruyha J iii.189; PvA 75, 152 (as v. l.; T. has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaŋ), & abhirūhitvā J i.50 (pabbataŋ) ii.128.
Abhirūhana
Abhirūhana (nt.) [BSk. ˚rūhana, e. g. M Vastu ii.289] climbing, ascending, climb Miln 356.
-- 69 --
Abhiroceti
Abhiroceti [abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc] 1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for J iii.192; v.222 (= roceti); Vv 6423 (vataŋ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho VvA 282). -- 2. to please, satisfy, entertain, gladden Vv 6424 (but VvA 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati, thus to no. 3). -- 3. v. l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2.
Abhiropana
Abhiropana (nt.) [fr. abhiropeti] concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Ps ii. only) Ps ii.82 (v. l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana.
Abhiropeti
Abhiropeti [abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh] to fix one's mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. ˚ropayi = ropesi VvA 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaŋ kāresi VvA 172), 604 (= pūjesi VvA 253); Dāvs v.19.
Abhilakkhita
Abhilakkhita (adj.) [Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ] fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices J iv.1; DA i.18.
Abhilakkhitatta
Abhilakkhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhilakkhita] having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics DhsA 62.
Abhilanghati
Abhilanghati [abhi + langhati] to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) J iii.364; vi.221.
Abhilambati
Abhilambati [abhi + lambati] to hang down over (c. acc.) M iii.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati); J v.70 (papātaŋ), 269 (Vetaraṇiŋ). -- pp. abhilambita (q. v.).
Abhilambita
Abhilambita (adj.) [pp. of abhilambati] hanging down J v.407 (nīladuma˚).
Abhilāpa
Abhilāpa [fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaŋ uncertain, vv. ll. abhipāyaŋ abhipāpāyaŋ, abhisāpāyaŋ, abhisapāyaŋ, atisappāyaŋ. The corresp. passage S iii.93 reads abhisapayaŋ: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA i.20, 23, 281; DhsA 51.
Abhilāsa
Abhilāsa [Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ] desire, wish, longing PvA 154.
Abhilekheti
Abhilekheti [Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta -- lekhaŋ ˚lekhayi).
Abhilepana
Abhilepana (nt.) [abhi + lepana] "smearing over", stain, pollution Sn 1032, 1033 = Nett 10, 11 (see Nd2 88 = laggana "sticking to", bandhana, upakkilesa).
Abhivagga
Abhivagga [abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M i.87 = Nd2 1996.
Abhivañcana
Abhivañcana (nt.) [abhi + vañc] deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64.
Abhivaṭṭa
Abhivaṭṭa [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha] rained upon Dh 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. DhA iv.45); Miln 176, 197, 286. -- Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dh 335 "the abounding Bīraṇa grass").
Abhivaḍḍhati
Abhivaḍḍhati [Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh] 1. to increase (intrs.) D i.113, 195 (opp. hāyati); M ii.225; A iii.46 (bhogā a.); Dh 24; Miln 374; PvA 8, 133; Sdhp 288, 523. -- 2. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow J iii.399 (vanaspatiŋ). -- pp. abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha (q.v.).
Abhivaḍḍhana
Abhivaḍḍhana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. abhivaḍḍhati] increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. ˚ī Sdhp 68.
Abhivaḍḍhi
Abhivaḍḍhi (f.) [cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh] in- crease, growth Miln 94. -- See also abhivuddhi.
Abhivaṇṇita
Abhivaṇṇita [pp. of abhivanneti] praised Dpvs i.4.
Abhivaṇṇeti
Abhivaṇṇeti [abhi + vanneti] to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita.
Abhivadati
Abhivadati [abhi + vadati] 1. to speak out, declare, pro- mise J i.83 = Vin i.36; J vi.220. -- 2. to speak (kindly) to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e. g. at M i.109, 266, 458; S iii.14; iv.36 sq.; Miln 69. -- Caus. abhivādeti.
Abhivandati
Abhivandati [abhi + vandati] to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. ˚vandanīya Miln 227.
Abhivassaka
Abhivassaka (adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha˚).
Abhivassati
Abhivassati [abhi + vassati from vṛṣ] to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed D iii.160 (ābhivassaŋ metri causa); A iii.34; Th 1, 985; J i.18 (v.100; pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106; Miln 132, 411. <-> pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Miln 132.
Abhivassin
Abhivassin (adj.) = abhivassaka It 64, 65 (sabbattha˚).
Abhivādana
Abhivādana (nt.) [fr. abhivādeti] respectful greeting, salu- tation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion A ii.180; iv.130, 276; J i.81, 82, 218; Dh 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. DhA ii.239); VvA 24; Sdhp 549 (˚sīla).
Abhivādeti
Abhivādeti [Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; D i.61; A iii.223; iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiŋ aor. = abhivādanaŋ kāresiŋ vandiŋ VvA 24); Miln 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaŋ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D i.89, 125, 225; Sn 1010. -- Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba).
Abhivāyati
Abhivāyati [abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti] to blow through, to pervade Miln 385.
Abhivāreti
Abhivāreti [abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ] to hold back, refuse, deny J v.325 (= nivāreti C.).
Abhivāheti
Abhivāheti [abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah] to remove, to put away Bu x.5.
Abhivijayati
Abhivijayati (& vijināti) [abhi + vijayati] to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the ger. ˚jiya at D i.89, 134; ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd pl. ˚jinanti at Miln 39; the ger. ˚jinitvā at M i.253; Pug 66.
Abhiviññāpeti
Abhiviññāpeti [abhi + viññāpeti] to turn somebody's mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaŋ dhammaŋ abhiviññāpesi).
Abhivitarati
Abhivitarati [abhi + vitarati] "to go down to", i. e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290.
Abhivinaya
Abhivinaya [abhi + vinaya] higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e. g. D iii.267; M i.472; also with vinaya Vin v.1 sg.
Abhivindati
Abhivindati [abhi + vindati] to find, get, obtain Sn 460 (= labhati adhigacchati SnA 405).
Abhivisiṭṭha
Abhivisiṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + visiṭṭha] most excellent, very distinguished DA i.99, 313.
Abhivissajjati
Abhivissajjati [abhi + vissajjati] to send out, send forth, deal out, give D iii.160.
Abhivissattha
Abhivissattha [abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta] confided in, taken into confidence M ii.52 (v. l. ˚visaṭṭha).
-- 70 --
Abhivuṭṭha
Abhivuṭṭha [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa] poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Th 1, 1065; Dh 335 (gloss); PvA 29.
Abhivuḍḍha
Abhivuḍḍha [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuddha] in- creased, enriched PvA 150.
Abhivuddha
Abhivuddha [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuḍḍha] grown up Miln 361.
Abhivuddhi
Abhivuddhi (f.) [Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi] in- crease, growth, prosperity Miln 34.
Abhiveṭheti
Abhiveṭheti: Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at J v.452 for ati˚, which however does not agree with C. expln. on p. 454.
Abhivedeti
Abhivedeti [abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, 11. -- 2. to know J vi.175 (= jānāti C.).
Abhivihacca
Abhivihacca [ger. of abhi + vihanati] having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at M i.317 = S iii.156; v.44 = It 20.
Abhivyāpeti
Abhivyāpeti see abhibyāpeti.
Abhisaŋvisati
Abhisaŋvisati [abhi + saŋvisati]. Only in abhisaŋvisseyya- gattaŋ (or -- bhastaŋ or -- santuŋ) Th 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻ a bag of skin with carrion filled ʼ.
Abhisaŋsati
Abhisaŋsati [Vedic abhiśaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs] to execrate, revile, lay a curse on J v.174 (˚saŋsittha 3rd sg. pret. med. = paribhāsi C.) -- aor. abhisasi J vi.187, 505, 522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.). -- pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiŋsati.
Abhisaŋsanā
Abhisaŋsanā (f.) [? abhisaŋsati] is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning "neighing" (of horses) VvA 272, 279.
Abhisankhata
Abhisankhata (adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisan- kharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M i.350; A ii.43; v.343; J i.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8.
Abhisankharoti
Abhisankharoti (& ˚khāreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddhɔ âbhisankhāraŋ ˚khāreyya); D i.184 (id.); S ii.40; iii.87, 92; iv.132, 290; v.449; A i.201; Sn 984 (ger. ˚itvā: having got up this curse, cp. SnA 582); PvA 56 (iddhɔ âbhisaŋkhāraŋ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.). -- pp. abhisankhata (q. v.).
Abhisankhāra
Abhisankhāra [abhi + sankhāra] 1. putting forth, perform- ance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz. (a) gamiya˚ (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233; A iv.180, & (b) iddha˚ (= iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 56, 172, 212. -- 2. preparation, store, accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum, state (see for detail sankhāra) S iii.58 (an˚); Nd1 334, 442; Nd2 s. v.; Vbh 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340; DhsA 357 (˚viññāna "storing intellect" Dhs trsl. 262).
Abhisankhārika
Abhisankhārika (adj.) [fr. abhisankhāra] what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya).
Abhisankhipati
Abhisankhipati [abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46.
Abhisanga
Abhisanga [fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga] I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to J v.6; Nett 110, 112; DhsA 129 (˚hetukaŋ dukkhaŋ) 249 (˚rasa).
Abhisangin
Abhisangin (adj.) [fr. abhisanga] cleaving to ( -- ˚) Sdhp 566.
Abhisajjati
Abhisajjati [abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga] to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) D i.91 (= kodha -- vasena laggati DA i.257); iii.159; J iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Av. Ś i.286); v.175 (= kopeti C.); Dh 408 (abhisaje Pot. = kujjhāpana -- vasena laggapeyya DhA iv.182); Pug 30, 36. <-> See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā.
Abhisajjana
Abhisajjana (nt. -- adj.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2] only as adv. f. ˚nī Ep. of vācā scolding, abusing, cursing A v.265 (para˚). Cp. next.
Abhisajjanā
Abhisajjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana] at Sn 49 evidently means "scolding, cursing, being in bad temper" (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vācɔ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd2 & Bdhgh. as "sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire" (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd2 89 & 107; SnA 98 (sineha -- vasena), cp. also the compromise -- expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha -- vasena laggati (DA i.257).
Abhisañcināti
Abhisañcināti (& ˚cayati) [abhi + sañcināti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaŋ = ˚sañcineyyaŋ VvA 202).
Abhisañcetayita
Abhisañcetayita [pp. of abhisañceteti] raised into consci- ousness, thought out, intended, planned M i.350; S ii. 65; iv.132; A v.343.
Abhisañceteti
Abhisañceteti [abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S ii.82. -- pp. abhisañcetayita (q. v.).
Abhisaññā
Abhisaññā (f.). Only in the compound abhi -- saññā -- nirodha D i.179, 184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻ trance ʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers. See saññā -- vedayita -- nirodha.
Abhisaññūhati
Abhisaññūhati [abhi + saññūhati, i. e. saŋ -- ni -- ūhati] to heap up, concentrate Vbh 1, 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Cp. abhisankhipati.
Abhisaṭa
Abhisaṭa [pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ to flow] 1. (med.) streamed forth, come together J vi.56 (= sannipatita C.). <-> 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268.
Abhisatta
Abhisatta [pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap] cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled J iii.460; v.71; SnA 364 (= akkuṭṭha); VvA 335.
Abhisattha
Abhisattha [pp. of abhisaŋsati] cursed, accursed Th 1, 118 "old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her" (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris J P T S. 1886, 145 gives the commentator's equivalents, "commanded, worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age, was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern's translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻ hurried up ʼ seems to us impossible.
Abhisaddahati
Abhisaddahati [abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e. g. Divy 17, 337] to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.), believe S v.226; Th 1, 785; Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya = paṭiñeyya PvA 226); Nett 11; Miln 258; PvA 26; Dāvs iii.58.
Abhisantāpeti
Abhisantāpeti [ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati] to burn out, scorch, destroy M i.121.
Abhisanda
Abhisanda [abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e. g. M Vastu ii.276] outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result; only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññɔ âbhisandā kusalɔ âbhisandā (yields in merit) S v.391 sq.; A ii.54 sq.; iii.51, 337; vi.245, & kammɔ âbhisanda result of kamma Miln 276. -- Cp. abhisandana.
Abhisandana
Abhisandana (nt.) [= abhisanda] result, outcome, con- sequence Ps i.17 (sukhassa).
-- 71 --
Abhisandahati
Abhisandahati [abhi + sandahati of saŋ + dhā] to put together, to make ready Th 1, 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of J ii.386 (= paṭicca C.).
Abhisandeti
Abhisandeti [abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad] to make over- flow, to make full, fill, pervade D i.73, 74.
Abhisanna
Abhisanna (adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with ( -- ˚), full Vin i. 279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Miln 134); J i.17 (v.88; pītiyā); Miln 112 (duggandha˚).
Abhisapati
Abhisapati [abhi + sapati, of śap] to execrate, curse, ac- curse Vin iv.276; J iv.389; v.87; DhA i.42. -- pp. abhisatta.
Abhisapana
Abhisapana (nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read for abhisampanna).
Abhisamaya
Abhisamaya [abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq. -- Esp. in full phrases: attha˚ grasp of what is proficient S i.87 = A iii.49 = It 17, cp. A ii.46; ariyasaccānaŋ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths S v.415, 440, 441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāŋ caturnāŋ āryasatyānāŋ a.]; Sn 758 (sacca˚ = saccɔ âvabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚), 525 (saccānaŋ); dhammɔ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharmɔ âbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA 9 etc. frequent; sammā -- mānɔ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaŋ, vivattayi saññojanaŋ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa" at S iv.205, 207, 399; A iii.246, 444; It 47; cp. māna˚ S i.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaŋ SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saŋyutta); Sn 737 (phassa˚, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa -- nirodha SnA 509); Ps ii.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha VvA 85); DA i.32; DhA i.109; VvA 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dpvs i.31. -- anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly S iii.260; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination").
Abhisamāgacchati
Abhisamāgacchati [abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143).
Abhisamācārika
Abhisamācārika (adj.) [abhi + samācārika, to samācāra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181; A ii.243 sq.; of dhamma M i.469; A iii.14 sq.; 422.
Abhisamikkhati
Abhisamikkhati (& ˚ekkhati), [abhi + sam + īks, cp. sa- mikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg. med. ˚samekkhase = olokesi C.). -- ger. ˚samikkha & ˚samekkha [B.Sk. ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J v.340 (˚samikkha, v. l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393, 394 (= disvā C.).
Abhisameta
Abhisameta [pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita] completely grasped or realised, understood, mastered S v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.); A iv.384 (appattaŋ asacchikataŋ +).
Abhisametāvin
Abhisametāvin (adj.) [possess. adj. -- formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta] commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189; S ii.133; v.458 sq.
Abhisameti
Abhisameti [abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e. g. aor. ˚samiŋsu & ˚samesuŋ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk. abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617: caturāryasatyāni a.] to come by, to attain, to realise, grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Miln 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaŋ abhisameti). Freg. in combn. abhisambujjhati, abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e. g. S ii.25; iii.139; Kvu 321. -- fut. ˚samessati S v.441. -- aor. ˚samiŋsu Miln 350; ˚samesuŋ S v.415. -- ger. ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as caus. form.; Trenckner's expln. Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding); A v.50 (sammɔattha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient); Sn 143 (= abhisamāgantvā KhA 236); and ˚sametvā S ii.25; iii.139. -- pp. abhisameta (q.v.).
Abhisampanna
Abhisampanna at PvA 144 is wrong reading for v. l. abhisapana (curse).
Abhisamparāya
Abhisamparāya [abhi + samparāya] future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll. phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻ what fate in the world -- to -- come ʼ, D ii.91; Vin i.293; S iv.59, 63; v.346, 356, 369; DhA i.221. -- evaŋ -- gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) "leading to such & such a revirn, such & such a future state" D i.16, 24, 32, 33 etc. (= evaŋ -- vidhā paralokā ti DA i.108). -- abhisamparāyaŋ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death A i.48; ii.197; iii.347; iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave PvA 200). -- diṭṭhe cɔeva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca "in this world and in the world to come" A ii.61; Pug 38; Miln 162; PvA 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha). -- Used absolutely at PvA 122 (= fate).
Abhisambujjhati
Abhisambujjhati [abhi + sambujjhati] to become wide- awake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiŋ) D iii.135; It 121. aor. ˚sambujjhi S v.433; PvA 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e. g. S. ii.25; iii.139. -- ppr. med. ˚sambudhāna; pp. ˚sambuddha -- Caus. ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. ˚bodhita.
Abhisambujjhana
Abhisambujjhana (nt.) = abhisambodhi J i.59.
Abhisambuddha
Abhisambuddha [pp. of abhisambujjhati] (a) (pass.) rea- lised, perfectly understood D iii.273; S iv.331; It 121. an˚ not understood M i.71, 92, 114, 163, 240. -- (b) (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully -- awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising, enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin i.1; D ii.4; M i.6 (sammāsambodhiŋ); S i.68, 138, 139 & passim PvA 94, 99.
Abhisambuddhatta
Abhisambuddhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhisambuddha] thorough realisation, perfect understanding S v.433.
Abhisambudhāna
Abhisambudhāna (adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚] awaking, realising, knowing, understanding Dh 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho DhA i.337).
Abhisambodhi
Abhisambodhi (f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlight- enment J i.14 (parama˚). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā -- ) sambodhi.
Abhisambodhita
Abhisambodhita (adj.) [pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati] awakened to the highest wisdom PvA 137 (Bhagavā).
Abhisambhava
Abhisambhava [fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur˚ hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S v.454; A v.202; Sn 429, 701; J v.269, vi.139, 439.
Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti)
Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti) [abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to", i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach, to bear A iv.241; Th 1, 436; Nd1 471,
-- 72 --
485; J iii.140; v.150, 417; vi.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. ˚sambhossaŋ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Ps ii.193. <-> ger. ˚bhutvā Th 1, 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). -- aor. ˚bhosi D ii.232. -- grd. ˚bhavanīya D ii.210; Ps ii.193. -- See also abhisambhuṇāti.
Abhisambhuṇāti
Abhisambhuṇāti [considered to be a bastard form of abhi- sambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable D i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268); Nd1 77, 312.
Abhisambhū
Abhisambhū (adj.) [fr. abhi + sam + bhū] getting, attaining (?) D ii.255 (lomahaŋsa˚).
Abhisambhūta
Abhisambhūta [pp. of abhisambhavati] attained, got Sdhp 556.
Abhisammati
Abhisammati [abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati] to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still J vi.420 (pp. abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain).
Abhisara
Abhisara [fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ to go] retinue J v.373.
Abhisallekhika
Abhisallekhika (adj) [abhi + sallekha + ika] austere, stern, only in f. ˚ā (scil. kathā) A iii.117 sq.; iv.352, 357; v.67.
Abhisavati
Abhisavati (better ˚ssavati?) [abhi + savati, of sru] to flow towards or into J vi.359 (najjo Gangaŋ a.).
Abhisasi
Abhisasi aor. of abhisaŋsati (q. v.).
Abhisādheti
Abhisādheti [abhi + sādheti] to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain J vi.180; Miln 264.
Abhisāpa
Abhisāpa [abhisapati] a curse, anathema S iii.93 = It 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa: see vv. ll. under abhilāpa & cp. Brethren 376 n. 1.); Th 1,1118.
Abhisāriyā
Abhisāriyā (f.) [Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ] a woman who goes to meet her lover J iii.139.
Abhisāreti
Abhisāreti [abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati] to approach, to persecute J vi.377.
Abhisiŋsati
Abhisiŋsati [= abhisaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs. As to Sk. śaŋs > P. siŋs cp. āsiŋsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the "infernals", cp. im -- precare], to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. ˚sīsi. v. l. ˚sisi. VvA 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi).
Abhisiñcati
Abhisiñcati [abhi + siñncati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚] to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate A i.107 (Khattiyɔ âbhisekena) J i.399 (fig. ˚itvā ger. ii.409 (id.); vi.161 (id.); Nd1 298; Miln 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā); PvA 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca . . .) -- Pass. abhisiñcati Miln 359. -- pp. abhisitta. -- Caus. abhiseceti.
Abhisitta
Abhisitta [pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. ˚sikta] 1. sprinkled over, anointed Sn 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Miln 336 (amatena loka a.). -- 2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin iii.44; A i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiyɔ âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (v.l. for avasitta, also an˚).
Abhiseka
Abhiseka [fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A i.107 (cp. abhisitta); ii.87 read abhisekɔ -- anabhisitto; J ii.104, 352; DhA i.350; PvA 74. Cp. ābhisekika.
Abhisecana
Abhisecana (nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Th 2, 239 & 245 (udaka˚). -- (b) consecration J ii.353.
Abhiseceti
Abhiseceti [caus. of abhisiñcati] to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated J v.26. (imper. abhisecayassu).
Abhisevanā
Abhisevanā (f.) [abhi + sevana fr. sev] pursuit, indulgence in ( -- ˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚).
Abhissara
Abhissara (adj.) [abhi + issara] only neg. an˚ in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro "without a Lord or protector" M ii.68 (v.l. ˚abhisaro); Ps i.126 (v.l. id.).
Abhihaŋsati
Abhihaŋsati [abhi + haŋsati fr. hṛṣ] 1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy S iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuŋ); A v.350 (id.). <-> 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy S v.74 (rūpaŋ manāpaŋ); A iv.419 sq. (T. reads ˚hiŋsamāna jhānaŋ v.l. ˚hisamāna).
Abhihaṭa
Abhihaṭa [pp. of abhiharati] brought, offered, presented, fetched D i.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraŋ gahetvā āhaṭaŋ bhikkhaŋ Pug A 231); DhA ii.79.
Abhihaṭṭhuŋ
Abhihaṭṭhuŋ [ger. of abhiharati]. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuŋ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. i.224; A v.350, 352; S iv.190, v.53, 300. See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440.
Abhihata
Abhihata [pp. of abhihanati] hit, struck PvA 55.
Abhihanati
Abhihanati (& ˚hanti) [abhi + han] 1. to strike, hit PvA 258. -- 2. to overpower, kill, destroy J v.174 (inf. ˚hantu for T. hantuŋ). -- pp. abhihata (q. v.).
Abhiharati
Abhiharati [abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati] -- 1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch D iii.170; J i.54, 157; iii.537; iv.421; DA i.272. -- 2. to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚] A i.198. -- Pass. abhihariyati VvA 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata VvA 172). -- pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.). -- Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought, to gain, to acquire D ii.188 = 192 = 195 Th 1, 637; J iv.421 (abhihārayaŋ with gloss abhibhārayiŋ). -- 2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Sn 414 (Paṇḍavaŋ ˚hāresi = āruhi Sn A 383), 708 (vanantaŋ abhihāraye = vanaŋ gaccheyya SnA 495); Th 2, 146 (aor. ˚hārayiŋ; uyyānaŋ = upanesi ThA 138). -- 3. to put on (mail), only in fut. abhihessati J iv.92 (kavacaŋ; C. expls. wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati). -- 4. At J vi.27 kiŋ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaŋ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati.
Abhihāra
Abhihāra [fr. abhiharati] bringing, offering, gift S i.82; Sn 710; J i.81 (āsanâ).
Abhihiŋsati
Abhihiŋsati spurious reading at A iv.419 for ˚haŋsati (q.v.).
Abhihiŋsanā
Abhihiŋsanā (& ˚ŋ) [for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaŋ] neighing Vv 6410 = VvA 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaŋsanā.
Abhihīta
Abhihīta S i.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻ So enchanted was I by the Buddha's rune ʼ. The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet.
Abhihesana
Abhihesana see abhihiŋsanā.
Abhihessati
Abhihessati see abhihāreti 3 & 4.
Abhīta
Abhīta (adj.) [a + bhīta] fearless J vi.193. See also abhida 1.
Abhīruka
Abhīruka (adj.) [a + bhīru + ka] fearless DA i.250.
Abhumma
Abhumma (adj.) [a + bhumma] groundless, unfounded, un- substantial, J v.178; vi.495.
Abhūta
Abhūta (adj.) [a + bhūta] not real, false, not true, usually as nt. ˚ŋ falsehood, lie, deceit Sn 387; It 37; instr. abhūtena falsely D i.161. -- vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Sn 661 = Dh 306 = It 42; expld. as "ariyɔ ûpavāda -- vasena alika -- vādin" SnA 478; as "tucchena paraŋ abhācikkhanto" DhA iii.477.
Abhejja
Abhejja (adj.) [grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya] not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Sn 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi); J i.263 (varasūra . . .) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character =
-- 73 --
abhijja -- hadaya); Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug A 212); Miln 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra).
Amacca [Vedic amātya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc. -- gen. of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaŋ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m -- ama), meaning "(those) of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellow -- worker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom -- friend It 73; J vi. 512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚ -- paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mittɔ âmaccā, friends & colleagues D iii.189 -- 90; S 190 = A ii.67; PvA 29; or with ñātī (ñāti -- sālohitā intimate friends & near -- relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126; Sn p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā A i.222; PvA 28; amaccā ñāti -- sanghā ca A i.152. <-> 2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J i.262; PvA 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba -- kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D i.136 (= piya -- sahāyaka DA i.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as "sesā āṇatti -- karā"); Vin i.348; D iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A i.142 (catunnaŋ mahārājānaŋ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106 -- 120.
Amajja
Amajja [etym.?] a bud J v.416 (= makula C.).
Amajjapāyaka
Amajjapāyaka [a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J ii.192.
Amata
Amata1 (nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a) -- m(b)rot -- o & a)mbrosi/a = Lat. im -- mort -- a(lis] 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛta -- varṣa "rain of Ambrosia" Jtm 221). -- 2. A general conception of a state of durability & non -- change, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re -- death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn 225) "na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati", or at DhA i.228 "ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati". -- Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ amatassa dvārā); Vin i.39; D ii.39, 217, 241; S i.32 (= rāgadosamoha -- khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta "sprinkled with A."); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti); A i.45 sq.; iii.451; iv.455; v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā); J i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā -- nibbāna); Sn 204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th 1, 310 (= agada antidote); It 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra); Dh 114, 374 (= amata -- mahā -- nibbāna DhA iv.110); Miln 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataŋ & nibbānaŋ amataŋ), 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhammɔ âmataŋ); DA i.217 (˚nibbāna); DhA i.87 (˚ŋ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; v.31; Sdhp 1, 209, 530, 571. -- ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S v. 41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A iii.79, 304; iv.46 sq., 317, 387; v.105 sq.; Sn 635; Th 1, 179, 748; Dh 411 (= amataŋ nibbānaŋ ogahetvā DhA iv.186); Vv 5020. -- osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln 247. -- gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S i.123; iv.370; v.8; A iii.329; Th 2, 222. -- dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th 1, 336. -- dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi). -- dvāra the door to Nibbāna M i.353; S i. 137 = Vin i.5; S ii.43, 45, 58, 80; A v.346. -- dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A iii.356. -- patta having attained to Ambrosia A iv.455. -- pada the region or place of Ambrosia S i.212 ("Bourne Ambrosial" trsln. p. 274); ii.280; Dh 21 (= amatassa adhigama -- vupāyo vuttaŋ hoti DhA i.228). -- phala ambrosial fruit S i.173 = Sn 80. -- magga the path to Ambrosia DhA i.94.
Amata
Amata2 (adj.) [see amata1] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn 452 = S i.189 (amatā vācā = amata -- sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: "ambrosial"), 960 (gacchato amataŋ disaŋ = nibbānaŋ, taŋ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It 46 = 62 (amataŋ dhātuŋ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu).
Amatabbāka
Amatabbāka (?) at VvA 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) "a precious stone of dark blue colour".
Amattaññu
Amattaññu (adj.) [a + matta + ˚ñu = Sk. amātrajña] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate, immoderate It 23 (bhojanamhi); Dh 7 (id.); Pug 21.
Amattaññutā
Amattaññutā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D iii.213; It 23 (bhojane); Pug 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane); DhsA 402.
Amatteyyatā
Amatteyyatā (f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one's mother D iii.70, 71.
Amanussa
Amanussa [a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; D i. 116; S i.91, J i.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted); PvA 216. -- Cp. amānusa.
Amanussika
Amanussika (adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202, 203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon).
Amama
Amama (adj.) [a + mama, gen. of ahaŋ, pron. 1st person, lit. "not (saying: this is) of me"] not egotistical, unselfish Sn 220 (+ subbata), 777; J iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 (= mamāyana -- taṇhā -- rahita C.); Pv iv.134 (= mamaŋkāravirahita PvA 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn 469 = 494; Ud 32; J iv.303; vi.259.
Amara
Amara (adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th 1, 276; Sn 249 (= amara -- bhāva -- patthanatāya pavatta -- kāya -- kilesa SnA 291); J v.80 (= amaraṇa -- sabhāva), 218; Dāvs v.62.
Amaratta
Amaratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J v.223 (= devatta C.).
Amarā
Amarā (?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expres- sion amarā -- vikkhepika eel -- wobbler, one who practices eel -- wriggling, fr. ˚vikkhepa "oscillation like the a. fish". In English idiom "a man who sits on the fence" D i.24; M i.521; Ps i.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DA i.115 is "amarā nāma maccha -- jāti, sā ummujjana -- nimmujjan -- ādi vasena . . gahetuŋ na sakkoti" etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern's expln. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up.
Amala
Amala (adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J v.4; Sdhp 246, 591, 596.
Amassuka
Amassuka (adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J ii.185.
Amājāta
Amājāta (adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. "at home", Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as "āma ahaŋ vo dāsī ti"!). See also āmāya.
Amātika
Amātika (adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J v.251.
Amānusa
Amānusa (adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non -- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non -- human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as n.); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas). -- f. ˚ī Dh 373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love).
Amāmaka
Amāmaka (adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] "not of me" i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA i.66.
Amāya
Amāya (adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn 941 (see Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next.
-- 74 --
Amāyāvin
Amāyāvin (adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D iii.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA i.69 (asaṭhena a.).
Amitābha
Amitābha (adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255.
Amitta
Amitta [Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D iii.185; It 83; Sn 561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); Dh 66, 207; J vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies).
Amilātatā
Amilātatā (f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J v.156.
Amu˚
Amu˚ base of demonstr. pron. "that", see asu.
Amucchita
Amucchita (adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D iii.46; M i.369; S ii.194. See ajjhopanna.
Amutta
Amutta (adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It 93 (mārabandhanā).
Amutra
Amutra (adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D i.4, 14, 184; It 99.
Amūḷhavinaya
Amūḷha -- vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity" (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27); iv.207, 351; M ii.248.
Amoha
Amoha (adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D iii.214; Pug 25. <-> The form amogha occurs at J vi.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of ratyā nights).
Amba
Amba [Derivation unknown. Not found in pre -- Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non -- Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D i.46, 53, 235; J ii.105, 160; Vv 7910; Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187. -- aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA iii.207, 208. -- ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795; VvA 305. -- kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika VvA 147). -- pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J ii.104, 394; DhA iii.207. -- panta a border of mango trees VvA 198. -- pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA iii.207. -- piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes J iii.53; DhA iii.207. -- pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin ii.109. -- potaka a mango sprout DhA iii.206 sq. -- phala a m. fruit PvA 273, 274. -- rukkha a m. tree DhA iii.207; VvA 198. -- vana a m. grove or wood D ii.126; J i.139; VvA 305. -- siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797.
Ambaka
Ambaka1 (adj.) [= ambakā?] "womanish" (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā A iii.349 (v. l. amma˚) = v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning). -- maddarī see next.
Ambaka
Ambaka2 [demin. of amba] a little mango, only in ˚mad- darī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A i.188.
Ambakā
Ambakā (f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232 = D ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā).
Ambara
Ambara1 (nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs i.38; iv.51; v.32. -- Note. At J v.390 we have to read muraja -- ālambara, and not mura -- jāla -- ambara.
Ambara
Ambara2 (m. -- nt.) [etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta -- kambala. -- The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak -- ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta -- kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya VvA 236).
Ambala
Ambala at J ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka -- āsana -- sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?.
Ambāṭaka
Ambāṭaka the hog -- plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana); DA i.271 (˚rukkha).
Ambila
Ambila (adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. -- J i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚); DA i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel); DhA ii.85 (ati -- ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta).
Ambu
Ambu (nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain -- cloud & Gr. a)fro/s scum: see P. abbha] water J v.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaŋ); Dāvs ii.16. -- Cp. ambha. -- cārin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 (= maccha Nd2 91). -- sevāla a water -- plant Th 1, 113.
Ambuja
Ambuja (m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water -- born", i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S i.52. -- 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 (= paduma Nd1 202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360.
Ambuda
Ambuda [ambu + da fr. dā] "water -- giver", a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270, 275.
Ambha & Ambho
Ambha & Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs iv.54.
Ambhaka
Ambhaka see ambaka.
Ambho
Ambho (indecl.) [fr. haŋ + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapanɔ âdhivacana); J ii.3; PvA 62. -- 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D i.194; It 114; J i.174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln 48.
Amma
Amma (indecl.) [voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D i.93; J ii.133; iv.1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA ii.87; PvA 73, 74. <-> (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J i.292; PvA 63; DhA ii.44; to a girl PvA 6; to a daughter DhA ii.48; iii.172. -- Cp. ambakā.
Ammaṇa
Ammaṇa (nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sans- kritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev. p. 72] 1. a trough J v.297; vi.381 (bhatt˚). <-> 2. a certain measure of capacity J i.62; ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). <-> As ˚ka at J ii.117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA i.84.
Ammā
Ammā (f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mma/s mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy", nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amāre to love] mother J iii.392 (gen. ammāya). -- Voc. amma (see sep.).
Amha & Amhan
Amha & Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama2] a stone Sn 443 (instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena). -- maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 (= pāsāṇa˚ DhA iii.151).
Amha, Amhi
Amha, Amhi see atthi.
Amhā
Amhā (f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A i.229. The C. says nothing.
Amhākaŋ, Amhe
Amhākaŋ, Amhe see ahaŋ.
Amho = ambho
Amho = ambho J i.174 (v. l.).
Aya
Aya1 see ayo.
-- 75 --
Aya
Aya2 (fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya -- potthaka receipt book J i.2. -- 2. inlet (for water, aya -- mukha) D i.74; A ii. 166, iv.287.
Ayaŋ
Ayaŋ (pron.) [Sk. ayaŋ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i)n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. "this, he"; f. ayaŋ; nt. idaŋ & imaŋ "this, it" etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚ (ayaŋ in nom. m. & f.) & im˚ (id˚ in nom. nt.). I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaŋ Sn 235; J i.168, 279; f. ayaŋ [Sk. iyaŋ] Kh vii.12; J ii.128, 133; nt. idaŋ Sn 224; J iii.53; & imaŋ Miln 46. acc. m. imaŋ J ii.160; f. imaŋ [Sk. īmāŋ] Sn 545, 1002; J i.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J i.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh vii.12 (dat.); J ii.158; f. imissā J i.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J i.290; DhA iii.172. instr. m. nt. iminā J i.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn 137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J i.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Sn 185; Dh 220; & imasmā (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmiŋ Kh iii.; J ii. 159 & asmiŋ Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imissā PvA 79 (or imissaŋ?) & imāyaŋ (no ref.). -- B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J i.221; Pv i.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 897 & imāyo Sn 1122; nt. imāni [= Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J i.266; ii.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 429; J ii.160. gen. imesaŋ J ii.160 & esaŋ [Sk. eṣāŋ] M ii.86, & esānaŋ M ii.154; iii.259; f. also āsaŋ J i.302 (= etāsaŋ C.) & imāsaŋ. instr. m. nt imehi J vi.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J i.307. II. Meanings (1) ayaŋ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsld. by "before our eyes", "the present", "this here", "just this" (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiŋ kāye "in this our visible body" Kh iii.; yathɔ âyaŋ padīpo "like this lamp here" Sn 235; ayaŋ dakkhiṇā dinnā "the gift which is just given before our eyes" Kh vii.12; ime pādā imaŋ sīsaŋ ayaŋ kāyo Pv i.83; asmiŋ loke paramhi ca "in this world & the other" Sn 634, asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ kathaŋ pecca na socati Sn 185; cp. also Dh 220, 410; J i.168; iii.53. -- (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaŋ kiñci vittaŋ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaŋ "whatever . . . that" Sn 224; ime divase these days (just gone) J ii.416; cp. also Vin i.84; Sn 429; J ii.128, 160. -- (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā "these are the two extremes, viz." Vin i.10; ayaŋ eva ariyo maggo "this then is the way" ibid.; cp. J i.280. <-> (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsld. by "like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon", e. g. imassa vānarindassa "of that fellow, the monkey" J i.279; cp. J i. 222, 307; ii 160 (imesaŋ sattānaŋ "creatures like us"). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca "this and this", "so and so" J ii.3; idañ cɔ idañ ca "such & such a thing" J ii.5. -- (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yâyaŋ taṇhā Vin i.10; yo ca ayaŋ . . . yo ca ayaŋ "I mean this . . . and I mean" ibid.; ye kecɔ ime Sn 381; yadidaŋ "i. e." Miln 25; yatha -- y -- idaŋ "in order that" (w. pot.) Sn 1092. See also seyyathīdaŋ. -- (6) The gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsavaɔ ssa na vijjanti "his are no intoxications" Sn 1100; sīlaŋ assā bhindāpessāmi "I shall cause her character to be defamed" J i.290; assa bhariyā "his wife" J ii.158 etc. freq.
Ayana
Ayana (nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. -- (b) going to, goal S v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA i.313; Dāvs iv.40. <-> See also eka˚.
Ayasa
Ayasa (nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln 139, 272; Dāvs i.8.
Ayira
Ayira (& Ayyira) (n. -- adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J v.257; Vv 396. -- f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J ii.349 (v. l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady J v.138 (= ayye C.).
Ayiraka
Ayiraka = ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D iii.190 (v. l. BB yy); J ii.313.
Ayo & Aya
Ayo & Aya (nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes -- , cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār (= E. ore).] iron. The nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A iii.16 = S v.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dh 240 (= ayato DhA iii.344); Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). -- Iron is the material used kat)e)coxh/n in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.). -- In compn. both ayo˚ & aya˚ occur as bases. I. ayo˚: -- kapāla an iron pot A iv.70 (v. l. ˚guhala); Nd2 304 iii. d 2 (of Niraya). -- kūṭa an iron hammer PvA 284. -- khīla an iron stake S v.444; M iii.183 = Nd2 304 iii. c; SnA 479. -- guḷa an iron ball S v.283; Dh 308; It 43 = 90; Th 2, 489; DA i.84. -- ghana an iron club Ud 93; VvA 20. -- ghara an iron house J iv.492. -- paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA 52. -- pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd2 304 iii. d 1. -- maya made of iron Sn 669 (kūṭa); J iv.492 (nāvā); Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of N.); PvA 43, 52. -- muggara an iron club PvA 55. -- sanku an iron spike S iv.168; Sn 667. II. aya˚: -- kapāla = ayo˚ DhA i.148 (v. l. ayo˚). -kāra a worker in iron Miln 331. -- kūṭa = ayo˚ J i.108; DhA ii.69 (v. l.). -- nangala an iron plough DhA i.223; iii.67. -- paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) J v.359. -- paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA i.148. -- sanghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA iv.104. -- sūla an iron stake Sn 667; DhA i.148.
Ayojjha
Ayojjha (adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or sub- dued M ii.24.
Ayya
Ayya (n. -- adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master J iii.167 = PvA 65; DhA i.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaŋ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95. -- (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191; DhA ii.94 sq. -- The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. "Sie" and E. address "Esq.") like E. Sir, milord or simply "you" with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya J i.221, 279, 308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several J ii.128, 415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin ii.215; J iii.126, 127. -- f. ayyā lady, mistress M ii.96 (= mother of a prince); DhA i.398; voc. ayye my lady J v.138. -- putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J iii.167; (b) lord, master, "governor" J i.62 (by a servant); DA i.257 (= sāmi, opp. dāsi -- putta); PvA 145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA ii.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq.) J vi.146.
Ayyaka
Ayyaka [demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu ii.426; iii.264) J iii.155; iv.146; vi.196; Pv i.84; Miln 284. ayyaka -- payyakā grandfather & great grandfather,
-- 76 --
forefathers, ancestors J i.2; PvA 107 (= pitāmahā). -- f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169; S i.97; J ii.349 (here used for "lady", as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th 2, 159; Vism 379.
Ara
Ara [Vedic ara fr. ṛ, ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr. a(/rma chariot, also P. aṇṇava] the spoke of a wheel D ii.17 (sahassɔ âra adj. with thousand spokes), cp. Miln 285; J iv.209; vi.261; Miln 238; DhA ii.142; VvA 106 (in allegorical etym. of arahant = saŋsāra -- cakkassa arānaŋ hatattā "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration") = PvA 7 (has saŋsāra -- vaṭṭassa); VvA 277.
Arakkhiya
Arakkhiya (adj.) [a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati] not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) J ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.). -- (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā).
Arakkheyya
Arakkheyya (adj.) [in form = arakkhiya] only in nt. "that which does not need to be guarded against", what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of A iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni). -- 3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at D iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers).
Araghaṭṭa
Araghaṭṭa [Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.] a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for T. arahatta -- ghaṭi -- yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112. -- The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ "a well -- wheel".
Araja
Araja (adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S iv.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagata -- raja VvA 236).
Arañña
Arañña (nt.) [Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā, at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from]. forest D i.71; M i.16; iii.104; S i.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mahā); A i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv 567; Ps i.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word. Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83) says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin iii.51; DA i.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J i.149, 215; ii.138; v.70]. -- āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; S ii.269; J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 54, 78, 141. -- kuṭikā a hut in the forest, a forest lodge S i.61; iii.116; iv.116, 380; DhA iv.31 (as v. l.; T. has ˚kuṭi). -- gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M i.323; A iii.353; v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. -- ṭhāna a place in the forest J i.253. -- vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J i.90. -- vihāra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A iii.343 sq.
Araññaka
Araññaka (& Āraññāka) (adj.) [arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) M i.214 (ā˚), 469; iii.89; S ii.187, 202 (v. l. ā˚), 208 sq.; 281; A iii.343, 391; iv.291, 344, 435; v.10. See also āraññaka.
Araññakatta
Araññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. araññaka] the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's practice, seclusion S ii.202, 208 sq. See also āraññakatta.
Araṇa
Araṇa1 (adj. -- n.) [Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ṛ, which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning "removed from, remote, far". See also arañña]. (adj.) living in solitude, far from the madding crowd M iii.237 (˚vibhanga -- sutta); S i.44, 45; J i.340 (tittha˚?).
Araṇa
Araṇa2 (nt.) [a + raṇa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraṇa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa). See saraṇa2. -- vihārin (or araṇā -- vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i. e. adv. far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2. As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i. e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syn. of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at PvA 230 expls. it as "mettā -- vihārin", & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e. g. Divy 401; Av. Ś ii.131 (q. v. for further ref. under note 3); M Vastu i.165; ii.292. Cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person A i.24; Th 2, 358, 360; Pv iv.133 (= PvA 230); ThA 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336.
Araṇi & ˚ī
Araṇi & ˚ī (f.) [Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr. ṛ] wood for kind- ling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53; ˚sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; J i. 212 (ī); v.46 (ī); DhA ii.246; ˚mathana rubbing of firewood J vi.209. -- Note. The reading at PvA 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa -- vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi).
Arati
Arati (f.) [a + rati] dislike, discontent, aversion Sn 270, 436, 642, 938; Dh 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaŋ DhA iv.225); Th 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi ThA 239); Sdhp 476.
Aravinda
Aravinda [ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.] a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62.
Araha
Araha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arha of arh] 1. worthy of, de- serving, entitled to, worth Dh 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚); VvA 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment). Freq. in cpd. mahâraha [Sk. mahârgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear J i.50, 58; iii.83, etc. (see mahant). -- 2. fit for, apt for, suitable PvA 26 (paribhoga˚ fit for eating).
Arahati
Arahati [Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati] to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Sn 431, 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituŋ); J i.262; Dh 9, 10, 230; Pv iii.66. -- ppr. arahant (q. v.). Cp. also adj. araha.
Arahatta
Arahatta1 (nt.) [abstr. formation fr. arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant iv.2] the state or condition of an Arahant, i. e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S iv.151) final & absolute emancipation, Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy ThA 64 (Selā); PvA 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but A iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp. D ii.93 = S v.360, and the references in Dial. iii.5 n4). <-> Arahattaŋ is defined at S iv.252 as rāga -- kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant ii.). Vin ii.254; D iii.10, 11, 255; A iii.34, 421, 430; v.209; Pug 73; Nett 15, 82; DA i.180, 188, 191; DhA ii 95; iv.193; PvA 14. -- Phrases: arahattaŋ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74; D i.229; arahattaŋ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) J ii.229 ThA 64; DhA ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); PvA 53, 54, 61, 233 & freq. elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna D iii.255; A i.120; iv.292 sq., 372 sq. -- gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship DhA i.8. -- patta (& patti) one who has attained Ar. S i.196; v.273; A ii.157; iii.376; iv.235. -- phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39, 41, 293; iii.93; D iii.227, 277; S iii.168; v.44; A i.23, 45; iii.272; iv.276; Dhs 1017; Vbh 326. -- magga the Path of Ar. S i.78; A iii.391; DA i.224. -- vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19.
Arahatta
Arahatta2 in ˚ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa.
-- 77 --
Arahant
Arahant (adj. -- n.) [Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy]. Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻ His Worship ʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. iii.3 -- 6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t. for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna). I. Cases nom. sg. arahaŋ Vin i.9; D i.49; M i.245, 280; S i.169; see also formula C. under ii., & arahā Vin i.8, 25, 26; ii.110, 161; D iii.255; It 95; Kh iv.; gen. arahato S iv.175; Sn 590; instr. arahatā S iii.168; DA i.43; acc. arahantaŋ D iii.10; Dh 420; Sn 644; Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212. -- nom. pl. arahanto Vin i.19; iv.112; S i.78, 235; ii.220; iv.123; gen. arahataŋ Vin iii.1; S i.214; Sn 186; It 112; Pv i.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence. II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq. occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya "destroyed is (re -- ) birth, lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin i.14, 35, 183; D i.84, 177, 203; M i.139; ii.39; S i. 140; ii.51, 82, 95, 120, 245; iii.21, 45, 55, 68, 71, 90, 94, 195, 223; iv.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; v.72, 90, 144, 222; A i.165; ii.211; iii.93; iv.88, 179, 302; v.155, 162; Sn p. 16; Pug 61, etc. -- B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻ alone, secluded, earnest, zealous, master of himself ʼ D i.177; ii.153 & continued with A: S i.140, 161; ii.21; iii.36, 74; iv.64; v.144, 166; A i.282; ii.249; iii.70, 217, 301, 376; iv. 235. -- C. arahaŋ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta -- sadattho parikkhīṇa -- bhava -- saññojano sammad -- aññā vimutto: D iii.83, 97; M i.4, 235; S i.71; iii.161, 193; iv.125; v.145, 205, 273, 302; A i.144; iii.359, 376; iv.362, 369, 371 sq., It 38. <-> D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaŋ udapādi akuppā me ceto -- vimutti ayaŋ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo "there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: S ii.171; iii.28; iv.8; v.204; A i.259; iv.56, 305, 448. III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaŋ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; ii. 110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); D i.49 (Bhagavā arahaŋ), 144; iii.10, 255: M i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaŋ karoti: arahaŋ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; S i.9, 26, 50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; A i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109, 266; iī.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120; Sn 186, 590, 644, 1003; It 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see KhA 88); Vv 212; i.217; Dh 164, 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps ii.3, 19, 194, 203 sq.; Pug 37, 73; Vbh 324, 336, 422; Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132. IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89, 136, 168, 320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: D ii 144. -- (2) arahat˚ in (arahad -- )dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: J i.65. V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin, khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. ii.1 -- 3; iii.6. For riddles or word -- play on the form arahant see M i.280; A iv.145; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 6 = PvA 7; DhA iv.228; DhsA 349.
Arāti
Arāti [a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti] an enemy Dāvs iv.1.
Ari
Ari [Ved. ari; fr. ṛ] an enemy. -- The word is used in exegesis & word expln, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Ps ii.197. -- Otherwise in late language only, e. g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti.
Ariñcamāna
Ariñcamāna [ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati] not leaving behind, not giving up, i. e. pursuing earnestly Sn 69 (jhānaŋ = ajȧhamana SnA 123, cp. Nd2 94).
Ariṭṭha
Ariṭṭha1 (adj.) [a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt] unhurt Sdhp 279.
Ariṭṭha
Ariṭṭha2 [Sk. ariṣṭa, N. of a tree] a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110.
Ariṭṭhaka
Ariṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. ariṭṭha] (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (˚ŋ ñāṇaŋ). -- (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of "soap -- berry plant"?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi S i.104 "a great mass of soap stone" (cp. Rh. D. in J. R. A. S. 1895, 893 sq.), "a shaped block of steatite" (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130).
Aritta
Aritta (nt.) [Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ to move); cf. Gr. e)re/ssw to row, e)retmo/s rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg. ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row] a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaŋ (phiy˚) oar & rudder, thus at S i.103 (T. piya˚, v. l. phiya˚); A ii.201 (piya˚); J iv.164 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚); Sn 321 (piya +; SnA 330 phiya = dabbi -- padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). DhsA 149.
Arindama
Arindama [Sk. arindama, ariŋ + dama of dam] a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 (= arīnaŋ damanasīla PvA 251); Sdhp 276.
Aribhāseti
Aribhāseti [= ariŋ bhāseti] to denounce, lit. to call an enemy J iv.285. Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corr.)
Ariya
Ariya (adj. -- n.) [Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya] 1. (racial) Aryan D ii.87. <-> 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth. -- 3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved. Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian. Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each]. -- (adj.): D i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti -- vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); M i.139 (pannaddhaja); ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage); S ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma); v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā -- cakkhu); A i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa); iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha); It 35 (paññā), 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Sn 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo SnA 216); Dh 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps ii.212 (iddhi). -- alamariya fully or thoroughly good D i.163 = iii.82 = A iv.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid. -- (m.) Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe); D i.37 = (yaŋ taŋ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna), 245; iii.111 (˚ānaŋ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); M i.17, 280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaŋ); S i.225 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); ii.123 (id.); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (id.); A i.256 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (id.); iv.145 (dele! see arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; It 21, 108; Dh 22, 164, 207; J iii.354 = Miln 230; M i.7, i35 (ariyānaŋ adassāvin: "not recognising the Noble Ones") PvA 26, 146; DhA ii.99; Sdhp 444 (˚ānaŋ vaŋsa). <-> anariya (adj. & n.) not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low, common, uncultured A i.81; Sn 664 (= asappurisa SnA 479; DhsA 353); J ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.); v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87; DhA iv.3. -- See also ñāṇa, magga, sacca, sāvaka. -- âvakāsa appearing noble J v.87. -- uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) A i.205 sq., 212. -- kanta loved by the Best D iii.227. -- gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies
-- 78 --
J vi.50 (= brāhmaṇa -- gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuŋ, tena te evam āha C.). -- garahin casting blame on the righteous Sn 660. -- citta a noble heart. -- traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs v.92. -- dasa having the ideal (or best) belief It 93 = 94. -- dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚, sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ "faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self -- denial, wisdom" ThA 240; VvA 113; DA ii.34. -- dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaŋ eso dhammo Nd1 71, 72) M i.1, 7, 135; A ii.69; v.145 sq., 241, 274; Sn 783; Dhs 1003. -- puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps i.167; Vin v.117; ThA 206. -- magga the Aryan Path. -- vaŋsa the (fourfold) noble family, i. e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites D iii.224 = A ii.27 = Ps i.84 = Nd2 141; cp. A iii.146. -- vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct J iii.443. -- vatā at Th 1, 334 should be read ˚vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac) "speaking noble words": -- vāsa the most excellent state of mind, habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at D iii.269, 291 = A v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict). -- vihāra the best practice S v.326. -- vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī -- kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4 -- 7. See D iii.232; A ii.246; Vin v.125. -- sangha the communion of the Nobles ones PvA 1. -- sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, D i.189, ii.90, 304 sq.; iii 277; M i.62, 184; iii.248; S v.415 sq. = Vin i.10, 230. It 17; Sn 229, 230, 267; Dh 190; DhA iii.246; KhA 81, 151, 185, 187; ThA 178, 282, 291; VvA 73. -- sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaŋ santike sutattā a. SnA 166). M i.8, 46, 91, 181, 323; ii.262; iii.134, 228, 272; It 75; Sn 90; Miln 339; DhA i.5, (opp. putthujjana). -- sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue D i.115 (= sīlaŋ ariyaŋ uttamaŋ parisuddhaŋ DA i.286); M ii.167. When the commentators, many centuries afterwards, began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -- Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA i.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at J v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya -- rūpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non -- Aryan. (cp ʻ frank ʼ in English).
Arīhatatta
Arīhatatta in phrase "arīhatta ariyo hoti" at A iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaŋ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence "ārakattā kilesānaŋ arīnaŋ hatattā . . . arahā hoti", and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS).
Aru
Aru (nt.) [Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores M ii.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (= navannaŋ vaṇamukhānaŋ vasena arubhūta kāya DhA iii.109 = VvA 77); ˚gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M i.506 (+ pakka -- gatta); Miln 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores S iv.198 (˚āni gattāni); ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds VvA 77 = DhA iii.109.
Aruka
Aruka = aru; only in cpd. ˚ûpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) A i.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A 212 as purāṇa -- vaṇa -- sadisa -- citto "an old wound" i. e. continually breaking open).
Aruṇa
Aruṇa [Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av. auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr. e)rudro/s, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin ii.68; iv.245; J ii.154; v.403; vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DA i.30. <-> a. uggacchati the sun rises J i.108; VvA 75, & see cpds. -- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; S v.29, 78, 101, 442 (at all Saŋyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49. -- uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, 204, 264; iv.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA i.165; ii.6; PvA 109. -- utu the occasion of the sun ( -- rise) DhA i.165. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA i 1.3 = PvA 216. -- sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) PvA 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa).
Arubheda
Arubheda the Rigveda ThA 206.
Arūpa
Arūpa (adj.) [a + rūpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D i.195 sq.; iii.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rūpa. -- âvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281 -- 1285; Ps i.83 sq., 101. -- kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Miln 317 (devā). -- ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless It 62. -- taṇhā "thirst" for the Formless D iii.216. -- dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚, nirodha˚; see dhātu) D iii.215, 275; It 45. -- bhava formless existence D iii.216. -- loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. -- saññin not having the idea of form D ii.110; iii.260; Exp. i.252.
Arūpin
Arūpin (adj.) [a + rūpin] = arūpa; D i.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA i.119), 195; iii.111, 139; It 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā).
Are
Are (indecl.) [onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. lale/w, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā, Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā] exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo! I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) J i.225 (dāsiputta -- ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha -- caṇḍāla); DA i.265 (= re); VvA 68 (dubbinī), 217 ("how in the world").
Ala
Ala1 freq. spelling for aḷa.
Ala
Ala2 (adj.) [alaŋ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M i.455; J ii.326 = iv.471.
Alaŋ
Alaŋ (indecl.) [Vedic araŋ. In meaning 1. alaŋ is the ex- panded continuation of Vedic araŋ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaŋ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaŋ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as "fit for, proper" (= yuttaŋ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaŋ, e.g. alam eva kātuŋ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat.) it may also be compd. with Vedic araŋ c. dat. -- (a) (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). -- (b.) (˚ -- ) see cpds. -- (c.) with dat. or infin.: alaŋ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M i.130 (opp. nâlaŋ not at all); alaŋ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250; alaŋ vacanāya one says rightly S ii.18; alaŋ hitāya untold happiness DhA ii.41. -- ito ce pi so bhavaŋ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . . . upasankamituŋ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D i.117 (expld. at DA i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuŋ kalyāṇaŋ indeed one
-- 79 --
must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaŋ PvA 122); alaŋ puññāni kātave "come, let us do meritorious works" Vv 4415 (= yuttaŋ VvA 191). <-> 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). -- (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaŋ thutuŋ it is not enough to praise Sn 217; te pi na honti me alaŋ they are not enough for me Pv i.63. -- (b) with voc.: alaŋ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo "look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community" Vin ii.198; alaŋ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S iii.120. -- (c) enough of (with instr.): alaŋ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA ii.34. -- attha (adj.) "quite the thing", truly good, very profitable, useful D ii.231; M ii.69 (so read for alamatta); A ii.180; Th 1, 252; J i.401 (so read for ˚atta). -- ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa -- dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya -- jñāna -- darśana Lal v.309, 509] Vin i.9; A iii.64, 430; v.88; J i.389 (cp. ariya). -- kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187. -- pateyya: see the latter. -- vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with "alaŋ" (i. e. "fie"), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh's. expln.). -- samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It 107. -- sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A iii.81. -- sāṭaka "curse -- coat", one who curses his waist -- coat (alaŋ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over -- eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at DhA iv.16 = DhsA 404.
Alakkhika
Alakkhika (& īka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate un- happy, of bad luck Vin iii.23; J iii.259.
Alakkhī
Alakkhī (f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th 1, 1123.
Alagadda
Alagadda [Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a water- snake] a kind of snake M i.133 = DA i.21; DhA iv. 132 (˚camma, so read for T. alla -- camma, vv. ll. alanda˚ & alandu˚).
Alagga
Alagga (adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA iii.298.
Alaggana
Alaggana (nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA i.180.
Alaŋkata
Alaŋkata [pp. of alankaroti] 1. "made too much", made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh 142 (= vatthâbharaṇa -- paṭimaṇḍita DhA iii.83); Pv ii.36; Vv 11; J iii.392; iv.60. -- 2. "done enough" (see alaŋ, use with instr.), only neg. analankata in meaning "insatiate" S i.15 (kāmesu).
Alaŋkaraṇa
Alaŋkaraṇa (nt.) [alaŋ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J i.60.
Alaŋkaraṇaka
Alaŋkaraṇaka (adj.) [fr. alankaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA i.410.
Alaŋkaroti
Alaŋkaroti [alaŋ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J i.60; iii.189; vi. 368. ger. ˚karitvā DhA i.410; PvA 74. -- pp. alankata. -- Caus. alankārāpeti to cause to be adorned J i.52.
Alaŋkāra
Alaŋkāra [fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] "getting up" i. e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, ornaments D iii.190; A iii.239; 263 sq.; J vi.368; PvA 23, 46, 70 ( -- ˚ adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249.
Alattaka
Alattaka [Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J iv.114 (˚pāṭala); DhA ii.174; iv.197.
Alanda & Alandu
Alanda & Alandu see alagadda.
Alamba
Alamba (adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J v.302; vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman's breasts cp. alambɔ ordhva -- stanī Suśruta i.371).
Alasa
Alasa (adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S i.44, 217; Sn 96 (= jāti -- alaso SnA 170); J iv.30; Dh 280 (= mahā -- alaso DhA iii.410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S i.44; D iii.190 (dakkha +); Vin iv.211; Nd2 141 (id.).
Alasatā
Alasatā (f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA 229.
Alassa
Alassa (nt.) at S i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya.
Alāta
Alāta (nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse, see chava); J i.68; Pug 36; DhA iii.442.
Alāpu
Alāpu (nt.) [= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216] a gourd, pumpkin Dh 149 (= DhA iii.112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu).
Alābu
Alābu [Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lage- naris M i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.); DhsA 405. -- See also alāpu.
Alābhaka
Alābhaka [a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77.
Alālā
Alālā (indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] "not saying lā lā" i. e. not babbling, not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 (= aneḷamūga of Sn 70).
Alika
Alika (adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S i.189; J iii.198; vi.361; Miln 26, 99. -- nt. ˚ŋ a lie, falsehood Dh 264. -- vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh 223 = VvA 69 (has alīka˚); J ii.4; SnA 478 (for abhūta -- vādin Sn 661).
Alīnatā
Alīnatā (f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J i.366.
Aluḷita
Aluḷita (adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln 383.
Aloṇika
Aloṇika (adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J iii.409; VvA 184.
Aloma
Aloma (adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J vi.457.
Alola
Alola (adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn 65 (= nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118).
Alla
Alla (adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a)/rdw moisten, a)/rda dirt] -- 1. moist, wet M iii.94 (˚mattikā -- puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). -- 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.˚âvalepana see adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A v.234 = 249; ˚gomaya fresh dung A v.234; DhA i.377; ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DA i.77; PvA 40; ˚dārūni green sticks J i.318; ˚madhu fresh honey DhA ii.197; ˚maŋsa -- sarīra a body of living flesh DhA ii.51 = iv.166; ˚rasa fresh -- tasting DhA ii.155; ˚rohita -- maccha fresh fish J iii.333. <-> 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair PvA 82 (sīsaŋ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, 91; DhA iv.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J iii.425. ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi PvA 116). [For analla -- gatta at S i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an -- allīna -- gatta. For allacamma at DhA iv.132 alagadda -- camma, with the v.l., is preferable].
Allāpa
Allāpa [Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. ˚sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J i.189; Miln 15; VvA 96; PvA 86.
-- 80 --
Allika
Allika (?) [either from alla = allikaŋ nt. in meaning defi- lement, getting soiled by ( -- ˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaŋ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma -- ) sukhɔ allikɔânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10; D iii.113, 130; S iv.330; v.421; Nett 110.
Allīna
Allīna [pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M i.80; A v.187; Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). -- (b.) soiled by ( -- ˚), dirtied A ii.201. -- anallīna "to which nothing sticks", i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S i.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya.
Allīyati
Allīyati [ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. -- (a) lit. kesā sīsaŋ allīyiŋsu the hair stuck to the head J i.64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J i.273. -- (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S iii.190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M i.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati "to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of" (c. acc.) at M i.260 & S iii.190. <-> J iv.5; v.154 (allīyituŋ, v.l. illīyituŋ); DhsA 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna -- Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu iii.144; pp. allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408; pass. allīpīyate iii.127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) J ii.325 (hatthiŋ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaŋ alliyāpetvā).
Aḷa
Aḷa [etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M i.234; S i.123; J i.223, 505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala˚); ii.342; iii.295; -- 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91.
Aḷāra
Aḷāra (adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expld. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched". ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J i.306 (= visāla -- netta C.); ˚pamha with thick eye -- lashes Vv 357 (= bahala -- saŋyata -- pakhuma C.; v.l. ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes J vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; C. expls by visāl -- akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra.
Aḷhaka
Aḷhaka in udakɔ aḷhaka VvA 155 read āḷhaka.
Ava˚
Ava˚ (prefix) I. Relation between ava & o. Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed -- that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards. Okaḍḍhati, okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati, ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples. The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash; Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2). -- A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa ( -- ˚) > okāsa (˚ -- ); avacara > ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna. -- B. 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later) is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas) are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati, okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati. -- (1) The Pāli form (o˚) shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava˚). See the foll.: avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence; avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance; avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued; avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy; avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love; avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal. (2) In certain secondary verb -- formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali. Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout. II. Ava as prefix. [P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o; Av. ava; Lat. au -- (aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.); Obg. u -- ; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under au]. -- Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp. ut˚, see e. g. uccâvaca high & low, and below iii. c), expld. as heṭṭhā (DhA iv.54 under avaŋ) or adho (ibid. 153; SnA 290). -- (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e. g. avasūra sun -- down; adv. avaŋ (q. v., opp. uddhaŋ). -- (a) lit. away from, off: ava -- kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off; ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over. -- down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down. -- (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de -- in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava -- jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati. away from, i. e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a˚ (an˚), e. g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚), ˚pakkhin, ˚patta. Affinities of ava. -- (a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚, the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga, ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati, ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati, avekkhati. -- (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana, ˚siñcati. -- (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2). Among the freq. contrast -- pairs showing the two, like E. up & down, are the foll. ukkaŋsâvakaŋsa, uggaman -- oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti -- olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituŋuggilituŋ, onaman -- unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba, olugga -- vilugga.
Avaŋ
Avaŋ (adv.) [Vedic avāk & avāŋ] the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (avaŋ sari he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp. uddhaŋ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avaŋsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaŋpāda feet up), a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S i.48; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā = adhogata -- sīsā SnA 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaŋpāda); Pv iv.146; J i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaŋ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaŋsiro); Nd1 404 (uddhaŋpāda +); DhA iv.153 (gloss adhosira). -- On avaŋ˚ cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati.
Avakaŋsa
Avakaŋsa [fr. ava -- karṣati; on ŋs: *rṣ cp. haŋsati: harṣati] dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaŋsâvak˚ lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering, rise & fall D i.54.
Avakankhati
Avakankhati ( -- ˚) [ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu -- kānkṣati] to wish for, strive after S iv.57 (n'); J iv.371 (n'); V 340 (n'), 348 (n' = na pattheti C).
-- 81 --
Avakaḍḍhati
Avakaḍḍhati [ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati] Nett 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass. avakaḍḍhati J iv.415 (hadayaŋ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati). -- pp. avakaḍḍhita.
Avakaḍḍhita
Avakaḍḍhita [pp. of avakaḍḍhati] pulled down, dragged away DhA iii.195.
Avakata
Avakata = apakata, v.l. at It 89.
Avakanta
Avakanta [for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2] cut, cut open, cut off J iv.251 (galakɔ âvakantaŋ).
Avakantati & okantati
Avakantati & okantati (okk˚) [cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve -- (ava:) J iv.155. -- pp. avakanta & avakantita.
Avakantita
Avakantita [pp. of avakantati] cut out PvA 213.
Avakappanā & okappanā
Avakappanā & okappanā (f.) [ava + kappanā] prepara- tion, fixing up, esp. harnessing J vi.408.
Avakaroti
Avakaroti [Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa˚] "to put down", to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin. <-> pp. avakata (q. v.). -- See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2.
Avakassati & okassati
Avakassati & okassati [cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove. -- A v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati).
Avakārakaŋ
Avakārakaŋ (adv.) [fr. avakāra] throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214.
Avakārin
Avakārin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. avakāra] despising, degrading, neglecting Vbh 393 sq. (an˚).
Avakāsa & okāsa
Avakāsa & okāsa [ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa] 1. "appearance": akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) D i.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan J v.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229. -- 2. "opportunity": kata˚ given leave D i.276 Sn 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Miln 383. -- anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaŋ etaŋ anavakāso Vin ii.199; A i.26; v.169; Pug 11, 12; PvA 28.
Avakirati & okirati
Avakirati & okirati [ava + kirati] 1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri PvA 86; ger. ˚kiritvā J v.144. -- 2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. ˚kari; VvA 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi). -- Pass. avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati PvA 174); grd. ˚kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp. okiṇṇa.
Avakiriya
Avakiriya [grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J v.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā).
Avakujja
Avakujja (adj.) [ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja M Vastu i.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412] face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) J i.13 = Bu ii.52; J v.295; vi.40; Pv iv.108; PvA 178. -- pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) A i.130; Pug 31 (= adhomukha -- pañña Pug A 214).
Avakkanta
Avakkanta ( -- ˚) [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, over- whelmed by (instr.) S iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚).
Avakkanti
Avakkanti (f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth S ii.66 (nāmarūpassa); iii.46 (pañcannaŋ indriyānaŋ); Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa).
Avakkama
Avakkama [fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J v.330 (gabbhassa).
Avakkamati & okkamati
Avakkamati & okkamati [ava + kamati fr. kram] to ap- proach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma J iii.480 (v.l. apa˚).
Avakkāra
Avakkāra [Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaŋ + karoti] throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash -- bin Vin i.157, 352; ii.216; M i.207; DhA i.305.
Avakkhalita
Avakkhalita [pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal] washed off, taken away from, detracted DA i.66 (v.l. apa˚).
Avakkhitta & okkhitta
Avakkhitta & okkhitta [pp. of avakkhipati] 1. [= Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected. (ava:) M i.296 (ujjhita +); DA i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa); PvA 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [= Sk. utkṣipta?] thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sedɔ âvakkhitta gained by sweat A ii.67; iii.45.
Avakkhipati & okkhipati
Avakkhipati & okkhipati [ava + khipati; cp. Sk. ava- kṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of "to keep under, to restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. ˚khipi DA i.268 (bhusaŋ, v. l. avakkhasi).
Avakkhipana
Avakkhipana (nt.) [fr. avakkhipati] throwing down, putting down J i.163.
Avagacchati
Avagacchati [ava + gacchati] to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) PvA 87.
Avagaṇḍa (kāraka)
Avagaṇḍa ( -- kāraka) (adj.) [ava + gaṇḍa˚] "making a swelling", i. e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks, full (when eating); only nt. ˚ŋ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214; iv.196.
Avagata
Avagata [pp. of avagacchati] at PvA 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is "known, understood" (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB).
Avagāhati & ogāhati
Avagāhati & ogāhati [ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiŋ); Sdhp 370, 383.
Avaguṇṭhana
Avaguṇṭhana (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. oguṇṭheti] covering Sdhp 314.
Avaggaha
Avaggaha [Sk. avagraha] hindrance, impediment, used at DA i.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā).
Avanga
Avanga see apanga.
Avaca
Avaca (adj.) [der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca > ut] low, only in combn. uccâvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38.
Avacana
Avacana (nt.) [a + vacana] "non -- word", i. e. the wrong word or expression J i.410.
Avacara
Avacara ( -- ˚) (n. -- adj.) [ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210] (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in D i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in A ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚); J i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician, see tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚); Miln 44 (id. and yoga˚). -- (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm, plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmâvacara rupâvacara arūpâvacara or the 3 realms of sense -- desires, form and non -- form: kāma˚ D i.34 (˚deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa˚ Pug 37; arūpa˚ Pug 38; Ps i.83, 84, 101; Dhs A 387; PvA 138, 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, 1278.
Avacaraka & ocaraka
Avacaraka & ocaraka (adj. -- n.) [fr. avacara] 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254. -- 2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Th 1, 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127).
-- 82 --
Avacaraṇa
Avacaraṇa (nt.) [fr. avacarati 1] being familiar with, dealing with, occupation J ii.95.
Avacuttha
Avacuttha 2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaŋ ava- cuttha do not speak thus J vi.72; DhA iv.228.
Avacchidda
Avacchidda ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + chidda] perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddâvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes J iii.491; DhA i.122. 284, 319. Cp. chidda -- vicchidda.
Avacchedaka
Avacchedaka ( -- ˚) (adj) [ava + cheda + ka] cutting off, as nt. ˚ŋ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaŋ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214; iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i. 259.
Avajaya
Avajaya [ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA ii.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya).
Avajāta
Avajāta (adj.) [ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage] low -- born, of low or base birth, fig. of low character (opp. abhijāta) Sn 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta SnA 479); It 63; Miln 359.
Avajānāti
Avajānāti [ava + jñā] 1. to deny Vin ii.85; A iii.164 = Pug 65. -- 2. (later) to despise DhA iii.16; PvA 175 (grd. ˚jānitabba) -- Of short stem -- form ñā are found the foll: grd. avaññeyya PvA 175, and with o˚: grd. oñātabba PvA 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta.
Avajīyati
Avajīyati [ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate] to be diminished, to be lost, be undone J i.313 (jitaŋ a; v.l. avajījy˚); Dh 179 (jitaŋ a = dujjitaŋ hoti DhA iii.197).
Avajja
Avajja (adj.) [Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning "not to be shunned, not forbidden". This interpretn is justified by context of Dh 318, 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava -- vadya) in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati] low, inferior, blamable, bad, deprecable Dh 318, 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless D i.70 (= anindita DA i.183); A ii.26 = It 102; Sn 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita KhA 140): Ps ii.116, 170; Pug 30, 41, 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja.
Avajjatā
Avajjatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an˚ blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349.
Avajjha
Avajjha (adj.) [grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh] not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Sn 288; J v.69; vi.132.
Avañcana
Avañcana (adj.) [a + vañcana from vañc] not (even) tot- tering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet J i.214 = Cp iii.910.
Avañña
Avañña (adj.) [to avaññā] despised, despicable Pv iii.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba PvA 175).
Avaññatti
Avaññatti (f.) [ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā] only as neg. an˚ the fact of not being despised, inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance It 72; Vbh 350, 356; ˚kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed, unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised A ii.240; iv.1 sq.
Avaññā
Avaññā (f.) [Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā] contempt, disregard, disrespect J i.257 (˚ya).
Avaññāta
Avaññāta (adj.) [pp. of avajānāti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88, 90.
Avaṭaŋsaka
Avaṭaŋsaka (= vaṭ˚) see Vin Texts ii.347.
Avaṭṭhāna
Avaṭṭhāna (nt.) [Sk. avasthāna] position, standing place J i.508; PvA 286.
Avaṭṭhita
Avaṭṭhita (ad.) [Sk. avasthita, ava + thita] "standing down" = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Th 1, 1140. Usually neg. an˚ unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dh 38 (˚citta; cp. DhA i.308 cittaŋ thāvaraŋ natthi); PvA 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever).
Avaṭṭhitatā
Avaṭṭhitatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] steadiness, only as neg. an˚ unsteadiness, fickleness ThA 259.
Avaṭṭhiti
Avaṭṭhiti (f.) [Sk. avasthiti] (firm) position, posture, stead- fastness S v.228; Dhs 11, 570.
Avaḍḍhi
Avaḍḍhi (f.) [a + vaḍḍhi] "non -- growth", decay DhA iii.335; C on A iii.76 (cp. apajaha).
Avaṇṭa
Avaṇṭa (adj.) [a + vaṇṭa] without a stalk J v.155.
Avaṇṇa
Avaṇṇa [a + vaṇṇa] blame, reproach, fault D i.1 (= dosā nindā DA i.37); It 67; Pug 48, 59.
Avaṇṇanīya
Avaṇṇanīya (adj.) [grd. of a + vaṇṇeti] indescribable J v.282.
Avataŋsa
Avataŋsa see vataŋsaka.
Avatata & otata
Avatata & otata [ava + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 ( -- ˚); VvA 276 (= chādita).
Avatiṭṭhati
Avatiṭṭhati [ava + tiṭṭhati] to abide, linger, stand still. D i.251 = S iv.322 = A v.299 (tatra˚); S i.25 (v.l. otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; J ii.62; iv.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). <-> pp. avaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa
Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati] fallen into, affected with ( -- ˚), as ava˚ rare late or poetical form of o˚, e. g. J v.98 (issâ˚). See otiṇṇa.
Avattha
Avattha1 [der. uncertain] aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A iii.171 (C. avavatthika).
Avattha
Avattha2 [Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2] thrown away J v.302 (= chaḍḍita C.).
Avattharaṇa
Avattharaṇa (nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of an army) J ii.104 (of a robber -- band), 336.
Avattharati
Avattharati [ava + tharati, stṛ] to strew, cover over or up J i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā ger.); iv.84; Dāvs i.38. -- pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy˚.
Avatthāraṇa
Avatthāraṇa (nt.) = avattharaṇa DA i.274.
Avatthu (&˚ ka)
Avatthu (&˚ ka) (adj.) [a + vatthu] groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241; J i.440 (˚kaŋ vacanaŋ). For lit meaning see vatthu.
Avadāta
Avadāta (= odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa).
Avadāna
Avadāna see apadāna.
Avadāniya
Avadāniya (adj.) [fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut] stingy, niggardly Sn 774 (= Nd1 36 which expls. as follows: avaŋ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaŋ vacanaŋ nɔâdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Sn A 516 condenses this expln. into the foll.: avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaŋ vacanaŋ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā).
Avadāpana
Avadāpana (cleansing): see vodāpana.
Avadāpeti
Avadāpeti (to deal out) only BSk pary˚ Divy 202.
Avadāyati
Avadāyati [denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2] to have pity on, to feel sorry for J iv.178 (bhūtānaŋ nâvadāyissaŋ, gloss nɔânukampiyaŋ).
Avadīyati
Avadīyati [Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī] to burst, split open J vi.183 (= bhijjati C.) see also uddīyati,
-- 83 --
Avadehaka
Avadehaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih] in the idiom udarāvadehakaŋ bhuñjati, to eat one's fill M i.102; Th 1, 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka -- bhojana, a heavy meal.
Avadhāraṇa
Avadhāraṇa (nt.) [Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ] calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C's in explanation of evaŋ at DA i.27; and of kho at PvA 11, 18.
Avadhi
Avadhi 3 sg. aor. of vadhati. -- At DhA ii.73 avadhi = odhi.
Avanata
Avanata see oṇata.
Avanati
Avanati ( -- ˚) (f.) [fr. avanamati] stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Miln 387 (unnatɔâvanati).
Avani
Avani (f.) [Vedic avani] bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5.
Avapakāsati
Avapakāsati [ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ] is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati -- Vin ii.204 (apakāsati +; v.l. avapakassati; Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems, to imply (a)vavakassati); A iii.145 sq. (avapakāsituŋ).
Avapatta
Avapatta see opatta.
Avapāyin
Avapāyin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [cp. avapivati] coming for a drink, drinking J i.163.
Avapivati
Avapivati [ava + pā, cp. apapibati] to drink from J i.163.
Avabujjhati
Avabujjhati ( -- ˚) [Cp. BSk. avabudhyate] to understand A iv.96 = It 83 (nɔavabujjhati); A iv.98 (id.) J i.378 = iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.).
Avabodha
Avabodha [ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca˚). -- Neg. an˚ not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha VvA 319).
Avabodhati
Avabodhati ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. avabodhati] to realise, perceive, pay attention to J iii.151 nâva˚).
Avabhāsa
Avabhāsa [later form of obhāsa] Only in cpd. gambhīrā- vabhāso D ii.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at A ii.105 = Pug 46 has obhāsa.
Avabhāsaka
Avabhāsaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. avabhāsa] shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14.
Avabhāsita
Avabhāsita ( -- ˚) [late form of obhāsita] shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590.
Avabhuñjati
Avabhuñjati [ava + bhuñjati] to eat, to eat up J iii.272 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ), 273.
Avabhūta
Avabhūta (adj.) [ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū] "come down", despised, low, unworthy M ii.210.
Avamangala
Avamangala (adj.) [ava + mangala, ava here in privative function] of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen J i.372, 402; ii.197; vi.10, 424; DhA iii.123; PvA 261. Cf. next.
Avamaññati
Avamaññati [Sk. avamanyate] to slight, to disregard, despise DhA i.170; PvA 37, 175; Sdhp 271. -- pp. Caus. avamānita.
Avamangalla
Avamangalla (adj.) [fr. avamangala] of bad omen, nt. any- thing importune, unlucky J i.446.
Avamāna & omāna
Avamāna & omāna [fr. ava + man, think] disregard, dis- respect, contempt J ii.386; iii.423; v.384. Cp. next.
Avamānana
Avamānana (nt.) [fr. avamāna] = avamāna J i.22.
Avamāneti
Avamāneti [Caus. of avamaññati] to despise J v.246. - pp. avamānita PvA 36.
Avaya
Avaya only in neg. anavaya.
Avayava
Avayava [Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava] limb, member, constituent, part VvA 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168, 201, 276; PvA 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at SnA 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aŋga would have been used in the older texts.
Avarajjhati
Avarajjhati ( -- ˚) [ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarād- hyate] to neglect, fail, spurn Th 1, 167; J iv.428 (v.l. ˚rujjh˚).
Avaruddha
Avaruddha [fr. avarundhati] 1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181, apparently meaning ʻ in revolt, out of hand ʼ (of slaves) -- 2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592.
Avaruddhaka
Avaruddhaka [avruddha + ka] subdued, expelled, banished J vi.575; Dpvs i.21 (Np).
Avaruddhati
Avaruddhati [Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh] to expel, remove, banish J vi.505 (= nīharati C.), 515. See also avarundhati.
Avarundhati
Avarundhati [ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (ThA 271) on oruddha] to put under restraint, to put into one's harem as subsidiary wife.
Avalambati
Avalambati [= olambati]. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35; cp. olubbha.
Avalitta
Avalitta ( -- ˚) [Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava -- limpati] besmeared; in cpd. ullittâvalitta "smeared up & down" i. e. plastered inside & outside A i.101.
Avalekhati
Avalekhati [ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati] to scrape off Vin ii.221 (v. l. apa˚).
Avalekhana
Avalekhana1 (nt.) [fr. avalekhati] (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in, writing down J iv.402, (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters).
Avalekhana
Avalekhana2 (nt.) v. l. for apalekhana.
Avalepana
Avalepana ( -- ˚) (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M i.385 (pīta˚); Sn 194 (kāyo taca -- maŋsɔ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh).
Avasa
Avasa (adj.) [a + vasa] powerless Sdhp 290.
Avasaṭa & Osaṭa
Avasaṭa & Osaṭa [Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, 217 (= titthāyatanaŋ saŋkata).
Avasarati
Avasarati [ava + sṛ] to go down, to go away (to) Sn 685 (v. l. BB. T. avaŋsari).
Avasāna
Avasāna ( -- ˚) [for osāna] (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion J i.87 (bhattakicc -- âvasāne at the end of the meal); PvA 76 (id.).
Avasāya
Avasāya [fr. avaseti] stopping, end, finish Th 2, 12 (= avasānaŋ niṭṭhānaŋ ThA 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte.
Avasiñcanaka
Avasiñcanaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. osiñcati] pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing J i.400 (an˚).
Avasiṭṭha
Avasiṭṭha (sic & not osiṭṭha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa] left, remaining, over S ii.133; J i.138; v.339; VvA 66, pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others PvA 165 (janā).
Avasiṭṭhaka
Avasiṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. avasiṭṭha] remaining, left J iii.311.
-- 84 --
Avasitta
Avasitta ( -- ˚) [pp. of osiñcati] besprinkled, anointed, con- secrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhâvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D i. 69; ii.227; iii.64; Pug 56; DA i.182 (T. muddhâvassita, v. l. ˚abhisitta); etc. -- See also abhisitta.
Avasin
Avasin (adj. -- n.) [a + vasin fr. vaś] not having control over oneself, D ii.275.
Avasissati
Avasissati [Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati] to be left over, to remain, in phrase yaŋ pamāṇa -- kataŋ kammaŋ na taŋ tatrâvasissati D i.251; A v.299 = S iv.322; J ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti S ii. 83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati.
Avasī
Avasī metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest J v.66 (mā avasī).
Avasussati
Avasussati [Sk. *ava -- suṣyati of śuṣ] to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaŋ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maŋsalohitaŋ) J i.71, 110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (M i.569). -- fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *˚śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) J vi.550 (v. l. BB ˚sussati; C. avasucchissati).
Avasūra
Avasūra [ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaŋs see ava ii] sundown, sunset, acc. ˚ŋ as adv. at or with sundown J v 56 (anāvasūraŋ metrically).
Avasesa
Avasesa1 [Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an˚ (adj.) without any remainder, i. e. fully, completely M i.220 = A v.347 (˚dohin); A i.20 sq., 88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (˚pharaṇa); PvA 71 (˚ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & sâvasesa leaving something over, having something left A i.20 sq., 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left).
Avasesa
Avasesa2 (adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (āyu avaseso); J iii.19; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā); PvA 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi -- tacamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi -- sanghātamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra). -- nt. (as pred.) ˚ŋ what is left PvA 52 (appɔ avasesaŋ); KhA 245 (nɔ atthi tesaŋ avasesaŋ).
Avasesaka
Avasesaka (adj.) [fr. avasesa2] being left, overflowing, ad- ditional, more J i.400 (an˚); Dpvs iv.45.
Avassa
Avassa (adj.) [a + vaś] against one's will, inevitable J i. 19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as nt. ˚ŋ adv. inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaŋ Divy 347; Av. Ś i.209 etc.) J iii.271; DA i.263; Sdhp 293.
Avassakaŋ
Avassakaŋ (adv.) [see avassa] inevitably Dpvs ix.13.
Avassajati & ossajati
Avassajati & ossajati [ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati. The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava): J iv.425; v.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji).
Avassana
Avassana (nt.) [a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat] not bleating J iv.251.
Avassaya
Avassaya [Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1] support, help, protection, refuge J i.211; ii. 197; iv.167; Miln 160; DhA ii.267; iv.198; PvA 5, 113.
Avassava
Avassava [ava + sava, Sk. ˚srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; M i.93; ii.246; A iii.334 sp.
Avasseti
Avasseti [ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti] to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) J ii.80 (aor. avassayiŋ = vāsaŋ kappesiŋ C.). <-> pp. avassita.
Avassāvana
Avassāvana (nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J ii.288.
Avassita
Avassita [for apassita, Sk. apaśrita] depending on, dealing with J v.375. See apassita.
Avassuta
Avassuta (adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avas- sava] 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J iv. 20. -- 2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire, lustful (opp. anavassuta, q. v.) Vin ii.236; S iv.70, 184 (an˚); A i.261, 262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Sn 63 (an˚); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs ii.5 (T. reads avassita). <-> Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak J iv.20 (nāvā = udaka -- pavesanɔ âbhāvena a. C.). -- 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (˚citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA 116 (= kilesa -- anvāssava -- virahita).
Avahaṭa
Avahaṭa [pp. of avaharati] taken away, stolen Miln 46.
Avaharaṇa
Avaharaṇa ( -- ˚) [fr. avaharati in both meanings] taking away, removal; theft PvA 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚).
Avaharati & oharati
Avaharati & oharati [ava + hṛ] to steal J i.384; PvA 47 (avahari vatthaŋ), 86 (id., = apānudi). -- pp. avahaṭa (q. v.).
Avahasati
Avahasati [ava + has] to laugh at, deride, mock J v.111 (aññamaññaŋ); PvA 178. -- aor. avahasi J iv.413.
Avahāra
Avahāra [fr. avaharati] taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚, paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚).
Avahīyati
Avahīyati [for ohīyati] to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340.
Avāgata
Avāgata [ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat -- amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J v.82. (C. explains apāgata).
Avākaroti
Avākaroti [either ava + ā + karoti or avaŋ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); v.495, 500; vi. 280. -- 2. to give back, restore J vi.577 (= deti C.).
Avākirati
Avākirati wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati (q. v.).
Avāṭuka
Avāṭuka see apāṭuka.
Avāpuraṇa
Avāpuraṇa (nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S iii.132; A iv.374.
Avāpurati
Avāpurati [same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J i.63; vi.373.
Avāvaṭa
Avāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J v.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.).
Avikampamāna
Avikampamāna (adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J iv.310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); vi.176 (= nirāsanka C.); J vi.273.
Avikampin
Avikampin (adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala VvA 215).
Avikopin
Avikopin (adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J vi.226 (acchejja +).
Avikkhepa
Avikkhepa [a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D iii.213; A i.83; Ps i.94; ii.228; Dhs 11, 15, 570.
-- 85 --
Avicāreti
Avicāreti [a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA 336.
Aviccaŋ
Aviccaŋ at J v.434 read aviviccaŋ [a + viviccaŋ] i. e. not secretly, openly.
Avijānaŋ
Avijānaŋ [a + vijānaŋ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; It 103.
Avijjā
Avijjā (f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca -- samuppāda, cp. S ii.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D iii.254, 282; S iv.205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4; D i.84; iii.216; It 49; Dhs 1100, 1109), of the oghā (D iii.230, 276; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S ii.23; A i.223; It 8; Dhs 1162, 1486), of the saŋyojanāni (D iii.254; Dhs 1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin i.1; iii.3; D iii.212, 230, 234, 274; M i.54, 67, 144; S ii.4, 26, 263; iii.47, 162; iv.256; v.52; A i.8, 285; ii.132, 158, 247; iii.84 sq., 414; iv.228; It 34 (yā kācɔ imā duggatiyo asmiŋ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā -- lobha -- sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn 199, 277, 729 (jāti -- maraṇa -- saŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāyɔeva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh 243; Nd2 99; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; DhA iii.350; iv.161 (˚paligha).
Aviññāṇaka
Aviññāṇaka (adj.) [a + viññāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA i.6 (saviññāṇaka +).
Aviññū
Aviññū (adj.) = aviddasu.
Avitakka
Avitakka (adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D iii.219, 274; Th 2, 75 ("where reasonings cease" trsl.); Dhs 161 ("free from the working of conception" trsl.), 504 etc.
Avidūra
Avidūra (adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in loc. ˚e as adv. near Sn. 147.
Aviddasu
Aviddasu (adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn 762 (= bāla Sn A 509); Dh 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū DhA iii.395); PvA 18 (so read for avindasu).
Avināsaka (˚ika)
Avināsaka (˚ika) (adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A iii.38 (˚ika); J v.116 (= anāsaka C.).
Avināsana
Avināsana (adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs iv.16.
Avinicchayaññū
Avinicchayaññū (adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ñū] not knowing how to decide J v.367.
Avinibbhujaŋ
Avinibbhujaŋ (adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atīrento C.).
Avinibbhoga
Avinibbhoga (ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J iii.428 (˚sadda).
Avipariṇāma
Avipariṇāma [a + viparināma] absence of change, stead- fastness, endurance D i.18; iii.31, 33 (˚dhamma); DA i.113 (= jarā -- vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato).
Avippaṭisāra
Avippaṭisāra [a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A iii.46.
Avippavāsa
Avippavāsa (adj. -- n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mind- fulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive, eager Vin v.216; Sn 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa).
Aviruddha
Aviruddha (adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854.
Avirūḷhi
Avirūḷhi (f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn 235; DhA i.245 (˚dhamma).
Avirodha
Avirodha [a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M ii.105 = Th 1, 875.
Avirodhana
Avirodhana (nt.) = avirodha J iii.320, 412; v.378.
Avivāda
Avivāda [a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D iii.245; Sn 896 (˚bhūma SnA 557 or ˚bhumma Nd1 308, expld. as Nibbāna).
Avisaŋvādaka
Avisaŋvādaka (adj.) [a + visaŋvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D i.4; iii.170; Pug 57; DA i.73.
Avisaŋvādanatā
Avisaŋvādanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaŋvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D iii.190.
Avisaŋvādeti
Avisaŋvādeti [a + visaŋ + Caus. of vad] to keep one's word, to be honest, to be true J v.124.
Avisaggatā
Avisaggatā (f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy˚, thus as a + viy- agga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony, balance J vi.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga.
Avisare
Avisare at J v.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a + visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare.
Avisāhaṭa
Avisāhaṭa (adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs 15, 24, 287, 570. (˚mānasata).
Avissaji
Avissaji at J vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).
Avissajjiya
Avissajjiya (adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚); J vi.568.
Avissāsaniya
Avissāsaniya (adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J iii.474.
Aviha
Aviha [of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha's, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā -- words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139. -- S i.35, 60; A i.279; Pug 17.
Avihiŋsa (Avihesa)
Avihiŋsa (Avihesa) (f.) [a + vihiŋsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D iii.213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It 82 (˚vitakka).
Aviheṭhaka
Aviheṭhaka (adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D iii.166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context); Miln 219.
Avī˚
Avī˚ in general see vī˚.
Avīci
Avīci [B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no plea- sure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin ii.203 = It 86; Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 iiid; Ps i.83; Dhs 1281; J i.71, 96; iii.182; iv.159; DhA i.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. -- 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma).
Avekalla
Avekalla (˚ -- ) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge J vi.297.
Avekkhati
Avekkhati [B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av˚ corresponds] to look at, to consider, to see It 33 (v.l. ap˚); Dh 28, 50, J iv.6; DhA i.259 (= passati).
Avekkhipati
Avekkhipati [avaŋ + khipati, avaŋ here in form ave cor- resp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw (a foot) down J iv.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.).
Avecca
Avecca (adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form] certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld.
-- 86 --
by Bdhgh. as acala (on D ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Sn 229); by Dhp. as apara -- paccaya -- bhāvena (on Pv iv.125). -- Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Sanghe avecca -- pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at M i.47; S ii.69; iv.271 sq., 304; v.344, 405; A i.222; ii.56; iii.212, 332, 451; iv.406; v.183; further at Ps i.161 (˚pasanna); Sn 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125.
Avedha
Avedha (adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331).
Avebhangika
Avebhangika (adj.) [fr. a + vi + bhanga] not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305. Cp. next.
Avebhangiya
Avebhangiya (nt.) [= avebhangika] that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q. v.); v.129.
Avera
Avera (adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. -- ˚ŋ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D i.247 (˚citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA i 51).
Averin
Averin (adj. -- n.) = avera Dh 197, 258.
Avosita
Avosita [reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an˚ unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Avyagga
Avyagga (ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S v.66. Cp. avisaggatā.
Avyattatā
Avyattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA ii.38.
Avyatha
Avyatha (adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J iii.466 (= akilamāna C.).
Avyaya
Avyaya [a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. i.72 (instr. ˚ena safely); Miln 393 (as abbaya T.).
Avyāpajjha
Avyāpajjha1 (abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta); It 31 (abyābajjhɔārāma).
Avyāpajjha
Avyāpajjha2 (abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not hurting, kind D ii.242 (avera +), 276; M i.90; It 16 = 52 (sukhaŋ); Miln 410 (avera +).
Avyāpanna
Avyāpanna (adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D iii.82,83 (˚citta); A ii.220 (id.); Pug 68 (id.). -- Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302.
Avyāpāda
Avyāpāda [a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, free- dom from malice D iii.215, 229, 240; It 82 (all MSS. have aby˚); Dhs 33, 36, 277, 313, 1056.
Avyāyata
Avyāyata (adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J i.496 (= avyatta C.).
Avyāyika
Avyāyika (adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J v.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).
Avyāvaṭa
Avyāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136; Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn 43); J iii.65; vi.188. Miln 177 (abyā˚).
Avyāseka
Avyāseka (adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka -- virahitattā avyāseka DA i.183); Pug 59.
Avyāharati
Avyāharati [a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J v.80.
Avyosita
Avyosita (adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby˚).
Avhaya
Avhaya [fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya "betting"] calling, name; adj. ( -- ˚) called, having the name of Sn 684 (isi˚), 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd2 624).
Avhayati & Avheti
Avhayati & Avheti [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] -- 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D i.244 (avhayāma imper.); PvA 164. -- 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J ii.10, 252 (= pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti). -- 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). -- pp. avhāta (q. v.).
Avhāta
Avhāta [pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123, cp. PvA 64. The id. p. at Th 2, 129 reads ayācita.
Avhāna
Avhāna (nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] - 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā). -- 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nāma).
Avhāyana
Avhāyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, in- vocation, imploration D i.11 (Sir -- avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expld. at DA i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as "ehi Siri mayhaŋ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaŋ sire Siriyā avhayanaŋ"), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna).
Avhāyika
Avhāyika (adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J i.401 = iii.234.
Asa (adj.) [for asaŋ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning "good"] bad J iv.435 = vi.235 (sataŋ vā asaŋ, acc. sg. with v. l. santaŋ . . ., expld -- by sappurisaŋ vā asappurisaŋ vā C.); v.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 v.319).
Asaŋvata
Asaŋvata (adj.) [pp. of + saŋvuṇati, cp. saŋvuta] unres- tricted, open J vi.306.
Asaŋvara
Asaŋvara [a + saŋvāra] absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345.
Asaŋvāsa
Asaŋvāsa (adj.) [a + saŋvāsa] deprived of co -- residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, 214.
Asaŋvindaŋ
Asaŋvindaŋ [ppr. a + saŋvindati] not finding, not knowing Th 1, 717.
Asaŋvuta
Asaŋvuta (adj.) [pp. of a + saŋvuṇāti, cp. saŋvata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347.
Asaŋsaṭṭha
Asaŋsaṭṭha (adj.) [a + saŋsaṭṭha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M i.ai4; S i.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404 (= dassana -- savana -- samullāpa paribhogakāya -- saŋsaggānaŋ abhāvena SnA 468 = DhA iv.173).
Asaŋhārima
Asaŋhārima (adj.) = asaŋhāriya (?) Vin iv.272.
Asaŋhāriya
Asaŋhāriya (adj.) [grd. of a + saŋharati] not to be destroyed or shattered It 77; Th 1, 372; Nd2 110.
Asaŋhīra
Asaŋhīra (adj.) [= asaŋhāriya of saŋ + hṛ] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; S i.193; A iv.141; v.71; Sn 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110); J i. 62; iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dpvs iv.12.
Asakka
Asakka (adj.) [a + sakka; Sk. aśakya] impossible J v. 362 (˚rūpa).
Asakkuṇeyya
Asakkuṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of a + sakkoti] impossible, un- able to J i.55; KhA 185 and passim.
Asakkhara
Asakkhara (adj.) [a + sakkhara] not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth J v.168; DhA iii.401 (opp. sasakkhara).
Asakyadhītā
Asakyadhītā (f.) [a + sakyadhītā] not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214.
-- 87 --
Asagguṇa
Asagguṇa [a + sagguṇa] bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhā- vin, the a˚ belongs to the whole cpd.).
Asankita & ˚iya
Asankita & ˚iya (adj.) [a + sankita, pp. of śank] not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold J i.334 (˚iya); v.241; Sdhp 435, 541.
Asankuppa
Asankuppa (adj.) [a + sankuppa, grd. of kup] not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Sn 1149 (cp. Nd2 106); Th 1, 649.
Asankusaka
Asankusaka (adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18] not contrary J vi.297 (˚vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. J trsln. vi.143).
Asankheyya
Asankheyya (adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of saŋ -- khyā] in- calculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A ii.142; Miln 232 (cattāri a.), 289 DhA i.5, 83, 104.
Asanga
Asanga (adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta ThA 259); Miln 343. Cp. next.
Asangita
Asangita (adj.) [fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?] not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick J v.409.
Asacca
Asacca (adj.) [a + sacca] not true, false J v.399.
Asajjamāna
Asajjamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj] not clinging, not stuck, unattached Sn 38, 71 (cp. Nd2 107); Dh 221 (nāmarūpasmiŋ a. = alaggamana DhA iii.298).
Asajjittho
Asajjittho 2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate J i.376. See sajjati.
Asajjhaya
Asajjhaya [a + sajjhāya] non -- repetition Dh 241 (cp. DhA iii.347).
Asañña
Asañña (adj.) [a + saññā] unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings N. of a class of Devas D i.28 (cp. DA i.118 and BSk. asaŋjñika -- sattvāḥ Divy 505).
Asaññata
Asaññata (adj.) [a + saññata, pp. of saŋ + yam] unres- trained, intemperate, lacking self -- control It 43 = 90 = Sn 662 = Dh 307.
Asaññin
Asaññin (adj.) [a + saññin] unconscious D i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DA i.163); iii.111, 140, 263; It 87; Sn 874.
Asaṭha
Asaṭha (adj.) [a + saṭha] without guile, not fraudulent, honest D iii.47, 55, 237; DhA i.69.
Asaŋṭhita
Asaŋṭhita (adj.) [a + saṇṭhita] not composed, unsettled, fickle It 62, 94.
Asat (Asanto)
Asat (Asanto) [a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good, i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881, 950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto nirayaŋ nenti). See also asaddhamma.
*Asati
*Asati (& Asanāti q. v.) [Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aŋśa share, part] to eat; imper. asnātu J v 376; fut. asissāmi Th 1, 223; Sn 970. -- ppr. med. asamāna J v.59; Sn 239. ger. asitvā Miln 167; & asitvāna J iv.371 (an˚). pp. asita (q. v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati (añhamāna Sn 240), also āsita1.
Asatiyā
Asatiyā (adv.) [instr. of a + sati] heedlessly, unintentionally J iii.486.
Asatta
Asatta (adj.) [pp. of a + sajjati] not clinging or attached, free from attachment Sn 1059; Dh 419; Nd2 107, 108; DhA iv.228.
Asattha
Asattha (n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases: see under daṇḍa. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaṇa).
Asadisa
Asadisa (adj.) [a + sadisa] incomparable, not having its like DhA ii.89; iii.120 (˚dāna).
Asaddha
Asaddha (adj.) [a + saddha] not believing, without faith D iii.252, 282.
Asaddhamma
Asaddhamma [a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma] evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at It 85; as 4 at A ii.47; as 7 at D iii.252, 282; as 8 at Vin ii.202.
Asana
Asana1 (nt.) [Vedic aśan(m)] stone, rock J ii.91; v.131.
Asana
Asana2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati] eating, food; adj. eating J i.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.). Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324); DA i.139. See also nirasana.
Asana
Asana3 (nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J i.40 (as Bodhi -- tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530.
Asana
Asana4 (nt.) [cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw] an arrow M i.82 = S i.62. Cp. asani.
Asanāti
Asanāti [see asati] to eat, to consume (food) J i.472; v. 64; vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati).
Asani
Asani (f.) [Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. a)/kros pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1). Cp. also aŋsa & asama2] orig. a sharp stone as hurling -- weapon thence in mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder -- clap, lightning J i.71, 167; ii.154; iii.323; Miln 277; VvA 83. -- aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused by lightning DhA iii.71. -- pāta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); PvA 45. -- vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) S ii. 229 (= lābha -- sakkāra -- silokassa adhivacana); D iii.44, 47.
Asantasaŋ & ˚anto
Asantasaŋ & ˚anto (adj.) [ppr. of a + santasati] fearless, not afraid Sn 71, 74; J iv.101; vi.306; Nd2 109.
Asantāsin
Asantāsin (adj.) [a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaŋ] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA iv.70.
Asantuṭṭha
Asantuṭṭha [pp. of a + santussati] not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Sn 108. Cp. next.
Asantuṭṭhitā
Asantuṭṭhitā (f.) [abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha] dis- satisfaction, discontentment D iii.214 (so read for tutth˚) = A i.95.
Asanthava
Asanthava [a + santhava] dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Sn 207.
Asandhitā
Asandhitā (f.) [a + sandhi + tā] absence of joints, discon- nected state J vi.16.
Asannata
Asannata (adj.) [a + sannata] not bent or bending Sdhp 417.
Asapatta
Asapatta (adj. -- n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) with- out enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure, peaceful D ii.276; Sn 150 (= vigata -- paccatthika, mettavihārin KhA 249); Th 2, 512.
Asapattī
Asapattī (f.) [a + sapattī] without co -- wife or rival in mar- riage S iv.249.
Asappurisa
Asappurisa [a + sappurisa, cp. asat] a low, bad or un- worthy man M iii.37; SnA 479 (= anariya Sn 664).
Asabala
Asabala (adj.) [a + sabala] unspotted D ii.80 = iii.245.
Asabbha
Asabbha (adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the assembly -- room, not consistent with good manners,
-- 88 --
impolite, vile, low, of base character J iii.527 (mātugāma); Dh 77 = J iii.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA i.256; ThA 246 (akkhi). Cp. next. -- Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form.
Asabbhin = asabbna
Asabbhin = asabbna J i.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi˚, e.g. -- kāraṇa a low or sinful act Miln 280. -- rūpa low, common J vi.386 (= asādhu -- jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita -- jātika). Cp. prec.
*Asabha
*Asabha [Sk. ṛṣabha] see usabha.
Asama
Asama1 (adj.) [a + sama] unequal, incomparable J i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd. ˚dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Sn 694 (= asama -- viriya SnA 489); J i.193; vi.259, 330.
Asama
Asama2 (nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q. v.); connected with Lat. ocris "mons confragosus"; Gr. a)/kmwn anvil; Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani] stone, rock DA i.270, 271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v. l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika); SnA 392 (instr. asmanā).
Asamaggiya
Asamaggiya (nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya).
Asamaṇa
Asamaṇa at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q. v.).
Asamapekkhana
Asamapekkhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. a + sam + apekkhati] lack of consideration S iii.261; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162.
Asamāhita
Asamāhita (adj.) [a + samāhita] not composed, uncontrolled, not firm It 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dh 110, 111; Pug 35.
Asamijjhanaka
Asamijjhanaka (adj.) [a + samijjhana + ka] unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. ˚ikā J iii.252.
Asamiddhi
Asamiddhi (f.) [a + samiddhi] misfortune, lack of success J vi.584.
Asamosaraṇa
Asamosaraṇa (nt.) [a + samosaraṇa] not coming together, not meeting, separation J v.233.
Asampakampiya
Asampakampiya (adj.) [grd. of a + sampakampeti] not to be shaken, not to be moved Sn 229 (= kampetuŋ vā cāletuŋ vā asakkuṇeyyo KhA 185).
Asampajañña
Asampajañña (nt.) [a + sampajañña] lack of intelligence D iii.213; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162, 1351.
Asampāyanto
Asampāyanto [ppr. of a + sampāyati] unable to solve or explain Sn p. 92.
Asambādha
Asambādha (adj.) [a + sambādha] unobstructed Sn 150 (= sambādha -- virahita KhA 248); J i.80; ThA 293.
Asammodiya
Asammodiya (nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J vi.517 (= asamaggiya C.).
Asammosa
Asammosa [a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc] absence of confusion D iii.221 = Dhs 1366.
Asayaŋvasin
Asayaŋvasin (adj.) [a + sayaŋ + vasiŋ] not under one's own control, i. e. dependent D ii.262; J i.337.
Asayha
Asayha (adj.) [a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya] im- possible, insuperable J vi.337. Usually in cpd. ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Th 1, 536, Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa); It 32.
Asahana
Asahana (nt. -- adj.) [a + sahana] not enduring, non -- endurance, inability J iii.20; PvA 17.
Asahāya
Asahāya (adj.) [a + sahāya] one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Miln 225.
Asā
Asā see āsa.
Asāta
Asāta (adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern's interpretation & etymology of asāta at Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable] disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Sn 867; J i.288, 410; ii.105; Dhs 152, 1343.
Asādhāraṇa
Asādhāraṇa (adj.) [a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561] not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35; Kh viii.9; J i.58, 78; Miln 285; DA i.71; Sdhp 589, 592.
Asāmapāka
Asāmapāka (adj.) [a + sāma + pāka] one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DA i.270.
Asāra
Asāra (n. adj.) [a + sāra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 (= asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA i.114 for interpretation).
Asāraka
Asāraka (adj.) [a + sāraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Th 1, 260; J ii.163 = DhA i.144.
Asāraddha
Asāraddha (adj.) [a + sāraddha] not excited, cool A i.148 = It 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha).
Asāhasa
Asāhasa (nt.) [a + sāhasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc. as adv. asāhasaŋ without violence, not arbitrarily J iii.319; instr. asāhasena id. J vi.280; Dh 257 (= amusāvādena DhA iii.382).
Asi
Asi [Vedic asi, Av. aŋhū Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D i.77 (= DA i.222); M ii.99; A i.48 = (asinā sīsaŋ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaŋ); J iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning "sickle"), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either "āsiñ ca me" or "āsiñcam me"); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asinā pahaṭa). -- camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; A iii.93; J vi.449. -- tharu the hilt of a sword DhA iv.66. -- nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -- patta having sword -- like leaves, with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword -- leaf -- wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e. g. Mārk -- aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) J vi.250 (˚niraya); PvA 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194. -- pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Miln 191. -- māla ( -- kamma) sword -- garland ( -- torture) J iii.178 (+sīsaŋ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation "sword -- dirt", see māla (mālā). -- lakkhana "swordsign", i.e. (fortune -- telling from) marks or a sword D i.9; J i.455. -- loma having swords for hair S ii.257, cp. Vin iii.106. -- sūna slaughter -- house (so also B.Sk. asisūnā Divy 10, 15; see further detail under "kāma" similes) Vin ii.26; M i.130, 143; A iii.97. -- sūla a swordblade Th 2, 488 (expld. at ThA 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena, i.e. with reference to the executioner's block, cp. also sattisūla).
Asika
Asika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [asi + ka] having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhittɔasika with drawn sword, M i.377; J i.393.
Asita
Asita1 [Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti] having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food M i.57; A iii.30, 32 (˚pīta -- khāyita etc.); PvA 25 (id.); J vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one's food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1.
Asita
Asita2 (adj.) [a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita] not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires) D ii.261 (˚âtiga); M i.386; Th 1, 38, 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); J ii.247; It 97; Sn 251, 519, 593, 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. SnA 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya).
-- 89 --
Asita
Asita3 (adj.) [Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i. e. burnt up; Gr. a)/zw to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i. e. black colour (of ashes)] black -- blue, black M ii.180 (˚vyābhangī); A iii.5 (id.); Th 2, 480 (= indanīla ThA 286); J iii.419 (˚âpangin black -- eyed); v. 302; Dāvs i.45.
Asita
Asita4 (m. nt.) [fr. asi] a sickle J iii.129; v 46.
Asīti
Asīti (num.) [Sk. aśīti] 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref's. In addition we mention the foll.:) J i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i. e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa -- vāraṇa -- parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni); Miln 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiŋ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) DhA i.14, 19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi -- vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika.
Asu
Asu (pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dẹmonstr. "that", that one, usually combd. with yo (yaŋ), e. g. asu yo so puriso M i.366; yaŋ aduŋ khettaŋ S iv.315. <-> nom. sg. m. asu S iv.195; Miln 242; f. asu J v.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduŋ M i.364, 483; A i.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amunā (instr.) A i.250. Cp. also next.
Asuka
Asuka (pron. -- adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87; J i.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 (˚ŋ gatiŋ gata).
Asuci
Asuci (adj.) [a + suci] not clean, impure, unclean Sn 75 (˚manussā, see Nd2 112); Pug 27, 36; Sdhp 378, 603.
Asucīka
Asucīka (nt.) [abstr. fr. asuci] impurity, unclean living, defilement Sn 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva -- missita SnA 286.
Asubha
Asubha (adj.) [a + subha] impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. ˚ŋ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the Asubha -- meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6. -- S iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320; Sn 341; Sdhp 368. -- subhâsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Sn 633; J iii. 243; Miln 136. -- ânupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) It 80, 81; DhA i.76. -- kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68. -- kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity DhA iii.425. -- nimitta sign of the unclean i. e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -- bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68. -- saññā idea of impurity D iii.253, 283, 289, 291. -- saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) It 93.
Asura
Asura [Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; con- nected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master] a fallen angel, a Titan; pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at PvA 272 & the C. on J v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka -- bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e. g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Miln 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DA i.51. <-> The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under the title of devâsura -- sangāma: D ii.285; S i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447; M i.253; A iv.432. -- Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna -- yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e. g. at It 93; J v.186; Pv iv.111, see also apāya. -- Other passages in general: S i.216 sq. (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203; A ii.91; iv.198 sq., 206; Sn 681; Nd1 89, 92, 448; DhA i.264 (˚kaññā); Sdhp 366, 436. -- inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (S i.222; iv.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A ii.17, 53; iii.243). Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at A iv.197. -- kāya the body or assembly of the asuras A i.143; J v.186; ThA 285. -- parivāra a retinue of Asuras A ii.91. -- rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Sn 310 (defined by Bdhgh at SnA 323 as pabbata -- pāda -- nivāsino dānava -- yakkha -- saññitā).
Asuropa
Asuropa [probably a haplological contraction of asura -- ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris's discussion at J P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions] anger, malice, hatred; abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vbh 357; Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1341 (an˚); DhsA 396.
Asussūsaŋ
Asussūsaŋ [ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati] not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient J v.121.
Asūyaka
Asūyaka see anasūyaka.
Asūra
Asūra (adj.) [a + sura1] -- 1. not brave, not valiant, co- wardly Sn 439. -- 2. uncouth, stupid J vi.292 (cp. Kern. Toev. p. 48).
Asekha
Asekha (& Asekkha) (adj. n.) [a + sekha] not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp. B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, 337; Av. Ś i.269, 335; ii.144) Vin i.62 sq.; iii.24; S i.99; D iii.218, 219; It 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v. l. asekkha); Pug 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq. -- muni the perfectly Wise DhA iii.321. -- bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps ii.173, cp. 176.
Asecanaka
Asecanaka (adj.) [a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka -- darśana in same meaning e. g. Divy 23, 226, 334] unmixed, unadulterated, i. e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely M i.114; S i.213 (a. ojava "that elixir that no infusion needs" Mrs Rh. D.) = Th 2, 55 (expld. as anāsittakaŋ pakatiyā ɔva mahārasaŋ at ThA 61) = Th 2, 196 (= anāsittakaŋ ojavantaŋ sabhāva -- madhuraŋ ThA 168); S v.321; A iii. 237 sq. Miln 405.
Asevanā
Asevanā (f.) [a + sevanā] not practising, abstinence from Sn 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā KhA 124).
Asesa
Asesa (adj.) [a + sesa] not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Sn 2 sq., 351, 355, 500, 1037 (= sabba Nd2 113). As ˚ -- (adv.) entirely, fully, completely Sn p. 141 (˚virāga -- nirodha); Miln 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement).
Asesita
Asesita (adj.) [pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati] leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole, all J iii.153.
Asoka
Asoka1 (adj.) [a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka] free from sorrow Sn 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha -- soka -- salla KhA 153); Dh 412; Th 2, 512.
Asoka
Asoka2 [Sk. aśoka] the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka J v.188; Vv 354, 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura); VvA 173 (˚rukkha).
Asoṇḍa
Asoṇḍa (adj.) [a + soṇḍa] not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink J v.116. -- f. asoṇḍī A iii.38.
Asotatā
Asotatā (nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless J vi.16.
Asnāti
Asnāti [Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti] to eat; imper. asnātu J v.376.
Asman
Asman (nt.) [Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2] stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā SnA 362.
Asmasati
Asmasati [spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśva- sati] to trust, to rely on J v.56 (Pot. asmase).
Asmi
Asmi (I am) see atthi.
Asmimāna
Asmimāna [asmi + māna] the pride that says "I am", pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, 314) Vin i.3; D iii.273; M i.139, 425; A iii.85; Ps i.26; Kvu 212; DhA i.237. Cp. ahaŋ asmi.
-- 90 --
Asmiye
Asmiye 1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. "I shall eat" J v.397, 405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr. -- āśa food, = aŋsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aŋśyati or aśnāti (see asati).
Assa
Assa1 [for aŋsa1, q. v. for etym.] shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder -- bag, knapsack i. e. a bag containing provisions, instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv. ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris J P T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena, sīse chārikaŋ okiritvā ti attho DA i.267. After all it is the same as puṭaŋsa (see under aŋsa1). -- D i.98, cp. A ii.242 (v. l. bhasma˚); DA i.267 (v.l. bhassa˚).
Assa
Assa2 [for aŋsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. a)/kros & o)cu/s sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four -- cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; J iv.46, 492; Pv ii.119. Perhaps also at Th 2, 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaŋsa under catur).
Assa
Assa3 [Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. i(/ppos, dial. i(/kkos; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo -- ; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os. ehu; Ags. eoh] a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa -- satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds, with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); A ii.207; v.271; Sn 769 (gavâssa). At Th ii.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻ four in hand ʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2) was probably what the poet meant; Dh 94, 143, 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī); VvA 78; DhA i.392 (hatthi -- assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚). -- ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse A i.77, 244; ii.113 sq., 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323; PvA 216. See also ājāniya. -- âroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, N. of an occupation "cavalry" D i.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DA i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja -- assabhaṇḍādayo). -- kaṇṇa N. of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. "horse -- ear" (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva -- tundi the thornbush, lit. horse -- tooth) J ii.161; iv.209; vi.528. -- khalunka an inferior horse ("shaker"), opp. sadassa. A i.287 = iv.397. -- tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192; D i.7 -- damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion A ii.112; ˚sārathi a horse trainer A ii. 112, 114; v.323 sq.; DhA iv.4. -- potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt J ii.288. -- bandha a groom J ii. 98; v.449; DhA i.392. -- bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse -- trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35). -- bhaṇḍaka horse -- trappings J ii.113. -- maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. M i.446. -- maṇḍalika exercising -- ground Vin iii.6. -- medha N. of a sacrifice: the horse -- sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] S i.76 (v. l. sassa˚); It 21 (+ purisamedha); Sn 303. -- yuddha a horse -- fight D i.7. -- rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse DhA ii.69 (+ hatthi -- rūpaka). -- lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging) the marks on a horse D i.9. -- laṇḍa horse -- manure, horsedung DhA iv.156 (hatthi -- laṇḍa +). -- vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6. -- sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind A i.289 = iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚).
Assa
Assa4 is gen. dat. sg. of ayaŋ, this.
Assa
Assa5 3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi).
Assaka
Assaka1 ( -- ˚) [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; anɔ without a horse J vi.515 (+ arathaka).
Assaka
Assaka2 (adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor, destitute M i.450; ii.68; A iii.352; Ps i.126 (v. l. asaka).
Assatara
Assatara [Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in func- tion of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA i.213; DhA iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); J iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342. -- f. assatarī a she -- mule Vin ii.188; S i.154; ii.241; A ii.73; Miln 166. -- assatarī -- ratha a chariot drawn by she -- mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā) = 438; Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha PvA 56); J vi.355.
Assattha
Assattha1 [Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z i.467 as aśva -- ttha dial. for aśva -- stha "standing place for horses, which etym. is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.] the holy fig -- tree, Ficus, Religiosa; the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment, i. e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35; D ii.4 (sammā -- sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); S v.96; J i.16 (v.75, in word -- play with assattha2 of v.79).
Assattha
Assattha2 [pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Av. Ś i.210] encouraged, comforted A iv.184 (v. l. as gloss assāsaka); Ps i.131 (loka an˚; v. l. assaka); J i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1); vi.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566.
Assaddha
Assaddha (adj.) [a + saddhā] without faith, unbelieving, Sn 663; Pug 13, 20; Dhs 1327; DhA ii.187.
Assaddhiya
Assaddhiya (nt.) [a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya; cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible] disbelief S i.25; A iii.421; v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vbh 371; DA i.235; Sdhp 80.
Assama
Assama [ā + śram] a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.26, 246; iii.147; Sn 979; Sn p. 104, 111; J i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (id.) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books, where "the 4 āśramas" is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. i.211 -- 217.
Assamaṇa
Assamaṇa [a + samaṇa] not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96; Sn 282; Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug A 207. -- f. assamaṇī Vìn iv.214.
Assaya
Assaya [ā + sayati, śri] resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DA i.67 (puññ˚). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning "body": see Av. Ś. i.175 & Index ii.223.
Assava
Assava (adj.) [ā + sunāti, śru] loyal D i.137; Sn 22, 23, 32; J iv.98; vi.49; Miln 254; an˚ inattentive, not docile DhA i.7.
Assavati
Assavati [ā + sru] to flow J ii.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati.
Assavanatā
Assavanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. assavana] not listening to, in- attention M i.168.
Assavanīya
Assavanīya (adj.) [a + savanīya] not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82.
Assasati
Assasati [ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā1 3] 1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale, J i 163; vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaŋ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i. e. to breathe in & out, D ii.291 = M i.56, cp. M i.425; J ii.53, cp. v.36. -- 2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage S iv.43; J iv.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase J iv.57 (C. for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (˚itvā). -- 3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession J iv.495 (= assāsa -- vātena upahanati āvisati C.). -- Caus. assāseti. -- pp. assattha2. See also assāsa -- passāsa.
-- 91 --
Assāda
Assāda [ā + sādiyati, svad] taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction D i.22 (vedanānaŋ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); M i.85; S ii.84 sq. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq. (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq.; A i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi) J i.508; iv.113, Sn 448; Ps i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157; cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚); Vbh 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq.; Miln 388; Vism 76 (paviveka -- rasɔ); Sdhp 37, 51. See also appassāda under appa.
Assādanā
Assādanā (f.) [cp. assāda] sweetness, taste, enjoyment S i.124; Sn 447 (= sādubhāva SnA 393).
Assādeti
Assādeti [Denom. fr. assāda] to taste S ii.227 (lābha -- sakkāra- silokaŋ); Vism 73 (paviveka -- sukha -- rasaŋ); DhA i.318.
Assāraddha
Assāraddha v. l. at It 111 for asāraddha.
Assāvin
Assāvin (adj.) [ā + sru] only in an˚ not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sāta -- vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā -- santhava -- virahita SnA 549). See also āsava.
Assāsa
Assāsa [Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa -- passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath D ii.157 = S i.159 = Th 1, 905; D iii.266; M i.243; S i.106; iv.293; v.330, 336; A iv.409; v.135; J ii.146; vi.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. -- assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. -- 2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence M i.64; S ii.50 (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.254 (param -- assāsa -- ppatta); A i.192; iii.297 sq. (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.185; J vi.309 (see assattha2); Miln 354; PvA 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313.
Assāsaka
Assāsaka (adj. n.) [fr. assāsa] 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚ not able to draw breath Vin iii.84; iv.111. -- 2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy J i.84; vi. 150. Cp. next.
Assāsika
Assāsika (adj.) [fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2] only in neg. an˚ not able to afford comfort, giving no comfort or security M i.514; iii.30; J ii.298 (= aññaŋ assāsetuŋ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk. anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Av. Ś. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma -- dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata.
Assāsin
Assāsin (adj.) [Sk. āśvāsin] reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy S iv.43 (an˚).
Assāseti
Assāseti [Caus. of assasati] to console, soothe, calm, com- fort, satisfy J vi.190, 512; DhA i.13.
Assita
Assita (adj.) [Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri] dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on D ii.255 (tad˚); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaŋ a.); Th 1, 149 (janaŋ evɔ assito jano); Sdhp 401.
Assirī
Assirī (adj.) [a + sirī] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassarɔ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).
Assu
Assu1 (nt.) [Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); S ii.282 (id.); Dh 74; Th 2, 496 (cp. ThA 289); KhA 65; DhA i.12 (˚puṇṇa -- netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98; PvA 125. -- dhārā a shower of tears DhA iv.15 (pavatteti to shed). -- mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e. g. Jtm 3116] D i.115, 141; Dh 67; Pug 56; DA i.284; PvA 39. -- mocana shedding of tears PvA 18.
Assu
Assu2 is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi.
Assu
Assu3 (indecl.) [Sk. sma] expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of "surely, yes, indeed" Sn 231 (according to Fausböll, but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tayɔ assu, cp. KhA 188); Vv 324 (assa v. l. SS) = VvA 135 (assū ti nipāta -- mattaŋ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2). Cp. āsu.
Assu
Assu4 part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. Ac- cording to this view Fausbölls reading kenɔ assu at Sn 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu.
Assuka
Assuka (nt.) [assu1 + ka] a tear Vin ii.289; Sn 691; Pv iv.53.
Assutavant
Assutavant (adj.) [a + sutavant] one who has not heard, ignorant M i.1, 8, 135; Dhs 1003, 1217, cp. Dhs trsl. 258.
Aha
Aha1 (indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. "ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in cpd. ˚kāmā miserable pleasures lit. "woe to these pleasures!") gloss at ThA 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th 2, 506 (expld. by C. as "ahā ti lāmaka -- pariyāyo"). See also ahaha.
Aha
Aha2 ( -- ˚) & Aho (˚ -- ) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) ˚aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekâhena in one day J vi. 366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipâhaŋ (for) some or several days J i.152 etc. (kattpâha); sattāhaŋ seven days, a week Vin i.1; D ii. 14; J iv.2, and freq.; anvahaŋ daily Dāvs iv.8. -- The initial a of ahaŋ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ɔhaŋ how many days? S i.7; ekâha -- dvī ɔhaŋ one or two days J i.292; dvīha -- tī ɔhan two or three days J ii.103; VvA 45; ekâha -- dvī ɔhɔ accayena after the lapse of one or two days J i.253. -- A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is ˚ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days). -- (2) aho˚ in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraŋ Av. Ś. i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahorattaŋ: M i.417 (˚ânusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J iv.108 (˚ānaŋ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ŋ); Miln 82 (ena). -- ahorattiŋ Dh 387; J vi.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiŋ).
Ahaŋ
Ahaŋ (prom.) [Vedic ahaŋ = Av. azəm; Gr. e)gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I". <-> nom. sg. ahaŋ S iii.235; A iv.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J i.61; ii.159. -- In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaŋ vadanti mama . . na te ahaŋ S i.116, 123; ahaŋ asmi "I am" (cp. ahaŋkāra below) S i.129; iii.46, 128 sq.; iv.203; A ii.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaŋ pure ti "I am the first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahaŋkārā ti VvA 351). -- gen. dat. mayhaŋ Sn 431, 479; J i.279; ii.160, mama S i.115; Sn 22, 23, 341, 997; J ii.159, & mamaŋ S i.116; Sn 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. -- instr. mayā Sn 135, 336, 557, 982; J i.222, 279. -- acc. maŋ Sn 356, 366, 425, 936; J ii. 159; iii.26, & mamaŋ J iii.55, 394. -- loc. mayi Sn 559; J iii 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & functions in diff. cases, as gen. (Sn 983; J ii.159), acc. (Sn 982), instr. (J i.138, 222), & abl. -- Pl. nom. mayaŋ (we) Sn 31, 91, 167, 999; J ii.159; vi.365, amhe J ii. 129, & vayaŋ (q. v.). -- gen. amhākaŋ J i.221; ii.159 & asmākaŋ Sn p. 106. -- acc. amhe J i.222; ii.415 & asme J iii.359. -- instr. amhehi J i.150; ii.417 & asmābhi ThA 153 (Ap. 132). -- loc. amhesu J i.222. <-> The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.): see under vayaŋ. -- kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaŋkāra) M iii.18, 32; S ii.253; iii.80, 136, 169 sq.; iv.41, 197, 202; A i.132 sq.; iii.444; Ud 70; Nett 127, and freq. passim.
-- 92 --
Ahaha
Ahaha [onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1] 1. ex- clamation of woe J iii.450 (ahahā in metre). -- 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A v.173 = Sn p. 126.
Ahāsa
Ahāsa [a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exult- ancy, modesty J iii.466 (= an -- ubbillāvitattaŋ C.).
Ahāsi
Ahāsi 3rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.).
Ahi
Ahi [Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin ii.109; D i.77; S iv.198; A iii.306 sq.; iv.320; v.289; Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA 100; PvA 144. -- kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = M i.73 = A iv.377. -- gāha a snake catcher or trainer J vi.192. -- guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non -- Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚); iv.456 (T. ˚guṇṭ; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (T. ˚kuṇḍ˚, v. l. SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (T. ˚guṇṭ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (T. ˚guṇḍ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚); Miln 23, 305. -- chattaka (nt.) "a snake's parasol", a mushroom D iii.87; J ii.95; Ud 81 (C. on viii.5, 1). -- tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304, 500. -- peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA ii.63. -- mekhalā "snake -- girdle", i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA i.139. -- vātaka ( -- roga) N. of a certain disease ("snakewind -- sickness") Vin i.78; J ii.79; iv.200; DhA i.169, 187, 231; iii.437. -- vijjā "snake -- craft", i. e. fortune -- telling or sorcery by means of snakes D i.9 (= sappa -- daṭṭhatikicchana -- vijjā cɔ eva sappɔ avhāyana -- vijjā ea "the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)" DA i.93).
Ahiŋsaka
Ahiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ahiŋsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S i.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J iv.447.
Ahiŋsā
Ahiŋsā (f.) [a + hiŋsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D iii.147; A i.151; Dh 261, 270; J iv.71; Miln 402.
Ahita
Ahita (adj. -- n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D iii.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (˚kāma).
Ahirika & Ahirīka
Ahirika & Ahirīka (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscru- pulous D iii.212, 252, 282; A ii.219; Dh 244; Sn 133 (˚īka); It 27 (˚īka); Pug 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs 365; Nett 39, 126; DhA iii.352.
Ahīnindriya
Ahīnindriya see discussed under abhinindriya.
Ahuvāsiŋ
Ahuvāsiŋ 1st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiŋ VvA 321).
Ahuhāliya
Ahuhāliya (nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J iii.223 (= danta -- vidaŋsaka -- mahā -- hasita C.).
Ahe
Ahe (indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha1] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as "ahevanaŋ vuccati vanasaṇḍo").
Aho
Aho (indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyɔ atthena nipāto); J i.88 (aho acchariyaŋ aho abbhutaŋ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA ii.85; PvA 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re D i. 107; Pv ii.94 5. Cp. ahe.
Ahosikamma
Ahosi -- kamma (nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix.
Ā1 (indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning "to, towards", & also "from". Orig. an emphatic -- deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. h)_ surely, really; Ohg. -- ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a -- sau; Gr. e\ kei_ (cp. a3), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well -- defined simple base -- prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam -- ā -- dhi) except in one case ā -- ni -- saŋsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from combn. āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇɔ atthe nipāto PvA 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. -- (1.) As prep. c. abl. only in J in meaning "up to, until, about, near" J vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning "forth, out, to, towards, at, on" in foll. applications: -- (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards; ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad -- duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at -- tempt; ˚rohana a -- scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad -- vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by; ˚hanati strike at. -- (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror; ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaŋsa subjective gain; ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding; ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself). -- (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad -- dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in. -- (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive -- frequentative prefix in sense of "all -- round, completely, very much", e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about. -- 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saŋsati), pa (˚tapati), paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a -- c; and vi (˚kirati, ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b. -- 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā -- gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati, ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā -- janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā -- ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā -- disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati). -- (b) Contrast -- combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of "up & down, in & out, to & fro"; ā + ni: āvedhika -- nibbedhika, āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa (contracted to ānisaŋsa), āsevita -- nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as "breathing out", passasati as "breathing in": see Vism 271), assāsa -- passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna -- pāhuna, āhuneyya -- pāhuneyya; ā + paccā:
-- 93 --
ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana -- parikaḍḍhana, āsankita -- parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita -- vilokita, āvāha -- vivāha, āveṭhana -- viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa -- sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa -- samāciṇṇa. -- 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda.
Ā˚
Ā˚2 guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suf- fixes as -- ya, -- iya, -- itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc.
Ā˚
Ā˚3 of various other origins (guṇa e. g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha).
Ā˚
Ā˚4 infix in repetition -- cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa -- or increment -- form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalâphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit & not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e. g. i.416; ii.160; iii.127; iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇâkāraṇāni all sorts of duties J vi.333; DhA i.385; khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa pêle -- mêle J i.114; iii.256; gaṇḍâgaṇḍa a mass of boils DhA iii.297; cirâciraŋ continually Vin iv.261; bhavâbhava all kinds of existences Sn 801, cp. Nd1 109; Nd2 664; Th 1, 784 (˚esu = mahant -- âmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate ThA 285; etc.
Ākankhati
Ākankhati [ā + kānkṣ, cp. kankhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna); D i.78, 176; S i.46; Sn 569 (˚amāna); Sn p. 102 (= icchati SnA 436); DhA i.29; SnA 229; VvA 149; PvA 229.
Ākankhā
Ākankhā f. [fr. ā + kānkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th 1, 1030.
Ākaḍḍhati
Ākaḍḍhati [ā + kaḍḍhati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); iv.219; J i.172, 192, 417; Miln 102, 135; ThA 117 (˚eti); VvA 226; PvA 68. <-> Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati J ii.122 (˚amāna -- locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln 102; Vism 163; VvA 207 (˚amāna -- hadaya with torn heart). -- pp. ākaḍḍhita.
Ākaḍḍhana
Ākaḍḍhana (nt.) [fr. ākaḍḍhati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about); DhsA 363; Miln 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352. -- As f. Vin iii.121.
Ākaḍḍhita
Ākaḍḍhita [pp. of akaḍḍheti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J iii.256 (= akkhitta2).
Ākantana
Ākantana (?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th 1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana.
Ākappa
Ākappa [cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213; J i.505. -- 2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi -- ākāro DhsA 321). -- sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A iii.78; J iv.542; an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, J i.420.
Ākampita
Ākampita [pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln 154 (˚hadaya).
Ākara
Ākara [cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan -- ākara a mine of jewels Th 1, 1049; J ii.414; vi. 459; Dpvs i.18. -- Cp. also Miln 356; VvA 13.
Ākassati
Ākassati [ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428.
Ākāra
Ākāra [a + karoti, kṛ] "the (way of) making", i. e. (1) state, condition J i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ˚. -- (2) property, quality, attribute D i.76 (anāvila sabb˚ -- sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta); J ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). -- (3) sign, appearance, form, D i.175; J i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger); Miln 24 (˚ena by the sign of . .); VvA 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA 90, 283 (rañño ā. the king's person); Sdhp 363. -- (4) way, mode, manner, sa -- ākāra in all their modes D i.13 = 82 = iii.111; J i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chahɔākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasahɔākārehi); Vism 613 (navahɔākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA 64 (yenɔākārena āgato tenɔākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). <-> (5) reason, ground, account D i.138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA i.14; KhA 100 (in expln. of evaŋ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style "what is meant by", the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚ -- dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ŋ dassesi), 121 (pucchan˚ -- nidassanaŋ what has been asked); SnA 135 (˚nidassana). -- parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S ii.115; iv.138; A ii.191 = Nd2 151.
Ākāraka
Ākāraka (nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) J i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.).
Ākāravant
Ākāravant (adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M i.401 (saddhā).
Ākāsa
Ākāsa1 [Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. <-> D i.55 (˚ŋ indriyāni sankamanti the sense -- faculties pass into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265; S iii.207; iv.218; v.49, 264; J i.253; ii.353; iii.52, 188; iv.154; vi.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv ii.118; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. -- ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati id. J ii.103; ˚e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando). -- Formula "ananto ākāso" freq.; e. g. at D i.183; A ii.184; iv. 40, 410 sq.; v.345. -- anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on ˚anta see anta1 4) J vi.89. -- ānañca (or ânañca) the infinity ef space, in cpd. ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the "space -- infinity -- plane", the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇɔānañc -- āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚, (4) nɔeva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. -- D i.34, 183; ii.70, 112, 156; iii.224, 262 sq.; M i.41, 159.; iii. 27, 44; S v.119; Ps i.36; Dhs 205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39; Vism 326, 340, 453; DA i.120 (see Nd2 under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd2 672 (sādhu -- vihārin). -- kasiṇa one of the kasiṇɔāyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D iii.268; A i.41. -- gangā N. of the celestial river J i.95; iii.344. -- gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. -- cārika walking through the air J ii.103. -- cārin = ˚cārika VvA 6. -- ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu i.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. -- tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. -- dhātu the element of space D iii.247; M i.423; iii.31; A i.176; iii.34; Dhs 638.
Ākāsa
Ākāsa2 (nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻ in the air ʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = D i.6 (= aṭṭhapada -- dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaŋ DA i.85).
Ākāsaka
Ākāsaka (adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J vi.124.
-- 94 --
Ākāsati
Ākāsati [fr. ākāsa1] to shine J vi.89.
Ākiñcañña
Ākiñcañña (nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below ˚āyatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). -- Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 (= akiñcanabhāva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer"); Nd2 115, see ākāsa; Miln 342. -- āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚) D i.35, 184; ii.156; iii.224, 253, 262 sq.; M i.41, 165; ii.254, 263; iii.28, 44, S iv.217; A i.268; iv.40, 401; Ps i.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha.
Ākiṇṇa
Ākiṇṇa [pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚ -- ) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair); S i.204 (˚kammanta "in motley tasks engaged"); iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A iii.104 (˚vihāro); iv.4; v.15 (an˚ C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula -- varalakkh˚ SnA 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- dijagaṇ˚ = āyutta PvA 157); Pug 31; PvA 32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp 595. -- Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city "iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa -- manussa", e. g. D i.211; ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A iii.215; cp. Miln 2 (˚jana -- manussa). -- 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S i.205 = J iii.309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "ruthless" & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula˚, as above under Sn 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1.
Ākirati
Ākirati [ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn 665; Dh 313; Pv ii.49 (dānaŋ vipulaŋ ākiri = vippakirati PvA 92); Miln 175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn 383. -- pp. ākiṇṇa.
Ākiritatta
Ākiritatta (nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln 173 (sakataŋ dhaññassa ā).
Ākilāyati
Ākilāyati v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati.
Ākucca
Ākucca (or ˚ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non -- Aryan] an iguana J vi.538 (C. godhā; gloss amattɔākuccā).
Ākurati
Ākurati [onomat. to sound -- root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura "intumescence", thus meaning "to swell") are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati).
Ākula
Ākula (adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk. -- P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning "revolving quickly", & so "confused"] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J i.123 (salākaggaŋ ˚ŋ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha˚); PvA 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln 117, 220; PvA 56; ākula -- pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula -- pakkula); ākula -- samākula J vi.270. <-> On phrase tantākula -- jātā gulā -- guṇṭhika -- jātā see guḷā.
Ākulaka
Ākulaka (adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā).
Ākulanīya
Ākulanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula] in an˚ not to be confounded or upset PvA 118.
Ākulī
Ākulī ( -- puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta -- bakula -- puppha. Vism 260 (id. p.) however reads ākulī -- puppha "tangle -- flower" (?), cp. Ud 5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula.
Ākoṭana
Ākoṭana1 (nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M i.385; Miln 63, 306; DhsA 144.
Ākoṭana
Ākoṭana2 (adj.) [= ākoṭana1] beating, driving, inciting, urging J vi.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by "nivāraṇapatoda -- laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti" p. 254).
Ākoṭita
Ākoṭita [pp. of ākoṭeti] -- 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J i.303; Miln 62 (of a gong). -- 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S ii. 281; DhA i.37.
Ākoṭeti
Ākoṭeti [a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraŋ trir ā˚, Cowell "break" (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.] -- 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J i.264. <-> 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217; J ii.274; PvA 55 (aññamaññaŋ); Sdhp 159. -- 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaŋ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D i.89; A iv.359; v.65; DA i.252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraŋ ā. J v 217; DhA ii.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA 316). -- 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J i.239. -- pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. ii. ākoṭapeti J iii.361.
Ākhu
Ākhu [Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10.
Āgacchati
Āgacchati [ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc. I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D i.161; J ii.153; Pv iv.151; fut. āgacchissati J iii.53; aor. āgacchi Pv ii.133; PvA 64. -- (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA 81, āgamā D i.108; J iii.128, and pl. āgamiŋsu J i.118; fut. āgamissati VvA 3; PvA 122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J i.151; Miln 14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). -- (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn 841; Pv i.123 (= āgacchi PvA 64). -- pp. āgata (q. v.). II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D i.108; Pv i.113; ii.133; Miln 14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA 81, 122. -- (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) D i.161 (gārayhaŋ ṭhānaŋ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA 241). -- (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiŋsu); SnA 321; VvA 3. See also āgamma.
Āgata
Āgata [pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln 18 (˚kā- raṇa the reason of his coming); VvA 78 (˚ṭṭhāna); PvA 81 (kiŋ āgatɔattha why have you come here) come by, got attained (˚ -- ) A ii.110 = Pug 48 (˚visa); Mhvs xiv. 28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -- āgatɔāgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA 39, 78, 129; VvA 190 (Ep. of sangha). -- svɔāgata "wel -- come", greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th 2, 337; Pv iv.315, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A ii.117, 143, 153; iii. 163; Th 2, 337. -- (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D i.88; DhA ii.35; KhA 229; VvA 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127, 337; ii 8; iv.158; A ii.147; Miln 19, 21. -- (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata.
Āgati
Āgati (f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S iii.53; J ii.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in
-- 95 --
special sense of rebirth and re -- death in the course of saŋsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D i.162; A iii.54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S ii.67; Pv ii.922 (gatiŋ āgatiŋ vā).
Āgada
Āgada (m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA i.66 (= vacana).
Āgantar
Āgantar [N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A i.63; ii.159; It 4, 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚ A i.64; ii.160.
Āgantu
Āgantu (adj.) [Sk. āgantu] -- 1. occasional, incidental J vi.358. -- 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J vi.529 (= āgantuka -- jana C.); ThA 16.
Āgantuka
Āgantuka (adj. -- n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś i.87, 286; Divy 50] -- 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132, 167; ii.170; iii. 65, 181; iv.24, A i.10; iii.41, 366; J vi.333; Ud 25; DhA ii.54, 74; VvA 24; PvA 54. -- 2. adventitions, incidental (= āgantu1) Miln 304 (of megha & roga). <-> 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195. -- bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opp. gamika˚); ii.16.
Āgama
Āgama [fr. ā + gam] -- 1. coming, approach, result, D i.53 (āgamanaŋ pavattatī ti DA i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚). -- 2. that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of (?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA i.1, 2 (dīgh˚). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma -- vagga -- mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaŋ". See also āgata 2, for phrase āgatɔāgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgatɔāgamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. -- 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (āgamā parivitakkaŋ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). <-> 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ˚). -- 5. repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245. -- 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa -- kārɔāgama).
Āgamana
Āgamana (nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, ar- rival, approach A iii.172; DA i.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an˚ not coming or returning J i.203, 264.
Āgameti
Āgameti [caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or some- thing to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii. 166, 182, 212; D i.112, 113; S iv.291; PvA 4, 55. <-> (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M i.161 (id.) J i.69 (id. + kālaŋ).
Āgamma
Āgamma (adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under i.2 for form & under ii.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. Ś i.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu i.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D i.229; It 71; J i.50; vi.424; Kh viii.14 (= nissāya KhA 229); PvA 5, 21 etc.
Āgāmitā
Āgāmitā found only in neg. form anāgāmitā.
Āgāmin
Āgāmin (adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saŋsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A i.63; ii.159; It 95. See anāgāmin.
Āgāra
Āgāra ( -- ˚) see agāra.
Āgāraka & ˚ika
Āgāraka & ˚ika (adj. -- n.) ( -- ˚) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan˚ prison -- keeper A ii.207; bhaṇḍ˚ keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also bhaṇḍ˚). -- (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S iii.190 (paŋsv˚ playmate).
Āgāḷha
Āgāḷha (adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaŋ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a i.283, 295; Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug A 215 has a˚, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā).
Āgilāyati
Āgilāyati [ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; KhA 66 (hadavaŋ ā.). Cp. āyamati.
Āgu
Āgu (nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S i.123; A iii.346; Sn 522 = Nd2 337 (in expln. of nāga as āguŋ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd1 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin. -- cārin one who does evil, D ii.339; M ii.88; iii.163; S ii.100, 128; A ii.240; Miln 110.
Āghāta
Āghāta [Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning "hurtfulness" at M Vastu i.79; Av. Ś ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill -- will, hatred, malice D i.3, 31; iii.72 sq.; S i.179; J i.113; Dhs 1060, 1231; Vbh 167, 362, 389; Miln 136; Vism 306; DA i.52; VvA 67; PvA 178. -- anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249; A v.80. -- paṭivinaya repression of ill -- will; the usual enumn. of ā -- ˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D iii.262, 289; Vin v.137; A iv.408; besides this there are sets of five at A iii.185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138. -- vatthu occasion of ill -- will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enumd. in sets of nine (Vin v.137; A iv.408; Ps i.130; J iii.291, 404; v.149; Vbh 389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin v.138; A v. 150; Ps i.130; Vbh 391).
Āghātana
Āghātana (nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] -- 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th 1, 418, 711; death D i.31 (= maraṇa DA i.119). <-> 2. shambles, slaughter -- house Vin i.182 (gav˚); A iv.138; J vi.113. -- 3. place of execution Vin iii.151; J i.326, 439; iii.59; Miln 110; DhA iv.52; PvA 4, 5.
Āghāteti
Āghāteti [Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaŋ a. (with loc.) to incite one's heart to hatred against, to obdurate one's heart. Sdhp. 126 = S i.151 = A v.172.
Ācamati
Ācamati [ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J iii.297; Miln 152, 262 (+ dhamati). -- Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one's mouth Vin ii.142; M ii. 112; A iii.337; Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaŋ vikkhāletvā PvA 241); Miln 152 (˚ayamāna). -- (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221. -- Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J vi.8.
Ācamana
Ācamana (nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi -- karaṇa DA i.98); (b) after evacuation J iii 486. -- kumbhī water -- pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, 52; ii.142, 210, 222. -- pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190; ii.142, 222. -- sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142, 221.
Ācamā
Ācamā (f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Sn 945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj iii) has ācāma.
-- 96 --
Ācaya
Ācaya [ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252. -- S ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, 685; Vbh 319, 326, 330; Vism 449; DhA ii.25. -- gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A v.243, 276; Dhs 584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357.
Ācarati
Ācarati [ā + aarati] -- 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56; ii.118; Sn 327 (ācare dhamma -- sandosa -- vādaŋ), 401; Miln 171, 257 (pāpaŋ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S i.124, 153, 213 in same meaning. -- pp. āciṇṇa. -- 2. to step upon, pass through J v.153.
Ācarin
Ācarin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + car] treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin iv.130), 317 (id.).
Ācariya
Ācariya [fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin i.60, 61, 119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D i.103, 116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq.; M iii.115; S i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚); A i.132 (pubb˚); Sn 595; Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚); J ii.100, 411; iv.91; v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 (= ācāra -- samācāra -- sikkhāpaka PvA 252); Miln 201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism 99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA 138. <-> For contracted form of ācariya see ācera. -- kula the clan of the teacher A ii.112. -- dhana a teacher's fee S i.177; A v.347. -- pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. "teacher & teacher's teacher" (see ā1 3b) D i.94, 114, 115, 238; S iv.306, 308; DA i.286; SnA 452 (= ācariyo cɔeva ācariya -- ācariyo ca). -- bhariyā the teacher's fee J v.457; vi.178; DhA i.253. -- muṭṭhi "the teacher's fist" i. e. close -- fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D ii.100; S v.153; J ii.221, 250; Miln 144; SnA 180, 368. -- vaŋsa the line of the teachers Miln 148. -- vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA i.92. -- vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln 148; Dpvs v.30; Mhbv 96.
Ācariyaka
Ācariyaka [ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin i.249; iii.25, 41; D i.88, 119, 187; ii.112; M i.514; ii.32; S v.261; A ii.170; iv. 310. See also sācariyaka.
Ācāma
Ācāma [Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D i.166; M i.78; A i.295; J ii.289; Pug 55; VvA 99 sq.; DhA iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka).
Ācāmeti
Ācāmeti [for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M ii.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect.
Ācāra
Ācāra [ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. ( -- ˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct. -- Sn 280 (pāpa˚); J i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚); SnA 157; PvA 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -- an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ŋ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA ii.201 (˚kiriyā). Cp. sam˚. -- kusala versed in good manners Dh 376 (cp. DhA iv.111). -- gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D i.63 = It 118; M i.33; S v.187; A i.63 sq.; ii.14, 39; iii.113, 155, 262; iv.140, 172, 352; v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh 244, 246 (cp. Miln 368, 370, quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8. -- vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171.
Ācārin
Ācārin (adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who be- haves well A i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.).
Ācikkhaka
Ācikkhaka (adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA i.71.
Ācikkhati
Ācikkhati [Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D i.110; A ii 189 (atthaŋ ā to interpret); Pug 59; DhA i.14; SnA 155; PvA 121, 164 (describe). -- imper. pres. ācikkha Sn 1097 (= brūhi Nd2 119 & 455); Pv i.109; ii.81; and ācikkhāhi DhA ii.27. <-> aor. ācikkhi PvA 6, 58, 61, 83. -- ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd1 271; Nd2 465; Vism 163. -- attānaŋ ā. to disclose one's identity PvA 89, 100. -- pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA ii.27.
Ācikkhana
Ācikkhana (adj. -- nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J iii.444; PvA 121.
Ācikkhita
Ācikkhita [pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta).
Ācikkhitar
Ācikkhitar [n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA ii.107 (for pavattar).
Āciṇa
Āciṇa [pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] ac- cumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (pāpaŋ = pāpaŋ āciṇanto karonto DhA iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina.
Āciṇṇa
Āciṇṇa [ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M i.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S iv.419; A v.74 sq.; J i.81; DA i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at D i.8), 275; Vism 269; DhA i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108; PvA 54; Sdhp 90. -- kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79; ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18.
Ācita
Ācita [pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, fur- nished or endowed with J vi.250 (= nicita); Vv 411; DhsA 310. See also āciṇa.
Ācināti
Ācināti [ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S iii.89 (v. l. ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaŋ); DhsA 44. -- pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). -- Pass. ācīyati (q. v.).
Ācīyati
Ācīyati (& Āceyyati) [Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J v.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.).
Ācera
Ācera is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J iv.248; vi.563.
Ācela
Ācela in kañcanācela -- bhūsita "adorned with golden clothes" Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚.
Ājañña
Ājañña is the contracted form of ājāniya.
Ājava
Ājava see ācamā.
Ājāna
Ājāna (adj.) [ā + jāna from jñā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S iv.127; Sn 762; J i.295, 300.
Ājānana
Ājānana (nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA 225.
Ājānāti
Ājānāti [ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D i.189; Sn 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aññāti at Vism 200. -- pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti.
Ājāniya (ājānīya)
Ājāniya (ājānīya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e. well -- born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaŋ kāraṇaŋ ājānana -- sabhāvo ājañño, and DhA iv.4: yaŋ assadamma -- sārathi kāraṇaŋ kāreti tassa khippaŋ jānana<->
-- 97 --
samatthā ājāniyā. -- The contracted form of the word is ājañña] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J i.178, 194; Dpvs iv.26; DhA i.402; iii.49; iv.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. -- (b) ājānīya: M i.445; A v.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. -- (c) ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J i.181; Pv iv.154; purisājañña "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S iii.91 = Th 1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A v.325. -- anājāniya of inferior birth M i.367. -- susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M i. 445 (˚ûpamo dhamma -- pariyāyo).
Ājānīyatā
Ājānīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA 214.
Ājira
Ājira [= ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ājīva
Ājīva [ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D i.54; A iii.124 (parisuddha˚); Sn 407 (˚ŋ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaŋ hitvā sammājīvaŋ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug 51; Vbh 107, 235; Miln 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (id.); DhsA 390; Sdhp 342, 375, 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā -- ājīva & micchā -- ā˚ right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S ii.168 sq.; iii.239; v.9; A i.271; ii 53, 240, 270; iv.82; Vbh 105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika). -- pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln 336; Vism 22 sq., 44; DhA iv.111. -- vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A i.270. -- sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A i.271; DA i.235.
Ājīvaka
Ājīvaka (& ˚ika) [ājīva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non -- buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. -- (a) ājīvaka: Vin i.291; ii.284; iv.74, 91; M i.31, 483: S i.217; A iii.276, 384; J i.81, 257, 390. -- (b) ājīvika: Vin i.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. ˚aka). -- sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii 130, 165; A i.217.
Ājīvika
Ājīvika (nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (˚bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and in phrase ājīvikɔâpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M i.463 = S iii.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln 279.
Ājīvin
Ājīvin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ājīva] having one's livelihood, finding one's subsistence, living, leading a life of ( -- ˚) D iii.64; A v.190 (lūkha˚)
Āṭa
Āṭa [etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148] a kind of bird J vi.539 (= dabbimukha C.).
Āṭaviya
Āṭaviya is to be read for aṭaviyo (q. v.) at J vi.55 [= Sk. āṭavika].
Āṭhapanā
Āṭhapanā (f.) at Pug 18 & v. l. at Vbh 357 is to be read aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vbh 357).
Āṇañja
Āṇañja see ānejja.
Āṇaṇya
Āṇaṇya see ānaṇya.
Āṇatti
Āṇatti (f.) [ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā] order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62; KhA 29; PvA 260; Sdhp 59, 354.
Āṇattika
Āṇattika (adj.) [āṇatti + ka] belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction KhA 29.
Āṇā
Āṇā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā] order, command, authority Miln 253; DA i.289; KhA 179, 180, 194; PvA 217; Sdhp 347, 576. rājɔāṇā the king's command or authority J i.433; iii.351; PvA 242. āṇaŋ deti to give an order J i.398; ˚ŋ pavatteti to issue an order Miln 189, cp. āṇāpavatti J iii.504; iv.145.
Āṇāpaka
Āṇāpaka (adj. n.) [fr. āṇāpeti] 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303. -- 2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders, a town -- crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority) Miln 147.
Āṇāpana
Āṇāpana (nt.) [abstr. fr. āṇāpeti] ordering or being, ordered, command, order PvA 135.
Āṇāpeti
Āṇāpeti [ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) J iii.351; Miln 147; DhA ii.82; VvA 68 (dāsiyo), 69; PvA 4, 39, 81.
Āṇi
Āṇi (Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n -- enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse, Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. w)le/nh, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el -- bow. See Walde, Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus]. -- 1. the pin of a wheel -- axle, a linch -- pin M i.119; S ii.266, 267; A ii.32; Sn 654; J vi.253, 432; SnA 243; KhA 45, 50. -- 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M i.119; S. ii 266 (drum stick); J iv.30; vi.432, 460; Th 1, 744; Dh i.39. <-> 3. (fig.) (˚ -- ) peg -- like (or secured by a peg, of a door), small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271, cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana -- colaka); ˚dvāra Th 1, 355; C. khuddaka -- dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "the towngate's sallyport" by Neumann as "Gestöck" (fastening, enclosure) āṇi -- gaṇṭhikɔāhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DA i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood.
Ātanka
Ātanka [etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka] illness, sickness, disease M i.437; S iii.1; Sn 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd1 486). Freq. in cpd. appātanka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D i.204; iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- f. abstr. appātankatā M i.124.
Ātankin
Ātankin (adj.) [fr. ātanka] sick, ill J v.84 (= gilāna C.).
Ātata
Ātata [fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs xiv.14; VvA 37 (q. v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96.
Ātatta
Ātatta [ā + tatta1, pp. of ā -- tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha -- sarīra C.).
Ātapa
Ātapa [ā + tapa] -- 1. sun -- heat Sn 52; J i.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs i.57; VvA 54; PvA 58. -- 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv i.74; Sdhp 396. -- 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA 98 (viriyā -- tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa. -- vāraṇa "warding off the sun -- heat", i. e. a parasol, sun -- shade Dāvs i.28; v.35.
Ātapatā
Ātapatā (f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122.
Ātapati
Ātapati [ā + tap] to burn J iii.447.
Ātappa
Ātappa (nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D i.13; iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M iii.210; S ii.132, 196 sq.; A i.153; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq.; Sn 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122); J iii.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vāyāma); DA i.104.
Ātāpa
Ātāpa [ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing,
-- 98 --
mortification" Miln 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA 98 (viriya˚). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana.
Ātāpana
Ātāpana (nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M i.78; A i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (id.); Pug 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.).
Ātāpin
Ātāpin (adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś i.233; ii. 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardént, zealous, strenuous, active D iii.58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M i.22, 56, 116, 207, 349; ii.11; iii.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54, 218; v.165, 187, 213; A ii.13 sq.; iii 38, 100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); DhA i.120; SnA 157, 503. -- Freq. in the formula of Arahantship "eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. <-> Opp. anātāpin S ii.195 sq.; A ii.13; It 27 (+ anottappin).
Ātāpeti
Ātāpeti [ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, in- flict pain, torture M i.341 (+ paritāpeti); S iv.337; Miln 314, 315.
Ātitheyya
Ātitheyya (nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A i.93; iv. 63 sq. (v. l. ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred).
Ātu
Ātu [dialectical] father M i.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois).
Ātuman
Ātuman [Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual con- tracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhāvo PvA 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd1 351; acc. ātumānaŋ Sn 782 (= attānaŋ SnA 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.).
Ātura
Ātura (adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 3170] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S iii.1 (˚kāya); A i. 250; Sn 331; Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna -- kāya VvA 328); J i.197 (˚anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201; v.90, 433; vi.248; Miln 139, 168; DhA i.31 (˚rūpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J iv.293; SnA 489. -- anātura healthy, well, in good condition S iii.1; Dh 198.
Āthabbaṇa
Āthabbaṇa (nt.) [= athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn 927 (v. l. ath˚, see interpreted at Nd1 381; expld. as āthabbaṇika -- manta -- ppayoga at SnA 564).
Āthabbaṇika
Āthabbaṇika (adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder -- worker, medicine -- man Nd1 381; SnA 564.
Ādapeti
Ādapeti [Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M ii.104; S i.132.
Ādara
Ādara [Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect, reverence, honour J v.493; SnA 290; DA i.30; DhsA 61; VvA 36, 61, 101, 321; PvA 121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp 2, 21, 207, 560. -- anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S i.96; Vin iv.218; Sn 247 (= ādara -- virahita SnA 290; DA i.284; VvA 219; PvA 3, 5, 54, 67, 257.
Ādaratā
Ādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an˚ want of consideration J iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā).
Ādariya
Ādariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an˚ disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; A v.146, 148; Pug 20; Vbh 371; miln 266.
Ādava
Ādava [ā + dava2?] is gloss at VvA 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear.
Ādahati
Ādahati1 [ā + dahati1] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaŋ ā.= samādahati). Cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati.
Ādahati
Ādahati2 [ā + dahati2] to set fire to, to burn J vi.201, 203.
Ādā
Ādā [ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya).
Ādāti (Ādadāti)
Ādāti (Ādadāti) [ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin i.50; inf. ādātuŋ D iii.133 (adinnaŋ theyyasankhātaŋ ā.). <-> ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). -- See also ādiyati & ādeti.
Ādāna
Ādāna (nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M iii.133; J v.371 (& ˚esana). -- (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S ii.94; A iv.400 (daṇḍ˚); PvA 27 (phal˚); esp. freq. in adinn˚ seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. -- (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A v.233, 253 (˚paṭinissagga); Dh 89 (id.; cp. DhA ii.163); Sn 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta); Nd1 98 (˚gantha); Nd2 123, 124. -- an˚ free from attachment S i.236 (sādānesu anādāno "not laying hold mong them that grip" trsl.); A ii.10; It 109; J iv.354; Miln 342; DhA iv.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
Ādāya
Ādāya [ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. "with" (c. acc.) Sn 120, 247, 452; J v.13; Vbh 245; DhA ii.74; SnA 139; PvA 10, 13, 38, 61 etc. -- At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of "a casually taken up belief" (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
Ādāyīn
Ādāyīn (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D i.4 (dinn˚); A iii.80; v.137 (sār˚); DA i.72.
Ādāsa
Ādāsa [Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2] a mir- ror Vin ii.107; D i.7, 11 (˚pañha mirror -- questioning, cp. DA i.97: "ādāse devataŋ otaretvā pañha -- pucchanaŋ"), 80; ii.93 (dhamnaɔ -- ādāsaŋ nāma dhamma -- pariyāyaŋ desessāmi); S v.357 (id.); A v.92, 97 sq., 103; J i.504; Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); KhA 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237; DhA i.226. -- tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450, 456, 489.
Ādāsaka
Ādāsaka = ādāsa Th 2, 411.
Ādi
Ādi [Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] -- 1. (m.) starting -- point, be- ginning Sn 358 (acc. ādiŋ = kāraṇaŋ SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom. ādi); Miln 10 (ādimhi); J vi.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. -- 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (˚ -- ) beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds. -- (b) (˚ -- ) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha -- gumb -- ādayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J i.150; amba -- panasɔ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J i.278; amba -- labujɔādīnaŋ phalānaŋ anto J ii.159; asi -- satti -- dhami -- ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) J i.150; kasi -- gorakkhɔ ādīni karonte manusse J ii.128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J i.81; PvA 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaŋ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J ii.128,
-- 99 --
416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). -- In phrase ādiŋ katvā meaning "putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . . down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA i.393 (rājānaŋ ādiŋ K. from the king down); PvA 20 (vihāraŋ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiŋ K.). -- kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin iii.146; iv.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. -- kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe -- kalyāṇa pariyosāna -- kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA i.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -- pubbangama original Dpvs iv.26. -- brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D i.189; iii.284; M i.431; ii.125, 211; iii. 192; S ii.75, 223; iv.91; v.417, 438; f. ˚ikā Vin i.64, 68; A i.231 sq. -- majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa.
Ādika
Ādika (adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M i.395, 479; ii.213; S ii.224; J vi.567. Cp. ādiya3.
Ādicca
Ādicca [Vedic āditya] the sun S i.15, 47; ii.284; iii.156; v.44, 101; A i.242; v.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("ādicco vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA iv. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40. -- upaṭṭhānā sun -- worship D i.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA i.97); J ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaŋ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaŋ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -- patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ākāsa DhA iii.177). -- bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; S i.186, 192; A ii.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b; Vv 425, 7810; VvA 116.
Ādiṇṇa
Ādiṇṇa [Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati2] broken, split open S iv.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M i.306.
Ādiṇṇata
Ādiṇṇata (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps i.49.
Āditta
Āditta [ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34; Kv 209 (sabbaŋ ādittaŋ); S iii.71; iv.19, 108; A iv.320 (˚cela); Sn 591; J iv.391; Pv i.85 (= paditta jalita PvA 41); Kvu 209; DA i.264; PvA 149; Sdhp 599. -- pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S iv.168 sq.; Vin i.34; DhA i.88.
Ādina
Ādina only at D i.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina -- khattiya -- kula primordial. See note in Dial. i.148.
Ādiya
Ādiya1 (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A iii.45 (bhojanāni).
Ādiya
Ādiya2 in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at A iii.164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. ādheyya˚, C. has v. l. ādheyya˚) where Pug A 248 explns. "ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama -- vacanasmiŋ yeva ṭhapita -- mukho ti attho" (sticking to one's word?). See ādheyya.
Ādiya
Ādiya3 = ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning J vi.567 (= ādikena C.).
Ādiya
Ādiya4 ger. of ādiyati.
Ādiyati
Ādiyati1 [ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. -- pres. ādiyati A iij.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124; J iii.296: v.367. -- pot. ādiye Sn 400; imper. ādiya M iii.133 (so read for ādissa?). -- aor. ādiyi D iii.65; A iii.209, ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaŋ daṇḍaŋ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA 241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S i.132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. "put this into thy mind"). -- ger. ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā); J ii.224 (C. for ādiya T.); iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J iii.196); DhA iii.32 (id.); PvA 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaŋ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S iii.26 (v. l. an˚ for anādīya); J ii.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya S iii.26 (an˚). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati.
Ādiyati
Ādiyati2 [ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps i.49. <-> pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa.
Ādiyanatā
Ādiyanatā (f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an˚ the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA 516.
Ādisati
Ādisati [ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. -- (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaŋ or dānaŋ). <-> pres. ind. ādisati D i.213 = A i.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atītaŋ); Nd1 382 (nakkhattaŋ set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dānaŋ); pot. ādiseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhiṇaŋ); Pv iv.130 (id. = uddiseyya PvA 228), & ādise Vin i.229 = D ii.88 (dakkhiṇaŋ); imper. ādisa PvA 49. -- fut. ādissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaŋ) PvA 88 (id.). -- aor. ādisi Pv ii.28; PvA 46 (dakkhiṇaŋ); pl. ādisiŋsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuŋ Pv i.106 (id.). -- ger. ādissa Vin iii.127; Sn 1018; Pv ii.16 (dānaŋ), & ādisitvāna Th 2, 311. -- grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M i.12.
Ādiso
Ādiso (adv.) [orig. abl. of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D i.180; M iii.208.
Ādissa
Ādissa at M iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest.
Ādissa
Ādissa2 (adj.) blameworthy M i.12; MA =garāyha.
Ādīna
Ādīna at D i.115 & S v.74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa.
Ādīnava
Ādīnava [ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning "full of wretchedness", cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu iii.297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) D i.38 (vedanānaŋ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi -- pāṭihāriye M i.318; S i.9 (ettha bhīyo); ii.170 sq. (dhātūnaŋ); iii.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); iv.7, 168; A i.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); iii.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala -- ppasāde); iv.439 sq.; v.81; J i.146; iv.2; It 9 = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Sn 36, 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732; Th 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA 287); Pv iii.107 (= dosa PvA 214); iv.67 (= dosa PvA 263); Ps i.192 sq.; ii.9, 10; PvA 12, 208. -- There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla -- vipattiyā ā. at D ii.85 = iii.235 = A iii.252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh 378; six of six each at D iii.182 sq. -- In phrase kāmānaŋ ā. okāro sankileso D i.110, 148; M i.115; Nett 42; DhA 16. -- ânupassin realising the danger or evil of S ii.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. ˚ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695. -- dassāvin same as ˚ânupassin D i.245 (an˚); A v.178 (id.); D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A iii.146; v.181 sq.; Nd2 141. -- pariyesanā search for danger in ( -- ˚) S ii.171; iii.29; iv.8 sq. -- saññā consciousness of danger D i.7); iii.253, 283; A iii.79.
Ādīpanīya
Ādīpanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln 270.
Ādīpita
Ādīpita [pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S i.31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J v.366; DhA iii.32 (v. l. āditta).
Ādu
Ādu (indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J iii.
-- 100 --
499 = vi.443; v.180; vi.552. -- (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiŋ . . . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv iv.317 = DhA i.31; J v.384; vi.382; without udāhu at J v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.
Ādeti
Ādeti [a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn 121 (= gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd1 444); cp. i.43; J iii. 103, 296; v.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln 336.
Ādeyya
Ādeyya (adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, accept- able, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158; J vi.243; Miln 110; ThA 42.
Ādeva, Ādevanā
Ādeva, Ādevanā [ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaŋ pari˚ Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps i.38.
Ādesa
Ādesa [fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiŋ -- nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc. case: paccatta -- vacanassa to -- ādeso veditabbo.
Ādesanā
Ādesanā (f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind -- reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii. 200; D i.212, 213; iii.220; A i.170, 292; v.327; Ps ii. 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D iii.103.
Ādhāna
Ādhāna (nt.) [ā + dhāna] -- 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaŋ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaŋ). -- 2. receptacle M i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. <-> 3. enclosure, hedge Miln 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka). -- gāhin holding one's own place, i. e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi -- parāmāsin ādhāna -- gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89; M i.43, 96; A iii.335 (v. l. ādāna˚, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); D iii.247 (adhāna˚).
Ādhāra
Ādhāra [ā + dhāra] -- 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A iii.27; J vi.257. -- 2. "holding up", i. e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms -- bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto); M iii.95; S v.21; J v.202. -- fig. S v.20 (an˚ without a support, cittaŋ); Vism 8, 444. -- 3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case ("resting on") Sn 211.
Ādhāraka
Ādhāraka (m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] -- 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra2) (always m., except at J i.33 where ˚āni pl. nt.) J i.33; DhA iii.290 = VvA 220; DhA iii.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaŋ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaŋ). -- 2. a reading desk, pulpit J iii.235; iv.299.
Ādhāraṇatā
Ādhāraṇatā (f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.).
Ādhārita
Ādhārita [pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1] supported, held up Miln 68.
Ādhāvati
Ādhāvati [ā + dhavati1] to run towards a goal, to run after M i.265 (where id. p. S ii.26 has upadh˚); DA i. 39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about, e. g. J i.127, 134, 158; ii.68.
Ādhāvana
Ādhāvana (nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln 135.
Ādhipacca
Ādhipacca (& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya "being over -- lord"; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S v.342 (issariy˚); A i.62 (id.), 147, 212; ii.205 (id.); iii.33, 76; iv.252 sg.; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b; see also D iii. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at PvA 137); J i.57; Dāvs v.17; VvA 126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14.
Ādhuta
Ādhuta [ā + dhuta1] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 394 (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaŋ Dāvs v.49; VvA 178 expls. by saṇikaŋ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned).
Ādheyya
Ādheyya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2] to be deposited (in one's head & heart Pug A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya2]; nt. depository (= ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug A 217) Pug 34 (˚ŋ gacchati is deposited); Miln 359 (sabbe tassɔ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property). -- mukha see ādiya2.
Ānaka
Ānaka [Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S ii.266; J ii. 344; Dpvs xvi.14.
Ānañca
Ānañca see ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚.
Ānañja
Ānañja see ānejja.
Ānaṇya
Ānaṇya (nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an -- aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D i.73; A iii.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA i.3.
Ānadati
Ānadati [ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J iv.233.
Ānana
Ānana (nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. ( -- ˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚).
Ānantarika
Ānantarika (& ˚ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pug 13; Dhs 1291. -- kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay" (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; J i.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna).
Ānanda
Ānanda [Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D i.3; Sn 679, 687; J i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum); DA i 53 (= pītiyā etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Ānandati
Ānandati [ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J vi. 589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi -- cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya.
Ānandin
Ānandin (adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th 1, 555; J iv.226.
Ānandiya
Ānandiya (adj. -- .) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J vi.589 (˚ŋ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.).
Ānandī
Ānandī (f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi -- citta J vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati).
Ānaya
Ānaya (adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S i.124 = J i.80.
Ānayati
Ānayati see āneti.
Ānāpāna
Ānāpāna (nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S v.132,
-- 101 --
311 sq.; J i.58; Ps i.162 (˚kathā); usually in cpd. ˚sati concentration by in -- breathing & out -- breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M i.425 (cp. D ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70; A i.30; It 80; Ps i.166, 172, 185 (˚samādhi); Nd2 466 B (id.); Miln 332; Vism 111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati.
Ānāpeti
Ānāpeti see āneti.
Ānāmeti
Ānāmeti [ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to).
Ānisaŋsa
Ānisaŋsa [ā + ni + saŋsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaŋsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage, good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). <-> There are five ānisaŋsā sīlavato sīla -- sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at D ii.86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self -- confidence, asammūlho kālaŋ karoti an untroubled death, saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajjati a happy state after death. -- D i.110, 143; iii.132 (four), 236 (five); M i.204; S i.46, 52; iii.8, 93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita -- satissa), 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto -- vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākāsɔānañcāyatane); v.i, 106 (mahā˚), 311; It 28, 29, 40 (sikkhā˚); Sn 256 (phala˚), 784, 952; J i.9, 94; v.491 (v. l. anu˚); Nd1 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln 198; VvA 6, 113; PvA 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 (= phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263. -- Eleven ānisaŋsas of mettā (cp. Ps ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311<-> 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq.
Ānisada
Ānisada (nt.) [a + sad] "sit down", bottom, behind M i. 80 = 245; J iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = KhA 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maŋsa).
Ānuttariya
Ānuttariya (nt.) [see also anuttariya which as -- ˚ probably represents ānutt˚] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D iii.102 sq.; A v.37.
Ānīta
Ānīta [pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J i.291; iii.127; iv.1.
Ānupuṭṭha
Ānupuṭṭha metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.).
Ānupubba
Ānupubba (nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th 1, 727 (cp. M Vastu ii.224 ānupubbā).
Ānupubbatā
Ānupubbatā (f.) (or ˚ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padânu -- pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd1 140; Nd2 137 (v. l. ˚ka).
Ānupubbikathā
Ānupubbikathā [for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi˚] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D i.110; ii.41 sq.; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228; DA i.277, 308; DhA iv.199.
Ānubhāva
Ānubhāva [the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491; DhA ii.58.
Ānejja
Ānejja and Ānañja [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P. form ān -- eñja is a direct (later, and probably re -- instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re -- sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii. 109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś i.199. -- The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja -- ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. -- The various spellings of the word are as follows: -- 1. ānejja D i.76 (v. l. ānañja -- p.) A ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, ānañja) = Vbh 137 (āneñja); Nd2 569a (v. l. ānañja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneñja); Pug 60 (p.); DA i.219 (v. l. BB āneñja). -- 2. ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v. l. ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Bdhgh. ānejja˚ p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānañca); DhA iv.46. See also below cpd. ˚kāraṇa. -- A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M ii.229 (v. l. aṇañja, aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254. -- 3. āneñja S ii.82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps ii.206; Vbh 135, 340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. <-> See also iñjati. -- kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J i.415; ii.325 (v. l. āṇañja, āneñca, ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310.
Āneñjatā
Āneñjatā (f.) [fr. āneñja] steadfastness Vism 330, 386.
Āneti
Āneti [ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, pro- cure, convey, bring back Sn 110; PvA 54, 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha M i.371. fut. ānayissati S i.124; Pv ii.65; J iii.173; v.154 (v. l.), & ānessati J v.154. inf. ānayituŋ Pv ii 610, ger. ānetvā PvA 42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA 3, & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiŋ). -- pp. ānīta (q. v.). -- Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati D ii.245 (āniyyataŋ imper. shall be brought); M i. 371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). -- Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J iii.391; v.225.
Āpa & Āpo
Āpa & Āpo (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. -- Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *) lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below ˚dhātu. <-> D ii.259; M i.327; S ii.103; iii.54, 207; A iv.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (˚ŋ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J iv.8 (paṭhavi -- āpa -- teja˚); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100. -- kasiṇa the water -- device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D iii.268; J i.313; Dhs 203; Vism 170; DhA i 312; iii.214. -- dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D iii.228, 247; M i.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. -- rasa the taste of water A i.32; SnA 6. -- sama resembling water M i.423.
Āpakā
Āpakā (f.) [= āpagā] river J v.452; vi.518.
Āpagā
Āpagā (f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th 1, 309; Sn 319; J v.454; Dāvs i.32; VvA 41.
Āpajjati
Āpajjati [Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saŋvaraŋ); D i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiŋ); It 113 (vuddhiŋ); J i.73; Pug 20, 33 (diṭṭhɔânugatiŋ); PvA 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA ii.71 -- pot. āpajjeyya D i.119 (musāvādaŋ). -- aor. āpajji J v.349; PvA 124 (sankocaŋ) &
-- 102 --
āpādi S i.37; A ii.34; It 85; J ii.293; 3rd pl. āpādu D ii.273. -- ger. āpajjitva PvA 22 (saŋvegaŋ), 151. <-> pp. āpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). -- Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naŋ It 86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8) has āsajjanaŋ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaŋ. Cp. pariyāpajjati.
Āpaṇa
Āpaṇa [Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin i.140; J i.55; v.445; Pv ii.322; Miln 2, 341; SnA 440; DhA i. 317; ii.89; VvA 157; PvA 88, 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215.
Āpaṇika
Āpaṇika [fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J i.124; Miln 344; VvA 157; DhA ii.89.
Āpatacchika
Āpatacchika at J vi.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārâpat˚ (q. v.).
Āpatati
Āpatati [ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J v.349 (= upadhāvati C.); vi.451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln 371.
Āpatti
Āpatti (f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti), 322 (˚ŋ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ŋ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti); iv.344; D iii.212 (˚kusalatā); A i.84 (id.), 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). <-> anāpatti Vin iii.35. ˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti).
Āpattika
Āpattika (adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M i.443; Vin iv.224. an˚ Vin i.127.
Āpatha
Āpatha in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚, dvedhā˚.
Āpathaka
Āpathaka in ˚jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka˚ at Nd1 226, and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26.
Āpadā
Āpadā (f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 3133] accident, misfortune, distress, D iii.190; A ii.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Th 1, 371; J iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); v.340 (loc. āpade), 368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl. āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā.
Āpanna
Āpanna [pp. of āpajjati] -- 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiŋ ā.); iii.90; D i.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd2 32 (taṇhāya). -- 2. unfortunate, miserable J i.19 (v.124). Cp. pari˚.
*Āpā
*Āpā (& *Āvā) (f.) [for āpadā, q. v.] misery, misfortune J ii.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); iii.12 (BB āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v. l. apagata, C. apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu), 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v. l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu.
Āpāṇa
Āpāṇa [ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. ˚koṭi the end of life Miln 397; Dāvs iii.93; adj. -- koṭika M ii.120; Vism 10.
Āpātha
Āpātha [etym.? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: "I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so"] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance A ii.67; J i.336; Vbh 321; Miln 298; Vism 21, 548; DA i.228; DhsA 308, 333; VvA 232 (˚kāla); DhA iv.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaŋ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M i.190; S iv.160, or ˚ŋ āgacchati Vin i.184; A iii.377 sq.; iv.404; Vism 125. Cp. ˚gata below. -- gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M i.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an˚ unapproached); PvA 23 (āpāthaŋ gata). -- gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617.
Āpāthaka
Āpāthaka (adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible D iii.44, 47. Cp. āpathaka.
Āpādaka
Āpādaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + pad] -- 1. (adj.) producing, leading to ( -- ˚) VvA 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha -- jjhāna). -- 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A i.62 = 132 = It 110 (+ posaka). -- f. āpādikā a nurse, foster -- mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā).
Āpādā
Āpādā (f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an˚ not nursing, unmarried J iv.178.
Āpādi
Āpādi aor. of āpajjati (q. v.).
Āpādeti
Āpādeti [Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M i.78; iii.248; S iv.110 (addhānaŋ to live one's life, cp. addhānaŋ āpādi J ii.293 = jīvitɔaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C.); SnA 466. -- Cp. pari˚
Āpāna
Āpāna (nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting -- hall, drinking -- hall J i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); DhA i.213 (id., rañño).
Āpānaka
Āpānaka (adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D i.167.
Āpānīya
Āpānīya (adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaŋsa drinking -- bowl, goblet M i. 316; S ii.110.
Āpāyika
Āpāyika (adj. -- n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = It 85 (v. l. ap˚); Vin ii.205; D i.103; A i.265; It 42; Vism 16; PvA 60.
Āpiyati
Āpiyati [fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364.
Āpucchati
Āpucchati [ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J i.140; PvA 110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA i.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā +); Miln 29; PvA 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th 2, 426; āpuccha Th 2, 416, & āpucchā [= āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an˚ without asking Vin ii.211, 219; iv.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA i.81. -- pp. āpucchita Vin iv.272.
Āpūrati
Āpūrati [a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); iv.26, 99, 100.
Āpeti
Āpeti [Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J vi.46. Cp. vy˚.
Āphusati
Āphusati [ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi VvA 84).
Ābaddha
Ābaddha [pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA i. 127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA i.88; PvA 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya).
Ābandhaka
Ābandhaka (adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (loc.) PvA 169 (sīse).
Ābandhati
Ābandhati (ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J iv.132, 289; v.319, 338, 359. -- pp. ābaddha.
Ābandhana
Ābandhana (nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] -- 1. tie, bond DA i. 181 = Pug A 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti -- parivaṭṭo). <-> 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). <-> 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J v.319 (but cp. C. expln. "hatthi -- assa -- rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni", thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough.
-- 103 --
Ābādha
Ābādha [ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; D i.72; ii.13; A i.121; iii.94, 143; iv.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism 41 (udara -- vāta˚) 95; VvA 351 (an˚ safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp 85. -- A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu -- pariṇāmajā, visama -- parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304i.c., recurring with slight variations at S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). <-> Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351. -- Five ābādhas at Vin i. 71, viz. kuṭṭhaŋ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. -- Three ābādhas at D iii.75, viz. icchā anasanaŋ jarā, cp. Sn 311. -- See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa.
Ābādhika
Ābādhika (adj. -- n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A iii.189, 238; Nd1 160; Miln 302; DA 212; DhA i.31; PvA 271. -- f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A ii.144.
Ābādhita
Ābādhita [pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th 1, 185.
Ābādheti
Ābādheti [ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S iv.329.
Ābila
Ābila (adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J v.90.
Ābhata
Ābhata [pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D i.142; S. i.65; A ii.71, 83; It 12, 14 with phrase yathābhataŋ as he has been reared (cp. J v.330 evaŋ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ = rattiyaŋ ā. PvA 199); DhA ii.57, 81; iv.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathābhata.
Ābhataka
Ābhataka (adj.) = ābhata; DA i.205 (v. l. ābhata).
Ābharaṇa
Ābharaṇa (nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D i. 104; Vv 802; J iii.11, 31; DhA iii.83; VvA 187.
Ābharati
Ābharati [ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J iv.351.
Ābhassara
Ābhassara (adj. -- n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens "the radiant gods", usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D i.17; Dh 200; It 15; DhA iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq.
Ābhā
Ābhā (f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D ii.12; M iii.147 (adj. -- ˚); S ii.150 (˚dhātu); A ii.130, 139; iii.34; Mhvs xi.11; VvA 234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA iv.191; Sdhp 286.
Ābhāti
Ābhāti [ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh 387 (= virocati DhA iv.144); J v.204. See also ābheti.
Ābhāveti
Ābhāveti [ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (met- tacittaŋ; gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā PvA 168).
Ābhāsa
Ābhāsa [Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appear- ance M iii.215.
Ābhicetasika
Ābhicetasika (adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.
Ābhidosika
Ābhidosika (adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); M i.170 (˚kālakata died last night); Miln 291.
Ābhidhammika
Ābhidhammika (adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Miln 17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKhA 151; J iv.219.
Ābhindati
Ābhindati [ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S iv.160 (v. l. a˚).
Ābhisekika
Ābhisekika (adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the conse- cration (of a king) Vin v.129.
Ābhujati
Ābhujati [ā + bhujati, bhuj1] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallankaŋ ā˚ "to bend in the round lap" or "bend in hookwise", to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin i.24; D i.71; M i.56 (v. l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; A iii. 320; Pug 68; Ps i.176; J i.71, 213; Miln 289; DA i. 58, 210. In other connection J i.18 (v.101; of the ocean "to recede"); Miln 253 (kāyaŋ).
Ābhujana
Ābhujana (nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallankɔābhujana sitting cross -- legged J i 17 (v.91); PvA 219.
Ābhujī
Ābhujī (f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic meta- phor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J v.195 (= bhūjapatta -- vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.).
Ābhūñjati
Ābhūñjati [ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J iv.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. "hold in its hood"?); DhsA 333.
Ābhuñjana
Ābhuñjana (nt.) [fr. ābhuñjati] partaking of, enjoying, ex- periencing DhsA 333.
Ābheti
Ābheti [*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī); Vv 82 (˚antī, v. l. ˚entī; = obhāsentī VvA 50).
Ābhoga
Ābhoga [fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara "pasturing", fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D i.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DA i.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh 320; Miln 97; Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68.
Āma
Āma1 (indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu˚ "that" (see asu), thus deictic -- emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś i.36] affirmative part. "yes, indeed, certainly" D i.192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J i.115, 226 (in C. expln. of T. amā -- jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448; Miln 11, 19, 253; DhA i.10, 34; ii.39, 44; VvA 69; PvA 12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc.
Āma
Āma2 (adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w)mo/s, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: ˚gandha "smell of raw flesh", verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu iii.214) D ii.242 sq.; A i.280; Sn 241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.).
Āmaka
Āmaka (adj.) [= āma2] raw, uncooked D i.5 = Pug 58 (˚maŋsa raw flesh); M i.80 (titta -- kalābu āmaka -- cchinno). -- dhañña "raw" grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D i.5 = Pug 58 (see DA i.78 for definition); Vin iv.264; v.135. -- sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -- susāna "cemetery of raw flesh" charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i. e. fetid smelling cremation ground J i.264, 489; iv.45 sq.; vi.10; DhA i.176; VvA 76; PvA 196.
Āmaṭṭha
Āmaṭṭha [Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J i.98 (an˚); DA i.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333.
-- 104 --
Āmaṇḍaliya
Āmaṇḍaliya [ā + maṇḍala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ŋ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M i 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇḍalikaroti).
Āmata
Āmata in anāmata at J ii.56 is métric for amata.
Āmattikā
Āmattikā (f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler's shop Vin iv.243.
Āmaddana
Āmaddana (nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA 311.
Āmanta
Āmanta (adj. -- adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an˚ without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra); A iii.259 (id.).
Āmantana
Āmantana (nt.) & ˚nā (f., also ˚ṇā) [from āmanteti] ad- dressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn 40 (ep. Nd2 128); ˚vacana the address -- form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaŋ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167.
Āmantanaka
Āmantanaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa -- sallāpa -- yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA 96).
Āmantaṇīya
Āmantaṇīya (adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J iv.371.
Āmantita
Āmantita [pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 (= nimantita PvA 86).
Āmanteti
Āmanteti [denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J vi.265; DA i.297; SnA 487 (= ālapati & avhayati); PvA 75, 80, 127. -- aor. āmantesi D ii.16; Sn p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn 997; Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). -- ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J iii.209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511. <-> pp. āmantita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D i.134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln 149.
Āmaya
Āmaya [etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚ (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74); 177; 368; J iii.260, 528; iv. 427; vi.23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp 397.
Āmalaka
Āmalaka [cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, 278; ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 125 (˚matti); J iv.363; v.380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln 11; DhA i.319; VvA 7.
Āmalakī
Āmalakī (f.) āmalaka Vin i.30; M i.456 (˚vana).
Āmasati
Āmasati [ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221; iii.48 (kumbhiŋ); J iii.319 (id.); A v.263, 266; J iv.67; Ps ii.209; Miln 306; SnA 400; DhsA 302; VvA 17. -- aor. āmasi J ii.360; ger. āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaŋ) J ii.330; grd. āmassa J ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba id. (C.). -- pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.).
Āmasana
Āmasana (nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214. Cp. iii.118; Miln 127, 306; DA i.78.
Āmasita
Āmasita [pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land).
Āmāya
Āmāya (adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚] "born in the house" (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenh/s > indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J vi.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiŋ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā).
Āmāsaya
Āmāsaya [āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya.
Āmilāka
Āmilāka (nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA i.87.
Āmisa
Āmisa (nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. -- Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] <-> 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared, uncultivated"; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i. 206. -- 2. "fleshy, of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M i.12 (˚dāyāda); It 101 (id.); A i.91 = It 98 (˚dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350). -- 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; J ii.6; Miln 413 (lok˚); DA i.83 (˚sannidhi), -- 4. bait S i.67; iv.158; J iv.57, 219; vi.416; DA i.270. -- 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase ˚kiñcikkha -- hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S ii.234; A i.128; v.265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaŋ patthento PvA 107); Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). -- 6. enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise -- laggacitto PvA 107). -- 7. greed, desire, lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (˚garū parisā); J v.91 (˚cakkhu); Ps ii.238 (mār˚). See also cpds. with nir˚ and sa˚.
Āmuñcati
Āmuñcati [ā + mtic] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA 305. -- pp. āmutta (q. v.).
Āmutta
Āmutta [Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always ˚ -- ) D i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi -- kuṇḍala); S i.211; J iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala);J iv.183; VvA 182.
Āmeṇḍita
Āmeṇḍita (or Āmeḍita) [Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical] -- (nt.) sympathy in ˚ŋ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA i.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA āmeḍita).
Āmo
Āmo = āma D i.192, 3.
Āmoda
Āmoda [Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51.
Āmodanā
Āmodanā (f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs 86, 285.
Āmodamāna
Āmodamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S i.100 (v. l. anu˚) = It 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna VvA 278); J v.45.
Āmodita
Āmodita [pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased); Miln 346.
Āmodeti
Āmodeti [Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th 1, 649 (cittaŋ); J v.34. -- pp. āmodita (q. v.).
Āya
Āya [Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M iii.93. - 2. tax J v.113. -- 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A iv.282 = 323; Sn 978; J i.228; KhA 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA 130. <-> 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice ("the incomer") J vi.281. -- kammika a treasurer DhA i.184. -- kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. -- kosalla proficiency in money making D iii.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh 325. -- pariccāga expediture of one's income PvA 8. -- mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D i.74 (= āgamana -- magga DA
-- 105 --
1.78); M ii.15; A ii.166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173.
Āyata
Āyata [Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] -- 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata); J i.77, 273 (tettiŋsɔ -- angulɔāyato khaggo); iii.438; Vv 8415 (˚aŋsa; cp. expln. at VvA 339); SnA 447; DhsA 48; PvA 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257. -- 2. (n.) a bow J iii.438. -- agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It 15, 52. -- paṇhin having long eye -- lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.17 = iii.143. -- pamha a long eye -- lash Th 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA 250).
Āyataka
Āyataka (adj.) [= āyata] -- 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara); A iii.251 (id.); J i.362. -- 2. sudden, abrupt, instr. ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237.
Āyatana
Āyatana (nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S iv.70. -- For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA i. 124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saŋsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni" and at Vism 527 "āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā."] -- 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as "samosaraṇa") D iii.241, 279 (vimutti˚); S ii.41, 269; iv.217; v.119 sq., 318. sq.; A iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚, q. v.) Sn 406 (rajass˚ "haunt of passion" = rāgādi -- rajassa uppatti -- deso SnA 381); J i.80 (raj˚). Freq. in phrase araññ˚ a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54. -- 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as paññatti), usually -- ˚, viz. kamm˚ Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasiṇ˚ A v.46 sq., 60; Ps i.28; titth˚ A i.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp˚ (art, craft) D i.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an˚ non -- exertion, indolence, sluggishness J v.121. -- 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense -- organ & object; relation, order. -- Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense -- organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects". -- These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt˚: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh˚: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. -- For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. -- Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of āyatana at DA i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2 under rūpa for further classifications. -- For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D ii.302 sq.; iii.102, 243; A iii.400; v.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps i.7, 22, 101, 137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S i.113, ii.3; iv.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D ii.112, 156; of 2 at D ii.69. -- Here also belongs ākāsɔ ānañcɔ āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D i.34 sq., 183; A iv.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq. -- Unclassified passages: M i.61; ii.233; iii.32, 216, 273; S i.196; ii.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; iii.228; iv.98; v.426; A i.113, 163, 225; iii.17, 27, 82, 426; iv.146, 426; v.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1 109, 133, 171, 340; J i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚); Vbh 412 sq. (id.). -- uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185. -- kusala skilled in the ā. M iii.63. -- kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D iii.212; Dhs 1335. -- ṭṭha founded in the sense -- organs Ps i.132; ii.121.
Āyatanika
Āyatanika (adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S iv.126 (phass˚ niraya & sagga).
Āyati
Āyati (f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiŋ (adv.) in future Vin ii.89, 185; iii.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiŋ, v. l. āyati); J i.89; v.431; DA i 236.
Āyatika
Āyatika (adj.) [fr. last] future S i.142.
Āyatikā
Āyatikā (f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123.
Āyatta
Āyatta [Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. -- 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana C.). <-> 2. striven after, pursued J i.341. -- 3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa -- passāsa˚); Nett 194; Sdhp 477, 605.
Āyanā
Āyanā (f.) [?] at DhsA 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian's construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in ˚āyanā, e. g. kankhā > kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus. -- formation kankhāyati > kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna.
Āyamati
Āyamati [ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaŋ āyamissāmi "my back feels weak, I will stretch it" Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; J i.491. <-> Besides this in commentaries e. g. J iii.489 (mukhaŋ āyamituŋ).
Āyasa
Āyasa (adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S ii. 182; A iii.58; Dh 345; J iv.416; v.81; Vv 845 (an˚? cp. the rather strange expln. at VvA 335).
Āyasakya
Āyasakya (nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A iv.96; J v.17; VvA 110; usually in phrase ˚ŋ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Th 1, 292; J ii.33 = 271; iii.514. [Bdhgh. on A iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya].
Āyasmant
Āyasmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing as- similation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera ). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula "piya -- vacanaŋ garu˚, sagārava -- sappaṭissâdhivacanaŋ", e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). -- Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. -- See also āvuso.
Āyāga
Āyāga [ā + yāga of yaj] sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Sn 486 (= deyyadhammānaŋ adhiṭṭhāna -- bhūta SnA 412); Th 1, 566; J vi. 205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees).
Āyācaka
Āyācaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + yāc] one who begs or prays, petitioner Miln 129.
Āyācati
Āyācati [ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.] -- 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; D i.240; PvA 160. -- 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A i. 88; J i.169 = v.472; i.260; ii.117. -- pp. āyācita (q. v.).
Āyācana
Āyācana (nt.) [fr. āyācati] -- 1. asking, adhortation, ad- dressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. -- 2. a vow, prayer A i.88; iii.47; J i.169 = v.472.
-- 106 --
Āyācita
Āyācita [pp. of āyācati] vowed, promised J i.169 (˚bhatta- jātaka N.).
Āyāta
Āyāta [pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210] gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.
Āyāti
Āyāti [ā + yāti of yā] to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into S i.240; Sn 669; Sn p. 116 (= gacchati SnA 463); J iv.410; pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati PvA 158); DhA i.93 (imper. āyāma let us go). -- pp. āyāta.
Āyāna
Āyāna (nt.) [fr. ā + yā to go] coming, arrival: see āyanā.
Āyāma
Āyāma [fr. ā + yam, see āyamati] -- 1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = J iii.488 (mukh˚). <-> 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato & instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. ( -- ˚): J i.7, 49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389; Miln 17 (ratanaŋ soḷasahatthaŋ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaŋ vitthārena), 282 (ratanaŋ catuhatthɔāyāmaŋ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚); Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); VvA 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚); PvA 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (id. + ubbedha); DhA i.17 (saṭṭhi -- yojan˚).
Āyāsa
Āyāsa [cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?] trouble, sorrow, only neg. an˚ (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble A iv.98; Th 1, 1008.
Āyu
Āyu (nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai)w/n "aeon", ai)e/n always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D iii.68, 69, 73, 77; S iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294; A i.155; ii.63, 66 (addh˚); iii.47; iv.76, 139; Sn 694, 1019; It 89; J i.197 (dīgh˚); Vv 555 (cp. VvA 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man's āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234, 239, 258. -- Long or divine life, dibbaŋ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin i.294; D iii.146; S iv.275 sq.; A i.115; iii. 33; iv.242, 396; Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaŋ PvA 136). -- ūhā see āyūhā. -- kappa duration of life Miln 141; DhA i.250. -- khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita -- kkhaya) D i.17 (cp. DA i.110); iii.29. -- pamāṇa span or measure of life time D ii.3; A i.213, 267; ii.126 sq.; iv.138, 252 sq., 261; v.172; Pug 16; Vbh 422 sq.; SnA 476. -- pariyanta end of life It 99; Vism 422. -- sankhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs v.102. -- sankhāra (usually pl. ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D ii.106; M i.295 sq.; S ii.266; A iv.311 sq.; Ud 64; J iv.215; Miln 285; Vism 292; DhA i.129; PvA 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ -- saŋskāra Divy 203.
Āyuka
Āyuka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āyu] -- being of life; having a life or age A iv.396 (niyat˚); VvA 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A iv.240; PvA 27; appāyuka A iv.247; PvA 103; both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D ii.5 -- 12 (see Table at Dial. ii.6); DhA ii.9; PvA 135; dasa -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA 73; cattāḷīsa˚ DhA i.103; catusaṭṭhi -- kappɔāyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422.
Āyukin
Āyukin (adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416.
Āyuta
Āyuta (adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] -- 1. con- nected with, endowed, furnished with Th 1, 753 (dve pannarasɔāyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn 301 (nārī -- varagaṇ˚ = ˚saŋyutta SnA 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- saragaṇ˚ = ˚yutta PvA 157). -- 2. seized, conquered, in dur˚ hard to conquer, invincible J vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.).
Āyutta
Āyutta [Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] -- 1. yoked, to con- nected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejasɔāyuta T., but PvA 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); PvA 157 (= ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124). -- 2. intent upon, devoted to S i.67.
Āyuttaka
Āyuttaka (adj. -- n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492; DhA i.101, 103, 180.
Āyudha
Āyudha is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D i.9 (v. l. āvudha).
Āyuvant
Āyuvant (adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234.
Āyusmant
Āyusmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).
Āyussa
Āyussa (adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A iii.145 dhamma).
Āyūhaka
Āyūhaka (adj.) [fr. āyūhati] keen, eager, active Miln 207 (+ viriyavā).
Āyūhati
Āyūhati [ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern's etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris' expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq., although contradictory in part.] lit. to push on or forward, aim at, go for, i. e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself S i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaŋ unstriving), 48; J vi.35 (= viriyaŋ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.). -- (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Sn 210 (= karoti SnA 258); Miln 108 (kammaŋ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaŋ āyūhi), 326 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āyūhita (q. v.).
Āyūhana
Āyūhana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. āyūhati] -- 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā). -- 2. furtherance, pursuit DA i.64 (bhavassa).
Āyūhā
Āyūhā f. [āyu + ūhā] life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life PvA 136, 162; VvA 319.
Āyūhāpeti
Āyūhāpeti [Caus. II. fr. āyūhati] to cause somebody to toil or strive after DhsA 364.
Āyūhita
Āyūhita [*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh] busy, eager, active Miln 181.
Āyoga
Āyoga [Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] -- 1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135; Vv 3341; VvA 142 (˚paṭṭa). -- 2. yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162. -- 3. ornament, decoration Nd1 226; J iii.447 (˚vatta, for v. l. ˚vanta?). -- 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D i.187; Dh 185 (= payoga -- karaṇa DhA iii.238). -- 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. -- Cp. sam˚.
Ārakatta
Ārakatta (nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaŋ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A iv.145; DhA iv.228; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349.
Ārakā
Ārakā (adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā2] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = A iv.202 (sanghamhā); D i.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M i.280 (adj.) S ii.99; iv.43 sq.; A i.281; It 91; J i.272; iii.525; v.451; Miln 243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + viratā).
Ārakkha
Ārakkha [ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D ii.59; iii.289; S iv.97, 175, 195; A ii.120; iii.38; iv. 266, 270, 281 (˚sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; v.29 sq.; J i.203; ii.326; iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (˚parivāra); Pug 21 (an˚), 24; Miln 154; Vism 19
-- 107 --
(˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (˚devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA ii.146; PvA 195; Sdhp 357, 365.
Ārakkhlka
Ārakkhlka [fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J iv.29.
Ārakkheyya
Ārakkheyya see arakkheyya.
Āragga
Āragga (nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A i.65; Sn 625, 631; Dh 401, 407; Vism 306; DhA ii 51; iv.181.
Āracayāracayā
Āracayāracayā [ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning "to produce", but here as a sound -- root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj). -- SnA 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaŋ bhūmiyaŋ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaŋ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaŋ koṭiŋ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho. -- Cp. ārañjita.
Āraññaka
Āraññaka (adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q. v.). -- Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M i.214; A iii.100 sq., 219; iv.21; v.66; J iii.174 (v. l. BB. a˚); Miln 342; DhA ii.94 (vihāra).
Āraññakatta
Āraññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also arañña- katta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M i.214; iii.40; A i.38.
Āraññika
Āraññika (adj.) = āraññaka Vin iii.15; A i.24; Pug 69; Vism 61, 71 (where defined); Miln 341.
Ārañjita
Ārañjita [in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā˚) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also "beaten") M i.178 (hatthipadaŋ dantehi ārañjitaŋ an elephant -- track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows).
Ārata
Ārata [Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J iv.372 (= virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata).
Ārati
Ārati (f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati VvA 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd2 462; Dhs 299.
Āratta
Āratta (nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J iv.444; Dāvs ii.74.
Āraddha
Āraddha (adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A i.148 (āraddhaŋ me viriyaŋ It 30; PvA 73 (ṭhapetuŋ began to place), 212 (gantuŋ). Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D i.176; M i.414; S ii.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. -- viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; D iii.252, 268, 282, 285; A i.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hīna -- viriya); Nd2 131; Ps i.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. ˚viriyatā M i.19.
Ārabbha
Ārabbha (indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] -- 1. beginning, undertaking etc., in cpd. ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D iii.256 = A iv.334 (eight such occasions enumd). -- 2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference to, about D i.180; A ii.27 = It 103 (senāsanaŋ ā.); Sn 972 (upekhaŋ; v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.); DhA i.3; ii.37; PvA 3 (seṭṭhiputta -- petaŋ ā.), 16, and passim.
Ārabhati
Ārabhati1 [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M i.371 (pāṇaŋ).
Ārabhati & Ārabbhati
Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S i.156 (ārabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaŋ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A iv.334. <-> aor. ārabhi DhA ii.38 & ārabbhi PvA 35. -- ger. ārabbha, see sep. -- pp. āraddha (q. v.).
Ārambha
Ārambha [Sk. ārambha in meaning "beginning", fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] -- 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu); iii.338 (id.), 166 (˚ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net 41; DhsA 145. -- viriyārambha (cp. āraddha -- viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197; S iv.175; A i.12, 16. -- 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an˚ unsupported, independent Sn 743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha.
Ārammaṇa
Ārammaṇa (nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv i.41 (yaŋ kiñcɔ ārammaṇaŋ katvā); ārammaṇaŋ labhati (+ otāraŋ labhati) to get the chance S ii.268; iv.185. -- (2) condition, ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Sn 474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA i.288 (sappāy˚); PvA 279. -- (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i. e. sense -- object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation" it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda -- & sukhuma -- rūpa, paññatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli. & 209. -- A 1. sq.; iv.385; Sn 506; Ps i.57 sq., 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127; VvA 11, 38. -- rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D iii.228; S iii.53; A i.82; J i.304; ii.439, 442; PvA 265. <-> ārammaṇaŋ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv i.41, above 1). -- ārammaṇa -- kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S iii.266; ā˚ -- paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. -- (4) ( -- ˚) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚); VvA 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha).
Āraha
Āraha (adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J vi.164.
-- 108 --
Ārā
Ārā1 (f.) [Sk. ārâ; *ēl "pointed", as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.).
Ārā
Ārā2 (indecl.) [Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa1 and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Sn 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh 253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA iii.377 expls. by dūragata); J ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); v.78 (saŋyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā. -- cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A iv.389. -- cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D i.4; M i.179; iii.33; A iii. 216, 348; iv.249; v.138, 205; DA i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra -- cārin).
Ārādhaka
Ārādhaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails); M i.491; ii.197 = A i.69 = Miln 243; S v.19; A v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). -- 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (˚ikā f.).
Ārādhana
Ārādhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D ii.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M i.479; ii.199; A v.211 sq.; J iv.427.
Ārādhanīya
Ārādhanīya (adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚); J ii.233 (dur˚).
Ārādhita
Ārādhita [pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510.
Ārādheti
Ārādheti [Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy as well as Av. Ś] -- 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana -- vāsena mānasaŋ); DhA ii.71; Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaŋ); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaŋ ārādheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D i.118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha -- citta to ārabhati); M i85, 341; S ii.107; v.109; J ii.372; Miln 25. -- 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S v.23 (maggaŋ), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v. l. ārām˚); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- pp. ārādhita (q. v.). -- See also parābhetvā.
Ārāma
Ārāma [Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] -- 1. pleasure, fondness of ( -- ˚), delight, always as adj. ( -- ˚) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S i.235; iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚); A i.35, 37, 130; ii.28 (bhāvan˚); It 82 (dhamm˚); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme ārāmo assā ti"); Pug 53 (samagg˚); Vbh 351. -- 2. a pleasure -- ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA iii.246 as Veḷuvana -- Jīvakɔ ambavanɔ ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango -- groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; D i. 106; Dh 188; Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv ii.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārāmɔ ûpavanāni PvA 102). -- (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see J i.92 -- 94) D i.178; Vin iv.69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (D i.178), etc. -- Vin i.39, 140, 283, 291; ii.170; iii.6, 45, 162; iv.85; A ii.176; Dpvs v.18. -- pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii. 109; VvA 288. -- ropa, -- ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S i.33; PvA 151. -- vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140; ii. 170; iii.50, 90.
Ārāmakinī
Ārāmakinī (f.) see ārāmika.
Ārāmatā
Ārāmatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A ii.28; iii.116; Vbh 381; Miln 233.
Ārāmika
Ārāmika (adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order). -- 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207 sq.; ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204; A ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (id.), 275 (˚pesaka); J i.38 (˚kicca) Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa). -- f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208.
Ārāva
Ārāva [cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46.
Āraha
Āraha (nt.) only in pl. gihīnaŋ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D iii.163.
Āriya
Āriya in anāriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.).
Āruṇṇa
Āruṇṇa (nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lam- enting Miln 357.
Āruppa
Āruppa (adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā (= a2) -- *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D iii.275; M i.410, cp. 472; iii.163; S i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123; A iv.316; It 61; Sn 754; J i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA i.224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism iii, 326 sq.
Āruhati
Āruhati [ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor. āruhaŋ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Sn 321 & āruyha J vi.452; Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. <-> Caus. āropeti (q. v.).
Ārūgya
Ārūgya see ārogya.
Ārūḷha
Ārūḷha [pp. of āruhati] -- 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137; J vi.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma -- paṭipadaŋ an˚); VvA 64 (magga˚); PvA 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚). -- 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA 2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26). -- 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J vi.153, 488.
Ārūha
Ārūha see āroha.
Ārogatā
Ārogatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln 341.
Ārogya
Ārogya (nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D i.11; iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā); M i.451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S ii.109; A i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq.; Sn 749, 257 = Dh 204 = J iii.196; Nd1 160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health); PvA 129, 198; Sdhp 234.
Ārocāpana
Ārocāpana (nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announ- cement DhA ii.167.
Ārocāpeti
Ārocāpeti (Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaŋ ā. Sn p. 111; J i.115, 125; DhA ii.89; PvA 141.
Ārocita
Ārocita [pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla).
Āroceti
Āroceti [ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś i.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D i.109, 224; Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi); PvA 4, 13
-- 109 --
(aññamaññaŋ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. -- pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.).
Ārodana
Ārodana (nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A iii.268 sq.; J i.34; DhA i.184; ii.100.
Āropana
Āropana (nt.) [fr. āropeti] "putting on to", impaling Miln 197 (sūl˚), 290 (id.).
Āropita
Āropita [pp. of āropeti] -- 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA 2. -- 2. effected, made S iii.12; PvA 92, 257. -- 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA 220 (= āvuta).
Āropeti
Āropeti [Caus. of āruhati]. -- 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) PvA 76 (pāsādaŋ), 160 (id.) -- 2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaŋ yānaŋ āropayitvāna); PvA 62 (sarīraŋ citakaŋ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaŋ sakaṭesu ā.). -- 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. loc.) J i.227; PvA 154 (rajjaŋ amaccesu ā.). -- 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA 73, 257 (sangahaŋ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. <-> 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S i.160 (ovādaŋ); Miln 176 (dosaŋ); DhA ii.75 (id.) -- 6. vādaŋ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin i.60; M ii.122; S i.160. -- pp. āropita (q. v.).
Āroha
Āroha ( -- ˚) [fr. ā + ruh] -- 1. climbing up, growth, in- crease, extent, in cpd. ˚pariṇāha length & circumference S ii.206; A i.288; ii.250; iv.397; v.19; J iii.192; v. 299; vi.20; Vbh 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha -- māna); SnA 382. -- 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass˚ & hatth˚ horse -- rider & elephantrider S iv.310; A ii.166 = iii.162 (T. ārūha); iv.107; DhsA 305. -- 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn 420 (vaṇṇ˚).
Ārohaṇa
Ārohaṇa (nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J i.70; vi.488; Miln 352; Vism 244; PvA 74.
Ālakamanda
Ālaka -- manda [ālaya˚?] at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning ("open to view"? or "not having pegs" = āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as "the city of Kuvera" (cp. Sk. alakā).
Ālaggeti
Ālaggeti [ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaŋ veḷagge ālaggetvā).
Ālapati
Ālapati [ā + lapati] to address S i.177, 212; J v.201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Sn 997), 487 (<-> avhayati); PvA 11, 13, 33, 69.
Ālapana
Ālapana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti ā.).
Ālapanatā
Ālapanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M i.331) (an˚).
Ālamba
Ālamba [Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S i.53 (an˚ without support); Sn 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J iii.396; Miln 343; Sdhp 245, 463.
Ālambati
Ālambati [ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28, J i.57; vi.192; Vv 8448; ThA 34. -- ālambeti id. VvA 32.
Ālambana
Ālambana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J iii.396; iv.457; SnA 214. -- (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117, 152 (˚bāha) Miln 126.
Ālambara & Āḷambara
Ālambara & Āḷambara (nt.) [Sk. āḍambara] a drum Vin i.15 (l); J ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ).
Ālaya
Ālaya (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] -- 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J i.10 (geh˚); Miln 213; DhA ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka). -- 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire, clinging, lust S i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma "devoted to the things to which it clings" K. S.); Vin iii.20, 111; S iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (id.); A ii. 34, 131 (˚rāma); iii.35; It 88; Sn 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā -- diṭṭhi -- vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh ˚ŋ akāsi?); DhA i.121; iv.186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). -- 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu iii.314] J i.157 (gilān˚), 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi 20, 262 (gilān˚).
Ālayati
Ālayati see allīyati.
Ālassa
Ālassa (nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S i.43; D iii.182; A iv.59; v.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya S i.43 (v. l. BB); Vbh 352; Miln 289, and ālasiya J i.427; DA i.310; DhA i.299; VvA 43.
Ālāna & Āḷāna
Ālāna & Āḷāna (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning "tying to" then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J i.415; iv.308; DhA i.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly.
Āli
Āli1 (m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J v.405.
Āli & Āḷi
Āli2 & Āḷi (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin ii.256; M iii.96; A ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28; J i.336; iii.533, 334.
Ālika
Ālika in saccālika at S iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood S iv.306.
Ālikhati
Ālikhati [ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J i.71; Miln 51.
Ālinga
Ālinga [ā + ling] a small drum J v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚ -- tala).
Ālingati
Ālingati [ā + ling] to embrace, enfold D i.230; iii.73; J i.281; iv.21, 316, 438; v.8; Miln 7; DhA i.101: VvA 260.
Ālitta
Ālitta [pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th 1, 737.
Ālinda
Ālinda (& Āḷinda) [Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah be- fore the house -- door Vin i.248; ii.153; D i.89; M ii.119; S iv.290 (ḷ); A v.65 (ḷ); J vi.429; DA i.252; DhA i. 26; iv.196; SnA 55 (˚ka -- vāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J iii.283.
Ālippati
Ālippati Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.).
Ālimpana
Ālimpana (nt.) [for āḷimp˚ = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2] conflagration, burning, flame Miln 43.
Ālimpita
Ālimpita [pp. of ālimpeti2] ignited, lit. A iv.102 (v. l. ālepita).
Ālimpeti
Ālimpeti1 [Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin ii.107; S iv.177 (vaṇaŋ). -- Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316. -- Pass. ālimpīyati Miln 74 & ālippati DhA iv.166 (v. l. for lippati). -- pp. ālitta (q. v.).
Ālimpeti
Ālimpeti2 [for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup > lump, lip > limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85; D ii.163 (citakaŋ); A i.257; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ read āvāpaŋ), 225; PvA 62 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ālimpita (q. v.).
Ālu
Ālu (nt.) [Sk. ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix
-- 110 --
Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J iv.371 = vi.578; iv.373.
Āluka
Āluka1 = ālu J iv.46 (C. for ālupa).
Āluka
Āluka2 (adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚); DA i.198 (id.); J ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy).
Ālupa
Ālupa (nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu -- a > ālu- va > ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J iv.46 (= āluka -- kaṇḍa C.). the form āluva occurs at Ap 237.
Ālumpakāra
Ālumpakāra [reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA ii.55 (˚gūtha).
Ālumpati
Ālumpati [ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M i.324.
Āluḷa
Āluḷa (adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J vi.431.
Āluḷati
Āluḷati [ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA iv.47 (T. ālūl˚; v. l. āḷul˚) confuse DhsA 375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J ii.9, 33. -- pp. āluḷita (q. v.).
Āluḷita
Āluḷita [pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J ii.101; Miln 397 (+ khalita).
Ālepa
Ālepa [cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274; Miln 74; DhsA 249.
Ālepana
Ālepana (nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D i.7 (mukkh˚).
Āloka
Āloka [ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. -- 1. sight, view, look S iv.128 = Sn 763; A iii. 236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one's eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln 296 (andha +). -- 2. light A i. 164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It 100 (vihato); A ii. 139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J ii 34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA 51 (dīp˚). -- 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge D ii.33 = S ii.7 = 105, cp. Ps ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on ii.7). -- 4. splendour VvA 53; DvA 71. -- kara making light, bringing light, n. light -- bringer It 108. -- karaṇa making light, illumining It 108. -- da giving light or insight Th 1, 3. -- dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th 1, 422. -- pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh 334; Nett 89. -- bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A iii.432. -- bhūta light J vi 459. -- saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D iii.223; A ii.45; iii.93 -- saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D iii.49; M iii.3; A ii 211; iii.92, 323; iv.437; v.207; Pug 69. -- sandhi "break for the light", a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin i.48 = ii.209 = 218; ii.172; iii.65; iv.47; J iv.310; PvA 24.
Ālokana
Ālokana (nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA i.194.
Ālokita
Ālokita (nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaŋ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita -- vilokita in ster. phrase at D i.70 = e. g. A ii.104, 106, 210; Pug 44, 45, 50; Vism 19; VvA 6; DA i.193 (ālokitaŋ purato pekkhanaŋ vil˚ anudisā p.).
Āloketar
Āloketar [n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or be- fore, a beholder DA i.194 (opp. viloketar).
Āloketi
Āloketi [Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA i.193, 194. -- pp. ālokita (q. v.).
Ālopa
Ālopa [ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś i. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D i.5 = A v.206; iii.176; A ii 209; iii.304; iv.318; Th 1, 1055; It 18; Pv ii.17; Pug 58; Miln 231, 406; Vism 106; DA i.80 (= vilopa -- karaṇaŋ).
Ālopati
Ālopati [ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th 1, 743.
Ālopika
Ālopika (adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or con- sisting of pieces (of food) A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55.
Āloḷa
Āloḷa [fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA i.38.
Āloḷī
Āloḷī (f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.
Āloḷeti
Āloḷeti [Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S i.175; J ii.272, 363; iv.333; vi.331; Vism 105.
Āḷaka
Āḷaka (or ˚ā f.) [Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i (?). See Mor- ris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158] -- 1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike, used either as arrow -- straightener Miln 418; DhA i.288; or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb VvA 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of "alum" in Ind. to VvA is incomprehensible). -- 2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna). Cp. ii.13.
Āḷamba = āḷambara
Āḷamba = āḷambara Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara.
Āḷavaka
Āḷavaka (& ˚ika) (adj. -- n.) [= āṭavika] dwelling in forests, a forest -- dweller S ii.235. As Np. at Vism 208.
Āḷādvāraka
Āḷādvāraka (adj.) at J v.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advāraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). J v.81 has āḷāraka only.
Āḷāra
Āḷāra (adj.) [= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?] thick, mas- sed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma VvA 279); Pv iii.35 (= vellita -- dīgha -- nīla -- pamukha). Cp. alāra.
Āḷārika & ˚iya
Āḷārika & ˚iya (adj. -- n.) [Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.] a cook D i.51 (= bhattakāraka DA i.157); J v.296 (= bhattakāraka C.); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, C. ˚ika = sūpika); Miln 331.
Āḷāhana
Āḷāhana (nt.) [fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D i.55; J i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA i.166; DhA i.26; iii.276; PvA 92, 161, 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha -- ṭṭhāna). -- Note. For āḷāhana in meaning "peg, stake" see ālāna.
Āḷika
Āḷika at A iii.352, 384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka.
Āḷha
Āḷha (nt.) = āḷhaka; only at A iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with v. l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id. p. at A ii.55 has ālhaka only.
Āḷhaka
Āḷhaka (m. & nt.) [Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning "grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaŋ etc." -- udakāḷhaka S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- In other connections at J i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaŋ āḷhakena = dhañña -- māpaka -- kammaŋ kataŋ C.); Miln 229 (patt˚); DhA iii.367 (aḍḍh˚).
-- 111 --
-- thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i. 240; A iii.369; DhA iii.370 (v. l. bhatta -- thālikā).
Āḷhiya
Āḷhiya (& āḷhika) (adj.) [fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. pos- sessing grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhañña2] rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable M i.450; ii.178 (+ daḷidda); A iii.352 sq. (so read with v. l. BB. ˚āḷhika for T. ˚āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v. l. SS. anaddhika); J v. 96, 97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika).
Āvajati
Āvajati [ā + vajati, vraj] -- 1. to go into, to or towards J iii.434; iv.49, 107. -- 2. to return, come back J v.24, 479.
Āvajjati
Āvajjati [not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] -- 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J i.81; ii.423; v.3; Miln 106. -- 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiŋ); J ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati). -- Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.).
Āvajjana
Āvajjana (nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. -- See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). -- Ps ii.5, 120; J ii.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.; Vism 432; DA i.271.
Āvajjita
Āvajjita [pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433.
Āvajjitatta
Āvajjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps ii.27 sq.
Āvajjeti
Āvajjeti [Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M iii.96; J iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA i.10 (kāyaŋ). <-> 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. -- J i.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA ii.96; PvA 181 (= manasikaroti). -- 3. to cause to yield A iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚). <-> pp. āvajjita (q. v.).
Āvaṭa
Āvaṭa [Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D i.97, 246; M i.381 (˚dvāra); J vi.267. -- anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā); S i.55; J v.213; Pv iii.64; Miln 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy˚.
Āvaṭṭa
Āvaṭṭa (adj. -- n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] -- 1. turning round, winding, twisting M i.382; S i.32 (dvi -- r -- ā˚ turning twice); J ii.217; SnA 439 (˚gangā). -- 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M i.381; DhA ii.153. -- 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M i.461 = A ii.123 (˚bhaya); Miln 122, 196, 377. -- 4. circumference J v.337; Dāvs v.24; DhA iii 184.
Āvaṭṭati
Āvaṭṭati [= āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.
Āvaṭṭana
Āvaṭṭana (nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J iii.494; DhA ii.153.
Āvaṭṭanā
Āvaṭṭanā (f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491.
Āvaṭṭanin
Āvaṭṭanin (adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M i.375, 381; A ii.190; J ii.330 = iv.471; DA i.250. -- Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin.
Āvaṭṭin
Āvaṭṭin (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M i.91 in neg. an˚ not enticed by (loc.), i. e. kāmesu. <-> Cp. āvattin.
Āvaṭṭeti
Āvaṭṭeti [ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M i.375, 381, 383, 505; A iii.27; DA i.272.
Āvatta
Āvatta1 (adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāyɔāvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M i.460; S ii.50; J i.206.
Āvatta
Āvatta2 (nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J i.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta).
Āvattaka
Āvattaka (adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ˚ turning to the right, dextrorsal D ii.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DA i.259.
Āvattati
Āvattati [ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to "the low", i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17; M i.460; S ii.231; iv.191; Sn p. 92 (= osakkati SnA 423); Ud 21; Pug 66; Miln 246. <-> pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati.
Āvattana
Āvattana (adj. -- nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln 251.
Āvattanin
Āvattanin (adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin).
Āvattin
Āvattin (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an˚), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non -- returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at D i. 156; iii.132; S v.346, 357, 376, 406; M i.91; DA i.313.
Āvatthika
Āvatthika (adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = KhA 107.
Āvapati
Āvapati [a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln 279.
Āvapana
Āvapana (nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,de- positing, scattering J i.321.
Āvara
Āvara (adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J v.325 (so to be read in ariya -- magg -- âvara).
Āvaraṇa
Āvaraṇa (adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañcɔ āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out, withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ŋ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (id.); D i.246 (syn. of pañca nīvaraṇāni); S v.93 sq.; A iii.63; J i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiŋ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn 66 (pahāya pañcɔ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an˚ -- dassāviṇ); Ps i.131 sq.; ii.158 (an˚); Pug 13; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 341, 342; Miln 21 (dur˚ hard to withstand or oppose). -- dant˚ "screen of the teeth", lip J iv.188; vi.590.
Āvaraṇatā
Āvaraṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A iii 436.
Āvaraṇīya
Āvaraṇīya (adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M i.273; an˚ not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M iii.3; Miln 157.
Āvarati
Āvarati [ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M i.380 (dvāraŋ); Sn 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd1 368); DA i.235 (dvāraŋ); Dpvs i.38. -- pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q. v.).
Āvalī
Āvalī (f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J v.69; DA i.140.
-- 112 --
Āvasati
Āvasati [ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M ii.72; S i.42; Sn 43, 805, 1134; Nd1 123, 127; Nd2 133; J vi.317. -- pp. āvuttha (q. v.).
Āvasatha
Āvasatha [Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling -- place, ha- bitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i 226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); S i.94, 229; iv.329; Sn 287, 672; J iv.396; vi.425; Pug 51; Miln 279.
Āvaha
Āvaha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37; PvA 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15, 98, 206.
Āvahati
Āvahati [ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S i.42 = Sn 181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaŋ metri causā); J iii.169; v. 80; Sn 823; Nd1 302; PvA 6. -- Pass. āvuyhati VvA 237 (ppr. ˚amāna).
Āvahana
Āvahana (adj) ( -- ˚) [= āvaha] bringing, causing Th 1, 519; Sn 256.
Āvahanaka
Āvahanaka (adj. -- nt) [= āvahana] one who brings VvA 114 (sukhassa).
Āva
Āva (misery, misfortune) see avā.
Āvāṭa
Āvāṭa [etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D i.142 (yaññ˚); J i.99, 264; ii 406; iii.286; iv 46 (caturassa); vi.10; DhA i.223; VvA 63; PvA 225.
Āvāpa
Āvāpa [if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p. -- Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter's furnace DhA i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178.
Āvāra
Āvāra [Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J vi 432 (yanta -- yutta˚, does it mean "cover, shield"?). <-> For cpd. khandhɔāvāra see khandha.
Āvāreti
Āvāreti [Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S iv 298; Nett 99.
Āvāsa
Āvāsa [Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling -- place, residence Vin i.92; D iii.234; S iv.91; A ii 68, 168; iii.46, 262; Sn 406; Dh 73 (cp. DhA ii.77); Nd1 128; J vi.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ ālimpeti: read āvāpaŋ); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113; Sdhp 247. -- anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A iv.345; J ii.77; Pv ii.333; PvA 80 (= anāgāra); VvA 46. -- kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, 300, 306; Dpvs iv.47, cp. v.18. -- palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. -- sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127.
Āvāsika
Āvāsika (adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin i.128 sq.; ii.15, 170; iii. 65; v.203 sq.; M i.473; A i.236; iii.261 sq., 366; J iv.310; Pv iv.84 (= nibaddha -- vasanaka PvA 267).
Āvāha
Āvāha [ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D i.99; J vi.363; SnA 273, 448; DhA iv.7. Often in cpd. ā˚ vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one's home) & leading away (from the bride's home), wedding feast D iii.183 (˚ka); J i.452; VvA 109, 157. (v. l. ˚ka).
Āvāhana
Āvāhana (nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] -- 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D i.11 (= āvāha -- karaṇa DA i. 96). -- 2. "getting up, bringing together", i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army J iv.91.
Āvi
Āvi (adv.) [Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. a)i/w to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one's eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A v.350, 353; Pv ii.716 = DhA iv.21 (āvī v. l.), expld. at PvA 103 by pakāsanaŋ paresaŋ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88; iii.24; Pug 19, 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain D iii.121; Sn 84, 85, 349; J v.457; Pug 57; VvA 79, 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J i.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA ii.51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D i.78; A iii.17; J ii.50, 111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur.
Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati)
Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati) [ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] -- 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep. round about, near J i.153 (khettaŋ), 170 (pokkharaṇiŋ); DA i.245 (nagaraŋ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at J iv.59 (chārika -- puñjaŋ). -- 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaŋ āviñji); M iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); J i.313; v.291 (cakkaŋ, of a potter's wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvijjh˚; see āracaya˚); DhA ii.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v. l. āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚). -- 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S iv.199 (T. āviñch˚; v. l. avicch˚ & āviñj˚); Nett 13. -- 4. to arrange, set in order J ii.406. <-> 5. to pull (?) A iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj˚, āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati "to pull"). -- pp. āviddha (q. v.).
Āvijjhana
Āvijjhana (so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvijj- hati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] -- 1. (= āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana -- rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world's wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA ii.143 (T. āviñch˚ (v. l. āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin ii.120, 148; J v.298, 299 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvicch˚ & āvij˚). -- 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA 312 (˚rasa, T. āviñj˚, v. l. āviñch˚; or is it "encompassing"? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa). -- 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma).
Āvijjhanaka
Āvijjhanaka (nt.) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling -- round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter's wheel), the worldaxis DhA ii.146 (T. āviñch˚).
Āviddha
Āviddha [pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S i.87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J iv.6 (cakkaŋ = kumbhakāra -- cakkam iva bhamati C.); v.291. What does an -- āviddha at PvA 135 mean?
Āvila
Āvila (adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A i.9; iii.233; J v.16, 90 (ābila); Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA 251; DA i.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D i.76; S iii. 83; iv,118; A i.9; iii.236; Sn 160; Dh 82, 413; J iii. 157; Miln 35; VvA 29, 30; ThA 251.
Āvilati
Āvilati [fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln 259 (+ luḷati).
Āvilatta
Āvilatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agita- tion Sn 967; Nd1 488.
Āvisati
Āvisati [ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin iv.334; Sn 936 (aor. āvisi); J iv.410, 496; Vism 42.
-- 113 --
Āvuṇāti
Āvuṇāti [in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale J i.430; iii.35; v.145; vi.105. -- Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J iii.218 (sūle). -- pp. āvuta1 (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ.
Āvuta
Āvuta [pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the cor- responding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] -- 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D i.76 (suttaŋ); ii.13 (id.); A i.286 (tantāvutaŋ web); J iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena); DA i.94 (˚sutta). -- 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J i.430; iii.35; v.497; vi.105; PvA 217, 220.
Āvuta = Āvaṭa
Āvuta2 = Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta1) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DA i.59.
Āvuttha
Āvuttha [pp. of āvasati] inhabited D ii.50 (an˚); S i.33.
Āvudha
Āvudha (nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D iii 219; M ii.100; A iv.107, 110; Sn 1008; J i.150; ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd2 on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA ii.2; iv.207; SnA 225, 466 (˚jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha.
Āvuyhamāna
Āvuyhamāna ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain).
Āvuso
Āvuso (voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaŋ and bhavanto. -- Vin ii.302; D i.151, 157; ii.8; SnA 227; DhA i.9; ii.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208.
Āveṭhana
Āveṭhana (nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (˚viniveṭhana).
Āveṭhita
Āveṭhita [pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J iv.383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expls. by parivattita).
Āveṇi
Āveṇi (adj) ( -- ˚) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā "Sine quā non", but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.); J i.490 (˚sangha -- kammāni).
Āveṇika
Āveṇika (adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś i.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S iv.239; A v.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35.
Āveṇiya
Āveṇiya (adj.) = āveṇika Vin i.71; J iv.358; vi.128.
Āvedha
Āvedha [cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J ii.276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha -- ṭṭhāne vaṇa).
Āvedhika
Āvedhika (adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh).
Āveḷa
Āveḷa (adj. & ˚ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] -- 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J i.12, 95, 501. <-> 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 362 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa -- pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin.
Āvelita
Āvelita (ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś i.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita).
Āveḷin
Āveḷin (adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other head- ornaments, usually in f. ˚inī J v.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline), 323; VvA 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana -- maya -- pupphɔ<-> āveḷavatī).
Āvesana
Āvesana (nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living -- place, house Vin ii 117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?); M ii 53; Pv ii.915.
Āsa
Āsa1 contr. -- form of aŋsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aŋsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next).
Āsa
Āsa3 [Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar -- āso piṇḍapātassɔ etaŋ nāmaŋ SnA 374); DhA iv.211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā -- āsa aftermath S i.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa -- pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaŋ "cating", food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Sn 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā.
Āsa
Āsa3 the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā.
Āsa
Āsa4 archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa "thus it has been".
Āsaŋsa
Āsaŋsa (adj.) [of *āśaŋsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A i.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as "so hi arahattaŋ āsaŋsati patthetī ti āsaŋso"); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir˚.
Āsaŋsati
Āsaŋsati [for the usual āsiŋsati, ā + śaŋs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna.
Āsaŋsā
Āsaŋsā (f.) [from ā + śaŋs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J iv.92. -- Cp. nirāsaŋsa.
Āsạŋsuka
Āsạŋsuka (adj.) [fr. āsaŋsā] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 (= āsiŋsanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging").
Āsaka
Āsaka (adj.) [of āsa2] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an˚ fasting S iv.118; Dh 141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77); J v.17; vi.63.
Āsakatta
Āsakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Āsankati
Āsankati [ā + śank] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J i.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); ii. 203; SnA 298. -- pp. āsankita (q v.),
Āsankā
Āsankā (f.) [Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śank] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J i.338; ii.383; iii.533; vi.350, 370; DhA iii.485; VvA 110. -- Cp. sāsanka & nirāsanka.
Āsankita
Āsankita (adj.) [pp. of āsankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA i.223; VvA 110. -- Cp. ussankita & parisankita.
Āsankin
Āsankin ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āsankā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn 255 (bhedā˚); J iii.192 (id.).
-- 114 --
Āsanga
Āsanga [ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsanga & āsakti] -- 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J iv.11. -- 2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in ( -- ˚); usually in cpd. uttarāsanga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin i.289; S iv.290; PvA 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (id.).
Āsangin
Āsangin (adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J iv.11.
Āsajja
Āsajja (indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] -- 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc. "near" (cp. āsanna) Sn 418 (āsajja naŋ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaŋ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaŋ); J ii.95; vi.194; Miln 271. -- 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S i.127 (khaṇuŋ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā "ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama" trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) <-> 3. knocking against or "giving one a setting -- to", insulting, offending, assailing D i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA i.276); A iii.373 (tādisaŋ bhikkhuŋ ā.); J v.267 (isiŋ ā. Gotamaŋ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiŋ ā. = āsādetvã PvA 266). -- 4. "sitting on", i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M i.250; D iii.258 = A iv.236 (dānaŋ deti); Vv 106 (dānaŋ adāsiŋ; cp. VvA 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.
Āsajjana
Āsajjana (nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] "knocking against", setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ŋ Tathāgataŋ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA 55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It 86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naŋ); S i.114 (apuññaŋ pasavi Māro āsajjanaŋ Tathāgataŋ; trsl. "in seeking the T. to assail"); J v.208.
Āsati
Āsati [from as] to sit DA i.208; h. sg. āsi S i.130. - pp. āsīna (q. v.).
Āsatta
Āsatta1 [pp. of ā + sañj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5. -- (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J i. 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA 259 (an˚).
Āsatta
Āsatta2 [pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J v.446 (an˚).
Āsatti
Āsatti (f.) [ā + sañj] attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = A i.138; S i.212; Sn 777 (bhavesu); Nd1 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. -- Cp. nirāsattin.
Āsada
Āsada [ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] -- 1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = J v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); M i.326 (metaŋ āsado = mā etaŋ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J i 414 (cakkaŋ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). -- 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J vi.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA 213); Miln 21; Dpvs v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384.
Āsana
Āsana (nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M i.469; Vin i.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); S i.46 (ek˚ sitting alone, a solitary seat); A iii.389 (an˚ without a seat); Sn 338, 718, 810, 981; Nd1 131; J iv.435 (āsān' ûdaka -- dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (id.); vi.413; DhA ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher's seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA 16, 23, 141. -- âbhihara gift or distinction of the seat J i.81. -- ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn 708 (= nisinna SnA 495). -- paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305. -- paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D i.167; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55. -- sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; DhA ii. 65; iv.46.
Āsana
Āsana2 (?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam -- āsita Miln 302). See, however, māsana.
Āsanaka
Āsanaka (nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 15.
Āsanika
Āsanika (adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek˚ sitting by oneself Vism 69.
Āsandi
Āsandi (f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck -- chair Vin i.192; ii.142, 163, 169, 170; D i.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant' āsanaŋ DA i.86), 55 = M i.515 = S iii.307 (used as a bier) A i.181; J i.108. See note at Dial. i.11.
Āsandikā
Āsandikā (f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii. 149; KhA 44.
Āsanna
Āsanna (adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra J ii.154; DhA ii 91; PvA 42, 243.
Āsappanā
Āsappanā (fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA i.69.
Āsabha
Āsabha [the guṇa -- and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha > ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in compn.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull -- like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Sn 687; nar˚ Sn 684, 696; āsabha -- camma bull's hide J vi. 453 (v. l. usabha˚). -- ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) "bull's place", first place, distinguished position, leadership M i.69; S ii.27; A ii.8 (C. seṭṭha -- ṭṭhāna uttama -- ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq.; DA i. 31; KhA 104.
Āsabhin
Āsabhin (adj.) [fr. āsabha] bull -- like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ŋ vācaŋ bhāsati "speak the lordly word" D ii.15, 82; M iii.123j J i.53; DA i.91; cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaŋ āsabhiŋ).
Āsamāna
Āsamāna (adj.) [ppr. of āsaŋsati or āsiŋsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiŋ ā = kiŋ paccāsiŋ santo VvA 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiŋsamāna patthayamana PvA 226).
Āsaya
Āsaya [ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś ii.161] -- 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S i.38; Vin iii.151; J ii.99; Miln 257; VvA 60; PvA 210; jal˚ river VvA 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in ( -- ˚) Miln 317; Nd1 362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. -- 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often combd. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps i. 133; ii.158; Vbh 340; Vism 140 (˚posana); PvA 197. <-> SnA 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), KhA 103 (˚sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. -- 3. outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh˚ = gabbha -- mala PvA 198); Vism 344.
Āsayati
Āsayati [ā + śī; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J iv.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya.
Āsava
Āsava [fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which
-- 115 --
flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on D iii.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J iv.222; vi.9. -- 2. discharge from a sore, A i.124, 127 = Pug 30. -- 3. in psychology, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the "Āsavas" constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. -- The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. -- They are mentioned as such at D ii.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A i.165 sq., 196; ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Ps i.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. -- The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at M i. 55; A i.165; iii.414; S iv.256; v.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciŋsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.); D i.83, 167; iii.78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; S ii.187 sq. (˚ehi cittaŋ vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; A i.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaŋ vimuttaŋ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta -- pariḷāha); v.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb˚); Vbh 42, 64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA 48; ThA 94, 173; KhA 26; DA i 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava -- surā, meaning?). Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1) āsavānaŋ khaya D i.156; S ii.29, 214; iii 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A i.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 334, 344; Vism 9; DA i.224; cp. ˚parikkhaya A v 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. -- (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S i.13, 48, 53, 146; ii 83, 239; iii.199, 128, 178; iv.217; A i 77, 109, 241, 266; iv.120, 224, 370 sq.; v 40, 253 sq.; Ps ii 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A iv.418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn 370. -- (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; S i 130; ii.214, 222; iii.83; iv.128; A i.81, 107 sq., 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114, 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A v.10 sq., 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Th i.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv ii.615; Pug 27; Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9. Cp. nirāsava ThA 148. -- Opp. sāsava S iii 47; v.232; A i.81 v.242; Dhs 990; Nett 10; Vism 13, 438.
Āsavati
Āsavati [ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116.
Āsasāna
Āsasāna [either grd. for *āsaŋsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaŋsati (= āsiŋsati) for *asaŋsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn 369 (an˚; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th 1, 528; J iv.18 (= āsiŋsanto C.), 381; v.391 (= āsiŋsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaŋsati, āsamāna & āsayāna.
Āsā
Āsā (f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa ( -- ˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope -- destroying), 259; D ii. 206; iii.88; M iii.138 (āsaŋ karoti); A i.86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat -- āso one whose longings have gone); Sn 474, 634, 794, 864; J i.267, 285; v.401; vi.452 (˚chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd1 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaŋ, cp. VvA 172); Pug 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug A 208); Dhs 1059 (+ āsiŋsanā etc.), 1136; PvA 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78, 111, 498, 609.
Āsāṭikā
Āsāṭikā (f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī] a fly's egg, a nit M i.220 sq.; A v.347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J iii.176.
Āsādeti
Āsādeti [Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] - 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M i.371; J i.481; v.197; aor. āsādesi Th 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J v.272; Miln 100, 205 (˚ayitvā); PvA 266 (isiŋ), āsādiya J v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiŋ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduŋ J v.154 & āsādituŋ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln 205; VvA 213 (an˚). -- 2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach, get J iii.206 (khuracakkaŋ).
Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī
Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī (f.) [Sk. āṣāḍha] N. of a month (June- July) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha˚ & Āsaḷhi˚, viz. ˚nakkhatta J i.50; SnA 208; ˚puṇṇamā J i.63; DhA i.87; SnA 199; VvA 66; PvA 137; ˚māsa SnA 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA 307 (= gimhānaŋ pacchimo māso).
Āsāvati
Āsāvati (f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J iii.250, 251.
Āsāsati
Āsāsati [cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaŋs in āsaŋsati & āsiŋsati (q. v.) & their derivations. -- pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.).
Āsi & Āsiŋ
Āsi & Āsiŋ 3rd & 1st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.).
Āsiŋsaka
Āsiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ā + siŋsati, cp. āsaŋsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln 342.
Āsiŋsati
Āsiŋsati [Sk. āśaŋsati, ā + śaŋs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaŋsati, abhisiŋsati & āsaŋsati] to hope for, wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. acc.) S i.34, 62; Sn 779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd2 135); J i.267; iii.251; iv.18; v.435; vi.43; Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA 337; PvA 226 (ppr. āsiŋsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.).
Āsiŋsanaka
Āsiŋsanaka (adj.) [fr. āsiŋsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA 217 (for āsaŋsuka Th 2, 273).
Āsiŋsanā
Āsiŋsanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsati] desire, wish, craving J v.28; Dhs 1059, 1136 (+ āsiŋsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53.
Āsiŋsaniya
Āsiŋsaniya (adj.) [grd. of āsiŋsati] to be wished for, desir- able Miln 2 (˚ratana).
Āsikkhita
Āsikkhita [pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, in- structed PvA 67, 68.
Āsiñcati
Āsiñcati [ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; ii.208; J iv.376; Vv 796 (= siñcati VvA 307); PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. ˚itvā). <-> pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy˚.
Āsiṭṭha
Āsiṭṭha [pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA 104.
*Āsita
*Āsita1 [= asita1?] "having eaten", but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. J ii.446 (dumapakkani -- m -- asita, where C. reading is māsita & expln. khāditvā asita (v. l. āsita) dhāta); Miln 302 (visam -- āsita affected with poison = visamāsita).
-- 116 --
Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at J vi.354 (tiṇa˚, expld. by C. as khādaka). -- āsita at J v.70 is very doubtful, v. l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73.
*Āsita
*Āsita2 [registered as such with meaning "performed" by Hardy in Index] at VvA 276 is better read with v. l. SS bhāsita ( -- vādana etc.).
Āsitta
Āsitta [pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J v.87; Pug 31; Miln 286; DhsA 307; DhA i.10; VvA 69.
Āsittaka
Āsittaka (adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna "decorated divan"?); ThA 61, 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q. v.).
Āsītika
Āsītika (adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M ii.124; J iii.395; SnA 172.
Āsītika
Āsītika (m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M i 80 = 245 (˚pabba).
Āsīdati
Āsīdati [cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] -- 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D i.248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?). -- 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) A iii.69 (āsīvisaŋ), 373 (na sādhurūpaŋ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J iv.56. -- 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J v. 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa -- vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). -- pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti.
Āsīna
Āsīna (adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S i.195 = Nd2 136; Sn 1105, 1136; Dh 227, 386; J i.390; iii.95; v. 340; vi.297; Dāvs ii.17.
Āsīyati
Āsīyati [etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning "cool oneself"; Morris' J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one's home, one's abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water).
Āsīvisa
Āsīvisa Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake's poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108; S iv.172; A ii.110; iii. 69; J i.245; ii.274; iv.30, 496; v.82, 267; Pug 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); DhA i.139; ii.8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA 308.
Āsīsanā
Āsīsanā see āsiŋsanā.
Āsu
Āsu expletive particle = assu3 J v.241 (v. l. assu; nipāta- mattaŋ C. p.243).
Āsuŋ
Āsuŋ 3rd pl. aor. of atthi.
Āsumbhati
Āsumbhati (& Āsumhati) [ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263, 265; Vv 5011 (˚itvāna); J iii.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi).
Āsevati
Āsevati [ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A i.10; Sn 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps ii.93 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āsevita.
Āsevana
Āsevana (nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] -- 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117; PvA 45. -- 2. succession, repetition Dhs 1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538.
Āsevita
Āsevita [pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, en- joyed J i.21 (v.141; āsevita -- nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93, 237.
Āha
Āha [Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J i.197 (cullalohitaŋ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn 839, 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). -- 3rd sg. āha Vin ii.191; Sn 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888; J i.280; iii.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl. āhu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J i.59; SnA 377, and āhaŋsu J i.222; iii.278 and freq.
Āhacca
Āhacca1 ger. of āhanati.
Āhacca
Āhacca2 (adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka -- pīṭha & ˚mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 n. 5); iv.40, 46 (def. as "ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti" it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. -- 2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M iii.139; DhsA 9, & in cpds. ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaŋ).
Āhaṭa
Āhaṭa [pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121; iii.53; D ii.180 (spelt āhata); J iii.512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs i.58.
Āhata
Āhata [pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.236 = D iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata -- citto); Vin i.75, 76; S i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā -- hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa -- setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J iii 456; Sdhp 187, 401.
Āhataka
Āhataka [fr. āhata] "one who is beaten", a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā).
Āhanati
Āhanati [ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln 21 (dhamma -- bheriŋ); Dāvs iv.50. <-> ger. āhacca touching M i.493; J i.330; vi 2, 200; Sn 716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism 420. -- pp. āhata (q. v.). 1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin i.8; D ii.72, where probably to be read as āhañh' (= āhañhaŋ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2.
Āhanana
Āhanana (nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, "impinging" Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of vitakka) = DhsA 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.).
Āharaṇa
Āharaṇa (adj. -- n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln 320; Kh viii.9; KhA 224; Sdhp 589.
Āharaṇaka
Āharaṇaka [āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J ii.199; iii.328.
Āharati
Āharati [ā + hṛ] -- 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M i.429 (sallaŋ); S i 121; iii.123; J i.40 (ger. āharitvā "with"), 293 (te hattaŋ); Nd2 540c (puttamaŋsaŋ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310; DA i.186, 188 <-> 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D ii.245; J iv 159 (nāvaŋ; v. l. āhāhitvā); v.466; VvA 63 (bhattaŋ); PvA 75. <-> 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J v.433 (padosaŋ); DhA ii.89. -- 4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M i.395 (kaṭhalaŋ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuŋ); Th 1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). -- 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th 1, 1173. -- 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on
-- 117 --
(w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaŋ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J iii.383 (desanaŋ), 401; v.462 (vatthuŋ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA 38, 39 (atītaŋ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma -- desanaŋ). See also payirudāharati. <-> pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for J iii.88, 342; v.466; PvA 215.
Āharima
Āharima (adj.) [fr. āharati] "fetching", fascinating, captiv- ating, charming Vin iv.299; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; VvA 14, 15, 77.
Āhariya
Āhariya [grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J iii.328.
Āhavana & Āhavanīya
Āhavana & Āhavanīya see under āhuneyya.
Āhāra
Āhāra [fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enumn. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚ n. of volition (= cetanā S. A. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness. Thus at M i.261; D iii.228, 276; Dhs 71 -- 73; Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla's refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910 -- 12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30. -- Vin i.84; D i.166; S i.172; ii.11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391; A iii.51 (sukhass˚), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaŋ etc.); Sn 78, 165, 707, 747; Nd1 25; Ps i.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug 21, 55; Vbh 2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs 58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124; DhsA 153, 401; DhA i.183 (˚ŋ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87; VvA 118; PvA 14, 35, 112, 148 (utu˚ physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, 395, 406; A v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -- an˚ without food, unfed M i.487 (aggi); S iii.126; v.105; Sn 985. -- ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii. 136. -- ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D iii.211, 273; A v.50, 55; Ps i.5, 122. -- pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln 244 or is it "restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combn. at Miln 313. -- maya "food -- like", feeding stuff, food J iii.523. -- lolatā greed after food SnA 35. -- samudaya origin of nutriment S iii.59.
Āhāratthaŋ
Āhāratthaŋ [āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin i.199, of medicine, ʻ to penetrate into food -- ness ʼ, to come under the category of food; Miln 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaŋ and ˚atthaŋ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaŋ, and records no variant (see p. 425)].
Āhāreti
Āhāreti [Denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S ii.13; iii.240; iv.104; A i.114, 295; ii.40, 145, 206; iv. 167; Nd2 540c (āhāraŋ & puttamaŋsaŋ cp. S ii.98).
Āhika
Āhika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [der. fr. aha2] only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaŋ & sattāhaŋ) M iii.157.
Āhiṇḍati
Āhiṇḍati [ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin i.203 (senāsana -- cārikaŋ), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituŋ); iv.62; J i.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540b; Pv iii.229 (= vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviŋ); VvA 238 (tattha tattha); PvA 143.
Āhita
Āhita [pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam˚.
Āhu
Āhu 3rd pl. of āha (q. v.).
Āhuti
Āhuti (f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; vener- ation, adoration M iii 167; S i.141; Th 1, 566 (˚īnaŋ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J i.15; v.70 (id.); Vv 6433 (paramâhutiŋ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285.
Āhuna
Āhuna = āhuti, in āhuna -- pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219.
Āhuneyya
Āhuneyya (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D iii.5, 217 (aggi); A ii.56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "āhavanīya" and "āhavanaŋ arahati" deserving of offerings.
Āhundarika
Āhundarika (adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin i.79; iv.297; Vism 413 (˚ŋ andha -- tamaŋ).
I. I
I in i -- kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (˚lopa), 508 (id.).
Ikka
Ikka [Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2] a bear J vi.538 [= accha C.).
Ikkāsa
Ikkāsa (?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by "slime of trees", according to Bdhgh's expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa.
Ikkhaṇa
Ikkhaṇa (nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism 16.
Ikkhaṇika
Ikkhaṇika [fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortune- teller Vin iii.107; S ii.260; J i.456, 457; vi.504.
Ikkhati
Ikkhati [fr. īkṣ] to look J v.153; ThA 147; DhsA 172.
Ingita
Ingita (nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J ii.195, 408; vi.368, 459.
Ingha
Ingha (indecl.) [Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. "get a move on", come on, go on, look here, Sn 83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J v.148; Pv iv.57; Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto VvA 237); VvA 47; DhA iv.62.
Inghāḷa
Inghāḷa [according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Th 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra -- kāsu ThA 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful.
Icc'
Icc' see iti.
Iccha
Iccha ( -- ˚) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires S i.50; ii.156; an˚ without desires S i.61, 204; Sn 707; app˚ id. Sn 628, 707.
Icchaka
Icchaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad -- icchikaŋ (and yen˚) after one's wish or liking M iii.97; A iii.28.
-- 118 --
Icchati
Icchati1 [Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"] to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S i.210 (dhammaŋ sotuŋ i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3, 138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv ii.63; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835 Pv ii.66 & iccheyya D ii.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. icchaŋ Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phalaŋ) aor. icchi PvA 31. -- grd. icchitabba PvA 8. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). <-> Note. In prep. -- cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita.
Icchati
Icchati2 [Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā.
Icchatā
Icchatā ( -- ˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚ Vbh 351, 370.
Icchana
Icchana (nt.) [fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J iv. 5; vi.244.
Icchā
Icchā (f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ2] wish, longing, desire D ii.243; iii.75; S i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraŋ parikassati); A ii.143; iv.293 sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (˚lobha -- samāpanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp 242, 320. -- âvacara moving in desires M i.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. -- âvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn 306. -- pakata same Vin i.97; A iii.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchāya apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). -- vinaya discipline of one's wishes D iii.252, A iv.15; v.165 sq.
Icchita
Icchita [pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J i.208; DhsA 364; PvA 3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice).
Ijjhati
Ijjhati [Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)/lqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S i.175 ("work effectively" trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaŋ hoti C.); iv.303; Sn 461, 485; J v.393; Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati PvA 120); Pot. ijjhe Sn 458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA 103). <-> pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam˚.
Ijjhana
Ijjhana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out suc- cessfully Ps i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217 sq.; Vism 266, 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237.
Iñjati
Iñjati [Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as ang in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha & Vedic pali -- angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati1] to shake, move, turn about, stir D i.56; S i.107, 132, 181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. "impassive"); iii.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DA i.167. -- pp. iñjita (q. v.).
Iñjanā
Iñjanā (f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [fr. iñj, see iñjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn 193 (= calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an˚ immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15; ii.118.
Iñjita
Iñjita [pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an˚). Usually as nt. iñjitaŋ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M i.454; S i.109; iv.202; A ii.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. <-> On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58.
Iñjitatta
Iñjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S v.315 (kāyassa).
Iṭṭha
Iṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D i.245; ii.192; M i.85; S iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337. -- Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); PvA 116 (= bhadraŋ), 140. -- aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. -- See also pariy˚, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha.
Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā)
Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā) (f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a)i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire -- brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick] -- 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin ii 121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru˚); J iii.435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya); PvA 4 (˚cuṇṇa -- makkhita -- sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa -- cūṛnɔâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ɔhaŋ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka > piṣṭa). <-> 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157.
Iṭṭhi˚
Iṭṭhi˚ in ˚khagga -- dhāra at J vi.223 should be read iddha.
Iṇa
Iṇa (nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an -- aṇa] debt D i.71, 73; A iii.352; v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn 120; J i.307; ii.388, 423; iii.66; iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, iṇaŋ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289; PvA 3. -- iṇaŋ muñcati to discharge a debt J iv.280; v.238; ˚ŋ sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3. -- apagama absence of debt ThA 245. -- gāhaka a borrower Miln 364. -- ghāta stricken by debt Sn 246 (= iṇaŋ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -- ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M i.463 = S iii.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. -- paṇṇa promissory note J i.230; iv.256. -- mokkha release from debt J iv.280; v.239. -- sādhaka negotiator of a loan Miln 365.
Iṇāyika
Iṇāyika [fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S i.170; J iv.159, 256; vi.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA 3. -- (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd1 160.
Ita
Ita [pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur -- ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc.
Itara
Itara1 (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaŋ, etaŋ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh 85, 104, 222; J ii.3; iii.26; iv.4; PvA 13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J v.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147; acc. itarîtaraŋ & instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J vi 448 (˚ŋ); Dh 331 (˚ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraŋ VvA 333).
Itara
Itara2 (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.).
Iti (ti)
Iti (ti) (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaŋ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic<->
-- 119 --
deictic particle "thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying to define its meaning viz. -- itī ti padasandhi padasaŋsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc." Nd1 123 = Nd2 137. The same expln. also for iti' haŋ (see below iv.) -- I. As deictic adv. "thus, in this way" (Vism 423 iti = evaŋ) pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 805; It 123 (ito devā. . . taŋ namassanti); Dh 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the -- foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaŋ VvA 307); VvA 5. -- (b) referring to what follows D i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A i.205 (id.) -- II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one's own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one's own or other's) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g. bālo ti vuccati Dh 63 = bālo vuccati). -- 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataŋ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaŋ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaŋ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D i.151. -- 2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact "so it is that" (cp. E. "viz.", Ger. "und zwar"), mostly untranslated Kh iv. (arahā ti pavuccati); J i.253 (tasmā pesanaka -- corā t' eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuŋ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA 112 (ankuro pañca -- sakaṭasatehi . . . aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca -- sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata -- sahassehi . . . patipannā). -- (b) as statement of a thought "like this", "I think", so, thus Sn 61 ("sango eso" iti ñatvā knowing "this is defilement"), 253 ("neso maman" ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 783 ("iti' han" ti), 1094 (etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ Nibbānaŋ iti naŋ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraŋ gaccheyya tasmā "Parāyanaŋ" iti). -- III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows: icc' eva, t' eva, etc. -- (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaŋ akatthā ti DhA i.7; kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. <-> IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc' eva Pv i.119 (= evam eva PvA 59); t' eva J i.253; Miin 114; tv' eva J i.203; ii.2. -- iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say D i.228, 229, 240. -- iti kho thus, therefore D i.98, 103; iii.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases) Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1. -- iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn 934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaŋ; cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); It 76; DA i.247, as iti haŋ at Sn 783 (same expln. at Nd1 71 as for iti). -- kin ti how J ii.159. -- kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. "so I guess" or "I have heard" A i.189 = ii.191 sq. = Nd2 151. Cp. itiha. -- bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava); D i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA i.91); A ii.248; It 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). -- vāda "speaking so & so", talk, gossip M i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; It iii.35. -- vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaŋ] "so it has been said", (book of) quotations, "Logia", N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka -- nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaŋ h' etaŋ Bhagavatā "thus has the Buddha said" (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.7, 103; iii.86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug 43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaŋ. -- hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] "thus indeed it has been", legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa -- pañca -- mānaŋ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D i.88 = (see DA i.247); A i.163; iii.223; Sn 447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu i.556. -- hītiha [itiha + itiha] "so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd2 spells ītihītiha) M i.520; S i.154; Sn 1084; Nd2 151.
Ito
Ito (indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, abl. -- adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaŋ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaŋ sandhāy' āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinnaŋ what is given in this world); i.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); i.123 (= idhalokato PvA 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti). -- (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c' ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA ii.80. -- (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA 319 (ito kira tiŋsa -- kappa -- sahasse); PvA 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re -- birth). -- (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA 138; ito paraŋ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J i.63 (ito dāni p.); PvA 41.
Ittara
Ittara (sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr. i] -- 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M i.318 (opp. dīgharattaŋ); A ii.187; J i.393; iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ C.), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (= na cira -- kāla -- ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma -- dhamma PvA 60); DA i.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaṇika). -- 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth); A ii.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln 93, 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna).
Ittaratā
Ittaratā (f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman).
Ittha
Ittha (indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd. ˚bhāv' aññathā -- bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9 (v. l. itthi˚ for iti˚) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; It 94 (v. l. ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaŋ = Sk. itthaŋ (see next).
Itthaŋ
Itthaŋ (indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D i.53, 213; Dāvs iv.35; v.18. -- nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56; iv.136; J i.297; Miln 115; DhA ii.98. -- bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA 162, 174; PvA 150.
Itthatta
Itthatta1 (nt.) [ittha + *tvaŋ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not "thusness" or "life as we conceive it", as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaŋ seems to exist, see ittha); "life in these conditions" K. S. ii.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on S i.140 (see K. S. 318). -- See also freq. formula A of arahatta. -- D i.18, 84; A i.63; ii.82, 159, 203; Sn 158; Dhs 633; Pug 70, 71; DA i.112.
-- 120 --
Itthatta
Itthatta2 (nt.) [itthi + *tvaŋ abstr. fr. itthi] state or con- dition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (= itthi -- sabhāva DhsA 321).
Itthi & Itthī
Itthi & Itthī (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. ˚sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & compn.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as -- ˚) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J v.72, 398; Nett 93; DhA i.390; PvA 153). -- S i.33 (nibbānass' eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185; A i.28, 138; ii.115, 209; iii.68, 90, 156; iv.196 (purisaŋ bandhati); Sn 112, 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi -- saññikā thiyo SnA 513); J i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaŋ); ii.415 (nom. pl. thiyo); v.397 (thi -- ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), v.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh 336, 337; DA i.147; PvA 5, 44, 46, 67, 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64, 79. -- anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ C.); kul' -- itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10; A iii.76; iv.16, 19; dahar˚ a young wife J i.291; dur˚ a poor woman J iv.38. <-> Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 = A v.264 = VvA 72, viz. mātu -- rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚, ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin iii.139 for expln. -- S i.38 (malaŋ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaŋ pamathenti); v. 425 (sīho yathā . . . tath' itthiyo); women as goods for sale S i.43 (bhaṇḍānaŋ uttamaŋ); DhA i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaŋ). -- agāra ( -- āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women's apartment, seraglio Vin i.72; iv.158; S i.58, 89; J i.90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D ii.249; J v.188. -- indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris' indriya) S v.204; A iv.57 sq.; Vism 447, 492; Dhs 585, 633, 653 et passim. -- kathā talk about women D i.7 (cp. DA i.90). -- kāma the craving for a woman S iv.343. -- kutta a woman's behaviour, woman's wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A iv.57 = Dhs 633; J i.296, 433; ii.127, 329; iv.219, 472; DhA iv.197. -- ghātaka a woman -- killer J v. 398. -- dhana wife's treasure, dowry Vin iii.16. -- dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn 106; J iii.260; PvA 5. -- nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, 713, 836. -- pariggaha a woman's company, a woman Nd1 11. -- bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S i.129; Th 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA 178; Dhs 633; PvA 168. -- rūpa womanly beauty A i.1; iii.68; Th 2, 294. -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling regarding a woman D i.9 (cp. DhA i.94, + purisa˚); J vi. 135. -- linga "sign of a woman", feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, 713, 836; DhsA 321 sq. -- sadda the sound (or word) "woman" DhA i.15. -- soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112.
Itthikā
Itthikā (f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin iii.16; D ii.14; J i. 336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S ii.264 (id. and appitthikāni).
Ida & Idaŋ
Ida & Idaŋ (indecl.) [nt. of ayaŋ (idaŋ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = S i.136; D i.185; Dhs 1004, 1061; Vbh 340, 362, 365; Vism 518; etc. -- (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D ii.267, 270, almost syn. (for with kira. -- (3) just (this), even so, only: idam -- atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th 1, 984 (cīvara); Pug 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika, see Pug A 250); as idam -- atthitā "being satisfied with what is sufficient" at Vism 81: expld. as atthika -- bhāva at Pug A 250. idaŋsaccâbhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya -- ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ˚ (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl. 304); D iii.230; S v.59; Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq.
Idāni
Idāni (indecl.) [Vedic idānīŋ] now Dh 235, 237; KhA 247.
Iddha
Iddha1 [pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi -- khagga˚); Dpvs vi.42.
Iddha
Iddha2 [pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A iii.215 (id.); J vi.227, 361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs i.11. -- (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaŋ); iv.313 (ovādo).
Iddhi
Iddhi [Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻ potency ʼ. -- 1. Pre -- Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D ii.177; M iii.176, cp. J iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A i.145. At M i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D ii.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). -- 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind -- made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D i.77, 212; ii.87, 213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264, 303; A i.170, 255; iii.17, 28, 82, 425; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DA i.122). For other such powers see S i.144; iv.290; v.263; A iii.340. -- 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻ It is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof ʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M i.34; A iii.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D ii.213; M i.103; A i.39, 297; ii.256; iii. 82; Ps i.111; ii 154, 164, 205; Vbh 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D iii.112; A i.93; Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. i.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps ii.150; Vism xii; DhA i.91; J i.47, 360. -- ânubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; iii.67; S i 147; iv.290; PvA 53. -- âbhisankhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16, 17, 25; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270;
-- 121 --
Sn p. 107; PvA 57, 172 212. -- pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25, 28, 180, 209; ii.76, 112, 200; D i.211, 212; iii.3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S iv.290; A i.170, 292; Ps ii.227. -- pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240; D ii.103, 115 sq., 120; iii.77, 102, 127, 221; M ii.11; iii.296; S i.116, 132; iii.96, 153; iv.360; v.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A iv.128 sq., 203, 463; v.175; Nd1 14, 45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd1 s. v.; Ps i.17, 21, 84; ii.56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA 237; DhA iii.177; iv.32. -- bala the power of working wonders VvA 4; PvA 171. -- yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln 276. -- vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -- vidhā kinds of iddhi D i.77, 212; ii.213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264 sq., 303; A i.170 sq., 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 384; DA i.222. -- visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67; Nett 23.
Iddhika
Iddhika1 ( -- ˚) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ -- iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J i.6; iv.15; PvA 78.
Iddhika
Iddhika2 ( -- ˚) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah -- iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah -- ânubhāva, e. g. at Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; S ii. 155; M i.34; Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J v.149. See mahiddhika.
Iddhimant
Iddhimant (adj.) [fr. iddhi] -- 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an˚ unfortunate, miserable, poor J vi.361. <-> 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; iv.108; A i.23, 25; ii.185; iii.340; iv.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472.
Idha
Idha (indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaŋ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i)qa -- genh/s, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. -- idhaloka this world, the world of men Sn 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c); PvA 64; in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA 348.
Idhuma
Idhuma [Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire -- wood - Tela -- kaṭāha -- gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.
Inda
Inda [Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). -- 1. The Vedic god Indra D i.244; ii.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd1 177. -- 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaŋ indo D i.216, 217; ii.221, 275; S i.219. Vepɔcitti asurindo S i.221 ff. manussinda, S i.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all of the Buddha, ʻ chief of men ʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. ii.294<-> 298. The idiom sa -- Indā devā, D ii.261, 274; A v.325, means ʻ the gods about Indra, Indra's retinue ʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiŋsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D ii.208 -- 212; S iii.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story]. -- aggi (ind' aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. -- gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. -- jāla deception DA i.85. -- jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. -- dhanu the rainbow DA i.40. -- bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiŋsa -- bhavana). -- linga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -- sāla N. of tree J iv.92.
Indaka
Indaka [dimin. fr. inda] -- 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv ii.957; PvA 136 sq. -- 2. ( -- ˚) see inda 2.
Indakhīla
Indakhīla [inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś i.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D ii.254 (˚ŋ ūhacca, cp. DhA ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani -- gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S v.444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh 95 (˚ûpama, cp. DhA ii.181); Th 1, 663; J i.89; Miln 364; Vism 72, 466; SnA 201; DA i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā); DhA ii.180 (˚sadisaŋ Sāriputtassa cittaŋ), 181 (nagara -- dvāre nikhataŋ ˚ŋ).
Indagū
Indagū see hindagū.
Indagopaka
Indagopaka [inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle", Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th 1, 13; Vin iii.42; J iv.258; v.168; DhA i.20; Brethren p. 18, n.
Indanīla
Indanīla [inda + nīla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J i.80; Miln 118; VvA 111 (+ mahānīla).
Indavāruṇī
Indavāruṇī (f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J iv.8 (˚ka -- rukkha).
Indīvara
Indīvara (nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stel- lata or Cassia Fistula J v.92 (˚ī -- samā ratti); vi.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka -- puppha VvA 197).
Indriya
Indriya (nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning "belonging to Indra"; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense "belonging to the ruler", i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning "controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis", in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense -- perceptibility "faculty, function", often wrongly interpreted as "organ"; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter "kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark" (cp. woman -- hood, hood = Goth. haidus "kind, form"); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, "principle, controlling" force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight "category". <-> Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA 119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. lvii; Cpd. 228, 229. B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a -- e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh -- undriya ("the eye which is a power", Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot -- indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚ nose or smell, (4) jivh˚ tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚ body -- sensibility, (6) man˚) mind; (b. material) (7) itth˚ female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚ male sex or masculinity, (9) jīvit˚ life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚ pain, (12) somanasa˚ joy, (13) domanass˚ grief, (14) upekh˚ hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh˚ faith, (16) viriy˚ energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚ concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta -- ñassāmīt˚ the thought "I shall come to know the unknown", (21) aññ˚ (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā -- v˚ one who knows. -- Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth˚ (no. 7), e. g. at Ps i.7, 137. -- From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man -- indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc' indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1 -- 19) at Ps i.137; 10 (pañca rūpīni &
-- 122 --
pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1 -- 5, 10 -- 14, 15 -- 19) at D iii.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i. e. nos. 15 -- 18) at A ii.141; three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A i. 118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaŋ indriya -- rūpaŋ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaŋ as indriyaŋ "form which is faculty" Dhs 661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1 -- 5), the 2 séx -- states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enumn.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709 -- 717, 971 -- 973. -- It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. -- Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas. C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a -- e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1 -- 5): M i.295: S iii.46 (pañcannaŋ ˚ānaŋ avak kanti), 225; iv.168; A ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1 -- 6): M i.9; S iv.176; v.74, 205, 230; A i.113; ii.16, 39, 152; iii.99, 163, 387 sq.; v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saŋvutāni S ii.231, 271; iv.112; pañcasu ˚esu saŋvuto Sn 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaŋ pi vuttaŋ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6th as manas included, SnA 343); ˚esu susaŋvuta Th 2, 196 (= mana -- chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saŋvutā ThA 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D iii.107; S ii.218; iv.103, 112, 175; A i.25, 94, 113; ii.39; iii.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; iv.25, 166; v.134; It 23, 24; Nd1 14; Vbh 248, 360; DA i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita -- dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S ii. 275; iii.2, 235; iv.294; v.301; A i.181; iii.380. ˚ānaŋ samatā (v. l. samatha) A iii.375 sq. (see also f. below) ˚āni bhāvitāni Sn 516 (= cakkh' ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd2 475 B8. -- Various: S i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚); Vbh 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚). -- (b) physical: (above B 7 -- 9) all three: S v.204; Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ A iv.57; Vbh 122, 415 sq.; puris˚ A iii.404; jīvit˚ Vbh 123, 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. -- (c) sensational (above B 10 -- 14): S v.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh 15, 71; Nett 88. -- (d) moral (above B 15 <-> 19): S iii.96, 153; iv.36, 365 sq.; v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A iv.125 sq., 203, 225; v.56, 175; Ps ii.49, 51 sq., 86; Nd1 14; Nd2 628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh 341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga, magga (see Nd2 s. v. p. 263) D ii.120; Vin iii. 93, Ps ii.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16<-> 19) at Nett 83. -- (e) cognitional (above B 20 -- 22) D iii.219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It 53; Ps i.115; ii.30. -- (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a -- e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (id.); iii.207 (ākāsaŋ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari -- bhinnāni); A iii.441 (˚ānaŋ avekallatā). magic power A iv.264 sq. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaŋ paripāko (moral or physical) over -- ripeness of faculties S ii.2, 42; A v.203; Nd2 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh 137. moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaŋ samatā, + viriyānaŋ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaŋ jīvaŋ Vin iii.156; Miln 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one's heart PvA 16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one's vow J ii.274; iv.190. D. Unclassified material D i 77 (ahīn˚); iii 239 (domanass˚ & somanass˚) M i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); ii. 11, 106; iii.296; S iii.225; v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚); A i.39, 42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Ps i.16, 21, 88, 180; ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd1 45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473. E. As adj. ( -- ˚) having one's senses, mind or heart as such & such S i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚); v.269 (id.); A i.70 (id) & passim (id.); A i.70 (saŋvut˚) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well -- composed); PvA 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart). F. Some compounds: -- gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S i.154; Dh 375. -- gutti keeping watch over the senses, self -- restraint DhA iv.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a J i.78; b A v.34, 38; b Ps i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c S v.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. -- bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā); M iii.298. -- saŋvara restraint or subjugation of the senses D ii.281; M i.269, 346; S i.54; A iii.360; iv.99; v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq.
Indhana
Indhana (nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1] firewood, fuel J iv.27 (adj. an˚ without fuel, aggi); v.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.
Ibbha
Ibbha (adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādâpaccā D i.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M i.334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA i.254, (also at J vi.215).
Iriṇa
Iriṇa (nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J vi.560 (= niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa.
Iriyati
Iriyati [fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M i.74, 75; S i.53 (dukkhaŋ aticca iriyati); iv.71; A iii.451; v.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th 1,276; J iii.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DA i.70.
Iriyanā
Iriyanā (f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716.
Iriyā
Iriyā (f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M i.81; Sn 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana). -- patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps ii.225 & DA i.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. -- Vin i.39; ii.146 (˚sampanna); Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple); S v.78 (cattāro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225, 226; Nd2 s. v.; J i.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104, 128, 290, 396; DhA i.9; iv.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604.
Irubbeda
Irubbeda the Rig -- veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA i.247; SnA 447.
Illiyā
Illiyā (f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J v.259; vi.50.
Illī
Illī (f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one -- edged sword J v.259.
Illīyituŋ
Illīyituŋ v. l. for allīyituŋ at J v.154.
Iva
Iva (indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh 1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J i.295; SnA 12 (= opamma -- vacanaŋ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic -- metathetic form viya (q. v.).
-- 123 --
Isi
Isi [Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. -- Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaŋ S ii.280 & isīnaŋ S i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065] -- 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S i.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaŋ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaŋ dhajo); A ii.24, 51; Vin iv.15 = 22 (˚bhāsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev˚ divine Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi -- nāmakā ye keci isi -- pabbajjaŋ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā); Dh 281; J i.17 (v.90: isayo n' atthi me samā of Buddha); J v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (= yama -- niyam' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isayo PvA 98); ii.133 (= jhān' ādīnaŋ guṇānaŋ esanatthena isi PvA 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaŋ sīlakkhandh' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isiŋ PvA 265); Miln 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika); DA i.266 (gen. isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. -- 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaŋ pubbakā isayo mantānaŋ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i. 245; D i.104, 238; A iii.224, iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu. -- nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). -- pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA i.105; iv.55; PvA 162. -- vāta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. -- sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M i.386; S i.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 211 (= buddha -- isinaŋ Vipassi -- ādīnaŋ sattamo VvA 105).
Isikā (isīkā)
Isikā (isīkā) (f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D i.77, cp. DA i.222; J vi.67 (isikā).
Isitta
Isitta (nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi -- ship D i.104 (= isi -- bhāva DA i.274).
Issati
Issati [denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)/ratai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy J iii.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. ˚ikā A ii.203. -- pp. issita (q. v.).
Issattha
Issattha (nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. -- Bdhgh. in a strange way dissects it as "usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaŋ hoti" (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] -- 1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) M i.85; iii.1; S i.100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. explns. by usu -- sippaŋ K. S. p. 318); Sn 617 (˚ŋ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaŋ SnA 466); J vi.81; Sdhp 390. -- 2. (m.) an archer Miln 250, 305, 352, 418.
Issatthaka
Issatthaka [issattha + ka] an archer Miln 419.
Issara
Issara [Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A iv.90; Sn 552; J i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada); Miln 253 (an˚ without a ruler); DhsA 141; DA i.111; PvA 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, 431. -- 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D iii.28; M ii.222 = A i.173; Vism 598.
Issariya
Issariya [fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, domi- nion (Syn. ādhipacca) D iii.190; S i.43, 100 (˚mada); v.342 (issariy -- âdhipacca); A i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205, 249; iii.38; iv.263; Sn 112; Dh 73; Ud 18; Ps ii.171, 176; J i.156; v.443; DhA ii.73; VvA 126 (for ādhipacca) PvA 42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, 583.
Issariyatā
Issariyatā (f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp 422.
Issā
Issā1 (f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill -- will D ii.277 (˚macchariya); iii.44 (id.); M i.15; S ii.260; A i.95, 105 (˚mala), 299; ii.203; iv.8 (˚saññojana), 148, 349, 465; v.42 sq., 156, 310; Sn 110; J v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa); Pv ii.37; Vv 155; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 380, 391; Dhs 1121, 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (def.); PvA 24, 46, 87; DhA ii.76; Miln 155; Sdhp 313, 510. -- pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S ii.260; Miln 155; PvA 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata.
Issā
Issā2 (f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya -- mṛga] in issammiga (= issāmiga) J v.410, & issāmiga J v.431, a species of antelope, cp. J v.425 issāsinga the antlers of this antelope.
Issāyanā
Issāyanā (& Issāyitatta) [abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470.
Issāsa
Issāsa [Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin iv.124; M iii.1; A iv.423 (issāso vā issās' antevāsī vā); J ii.87; iv.494; Miln 232; DA i.156.
Issāsin
Issāsin [Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning "bow" + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J iv.494 (= issāsa C.).
Issita
Issita [pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J v.44.
Issukin
Issukin (adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin); D iii.45, 246; M i.43, 96; S iv.241; A iii.140, 335; iv.2; Dh 262; J iii.259; Pv. ii.34; Pug 19, 23; DhA iii.389; PvA 174. See also an˚.
Iha
Iha (indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place "here" Sn 460.
Ī. Īgha
Īgha (?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble, rage etc. See discussed under nigha1] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e. g. J iii.343 (= niddukkha C.); v.343.
Īti & Ītī
Īti & Ītī (f.) [Sk. īti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk. ītay' opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. <-> Sn 51; J i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. -- anīti sound condition, health, safety A iv.238; Miln 323.
Ītika
Ītika (adj.) [fr. īti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an˚ .
Ītiha
Ītiha a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an˚.
Īdisa
Īdisa (adj.) [Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so -- looking] such like, such DhsA 400 (f. ˚ī); PvA 50, (id.) 51.
Īriṇa
Īriṇa (nt.) [= iriṇa, q. v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa] barren soil, desert D i.248; A v.156 sq.; J v.70 (= sukkha -- kantāra C.); vi.560; VvA 334.
Īrita
Īrita [pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati] -- 1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by
-- 124 --
the wind); J i.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv ii.123 (malut'erita); PvA 156 (has erita for ī˚); VvA 177 (= calita). -- 2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12.
Īsa
Īsa [fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e. g. Jtm 3181] lord, owner, ruler J iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa -- sīha C.); VvA 168. f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha.
Īsaka
Īsaka [dimin. of īsā] a pole J ii.152; vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole).
Īsakaŋ
Īsakaŋ (adv.) [nt. of īsaka] a little, slightly, easily M i. 450; J i.77; vi.456; DA i.252, 310; VvA 36; Vism 136, 137, 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586.
Īsā
Īsā (f.) [Vedic īṣā] the pole of a plough or of a carriage S i.104 (nangal' īsā read with v. l. for nangala -- sīsā T.), 172, 224 (˚mukha): A iv.191 (rath˚); Sn 77; J i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209; Ud 42; Miln 27; SnA 146; VvA 269 (˚mūlaŋ = rathassa uro). -- danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough -- pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352; M i.414; Vv 209 = 439 (= ratha -- īsā -- sadisa -- danto); J vi.490 = 515.
Īsāka
Īsāka (adj.) [fr. īsā] having a pole (said of a carriage) J vi.252.
Īhati
Īhati [Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh.) J vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA i.139; VvA 35.
Īhā
Īhā (f.) [fr. īh] exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir -- īha void of activity Miln 413.
U. U
U the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).
Ukkaŋsa
Ukkaŋsa [fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaŋsa) D i.54 (ukkaŋs -- âvakkaŋsa = hāyana -- vaḍḍhana DA i.165); M i.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaŋsena par excellence, exceedingly); PvA 228 (˚vasena, with ref. to devatās; v. l. SS okk˚).
Ukkaŋsaka
Ukkaŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ukkaŋsa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M i.19 (att˚; opp. para -- vambhin); J ii.152. Cp. sāmukkaŋsika.
Ukkaŋsati
Ukkaŋsati [ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise M i.498; J iv.108. -- pp. ukkaṭṭha. -- ukkaŋseti in same meaning M i.402 sq. (attānaŋ u. paraŋ vambheti); A ii.27; Nd2 141.
Ukkaŋsanā
Ukkaŋsanā (f.) [abstr. of ukkaŋsati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self -- exaltation, self -- praise M i.402 (opp. para -- vambhanā); Nd2 505 (id.).
Ukkaṭṭha
Ukkaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of ukkaŋsati] -- 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna, in phrase hīna -- m -- ukkaṭṭha -- majjhime Vin iv.7; J i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); SnA 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaŋ ukkaṭṭhā); VvA 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka). -- 2. large, comprehensive, great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak' odanaŋ gaṇhāti catu -- bhāgaŋ khādanaŋ vā tadūpiyaŋ vā byañjanaŋ). -- 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism 37 (ati -- ukkaṭṭha -- desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail SnA 181. -- 4. arrogant, insolent J v. 16. -- 5. used as nom at J i.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". -- an˚ Vism 64 (˚cīvara). -- niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. -- pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376.
Ukkaṭṭhatā
Ukkaṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha] superiority, eminence, exalted state J iv.303 (opp. hīnatā).
Ukkaṭṭhita
Ukkaṭṭhita [for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati] boiled up, boiling, seething A iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v. l. ukkuṭṭhito); J iv.118 (v. l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss).
Ukkaṇṭhati
Ukkaṇṭhati [fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one's neck for anything; i. e. long for, be hungry after, etc.] to long for, to be dissatisfied, to fret J i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); DhsA 407; PvA 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi, v. l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali). -- pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q. v.). Cp. pari˚.
Ukkaṇṭhanā
Ukkaṇṭhanā (f.) [fr. ukkaṇṭhati] emotion, commotion D ii.239.
Ukkaṇṭhā
Ukkaṇṭhā (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88; PvA 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152.
Ukkaṇṭhi
Ukkaṇṭhi (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, dissatisfaction ThA 239 (= arati).
Ukkaṇṭhikā
Ukkaṇṭhikā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita] = ukkaṇṭhi, i. e. longing, state of distress, pain J iii.643.
Ukkaṇṭhita
Ukkaṇṭhita [pp. of ukkaṇṭhati] dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting J i.196; ii.92, 115; iii.185; Miln 281; DhA iv.66, 225; PvA 13 (an˚), 55, 187.
Ukkaṇṇa
Ukkaṇṇa (adj.) [ud + kaṇṇa] having the ears erect (?) J vi.559.
Ukkaṇṇaka
Ukkaṇṇaka (ad.) [ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. "with ears out" or is it ukkandaka?] a certain disease (? mange) of jackals, S ii.230, 271; S. A. ʻ the fur falls off from the whole body ʼ.
Ukkantati
Ukkantati [ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva); J i.164; iv.210 (v. l. for okk˚); v.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni˚), 211 (= chinditvā).
Ukkapiṇḍaka
Ukkapiṇḍaka [etymology unknown] only in pl.; vermin, Vin i.211 = 239. See comment at Vin. Texts ii.70.
Ukkantikaŋ
Ukkantikaŋ (nt. adv.), in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.
Ukkamati
Ukkamati (or okk˚ which is v. l. at all passages quoted) [ud + kamati from kram ] to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from A iii.301 (maggā); J iii.531; iv. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DA i.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti J ii.3.
Ukkamana
Ukkamana (nt.) [fr. ukkamati] stepping away from Vism 374.
Ukkala
Ukkala in phrase ukkala -- vassa -- bhañña S iii.73 = A ii.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as "the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old" (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i. e. ukkalā + avassa˚ [*avaśya˚], one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman M iii.78 reads Okkalā (v. l. Ukkalā) -- Vassa -- Bhaññā, all as N. pr.
Ukkalāpa
Ukkalāpa see uklāpa.
-- 125 --
Ukkalissati
Ukkalissati [= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati] to become depraved, to revoke(?) Miln 143.
Ukkā
Ukkā (f.) [Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr. a)/flac (= lamprw_s torch Hesychius), velxa/nos (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus, Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery] 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch D i.49, 108; S ii.264; Th 2, 488 (˚ûpama); J i.34 (dhamm -- okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428; ThA 287; DA i.148; DhA i.42, 205; PvA 154. Esp. as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass M i.128, 365; Nd2 40Ie; DhA i.126; Sdhp 573. -- 2. a furnace or forge of a smith A i.210, 257; J vi.437; see also below ˚mukha. <-> 3. a meteor: see below ˚pāta. -- dhāra a torch -- bearer Sn 335; It 108; Miln 1. -- pāta "falling of a firebrand", a meteor D i.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaŋ patanaŋ DA i.95); J i.374; vi.476; Miln 178. -- mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A i.257; J vi.217 (= kammārɔuddhana C.), 574; Sn 686; DhA ii.250.
Ukkācanā
Ukkācanā (f.) [fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita] en- lightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapanā, v. l. ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā).
Ukkācita
Ukkācita [pp. either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1] enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up A i.72, 286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained).
Ukkāceti
Ukkāceti [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole] to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets J ii.70 (v. l. ussiñcati).
Ukkāmeti
Ukkāmeti [Caus. of ukkamati] to cause to step aside J vi.11.
Ukkāra
Ukkāra [fr. ud + kṛ "do out"] dung, excrement J iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra -- bhūmi dung -- hill J i.5, 146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305; Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa); DhA iii.208. Cp. uccāra.
Ukkāsati
Ukkāsati [ud + kāsati of kas to cough] to "ahem"! to cough, to clear one's throat Vin ii.222; iv.16; M ii.4; A v.65; aor. ukkāsi J i.161, 217. -- pp. ukkāsita.
Ukkāsikā
Ukkāsikā (f.?) [doubtful] at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vin Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh's expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? Cp. S iii.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk. varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. "rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction".
Ukkāsita
Ukkāsita [pp. of ukkāsati] coughed, clearing one's throat, coughed out, hawking D i.89; Bu i.52 (+ khipita) <-> ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat D i.50; J i.119; DhA i.250 (+ khipita˚).
Ukkiṇṇa
Ukkiṇṇa [pp. of ud + kṛ dig2] dug up or out D i.105; J iv.106; Miln 330; DA i.274 (= khāta).
Ukkiledeti
Ukkiledeti [Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati] to take the dirt out, to clean out DA i.255 (dosaŋ); SnA 274 (rāgaŋ; v. l. BB. uggileti).
Ukkujja
Ukkujja (adj.) [ud + kujja] set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja A i.131; S v.89 (ukkujjɔâvakujja); Pug 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214).
Ukkujjati
Ukkujjati (˚eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181; ii.126 (pattaŋ), 269 (bhikkhuŋ); mostly in phrase nikkujjitaŋ ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up one who has fallen" D i.85, 110; ii.132, 152; Sn p. 15 (= uparimukhaŋ karoti DA i.228 = SnA 155).
Ukkujjana
Ukkujjana (nt.) [fr. ukkujjati] raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚).
Ukkuṭika
Ukkuṭika [fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. "bending up". The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e. g. Av. S i.315] a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See Dial. i.231 n. 4. -- Vin i.45 (˚ŋ nisīdati); iii.228; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55; Vism 62, 104, 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; DhA i.201, 217; ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223. -- padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka -- prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dh 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit) D i.167; M i.78, 515; A i.296; ii.206; J i.493; iii.235; iv.299; Dh 141 (= ukkuṭika -- bhāvena āraddha -- viriyo DhA iii.78).
Ukkuṭṭhi
Ukkuṭṭhi (f.) [fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati] shouting out, acclamation J ii.367; vi.41; Bu i.35; Miln 21; Vism 245; DhA ii.43; VvA 132 (˚sadda).
Ukkusa
Ukkusa [see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453] an osprey J iv.291 (˚rāja), 392.
Ukkūla
Ukkūla (adj.) [ud + kūla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) A i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla -- sama Lal. V. 340.
Ukkoṭana
Ukkoṭana (nt.) [fr. ud + *kuṭ to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked] crookedness, perverting justice, taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) D i.5; iii.176; S v.473; A ii.209, v.206; DA i.79 = Pug A 240 ("assāmike sāmike kātuŋ lañcagahaṇaŋ").
Ukkoṭanaka
Ukkoṭanaka (adj.) [fr. ukkoṭana] belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94.
Ukkoṭeti
Ukkoṭeti [denom. fr. *ukkoṭ -- ana] to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged, Vin ii.94, 303; iv.126; J ii.387; DA i.5.
Ukkhali
Ukkhali (˚lī) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) J i.68, 235; v. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla, in comp.); DhA i.136; ii.5; iii.371; iv.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next.
Ukkhalikā
Ukkhalikā (f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta -- pacana- bhājanaŋ ThA 29); DhA iv.98 (˚kāla); DhsA 376.
Ukkhā
Ukkhā(?) [can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?] in ukkha- sataŋ dānaŋ, given at various times of the day (meaning = e(kato/mbh?) S ii.264 (v. l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataŋ d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaŋ?). S A: paṇītabhojana -- bharitānaŋ mahā -- ukkhalinaŋ sataŋ dānaŋ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. v.38). Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift.
Ukkhita
Ukkhita [pp. of ukṣ sprinkle] besmeared, besprinkled J iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). Cp. okkhita.
Ukkhitta
Ukkhitta [pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law "suspended" Vin iv.218; J iii.487. -- ˚āsika with drawn sword M i.377; S iv.173; J i.393; DhsA 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -- paligha having the obstacles removed M i.139; A iii.84; Dh 398 = Sn 622 (= avijjā -- palighassa ukkhittatāya u. SnA 467 = DhA iv.161). -- sira with uplifted head Vism 162.
Ukkhittaka
Ukkhittaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ukkhitta] a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97, 121; ii.61, 173, 213.
Ukkhipati
Ukkhipati [ut + khipati, kṣip]. To hold up, to take up J i.213; iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaŋ); PvA 265. A
-- 126 --
t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309; Pug 33. -- ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported J i.52; ii.15, 38; iii.285, 436. -- pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. "upright" Vism 126.
Ukkhipana
Ukkhipana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] 1. pushing upwards J i.163. -- 2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya).
Ukkheṭita
Ukkheṭita [pp. of ud + kheṭ or *khel, see kheḷa] spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = iv.27.
Ukkhepa
Ukkhepa (adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + kṣip] (adj.) throwing away DhA iv.59 (˚dāya a throw -- away donation, tip). -- (m.) lifting up raising J i.394 (cel˚); vi.508; DA i.273; dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347.
Ukkhepaka
Ukkhepaka (adj.) [fr. ukkhepa] throwing (up); ˚ŋ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = iv.195 (piṇḍ˚).
Ukkhepana
Ukkhepana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] suspension J iii.487.
Ukkhepanā
Ukkhepanā (f.) [= last] throwing up, provocation, sneering Vbh 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29.
Ukkhepaniya
Ukkhepaniya (adj.) [ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepa- nīyaŋ karma Divy 329] referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49, 53, 98, 143, 168; ii.27, 226, 230, 298: A i.99.
Uklāpa (ukkalāpa)
Uklāpa (ukkalāpa) (adj.) [cp. Sk. ut -- kalāpayati to let go] - 1. deserted J ii.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv. ll. uklāpa & ullāpa). -- 2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA iii.168 (ukkalāpa).
Ugga
Ugga1 (adj.) [Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. a)ve/cw, Goth. wahsjan "to wax", also Lat. augeo & P. oja] mighty, huge, strong, fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord D i.103; S i.51 = VvA 116 (uggateja "the fiery heat"); J iv.496; v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Miln 331; DhA ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (id.). <-> Cp. sam˚. As Np. at Vism 233 & J i.94. -- putta a nobleman, mighty lord S i.185 ("high born warrior" trsl.); J vi.353 (= amacca -- putta C.); Th 1, 1210.
Ugga
Ugga2 = uggamana, in aruṇ -- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272.
Uggacchati
Uggacchati [ud + gam] to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Th 1, 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise VvA 75; Pv iv.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Miln 376. -- pp. uggata (q. v.).
Uggajjati
Uggajjati [ud + gajjati] to shout out Nd1 172.
Uggaṇhāti
Uggaṇhāti [ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti SnA 561); imper. uggaṇha J ii.30 (sippaŋ) & uggaṇhāhi Miln 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Sn 832, 845; Nd1 173. -- Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta -- yogaŋ = akari PvA 198); ger. uggahetvā J v.282, VvA 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaŋ); infin. uggahetuŋ VvA 138 (sippaŋ to study a craft). -- Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct J v. 217; vi.353. -- pp. uggahita (q. v.). See also uggahāyati. -- A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DA i 32 (cp. uggāhaka).
Uggata
Uggata [pp. of uggacchati] come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted J iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata -- sabhāva samiddha PvA 220); VvA 217 (˚mānasa); DA i.248; PvA 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i. e. emaciated, for upphāsulika). Cp. acc˚.
Uggatta
Uggatta in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚, thus at Pv iii.32; PvA 10, 188.
Uggatthana
Uggatthana at J vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti] lit. "tinkling", i. e. a bangle.
Uggama
Uggama [fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama] rising up Sdhp 594.
Uggamana
Uggamana (˚na) (nt.) [fr. ud + gam] going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) D i.10, 240; S ii.268 (suriy˚); J iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚); DA i.95 (= udayana); DhA i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (id.); VvA 326 (oggaman˚); PvA 109 (aruṇ˚). Cp. ugga2 & uggama.
Uggaha
Uggaha (adj) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] -- 1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa). -- 2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq. neg. an˚ Sn 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Cp. dhanuggaha.
Uggahaṇa
Uggahaṇa (nt.) [fr. uggaṇhāti] learning, taking up, studying PvA 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277.
Uggahāyati
Uggahāyati [poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati] to take hold of, to take up Sn 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 91). -- ger. uggahāya Sn 837.
Uggahita
Uggahita [pp. of uggaṇhāti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; J iii.168 (˚sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi 76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha).
Uggahetar
Uggahetar [n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti] one who takes up, acquires or learns A iv.196.
Uggāra
Uggāra [ud + gṛ or *g&lcircle; to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up] spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DA i.41; KhA 61.
Uggāhaka
Uggāhaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti] one who is eager to learn J v.148 [cp. M Vastu iii.373 ogrāhaka in same context].
Uggāhamāna
Uggāhamāna see uggaṇhāti.
Uggirati
Uggirati1 [Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraŋ udgirati Jtm 3126. -- The by -- form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ, roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DA i.41 (uggāraŋ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589.
Uggirati
Uggirati2 [cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = DhA iii.50 (talasattikaŋ expld. by uccāreti); J i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam˚.
Uggilati
Uggilati = uggirati1, i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M i.393; S iv.323; J iii.529; Miln 5; PvA 283.
Uggīva
Uggīva (nt.) [ud + gīva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging down J vi.562 (uggīvañ cɔâpi aŋsato = aŋsakūṭe pacchi -- lagganakaŋ C.).
Ugghaŋseti
Ugghaŋseti [ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaŋsati1] to rub Vin ii.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q. v.).
Ugghaṭita
Ugghaṭita (adj.) [pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, 26 and phrase at M Vastu iii.260 udghaṭitajña] striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd. ˚ññū of quick understanding A ii.135; Pug 41; Nett 7 -- 9, 125; DA i.291.
Ugghaṭeti
Ugghaṭeti [ud + ghaṭati] to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid.
Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?)
Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?) [should be pp. of ugghaŋsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaŋsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti] knocked, crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa -- pāda
-- 127 --
foot -- sore Sn 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa -- pādatala etc. SnA 582); J iv.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha -- vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa -- pāda C. not to the point).
Uggharati
Uggharati [ud + kṣar] to ooze Th 1, 394 = DhA iii.117.
Ugghāṭana
Ugghāṭana (nt.?) [fr. ugghāṭeti] that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives "rope & bucket of a well" as meaning (kavāṭaŋ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā .
Ugghāṭita
Ugghāṭita [pp. of ugghāṭeti] opened Miln 55; DhA i.134.
Ugghāṭeti
Ugghāṭeti [for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130] to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaŋ); iv.37; J ii.31; vi.68; Miln 140 (bhava -- paṭisandhiŋ), 371; Vism 374. -- Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened J v.381.
Ugghāta
Ugghāta [ud + ghāta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii. 276 (yān˚); J vi.253 (an˚); DhA iii.283 (yān˚).
Ugghāti
Ugghāti (f.) [fr. ud + ghāta] -- 1. shaking, shock VvA 36. -- 2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Sn 828; Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghāta˚).
Ugghātita
Ugghātita [pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta] struck, killed A iii.68.
Ugghosanā
Ugghosanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā] procla- mation DA i.310.
Ugghoseti
Ugghoseti [ud + ghoseti] to shout out, announce, proclaim J i.75; DhA ii.94; PvA 127.
Ucca
Ucca (adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up] high (opp. avaca low) D i.194; M ii.213; A v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaŋ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaŋ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraŋ katvā PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA i.135; PvA 176. -- âvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70, 203; J iv.115, 363 (= mahaggha -- samaggha C. p. 366); Sn 703, 714, 792, 959; Dh 83; Nd1 93, 467; Vv 121 (= vividha VvA 60); 311. -- kulīnatā high birth A iii.48 (cp. uccā˚).
Uccaka
Uccaka (adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair).
Uccatta
Uccatta (nt.) [fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaŋ] height J iii.318.
Uccaya
Uccaya [fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya] heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dh 115, 191, 192; Vv 4711; 827 (= cetiya VvA 321); DhA iii.5, 9; DhsA 41 (pāpassa). -- siluccaya a mountain Th 1, 692; J i.29 (v.209); vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63.
Uccā
Uccā (˚ -- ) (adv.) [cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaŋ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl. -- In BSk. we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Av. Ś iii.117) as well as uccaŋ (uccaŋgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds. -- kaṇerukā a tall female elephant M i.178. -- kāḷārikā id. M i.178 (v. l. ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred). -- kula a high, noble family Pv iii.116 (= uccā khattiya -- kul -- âdino PvA 176). -- kulīnatā birth in a high -- class family, high rank M iii.37; VvA 32. -- sadda a loud noise D i.143, 178; A iii.30. -- sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i. 192; D i.5, 7; cp. DA i.78.
Uccāra
Uccāra [Ud + car] discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ŋ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); DhA ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine D i.70; M i.83; J i.5; ii.19.
Uccāranā
Uccāranā (f.) [fr. uccāreti] lifting up, raising Vin iii.121.
Uccārita
Uccārita [pp. of uccāreti] -- 1. uttered, let out PvA 280 (akkharāni). -- 2. lifted, raised ThA 255.
Uccāreti
Uccāreti [ud + cāreti, Caus. of car] to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81; iv.147 = DhA iii.50; M i.135. -- pp. uccārita (q. v.).
Uccālinga
Uccālinga [etym.?] a maw -- worm Vin iii.38, 112; J ii.146.
Uccināti
Uccināti [ud + cināti] to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73; ii.285 (aor. uccini); J iv.9; Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana -- vasena gahetvāna PvA 185); Dpvs iv.2.
Ucchanga
Ucchanga [Sk. utsanga, ts > cch like Sk. utsahate > BSk. ucchahate see ussahati] the hip, the lap Vin i.225; M i. 366; A i.130 (˚pañña); J i.5, 308; ii.412; iii.22; iv.38, 151; Pug 31; Vism 279; DhA ii.72.
Ucchādana
Ucchādana (nt.) [ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing D i.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc˚ -- dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at M i. 500; S iv.83; J i.146 & passim; A i.62; ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386; It 111; Th 2, 89 (nahāpan˚); Miln 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DA i.88.
Ucchādeti
Ucchādeti [fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana] to rub the body with perfumes J vi.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DA i.88.
Ucchiṭṭha
Ucchiṭṭha [pp. of ud + śiṣ] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaŋ); iv.266 (id.); J ii.83 (bhattaŋ ucchiṭṭhaŋ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ŋ piṇḍaŋ), 388; vi.508; Miln 315; DhA i.52; ii.85; iii.208; PvA 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaŋ). At J iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha. -- an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3. -- See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka.
Ucchiṭṭhaka
Ucchiṭṭhaka (fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha J iv.386; vi.63, 509.
Ucchindati
Ucchindati [ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S v.432 (bhavataṇhaŋ), A iv.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); J v.383; Dh 285. <-> Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S iv.309; J v.242, 467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi). -- pp. ucchinna (q. v.).
Ucchinna
Ucchinna [pp. of ucchindati] broken up, destroyed S iii. 10; A v.32; Sn 746. Cp. sam˚.
Ucchu
Ucchu [Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu] sugar -- cane Vin iv.35; A iii.76; iv.279; Miln 46; DhA iv.199 (˚ūnaŋ yanta sugar -- cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124. -- agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172. -- khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar -- cane Vv 3326. -- khādana eating s. c. Vism 70. -- khetta sugar -- cane field J i.339; VvA 256. -- gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar -- cane, Batatas Paniculata J i.339; vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika). -- pāla watchman of s. -- c. VvA 256. -- pīḷana, cane -- pressing, Asl. 274. -- puṭa sugar -- cane basket J iv.363. -- bīja seed of s. -- c. A i.32; v.213. -- yantra a sugar -- mill J i.339. -- rasa s. -- c. juice Vin i.246; Vism 489; VvA 180 -- vāta, Asl. 274. -- sālā, Asl. 274.
Uccheda
Uccheda [fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) D i.34, 55; S iv.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160; DA i.120. -- diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as opp. to sassata -- or atta -- diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) S ii.20; iii.99, 110 sq; Ps i.150, 158; Nd1 248 (opp. sassati˚); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta˚). -- vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235; iii.2; D i.34, 55; S ii.18; iv.401; A iv.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. -- vādin = ˚vāda Nett 111; J v.244.
-- 128 --
Ucchedana
Ucchedana (adj.) [fr. ud + chid] cutting off, destroying; f. ˚anī J v.16 (surā).
Ucchedin
Ucchedin (adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda J v.241.
Ucchepaka
Ucchepaka (nt.) [= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭha- bhatta] leavings of food M ii.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682).
Uju & Ujju
Uju & Ujju (adj.) [Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. o) re/gw to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct; straightforward, honest, upright D iii.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba -- jimha -- vanka -- kuṭilabhāvɔâpagama -- hetutāya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila); DA i.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA i.288 (cittaŋ ujuŋ akuṭilaŋ nibbisevanaŋ karoti); VvA 281 (˚koṭi -- vanka); PvA 123 (an˚). -- angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an˚ not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J v.40 (= kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīra C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita -- agarahitangin C.). -- gata walking straight, of upright life M i.46; A iii.285 sq. (˚citta); v.290 sq.; Sn 350 (ujju˚), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju˚, see DhA ii.234 for interpretation). -- gāmin, neg. an˚ going crooked, a snake J iv.330. -- cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350. -- diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Miln 257. -- paṭipanna living uprightly D i.192; S iv.304; v.343; Vism 219. -- magga the straight road D i.235; Vin v.149; It 104; J i.344; vi.252; DhA ii.192. -- bhāva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. -- bhūta straight, upright S i.100, 170; ii.279; v.384, 404; A ii.57; iv.292; J i.94; v.293 (an˚); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta -- jimha -- vankaKutīla -- bhāva -- karānaŋ kilesānaŋ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta PvA 51). -- vaŋsa straight lineage, direct descendency J v.251. -- vāta a soft wind Miln 283. -- vipaccanīka in direct opposition D i.1; M i.402; DA i.38.
Ujuka & Ujjuka
Ujuka & Ujjuka (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M i.124; S i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna), 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165; J i.163; v.297 (opp. khujja); DhA i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321. -- anujjuka crooked, not straight S iv.299; J iii.318.
Ujukatā
Ujukatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ujuka] straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq.
Ujutā
Ujutā (f.) [abstr. of uju] straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51.
Ujjagghati
Ujjagghati [ud + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128; Th 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati ThA 78); A iii.91 (ujjh˚, v. l. ujj˚) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiŋ paharitvā mahāhasitaŋ hasati Pug A 249).
Ujjangala
Ujjangala [ud + jangala] hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place D ii.146 (˚nagaraka, trsl. "town in the midst of a jungle", cp. Dial. ii.161); J i.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaŋsena jangala i. e. exceedingly dusty or sandy, dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya -- thaddhabhūmibhāga at PvA 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala, e. g. M Vastu ii.207.
Ujjala
Ujjala (adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J i.220; Dāvs ii.63.
Ujjalati
Ujjalati [ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; VvA 161 (+ jotati). -- Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāŋ ujjālayiŋ); VvA 51 (padīpaŋ).
Ujjava
Ujjava (adj.) [ud + java] "running up", in cpd. ujjav -- ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv. 300, expld. by "yattakaŋ patthena (patthana?) añcitaŋ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite".
Ujjavati
Ujjavati [ud + javati] to go up -- stream Vin ii.301.
Ujjavanikāya
Ujjavanikāya instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. [ud + javanaka, q. v.] up -- stream, lit "running up" Vin ii.290; iv.65 (in expln. of uddhaŋgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya).
Ujjahati
Ujjahati [ud + jahati] to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha S i.188; Th 2, 19; Sn 342.
Ujju & Ujjuka
Ujju & Ujjuka see uju & ujuka.
Ujjota
Ujjota [ud + *jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate] light, lustre J i.183 (˚kara); Miln 321.
Ujjotita
Ujjotita [pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti] illumined Dāvs v.53.
Ujjhaggati
Ujjhaggati see ujjagghati.
Ujjhaggikā
Ujjhaggikā (f.) [fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies] loud laughter Vin ii.213, cp. iv.187.
Ujjhati
Ujjhati [Sk. ujjhati, ujjh] -- 1. to forsake, leave, give up J vi.138; Dāvs ii.86. -- 2. to sweep or brush away J vi.296. -- pp. ujjhita (q. v.).
Ujjhatti
Ujjhatti (f.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud -- dhyāti] irritation, discontent A iv.223, 467 (v. l. ujj˚); cp. ujjhāna.
Ujjhāna
Ujjhāna (nt.) [ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?] -- 1. taking offence, captiousness Dh 253 (= paresaŋ randha -- gavesitāya DhA iii.377); Miln 352 (an˚ -- bahula). -- 2. complaining, wailing J iv.287. -- saññin, -- saññika irritable S i.23; Th 1, 958; Vin ii.214, cp. iv.194; Dpvs ii.6; DhA iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability).
Ujjhāpana
Ujjhāpana (nt.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna] stirring up, provoking J v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma).
Ujjhāpanaka
Ujjhāpanaka (adj.) [fr. ujjhāpana] one who stirs up an- other to discontent Vin iv.38.
Ujjhāpeti
Ujjhāpeti [Caus. of ujjhāyati] to harass, vex, irritate M i. 126; S i.209 ("give occasion for offence"); Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356); J v.286; PvA 266.
Ujjhāyati
Ujjhāyati [ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G. pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava -- dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically] to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53, 62, 73; ii.207; iv.226; S i.232 & passim. -- S i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); J ii.15; DhA ii.20; aor. ujjhāyi J i.475; DhA ii.88; inf. ujjhātuŋ J ii.355. <-> Caus. ujjhāpeti (q. v.).
Ujjhita
Ujjhita [pp. of ujjhati] destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away M i.296 (+ avakkhitta); Th 1, 315 (itthi); 2, 386 (cp. ThA 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano); Dh 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings DhA i.445); J iii.499; v.302; vi.51.
Uñcha & Uñchā
Uñcha & Uñchā (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to uñch. Neu- mann's etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S ii. 281; A i.36; iii.66 sq., 104; Vin iii.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J iii.389; iv.23, 28, 434, 471 (˚ya, dat. = phalâphalɔatthāya C.); ThA 235, 242. Cp. samuñchaka. -- cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J ii.272; iii.37, 515; v.3; DA i.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. -- cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA i.270, 271). -- patta the gleaning -- bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato "fond of
-- 129 --
that which has come into the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren "contented with whatever fills the bowl"). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) S ii.281, so S A.
Uñchati
Uñchati [fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati).
Uññā
Uññā (f.) [= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññā- tabba?] contempt Vin iv.241; Vbh 353 sq. (att˚).
Uññātabba
Uññātabba (adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock -- phrase "daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo" S i.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaŋ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J v.63 mā naŋ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v. l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā˚).
Uṭṭitvā
Uṭṭitvā at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (= oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning "putting into a sling, tying or binding up".
Uṭṭepaka
Uṭṭepaka one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚). See remarks on uṭṭepeti.
Uṭṭepeti
Uṭṭepeti in phrase kāke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti = oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also uṭṭepaka.
Uṭṭhapana
Uṭṭhapana see vo˚.
Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti
Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug 51. -- pot. uṭṭhaheyya S i.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaŋ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152). -- imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61; J iv.433. -- ppr. uṭṭhahanto M i.86; S i.217; J i.476. -- aor. uṭṭhahi J i.117; PvA 75. -- ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA 4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn 401. -- inf. uṭṭhātuŋ J i.187. <-> Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. -- pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. -- Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti.
Uṭṭhahāna
Uṭṭhahāna [ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing one- self; an˚ sluggish, lazy Dh 280 (= ayāyāmanto DhA iii. 409); cp. anuṭṭhahaŋ S i.217.
Uṭṭhātar
Uṭṭhātar [n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S i.214; A iv.285, 288, 322; Sn 187; J vi.297. -- an˚ one who is without energy S i.217; Sn 96.
Uṭṭhāna
Uṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] -- 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D ii.134 (sīha -- seyyaŋ kappesi uṭṭhāna -- saññaŋ manasikaritvā); Dh 280 (˚kāla); J i.392 (an˚ -- seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ -- uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA i.17. -- 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. ( -- ˚) producing J i.47 (kapp˚); vi.459; Miln 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaŋ atthi). -- 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M i.86; A i.94; ii.135 (˚phala); iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā); It 66 (˚adhigataŋ dhanaŋ earned by industry); Pv iv.324; Pug 51 (˚phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (˚viriya); PvA 129 (+ viriya). -- an˚ want of energy, sluggishness A iv.195; Dh 241. <-> Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha -- vuṭṭhānaŋ J i.114. See also vuṭṭh˚, and cp. pariy˚.
Uṭṭhānaka
Uṭṭhānaka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] -- 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J i.377, 420 (satasahass˚); iii. 229 (id.); v.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. -- 2. energetic J vi.246.
Uṭṭhānavant
Uṭṭhānavant (adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh 24.
Uṭṭhāpeti
Uṭṭhāpeti [Caus. ii. of utthahati] -- 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaŋ (suriyaŋ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise J i.318; vi.330; Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaŋ). -- 2. to raise J vi.32 (paṭhaviŋ). <-> 3. to fit up J vi.445 (nāvaŋ). -- 4. to exalt, praise DA i.256. -- 5. to turn a person out DhA iv.69. -- See also vuṭṭhāpeti.
Uṭṭhāyaka
Uṭṭhāyaka (adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭha- hati] "getting -- up -- ish", i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna -- viriyasampannā ThA 267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā)
Uṭṭhāyika
Uṭṭhāyika (adj.) [= uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J ii.403 (satasahass˚).
Uṭṭhāyin
Uṭṭhāyin (adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā -- nipātin rising early & lying down late).
Uṭṭhāhaka
Uṭṭhāhaka (adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J v.448; f. ˚ikā A iii.38 (v. l. ˚āyikā); iv.266 sq.
Uṭṭhita
Uṭṭhita [pp. of uṭṭhahati] -- 1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73. -- 2. arisen, produced J i.36; Miln 155. -- 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J ii.61; Dh 168; Miln 213. -- an˚ S ii.264; Ps i.172. -- Cp. pariy˚. <-> Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D ii.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA 128.
Uḍḍayhana
Uḍḍayhana (nt.) [fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (˚velā = jhāyana -- kālo Pug A 187); KhA 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v. l. preferable uḍḍayh˚).
Uḍḍahati
Uḍḍahati [ud + ḍahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v. l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S iii.149, 150 (v. l. for ḍayhati); J iii.22 (udayhate); v.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati J i.48.
Uḍḍita
Uḍḍita [pp. of uḍḍeti2] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S i.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. "the world is all strung up").
Uḍḍeti
Uḍḍeti1 [ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning ("lay snares"), it may be a cpd. with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l > ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M i.364 (kāko maŋsapesiŋ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv. ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J v.256, 368, 417.
Uḍḍeti
Uḍḍeti2 [see discussion under uḍḍeti1] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. uḍḍhetvā). -- (b) to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chaḍḍayāmi gloss). -- pp. uḍḍita.
Uḍḍha
Uḍḍha ( -- ˚) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha] the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha "half of the fourth unit", i. e. three & a half (cp.
-- 130 --
diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha -- teyya 2 1/2) J v.417 sq. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs xii.53.
Uṇṇa
Uṇṇa (nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_) los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil -- mod] -- 1. wool A iii.37 = iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J ii.147; SnA 263 (patt˚). -- 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamukɔantare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D ii.18 = iii.144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti -- uṇṇāya. -- ja in uṇṇaja mukha J vi.218, meaning "rounded, swelling" (C. expls. by kañcanɔādāso viya paripuṇṇaŋ mukhaŋ). -- nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. "wool -- i. e. thread -- weaver", only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = A ii.73 = J ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C).
Uṇṇata
Uṇṇata (adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A ii.86; Sn 702 (an˚ care = uddhaccaŋ nɔāpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug A 229). Cp. unnata.
Uṇṇati
Uṇṇati (f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn 830; Nd1 158, 170; Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnati.
Uṇṇama
Uṇṇama [fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnama .
Uṇṇamati
Uṇṇamati [ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn 366, 829, 928; Nd1 169; J vi.346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn 206. Cp. unnamati.
Uṇṇī
Uṇṇī (f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin ii.108.
Uṇha
Uṇha (adj. -- n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu)/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill oneself DhA i.95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. "heat" & always in contrast to sītaŋ "cold" Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D ii.15 (opp. sīta); M i.85; A i.145 = 170 = J v.417 (sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā tiṇaŋ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn 52, 966 (acc ˚); Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita); J i.17 (v.93); Miln 410 (megho uṇhaŋ nibbāpeti); PvA 37 (ati˚). -- ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇḍu -- kambala -- silɔāsanaŋ uṇhākāraŋ dassesi, of Sakka's throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J i.330; v.92; DhA i.17, and passim. -- odaka hot water VvA 68. -- kalla glowing -- hot embers or ashes J ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. ˚kukkuḷavassa). -- kāla hot weather Vin ii.209.
Uṇhatta
Uṇhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism 171.
Uṇhīsa
Uṇhīsa [Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D i.7; ii.19 = iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dial. ii.16); J ii.88; Miln 330; DA i.89; DhsA 198.
Ut(t)aṇḍa
Ut(t)aṇḍa see uddaṇḍa.
Utu
Utu (m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] -- 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa -- utu occasion or time of the sun( -- rise) DhA i.165; utuŋ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraŋ utuŋ gaṇhāpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J iii.527; DA i.252. -- (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A iv.138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S v.51. -- (c) the menses SnA 317; J v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc., as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). -- 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614; J vi.105 (kamma -- paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā). -- āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148. -- ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 (= gimhe ātapa -- ṭṭhāna -- sevanā vasse rukkha -- mūla -- sevanā hemante jalappavesa -- sevanā SnA 291). -- kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173. -- ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451. -- nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. -- pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin i.95. -- pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. -- parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A iii.388. -- pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J vi.524. -- vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season J i.58. -- vikāra change of season Vism 262. -- veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317). -- saŋvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. ˚ā the seasons D iii.85 = A ii.75; S v.442. The phrase utusaŋvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta -- gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta -- saŋvaccharɔadi bahūni saŋvaccharāni ca PvA 135. Similarly at J v.330 (with Cy). -- sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable DhA 327. -- samaya time of the menses SnA 317.
Utuka
Utuka ( -- ˚) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabb- otuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D ii.179; Pv iv. 122 (= pupphupaga -- rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA 275); Sdhp 248.
Utunī
Utunī (f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin iii.18; iv.303; S iv.239; A iii. 221, 229; Miln 127. an˚ A iii.221, 226.
Utta
Utta [pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚ speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A ii.117, 143; iii.163; Kh viii.2; KhA 218.
Uttaṇḍāla
Uttaṇḍāla (adj.) [ud + taṇḍula] "grainy", i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J i.340; iii.383 (id.); iv.44 (id.).
Uttatta
Uttatta [ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J vi. 574 (hemaŋ uttattaŋ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa, so read for uggata˚, reading correct at PvA 188 ˚singī); PvA 10 (˚kanaka, T. uggatta˚); Mhbv 25 (id.).
Uttanta
Uttanta [= utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin iii.84. See uttasta & utrasta.
Uttama
Uttama (adj.) [superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud˚] "ut -- most", highest, greatest, best Sn 1054 (dhammaŋ uttamaŋ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn 1064; cp. Nd2 317); Dh 56; Nd1 211; Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara);
-- 131 --
KhA 124; DhA i.430: PvA 1, 50. -- dum -- uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar˚ the best of men Sn 1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Sn 1012; puris˚ the noblest man Th 1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaŋ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J i.96. -- anga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = M i.32 = A iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiŋ); J ii.163; also in cpd. ˚bhūta the hair of the head Th 2, 253 (= kesa -- kalāpa ThA 209, 210) & ˚ruha id. J i.138 = vi.96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J iv.403; (c) the penis J v.197. -- attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn 324; Dh 386, 403; DhA iv.142; ThA 160. -- adhama most contemptible J v.394, 437. -- guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J i.96. -- purisa It 97 & -- porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (see DhA ii.188). -- bhāva the highest condition, state or place DhA ii.188 (˚ŋ patto = puris'<-> uttamo).
Uttamatā
Uttamatā (f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA i.169 (for paramatā).
Uttara
Uttara1 (adj.) compar. of ud˚, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] -- 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below. -- 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D i.153; M i.123; S i.224; PvA 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraŋmukha) turning north, facing north Sn 1010. -- 3. subsequent, following, second (˚ -- ) J i.63 (˚āsāḷha -- nakkhatta). <-> 4. over, beyond ( -- ˚): aṭṭhɔutara -- sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA i.388. -- sa -- uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D i.80 (citta), ii.299; M i.59; S v.265; Vbh 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50. -- anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D i.40; S i.124; ii.278; iii.84; Sn 179. See also under anuttara. -- attharaṇa upper cover J vi.253. -- âbhimukha facing North D ii.15. -- āsanga an upper robe Vin i.289; ii. 126; S i.81; iv.290; A i.67, 145; ii.146; DhA i.218; PvA 73; VvA 33 = 51. -- itara something higher, superior D i.45, 156, 174; S i.81; J i.364; DhA ii.60; iv.4. -- oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar˚) J ii.420; iii.26; iv. 184. -- chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D i.7; A i.181; iii.50. -- chadana = ˚chada D ii.187; DhA i.87. -- dvāra the northern gate J vi.364. -- dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness D ii.188 (paṭividdha -- lokɔuttara -- dhammatāya uttama -- bhāvaŋ patta). -- pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = 148. -- pubba north -- eastern J vi.518. -- sse (v. l. ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow A i.240.
Uttara
Uttara2 (adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚ difficult to cross or to get out of S i.197 (not duruttamo); Miln 158; and in cpd. ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln 194 (cp. uttara -- setu).
Uttaraṇa
Uttaraṇa (nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J i.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). <-> Cp. uttara.
Uttarati
Uttarati [ud + tarati1] -- 1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opp. otarati); J i.108 (id.). -- 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln 117, 118, 132, 260, 277. -- 3. to cross over, to go beyond M i.135; aor. udatāri Sn 471 (oghaŋ). -- 4. to go over, to overspread J v.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). -- pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. uttareti (q. v.).
Uttari (˚) & Uttariŋ
Uttari (˚ -- ) & Uttariŋ (adv.) [compn. form of uttara, cp. angi -- bhūta uttāni -- karoti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. -- (1) uttariŋ: D i.71; M i.83; iii.148; S iv.15; Sn 796 (uttariŋ kurute = uttariŋ karoti Nd2 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J ii.23; iii.324; Miln 10 (ito uttariŋ anything beyond this, any more) DhA iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA 152. -- uttariŋ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314, referring to Ps ii.131, which is quoted at Miln 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. -- (2) uttari˚ in foll. cpds. -- karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S ii. 99; iii.168; A v.157 = 164; It 118. -- bhanga an extra portion, tit -- bit, dainties, additional or after -- meal bits Vin ii.214; iii.160; iv.259; J ii.419; DhA i.214 sa -- uttaribhanga together with dainty bits J i.186, cp. 196 (yāgu). -- bhangika serving as dainties J i.196. -- manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin i.209; ii.112; iii.105; iv.24; D i.211; iii.3, 12, 18; M i.68; ii.200; S iv.290, 300, 337; A iii.430; v.88; DhA iii.480. -- sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J ii.246; DhA iv.200; PvA 48, 49 (= uttarīyaŋ).
Uttarika
Uttarika (adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, super- human Nett 50.
Uttariya
Uttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *ut- tarya] -- 1. state of being higher. Cp. iii.35; neg. an˚ state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA i.44 (karaṇ˚ -- karaṇa).
Uttarīya
Uttarīya (nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 (= uparivasanaŋ uparihāraŋ uttarisāṭakaŋ PvA 49); Dāvs iii.30; ThA 253.
Uttasati
Uttasati1 [identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttā- seti to impale, q. v.
Uttasati
Uttasati2 [ut + tasati2] -- 1. to frighten J i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); iii.145 (id.); J ii.384; vi.79; ppr. uttasaŋ Th 1, 863; & uttasanto Pv ii.23. -- See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). <-> pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta.
Uttasana
Uttasana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J i.414 (v. l. for uttasta).
Uttasta
Uttasta [pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint -- hearted J i.414 (˚bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana˚).
Uttāna
Uttāna (adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] -- 1. streched out (flat), lying on one's back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaŋ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); ii.215; J i.205; Pv iv.108 (opp. avakujja); PvA 178 (id.), 265. -- 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S ii.106] D i.116; S ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J ii.168 (= pākaṭa); v.460; PvA 66, 89, 140, 168. -- anuttāna unclear, not explained J vi.247. -- The cpd. form (˚ -- ) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q. v.). -- 3. superficial, "flat", shallow A i.70 (parisa); Pug 46. -- mukha "clear mouthed", speaking plainly, easily understood D i.116 (see DA i.287); DhA iv.8. -- seyyaka "lying on one's back", i. e. an infant M i.432; A iii.6; Th 1, 935; Miln 40; Vism 97 (˚dāraka).
Uttānaka
Uttānaka (adj.) [fr. uttāna] -- 1. (= uttāna1) lying on one's back J vi.38 (˚ŋ pātetvā); DhA i.184. -- 2. (= uttāna2) clear, open D ii.55; M i.340 = DhA i.173.
Uttānī
Uttānī (˚ -- ) [the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī -- karoti M Vastu iii.408; uttānī -- kṛta Av. Ś i.287; ii.151] open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation S v.443; Pug 19; Vbh 259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. -- ˚karaṇa id. SnA 445. -- ˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103; S ii.25, 154; iii.132, 139; iv.166; v.261; A i.286; iii.361 sq.
-- 132 --
Uttāpeti
Uttāpeti [Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J vi.161.
Uttāra
Uttāra [fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S iv.174 = M i.134; cp. uttara2.
Uttārita
Uttārita [pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J i.194.
Uttāritatta
Uttāritatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J i.195.
Uttāreti
Uttāreti [Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J i.194; SnA 349. -- pp. uttārita (q. v.).
Uttāsa
Uttāsa [Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D iii.148; S v.386; Miln 170; PvA 180.
Uttāsana
Uttāsana (nt.) [fr. uttāseti2] impalement J ii.444; SnA 61 (sūle).
Uttāsavant
Uttāsavant (adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S iii.16 sq.
Uttāsita
Uttāsita [pp. of uttāseti2] impaled Pv iv.16 (= āvuta āropita VvA 220); J i.499; iv.29.
Uttāseti
Uttāseti1 [Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taŋs is uttā- seti2 is a variant] to frighten, terrify J i.230, 385; ii.117.
Uttāseti
Uttāseti2 [cp. Sk. uttaŋsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taŋs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A i.48; J i.230, 326; ii.443; iii.34; iv.29. -- pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana.
Uttiṭṭha
Uttiṭṭha [= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati "alms which one stands up for, or expects"] left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta); Th 1, 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka -- piṇḍa ThA 242); J iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Miln 213, 214.
Uttiṭṭhe
Uttiṭṭhe see uṭṭhahati.
Uttiṇa
Uttiṇa (adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaŋ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off -- straw; to deprive of the roof M ii.53. Cp. next.
Uttiṇṇa
Uttiṇṇa [pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?
Utrasta
Utrasta [pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, ter- rified, alarmed Vin ii.184; S i.53, 54 (an˚); Sn 986; Miln 23; DhA ii.6 (˚mānasa); PvA 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva).
Utrāsa
Utrāsa [= uttāsa] terror J ii.8 (citt˚).
Utrāsin
Utrāsin (adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, fright- ened, fearful, anxious S i.99, 219. -- Usually neg. an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S i.99; Th 1, 864; Nd2 13; J iv.296; v.4; Miln 339. See also apalāyin.
Ud
Ud -- [Vedic ud -- ; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud -- ; cp. Lat. ūsque "from -- unto" & Gr. u(/steros = Sk. uttara] prefix in verbal & nominal combn. One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli. -- I. Original meaning "out in an upward direction", out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one's neck out high (cp. Ger. "empor"); uggilati to "swallow up", i. e. spit out. -- The opposites of ud -- are represented by either ava or o˚ (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc -- âvaca; uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi -- aya or vaya). -- II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from -- : ˚aṇha ("day -- out"); ˚agga ("top -- out"); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opp. o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opp. o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus -- lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth; ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika "ribs out"; etc. etc. -- (2) up (high) or high up, upwards, on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher) -- : ˚kujja erect (opp. ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opp. vi˚); ˚khipati throw -- up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up -- stream, ˚javana id. (opp. o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna "standing up" ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opp. o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opp. o˚); ˚nama e -- levation; ˚nāmin raised (opp. ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc. -- III. More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, "ex -- ", e. g. unnangala "outplough" = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex -- bhikkhu. <-> (2) ud˚ = off, i. e. out of the way, wrong, e. g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id. -- (3) ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i. e. exceedingly, e. g. ujjangala extremely dusty; uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard. -- IV. Dialectical variations & combinations. -- (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between ud˚ and ava˚ (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between ū & u or o & u. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk˚; uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti: opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati > abbhukkirati. -- (2) the most freq. combns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚ and sam˚; see e. g. abhi + ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc.; sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc.
Uda
Uda1 (indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. au(_ti (again), au)ta/r (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J v.478 (v. l. udāhu); Nd1 445 (expld. as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (caraŋ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno uda vā sayaŋ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); KhA 191. -- See also udāhu.
Uda
Uda2 (˚ -- ) [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ˚ -- ), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapāna, udabindu).
Udaka
Udaka (nt.) [Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood, odana gruel, q. v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter ("water -- animal"); Gr. u(/dwr water ("hydro"), u(/dra hydra ("water -- animal"); Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water; Obulg. voda water, vydra otter] water Vin ii.120, 213; D ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dh 80, 145; J i.212; Pv i.57; Pug 31, 32; Miln 318; VvA 20 (udake temanaŋ aggimhe tāpanaŋ); DhA i.289; DhA iii. 176, 256; PvA 39, 70. -- Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. <-> The compn. form ( -- ˚) is either ûdaka (āsanûdaka -- dāyin
-- 133 --
J iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet PvA 78). odaka occurs also in abs. form (q. v.), cp. also oka. Bdgh.'s kaŋ = udakaŋ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DA i.209. -- aṇṇava water -- flood M i.134. -- āyatika a water -- pipe Vin ii.123. -- āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- ûpama resembling water, like water A iv.11 (puggala). -- ogāhana plunging into water J iii.235. -- ogha a water flood VvA 48. -- orohaka descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit. "bather" M i.281; S iv.312; A v. 263. -- orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing D i.167; S i.182; A i.296; ii.206; J iv.299; Pug 55. -- kalaha the "water dispute" DhA iii.256. -- kāka a water crow J ii.441. -- kicca libation of water, lit. water -- performance; cleansing, washing D ii.15. -- kīḷā sporting in the w. J vi.420. -- gahaṇasāṭaka bathing -- gown J v.477. -- ghaṭa a water pitcher PvA 66. -- cāṭi a water jar DhA i.52. -- ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -- tumba a water vessel J ii.441; DA i.202; DhA ii.193. -- telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -- dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth -- cleaner Vin iii.51; iv.90, 92, 233; J iv.69. -- daha a lake (of water) D i.45. -- doṇikā a water -- tub or trough Vin ii.220. -- dhārā a shower of water Ps i.125; J iv.351. -- niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120, 123; DhA ii.37. -- nibbāhana an aquaduct Miln 295. -- paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -- patta a waterbowl Vin ii. 107; D i.80; S iii.105. -- puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122. -- posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173. -- phusita a drop of water S ii.135. -- bindu a drop of w. It 84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. -- bubbula a w. bubble A iv.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). -- bhasta devoid of water ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). -- maṇika a water -- pot Vin i.227; M i.354; A iii.27; Miln 28; DhA i.79. -- mallaka a cup for w. A i.250. -- rakkhasa a water -- sprite DhA iii.74. -- rahada a lake (of w.) D i.74, 84; A i.9; ii.105; iii.25; Sn 467; Pug 47. -- rūha a water plant Vv 356. -- lekhā writing on w. A i.283 = Pug 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug A 215). -- vāra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA i.49. -- vāraka bucket S ii.118. -- vāha a flow of water, flowing w. J vi.162. -- vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water), overflowing, flood A i.178. -- vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju). -- sadda sound of water Dhs 621. -- sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -- sāṭaka = sāṭikā J ii.13. -- sāṭikā "water -- cloak", a bathing -- mantle Vin i. 292; ii.272; iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); DhA ii.61 (T. ˚sāṭaka). -- suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta -- karaṇassa dhovanā C.).
Udakaccha
Udakaccha [uda + kaccha] watery soil, swamp J v.137.
Udakumbha
Udakumbha [uda + kumbha] a water jug J i.20; Dh 121, 122; Pv i.129.
Udagga
Udagga (adj.) [ud + agga, lit. "out -- top", cp. Sk. udagra] top- most, high, lofty Th 1, 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant, joyful, happy D i.110 (˚citta); Sn 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv iv.155 (attamana +); iv.58 (haṭṭha +); Miln 248; DhA ii.42 (haṭṭha -- pahaṭṭha udagg -- udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya.
Udaggatā
Udaggatā (f.) [abstr. fr. udagga] exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298.
Udaggi˚
Udaggi˚ in udaggihuttaŋ [= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra] the fire prepared (for sacrifice) J v.396 (= uda -- aggihuttaŋ C. wrongly), lit. "the sacrifice (being) out"
Udangaṇa
Udangaṇa (nt.) [ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana "a place for digging for water" see Toev. p. 96] an open place J i.109.
Udacchidā
Udacchidā 3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Sn 2, 3 (˚ā metri causa).
Udañcana
Udañcana (nt.) [fr. ud + añc, see añchati] a bucket for drawing water out of a well DhA i.94.
Udañcanin
Udañcanin (adj. -- n.) [ud + añcanin to añc see añchati] draining, pulling up water f. ˚ī a bucket or pail J i. 417 (f. ˚ī).
Udañjala
Udañjala [udan + jala see uda2] in ˚ŋ kīḷati a water -- game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Bdhgh.: udañjalan ti udaka -- cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)
Udaññavant
Udaññavant (adj.) [udan = uda(ka) + vant] rich in water, well -- watered J v.405 (= udaka -- sampanna C.).
Udaṇha
Udaṇha [ud + aṇha] day -- break, dawn, sunrise J v.155.
Udatāri
Udatāri 3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Sn 471 (oghaŋ).
Udatta
Udatta (adj.) [Sk. udātta] elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 (= uḷārapañña C.).
Udadhi
Udadhi [uda + dhi, lit. water -- container] the sea, ocean S i.67; It 86; Sn 720; J v.326; vi.526; ThA 289; VvA 155 ("udakaŋ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi"); Sdhp 322, 577.
Udapatta [ụda
Udapatta1 [ụda for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak -- prāpta, risen, flying up, sprung up J iii.484 (= uppatita C.); v.71 (= uṭṭhita C.).
Udapatta
Udapatta2 [uda + patta; Sk. udapātra] a bowl of water, a water -- jug, ewer M i.100; S v.121; A iii.230 sq., 236; v.92, 94, 97 sq.
Udapādi
Udapādi 3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, be- come D i.110, 180, 185; S ii.273; It 52, 99; SnA 346, 462.
Udapāna
Udapāna [uda + pāna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna] a well, a cistern Vin i.139; ii.122; M i.80; A iv.171; J iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Miln 411; Vism 244 (in simile); DA i.298; VvA 40; PvA 78.
Udappatta
Udappatta see udapatta.
Udabindu
Udabindu [uda + bindu] a drop of water M i.78; Sn 812; Dh 121, 122, 336; It 84 (v. l. udaka˚); Nd1 135; SnA 114; DhA ii.51.
Udabbhadhi
Udabbhadhi aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati [ud + vadh] to destroy, kill Sn 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati SnA 18).
Udabbahe
Udabbahe 3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati [ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati] to draw out, tear out, remove Th 1, 158; Sn 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) SnA 460); J ii.223 (= udabbaheyya C.); vi.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin iv.5.
Udaya
Udaya [fr. ud + i, cp. udeti] rise, growth; increment, in- crease; income, revenue, interest A ii.199; Ps i.34; Vv 847 (dhanɔatthika uddayaŋ patthayāna = ānisaŋsaŋ atirekalābhaŋ VvA 336); 8452; DhA ii.270; PvA 146 (ulār˚ vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa -- satāni labhitvā, with interest); Sdhp 40, 230, 258. -- See also uddaya. -- attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha2) M i.356; S v.197 sq., 395; A iii.152 sq.; iv.111, 289, 352; v.15, 25. -- atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp. above Vv 847 dhanɔatthika) A ii.199. -- bbaya (ud -- aya + vy -- aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death, up & down D iii.223; S i.46 = 52 (lokassa); iii.130; A ii.90; iii. 32; iv.153; It 120; Vism 287; Ps i.54; ThA 90. -- vyaya = ˚bbaya S iv.140; A ii.15 (khandhānaŋ); Dh 113, 374 (khandhānaŋ, see DhA iv.110).
Udayaŋ & Udayanto
Udayaŋ & Udayanto ppr. of udeti (q. v.).
Udayana
Udayana (nt.) [fr. ud + i] going up, rise DA i.95.
-- 134 --
Udara
Udara (nt.) [Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. u(/steros = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica] -- 1 the belly, stomach D ii.266; Sn 78, 604, 609, 716; J i.146, 164, 265; Miln 213; PvA 283; KhA 57, 58; DhA i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102. -- 2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir -- odare). -- ūnûdara with empty belly Th 1, 982; Miln 406, 407; cp. ūna. -- aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i. e. of digestion) KhA 59; SnA 462; PvA 33; -- âvadehakaŋ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous M i.102; A v.18; Th 1, 935; Vism 33. -- paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr˚abbhantara 261); SnA 248; KhA 55, 61. -- pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -- vaṭṭi "belly -- sack", belly Vin iii.39, 117; Vism 262 where KhA reads ud. paṭala). -- vāta the wind of the belly, stomach -- ache 9J i.33, 433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha); DhA iv.129.
Udariya
Udariya (nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh iii. (cp. KhA 57); Vism 258, 358. Cp sodariya.
Udassaye
Udassaye 2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati [ā + śri, cp. assaya] J v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?).
Udahāraka
Udahāraka [uda + hāraka] a water -- carrier J ii.80.
Udahāriya
Udahāriya (adj.) [fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ] going for water Vv 509.
Udāgacchati
Udāgacchati [ud + ā + gacchati] to come to completion Da i.288. Cp sam.
Udāna
Udāna (nt.) [fr. ud + an to breathe] -- 1. "breathing out", exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) D i.50, 92; S i.20, 27, 82, 160; A i.67; J i.76; Pug 43, 62; Nett 174; PvA 67; Sdhp 514. -- The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaŋ udānaŋ udānesi" i. e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaŋ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e. g. at Vin i.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; D i.47; ii.107 (udāna of triumph); S iii.55; Mhvs xix.29; DA i.140; Ud. 1 passim; SnA 354 ("the familiar quotation about the sakyas"). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g. udānaŋ pavatti J i.61; abhāsi Vin iv.54; kathesi J vi. 38. -- 2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & anga. -- Cp. vodāna.
Udānita
Udānita [pp. of udāneti] uttered, breathed forth, said DhA iv.55.
Udāneti
Udāneti [denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati] to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaŋ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at J iii.218.
Udāpatvā
Udāpatvā at J v.255 is uncertain reading (v. l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up), perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud + pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.).
Udāyati
Udāyati at DA i.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; D i.96 has here udrīyissati (q. v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DA i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v. l. undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti).
Udāra
Udāra (adj.) [Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q. v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.] raised, sublime, noble, excellent Dāvs iii.4 (samussit -- odāra -- sitātapattaŋ); DA i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429, 591.
Udāvatta
Udāvatta [pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati] retired, de- sisting J v.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C).
Udāsīna
Udāsīna (adj.) [ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129.
Udāhaṭa
Udāhaṭa [pp of udāharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41.
Udāharaṇa
Udāharaṇa (nt.) [fr. udāharati] example, instance J iii.401 (˚ŋ āharitvā dassento), 510; Miln 345; SnA 445; VvA 297.
Udāharati
Udāharati [ud + ā + hṛ] to utter, recite. speak. Sn 389; J iii.289; DA i.140 (see udāhāra). -- pp udāhaṭa (q. v.). Cp. pariy˚.
Udāhāra
Udāhāra [fr. udāharati] utterance, speech DA i.140 (˚ŋ udāhari = udānaŋ udānesi); Pug A 223,
Udāhu
Udāhu (indecl.) [uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro] disjunctive -- adversative particle "or", in direct questions D i 157; ii.8; Sn 599, 875, 885; J i.20, 83; VvA 258 (= ādu); PvA 33, 51; Miln 10. -- The first part of the question is often introduced with kiŋ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e. g. kin nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi VvA 63; kiŋ amhehi saddhiŋ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? DhA ii.96: See under kiŋ. -- Often combd with other expletive particles, e. g. udāhu ve Sn 1075, 1077; udāhu no Sn 347; eva . . . no udāhu (so . . . or not) D i.152; (ayaŋ) nu kho -- udāhu (ayaŋ) is it (this) -- (this) Vism 313.
Udi
Udi (or udī) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho).
Udikkhati
Udikkhati [ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate] -- 1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.); J v.71, 296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaŋ = ullokesiŋ VvA 316); Dāvs ii 109; Sdhp 308. -- 2. to look out for, to expect J i.344; VvA 118. -- 3. to envy Miln 338.
Udikkhitar
Udikkhitar [n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D iii 167.
Udicca
Udicca (adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern, the north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north -- westerly, of north -- western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Miln trsln. ii.45 n. 1) J i.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln 236. -- See also uddiya.
Udiccare
Udiccare 3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q. v.).
Udita
Udita1 [pp. of ud -- i, see udeti] risen, high, elevated Miln 222; (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun) 442 (˚odita).
Udita
Udita2 [pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka -- pātha ed. 1869, p. 22).
Udīraṇa
Udīraṇa (nt.) [fr. udīreti] utterance, saying J v.237; Dhs 637, 720; Miln 145.
Udīrita
Udīrita [pp. of udīreti] uttered J iii.339; v.394 = 407.
Udīreti
Udīreti [ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita] -- 1. to set in motion, stir up, cause J iii.441 (dukkhaŋ udīraye Pot. = udīreyya C.); v.395 (kalahaŋ to begin a quarrel). -- 2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say S i.190; Sn 632 (pot. ˚raye = bhāseyya SnA 468); Dh 408 (giraŋ udīraye = bhāseyya DhA iv.182); J v.78 (vākyaŋ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Th 1, 1232 (nigghoso).
Udu
Udu (adj.) [= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in ˚mano straight -- minded D iii.167, 168 (= uju˚ in v. l. and expln. by C.).
-- 135 --
Udukkhala
Udukkhala (m. & nt.) [Sk. ulukhala] a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle); J i.502; ii.428; v.49; ii.161, 335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); DhA ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DA i.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud., the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 37.
Udukkhalikā
Udukkhalikā (f.) [fr. udukkhala] part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara -- pasaka lintel of a door).
Udumbara
Udumbara [Sk. udumbara] the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata D ii.4; Vin iv.35; A iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Sn 5; DhA i.284; SnA 19; KhA 46, 56; VvA 213. Cp. odumbara.
Udeti
Udeti (ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); J ii.33; iii.324; ppr. udayaŋ It 85 (ādicco), & udayanto PvA 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). -- pp. udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi.
Udda
Udda1 [Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. u(/dros "hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver -- Vin i.186 (˚camma otter -- skin, used for sandals); Cp. i.102 (˚pota); J iii.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at J iii.333 are Gambhīra -- cārin and Anutīra -- cārin.
Udda
Udda2 [for uda2?] water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i. e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid D ii.14; M iii.122.
Uddaṇḍa
Uddaṇḍa [ud + daṇḍa] a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda) = Vism 25 (v. l. BB uṭṭanda).
Uddaya
Uddaya1 [a (metric?) variant of udaya] gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); J v.39 (satt˚ -- mahāpaduma of profit to beings?).
Uddaya
Uddaya2 in compounds dukkh˚ and sukh˚. see udraya.
Uddalomī
Uddalomī [= udda + lomin beaver -- hair -- y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end D i.7 (= ubhato dasaŋ uṇṇā -- mayɔ attharaṇaŋ; keci ubhato uggata -- pupphaŋ ti vadanti DA i.87); A i.181. See however uddha -- lomin under uddhaŋ.
Uddasseti
Uddasseti [ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1] to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct D ii.321 sq.; M i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?); ii.60 (v. l. uddiset˚) A iv.66.
Uddāna
Uddāna (nt.) [fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma] a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka, with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saŋyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Miln 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. DhsA 27). The Uddāna gives, in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group, the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered "summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work. -- Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes "macchuddāna" (so J ii.425; DhA ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case.
Uddāpa
Uddāpa [*udvāpa] foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚ etc. D iii.101; S v.194 = also at J vi.276 (= pākāra -- vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud -- vapati to dig out, and translates "moat, ditch". The meaning "wall" or "mound" however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. "digging", cp. E. dike > Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2.
Uddāpavant
Uddāpavant (adj.) [fr. uddāpa] having a wall or embank- ment S ii.106 (v. l. uddhā˚); C. expls. as apato uggatattā J iv.536 (so read with v. l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C. expls. as tīra -- mariyādā -- bandhana).
Uddāma
Uddāma [fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma] 1. (adj.) "out of bounds", unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara). -- 2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as "binding in", protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam "to throw up" in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla -- uddāma -- parikhâdīni watchtowers, enceintes, moats etc. DhA iii.488.
Uddāraka
Uddāraka [?] some wild animal J v.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto).
Uddāla
Uddāla = uddālaka, only as Np. J iv.298 sq.
Uddālaka
Uddālaka [fr. ud + dal, see dalati] the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa, lit. "uprooter" Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati VvA 43); J iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (= vātaghātaka C.), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚); VvA 197 (˚puppha = indīvara); PvA 169.
Uddālanaka
Uddālanaka (adj.) [fr. uddālana > ud + dāleti] referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169.
Uddāleti
Uddāleti [ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off Vin iv.170; S iv.178.
Uddiṭṭha
Uddiṭṭha [pp. of uddisati] -- 1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified M i.480 (pañha); Sn p. 91 (id. = uddesa -- mattenɔ eva vutta, na vibhangena SnA 422); SnA 372. -- 2. appointed, dedicated J v.393 (an ˚ŋ pupphaŋ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); PvA 50; KhA 138.
Uddiya
Uddiya (adj.) [Sk. udīcya?] northern, northwestern (i. e. Nepalese) J iv.352 (˚kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk. udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet.
Uddisati
Uddisati [ud + disati] -- to propose, point out, ap- point, allot Dh 353, cp. DhA iv.72; Miln 94 (satihāraŋ); fut. uddisissati M i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q. v.). -- 2. to specify PvA 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27. -- Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati PvA 46. -- pp. uddiṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q. v.). -- ger. uddissa (q. v.)
Uddisāpeti
Uddisāpeti [Caus. II. of uddisati] -- 1. to make recite Vin i.47 = ii.224; iv.290. -- 2. to dedicate PvA 35 (v. l. ādisati).
Uddissa
Uddissa (indecl.) [orig. ger. of uddisati] -- 1. indicating, with signs or indications J iii.354 = Miln 230. -- 2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards, to PvA 250 Suraṭṭha -- visayaŋ). -- (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning PvA 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaŋ), 70 (maŋ), 146. -- kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maŋsa); ii.163; D i.166 = A i. 295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā); M i.77; KhA 222; J ii. 262, 263 (bhatta).
Uddissana
Uddissana (nt.) [fr. uddissa] dedication PvA 27, 80.
Uddīpanā
Uddīpanā (f.) [fr. ud + dīpeti] explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā).
Uddīyati, Uddīyana
Uddīyati, Uddīyana ete. see udrī˚.
-- 136 --
Uddeka
Uddeka [Sk. udreka, ud + ric] vomit, spouting out, erup- tion Vism 261 (where id. p. at KhA 61 reads uggāra); ˚ŋ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277.
Uddekanika
Uddekanika (adj.) [uddeka + ana + ika] spouting, ejecting M ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v. l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water).
Uddesa
Uddesa [fr. uddisati] -- 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; S iv.299; SnA 422. -- 2. explanation S v.110 sq.; sa -- uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln., point by point, in detail, D i.13, 81; iii.111; A iii.418; It 99; Nd2 6171. -- 3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) D i.151; M iii.128; A iv.343; uddesa -- bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation, questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ŋ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaŋ d); A iv.114 (+ paripucchā); v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaŋ); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā); J i.116; Miln 257 (+paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47; A iii.67, 180; Miln 10, 18.
Uddesaka
Uddesaka (adj.) [fr. uddesa] assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food VvA 92.
Uddesika
Uddesika (adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] -- 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D ii. 100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. <-> Esp. as -- ˚ in phrase aṭṭha -- vass' uddesika -- kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67; soḷasa -- vass˚ M i.88; J i.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). -- 2. memorial J iv.228 (cetiya).
Uddehaka
Uddehaka (adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv. ˚ŋ in cpd. pheṇ˚ (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) M iii.167; A i.141; J iii.46; Miln 357.
Uddosita
Uddosita [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; ii.278; iii.200; iv.223.
Uddha
Uddha (adj.) [possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaŋ; or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?] in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes J iv.154 (of a devatā; passage may be corrupt).
Uddhaŋ
Uddhaŋ (& Uddha˚) (indecl.) [nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared(h) as in Lat. arduus steep, or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. o) rqo/s straight] high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.). -- On uddhaŋ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd2 155. -- I. (adv.). -- A. (of space) up, aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin iii.121; KhA 248 (= upari). -- In contrast with adho (above > below) D i.23, 153, 251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaŋ expld.); DA i.98 (see also adho). -- Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as "in zenith" (opp. adho "in nadir"), e. g. at D i.222 ("straight up"); It 120; J i.20. <-> B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Sn 894; Nd1 303 (u. vuccati anāgataŋ). -- II. (prep. with abl. & instr.). <-> A. (of space) in phrase uddhaŋ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) D ii. 293, 294; iii.104; A iii.323; v.109. -- B. (of time) after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months = catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari PvA 52); PvA 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v. l. BB.). -- In cpds. uddha˚ & uddhaŋ˚ (see below). The reading udhogalaŋ at PvA 104 is to corrected to adho˚. -- III. Note (cp. Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggato J v.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti "standing erect" D i.167; M i.78; ubbhamukhu "mouth (face) upwards", turned upwards S iii.238; Miln 122. (1) uddha˚ in: -- gāmin going upwards S v.370 sq. cchiddaka ( -- vātapānā) (windows) having openings above DhA i.211. -- pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) A iv.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v. l.); J i. 233. -- mukha turned upwards, adv. ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Miln 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Miln 122). -- lomin "having hair on the upper side", a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch) Vin i.192 = ii.163, 169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q. v.). -- virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho -- virecana of a purgative) D i.12 (= uddhaŋ dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ DA i.98); DhA iii.126; SnA 86. -- suddha clean on top Vin ii.152. -- (2) uddhaŋ˚ in: -- āghātanika an after -- deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death D i.31, cp. DA i.119. -- pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 5225 (v. l. uddha˚). -- bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram˚): see saŋyojana. -- virecana v. l. BB. at SnA 86 for uddha˚. -- sara(ŋ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. "sounding high" Sn 901, see Nd1 315. -- sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46] D iii.237; S v.69, 201, 205, 237, 285, 314, 378; A i.233; ii.134; iv.14 sq., 73 sq., 146, 380; v.120; Dh 218; Th ii.12; Pug 17; Nett 190; DhA iii.289; lit. up -- stream at J iii.371.
Uddhaŋsati
Uddhaŋsati [ud + dhaŋsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaŋs, see dhaŋsati] to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatthɔ uddhaŋsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati VvA 304. -- pp. uddhasta (q. v.).
Uddhagga
Uddhagga (adj.) [uddha + agga] -- 1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa D ii.18 = iii.144, 154. -- 2. prominent, conspicuous J iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). <-> 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point -- downwards) J v.156 (= heṭṭhima -- danta C.). <-> 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) A ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika.
Uddhaggika
Uddhaggika (adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) D i.51 = iii.66; S i.90; A iii.259; DA i.158.
Uddhacca
Uddhacca (nt.) [substantivised ger. of ud -- dharati, ud + dhṛ, cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca] over -- balancing, agitation, excitement, distraction, flurry (see on meaning Dialogues i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). A i.256, 282; iii.375, 421, 449; iv.87; v.142, 145, 148; D iii.234; S v.277 sq.; DhSA 260; SnA 492 (in sense of "haughtiness"? for Sn 702 uṇṇata); Nd1 220, 501; Ps i.81, 83; ii.9, 97 sq.; 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pug 18, 59; Dhs 427, 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vbh 168, 369, 372, 377; Vism 137, 469 (= uddhata -- bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca "flurry or worry" u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa's and as the 9th of the 10 saŋyojana's (q. v.), e. g. at D i.71, 246; iii.49, 234, 269, 278; S i.99; A i.3; iii.16; v.30; Nd2 379; Dhs 1486.
Uddhaja
Uddhaja (adj.) [uddhaŋ + ja] upright, honest M i.386 (v. l. for pannadhaja).
Uddhaṭa
Uddhaṭa [pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca] -- 1. pulled out J ii.26. -- 2. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) J i.505; ii.259; vi.6. -- 3. cut off or out Miln 231 (uddhaṭ -- uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off). -- 4. drawn out, lifted out, raised J i.143; sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paŋsu). Cp. uddhaṭa -- bīja castrated J ii.237.
Uddhata
Uddhata [pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca]. -- 1. lifted up, raised, risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u. aruṇo) Vin ii.236; Ud 27 (vv. ll. uggata & uddhasta). <->
-- 137 --
2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken S i.61 (+ unnaḷa "muddled in mind & puffed up" trsl.), 204 (id.) v.112 (līnaŋ cittaŋ uddhataŋ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269; A ii.23; iii.391; v.93 sq., 142, 163; It 72; Th 2, 77 (so read with v. l., T. has uddhaṭa; ThA 80 explns. as nānɔ ārammaṇe vikkhitta -- citta asamāhita); Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta -- citto); Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug A 217). -- an˚ well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued M i.470; A ii.211; v.93 sq., 104; Sn 850 (= uddhaccavirahita SnA 549); Dh 363 (= nibbutacitto DhA iv.93); J v.203; Vv 648. -- See also ubbhata.
Uddhana
Uddhana (nt.) [*ud -- dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati] an oven J i.33, 68, 71, 346; ii.133, 277; iii.178, 425; v.385, 471; ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Sn p. 105; Miln 118, 259; Vism 171, 254; DhA i.52, 224; ii.3; iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176.
Uddhamma
Uddhamma [ud + dhamma] false doctrine Dpvs v.19.
Uddharaṇa
Uddharaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddharati] -- 1. taking up, lifting, raising Miln 307 (sass˚ -- samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DA i.192. -- 2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin iii.29. See also ubbahati2.
Uddharati
Uddharati [ud + dharate of dhṛ] -- 1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with bṛh: see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up; hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp. uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa. -- (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away D i.135 (baliŋ uddhareyya raise a tax); M i.306 (hiyaŋ); J i.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); VvA 157. -- Caus. uddharāpeti Vin ii.180, 181; J vi.95. -- 2. to pull out, draw out (syn. with abbahati, q. v. for comparison) D i. 77 (ahiŋ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato) PvA 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha J ii.95 (for abbaha); Dh 327 (attānaŋ duggā); aor. uddhari J iii.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Th 1, 756; ger. uddharitvā D i.234; Nd1 419; SnA 567; DhA iv.26; PvA 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā J iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni = akkhīni uddharitvā C.). -- pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata.
Uddharin
Uddharin īn an˚ Sn 952 see under niṭṭhurin.
Uddhasetā
Uddhasetā see uddhasta.
Uddhasta
Uddhasta [pp. of uddhaŋseti, see dhaŋsati & cp. anuddhaŋ seti] attacked, perhaps "spoilt" (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at A i.202 (T. uddhaseta, expld. by upari dhaŋsita C.); ii.211 (vv. ll. uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaŋso). -- Registered with an˚ as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q. v.). Cp. also viddhasta.
Uddhāra
Uddhāra (& ubbhāra in Vin.; e. g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) [fr. uddharati1] <-> 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚ (q. v.) Vin i.255 sq.; iii.262; iv.287; v.177 sq. -- 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase ˚ŋ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J ii.341; iii.106; iv.45, 247. uddhāra -- sodhana (v. l. sādh˚) the clearance of a debt J ii.341. -- 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth˚ + pad˚).
Uddhālaka
Uddhālaka at J vi.530 is to be read uddālaka.
Uddhita
Uddhita [a by -- form of uddhaṭa] pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed J vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa -- bīja C.).
Uddhunāti
Uddhunāti [ud + dhunāti] to shake VvA 279.
Uddhumāta
Uddhumāta (adj.) [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) A i.140; Sn 200 (of a corpse); SnA 100 sq., 171; DA i.114. Cp. next.
Uddhumātaka
Uddhumātaka (adj.) [prec. + ka] swollen, bloated, puffed up M i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (id.); J i.164 (udaraŋ ˚ŋ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up); Miln 332; DhA i.307. See also subha & asubha. -- saññā the idea of a bloated corpse A ii.17; Dhs 263; Miln 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69.
Uddhumātatta
Uddhumātatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddhumāta] swollen con- dition Vism 178.
Uddhumāyati
Uddhumāyati [ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca] to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. ˚āyi J iii.26; VvA 76; ger. ˚ājitvā J ii.18; DhA i.126. -- pp. uddhumāta & ˚āyita (q. v.).
Uddhumāyana
Uddhumāyana (nt.) [fr. uddhumāyati] puffing, blowing or swelling up J iv.37.
Uddhumāyika
Uddhumāyika (adj.) [cp. uddhumāyita] like blowing or swelling up, of blown -- up appearance M i.142 sq.
Uddhumāyita
Uddhumāyita [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, puffed up VvA 218.
Udrabhati
Udrabhati [? doubtful in form & etym.] to eat M i.306 (upacikā bījaŋ na udrabheyyuŋ; vv. ll. on p. 555: udrah˚, udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuŋ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)). -- Note. The Dhātupāṭha, 212, and the Dhātu -- mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating.
Udraya
Udraya (& Uddaya) ( -- ˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya1] coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh˚ (yielding pain) & sukh˚ (giving pleasure); e. g. as dukkh˚ at M i 415; J iv.398; v.119 (v. l. ˚indriya); Pv i.1110 (so read for T. ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as v. l. for udāyati); Ps ii.79 (kammaŋ); as sukh˚ at J v.389 (v. l. ˚indriya); DhA ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh˚ & sukh˚ at Ps i.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk˚ causing bitterness J v.241; sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences S ii.29; M i.271.
Udrīyati
Udrīyati (& Uddīyati) [cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ, dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati] to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii 174 (id); iv.254 (i); D i.96 (˚īyissati = bhijjhissati DA i 96, so read for udāyati); S i 113, 119.
Udrīyana & Uddīyana
Udrīyana & Uddīyana (nt.) [fr. udrīyati] breaking or splitting open, bursting J i.72; DhA ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī -- uddīyana -- sadda; vv. ll. uddri˚, udri˚).
Undura
Undura [etym ?] a rat Vin i.209; ii.148, 152; iii.151; J i.120; Miln 23, 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62.
Unna
Unna [pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka] in phrase pīti -- vegenɔunna "bubbling up with the excitement of joy", overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i. e. lofty, exalted C.). -- It may however be better & more in keeping with Pāli word -- formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud + na, taking ˚na as abs. (base) -- form of nam, thus lit. "bent up", i. e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna = ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata.
Unnaka
Unnaka [etym.?] a species of perfume J vi 537 (gloss kuṭantaja).
Unnangala
Unnangala (adj.) [ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud] in phrase ˚ŋ karoti, according to Morris, J P T S 1887, 120 "to make an up -- ploughing, to turn up etc.", but more aptly with C. on J vi.328 to make
-- 138 --
"out -- plough" (not "up -- plough") in sense of out -- of -- work, i. e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday. A typical "Jātaka" -- phrase; J i.228; ii.296, 367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; DhA iii.10.
Unnata
Unnata [pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q. v.] raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv iv.66 (= sāmin PvA 262); J i.71; ii369; vi 487; Miln 146, 387; DA i.45 See also unnaḷa.
Unnati
Unnati (f) [fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati] rising, lifting up, elevation Miln 387 (˚avanati).
Unnadati
Unnadati [ud + nadati] to resound, shout out, roar J i.110; ii 90; iii.271, 325; Miln 18; aor. unnadi J i 74; Miln 13. -- Caus. unnādeti (q. v.).
Unnama
Unnama [fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning] rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh vii.7 = Pv i.57 (= thala unnata -- padesa PvA 29); Miln 349; DA i.154.
Unnamati
Unnamati [ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning] to rise up, ascend Miln 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306. -- Caus. unnāmeti (q. v.). -- pp. unnara & uṇṇata (q. v.).
Unnala & Unnaḷa
Unnala & Unnaḷa (adj.) [Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n > l change freq., cp. P. nangala > lāngala; nalāṭa > lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning "sporting, sporty, wild" etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala M Vastu i.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244. To these may be added P. celakedu > cetakedu J vi.538] showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty, in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala M i.32; S i.61 = 204 (trsld. as "muddled in mind, puffed up, vain", expld. as uggata -- nala uddhaṭa -- tuccha -- māna K. S. 318); A i.70, 266; ii.26; iii 199, 355, 391; It 113 (+ asamāhita); Dh 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as "māna -- naḷaŋ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala" DhA iii.452); Th 1, 634; Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha -- mānaŋ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217).
Unnahanā
Unnahanā (f.) [ud + nah, see nayhati] flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27.
Unnāda
Unnāda [fr. ud + nad] shout, shouting J ii 405.
Unnādin
Unnādin (adj.) [fr. ud + nad] shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336; D i.95, 143, 178; J ii.216.
Unnādeti
Unnādeti [Caus. of unnadati] to make resound J i.408 (paṭhaviŋ), ii.34.
Unnāmin
Unnāmin (adj) [ud + nam in Caus. form] raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low A iv.237 (of cultivated land).
Unnāmeti
Unnāmeti (unn˚) [Caus. of unnamati] to raise DhsA 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids) at Sn 206 (inf. uŋṇametave).
Upa -- [Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. u(po/ under, u(pe/r over; Lat. sub fr. * (e)ks -- upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg. ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari] prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā), usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by. -- In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e. g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita. -- Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up -- : ˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup -- ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac -- cumulated; ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc. -- (2) (Aim): (out) up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as "higher, above" in upara, upari, upama = Lat. superus, supremus E. g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad -- ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap -- proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad -- vise; ˚dhāvati run up to: ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc. -- (3) (Nearness): close by, close to, near, "ad -- "; e. g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap -- plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at -- tending; ṭṭhita ap -- proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to; ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by. -- (4) (Intensive use): quite, altogether, "up"; e. g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up. -- (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus; Gr. u(po/leukos whitish; Oir. fo -- dord; Cymr. go -- durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary, by -- , miniature, made after the style of, e. g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest; uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚.
Upaka
Upaka ( -- ˚) [for ˚upaga] found only in combn. kulûpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192, 208; iii.84; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.258 sq.; Nd2 3851; Pv iii.85; PvA 266. -- f. kulûpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66. -- Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at J iv.219.
Upakaccha
Upakaccha (˚ -- ) [upa + kacchā2] only in combn. with ˚antare lit. "in between the hips or loins or arm -- pits", in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. ii.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs J i.63, 425, khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits J v.211 & ṭhapetvā id. J v.46.
Upakacchaka
Upakacchaka [upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning] (1) [= upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure, adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter J i.158. (2) [= upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow, usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39; iv.260 (pudendum muliebre); Miln 293; J v.437 (= kaccha2).
Upakaṭṭha
Upakaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha -- majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassûpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha. -- loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. "near, in the neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 (= santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe).
Upakaḍḍhati
Upakaḍḍhati [upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha] to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to D i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (id.); M i.365; S i.49; ii.99; Dh 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti DhA iii.484).
Upakaṇṭha
Upakaṇṭha at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha.
Upakaṇḍakin
Upakaṇḍakin (Pv ii.113) see under uppaṇḍukin.
Upakaṇṇa
Upakaṇṇa (˚ -- ) [upa + kaṇṇa] lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. ˚ka (q. v.) Th 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear).
Upakannaka
Upakannaka (adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237; ii.99; iv.20, 271; S i.86; A iii.57; SnA 186; and in cpd. ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports A iii. 136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.
-- 139 --
Upakappati
Upakappati [upa + kappati] intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue S i.85; Pv i.44 (= nippajjati PvA 19); i.57 (petānaŋ); i.104 (= viniyujjati PvA 49); J v.350; PvA 8, 29 (petānaŋ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, 504.
Upakappana
Upakappana (nt.) [fr. upakappati] profit PvA 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚).
Upakappanaka
Upakappanaka (adj.) [fr. upakappana] profitable J i.398; DhA ii.133.
Upakaraṇa
Upakaraṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + kṛ] help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood D ii.340; A ii.86; J i.7; PvA 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adj. suitable, fit); Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship J iv.165; tunnavaya˚ a weaver's outfit J ii.364; dabb˚ fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚ materials for a gift PvA 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚ bathing requisites VvA 248; vitt˚ luxuries A v.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; PvA 71.
Upakaroti
Upakaroti [upa + karoti] to do a service, serve, help, sup- port Th 2, 89 (aor. upakāsiŋ = anugaṇhiŋ santappesiŋ ThA 88). -- pp. upakkhaṭa (q. v.).
Upakāra
Upakāra [fr. upa + kṛ, cp. upakaraṇa] service, help, be- nefit, obligation, favour D iii.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. <-> bahûpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful S iv.295; PvA 114. upakāraŋ karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116. -- āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86.
Upakāraka
Upakāraka (adj.) [fr. upakāra] serviceable, helping, effec- tive J v.99; Vism 534. -- f. upakārikā 1. benefactress, helper J iii.437. -- 2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall D i.105, see DA i.274 & cp. parikkhāra; M i.86 (= Nd2 1996). -- 3. (philosophy) = cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11
Upakārin
Upakārin (adj. -- n.) [fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142] a benefactor J iii.11; DA i.187; Sdhp 540, 546.
Upakiṇṇa
Upakiṇṇa [pp. of upakirati] strewn over with ( -- ˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; expld by okiṇṇa VvA 160).
Upakiriyā
Upakiriyā (f.) [fr. upa + kr] implement, ornament J v.408.
Upakūjati
Upakūjati [upa + kūjati] to sing to (of birds) J iv.296 (kūjantaŋ u. = replies w. song to the singing). -- pp. upakūjita (q. v.).
Upakūjita
Upakūjita ( -- ˚) [pp. of upakūjati] resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) J iv.359; PvA 154.
Upakūla
Upakūla [upa + kūla] embankment, a river's bank, river- side J vi.26 (rukkhɔûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank).
Upakūlita
Upakūlita [derivation uncertain] used of the nose in old age Th 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs. Rh. D. in "Sisters" takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller J R A S. 1919. 538. This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita.
Upakūḷita
Upakūḷita [pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati] singed, boiled, roasted J i.405 ("half -- roasted" = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.). See also upakūsita.
Upakūsita
Upakūsita at J ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. "kukkule jhāmo" and also by v. l. ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz. ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (v. l. BB.) by ˚kupita (meaning "shaken, disturbed by fire").
Upakka
Upakka see uppakka.
Upakkanta
Upakkanta [pp. of upakkamati] 1. attacked by ( -- ˚) Miln 112. -- 2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc.) DA i.140.
Upakkama
Upakkama [fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach ( -- ˚) VvA 72. -- (b) attack Vin ii.195; Miln 157; DA i.69, 71. -- (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S i.152 = Sn p. 126. -- (b) in special: ways, means, i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575; Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th 1, 143; J iv.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176.
Upakkamati
Upakkamati [upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack M i.86 = Ud 71. -- (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, 111. -- (3) to begin Vin iv.316; DA i.318.
Upakkamana
Upakkamana (nt.) [fr. upa + kram] going near to, attacking J iv.12.
Upakkitaka
Upakkitaka [fr. upa + krī to buy] a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka DhA i.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by "yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati"); Ps ii.196 (? T. upakkhittaka).
Upakkiliṭṭha
Upakkiliṭṭha [pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next] soiled, stained, depraved, impure S i.179; A i.207 (citta); Vism 13.
Upakkilesa
Upakkilesa [fr. upa + kliś] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. SnA 487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M i.36, 91; D iii.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; S v.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; A i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima -- suriyānaŋ samaṇa -- brāhmaṇānaŋ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Ps i.164 (eighteen); Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.
Upakkuṭṭha
Upakkuṭṭha [pp. of upakkosati] blamed, reproached, cen- sured, faulty D i.113 (an˚); Sn p. 115 (id.); J iii.523; DA i.211.
Upakkosa
Upakkosa [fr. upa + kruś] censure, reproach J vi.489.
Upakkosati
Upakkosati [upa + kosati] to scold, reprove, blame D i. 161; J iii.436, 523; iv.81, 317, 409.
Upakkhaṭa & ˚ta
Upakkhaṭa & ˚ta [pp. of upakaroti] done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered D i.127 (= sajjita DA i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita PvA 107); J vi.139; Miln 156.
Upakkhalati
Upakkhalati [upa + khalati] to stumble, trip D ii.250; M ii.209; A iii.101; J iii.433.
Upakkhalana
Upakkhalana (nt.) [fr. prec.] stumbling, tripping Vism 500.
Upakkhittaka
Upakkhittaka at Ps ii.196 see upakk˚.
Upakhandha
Upakhandha [upa + khandha] lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder J iv.210 (= khandha C.).
Upaga
Upaga (always as ˚ûpaga) (adj.) [upa + ga] -- 1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, S ii.24; ākāsɔānañcɔ āyatan˚ etc. Ps i.84; kāy˚ S ii.24; brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319; yathākamm˚ D i.82. -- 2. coming into, experiencing, having, as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283; phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower PvA 275. <-> 3. attached to, belonging to, being at J i.51 (hatth˚); VvA 12 (id. + pādûpaga). -- 4. in phrase gayh˚ lit. "accessible to the grip", acquisition of property, theft J iv.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Miln 325; DhA ii.29; PvA 4.
-- 140 --
Upagacchati
Upagacchati [upa + gacchati] -- 1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) D ii.12; PvA 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaŋ), 29, 32 (vāsaŋ) 132; ger. ˚gantvā PvA 70 (attano santikaŋ), & ˚gamma S ii.17, 20. -- 2. to undergo, go (in) to, to begin, undertake Sn 152 (diṭṭhiŋ anupagamma); J i.106 (vassaŋ); PvA 42 (id.); J i.200; niddaŋ upagacchati to drop off into sleep PvA 43 (aor. upagacchi, MSS. ˚gañchi), 105, 128. -- pp. upagata (q. v.).
Upagaṇhanā
Upagaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. of upa + gṛh] taking up, keeping up. meditating Miln 37.
Upagaṇhāti
Upagaṇhāti [upa + gaṇhāti] to take up (for meditation) Miln 38.
Upagata
Upagata [pp. of upagacchati] -- 1. gone to, come, ap- proached (intrs.) Sn 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna SnA 495); PvA 77 (santikaŋ), 78, 79 (petalokaŋ), 123. -- 2. undergoing, coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at A v.187); Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚); PvA 60 (= abhibhūta).
Upagamana
Upagamana (nt.) [fr. upa + gam] approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚); Nett 27; Vism 600; PvA 42 (vass˚).
Upagamanaka
Upagamanaka (adj.) [fr. upagamana] going to, one who goes to (with acc.) PvA 168 (= ˚upaga).
Upagaḷita
Upagaḷita [pp. of upagaḷati] flowing out, spat or slobbered out J v.471 (˚khelo; v. l. paggharita).
Upagāmin
Upagāmin (adj.) [fr. upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga] going to, undergoing, experiencing A ii.6 (jāti jar˚).
Upagūhati
Upagūhati [upa + gūhati] to embrace J i.346, 349; ii.424; iii.437; v.157, 328, 384. -- ger. upaguyha J vi.300.
Upagghāta
Upagghāta [pp. of next] scented, smelled, kissed J vi.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita).
Upagghāyati
Upagghāyati [upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1] to smell at, in sense of "to kiss" J v.328 (also inf. upagghātuŋ).
Upaghaṭṭita
Upaghaṭṭita [pp. of upaghaṭṭeti] knocked or knocking against J i.26 (v.179).
Upaghāta
Upaghāta [fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta] hurting, injuring, injury M iii.237; S ii.218; iv.323 sq.; A iii.173; Th 1, 583; Miln 274, 307, 347; DA i.273. an˚ not hurting others, kindness Dh 185.
Upaghātana
Upaghātana (nt.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting DhA iii.237 (an˚).
Upaghātika
Upaghātika (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] injuring, offending Vin ii.13.
Upaghātin
Upaghātin (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting, injuring J iii.523.
Upacaya
Upacaya [fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya] heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion & defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). <-> D i.76 (= odana = kummāsɔûpacayo, see under kāya); Dhs 582, 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaŋ ācayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449; DA i.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa preferable).
Upacarati
Upacarati [upa + carati] to deal with, handle, use J vi. 180. -- pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita (q. v.).
Upacarita
Upacarita [pp. of upacarati] practised, served, enacted, performed Miln 359, 360.
Upacāra
Upacāra [fr. upa + car] -- 1. approach, access Vin ii.120, 152; iv.304; J i.83, 172; DhsA 328 (phal˚). -- 2. habit, practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚); SnA 140 (id.); J iii.280. -- 3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) J iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180; Miln 153, 154 (dur˚ an evil spell); VvA 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ˚). -- 4. entrance, access, i. e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of ( -- ˚) J iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚ Vin i.109; iii.46; iv.230; KhA 77; SnA 83, 179. -- 5. attention, attendance Vin iv.272; J vi.180; Miln 154. -- 6. civility, polite behaviour J ii.56; vi.102. -- 7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53, 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood -- , or access -- concentration, distinguishing it from appanā -- samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim.
Upacikā
Upacikā (f.) [connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā > upatikā > upacikā) & Kern, Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for ˚dihikā, vv. ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ci, thus meaning "making heaps, a builder"] the termite or white ant Vin ii.113, 148, 152; iii.151; M i.306; J iii.320; iv.331; Miln 363, 392; Vism 62, DhA ii.25; iii.15.
Upaciṇṇa
Upaciṇṇa [pp. of upacarati] used, frequented, known (as value) J vi.180.
Upacita
Upacita [pp. of upacināti] -- 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150. -- 2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA i.220.
Upacitatta
Upacitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upacita] storing up, accumulation Dhs 431.
Upacināti
Upacināti [upa + ci] -- 1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaŋ or pāpaŋ) VvA 254; PvA 8, 241. -- 2. to concentrate, pay attention Th 1, 199 (C. upacetuŋ for ocetuŋ T.); J v.339 (= oloketi). -- Pass. upaciyyati Th 1, 807. -- pp. upacita (q. v.).
Upacca = uppacca
Upacca = uppacca (q. v.) "flying up" (= uppatitvā PvA 103) at Th 2, 248 (= ThA 205, where v. l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expld. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= PvA 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca).
Upaccagā
Upaccagā [upa + ati + agā of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of upâ- tigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami SnA 339) = Th 2, 5 (= mā atikkami ThA 12); Sn 636, 641, 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167); Dh 315, 412, 417 (= atikkanta DhA iv.225); Bu ii.43. -- pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311.
Upaccati
Upaccati (?) in phrase "akkhīni upacciŋsu" at J vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiŋsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati > upacināti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiŋsu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted.
Upacchindati
Upacchindati [upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. ˚chinde); J iv. 127; Nd1 502; ThA 267; PvA 31 (kulavaŋso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaŋ).
Upacchinna
Upacchinna [pp. of upacchindati] cut off, interrupted J i. 477; Miln 306.
Upacchubhati
Upacchubhati [upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti] to throw at M i.364 (vv. ll. ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚).
Upaccheda
Upaccheda [fr. upa + chid] breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption M i.245, 327 (pāṇ˚ murder); J i.67; Miln 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition) PvA 82 (kulavaŋs˚); DhA i.152 (āhār ˚ŋ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DA i.136, 159.
Upacchedaka
Upacchedaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. upaccheda] destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting J i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357; DA i.69 (jīvitɔ indriy˚); VvA 72 (id.).
-- 141 --
Upajānāti
Upajānāti [upa + jānāti] to learn, acquire or have know- ledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin i.272 (saŋyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvāsɔatthena); A i.50 (dvinnaŋ dhammānaŋ upaññāsin). -- fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati Sn 716) Sn 701, 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati SnA 498); J v.215. -- pp. upaññāta (q. v.).
Upajīvati
Upajīvati [upa + jīvati] to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) D i.228; S i.217; Sn 612 sq.; Th 1, 943; J iii.309, 338; iv.271 (= anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraŋ u. ti taŋ nissāya jīvanti PvA 134); Miln 231.
Upajīvika
Upajīvika (adj.) [= upajīvin] Sdhp 501 (see next).
Upajīvin
Upajīvin ( -- ˚) (adj. -- n.) [fr. upa + jīv] living on, sub- sisting by A ii.135 (phal˚); Sn 217 (para -- datt˚), J i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380; Pug 51; Miln 160 (Satth˚); VvA 141 (sipp˚). f. upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i. e. a courtesan) Miln 122; PvA 46; cp. kiliṭṭha -- kamm˚ gaṇikā PvA 195.
Upajūta
Upajūta (nt.) [upa + jūta] stake at game J vi.192.
Upajjha
Upajjha see next.
Upajjhāya
Upajjhāya [Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. "one who is gone close up to"] a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e. g. Vin i. 119; Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45, 53, 62, 120; iv. 130; S i.185; A ii.66, 78; iii.69; SnA 346; DhA ii.93; PvA 55, 60, 230. -- A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e. g. at Vin i.94; iii.35; with f. upajjhā Vin iv.326.
Upaññāta
Upaññāta [pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin i.40; J v.325, 368; A i.61.
Upaṭṭita
Upaṭṭita [upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terri- fied; overcome, overwhelmed J vi.82 (visavegena).
Upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti
Upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210; D ii.19; M i.429; J i.266; iv.2; v.218; Pug 59, 68; Miln 15, 257, 366 (pānīyaŋ paribhojanīyaŋ), 397; DA i.270; Sdhp 356. -- 2. to cause to be present Vin i.45; S i.170; Pv iv.170. -- 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A v.72 (gilānaŋ upaṭṭhātuŋ vā upaṭṭhāpetuŋ vā). -- 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267. <-> 5. to ordain Vin i.62, 83.
Upaṭṭhahati & ˚ṭṭhāti
Upaṭṭhahati & ˚ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on, attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50, 302; iv.326; M iii.25; S i.167; A iii.94; v.72; Sn 82 = 481 (imper. ˚ṭṭhahassu); J i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396; Dpvs ii.16; PvA 19, 20. -- aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA 14, 42, 82. -- inf. upaṭṭhātuŋ A v.72; PvA 20. -- ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA 76. -- grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302; PvA 20. -- pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). -- 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M i.104 sq.; A iv.32; J iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207; Miln 64; ThA 258. <-> aor. upaṭṭhāsi J i.61; iv.3; PvA 42. -- Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). -- Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna).
Upaṭṭhāka
Upaṭṭhāka [fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu i.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. i.214; ii.85, 112.] a servitor, personal attendant, servant, "famulus". Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D i.206; Th 1, 1041 f.; ThA in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin i.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47; D i.150 (Nāgita); S iii.113; A i.121; iii.31, 189; J i 15, 100 (a merchant's); ii.416; Pug 28; DhA ii.93; VvA 149; PvA 211. -- agg˚ main follower, chief attendant D ii.6; gilān˚ an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303; A i.26; sangh˚ one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216; A i.26; iii.39. -- dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302. -- kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen.) Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286; VvA 120.
Upaṭṭhāna
Upaṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] -- 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A i.151, 225; Sn 138; J i.226, 237, 291; ii.101; iv.138; vi.351. Ps i.107; ii.7 sq., 28, 230; PvA 104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560. -- 2. worship, (divine) service D iii.188 sq. (˚ŋ gacchati); PvA 122. Buddh˚ attendance on a Buddha PvA 93; ThA 18. <-> 3. a state room J iii.257. -- sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA 20. -- sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk. upasthāna -- śālā Divy 207] Vin i.49, 139; ii.153, 208; iii. 70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42; D ii.119 (at Vesālī); S ii.280; v.321; A ii.51, 197; iii.298; DhA i.37, 38; iii.413.
Upaṭṭhāpana
Upaṭṭhāpana (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin iv. 291.
Upaṭṭhita
Upaṭṭhita [pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upa- sthita Divy 281, 342] -- 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn 295 (˚asmiŋ yaññasmiŋ); J v.173 (annena pānena); Pv i.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta PvA 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita PvA 116); PvA 132. <-> 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh 235; Miln 274; PvA 124 (dānakāle ˚e). <-> 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M i.77; A ii.206; Sn 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv ii.953 (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA 135. -- sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin i.63; D iii.252, 282; S iv.186; A iii. 251; Pug 25.
Upaṭṭheti
Upaṭṭheti [Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaŋ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275. fut. ˚essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244.
Upaḍayhati
Upaḍayhati [upa + ḍayhati] to be burnt up Miln 277.
Upaḍḍha
Upaḍḍha (adj. -- nt.) [upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS i.211, 240] half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana); J iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma); DhA i.15, 205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; KhA 239 (˚gāthā); SnA 298; VvA 38, 61, 120; PvA 209, 276.
Upatappati
Upatappati [upa + tappati1)] to be vexed or tormented J v.90; DhsA 42.
Upatāpa
Upatāpa [fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism 166.
Upatāpana
Upatāpana (nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J iv.13; ThA 243.
Upatāpika
Upatāpika (adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J ii.224.
Upatāpeti
Upatāpeti [upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J ii.178, 224; iv.11; DhsA 42 (vibādhati +).
Upatiṭṭhati
Upatiṭṭhati [upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. "to stand by", to look after, to worship Pv iii.118; J ii.73 (ādiccaŋ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln 231 (ger. ˚tiṭṭhitvā); J v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Upatta
Upatta [upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M i.343; J i.399.
Upatthaddha
Upatthaddha [upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] - 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni). -- 2. supported or held up
-- 142 --
by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th 1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J i.47 (v. 267: mettābalena); v. 121, 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ "when it is the medium of an idea"); Nett 117; Miln 110 (kāruñña -- bal˚).
Upatthambha
Upatthambha [fr. upa + stambh] -- 1. a support, prop, stay Miln 355, 415, 417; Sdhp 565. -- 2. relief, ease Vin iii.112. -- 3. encouragement J v.270; DhA i.279.
Upatthambhaka
Upatthambhaka (adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153.
Upatthambhana
Upatthambhana (nt.) = upatthambha Miln 36; J i.447; DA i.124; ThA 258; Vism 279.
Upatthambhita
Upatthambhita [pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, sup- ported, sustained J i.107; Miln 36; DA i 234; PvA 117 (puñña -- phal˚), 148 (utu -- āhārehi u.).
Upatthambheti
Upatthambheti [upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J i.127 [ppr. ˚ayamāna), 447; DA i.113; DhA iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). <-> pp. upatthambhita.
Upatthara
Upatthara [fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D i.103 (rath˚); J ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534.
Upatheyya
Upatheyya [for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216] a cushion J vi.490, 513.
Upadaŋsitar
Upadaŋsitar [n. ag. fr. upadaŋseti] one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaŋsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists, and translators, like upadaŋseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsls. "one who confirms". The Pug A leaves the word unexplained).
Upadaŋseti
Upadaŋseti [= upadasseti with ˚aŋs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhan- seti = Sk. dharṣayati, haŋsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages] to cause to appear, to manifest M ii.120; S i. 64, 65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour -- tones); A ii.84 = iii.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Th i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin iv.309.
Upadasseti
Upadasseti (upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upa- daŋseti] to make manifest, to show Miln 276, 316, 347.
Upadahati
Upadahati [upa + dahati1] to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149; D ii.135 (vippaṭisāraŋ); A i.203 (dukkhaŋ); Miln 109, 139, 164, 286, 383. grd. pass. ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = A iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi.
Upadāyaka
Upadāyaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upa + dā] giving, bestowing Sdhp 319.
Upadiṭṭha
Upadiṭṭha [pp. of upadisati] pointed out, put forth, speci- fied Miln 144 (pañha).
Upadisati
Upadisati [upa + disati] to point out, show, advise, specify J v. 457 (sippaŋ); Miln 21 (dhamma -- maggaŋ). -- pp. upadiṭṭha (q. v.).
Upadissati
Upadissati [upa + dissati] to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Sn 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti SnA 192).
Upadeva
Upadeva [upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5] a secondary, lesser, minor god PvA 136.
Upadesa
Upadesa [fr. upadisati] pointing out, indication, instruction, advice PvA 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; KhA 208 differs at id. p.); KhA 100; Sdhp 227.
Upaddava
Upaddava [upa + dava2 of dru] lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression S ii.210; A i.101; Sn 51; Dh 338 (an˚); DhA i.16; Sdhp 267, 398.
Upaddavati
Upaddavati [fr. upa + dru] to annoy, trouble DA i.213. -- pp. upadduta (q. v.).
Upadduta
Upadduta [pp. of upaddavati] overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170; iii.144, 283; S ii.210; iv.29; J i.26, 61, 339; ii.102; iv.324, 494; Pv ii.108; Vism 24 (= apakata); Miln 279; VvA 311 (aṭṭita +); PvA 61. an˚ unmolested PvA 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested VvA 95.
Upadhaŋsitar & Upadhaŋseti
Upadhaŋsitar & Upadhaŋseti at Pug 49 is to be read upad˚ (q. v.).
Upadhāna
Upadhāna (adj. nt.) [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati] "putting under", i. e. (1) a pillow, cushion D i.7; S ii.267 = Miln 366 (kaḷingar˚); S iii.145; A i.137, 181; iii.50, J iv.201; v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ C.); (2) imposing, giving, causing Dh 291 dukkh˚).
Upadhāneti
Upadhāneti [f. upa + dhā] to suppose, think, reflect DhA i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti).
Upadhāraṇā
Upadhāraṇā (nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ) "receptacle", milk -- pail D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503. See kaŋs˚. Kern, Toev. i. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaŋsɔûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali.
Upadhāraṇā
Upadhāraṇā (f) [cp. upadhāraṇa] calculation VvA 7.
Upadhārita
Upadhārita [pp. of upadhāreti] considered, reflected upon Dh i.28; sûpadh˚ Miln 10; dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275.
Upadhāreti
Upadhāreti (Caus. of upa + dhṛ, cp. dhāreti 3] 1. "to hold or take up" (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet), to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such & such, realise J i.338; DhA i.28, 41; ii.15, 20, 37, 96; iv.197 (an˚); VvA 48, 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324; PvA 119 (for jānāti). -- 2. to look out for (acc.) J iii. 65; vi.2.
Upadhāvati
Upadhāvati [upa + dhāvati 1] to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207; iv.260 (pp. ˚dhāvita); S i.185; S ii.26 (aparantaŋ); Th 1, 1209; Miln 209; VvA 256; PvA 154, 168, 173 (for padhāvitā).
Upadhi
Upadhi [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, 224, 534] 1. putting down or under, foundation, basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) S i.117, 124, 134, 186; A ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (˚kkhaya); It 21, 69; Sn 364, 728 (upadhī -- nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa -- dukkhaŋ SnA 505), 789, 992; Nd1 27, 141; Nd2 157; Vbh 338; Nett 29; DhA iv.33. -- (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi); S A. = pañcakkhandhā, S ii.108. At M i 162 (cp. Sn 33 = S i.6 = i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds, silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; S ii.108; Sn 728 = 1051 = Th i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna D ii.36. (cp. S i.136; iii.133; v.226; A i.80; M i.107 = ii.93; Vin i.5, 36 = J i.83 = Mvst ii.444; It 46, 62); D iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (= non -- Aryan). At S i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saŋgo). Cp. opadhika. -- The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows: 5 taṇhɔ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma, duccarita), āhār -- upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa -- kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398.
Upadhika (Upadhīka)
Upadhika (Upadhīka) (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upadhi] having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36; Sn 1057, & nir˚ id. S i.141.
Upadheyya
Upadheyya (nt.) [cp. upadhāna] a cushion J vi.490 (for upatheyya, q. v.).
Upanaccati
Upanaccati [upa + naccati] to perform a dance D ii.268.
Upanata
Upanata [pp. of upanamati] inclined, bent, prone PvA 190.
Upanadati
Upanadati [upa + nadati] to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 (= vikūjati PvA 189).
-- 143 --
Upanandha
Upanandha [pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati] scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118.
Upanandhati
Upanandhati [a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upa- nayhati] to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.); aor. upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiŋ); iv.83; Mhvs 36, 117.
Upanamati
Upanamati [upa + namati] to be bent on, strive after J iii 324 (= upagacchati C.). -- pp. upanata; Caus. upanāmeti (q. v.).
Upanayana
Upanayana (nt.) [fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana] tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11) Miln 154; Nett 63; DhsA 329 (so read with v. l. for ˚najana).
Upanayhati
Upanayhati [upa + nayhati] -- 1. to come into touch with It 68 = J iv.435 (pūtimacchaŋ kusaggena, cp. DhA i.45). -- 2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge, scorn Dh 3, 4. -- pp. upanandha (for ˚naddha). -- See also upanandhati.
Upanayhanā
Upanayhanā (f.) & ˚nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill -- will) in exegesis at Pug 18 = 22, whereas id. p. at Vbh 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaŋ (with v. l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaŋ).
Upanāmita
Upanāmita [pp. of upanāmeti] brought up to, placed against D ii.134.
Upanāmeti
Upanāmeti [Caus. of upanamati] 1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near D ii. 134; S i.207; Th 1, 1055; Sn p. 48 (= attano kāyaŋ Bhagavato upanāmeti); J i.62; v.215; SnA 151. -- 2. to offer, to present J iv.386; ii.5; Miln 210, 373; PvA 274. -- pp. upanāmita (q. v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, 14, 22].
Upanāyika
Upanāyika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upa + nī] -- 1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att˚ ref. to oneself Vin iii.91; Vism 27. -- 2. beginning, in phrase vass'ûpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253; A i.51 (divided into 2 parts, first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); J iii.332; DA i.8; DhA i.203; iii.438; VvA 44; PvA 42.
Upanāha
Upanāha [fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e. g. at M Vastu ii.56.] ill -- will, grudge, enmity M i.15; A i.91, 95, 299; iv.148, 349, 456; v.39, 41 sq., 209, 310; Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (pubbakālaŋ kodho aparakālaŋ upanāho Miln 289.
Upanāhin
Upanāhin (adj. -- n.) [fr. upanāha] one who bears ill -- will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89; M i.95; D iii.45; S ii.206; iv.241; A iii.260, 334; v.123, 156; Sn 116; Th 1, 502; J iii.260 (kodhana +); Pug 18; Vbh 357. -- Opp. an˚ not being angry (loc.) D iii.47; S ii. 207; iv.244; A v.124 sq.; J iv.463.
Upanikkhamati
Upanikkhamati [upa + nikkhamati] to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Th 2, 37; 169; J iii 244; Pv i. 101 (aor. ˚nikkhami; imper. ˚nikkhamassu).
Upanikkhitta
Upanikkhitta [upa + n˚] laid down (secretly), placed by or on top S v.457; J vi.390; Miln 80. -- m. a spy J vi.394 (˚purisa).
Upanikkhittaka
Upanikkhittaka [= prec.] a spy J vi 409 (˚manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.).
Upanikkhipati
Upanikkhipati (upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312; S ii.136 sq.; Miln 78, 80; Nett 21, 22; DA i. 125. -- pp. upanikkhitta (q. v.).
Upanikkhipana
Upanikkhipana (nt.) [fr. ˚nikkhipati] putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77.
Upanikkhepa
Upanikkhepa [fr. upa + nis + kṣip] "putting near", depositing; -- 1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Miln 78, 80; cp. ˚nikkhepana S ii.276. -- 2. deposit, pledge J vi.192, 193 (= upajūta).
Upanighaŋsati
Upanighaŋsati [upa + ni + ghaŋsati1] to rub up against, to crush (close) up to DhA i.58.
Upanijjhāna
Upanijjhāna (nt.) [upa + nijjhāna1] meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚, with ref. to jhāna J v.251; DhA i.230; iii.276; VvA 38, 213. Cp. nijjhāyana.
Upanijjhāyati
Upanijjhāyati [upa + nijjhāyati] to meditate upon, con- sider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 ("covet"); ii 269; iii. 118; D i.20; A iv.55; Miln 124; Vism 418. -- pp. upanijjhāyita (q. v.).
Upanijjhāyana
Upanijjhāyana [for ˚nijjhāna] meditation, reflection Miln 127; Vism 418.
Upanijjhāyita
Upanijjhāyita [pp. of ˚nijjhāyati] considered, looked at, thought over or about Sn p. 147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita SnA 508).
Upanidhā
Upanidhā (f.) [abstracted from upanidhāya or direct for- mation fr. upa + ni + dhā?] comparison Nd2 158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?).
Upanidhāya
Upanidhāya (indecl.) [ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā] comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. "compared with" M i.374; iii.177 (Himavantaŋ pabbatarājānaŋ); S ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviŋ), 262; v.457 (Sineru -- pabbata -- rājānaŋ); A iii.181 sq.; iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaŋ); Th 1, 496 (kammaŋ); J ii.93; DA i.29, 59, 283.
Upanidhi
Upanidhi (f.) [upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi] -- 1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51. -- 2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiŋ na upeti "does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with" M iii.177; S ii.263; v.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23.
Upanipajjati
Upanipajjati [upa + ni + pad] to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; J v.231.
Upanibajjhati
Upanibajjhati see upanibandhati.
Upanibaddha
Upanibaddha [pp. of ˚nibandhāti] -- 1. tied on to Miln 253, 254. -- 2. closely connected with, close to Vin iii. 308 (Samanta Pāsādikā). -- 3. attached to DA i.128.
Upanibandha
Upanibandha [upa + ni + bandh] 1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara). -- 2. (adj. -- ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaŋ assāsa -- passāsa˚ etc).
Upanibandhati
Upanibandhati [upa + n˚) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach M iii.132; Miln 254, 412. -- Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Sn 218. -- pp. ˚nibaddha (q. v.).
Upanibandhana
Upanibandhana (adj. nt.) [upa + n˚] (adj.) closely con- nected with D i.46; DA i.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Miln 253.
Upanibbatta
Upanibbatta [upa + nibbatta] come out, produced DA i.247.
Upanibha
Upanibha (adj. [upa + nibha] somewhat like ( -- ˚) M i. 58 = A iii.324 (sankha -- vaṇṇa˚); J i.207 (= sadisa C.); v.302 (tāla˚).
Upanivattati
Upanivattati [upa + n˚] to return Sn 712; J iv.417; v.126.
Upanisā
Upanisā (f.) [if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri . The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad] -- 1. cause, means D ii. 217, 259; M iii.71 (samādhiŋ sa -- upanisaŋ); S ii.30 -- 32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25; A i.198; iii.20, 200 sq., 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq.; Sn 322 (= upanissaya SnA 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana SnA 503); Dh 75 (cp. DhA ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). <-> 2. likeness, counterfeit [= Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79] J vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.).
-- 144 --
Upanisīdati
Upanisīdati [upa + nisīdati of sad] to sit close to or down by D i.95; A iv.10; J ii.347; Pv iv.163 (ger. ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā PvA 242); Vism 269.
Upanisevati
Upanisevati [upa + n˚] to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) M i.306. -- pp. upanisevita (q. v.).
Upanisevana
Upanisevana (adj.) [fr. upanisevati] going close after, fol- lowing J v.399 [f. ˚ī.).
Upanisevita
Upanisevita [pp. of upanisevati] gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of J v.302 (kakka˚).
Upanissaya
Upanissaya [upa + ni˚] basis, reliance, support, founda- tion, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature J i.78, 508; iv.96; vi.70; Nett 80; Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya); DhsA 315 (id.); DhA ii.33; VvA 98; PvA 38 (sotāpatti -- phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti); Sdhp 265, 320.
Upanissayati
Upanissayati [upa + ni˚] to depend or rely on (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaŋ). -- ger. ˚nissāya (q. v.); -- pp. ˚nissita (q. v.).
Upanissāya
Upanissāya (adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) M ii.3; S ii.269; Sn 867 (taŋ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, PvA 9 (Rājagahaŋ), 67 (id.); VvA 63 (Rājagaha -- seṭṭhiŋ "with"). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e. g. at Divy 54, 207, 505.
Upanissita
Upanissita [upa + ni˚] dependent or relying on Sn 877; Nd1 283, Miln 245.
Upanīta
Upanīta [pp. of upaneti] 1. brought up to or into (mostly -- ˚) Th 2, 498; Sn 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚); J iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚); Nd1 38; Dh 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo DhA iii.337, advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚ Sn 846. -- 2. offered, presented J i.88; PvA 274, 286. <-> 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) J v.375 (= maraṇa -- santikaŋ u. C.). -- 4. bringing up (for trial), charging M i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya).
Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya)
Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya) [ger. of upaneti] "bringing up" (for trial), charging, accusing D i.107 (vadati, cp. DA i. 276); A i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3.
Upanīla
Upanīla (adj.) [upa + nīla] somewhat dark -- blue J v.168.
Upaneti
Upaneti [upa + neti] to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give J i.200; Miln 396; DA i.276; PvA 39, 43, 49, 53, 74. -- Pass. upanīyati (˚niyyati) -- 1. to be brought (up to) J iv.398; ppr. ˚nīyamāna J i.200; PvA 5. -- 2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) M ii.68; S i.2. -- 3. to be carried along or away A i.155. -- pp. upanīta (q. v.). -- ger. upanīya (q. v.).
Upanti
Upanti (adv.) [upa + anti] near, before, in presence of J iv.337.
Upantika
Upantika (adj.) [upa + antika] nt. acc. ˚ŋ near J iv.337; v.58 (with gen.); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); loc. ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 (= samīpe gehassa PvA 120).
Upapacciyati
Upapacciyati see uppaccati.
Upapajjati
Upapajjati [doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Notes 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry. The v. l. upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other] to get to, be reborn in (acc.); to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaŋ); A iii.415; v.292 sq.; Sn 584; It 13 (nirayaŋ), 14 (sugatiŋ; v. l. upp˚), 67 (saggaŋ lokaŋ; v. l. upp˚); 43 = Dh 307 (nirayaŋ); Dh 126, 140; Pv i.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja PvA 50); Pug 16, 51, 60; Nett 37, 99, cp. Kvu 611 sq. <-> pp. upapannā (q. v.). -- Caus. upapādeti & pp. upapādita (q. v.).
Upapatti
Upapatti [fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti] -- 1. birth, re- birth, (lit. attainment) M i.82; S iii.53; iv.398; A v. 289 sq.; Sn 139, 643, 836; Dh 419 (sattānaŋ); in var. specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods PvA 6, 81; devaloka˚ A i.115; kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe D iii.218; It 94; arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vbh 172, 267, 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vbh 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory PvA 53. <-> 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. "coming to"); object for, in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts A iv.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna). -- deva a god by birth (or rebirth) VvA 18; also given as uppatti -- deva, e. g. at KhA 123. See detail under deva.
Upapattika
Upapattika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upapatti] belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta PvA 119. -- Cp. upapātika.
Upapanna
Upapanna [pp. of upapajjati] -- 1. ( -- ˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Sn 68 (thāma -- bala), 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna -- ñāṇa). <-> 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) S i.35 (Avihaŋ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as "nipphattivasena upagata", i. e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) A v.68.
Upaparikkhaṇa
Upaparikkhaṇa (nt.) = upaparikkhā VvA 232.
Upaparikkhati
Upaparikkhati [upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, 230] to investigate, ascertain, test, examine M i.133, 292, 443; S ii.216; iii.42, 140; iv.174; J i.489; ii.400; v.235; Miln 91, 293; Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539; PvA 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya).
Upaparikkhā
Upaparikkhā (f.) [fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.] investigation, examination Vin iii.314; M ii.175 (attha˚); A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; Nett 8, 42; DA i.171.
Upaparikkhin
Upaparikkhin (adj.) [fr. upaparikkhati] investigating, re- flecting, testing S iii.61; A iv.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp. BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212.
Upapāta
Upapāta = upapatti [but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad) with the meaning of the casual & unusual] rebirth Vin iii.4; S iv.59 (cut˚); Pug 50.
Upapātika
Upapātika (adj.) [fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk. upapāduka Av. S ii.94, 95; Divy 523] = opapātika i. e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on D iii.107; ThA 207.
Upapādita
Upapādita [pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati] accom- plished J ii.236.
Upapādeti
Upapādeti [Caus. of upapajjati] to execute, perform J v.346.
Upapāramī
Upapāramī (f.) [upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5] minor perfection Bu i.77 (opp. paramattha -- pāramī); DhA i.84.
Upapisana
Upapisana [upa + piṣ] grinding, powder, in añjan˚ pow- dered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203; ii.112.
Upapurohita
Upapurohita [upa + purohita, see upa 5] a minor or assistant priest J iv.304.
Upapīla
Upapīla at D i.135 read uppīḷa (q. v.).
-- 145 --
Upapphusati
Upapphusati [upa + phusati, of spṛś] to touch; aor. upap- phusi J v.417, 420.
Upaplavati
Upaplavati [upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati] to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviŋ at Sn 1145 (dīpā dīpaŋ upaplaviŋ floatcd from land to land; vv. ll. at SnA 606 uppalaviŋ & upallaviŋ; all MSS. of Nd2 p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviŋ). Perhaps we should better read uppalaviŋ (or upallaviŋ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviŋ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v. Expld. at Nd2 160 by samupallaviŋ.
Upabbajati
Upabbajati [upa + vraj] to go to, resort to, visit Th 1, 1052; J iv.270, 295; v.495 (= upagacchati C.); vi.43.
Upabbūḷha
Upabbūḷha see sam˚.
Upabrūhaṇa
Upabrūhaṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛŋhita Jtm 3195] expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; DhsA 117.
Upabhunjaka
Upabhunjaka (adj.) [fr. next] one who eats or enjoys Vism 555.
Upabhunjati
Upabhunjati [upa + bhuj] to enjoy J iii.495; v.350 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ) -- grd. upabhogga. -- pp. upabhattu (q. v.).
Upabhutta
Upabhutta [pp. of upabhunjati] enjoyed Dāvs iii.65.
Upabhoga
Upabhoga [fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati] enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267; J ii.431; iv.219 (v. l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Miln 201, 403; PvA 49, 220 (˚paribhoga); DhA iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, 341, 547.
Upabhogin
Upabhogin (adj.) [fr. upabhuñjati] enjoying Miln 267.
Upabhogga
Upabhogga (adj.) [Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati] to be enjoyed, enjoyable Miln 201.
Upama
Upama (adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub -- mo] "coming quite or nearly up to", i. e. like, similar, equal D i.239 (andha -- veṇ˚); M i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow); A iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water); Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa PvA 7); PvA 2, 8 etc. -- Note. ūpama metri causa see ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā.
Upamā
Upamā (f.) [f. of upama in abstract meaning] likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. S ii. 114; M i.148); Sn 705 (cp. Dh 129, 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaŋ paṭibhāgo Nd2 158); It 114; Vism 341, 478, 512, 582 sq., 591 sq.; PvA 29, 112 (dhen˚); SnA 329, 384; Sdhp 29, 44, 259. -- vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaŋ) SnA 13, 472; KhA 185, 195, 208, 212; PvA 25.
Upamāna
Upamāna (nt.) [fr. upa + mā] comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison J v.341; VvA 13.
Upamānita
Upamānita [pp. of caus. upa + mā] measured out, likened, like, comparable Th 2, 382 (= sadisa ThA 255).
Upameti
Upameti [upa + mā] to measure one thing by another, to compare J vi.252; Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?).
Upameyya
Upameyya (adj.) [grd. of upa + mā] to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison VvA 13.
Upaya
Upaya [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. ( -- ˚) in an˚ (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached S i.141, 181; ii.284; Sn 786, 787, 897 (cp. SnA 558); and in rūpûpaya (vv. ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya) "clinging to form" (etc.) S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (+ rupɔārammaṇa).
Upayācati
Upayācati [upa + yācati] to beg, entreat, pray to J vi. 150 (divyaŋ).
Upayācitaka
Upayācitaka (nt.) [of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati] begging, asking, praying, propitiation J vi.150 (= devatānaŋ āyācana).
Upayāti
Upayāti [upa + yāti of yā] to go to, to approach S i.76; ii.118 (also Caus. ˚yāpeti); Dpvs vi.69; Sdhp 579.
Upayāna
Upayāna (nt.) [fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163] nearing, approach, arrival D i.10; DA i.94.
Upayānaka
Upayānaka [fr. upayāna] a crab J vi.530.
Upayuñjati
Upayuñjati [upa + yuj] to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna VvA 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food).
Upayoga
Upayoga [fr. upa + yuj] connection, combination; em- ployment, application J vi.432 (nagare upayogaŋ netvā for use in the town? v. l. upabhogaŋ). Usually in cpd. ˚vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis SnA 386; KhA 236; PvA 73, 135; or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi -- vacana SnA 127; PvA 102; bhumma˚ SnA 140; KhA 116; karaṇa˚ SnA 148; sampadāna˚ J v.214; SnA 317; itthambhūta˚ SnA 441; nissakka˚ J v.498.
Uparacita
Uparacita [pp. of upa + rac] formed ThA 211; Sdhp 616.
Uparajja
Uparajja (nt.) [upa + rajja, cp. uparaja] viceroyalty A iii. 154 (v. l. opa˚); J i.511; iv.176; DA i.134.
Uparata
Uparata [pp. of uparamati] having ceased, desisting from ( -- ˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt -- ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti -- bhojanato uparata DA i.77); D i.5 (id.); M i.319 (bhaya˚); Sn 914 (= virata etc. Nd1 337); Miln 96, 307; DhsA 403 (vihiŋs˚).
Uparati
Uparati (f.) [fr. upa + ram] ceasing, resting; cessation M i.10; S iv.104; Miln 274.
Uparamati
Uparamati [upa + ram] to cease, desist, to be quiet J iii. 489; v.391 (v. l. for upāramati, also in C.); Miln 152.
Uparamā
Uparamā (f.) [cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati] cessation Miln 41, 44 (an˚).
Uparava
Uparava [fr. upa + ru] noise J ii.2.
Uparājā
Uparājā [upa + rājā; see upa 5] a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy J i.504; ii.316; DhA i.392.
Upari
Upari (indecl.) [Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. uper, Lat. s -- uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for] over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv.) on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heṭṭhā); J vi.432; KhA 248 (= uddhaŋ; opp. adho); SnA 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Sn 442); PvA 11 (heṭṭhā manussa -- saṇṭhānaŋ upari sūkara -- s˚), 47 (upari chattaŋ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything). -- 2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? DhA i 41; attano u. patati falls upon himself PvA 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i. e. against her VvA 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari after 4 months PvA 52 (= uddhaŋ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012); sattannaŋ vassa -- satānaŋ upari after 700 years PvA 144. <-> 3. (adv. in compn., meaning "upper, higher, on the upper or top side", or "on top of", if the phrase is in loc. case. See below. -- cara walking in the air, suspended, flying J iii.454. -- pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace D i.112 (loc.); PvA 105, 279. -- piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii 207 (loc). -- bhaddaka N. of a tree [either Sk. bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba, after Kern, Toev. s. v.] J vi.269. -- bhāga the upper part; used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of "above, over,
-- 146 --
beyond" J iv.232 (instr.). -- bhāva higher state or condition M i.45 (opp. adh˚). -- mukha face upwards DA i. 228; Pug A 214. -- vasana upper garment PvA 49. -- vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind J ii.11; or in ˚passe (loc.) on the upper (wind -- ) side DhA ii.17. -- visāla extended on top, i. e. of great width, very wide J iii.207. -- vehāsa high in the air (˚ -- ), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa -- ghaṭṭā "not knocking against the head of a middle -- (sized) man" is not quite clear). -- sacca higher truth PvA 66 (so read for upari sacca).
Upariṭṭha
Upariṭṭha (adj.) [superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha] highest, topmost, most excellent Th 1, 910. Cp. next.
Upariṭṭhima
Upariṭṭhima (adj) [double -- superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā] = upariṭṭha & uparima Dhs 1016, 1300, 1401; Pug 16, 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaŋbhāgiya -- sañyojanāni Pug A 198).
Uparima
Uparima (adj.) [upari + ma, superl. formation] uppermost, above, overhead D iii.189 (disā); Nett 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima.
Upariya
Upariya (adv.) [fr. upari] above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚ below and above Vism 1.
Uparujjhati
Uparujjhati [Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati] to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed D i.223; Th 1, 145; It 106; Sn 724, 1036, 1110; Nd2 159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Miln 151; Sdhp 280. <-> pp. uparuddha.
Uparuddha
Uparuddha [pp. of uparujjhati] stopped, ceased Miln 151 (˚jīvita).
Uparundhati
Uparundhati [upa + rudh] to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check M i.243; J i.358; Th 1, 143, 1117; Sn 118, 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd1 346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Miln 151, 245, 313. -- ger. uparundhiya Th 1, 525; Sn 751; aor. uparundhi J iv.133; PvA 271. -- Pass. uparujjhati (q. v.).
Uparūḷha
Uparūḷha [upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh] grown again, recovered J iv.408 (cakkhu).
Uparocati
Uparocati [upa + ruc] to please (intrs.) J vi.64.
Uparodati
Uparodati [upa + rud] 1. to lament J vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati) -- 2. to sing in a whining tone J v.304.
Uparodha
Uparodha [fr. upa + rudh] obstacle; breaking up, destruc- tion, end J iii.210, 252; Pv iv.15; Miln 245, 313.
Uparodhana
Uparodhana (nt.) [fr. upa + rudh] breaking up, destruc- tion Sn 732, 761.
Uparodheti
Uparodheti [Caus of uparundhati] to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73.
Uparopa
Uparopa [upa + ropa, cp. upa 5] "little plant", sapling Vin ii.154. See also next.
Uparopaka
Uparopaka = uparopa, sapling J ii.345; iv.359.
Upala
Upala [Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain] a stone Dāvs iii.87.
Upalakkhaṇā
Upalakkhaṇā (f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [upa + lakkhaṇa] discrimi- nation S iii.261 (an˚); Dhs 16, 20, 292, 1057; Pug 25; VvA 240.
Upalakkheti
Upalakkheti [upa + lakṣay] to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172.
Upaladdha
Upaladdha [pp. of upalabhati] acquired, got, found J vi. 211 (˚bāla; v. l. paluddha˚); Sdhp 4, 386.
Upaladdhi
Upaladdhi (f.) [fr. upa + labh] acquisition; knowledge Miln 268; VvA 279.
Upalabhati
Upalabhati [upa + labh] to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Miln 124 (kāraṇaŋ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist M i.138 (an˚); S i.135; iv.384; Sn 858; Pv ii.111 (= paccanubhavīyati PvA 146); Kvu 1, 2; Miln 25; PvA 87.
Upalāpana
Upalāpana (nt.) [fr. upa + lap] talking over or down, per- suasion; diplomacy, humbug D ii.76; Miln 115, 117.
Upalāpeti
Upalāpeti [Caus. of upa + lap] to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119; iii.21; J ii.266; iii.265; iv.215; PvA 36, 46, 276.
Upalāḷita
Upalāḷita [pp. of upalāḷeti] caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301.
Upalāḷeti
Upalāḷeti [Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, 503]. -- 1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over J ii. 267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375. -- 2. to boast of, exult in J ii.151. -- pp. upalāḷita (q. v.).
Upaḷāseti
Upaḷāseti [upa + Caus. of las] to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) D ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q. v.).
Upalikkhati
Upalikkhati [upa + likh] to scratch, scrape, wound A iii. 94 sq. (= vijjhati C.).
Upalitta
Upalitta [pp. of upalimpati] smeared with ( -- ˚), stained, tainted Th 2, 467 (cp. ThA 284; T. reads apalitta); Pug 56. Usually neg. an˚ free from taint, undefiled M i.319, 386; Miln 318; metri causa anûpalitta S i.141; ii.284; Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353 (cp. DhA iv.7).
Upalippati
Upalippati [Pass. of upalimpati] to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Sn 547, 812; J iii.66 (= allīyati C.); Miln 250, 337.
Upalimpati
Upalimpati [upa + lip] to smear, defile D ii.18; Vin iii. 312; J i.178; iv.435; Miln 154. -- Pass. upalippati, pp. upalitta (q. v.).
Upalepa
Upalepa [fr. upa + lip] defilement J iv.435.
Upalohitaka
Upalohitaka (adj. [upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5] reddish J iii.21 (= rattavaṇṇa C.).
Upallaviŋ
Upallaviŋ Sn 1145 see upaplavati.
Upavajja
Upavajja (adj.) [grd. of upavadati] blameworthy S iv.59, 60; A ii.242. an˚ blameless, without fault S iv.57 sq; A iv.82; Miln 391.
Upavajjatā
Upavajjatā (f.) [abstr. fr. upavajja] blameworthiness S iv. 59 (an˚).
Upavaṇṇeti
Upavaṇṇeti [upa + vaṇṇeti] to describe fully Sdhp 487.
Upavattati
Upavattati [upa + vṛt] to come to pass, to take place J vi.58.
Upavadati
Upavadati [upa + vad] to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame D i.90; S iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); A ii.121 (id.); v.88; J ii.196; PvA 13.
Upavana
Upavana (nt.) [upa + vana, see upa 5] a kind of wood, miniature wood, park J iv.431; v.249; Miln 1; VvA 170 (= vana), 344; ThA 201; PvA 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚).
Upavasati
Upavasati [upa + vasiti]. -- 1. to dwell in or at J iii.113; DA i.139. -- 2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaŋ upavasati to observe the fast day S i.208; A i.142, 144, 205; Sn 402 (ger. upavassa); J iii.444; SnA 199; PvA 209. -- pp. upavuttha (q. v.). See also uposatha.
Upavāda
Upavāda [fr. upa + vad] insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd1 386; PvA 269; an˚ (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dh 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa).
Upavādaka
Upavādaka (adj.) [fr. upavāda] blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaŋ u.
-- 147 --
insulting the gentle Vin iii.5; A i.256; iii.19; iv.178; v.68; It 58, 99. -- an˚ Ps i.115; Pug 60.
Upavādin
Upavādin (adj. [fr. upavāda] = upavādaka; in ariy˚ S i. 225; ii.124; v.266; Pv iv.339. an˚ M i.360.
Upavāyati
Upavāyati [upa + vāyati] to blow on or towards somebody M i.424; A iv.46; Th 1, 544; Pv iii.66; Miln 97.
Upavāsa
Upavāsa [fr. upa + vas, see upavasati] keeping a prescri- bed day, fasting, self -- denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e. g. at Av. Ś i.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga -- samanvāgataŋ upavāsaŋ upavasati] A v.40 (? uncertain; vv. ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); J vi.508; SnA 199 (in expln. of uposatha).
Upavāsita
Upavāsita (adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed PvA 164 (for gandha -- samerita).
Upavāhana
Upavāhana (nt.) [upa + vāhana] carrying away, washing away Sn 391 (sanghāṭi -- raj -- ûpa˚ = paŋsu -- malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaŋ SnA 375).
Upavicāra
Upavicāra [upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by "perplexed by doubts" (?)] applying (one's mind) to, discrimination D iii.245 (domanass˚); M iii.239; S iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.); A iii.363 sq.; v.134; Ps i.17; Dh 8, 85, 284; Vbh 381.
Upavijaññā
Upavijaññā (f.) (adj.) [grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya] about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth M i.384; Th 2, 218; Ud 13; Dāvs iii.38; ThA 197.
Upavisati
Upavisati [upa + visati] to come near, to approach a per- son J iv.408; v.377; aor. upāvisi Sn 415, 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaŋ gantvā nisīdi SnA 384).
Upavīna
Upavīna [upa + vīṇā] the neck of a lute S iv. 197; Miln 53.
Upavīta
Upavīta [?] covered (?) at VvA 8 in phrase "vettalatâdīhi upavītaŋ āsanaŋ" should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll. uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)?
Upavīyati
Upavīyati [Pass. of upa + vā2 to weave] te be woven J vi.26.
Upavuttha
Upavuttha [pp. of upavasati] celebrated, kept (of a fastday) A i.211 (uposatha); Sn 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha.
Upavhyati
Upavhyati [upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati] to invoke, call upon D ii.259; S i.168.
Upasaŋvasati
Upasaŋvasati [upa + saŋ + vas] to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) J i.152.
Upasaŋharaṇa
Upasaŋharaṇa (nt.) [fr. upasaŋharati] drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; J v.186.
Upasaŋharati
Upasaŋharati [upa + saŋ + hṛ] -- 1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Miln 132. -- 2. to dispose, arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaŋ); M i.436 (cittaŋ), 468 (cittaŋ tathattāya); S v.213 sq. (id.); DhsA 309 (cakkhuŋ). -- 3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Miln 232.
Upasaŋhāra
Upasaŋhāra [fr. upa + saŋ + hṛ] taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚ being seized or possessed by a god Miln 298.
Upasaŋhita
Upasaŋhita (adj.) [pp. of upa + saŋ + dhā] accompanied by, furnished or connected with ( -- ˚) D i.152; M i.37, 119 (chand˚); S ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (id.); Sn 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraŋ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaŋ Nd2); Th 1, 970; J i.6; ii.134, 172; v.361.
Upasankamati
Upasankamati [upa + saŋ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankra- mati Av. S. i.209] -- 1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach, come near; freq. in stock phrase "yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) tenɔ upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdiɔ', e. g. Vin i.270; D i.109; ii.1, and passim. -- aor. ˚sankami Pv. ii.210; SnA 130, 140; KhA 116; PvA 88; ger. ˚sankamitvā SnA 140; PvA 6, 12, 19, 20, 88; ˚sankamma Sn 166, 418, 460, 980, 986; inf. ˚sankamituŋ PvA 79. -- . 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Miln 169, 233, 353; DA i.7.
Upasankamana
Upasankamana (nt.) [fr. upasankamati] going near, ap- proach M ii.176; S v.67 = It 107; PvA 232.
Upasankheyya
Upasankheyya (adj.) [grd of upa + sankharoti] to be prepared, produced or contracted Sn 849 (= ˚sankhātabba SnA 549; cp. Nd1 213).
Upasagga
Upasagga [Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj] -- 1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33; A i.101; Th 2, 353; Dh 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. DhA iii.70); Miln 418. -- 2. (tt. g.) prefix, preposition J ii.67 (saŋ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni, pa); DA i.245 (adhi); KhA 101 (sa˚ and an˚); PvA 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa); DhsA 163, 405.
Upasaṇṭhapanā
Upasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti] stopping, cau- sing to cease, settling Pug 18 (see also an˚).
Upasanta
Upasanta [pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati] calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace M i.125; S i.83, 162; A iii. 394; Sn 848, 919, 1087, 1099; Nd1 210, 352, 434; Nd2 161; Dh 201, 378; Miln 394; DhA iii.260; iv.114; PvA 132 (= santa).
Upasama
Upasama [Sk. upaśama, upa + śam] calm, quiet, appea- sement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i 10 = S iv.331 = v.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saŋvattati; see nibbāna iii.7); D i.50; iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); M i. 67; iii.246; S i.30, 34 (sīlena), 46 citta -- v -- ûpasama), 48, 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaŋ . . . v -- ūpasamo) D ii. 157; S i.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaŋ maggaŋ dukkh˚ -- gāminaŋ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179, 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq.; A i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Sn 257, 724, 735, 737; It 18 (dukkh˚) 83; Dh 205; Nd1 351; J i.97; Ps i.95; Miln 170, 248; Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587. Cp. vi˚ (vū˚).
Upasamati
Upasamati [upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning] to appease, calm, allay, assuage Sn 919; Th 1, 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd1 352). -- pp. upasanta q. v.).
Upasamāna
Upasamāna (nt.) = upasama Th 1, 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚).
Upasampajjati
Upasampajjati [upa + sampajjati] to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja M i.89; S iii.8; A iv.13; v.69; Dhs 160 (see DhsA 167); DA i.313; SnA 158. -- pp. upasampanna (q. v.).
Upasampadā
Upasampadā (f.) [fr. upa + saŋ + pad] -- 1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking D ii.49; M i.93; A iii.65; Dh 183 (cp. DhA iii.236); Nett 44 (kusalassa). -- 2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad & ˚padā Divy 21, 281 etc.] Vin i.12, 20, 95, 146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52; D i.176, 177, 202; S i.161; A iv.276 sq. & passim; DhA ii.61 (pabbajjā +); PvA 54 (laddh˚ one who has received ordination), 179 (id.).
Upasampanna
Upasampanna [pp. of upasampajjati] obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship, ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] S i.161; A v.70; Vin iii.24; iv.52, 130; Miln 13.
-- 148 --
Upasampādeti
Upasampādeti [Denom. fr. upasampadā] 1. to attain to, obtain, produce DhsA 167 (= nipphādeti). -- 2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130, 226, 317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. ˚etabba Vin i.64 sq.; iv.48; A v.72.
Upasamphassati
Upasamphassati [upa + sam + spṛś] to embrace J v.297.
Upasammati
Upasammati [Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function] to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased S i.62, 221; Dh 100 sq.
Upasavyāna
Upasavyāna (nt.?) [?] "a robe worn over the left shoulder" (Hardy, Index to ed.) VvA 166 (v. l. upavasavya).
Upasiŋsaka
Upasiŋsaka (adj.). [fr. upa + siŋsati = śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsaka] striving after, longing or wishing for Miln 393 (āhār˚; Morris J P T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka).
Upasinghaka
Upasinghaka (adj.) [fr. upa + singh] sniffing after J ii. 339; iii.144; Miln 393 (? see upasiŋsaka).
Upasinghati
Upasinghati [upa + singh] -- 1. to sniff at S i.204 (pa- dumaŋ); i.455; J ii.339, 408; vi.336. -- 2. to sniff up Vin i.279. -- Caus. āyati to touch gently KhA 136. Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke J iv.407.
Upasinghita
Upasinghita [pp. of upasinghati] scented, smelled at (loc.) J vi.543 (sisaŋhi, C. for upagghata).
Upasussati
Upasussati [upa + sussati] to dry up M i.481; Sn 433; J i.71.
Upasecana
Upasecana (nt.) [fr. upa + sic] sprinkling over, i. e. sauce Th 1, 842; J ii.422; iii.144; iv.371 (maŋs˚); vi.24. See also nandi˚ & maŋsa˚.
Upaseniyā
Upaseniyā (f.) [Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī] (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling J vi.64 (=mātaraŋ upagantvā sayanika C.).
Upasevati
Upasevati [upa + sev] -- 1. to practice, frequent, pursue Miln 355. -- 2. to serve, honour, Sn 318 (˚amāna). <-> pp. upasevita (q. v.).
Upasevanā
Upasevanā (f.) [abstr. fr. upasevati] serving, pursuing, fol- lowing, service, honouring, pursuit S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (nand˚ pleasure -- seeking); It 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚); Sn 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons); Miln 351.
Upasevita
Upasevita [pp. of upasevati] visited, frequented PvA 147 (for sevita).
Upasevin
Upasevin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upasevati] pursuing, following, going after A iii.136 (vyatta˚); Miln 264 (rāj˚); DhA iii.482 (para -- dār˚).
Upasobhati
Upasobhati [upa + śubh] to appear beautiful, to shine forth Th 1, 1080. -- Caus.˚sobheti to make beautiful, embellish, adorn Vv 526; J v.132; PvA 153. -- pp. upasobhita (q. v.).
Upasobhita
Upasobhita [pp. of upasobheti] embellished, beautified, adorned PvA 153, 187; Sdhp 593.
Upassagga
Upassagga see upasagga.
Upassaṭṭha
Upassaṭṭha [Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj] "thrown upon", overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed S iv.29; A iii.226 (udak˚); J i.61; ii.239.
Upassaya
Upassaya [fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S i.32, 33; Vv 684; Miln 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni˚ or bhikkhun˚ a nunnery Vin ii.259; iv.265, 292; S ii.215; J i.147, 428; Miln 124.
Upassāsa
Upassāsa [upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas] breathing J i.160.
Upassuti
Upassuti (f.) [fr. upa + śru] listening to, attention S ii. 75; iv.91; J v.100; Miln 92.
Upassutika
Upassutika (adj.) [fr. upassuti] one who listens, an eaves- dropper J v.81.
Upahacca
Upahacca (˚ -- ) [ger. of upahanti] -- 1. spoiling, impairing, defiling J v.267 (manaŋ) -- 2. reducing, cutting short; only in phrase upahacca -- parinibbāyin "coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life") S v.70, 201 sq.; A i.233 sq.; iv.380; Pug 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaŋ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pug A 199); Nett 190. -- The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca > upapajja > uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya -- parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kvu 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159.
Upahaññati
Upahaññati [Pass. of upahanti] to be spoilt or injured Sn 584; J iv.14; Miln 26.
Upahata
Upahata [pp. of upahanti] injured, spoilt; destroyed D i.86 (phrase khata + upahata); S i.238 (na sûpahata "not easily put out" trsl.); ii 227; A i.161; Dh 134; J vi. 515; Miln 223, 302; DhA ii.33 (an˚). The formula at D i.86 (khata+upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning. According to Bdhgh it means "one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation," i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DA i.237: "bhinna -- patiṭṭho jāto," i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. i.95 gives it as "deeply affected and touched in heart": doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata.
Upahattar
Upahattar [Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ] a bringer (of) M i.447 sq.
Upahanti
Upahanti (& ˚hanati J i.454) [upa + han] to impair, in- jure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass. upahaññati (q. v.).
Upaharaṇa
Upaharaṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + hṛ] -- 1. presentation; luxury J i.231. -- 2. taking, seizing J vi.198.
Upaharati
Upaharati [upa + hṛ] to bring, offer, present A ii.87; iii. 33; Dh i.301, 302; J v.477.
Upahāra
Upahāra [fr. upa + hṛ] bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) A ii.87; iii.33; v.66 (mett˚); J i.47; iv.455; vi.117; DA i.97.
Upahiŋsati
Upahiŋsati [upa + hiŋs] to injure, hurt Vin ii.203; J iv.156.
Upāgacchati
Upāgacchati [upa + ā + gam] to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp i 1010, pl. upāgañchuŋ Sn 1126; or upāgami Sn 426, 685, pl. upāgamuŋ Sn 302, 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha PvA 64 (so read for upagaccha). -- pp. upāgata.
Upāgata
Upāgata [pp. of upāgacchati] come to, having reached or attained Sn 1016; PvA 117 (yakkhattaŋ); Sdhp 280.
Upāta
Upāta [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā "taken up"; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884, 75 = uppāta "flying up"] thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Th 1, 675.
Upâtigacchati
Upâtigacchati [upa + ati + gacchati] to "go out over", to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Sn 333, 636, 641, 827; Th 1, 181; 2, 4; J i.258; vi.182; & 3rd pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311; J iii.201.
Upâtidhāvati
Upâtidhāvati [upa + ā + dhāvati] to run on or in to Ud 72.
Upâtipanna
Upâtipanna [pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad] fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Sn 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta SnA 415).
Upâtivatta
Upâtivatta [pp. of upâtivattati] gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) S i.143; A ii.15; Sn 55, 474, 520, 907; J iii.7, 360; Fd1 322 = Nd2 163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at M Vastu iii.281.
Upâtivattati
Upâtivattati [upa + ati + vattati] to go beyond, overstep M i.327; Sn 712 (v. l. for upanivattati); Nett 49. <-> pp. upâtivatta (q. v.).
-- 149 --
Upādā
Upādā (adv.) [shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning] lit. "taking up", i. e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary, derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, 960, 1210; Vism 275, 444 (24 fold); DhsA 215, 299, 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127, 197. -- Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā) as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning "not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)", not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q. v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaŋ "unsupported emancipation" M i.148; S iv.48; v.29; DhA i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release A v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattassɔetaŋ nāmaŋ); Vin v.164; Ps ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto D i.17 (= kinci dhammaŋ anupādiyitvā vimutto DA i.109); cp. M iii.227 (paritassanā).
Upādāna
Upādāna (nt.) [fr. upa + ā + dā] -- (lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. ( -- ˚) supported by, drawing one's existence from S i.69; ii 85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚); J iii.342 sa -- upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel S iv.399; anupādāna without fuel DhA ii.163. <-> 2. (appld.) "drawing upon", grasping, holding on, grip, attachment; adj. ( -- ˚) finding one's support by or in, clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād˚ or the graspings arising from sense -- desires, speculation, belief in rites, belief in the soul -- theory D ii.58; iii.230; M i.51, 66; S ii.3; v 59; Dhs 1213; Ps i.129; ii.46, 47; Vbh 375; Nett 48; Vism 569. -- For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: D i.25; ii.31, 33, 56; iii.278; M i.66, 136 (attavād˚) 266; S ii.14, 17, 30, 85; iii.10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq., 102 (tannissitaŋ viññāṇaŋ tadupādānaŋ), 390, 400 (= taṇhā); A iv.69; v.111 (upāy˚); Sn 170, 358, 546; Ps i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113; Vbh 18, 30, 67, 79, 119, 132; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; DhA iv.194. -- sa˚ full of attachment (to life) M i.65; Vin iii.111; S iv.102; an˚ unattached, not showing attachment to existence S iv.399; Vin iii.111; Th 1, 840; Miln 32; DA i.98. -- kkhandha, usually as pañcɔ upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the "fivefold clinging to existence" [cp. BSk. pañcɔ u˚ -- skandhāḥ Av. Ś ii.1681 & note] D ii.35, 301 sq.; iii.223, 286; M i.61, 144, 185; iii.15, 30, 114, 295; Ps ii.109 sq.; Vbh 101; Vism 505 (khandha -- pañcaka). See for detail khandha ii.B 2. -- kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment S ii.54; A iii.376 sq.; Sn 475, 743; It 75. -- nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj. founded on or caused by attachment Ps ii.111; Vbh 135 sq. -- nirodha destruction of "grasping" Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca -- samuppāda); S ii.7; iii.14; A i.177. -- paccaya = ˚nidāna S ii.5; iii 94; Sn 507, 742.
Upādāniya
Upādāniya (adj.) [fr. upādāna, for *upādānika > ˚aka] be- longing to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322. -- S ii.84; iii.47; iv.89, 108; Dhs 584, 1219, 1538; Vbh 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326.
Upādāya
Upādāya (adv.) [ger. of upādiyati] -- 1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. "taking it up" (as such & such), i. e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaŋ upādāya out of pity or mercy D i.204; PvA 61, 141, 164. -- (b) compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to D i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); DhA i.391; VvA 65 (paŋsucuṇṇaŋ); PvA 268 (manussalokaŋ). The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e. g. at Divy 25, 359, 413; Av. Ś i.255. -- 2. (ic same meaning & application as upādā, i. e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term "hanging on to", i. e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vbh 12, 67 etc.; Nd1 266. Usually as anupādāya "not clinging to", without any (further) clinging (to rebirth), emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt -- anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a. nibbuta completely emancipated S ii.279; A i.162; iv. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaŋ vimuccati) 182 (id.); S ii.187 sq.; iv.20, 107; v.317; Dh 89 = S v.24 (ādānapaṭi -- nisagge a. ye ratā); Dh 414; Sn 363; It 94 (+ aparitassato).
Upādi˚
Upādi˚ [the compn. -- from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in compn. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr. dā analogous to ˚dhi fr. dhā in upadhi] = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of "stuff of life", substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with ˚sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S v.129, 181; A iii.143; It 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an -- upādi -- sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi -- vimukti M Vastu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna -- dhātu); D iii.135; M i.148 (parinibbāna); A ii.120; iv.75 sq., 202, 313; J i.28, 55; Sn 876; It 39, 121 (nibbāna -- dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509; DhA iv.108 (nibbāna); VvA 164, 165. Opp. saupādisesa A iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn 354 (opp. nibbāyi); Vism 509; Nett 92. See further ref. under nibbāna & parinibbāna.
Upādiṇṇa
Upādiṇṇa [for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1] grasped at, laid hold of; or "the issue of grasping", i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324. -- Dhs 585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, 451; an˚ Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, 991, 1212, 1535.
Upādiṇṇaka
Upādiṇṇaka (adj,) = upādiṇṇa DhsA 311, 315, 378; Vism 398.
Upādiyati
Upādiyati [upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati1] to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna D ii.292; M i.56, 67; S ii.14; iii.73, 94, 135; iv. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Sn 752, 1103, 1104; Nd1 444 (= ādeti); Nd2 164. ppr. upādiyaŋ S iv. 24 = 65 (an˚); -- ppr. med. upādiyamāna S iii.73; SnA 409, & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Sn 470; Dh 20. <-> ger. upādāya in lit. meaning "taking up" J i.30; Miln 184, 338, 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep. see separately as also upādā and upādiyitvā VvA 209; DA i.109 (an˚); DhA iv.194 (an˚). -- pp. upādiṇṇa (q. v.).
Upādhi
Upādhi [fr. upa + ā + dhā] 1. cushion J vi.253. -- 2. sup- plement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha "the chariot with the outfit", expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper J vi.22.
Upādhiya
Upādhiya [fr. upāhi] being furnished with a cushion J vi. 252 (adj.).
Upāya
Upāya [fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S iii.53 sq., 58; D iii.220 (˚kosalla); Sn 321 (˚ññū); J i.256; Nd2 570 (for upaya); PvA 20, 31, 39, 45, 104, 161; Sdhp 10, 12. 350, 385. -- Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA 93; yena kenaci u. PvA 113. -- abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow J iii.443; v.401 (= upāyena C.). <-> anupāya wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for S i.181; M iii.25. -- kusala clever in resource J i.98; Nett 20; SnA 274.
Upāyatta
Upāyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāya] a means of ( -- ˚) VvA 84 (paṭipajjan˚).
Upāyana
Upāyana (nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; vi. 327; Miln 155, 171, 241; Sdhp 616, 619.
-- 150 --
Upāyāsa
Upāyāsa [upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M i.8, 144, 363; iii.237; A i.144, 177, 203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Sn 542; It 89 = A i.147 = M i.460; J ii.277 (˚bahula); iv 22 (id.); Pug 30, 36; Vbh 247; Nett 29; Miln 69; Vism 504 (def.); DA i.121. -- anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D iii.159; A iii.429; Ps i 11 sq.
Upāramati
Upāramati [upa + ā + ram] to cease, to desist J v.391, 498.
Upāraddha
Upāraddha [pp. of upārambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved A v 230.
Upārambha
Upārambha [Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc] -- 1. re- proof, reproach, censure M i.134, 432; S iii.73; v.73; A i.199; ii.181; iii.175; iv.25; Vbh 372. -- 2. (adj.) indisposed, hostile Th 1, 360 sq.; DA i.21, 263.
Upārambhati
Upārambhati [Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M i.432, 433. -- pp. upāraddha (q. v.).
Upālāpeti
Upālāpeti at PvA 276 read upalāpeti (q. v.).
Upāvisi
Upāvisi 3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q. v.).
Upāsaka
Upāsaka [fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati] a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4, 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139, 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109; D i.85; ii.105, 113; iii.134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264; M i.29, 467, 490; S v.395, 410; A i.56 sq.; ii.132 (˚parisā); iii 206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Sn 376, 384; J i.83; Pv i 104; Vbh 248 (˚sikkhā); DA i.234; PvA 36, 38, 54, 61, 207. -- f. upāsikā Vin i.18, 141, 216; iii.39; iv.21, 79; D iii.124, 148, 172, 264; M i.29, 467, 491; S ii.235 sq.; A i.88; ii.132; v.287 sq.; Miln 383; PvA 151, 160.
Upāsakatta
Upāsakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāsaka] state of being a be- lieving layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37; S iv,301; Vv 8421.
Upāsati
Upāsati [upa + ās] lit. "to sit close by", to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship D ii.287; A i.162; J v. 339, 371 (= upagacchati C.); Miln 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target). -- 3rd pl. pres. med. upāsare A i.162; J iv.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati. -- pp. upāsita & upāsīna (q. v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1.
Upāsana
Upāsana1 (nt.) [fr. upāsati] attendance, service, honour S i.46 (samaṇ˚); Th 1, 239; Miln 115. Cp. payir˚.
Upāsana
Upāsana2 (nt.) [fr. upāsati] -- 1. archery J vi.448; usually in phrase katûpāsana skilled in archery M i.82; S ii. 266; A ii.48; J iv.211; Mhvs 24, 1. -- Miln 232 (˚ŋ sikkhitvā). -- 2. practice Miln 419. -- 3. in ˚sālā gymnasium, training ground Miln 352.
Upāsikā
Upāsikā see upāsaka; cp. payir˚.
Upāsita
Upāsita [pp. of upāsati] honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd2 165; Th 1, 179.
Upāsīna
Upāsīna [pp. of upāsati] sitting near or close to J v.336.
Upāhata
Upāhata [upa + āhata] struck, afflicted, hurt J i.414.
Upāhanā
Upāhanā (f.) [with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6] a shoe, sandal Vin i.185; ii.118, 207 (adj. sa -- upāhana), 208; S i.226; J iv.173, 223; Pv ii.49; Nd2 226; KhA 45; DhA i.381 (chatt ˚ŋ as nt? v. l. ˚nā); PvA 127, 186. <-> upāhanaŋ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals J iv. 16; vi. 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin ii.207, 208; J iii.415; iv.16. -- Note. An older form upānad˚ (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama J ii.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v. l. upāhan -- upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad.
Upiya
Upiya [ger. of upeti] undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya ( -- ˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiŋ opiya S i 199 = Th 1, 119; senûpiya J v.96 (v. l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadûpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Miln 9.
Upekkhaka
Upekkhaka (adj.) [fr. upekkhā] disinterested, resigned, stoi- cal Vin iii.4; D i.37, 183; iii.113, 222, 245, 269, 281; S v.295 sq., 318; A iii.169 sq., 279; v.30; Sn 515, 855, 912; It 81; Nd1 241, 330; Pug 50, 59; Dhs 163; DhsA 172.
Upekkhati
Upekkhati [upa + īkṣ] to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Sn 911; Nd1 328; J vi.294.
Upekkhanā
Upekkhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ] is commentator's paraphrase for upekkhā (q. v.) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Vbh 230.
Upekkhavant
Upekkhavant (adj.) = upekkhaka J v.403.
Upekkhā & Upekhā
Upekkhā & Upekhā (f.) [fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16] "looking on", hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66); disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham -- asukha -- vedanā "feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure". See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229 -- 232, & cp. Dhs trsln. 39. -- Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at DhsA 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505). -- D 138 (˚sati -- parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trslnn. 50), 251; ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282; M i.79, 364; iii 219; S iv.71, 114 sq., v.209 sq. (˚indriya); A i 42; 81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; v.301, 360; Sn 67, 73, 972, 1107, (˚satisaŋsuddha); Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps i.8, 36, 60, 167, 177; Pug 59 (˚sati); Nett 25, 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq.; Vbh 12, 15 (˚indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra); Dhs 150, 153, 165, 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga, 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461; SnA 128; Sdhp 461.
Upeta
Upeta [pp. of upeti] furnished with, endowed with, pos- sessed of Sn 402, 463, 700, 722; Dh 10, 280; Nd2 s. v., Th 1, 789; Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii 712 (phal˚, v. l. preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaŋ aṭṭhangavaraŋ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaŋ yuttaŋ PvA 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata, samupagata etc); PvA 7. -- Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga).
Upeti
Upeti [upa + i] to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain D i.55 (paṭhavi -- kāyaŋ an -- upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; M i.486 (na upeti, as answer: "does not meet the question"); S iii.93; It 89; Sn 209, (na sankhaŋ "cannot be reckoned as") 749, 911, 1074; 728 (dukkhaŋ), 897; Sn 404 (deve); Nd1 63; Nd2 167; Dh 151, 306, 342; Sn 318; J iv.309 (maraṇaŋ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); v.212 (v. l. opeti, q. v.); Th 1, 17 (gabbhaŋ); Pv ii.334 (saggaŋ upehi ṭhānaŋ); iv. 352 (saraṇaŋ buddhaŋ dhammaŋ); Nett 66; fut. upessaŋ Sn 29; 2nd sg. upehisi Dh 238, 348. -- ger. upecca Vv 337; S i.209 = Nett 131; VvA 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); PvA 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca. -- pp. upeta.
Upocita
Upocita [pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J iv.471.
Uposatha
Uposatha [Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon's waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th,
-- 151 --
23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre -- Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half -- month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla. The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer. The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half -- month (pakkha), so the twenty -- third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi -- uposatho, "reconciliation -- Up.", which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123; Mah. 42). -- Vin i.111, 112, 175, 177; ii.5, 32, 204, 276; iii.164, 169; D iii. 60, 61, 145, 147; A i.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚, nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga -- samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Sn 153 (pannaraso u); Vbh 422; Vism 227 (˚sutta = A i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DA i.139; SnA 199; VvA 71, 109; PvA 66, 201. -- The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaŋ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraŋ (Vin i.107; DhA ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102; v.142; J i.232; iii.342, 444; DhA i.205). uposathaŋ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107, 175, 177; J i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposathaŋ upavasati (A i.142, 144, 205, 208; iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaŋ vasati (J v.177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaŋ samādiyati (see sīlaŋ & samādiyati); uposatha -- sīla observance of the Up. (VvA 71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha -- divasa (J iii.52).
Uposathika
Uposathika (adj.) [fr. uposatha] -- 1. belonging to the Upo- satha in phrase anuposathikaŋ (adv.) on every U., i. e. every fortnight Vin iv.315. -- 2. observing the Sabbath, fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika M Vastu ii.9); Vin i.58; iv. 75, 78; J iii.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); DhA i.205.
Uposathin
Uposathin (adj.) [fr. upusatha] = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6.
Uppakitaka
Uppakitaka indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakki- taka (q. v.).
Uppakka
Uppakka (adj.) [fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati] -- 1. "boiled out", scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiŋ uppakkaŋ okiliniŋ okiriniŋ Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin iii.273 as "kharena agginā pakkasarīra". -- 2. "boiled up", swollen (of eyes through crying) J vi.10.
Uppacca
Uppacca [ger. of uppatati] flying up Th 2, 248 (see under upacca)); S i.209 (v. l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā PvA 103) = DhA iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca).
Uppaccati
Uppaccati [ud + paccati, Pass. of pac] in ppr. uppacci- yamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v. l. BB. uppajj˚) "being boiled out", i. e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) J iv.327. Not with Morris J P T S. 1887, 129 "being tormented", nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) "dicht opgesloten", a meaning foreign to this root.
Uppajjati
Uppajjati [ud + pajjati of pad] to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence D i.180; Sn 584; Pv ii.111 (= nibbattati PvA 71); PvA 8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DA i.165. <-> Pass. uppajjiyati Vin i.50. -- ppr. uppajjanto PvA 5, 21; fut. ˚pajjissati PvA 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji PvA 21, 50, 66; & udapādi (q. v.) Vin iii.4; J i.81; ger. ˚pajjitvā D ii.157 = S i.6, 158 = ii.193 = J i.392 = Th 1, 1159; & uppajja J iv.24. -- Caus. uppādeti (q. v.). <-> pp. uppanna (q. v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna.
Uppajjana
Uppajjana (adj. -- nt.) [fr. uppajjati] coming into existence; birth, rebirth PvA 9 (˚vasena), 33 (id.).
Uppajjanaka
Uppajjanaka (adj.) [fr. uppajjana] (belonging to) coming into existence, i. e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove J iii.150.
Uppajjitar
Uppajjitar [n. ag. fr. uppajjati] one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) D i.143 (saggaŋ etc.).
Uppaṭipāṭiyā
Uppaṭipāṭiyā [abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi] lit. "out of reach", i. e. in a distance J i.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. "with reference to the preceding", supra Vism 272; SnA 124, 128; DhsA 135 (T. ˚paṭipāṭika).
Uppaṇḍanā
Uppaṇḍanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā).
Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta
Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta (adj.) [redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka, upa in meaning of "somewhat like", cp. upanīla, upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at PvA 72 by upakaṇḍaka -- jāta "shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)". The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, 463, and trsld. "very pale"] "having become very pale" (?), or "somewhat pale" (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani -- santhata -- gatto Vin i.276; iii.19, 110; M ii.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334. -- (2) kiso upp˚. J vi. 71; DhA iv.66. -- (3) upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ J i.346; ii.92; v.95; DhA i.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v. l. uppaṇḍ˚ BB.), expld. at PvA 72 "upakaṇḍakajāta", vv. ll. uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚.
Uppaṇḍeti
Uppaṇḍeti [ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin] to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216, 272, 293; iv. 278; A iii.91 = Pug 67 (ūhasati ullapati +); J v.288, 300; DhA ii.29; iii.41; PvA 175 (avamaññati +). <-> Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P. uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv. ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati).
Uppatati
Uppatati [ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā J iii.484; iv.213; PvA 103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). -- pp. uppatita (q. v.).
Uppatita
Uppatita [pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn 1 (= uddhamukhaŋ patitaŋ gataŋ SnA 4), 591; Dh 222 (= uppanna DhA iii.301); Th 1, 371.
Uppatti
Uppatti (f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vbh 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Miln 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava, 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA 144, 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. <-> See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti.
Uppatha
Uppatha [Sk. utpatha, ud + patha] a wrong road or course D i.10 (˚gamana, of planets); S i.38, 43; J v.453; vi. 235; DhA iii.356 (˚cāra).
-- 152 --
Uppanna
Uppanna [pp. of uppajjati] born, reborn, arisen, produced, D i.192 (lokaŋ u. born into the world); Vin iii.4; Sn 55 ˚ñāṇa; see Nd2 168), 998; J i.99; Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaŋ); Dhs 1035, 1416; Vbh 12, 17, 50, 319; 327; DhA iii. 301; PvA 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155. -- anuppanna not arisen M ii.11; not of good class D i.97 (see DA i.267).
Uppabbajati
Uppabbajati [ud + pabbajati] to leave the Order DhA i. 68; PvA 55. -- pp. ˚pabbajita. -- Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order J iv.219; DhA iv.195. -- Caus. II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order J iv.304.
Uppabbajjta
Uppabbajjta [ud + pabbajita] one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex -- bhikkhu VvA 319; DhA i.311.
Uppala
Uppala [Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.] the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at J v.37 are: nīla -- ratta -- set -- uppala, ratta -- seta -- paduma, seta -- kumuda, kalla -- hāra. -- D i.75; ii.19; Vin iii.33 (˚gandha); J ii. 443; Dh 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105; DhA i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (id.); ThA 254, 255; VvA 132, 161. <-> What is meant by uppala -- patta (lotus -- leaf?) at Vin iv.261?
Uppalaka
Uppalaka [uppala + ka] "lotus -- like", N. of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) A v.173. See also puṇḍarika.
Uppalin
Uppalin (adj. -- n.) [fr. uppala] having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus -- pond D i.75; ii.38; S i.138; A iii. 26; Vv 322; DA i.219.
Uppaḷāseti
Uppaḷāseti [ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning] to sound out or forth, to make sound Miln 21 (dhamma -- sankhaŋ). Reading at D ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning.
Uppāṭaka
Uppāṭaka [fr. ud + paṭ in meaning of "biting, stinging"] an insect, vermin S i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno "a siesta -- couch covered by vermin swarm" trsld. p. 215 & note).
Uppāṭana
Uppāṭana (nt.) [fr. ud + paṭ] pulling out, uprooting, de- stroying, skinning J i.454; ii.283; vi.238; Miln 166; PvA 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). Cp. sam˚.
Uppāṭanaka
Uppāṭanaka (adj.) [fr. uppāṭana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (id.).
Uppāṭeti
Uppāṭeti [Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av. Ś i.294] to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviŋ to skin); M ii.110 (attānaŋ); Th 2, 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā ThA 259); J i.281 (bījāni); iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati); Miln 86; DhA iii.206. <-> Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off DhA iii.208. See also upphāleti.
Uppāda
Uppāda1 [Sk. utpāta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D i.9 (v. l. uppāta) = Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda) Sn 360; J i.374; vi. 475; Miln 178.
Uppāda
Uppāda2 [Sk. utpāda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; D i.185; S iii.39 (+ vaya); iv.14; v.30; A i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚); iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dh 182, 194; J i.59, 107 (sat˚); Vbh 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚); PvA 10; ThA 282. -- anuppāda either "not coming into existence" D iii.270, M i.60; A i.286, 296; ii.214, 249: iii.84 sq.; Ps i.59, 66; Dhs 1367; or "not ripe" D i.12.
Uppādaka
Uppādaka (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. uppāda2] producing, generating PvA 13 (dukkh˚). f. ˚ikā DhA iv.109 (jhānɔ).
Uppādana
Uppādana (nt.) [fr. uppada2] making, generating, causing PvA 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114.
Uppādin
Uppādin (adj.) [fr. uppāda2] having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, 1416; Vbh 17, 50, 74, 92 and passim; DhsA 45.
Uppādetar
Uppādetar [n. ag. fr. uppādeti] one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer M i.79; S i. 191; iii.66; v.351; Miln 217.
Uppādeti
Uppādeti [Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad] -- 1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make D i.135; M. i.162, 185; Pug 25; PvA 4, 16, 19, 59; Sdhp 539. cittaŋ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc.) J i.81; Miln 85; DhA ii.89; PvA 3. -- 2. to get, obtain, find J iv.2; Miln 140; DhA i.90; PvA 121. -- 3. in lohitaŋ u. to draw (blood) Miln 214.
Uppilavati
Uppilavati (& Uplavati) [Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Av. Ś i.209] -- 1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float S iv.313 (uplava imper.); Miln 80, 379; VvA 47 (uplavitvā, v. l. uppalavitvā); DA i.256 (v. l. upari lavati). -- 2. to jump up, frisk about, to be elated or buoyant J ii.97 (cp. Morris J P T S. 1887, 139); Miln 370. -- See also upaplavati, uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc.
Uppīḷa
Uppīḷa (adj.) [ud + pīḍ] oppressing or oppressed: an˚ free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed D i.135 (opp. sa -- uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v. l. upp˚); J iii.443; v.378; PvA 161.
Uppīḷita
Uppīḷita [pp. of uppīḷeti] pressed J vi.3.
Uppīḷeti
Uppīḷeti [ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti] -- 1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight) to (with acc.), to cover up or close M i.539 (piṭṭhi -- pāṇiŋ hanukena); J i 483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaŋ); v.293 (aggalaŋ); ThA 188. -- 2. to stampede VvA 83 (paṭhaviŋ).
Uppoṭheti
Uppoṭheti [ud + poṭheti] to beat PvA 4.
Upplavana
Upplavana at DhA i.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty.
Upphāleti
Upphāleti [Caus. of ud + phal] to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara -- cchaviŋ upphāletvā; v. l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable).
Upphāsulika
Upphāsulika (adj.) [ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phā- suka a rib] "with ribs out", i. e. with ribs showing, emaciated, thin, "skinny" Pv ii.11 (= uggata -- phāsuka PvA 68); iv.101 (MSS. uppā˚); ThA 133 (spelt uppā˚).
Uplāpeti
Uplāpeti [Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with sub- stitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati] to immerse M i.135 (vv. ll. upal˚ & opil˚); J iv.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v. l. upal˚). See also opilāpeti & ubbillāvita.
Ubbaṭuma (adj.) [ud + *vṛti (of vṛt) + ma (for mā > mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant] going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase ubbaṭumaŋ rathaŋ karoti to put a cart out of its direction A iv. 191, 193.
Ubbaṭṭeti
Ubbaṭṭeti [Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, 36] to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo J i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); v.89, 438.
Ubbaṭṭhaka
Ubbaṭṭhaka misprint in Pug Index as well as at Pug A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q. v.).
Ubbattati
Ubbattati [ud + vṛt] to go upwards, to rise, swell J vi. 486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next.
Ubbatteti
Ubbatteti [Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma] -- 1. to tear out J i.199; Miln 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); DhA i.5 (hadayamaŋsaŋ), 75 (rukkhaŋ). -- 2. to cause to swell or rise J iii.361 (Gangāsotaŋ); iv.161 (samuddaŋ). -- 3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v. l. uppaṭṭati); DhA iii.155.
-- 153 --
Ubbadhati
Ubbadhati [ud + vadhati] to kill, destroy Sn 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti SnA 18).
Ubbandhati
Ubbandhati [ud + bandhati] to hang up, strangle Vin iii. 73 (rajjuyā); J i.504 (id.); iii.345; Th 2, 80; Vism 501; VvA 139, 207 (ubbandhitu -- kāmā in the intention of hanging herself).
Ubbarī
Ubbarī (f.) [Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant] fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife J vi 473 (= orodha C.).
Ubbasati
Ubbasati see ubbisati.
Ubbaha
Ubbaha (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + vṛh, i. e. to ubbahati1] only in cpd. dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Th 1, 124, 495 = 1053.
Ubbahati
Ubbahati1 [ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati] to pull out, take away, destroy Sn 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya SnA 460); Th 1, 158; J ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.).
Ubbahati
Ubbahati2 [ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubba- hati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati] to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii 180 = A i.241. -- Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha.
Ubbāḷha
Ubbāḷha [adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh] oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed, vexed Vin i.148, 353; ii.119; iv.308; J i.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa -- gandhena); DhA i.343.
Ubbāsīyati
Ubbāsīyati [Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas] "to be dis -- inhabited", i. e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mhvs 6, 22 (= chaḍḍīyati C.). -- Cp. ubbisati.
Ubbāhana
Ubbāhana (nt.) [fr. ubbahati2] carrying, lifting, in ˚sa- mattha fit for carrying, i. e. a beast of burden, of an elephant J vi.448.
Ubbāhikā
Ubbāhikā (f.) [orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use] a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya "by means of a referendum", the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq.) Vin ii.95, 97, 305; v.139, 197; A v.71; Mhvs 4, 46.
Ubbāheti
Ubbāheti [hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2] to oppress, vex, hinder, incommodate J v.417 sq.
Ubbigga
Ubbigga [Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij] agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184; S i.53; Th 1, 408; J i.486; iii.313; Miln 23, 236, 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚); DhA ii.27; ThA 267; Sdhp 8, 77.
Ubbijjati
Ubbijjati [Pass. of ud + vij] to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (id.); S i. 228 (aor. ubbijji); Miln 149 (tasati +), 286 (+ saŋviji); Vism 58. -- Caus. ubbejeti (q. v.). -- pp. ubbigga (q. v.).
Ubbijjanā
Ubbijjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ubbijjati] agitation, uneasiness DA i.111. Cp. ubbega.
Ubbinaya
Ubbinaya (adj.) [ud + vinaya] being outside the Vinaya, ex -- or un -- Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307; Dpvs v.19.
Ubbilāpa
Ubbilāpa (v. l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next.
Ubbilāvita
Ubbilāvita (according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris J P T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti < uplāveti, as expld. under uppilavati, ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sk. ālīyate > P. allīyati, ālāpa > allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt. frisky; only in cpds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind D i.3, 37; J iii 466; Miln 183; DA i.53, 122; and ˚ākāra id. DhA i.237. At Vism 158 "cetaso ubbilāvitaŋ" stands for ubbilāvitattaŋ, with v. l. BB uppilāvitaŋ. Cp. J v.114 (ubbilāvita -- cittatā).
Ubbilla
Ubbilla [either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu, as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk. dvādaśa > dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv. is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa > dīpa, *udvāpa > uddāpa. Müller's construction ubbilla > *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.] elation, elated state of mind M iii.159; ˚bhāva id. DA i.122; Sdhp 167. See next.
Ubbisati
Ubbisati [better reading v. l. ubbasati, ud + vas] "to be out home", to live away from home J ii.76. -- See also ubbāsīyati. -- pp. ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid.
Ubbūḷhavant
Ubbūḷhavant see uruḷhavant.
Ubbega
Ubbega [Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij] excitement, fright, an- guish D iii.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd. (˚pīti); Vism 143; DhsA 124; PugA 226.
Ubbegin
Ubbegin (adj.) [fr. ubbega] full of anguish or fear J iii. 313 (= ubbegavant C.).
Ubbejanīya
Ubbejanīya (adj.) [fr. ubbejeti] agitating, causing anxiety J i.323, 504.
Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar
Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar [n. ag. fr. ubbejeti] a terrifier, a terror to A ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (id.); Pug 47, 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaŋ karotī ti PugA 226).
Ubbejeti
Ubbejeti [Caus. of ud + vij] to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Miln 388 (˚jayitabba grd.); PugA 226.
Ubbeṭhana
Ubbeṭhana (nt.) [fr. ud + veṣṭ] an envelope, wrap J vi.508.
Ubbedha
Ubbedha [ud + vedha of vyadh] height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width J i.29 (v.219; asīti -- hatth˚), 203 (yojana -- sahass˚); VvA 33 (yojana˚), 66 (asīti -- hatth˚), 158 (hattha -- sat˚), 188 (soḷasa -- yojan˚), 221, 339; PvA 113. See also pabbedha.
Ubbedhati
Ubbedhati [ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate] to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake J vi.437 (= kampati C.).
Ubbhaŋ
Ubbhaŋ (& Ubbha˚) (indecl.) [a doublet of uddhaŋ, see uddhaŋ iii.] up, over, above, on top J v.269 (ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaŋ above the collar bone Vin iv.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaŋ above the knee Vin iv.213; ubbhamukha upwards S iii.238; Miln 122.
Ubbhaṭṭhaka
Ubbhaṭṭhaka (adj.) [ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka] standing erect or upright D i.167; M i.78, 92, 282, 308, 343; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaŋ ṭhitaka PugA 233).
Ubbhaṇḍita
Ubbhaṇḍita [pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa] bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287.
Ubbhata
Ubbhata [pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa] drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up, withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra); iii.196 (id.); D i.77 (cp uddharati); M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dh 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); J i.268; PvA 163.
Ubbhava
Ubbhava [ud + bhava] birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚) 492 (id.).
Ubbhāra
Ubbhāra = uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255, 300; v.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157.
-- 154 --
Ubbhijjati
Ubbhijjati [ud + bhid] to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout D i.74 = M iii. 93 = iii.26; J i.18 (v.104); Dh 339 (ger. ubbhijja = uppajitvā DhA iv.49); DA i.218. -- pp. ubbhinna.
Ubbhida
Ubbhida1 (nt.) [Sk. udbhida] kitchen salt Vin i.202, cp. Vin Texts ii.48.
Ubbhida
Ubbhida2 (adj.) [fr. ud + bhid] breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. ˚odaka "whose waters well up", or "spring water" D i.74; M i.276; DA i.218.
Ubbhinna
Ubbhinna [pp. of ubbhijjati] springing up, welling up Dh i.218.
Ubbhujati
Ubbhujati [ud + bhuj] to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. ˚itvā in meaning of "forcibly" Vin ii.222; iii.40.
*Ubha
*Ubha see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya.
Ubhato
Ubhato (adv.) [abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho] both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides; usually ˚ -- , as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways D ii.71; Dialogues ii.70, n. 1; M i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha); S i.191; A i.73; iv.10, 77; Png 14, 73; Nett 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89, 136, 168; iii.28; v. 222; ˚sangha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ & bhikkhunī Vin ii.255; iv.52, 242, 287; Mhvs 3234. <-> See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye); D i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DA i.87); M i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho; S iv.323 (id.).
Ubhaya
Ubhaya (adj.) [*ubha + ya, see ubho] both, twofold Sn 547, 628, 712, 1106, 1107, 801 (˚ante); Nd1 109 (˚ante); J i.52; PvA 11, 24, 35, 51. -- nt. ˚ŋ as adv. in combn. with ca c'ûbhayaŋ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) "and both" for both -- and; and also, alike, as well Dh 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c'ûbhayaŋ with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69. -- Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho (= duve PvA 86). -- aŋsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i. e. completely, thoroughly, all round (˚ -- ) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained D i.154 (cp. DA i.312 ubhaya -- koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito).
Ubhayattha
Ubhayattha [adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya] in both places, in both cases Vin i.107; A iii.64; Dh 15 -- 17; DhA i.29 (˚ettha), 30; PvA 130.
Ubho
Ubho (udj.) [Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. a)/mfw both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai, Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep. -- adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati] both; nom. acc. ubho S i.87 = A iii.48 = It 16; It 43 = Sn 661 = Dh 306; Sn 220, 543, 597; Dh 74, 256, 269; 412; Nd1 109; Pv i.76; J i.223; ii.3; PvA 13, 82 (tā ubho). -- ubhantaŋ both ends, both sides Sn 1042 (see Nd2 169; Sn A 588 expls. by ubho ante). -- gen. ubhinnaŋ S i.162; ii. 222; J ii.3; instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256; J iv.142; loc. ubhosu Sn 778 (antesu); J i.264 (passesu; PvA 94 (hatthesu). <-> Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve PvA 86).
Ummagga
Ummagga [ud + magga, lit. "off -- track"] -- 1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main M i.171; A ii.189; J vi.426, 432; SnA 50 ("ummaggo paññā pavuccati"); DhA i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104; PvA 44 (read with v. l. SS kummagga). -- 2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way S i.193 (v. l. ˚manga) = Th 1, 1242; S iv.195; A iv.191.
Ummanga
Ummanga [ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q. v. for vv. ll.] "out luck", i. e. unlucky; or "one who has gone off the right path" Vin v.144.
Ummatta
Ummatta (adj.) [ud + matta of mad] out of one's mind, mad S v.447 (+ viceta); J v.386; Miln 122; Sdhp 88; PvA 40 (˚puggala read with v. l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda. -- rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81; ii.62 (where J iii.156 has santaramāna).
Ummattaka
Ummattaka (adj.) = ummatta; Vin i.123, 321; ii.60, 80; iii.27, 33; A iv.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Miln 277; PvA 38, 39, 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95. <-> f. ummattikā Vin iv.259, 265; ThA 111.
Ummaddeti
Ummaddeti [ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd] to rub something on (acc.) Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaŋ).
Ummasati
Ummasati [ud + masati of mṛś.] to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121. Cp. next.
Ummasanā
Ummasanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ummasati] lifting up Vin iii.121 (= uddhaŋ uccāraṇā).
Ummā
Ummā (f.) [cp. Sk. umā] flax, only in cpd. ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax M ii.13 = A v.61 (v. l. dammā˚, ummāta˚); D ii.260; Th 1, 1068; DhsA 13. Also (m.) N. of a gem Miln 118.
Ummāda
Ummāda [ud + māda] madness, distraction, mental aberra- tion S i.126 (˚ŋ pāpuṇeyya citta -- vikkhepaŋ vā); A ii.80; iii.119; v.169; Pug 69; PvA 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta).
Ummādanā
Ummādanā (f.) (or ˚aŋ nt.) [abstr. fr. ummāda] maddening Sn 399 (+ mohanaŋ = paraloke ummādanaŋ ihaloke mohanaŋ SnA 377); ThA 2, 357 (cp. ThA 243).
Ummāra
Ummāra [according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)] - 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla); Th 2, 410; J i. 62; iii.101; Vism 425; DhA i.350. -- 2. a curb -- stone J vi.11. -- 3. as uttar˚ (the upper threshold) the lintel J i.111; DhA ii.5 (v. l. upari˚). -- 4. window -- sash or sill J i.347; iv.356.
Ummi
Ummi (& Ummī) (f.) [for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi > bhūmi] a wave Th 1, 681; Miln 346.
Ummisati
Ummisati [ud + misati] to open one's eyes J iii.96 (opp. nimisati; v. l. ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?).
Ummihati
Ummihati [ud + mih] to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati +).
Ummīleti
Ummīleti [Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti] to open one's eyes J i.439; ii.195; iv.457; vi.185; Miln 179, 357, 394; Vism 185, 186; DhA ii.28 (opp. ni˚); VvA 205, 314.
Ummuka
Ummuka (nt.) [Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo] a fire brand Vin iv.265; S iv.92 (T. ummukka meaning "loosened"?); J ii.69 v. l. ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356.
Ummujjati
Ummujjati [ud + majj] to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180; S iv.312; A iv.11 sq; J ii.149, 284; iii.507; iv.139; Pug 71; Miln 118; DA i.37, 127; PvA 113.
Ummujjana
Ummujjana (nt.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging Vism 175 (+ nim- mujjana); DA i.115.
Ummujjamānaka
Ummujjamānaka (adj.) [ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of um- mujjati, + ka] emerging A ii.182.
Ummujjā
Ummujjā (f.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja -- nimujjaŋ karoti to emerge & dive D i.78; M i.69; A i.170; J iv.139; Nett 110; Vism 395 (= Ps ii.208).
Ummūla
Ummūla (adj.) [ud + mūla] "roots -- out", with roots showing, laying bare the roots J i.249 (˚ŋ karoti); Sdhp 452.
Ummūlaka
Ummūlaka (adj.) [= ummūla] uprooting, laying bare the roots J i.303 (vāta).
Ummūleti
Ummūleti [Caus. fr. ummūla] to uproot, to root out J i.329.
-- 155 --
Umhayati
Umhayati [Sk. *ut -- smayate, ud + smi] to laugh out loud J ii.131 (= hasitaŋ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna = hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti J v.297.
Uyyassu
Uyyassu (imper. 3rd. sg.) is v. l. BB. and C. reading at J vi.145, 146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go.
Uyyāti
Uyyāti [ud + yā] to go out, to go away J ii.3, 4 (imper. uyyāhi); iv.101. -- Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away, to bring or take out S iv.312.
Uyyāna
Uyyāna (nt.) [Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā] a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden J i.120, 149; ii.104; iv.213; v.95; vi.333; PvA 6, 74, 76; VvA 7; Sdhp 7. -- kīḷā amusement in the park, sports DhA i.220; iv.3. -- pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper J ii. 105, 191; iv.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground J i.58; Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; DA i.235.
Uyyānavant
Uyyānavant (adj.) [fr. uyyāna] full of pleasure gardens Pv iii.36.
Uyyāma
Uyyāma [Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma > niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210] exertion, effort, endeavour Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571; DhsA 146.
Uyyuñjati
Uyyuñjati [ud + yuj] to go away, depart, leave one's house Dh 91 (cp. DhA ii.170). -- pp. uyyutta. -- Caus. uyyojeti (q. v.).
Uyyuta
Uyyuta (adj.) [ud + yuta] striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Sn 247, 248; J v.95.
Uyyutta
Uyyutta [pp. of uyyuñjati] striving, active, zealous, energ- etic J i.232.
Uyyoga
Uyyoga [fr. ud + yuj] departure, approach of death Dh 236 (cp. DhA iii.335).
Uyyojana
Uyyojana (nt.) [fr. uyyojeti] inciting, instigation A iv.233.
Uyyojita
Uyyojita [pp. of uyyojeti] instigated Miln 228; PvA 105.
Uyyojeti
Uyyojeti [Caus. of uyyuñjati] -- 1. to instigate Vin iv.235; J iii.265. -- 2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off, let go Vin i.179; A iii.75; J i.119 (bhikkhu -- sanghaŋ), 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91; DhA i.14, 15, 398; ii.44; VvA 179; PvA 93. -- pp. uyyojita (q. v.).
Uyyodhika
Uyyodhika (nt.) [fr. ud + yudh] a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107; D i.6; A v.65; DA i.85.
Ura
Ura (m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] -- 1. the breast, chest. -- Cases after the nt. s. -- declension are instr. urasā Th 1, 27; Sn 609; & loc. urasi Sn 255; J iii.148; iv. 118, also urasiŋ J iii.386 (= urasmiŋ C.). Other cases of nt. a -- stem, e. g. instr. urena J iii.90; PvA 75; loc. ure D i.135; J i.156, 433, 447; PvA 62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa). -- Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129; J iv.3; v.159, 202; Nd2 659; Pv iv.108; DhA iii.175; DA i.254; DhsA 321; PvA 62, 66. -- uraŋ deti (with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one's chest, fig. to apply oneself to J i.367, 401, 408; iii.139, 455; iv.219; v.118, 278. -- 2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla VvA 269). -- ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S i.69; Sn 1, 604; J i.7; iv.330; vi.208; Vv 808; Pv i.121 (= urena gacchati ti urago sappassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ PvA 63); PvA 61, 67. -- cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya J i.363, 414. -- cchada "breast cover", breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; J iv.3; v.215, 409; vi.480; ThA 253. -- ttāḷi beating one's breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) M i.86, 136; A ii.188; iii.54, 416; iv.293; PvA 39. -- tthala the breast A ii.174.
Urabbha
Urabbha [Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr. a)rh/n wether, cp. Hom. ei)=ros wool; Lat. vervex; Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware. Here also belongs P. urāṇī] a ram D i.127; A i.251 sq.; ii.207; iv.41 sq.; J v.241; Pug 56; DA i.294; DhA ii.6. See also orabbhika.
Urāṇī
Urāṇī (f.) [or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha] an ewe J v.241 (= urāṇikā C.); v. l. uraṇī & uraṇikā.
Uru
Uru (adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. eu)rus wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J v.89; Miln 354; Sdhp 345, 592. -- pl. urū sands, soil J v.303.
Urundā
Urundā (f.) [ura + undā?] freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief D ii.269 (v. l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura + uddharana lifting or raising the chest).
Urūḷhava
Urūḷhava (adj.) [doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud -- ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana. Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J. P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus "overgrown"] large, bulky, immense; great, big, strong. Only in one stock phrase "nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo" Vv 209, 439; J vi.488; of which variant n. ī. ubbuḷhavā M i.414 = 450. The word is expld. at J vi.488 by "ubbāhana -- samattha"; at VvA 104 (pl. urṳ̄ḷhavā) by "thāmajava -- parakkamehi byūhanto (v. l. brahmanto) mahantaŋ yuddha -- kiccaŋ vahituŋ samatthā ti attho". The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha.
Ulati
Ulati is a commentator's invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paŋsu -- kūla; paŋsu viya kucchita -- bhāvaŋ ulatī ti paŋsu -- kūlaŋ).
Ulūka
Ulūka [Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. o)lolu/zw, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti] an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl's skin); iii.34; A v.289 sq.; J ii.208, 352 (as king of the birds); Miln 403; DhA i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls). -- pakkha owls' wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; D i.167. -- pakkhika dress of owls' wings, or owl feathers A i.241, 296; ii.206; Pug 55 (= ulūka -- pattāni ganthetvā kata -- nivāsanaŋ Pug A 233).
Ullanghati
Ullanghati [ud + langh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgres- sing (= pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596] to leap up J iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā). -- Caus. ullangheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i. e. to make dance up & down) Vin iii.121; J v.434; DhA iv.197. -- pp. ullanghita (q v.).
Ullanghanā
Ullanghanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ud + langh] jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121; J iv.5 (˚samattha?).
Ullanghita
Ullanghita [pp. of ullangheti] being jumped on, set on C. on S i.40 (see K. S. i.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita).
Ullapati
Ullapati [ud + lapati] to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97; iii.105; Pug 67 (= katheti Pug A 249).
Ullapana
Ullapana (nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ullapati] calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101; Th 2, 357; Miln 127; ThA 243. -- ullapanā = uddhaŋ katvā lapanā Vism 27.
Ullahaka
Ullahaka (adj.) [?] only in acc. nt. ullahakaŋ used adverbially, in cpd. dant˚ after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth M iii.167. Seems to be a a(/pac legome/non.
Ullāpa
Ullāpa is v. l. for uklāpa (q. v.).
Ullikhana
Ullikhana (nt.) [fr. ud + likh] combing, scratching VvA 349; ThA 267.
-- 156 --
Ullikhita
Ullikhita [pp. of ud + likh] scratched, combed Vin i.254; J ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh˚ for aḍḍh˚); VvA 197.
Ullingeti
Ullingeti [Denom. of ud + linga] to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492.
Ullitta
Ullitta [pp. of ud + lip] smeared; only in combn. ullittâ- valitta smeared up & down, i. e. smeared all round Vin ii 117; M ii.8; A i.101, 137; iv.231; Th 1, 737.
Ullumpati
Ullumpati [ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268] to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin ii.277; D i.249.
Ullumpana
Ullumpana (nt.) [fr. ullumpati] saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva -- saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DA i.177; PvA 35. Same as ullopana (q. v.).
Ullulita
Ullulita [pp. of ulloleti] waved, shaken (by the wind); waving J vi.536.
Ulloka
Ulloka [ud + lok˚] doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaŋ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by "a cloth to remove cobwebs", but better by Andersen, Pāli Reader as "as soon as it is seen"; at Vin ii.151 the translators give "a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out". See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31. -- In cpd ulloka -- paduma at J vi.432 it may mean "bright lotus" (lit. to be looked at). See ulloketi.
Ullokaka
Ullokaka (adj.) [fr. ulloketi] looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚ looking into a person's face; i. e. cheerful, winning; or "of bright face", with a winning smile D i.60; DA i.59, 168; PvA 219 (˚ika for ˚aka).
Ullokita
Ullokita [pp. of ulloketi] looked at, looked on J i.253; DA i 193.
Ulloketi
Ulloketi [ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka] to look on to, look for, await J i.232 (ākāsaŋ), 253; ii.221, 434; DA i.153, 168; VvA 316. -- pp. ullokita (q. v.).
Ullopana
Ullopana (nt.) = ullumpana DhA i.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum).
Ullola
Ullola [fr. ud + lul] -- 1. a wave J iii.228; vi.394. - 2. commotion, unrest J iv.306, 476.
Ullolanā
Ullolanā (f.) [fr. ulloleti] wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed ThA 243.
Ulloleti
Ulloleti [denom. fr. ullola] to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect ThA 243. -- pp. ullulita.
Uḷāra
Uḷāra (adj.) [Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra] great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich. -- Dhammapāla at VvA 10 -- 11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraŋ; paṇītaŋ (excellent), seṭṭhaŋ (best), mahantaŋ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga); D i.96; M iii.38 (˚bhogatā); S v.159; Sn 53, 58, 301; Nd2 170; J i.399; v.95; Vv 11; 8426; Pv i.512 (= hita samiddha PvA 30); VvA 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva); ThA 173, 280; PvA 5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 30, 43, 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, 260, 416. <-> Der. oḷārika (q. v.).
Uḷāratā
Uḷāratā (f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254.
Uḷāratta
Uḷāratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uḷāra] greatness etc.; only neg. an˚ smallness, insignificance, inferiority VvA 24.
Uḷu
Uḷu [Sk. uḍu, dialectical?] a lunar mansion Miln 178.
Uḷunka
Uḷunka [dial.?] a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286; J i.120, 157; iii.461; Miln 8; DhA i.425; ii.3, 20; iv.75, 123.
Uḷumpa
Uḷumpa [dial.?] a raft, a float Vin i.230; iii 63 (˚ŋ ban- dhati); J iv.2; DhA ii.120.
Uviṭṭa
Uviṭṭa [= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u] having entered, come in D ii.274 (v. l. BK. upa˚).
Usabha
Usabha1 [Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. a)/rshn, a)/rrhn masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat. rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr. e)/rsh dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull] a bull; often fig. as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) D i.6 (˚yuddha bull -- fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin iii.39 (puris˚ "bull of a man", a very strong man); A i.188; ii.207; iv.41 sq., 376; v.347, 350; Sn 26 sq., 416, 646, 684; Dh 422; J i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136; Pug 56; Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile); DhA i.396; SnA 226, 333; KhA 144; PvA 163; VvA 85. -- The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q. v.). The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at SnA 40.
Usabha
Usabha2 (nt.) [= usabha1, in special application (?)] a cer- tain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi) or 140 cubits J i.64 (eight), 70 (id.); ii.91; iv.17 (one), 142 (eight); DhA i.108 (˚mattaŋ).
Usā
Usā (f.) [doubtful] (a certain) food J vi.80.
Usīra
Usīra (m. & nt.) [Sk. uśīra] the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201; ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī); S ii.88 (˚nāḷi); A ii.199 (id.); Dh 337; J v.39; Th 1, 402 (˚attho).
Usu
Usu (m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma); D i.9; M i.86; iii.133; S i.127; A ii.117; iii.162; J iv.416; vi.79, 248, 454; Miln 331, 339; SnA 466; PvA 155. -- kāra an arrow -- maker, fletcher M ii.105; Dh 80, 145; Th 1, 29; J ii.275; vi.66; DhA i.288.
Usumā
Usumā (f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q. v.)] heat J i.31 (= uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma -- vaṭṭi -- sadisa); DA i.186; DhA i.225; ii.20.
Usuyyaka
Usuyyaka (adj.) [fr. usuyyā] envious, jealous Vin ii.190; Sn 318, 325; J ii.192 (v. l. asuyy˚); v.114. -- Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q. v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see VvA 147).
Usuyyati & Usūyati
Usuyyati & Usūyati [Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy] to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin i.242; J iii. 27 (ppr. an -- usuyyaŋ); Pv ii.320 (maŋ usūyasi = mayhaŋ issaŋ karosi PvA 87).
Usuyyanā
Usuyyanā (f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q. v.). Dhs 1121; Pug 19.
Usuyyā & Usūyā
Usuyyā & Usūyā (f.) [Sk. asūyā] envy, jealousy, detraction S i.127 (ū); Sn 245 (u); J ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; v. l. ussuyyā); Miln 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); VvA 71 (u); SnA 332 (u).
Usmā
Usmā (f.) [see usumā] heat D ii.335, 338; M i.295; S ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DA i.310. -- In combn. with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚, e. g. at M i 132, 258. -- gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J v.209 (= samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469, & see Kern's mistakes at Toev. s. v.).
Ussa
Ussa (adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud -- s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A iii.359; Sn 860 (= Nd1 251 with spelling ossa), 954.
Ussakkati
Ussakkati1 [ud + sakkati, see sakkati] to creep out or up to, to rise A iii.241 sq.; Miln 260.
Ussakkati
Ussakkati2 [by -- form of ussukkati] to endeavour Vism 437; VvA 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214.
-- 157 --
Ussankita
Ussankita (adj.) [pp. of ud + śank] = ussankin A iii.128; DhA iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚).
Ussankin
Ussankin (adj.) [fr. ud + śank] distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192.
Ussankha
Ussankha (adj.) [ud + sankha] with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa D ii.17; iii.143, 154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot.
Ussajjati
Ussajjati [ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587] to dis- miss, set free, take off, hurl A iv.191.
Ussaṭa
Ussaṭa [pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ, cp. saṭa for *sūta] run away M ii.65.
Ussada
Ussada [most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt -- ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as "projecting, prominent hells", ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) J i.174; iv.3, 422 (pallankaŋ, v. l. caturassạŋ, with four corners); v.266. -- adj. prominent ThA 13 (tej -- ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). -- 2. protuberance, bump, swelling J iv.188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa D iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back). -- 3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with ( -- ˚), in candan˚ J iii.139; iv.60; Th 1, 267; Vv 537; DhA i.28; VvA 237. -- 4. a crowd adj. full of ( -- ˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D i.87 (cp. DA i.245: aneka -- satta -- samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk. sapt -- otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita PvA 221. -- 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada "having the four qualifications (of a good village)" J iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after D i.87 (under 4). As "preponderant quality, characteristic" we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the "Ussadakittana"), and similarly at VvA 19 in Dhammapāla's definition of manussa (lobhɔādīhi alobhɔādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa -- jātikā tesu lobhɔ <-> ādayo alobhɔādayo ca ussadā. -- 6. (metaph.) self -- elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3; Sn 515, 624 (an˚ = taṇhā -- ussada -- abhāvena SnA 467), 783 (expld. by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i. e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855. -- See also ussādana, ussādeti etc.
Ussadaka
Ussadaka (adj.) [fr. ussada 4] over -- full, overflowing A iii.231, 234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚).
Ussanna
Ussanna (adj.) [pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna] -- 1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant, preponderant, excessive, full of (˚ -- ) Vin i.285 (cīvaraŋ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaŋ too abundant); iii.286; Th 2, 444 (= upacita ThA 271); J i.48, 145 ˚kusalamūla); DhA i.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Miln 223 (id.); J i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. PvA 197); PvA 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). Cp. accussanna. -- 2. anointed VvA 237. -- 3. spread out, wide DhA ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.).
Ussannatā
Ussannatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ussanna] accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); VvA 18, 19.
Ussaya
Ussaya in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚ "using envious language, quarrelsome". -- Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning "accumulation" is found in cpd. samussaya only.
Ussayāpeti
Ussayāpeti see udassaye.
Ussarati
Ussarati [ud + sarati of sṛ] to run out, run away J i.434 (imper. ussaratha); v.437. -- pp. ussaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. ussāreti (q. v.).
Ussava
Ussava [Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii. 249; J i.475; ii.13, 248; VvA 7, 109 (˚divasa).
Ussahati
Ussahati [ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. Ś ii.21] to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, 83; ii.208; iii.17; D i.135; S iv.308, 310; Miln 242; VvA 100. -- Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita).
Ussāda
Ussāda [fr. ussādeti] throwing up on DA i.122.
Ussādana
Ussādana (nt.) [to ussādeti, cp. ussādita] -- 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M iii.230 (opp. apasādana). -- 2. (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion A iii.91, 92 (v. l. ussāraṇa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaŋ cɔeva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda -- mahāsaddo Pug A 249).
Ussādita
Ussādita [fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz. sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)].
Ussādiyati
Ussādiyati [Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167.
Ussādeti
Ussādeti [denom. fr. ussada 1] -- 1. to dismiss D iii.128 [for ussāreti1] -- 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up M i.135; iii.230; A iv.198, 201; Miln 187, 250. -- Pass. ussādiyati (q. v.). -- pp. ussādita (q. v.).
Ussāpana
Ussāpana (nt.) [fr. ussāpeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A iv.41; Nd2 503 (dhamma -- dhajassa).
Ussāpita
Ussāpita [pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita] lifted, raised, un- furled Miln 328 (dhamma -- dhaja); J ii.219.
Ussāpeti
Ussāpeti [Caus. of ud + śri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. S i.384, 386, 387; ii.2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; A iv.43; J ii.219; iv.16; v.95 (chattaŋ); PvA 75 (id.); Miln 21; DhA i.3; iii 118 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ussāpita & ussita (q. v.). See also usseti.
Ussāraṇa
Ussāraṇa (nt.) [fr. ussāreti] procession, going or running about, tumult DhA ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana.
Ussārita
Ussārita [pp. of ussāreti2] lifted out or up Vism 63 (samudda- vīcīhi thale ussārita; v. l. ussādita).
Ussāreti
Ussāreti1 [Caus. of ussarati] to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32, 46 (here a student, when folding up his master's robe, has to make the corners move back a hand's breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); J i.419; iv.349; v.347. -- Caus. II. ussārāpeti J ii.290.
Ussāreti
Ussāreti2 [= ussādeti] to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift J v.319 (= ussāpeti). -- pp. ussārita.
Ussāva
Ussāva1 [either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru] hoar- frost, dew D ii.19; J iv.120; v.417; ˚bindu a dew drop A iv.137; Pv iv.15; SnA 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, 633.
Ussāva
Ussāva2 [fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) DhA iv.165 (taṇhā˚; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6).
Ussāvana
Ussāvana (nt.) [= ussāpana] proclamation (of a building
-- 158 --
as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239.
Ussāsa
Ussāsa see nirussāsa.
Ussāha
Ussāha [Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, good -- will M ii.174; S v.440; A i. 147; ii.93, 195; iii.75, 307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Miln 323, 329 (dhiti +) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA iii.394; PvA 31, 106, 166; VvA 32, 48. -- In exegetical literature often combd. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e. g. at Nd2 s. v.; Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571.
Ussāhana
Ussāhana (f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussāha Nett 8.
Ussāhita
Ussāhita [pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati] determined, incited, encouraged, urged J i.329; VvA 109; PvA 201. Cp. sam˚.
Ussiñcati
Ussiñcati [ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J i.450, ii.70; iv.16; Miln 261.
Ussiñcana
Ussiñcana (nt.) [fr. ussiñcati] drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting J i.417.
Ussita
Ussita [Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti] erected, high S v.228; Th 1, 424 (pannaddhaja); J v.386; Vv 8415; VvA 339. Cp. sam˚.
Ussīsaka
Ussīsaka (nt.) [ud + sīsa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for the head J i.266; ii.410, 443; iv.154; v.99; vi.32, 37, 56; DhA i.184 (˚passe, opp. pāda -- passe).
Ussuka
Ussuka (adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3168] -- 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S i.15 (an˚ inactive); A iv.266; Sn 298. -- 2. greedy, longing for Dh 199 (an˚).
Ussukita
Ussukita (adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an˚ free from greed VvA 74.
Ussukin
Ussukin (adj.) [fr. ussuka] greedy, longing; only neg. an˚ Pug 23.
Ussukka
Ussukka (nt.) [*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Av. Ś i.85] zeal, energy, endeavour, hard work, eagerness Vin i.50; S iv.288, 291, 302; Nd2 s. v. Nett 29; VvA 147; PvA 5, 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati); 644 (˚ppahānaŋ). -- Cp. appossukka.
Ussukkatā
Ussukkatā (f.) = ussukka A y.195.
Ussukkati
Ussukkati [denom. fr. ussukka] to endeavour D i.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in, to perform VvA 95, 98, 243. See also ussakkati .
Ussuta
Ussuta (adj.) [pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta] defiled, lust- ful (cp. āsava), only neg. an˚ free from defilement Dh 400.
Ussuyā, Ussuyaka
Ussuyā, Ussuyaka, uss.
Ussussati
Ussussati [ud + sussati of śuṣ] to dry up (intrs.) S i.126; iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Sn 985; J vi.195.
Ussūra
Ussūra (adj) [ut + sūra] "sun -- out", the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in ˚bhatta eating after mid -- day, unpunctual meals A iii.260, and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D iii.184; DhA ii.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at evening Vin i 293; iv.77; J ii.286, also in ati -- ussūre too long after sunrise VvA 65; DhA iii.305.
Usseti
Usseti [ud + śri] to erect, raise, stand up J iv 302; aor. ussesi J vi.203. -- Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita (q. v.).
Usseneti
Usseneti [denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)] to draw on to oneself, to be friendly S iii.89 (v. l. ussi˚); A ii.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Ps ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti.
Usseḷheti
Usseḷheti (?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya.
Ussota
Ussota (adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussotaŋ as adv. "up -- stream" Miln 117.
Ussoḷhi
Ussoḷhi (f.) [a by -- form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical] exertion M i.103; S ii.132; v.440; A. ii. 93, 195; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q. v.).
Ussoḷhikā
Ussoḷhikā (f.) [adj. of ussoḷhi] belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya "in the way of exertion", i. e. ardently, keenly, eagerly S i.170 (naccati).
Uhunkara
Uhunkara [onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka] an owl (lit. "uhu" -- maker) J vi.538 (= ulūka C.).
Ū. Ūkā
Ūkā (f.) [Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical] a louse J i.453; ii. 324; iii.393; v.298; Miln 11; Vism 445; DhsA 307, 319; DhA iii.342; VvA 86. is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaŋ) VbhA 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā).
Ūtagītaŋ
Ūtagītaŋ at J i.290 in phrase "jimaŋ ūtagītaŋ gāyanto" read "imaŋ jūtagītaŋ g."
Ūna
Ūna (adj.) [Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. eu)_nis, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want] wanting, deficient, less M ii.73; J v.330; DhA i.77; DhA iv.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e. g. ekūna -- aṭṭhasataŋ (799) J i.57; ekūna -- pañcasate KhA 91, ekūna -- vīsati (19) Vism 287; ekenɔūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) J i.167; also with eka in instr. as eken'ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285; KhA 91; sometimes without eka, e. g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284; ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130, 148. With "two" less: dvīhi ūnaŋ sahassaŋ (998) J i.255. -- anūna not deficient, complete PvA 285 (= paripuṇṇa). -- udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach, adj. of empty stomach; ˚udara J ii.293; vi.295; ˚ūdara J vi.258; Miln 406; odara Sn 707; DhA i.170. -- bhāva depletion, deficiency SnA 463 (v. l. hānabhāva).
Ūnaka
Ūnaka (adj.) [ūna + ka] deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81, 254; iv.263; Sn 721; Miln 310, 311, (˚satta -- vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; DhA i.79.
Ūnatta
Ūnatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ūna] depletion, deficiency Vin ii. 239; J v.450.
Ūpāya
Ūpāya at DhA ii.93 stands for upāya.
Ūpiya
Ūpiya see upiya & opiya.
Ūmika
Ūmika [f. ūmi] wave Miln 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract).
Ūmī & Ūmi
Ūmī & Ūmi (f.) [Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *ṷel (see nibbāna i.2); cp. Gr. e)lu/w io wind, e(/lic wound; Lat. volvo to roll; Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra, valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under volvo] a wave M i.460 (˚bhaya); S iv.157; v.123
-- 159 --
(˚jāta); A iii.232 sq. (id.); Sn 920; J ii.216; iii.262; iv.141; Miln 260 (˚jāta). -- Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī.
Ūru
Ūru [Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow -- legged, of Idg. *ṷā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg] the thigh Sn 610; Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii. 106; J i.277; ii.275, 443; iii.82; v.89, 155; Nd2 659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DA i.135 = Vin ii.190. -- aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone M i.58; iii.92; J i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); KhA 49, 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -- (k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) M i.237; J v.23.
Ūsa
Ūsa [Sk. ūṣa] salt -- ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra S iii 131 (˚gandha); A i.209.
Ūsara
Ūsara (adj.) [Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa] saline S iv.315; A iv.237; DhsA 243. -- nt. ˚ŋ a spot with saline soil PvA 139 (gloss for ujjhangala).
Ūha
Ūha see vy˚, sam˚.
Ūhacca
Ūhacca1 (indecl.) [ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ (or ava + hṛ, cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2] -- 1. lifting up, raising or rising J iii.206. -- 2. pulling out, taking away, removing D ii.254 (cp. DhA ii.181); S i.27 (v. l. for ohacca); Sn 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd2 171).
Ūhacca
Ūhacca2 (indecl.) [ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati] soiling by defe- cation, defecating J ii.71 (= vaccaŋ katvā C.).
Ūhaññati
Ūhaññati [Pass. of ūhanati1] to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaññi Vin i.48; M i.116; aor. also ūhani M i.243.
Ūhata
Ūhata1 [pp. of ud + hṛ or dhṛ thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata] -- 1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; J v.403. <-> 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Th 1, 514; Dh 338 (= ucchinna DhA iv.48). -- 3. soiled with excrements Vin ii.222.
Ūhata
Ūhata2 [pp. of ūhanati1] disturbed M i.116.
Ūhadati
Ūhadati [for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?] to defecate J ii.355; DhA ii.181 (so read with v. l. for T. ūhadayati).
Ūhana
Ūhana (nt.) [fr. ūhanati?] reasoning, consideration, examin- ation Miln 32 ("comprehension" trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = DhsA 114 ("prescinding" trsl.; as characteristic of vitakka).
Ūhanati
Ūhanati1 [ud + han] to disturb, shake up, defile, soil M i.243; J ii.73. -- Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaññati. -- pp. ūhata2 (q. v.). Cp. sam˚.
Ūhanati
Ūhanati2 [either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati] 1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78; iii.227. <-> 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away M i.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. <-> ger. ūhacca2 (q. v.).
Ūharati
Ūharati [for uddharati] only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q. v.).
Ūhasati
Ūhasati [either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati] to laugh at, deride, mock A iii.91; J v.452 (+ pahasati); Pug 67 (= avahasati Pug A 249).
Ūhasana
Ūhasana (nt.) [fr. ūhasati] laughing, mocking Miln 127.
Ūhā
Ūhā (f.) [etym.?] life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime PvA 136, 162 (˚pariyosāna). -- As N. of a river at Miln 70. <-> Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. S i.209, 235.
E. Eka
Eka (adj. -- num.) [Vedic eka, i. e. e -- ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. oi)_os one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū -- nus, cp. Gr. oi)no/s (one on the dice), Goth. etc. ains = E. one] one. Eka follows the pron. declension, i. e. nom. pl. is eke (e. g. Sn 43, 294, 780 etc.) -- 1. "one" as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also "single" opp. to nānā various, many (q. v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11; DhA iii. 127; ekapasse in one quarter DhA ii.52; ekamaccha a single fish J i.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa DhA i.24. With other numerals: eka -- tiŋsa (31) D ii.2; ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20; ˚navuti (91) DhA i.97; ˚sata (101) DhA ii.14. Cp. use of "one less" in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna). -- 2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary A iii.67 (ek -- uddesa); J i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i. e. on the same day); Dh 395; Sn 35, 1136 (see Nd2 172a), ekaŋ ekaŋ one by one S i 104 (devo ekaŋ ekaŋ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka. -- 3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a, one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiŋ samaye once upon a time J i.306; ekena upāyena by some means J iii.393; ekaŋ kulaŋ gantuŋ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka) DhA i.45; ekadivasaŋ one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 67. Cp. Sn 1069 (see Nd2 172b). -- All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection. -- akkhi see ˚pokkhara. -- agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] S iv.125; A i.70, 266; ii.14, 29; iii.175 (˚citta), 391; Sn 341; J i.88; Nett 28, cp. Miln 139. -- aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785, 237, 240) S v.21, 197, 269 (cittassa); A i.36; iv.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -- anga a part, divisioh, something belonging to J iii.308; Ud 69. -- angaṇa one (clear) space J ii.357. -- āgārika a thief, robber D i.52, 166; A i.154, 295; ii.206; iii.129; Nd1 416; Nd2 304 iii.a. DA i.159 (= ekam eva gharaŋ parivāretvā vilumpanaŋ DA i.159). -- āyana leading to one goal, direct way or "leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga) M i.63; S v.167, 185. -- ārakkha having one protector or guardian D iii.269; A v.29 sq. -- ālopika = ekāgārika D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. -- āsana sitting or living alone M i.437; Sn 718; Dh 305; J v.397; Miln 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaŋ ekāsanaŋ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll. ˚āsanika is ibid. expld. as "taŋ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko"). -- āsanika one who keeps to himself Miln 20, 216; Vism 69. -- âha one day M i.88; usually in cpd. ekâhadvîhaŋ one or two days J i.255; DhA i.391. -- âhika of or for one day D i.166. -- uttarika( -- nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika -- nikāya Miln 392. -- ūna one less, minus one, usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like ˚vīsati (20 -- 1 = 19) DhA i.4; ˚paññāsa (49) J iii.220; ˚saṭṭhi (59) DhA iii.412; ˚pañcasatā (499) DhA ii.204. See ūna. -- eka one by one, each, severally, one to each D ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (id.), 157; J i.222; DhA i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaŋ māsaŋ one month for each of us); ii.114; VvA 256; PvA 42, 43. -- ghana compact, solid, hard Dh 81. -- cara wandering or living alone, solitary S i.16; Sn 166, 451; Dh 37. -- cariyā walking alone, solitude Dh 61; Sn 820. -- cārin = ˚cara Miln 105. -- cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -- cintin "thinking one thing (only)", simple Miln 92. -- thūpa (all) in one heap, mixed up, together J v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -- doṇikā( -- nāvā) a trough -- shaped canoe with an outrigger J vi.305. -- paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -- paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -- padika( -- magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot -- path J i.315; v.491. -- pala one carat worth
-- 160 --
(see pala) Vism 339. -- passayika is to be read ekɔapassayika (see under apa˚). -- pahārena all at once Vism 418; DhsA 333. -- piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62. -- puttika having only one son KhA 237. -- purisika (itthi) (a woman) true to one man J i.290. -- pokkhara a sort of drum J vi.21, 580 (C. explns. by ek -- akkhi -- bherī). -- bījin having only one (more) seed, i. e. destined to be reborn only once S v.205; A i.233; iv.380; Nett 189. -- bhattika having one meal a day A i.212; iii.216; J i.91. -- bhattakinī a woman true to one husband J iii.63. -- rajja sole sovereignty Dh 178; PvA 74. -- rājā universal king J i.47 (of the Sun). -- vāciya a single remark or objection J ii.353. -- vāraŋ once J i.292; ˚vārena id. DhA i.10. -- sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical J i.291. -- sama equal J vi.261. -- sāṭa & sāṭaka having a single vestment, a "one -- rober" S i.78 (˚ka); Ud 65.
Ekaŋsa
Ekaŋsa1 (adj.) [eka + aŋsa1] belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaŋsaŋ uttarāsangaŋ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46; ii.188 & passim.
Ekaŋsa
Ekaŋsa2 [eka + aŋsa1 or better aŋsa2] "one part or point", i. e. one -- pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty, absoluteness D i.153; A ii.46; Sn 427, 1027; J iii.224 (ekaŋsatthe nipāto for "nūna"); SnA 414 (˚vacana for "taggha"). -- Opp. an˚ Miln 225. -- instr. ekaŋsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably D i.122, 161, 162; M i.393; S iv.326; A v.190; J i.150; iii. 224; PvA 11.
Ekaŋsika
Ekaŋsika (adj.) [fr. ekaŋsa2] certain D i.189, 191; an˚ uncertain, indefinite D i.191.
Ekaŋsikatā
Ekaŋsikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ekaŋsika] as neg. an˚ indefini- teness Miln 93.
Ekaka
Ekaka (adj.) [eka + ka] single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212; J i.255; ii.234; iv.2. -- f. ekikā Vin iv.229; J i.307; iii.139.
Ekacca
Ekacca (adj.) [der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. "one -- like", cp. E. one -- like = one -- ly = only] one, certain, definite D i.162, A i.8; often in pl. ekacce some, a few D i.118; A v.194; Th 2, 216; J ii. 129; iii.126. See also app˚ under api.
Ekaccika
Ekaccika (adj.) [fr. ekacca] single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) J v.216 (˚vasana = eka -- paṭṭa -- nivattha).
Ekacciya
Ekacciya (adj.) = ekacca S i.199; J iv.259; acc. as adv. ˚ŋ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212).
Ekajjhaŋ
Ekajjhaŋ (adv.) [fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaŋ, but BSk. ekadhyaŋ M Vastu i.304] in the same place, in conjunction, together Miln 144 (karoti), KhA 167; SnA 38.
Ekato
Ekato (adv.) [abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ] -- 1. on the one side (opp. on the other) J iii.51; iv.141. <-> 2. together J ii.415; iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti), 391; iv.390; DhA i.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect VvA 3. ekato hutvā "coming to one", agreeing DhA i.102, cp. ekato ahesuŋ J i.201.
Ekatta
Ekatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. eka] -- 1. unity D i.31. -- 2. lone- liness, solitude, separation Sn 718; Th 1, 49; Miln 162; J vi.64; VvA 202 (= ekībhāva).
Ekattatā
Ekattatā (f.) [fr. ekatta] unity, combination, unification, concentration Nett 4, 72 sq, 107 sq.
Ekadatthu
Ekadatthu (adv.) [eka -- d -- atthu, cp. aññadatthu] once, defi- nitely, specially J iii.105 (= ekaŋsena C.).
Ekadā
Ekadā (adv.) [fr. eka] once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time S i.162; Sn 198; DhA ii.41; Miln 213.
Ekanta
Ekanta (adj.) [Sk. ekānta] one -- sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚ -- ) usually in function of an adv. as ˚ -- , meaning "absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite" etc. <-> 1. (lit.) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end D i.7 (= ekato dasaŋ uṇṇāmayɔ attharaṇaŋ keci ekato uggata -- pupphan ti vadanti DA i.87); Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; A i.181. -- 2. (fig.) extremely, very much, in freq. combns; e. g. ˚kāḷaka A iii.406; iv. 11; ˚gata S v.225; A iii.326; ˚dukkha M i.74; S ii.173; iii.70 (+ sukha); A v.289; ˚dussīlya DhA iii.153; ˚nibbida A iii.83; iv.143; ˚paripuṇṇa S ii.219; v.204; ˚manāpa S iv.238; ˚sukha A ii.231; iii.409; ˚sukhin DA i.119 etc.
Ekantarika
Ekantarika (adj.) [eka + antarika] with one in between, alternate J iv.195, ˚bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation, alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244.
Ekamantaŋ
Ekamantaŋ (adv.) [eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante M Vastu i.35] on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47, 94 = ii.272; D i.106; Sn p. 13 (expld. at SnA 140 as follows: bhāvana -- puŋsaka -- niddeso, ekɔokāsaŋ ekapassan ti vuttaŋ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaŋ); Sn 580, 1009, 1017; J i.291; ii.102, 111; SnA 314, 456. <-> Also in loc. ekamante on one side DhA i.40.
Ekameka
Ekameka (adj.) [eka -- m -- eka, cp. BSk. ekameka M Vastu iii.358] one by one, each A v.173; Vv 782.
Ekavidha
Ekavidha (adj.) [eka + vidha] of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528.
Ekaso
Ekaso (adv.) [Sk. ekaśaḥ] singly, one by one J iii.224 (an˚).
Ekākiya
Ekākiya (adj.) alone, solitary Th 1, 541; Miln 398.
Ekādasa
Ekādasa (num.) [Sk. ekādaśa] eleven Vin i.19. -- num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Sn 111, 113.
Ekānika
Ekānika (adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. "by oneself" Miln 402.
Ekikā
Ekikā see ekaka.
Ekībhāva
Ekībhāva [eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū] being alone, loneliness, solitude D iii 245; M ii.250; A iii.289; v.89, 164; Vism 34; SnA 92, 93; DhA ii.103; VvA 202; DA i.253, 309.
Ekodi
Ekodi (adj.) [most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e. g. at M Vastu iii.212, 213; Lal. Vist. 147, 439] concentrated, attentive, fixed A iii.354; Nd1 478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda˚ with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi -- karoti to concentrate M i.116; S iv. 263; ˚bhavati to become settled S iv.196; v.144; ˚bhūta concentrated Sn 975; ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one's mind on one point D i.37; iii.78, 131; A i.254; iii.24; Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); DhsA 169; Nett 89.
Ejā
Ejā (f.) [to iñj, q. v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move] motion, turbulence, distraction, seduction, craving S iv.64; Sn 791; It 91; Nd1 91, 353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); VvA 232. -- aneja (adj.) unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless S i.27, 141, 159; iii.83; iv.64; A ii.15; Nd1 353; VvA 107.
Eṭṭha
Eṭṭha [pp. of ā + iṣ] see pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi.
Eṭṭhi
Eṭṭhi (f.) [fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi] desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vbh 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc.
Eṇi
Eṇi (f.) [etym.? dial.] a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: ˚jangha "limbed like the antelope" (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) D ii.17; iii.143, 156; M ii.136; S i.16; Sn 165; ˚miga the eṇi deer J v.416; SnA 207, 217.
-- 161 --
Eṇeyya
Eṇeyya D iii.157; J vi.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka A i.48; ii. 122; J v.155 Nd2 604 = eṇi.
Etad
Etad (pron. adj.) [Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem] demonstr. pron. "this", with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad, only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad. Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical -- archaic form) A ii.17; Sn 274, 430, 822, 1087; J i.61, 279; & etaŋ (the usual form) Sn 51, 207, 1036, 1115; J ii.159; pl. etāni Sn 52; J ii.159. -- m. sg. esa Sn 81, 416, 1052; J i.279; ii. 159; Miln 18; DhA i.18; & eso Sn 61, 312, 393; J vi. 336; pl. ete Sn 188, 760; J i.223. -- f. sg. esā Sn 80, 451; J i.307; pl. etā Sn 297, 897; J ii.129. -- Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa J ii.159; f. etissā J iii.280; instr. etena Sn 655; J i.222; pl. loc. etesu Sn 248, 339, 1055; f. etāsu Sn 607. Other cases regular & frequent.
Etarahi
Etarahi (adv.) [Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi] now, at present D i.29, 151, 179, 200; ii.3; J i.215 (opp. tadā); iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna).
Etādisa
Etādisa (adj.) [etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa] such, such like, of this kind D ii.157; Sn 588, 681, 836; Pv i. 94; iv.186 (= edisa yathā -- vutta -- rūpa PvA 243); PvA ii.71.
Eti
Eti [P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā -- eti, i. e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ei)_si, Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha] to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Sn 364, 376, 666 (come); J vi.365 (return); ppr. ento J iii.433 (acc. suriyaŋ atthaŋ entaŋ the setting sun); imper. 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning "come" (see separately), 3rd etu D i.60; 2nd pl. etha D i.211; Sn 997; J ii.129; DhA i.95 (in admission formula "etha bhikkhavo" come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu). -- fut. essati J vi.190, 365, & ehiti J ii.153; 2nd sg. ehisi Dh 236, 369. -- pp. ita (q. v.).
Etta
Etta (adv.) [= Sk. atra, see also ettha] there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. KhA 254 note).
Ettaka
Ettaka (adj.) [etta + ka, contrasting -- comparative function, cp. tattaka] so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little; pl. so few, just so many D i.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; A iv.114; Nd2 304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. VvA 307); Miln 10, 18 (alaŋ ettakena enough of this much); DhA i.90 (enough, this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq.; VvA 233 (a little), 323. -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ a short time (but see also under 2) J i.34; DhA ii.20. -- (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot A iii.337; J i.207 (pl. ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaŋ); iii.80 (id.), 94 (˚ŋ dhanaŋ such great wealth); Miln 37 (pl.); DhA i.392, 396 (pl. f. ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many); VvA 65 (dhanaŋ). -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) DhA ii.62, 81; iii.318; VvA 330.
Ettato
Ettato (adv.) [with double suffix for *atra -- taḥ] from here, therefore S i.185.
Ettāvatā
Ettāvatā (adv.) [fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka] so far, to that extent, even by this much D i.205, 207; S ii.17; Sn 478; Vv 556 (cp. VvA 248); Pv iv.167; Miln 14; DA i.80; SnA 4; PvA 243.
Etto
Etto (adv.) [in analogy to ito fr. *et˚, as ito fr. *it˚] orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Sn 448, 875; J i.223 (opp. ito), v.498; Pv i.11; ii.104; DhA ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); PvA 103.
Ettha
Ettha (adv.) [= Sk. atra, cp. etta] here, in this place; also temporal "now", & modal "in this case, in this matter" D ii.12; S v.375; Dh 174; Sn 61, 171, 424, 441, 502, 1037, & freq. passim.
Edisa
Edisa (adj.) [Sk. īdṛśa] such like, such Vv 373; PvA 69, 243.
Edisaka
Edisaka = edisa Sn 313.
Edha
Edha [Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. ai)_qos, a)i/qw, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma & iṭṭhaka] fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an˚ without fuel J iv.26.
Edhati
Edhati [edh, cp. iddhati] to prosper, succeed in, increase S i.217 (sukhaŋ); Sn 298; Dh 193; J i.223; iii.151. <-> sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita, as at J vi.219.
Ena
Ena (pron.) [fr. pron. base *ē̆, cp. e -- ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Lat. ūnus, Gr. oi)no/s, Ohg. ein, Oir. ōin] only used in acc. enaŋ (taŋ enaŋ) "him, this one, the same" Sn 583, 981, 1114; Dh 118, 313; J iii.395; Nd2 304iii.b. See also naŋ.
Eraka
Eraka1 (adj.) [fr. ereti] driving away, moving J iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture M i.87 = A i.47 = ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197.
Eraka
Eraka2 (nt.) [fr. ereti] Typha -- grass J iv.88. As eragu(?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on D i.166).
Eraṇḍa
Eraṇḍa [dial.?] the castor oil plant Nd2 680ii.; J ii.440. Cp. elaṇḍa.
Erāvaṇa
Erāvaṇa N. of Indra's elephant Sn 379; Vv 4413; VvA 15.
Erita
Erita [pp. of ereti] moved, shaken, driven J iv.424; Vv 394, 424; Th 1, 104, Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita), 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). Cp. īrita.
Ereti
Ereti [=īreti (q. v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati] to move, set into motion, raise (one's voice) M i.21; Sn 350 (eraya imper.); Th 1, 209 (eraye); J iv.478. -- pp. erita (q.v.).
Ela
Ela (nt.) [?] salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el˚ambu -- ja) born in (salt) water Sn 845 (= ela -- saññaka ambumhi jāta); Nd1 202 (elaŋ vuccati udakaŋ).
Elaṇḍa
Elaṇḍa = eraṇḍa (?) M i.124.
Elambaraka
Elambaraka [?] N. of a creeping vine J vi.536.
Elāluka (Eḷāluka)
Elāluka (Eḷāluka) (nt.) [etym.?] a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; J i.205; v.37; DhA i.278.
Eḷa
Eḷa (nt.) [Sk. enas] in eḷamūga deaf & dumb A ii.252; iii.436; iv.226; Miln 20, 251 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake "spitting") we find at J iii.347, where it is expld. as "eḷa -- paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaŋ" i. e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v. l. elamukha. -- Cp. neḷa & aneḷa.
Eḷaka
Eḷaka1 [?] a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka -- pītha, why not "having feet resembling those of a ram"? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 "a chair raised on a pedestal"); D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. The word & its meaning seems uncertain.
Eḷaka
Eḷaka2 [Sk. eḍaka] a ram, a wild goat Sn 309; Vism 500 (in simile); J i.166; Pug A 233 (= urabbha). -- f. eḷakā S ii.228, eḷakī Th 2, 438, eḷikī J iii.481.
Eḷagala
Eḷagala see aneḷa.
Eḷagalā
Eḷagalā (f.) [dial.?] the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm -- shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), J iii. 222 (= kambojī C.).
Eḷagga
Eḷagga in kāmāmis˚ at PvA 107 is to be read kāmā- mise lagga˚.
-- 162 --
Eva
Eva (adv.) [Vedic eva] emphatic part "so, even, just"; very freq. in all contexts & combns. -- 1. eva J i.61 (ajjɔeva this veryday), 278 (tathɔeva likewise); ii.113 (ahaŋ e. just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own). -- 2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi -- )y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ŋ, cp. J i.293, 307; ii.110, 128, 129, 159; iv.3; vi.363. -- 3. After ŋ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ŋ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva J i.223; tasmiñ ñeva J i.139; ahañ ñeva Miln 40. -- 4. After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q. v.). -- rūpa (1) such, like that Sn 279, 280; It 108; J ii. 352, etc. -- (2) of such form, beauty or virtue J i.294; iii.128, etc.
Evaŋ
Evaŋ (adv.) [Vedic evaŋ] so, thus, in this way, either re- ferring to what precedes or what follows, e. g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as "niddiṭṭha -- nayanidassana") D i.193 (evaŋ sante this being being so), 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (evaŋ bhante, yes); J i.222; Pv ii.1312 evaŋ etaŋ, just so). -- (2) thus (as follows) M i. 483 (evaŋ me sutaŋ "thus have I heard"). -- Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho "in just the same way" (in final conclusions) D i.104, 199, 228, 237, 239; in older form evaŋ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin ii.26; iv.134 = DA i.27; evam evaŋ "just so" D i.51; Sn 1115; evaŋ kho D i.113; evam pi Sn 1134; evaŋ su D i.104; etc. etc. -- diṭṭhin holding such a view M i.484. -- nāma having that name M i.429.
Esa
Esa1 see etad.
Esa
Esa2 (adj.) = esin Sn 286.
Esati
Esati [ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati] to seek, search, strive for Sn 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dh 131.
Esanā
Esanā (f.) [fr. esati] desire, longing, wish D iii.216, 270; M i.79; S v.54, 139; A i.93; ii.41; v.31; VvA 83; PvA 98, 163, 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚.
Esanī
Esanī (f.) [fr. iṣ] a surgeon's probe M ii.256.
Esabha
Esabha ( -- ˚) a by -- form of usabha (q. v.), in cpd. rathesabha.
Esika
Esika (nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) [a by -- form of isīkā] a pillar, post A iv.106, 109. Freq. in cpd. ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar D i.14; S iii.202, 211, 217; DA i.105.
Esikā
Esikā2 desire, see abbūḷha.
Esin
Esin (adj.) [Sk. eṣin, of iṣ] seeking, wishing, desiring S ii.11 (sambhav˚); J i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam); PvA 132.
Ehi
Ehi [imper. of eti] come, come here Sn 165; J ii 159; vi. 367; DhA i.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. a)/ge, Lat. age, "come on" DhA ii.91; PvA 201 (+ tāva = a)/ge dh/). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa + ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as "ehi, passa imaŋ dhamman ti evaŋ pavattaŋ ehi -- passavidhaŋ arahatī ti", D ii.217; iii.5, 227; S i.9; iv.41, 272; v.343; A i.158; ii.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation D i.166; M i.342; ii.161; A i.295; ii.206. ehi bhikkhu "come bhikkhu!" the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12; iii.24; DhA i.87; J i.82; f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo DhA i.95. ehibhikkhu -- pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship SnA 456. ehibhikkhubhāva -- state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order J i.82, 86; DhA ii.32; SnA 456. ehisāgata -- (& svāgata -- )vādin a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: "come you are welcome") D i.116; Vin ii.11; iii.181.
O. O
O Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika, opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava, for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post -- canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana).
Oka
Oka (nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. "comfort", hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation. The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd1 487 on Sn 966: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see below), partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dh 34. Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya] resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) S iii.9 = Sn 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at SnA 547 by rūpa -- vatthɔ ādi -- viññaṇassɔ okāso); S v.24 = A v. 232 = Dh 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dh 34 (oka -- m -- okata ubbhato, i. e. oka -- m -- okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise except by Bdhgh's quotation "okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaŋ". This quot. is taken from Vin i.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at DhA i.289 runs: "okaŋ okaŋ pahāya aniketa -- sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i. e. at Dh 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka -- sankhātā ālayā ti attho", i. e. from the water's abode. Bdhgh's expln. is of course problematic); Dh 91 (okam okaŋ jahanti "they leave whatever shelter they have", expld. by ālaya DhA ii.170). -- cara (f. ˚carikā J vi.416; ˚cārikā M i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i. e. tame (cp. same etym. of "tame" = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage M i. 117, 118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as "water". But from the context as well as from C. on J vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at M i.117 runs "odaheyya okacaraŋ ṭhapeyya okacārikaŋ" i. e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. "ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o." i. e. takes away the male & kills the female. -- (ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Sn 1101 (= ālayaŋjahaŋ SnA 598; cp. Nd2 176 with v. l. oghaŋjaha). -- anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately.
Okaḍḍhati
Okaḍḍhati [o + kaḍḍhati] to drag away, remove Th 2, 444. See also ava˚.
Okantati (okkant˚)
Okantati (okkant˚) [o + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati M i. 129; Pv iii.102 (= ava˚ PvA 213); ger. okantitvā J i. 154 (migaŋ o. after carving the deer); PvA 192 (piṭṭhi<->
-- 163 --
maŋsāni), & okacca J iv.210 (T. okkacca, v. l. BB ukk˚; C. expls. by okkantitvā). -- pp. avakanta & avakantita.
Okappati
Okappati [o + kappati] to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4; Ps ii.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21); Miln 150, 234; DA i.243.
Okappanā
Okappanā (f.) [o + kappanā] fixing one's mind (on), sett- ling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, 25, 96, 288; Nett 15, 19, 28; Vbh 170.
Okappeti
Okappeti [o + kappeti] to fix one's mind on, to put one's trust in M i.11; Miln 234 (okappessati).
Okampeti
Okampeti [o + Caus. of kamp] to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaŋ okampeti to shake one's head M i.108, 171; S i.118.
Okassati
Okassati [o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger. okassa, always combd. with pasayha "removing by force" D ii.74 (T. okk˚); A iv.16 (T. okk˚, v.l. ok˚), 65 (id.); Miln 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out, draw out Th 2, 116 (vaṭṭiŋ = dīpavaṭṭiŋ ākaḍḍheti ThA 117). [MSS. often spell okk˚].
Okāra
Okāra [o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e. g. M Vastu iii. 357] only in stock phrase kāmānaŋ ādīnavo okāro sankileso D i.110, 148 (= lāmaka -- bhāva DA i 277); M i.115, 379, 405 sq.; ii.145; A iv.186; Nett 42 (v. l. vokāra); DhA i.6, 67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly, vanity, and this suits the context better.
Okāsa
Okāsa [ava + kāś to shine] -- 1. lit. "visibility", (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space D i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā & pariccheda), 243 (id.); PvA 14 (okāsaŋ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa. -- 2. "visibility", i. e. appearance, as adj. looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e. g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises PvA 63; okāsaŋ deti to give one's appearance, i. e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat.) PvA 19. -- 3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission, consent, leave A i.253; iv.449; J iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); SnA 547. -- In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaŋ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with pañhassa veyyā -- karaṇāya (to ask a question), e. g. D i.51, 205; M ii.142; S iv 57. <-> Vin i.114, 170; Nd1 487; PvA 222. -- Caus. ˚ŋ karoti Vin ii.5, 6, 276; Caus. II. ˚ŋ kārāpeti Vin i.114, 170. <-> katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience, granted leave Sn 1031; VvA 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114. -- (b) okāsaŋ yācati to ask permission M ii.123. -- (c) okāsaŋ deti to give permission, to consent, give room J ii.3; VvA 138. <-> (d) with bhū: anokāsa -- bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa -- bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity SnA 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara's Man. 4 etc. -- âdhigama finding an opportunity D ii.214 sq.; A iv. 449. -- kamma giving opportunity or permission Sn p. 94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ŋ karoti to give permission). -- matta permission Sn p. 94. -- loka the visible world (= manussa -- loka) Vism 205; VvA 29.
Okāsati
Okāsati [ava + kāś] to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show S iv.290.
Okiṇṇa
Okiṇṇa [pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192] strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of J v.74, 370; PvA 86, 189 (= otata of Pv iii.33).
Okiraṇa
Okiraṇa [o + kiraṇa] casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj. -- f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation) a cast -- out woman (cast -- out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = S ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh's allegorical expln. at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa. Cp. kirāta.
Okirati
Okirati [o + kirati] -- 1. to pour down on, pour out over M i.79; aor. okiri Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; Pv ii.38; PvA 82. -- 2. to cast -- out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. <-> pp. okiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaŋ).
Okilinī
Okilinī see okiraṇa.
Okoṭimaka
Okoṭimaka (adj.) [o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Av. Ś i. 280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on S i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat -- bellied) as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pug A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only] lit. "having the top lowered", with the head squashed in or down, i. e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls hunchback at S i.94, pot -- bellied at S i.237; Warren, Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud -- das(s)ika okoṭimaka "of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed" at Vin ii.90 = S i.94 = A i.107 = ii.85 = iii.285 sq. = Pug 51. The same also at M iii.169; S i.237; ii.279; Ud 76.
Okkanta
Okkanta [pp. of okkamati] coming on, approaching, taking place D ii.12; Miln 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta S ii.174; iii.46.
Okkanti
Okkanti (f.) [fr. okkamati] entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti M iii.249; S ii.3; iii.225; Nd2 257; Pug A 184. Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DA i.130.
Okkantika
Okkantika (adj.) [fr. okkanti] coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = DhsA 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. "flooding").
Okkandika
Okkandika [kand or kram?] at J ii.448 is doubtful, v. l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaŋ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as "migo viya okkandi -- katvā kīḷati"; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about (?), like a deer.
Okkamati
Okkamati [o + kamati fr. kram] lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻ he went to sleep ʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻ sleep overcame him ʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same <-> an internal change, or developement, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15; niddaŋ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, DhA i.9; PvA 47. At It 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaŋ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At D ii.12; M iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother's womb (kucchiŋ okkami). At D ii 63 occurs the question ʻ if consciousness were not to develop in the womb? ʼ (viññāṇaŋ na okkamissatha) S v.283 ʻ abiding in the sense of bliss ʼ (sukha -- saññaŋ okkamitvā). See also Pug 13 = 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻ he enters on the Path ʼ). <-> Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to S iv.312 (saggaŋ). -- pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati.
Okkamana
Okkamana (nt.) [fr. okkamati] entering into, approaching, reaching M iii.6; A iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya A iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq.
Okkala
Okkala see ukkala.
-- 164 --
Okkassa
Okkassa see okassati.
Okkhāyati
Okkhāyati [ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie] to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) S iv.144 sq. (cakkhuŋ etc. okkhāyati).
Okkhāyika
Okkhāyika (adj.) [fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhā- yati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319] low -- lying, deep, remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka -- tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā M i.80, 245.
Okkhita
Okkhita [pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle] besprinkled, bestrewn with ( -- ˚) Th 2, 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta ThA 137); J v.72 (so in v. l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita).
Okkhitta
Okkhitta [pp. of okkhipati] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta -- cakkhu, with down -- cast eyes, i. e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning "with eyes under control"Sn 63, 411, 972; Nd1 498; Nd2 177; Pv iv.344 (v. l. ukkh˚); VvA 6. -- For further use & meaning, see avakkhitta.
Okkhipati
Okkhipati [ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning "keep under, restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. ˚khipi A iv.264 (indriyāni); ger. ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (id.). -- pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta (q. v.).
Ogacchati
Ogacchati [ava + gacchati] to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set D i.240 (opp. uggacchati); A iv. 101 (udakāni og.). See also ava˚.
Ogaṇa
Ogaṇa (adj.) [Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava] separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80; J iv. 432 = (gaṇaŋ ohīna C.).
Ogadha
Ogadha ( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati] immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases, viz. Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha diving into N. <-> Besides these only in jagatɔogadha steeped in the world S i.186.
Ogamana
Ogamana (nt.) [o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word -- formation common to the two languages] going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to uggamana (rising), therefore freq. v.l. ogg˚ D i.10, 68; DA i.95 (= atthangamana); VvA 326.
Ogahana
Ogahana (nt.) [o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha] submersion, ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing -- place Sn 214 (= manussānaŋ nahāna -- tittha SnA 265). See also avagāhana.
Ogādha
Ogādha1 (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2] immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in ( -- ˚), spelt ogāḷha Miln 1 (abhidhamma -- vinay˚). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha.
Ogādha
Ogādha2 (nt.) [ava + gādha2] a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing A iii.297 sq.
Ogāha
Ogāha [fr. o + gah] diving into; only in cpd. pariy˚.
Ogāhati (ogāheti)
Ogāhati (ogāheti) [Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv ii. 1211; Vv 61 (= anupavisati VvA 42), 392 (sālavanaŋ o. = pavisati VvA 177). ogāheti PvA 155 (pokkharaṇiŋ); ger. ogāhetvā M iii.175 (T. ogah˚; v. l. ogāhitvā); PvA 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaŋ, v. l. ˚itvā). See also ava˚.
Ogāhana
Ogāhana (nt.) [fr. ogāhati] plunging into ( -- ˚) PvA 158.
Ogilati
Ogilati [o + gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati) M. i. 393 (inf. ogilituŋ) Miln 5 (id.).
Oguṇṭhita
Oguṇṭhita [pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e. g. Jtm 30] covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207; PvA 86 (v. l. okuṇṭhita).
Oguṇṭheti
Oguṇṭheti [o + guṇṭheti] to cover, veil over, hide S iv.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaŋ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā; v. l. SS. okuṇṭhitū). -- pp. oguṇṭhita (q. v.).
Ogumpheti
Ogumpheti [ava + Denom. of gumpha garland] to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv. ll. ogumbhiyanti, ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā).
Oggata
Oggata [pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of con- trast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata] gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = rattɔ andhakāre); Th 1, 477 (anoggatasmiŋ suriyasmiŋ).
Ogha
Ogha [Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e. g. Divy 95 caturoghɔ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain]. 1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water VvA 48 (udakɔ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dh 47; Vism 512; VvA 110; DhA ii.274 = ThA 175. -- 2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation. To him who has "crossed the flood", oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Sn 173, 219, 471, 495, 1059, 1064, 1070, 1082; A ii.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts A iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at S i.3 and Th 1, 15, 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the "flood" is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill -- temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at S i.126 are possibly these last. Sn 945 says that the flood is gedha greed, and the avijjogha of Pug 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path S i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaŋ); iv.257; v.59; It iii (˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith S i.214 = Sn 184 = Miln 36; mindfulness S v.168, 186; the island Dh 25; and the dyke Th 1,7 = Sn 4 (cp. D ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See D iii.230, 276; S iv.175, 257; v.59, 292, 309; Nd1 57, 159; Nd2 178. When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151; Vbh 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114 -- 24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha -- ogha -- yoga -- agati -- taṇhɔupādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha,
-- 165 --
used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (VvA 48, 110, see above 1). -- âtiga one who has overcome the flood Sn 1096 (cp. Nd2 180). -- tiṇṇa id. S i.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; Dh 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa DhA iv.109); Vv 6428 (= catunnaŋ oghānaŋ saŋsāra -- mahɔoghassa taritattā o. VvA 284); 827; Nd1 159; Nd2 179.
Oghana
Oghana (nt.) watering, flooding (?) M i.306 (v. l. ogha).
Oghaniya
Oghaniya (adj.) [fr. ogha(na)] that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vbh 12, 25 & passim; DhsA 49.
Ocaraka
Ocaraka [fr. ocarati] in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant, scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66). -- Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli. -- Vin iii.47, 52; M i.129 = 189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); S i.79 (purisā carā (v. l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v. l. SS) janapadaŋ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.).
Ocarati
Ocarati [o + carati] to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (ger. ˚itvā); M 1502 (ocarati); S i.79 (˚itvā: so read for T. ocaritā; C. explns. by vīmaŋsitvā taŋ taŋ pavattiŋ ñatvā). <-> pp. ociṇṇa.
Ociṇṇa
Ociṇṇa [pp. of ocarati] gone into, investigated, scouted, explored S i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa).
Ocita
Ocita [o + cita, pp. of ocināti1] gathered, picked off J iii. 22; iv.135, 156; Sdhp 387.
Ocināti (ocinati)
Ocināti (ocinati) -- 1. [= Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1] to gather, pluck, pick off DhA i.366; also in pp. ocita. <-> 2. [= Sk. avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2] to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) J vi.4 (= avajānāti C.).
Ocīraka
Ocīraka see odīraka.
Occhindati
Occhindati [o + chindati] to cut off, sever J ii.388 (maggaŋ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v. l. BB. ochijjati), 404.
Ojavant
Ojavant (adj.) [fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful] possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength M i.480; S i.212 (so read for ovajaŋ; phrase ojavaŋ asecanakaŋ of Nibbāna, trsld. "elixir"); Th 2, 196 (id. = ojavantaŋ ThA 168); A iii.260 (an˚ of food, i. e. not nourishing DhA i.106.
Ojavantatā
Ojavantatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ajavant] richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality J i.68 (of milk).
Ojahāti
Ojahāti [o + jahati] to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya D i.115 (ñāti -- sanghaŋ & hirañña -- suvaṇṇaŋ); M ii.166 (id.); J v.340 (= chaḍḍetvā C.); PvA 93 (maŋ). <-> Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati, pp. ohīna (q. v.). -- See also ohanati.
Ojā
Ojā (f.) [Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium, Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. a)e/cw, Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase] strength, but only in meaning of strength -- giving, nutritive essence (appld. to food) M i.245; S ii.87; v.162 (dhammɔ); A iii.396; J i.68; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Miln 156; DhA ii.154 (paṭhav˚). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkārɔāhāra. The compn. form is oja, e. g. ojadāna J v.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341.
Ojināti
Ojināti [Sk. avajayati, ava + ji] to conquer, vanquish, sub- due J vi.222 (ojināmase).
Oñāta
Oñāta [pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta] despised Miln 191, 229, 288.
Oṭṭha
Oṭṭha1 [Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin] the lip A iv.131; Sn 608; J ii.264; iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip), 278; v.156; DhA i.212; iii.163; iv.1; VvA 11; PvA 260. Cp. bimboṭṭha.
Oṭṭha
Oṭṭha2 [Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Miln 32. At J iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī -- vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung -- cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant.
Oṭṭhubhati
Oṭṭhubhati [cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati] to spit out M i.79, 127.
Oḍḍita
Oḍḍita [pp. of oḍḍeti] thrown out, laid (of a snare) J i. 183; ii.443; v.341; ThA 243.
Oḍḍeti
Oḍḍeti [for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti] to throw out (a net), to lay snares A i.33 = J ii.37, 153; iii.184 and passim; ThA 243. -- pp. oḍḍita (q. v.).
Oḍḍha
Oḍḍha [better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah -- oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu ix.270).
Oṇata
Oṇata [pp. of oṇamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to uṇṇata, i. e. raised & degraded, lofty and low A ii.86 = Pug 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug A 229); Pv iv.66; Miln 387; DA i.45; PvA 29.
Oṇamati
Oṇamati [o + namati] (instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Miln 220, 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DA i.112. Caus. oṇāmeti M ii.137 (kāyaŋ). -- pp. oṇata & Caus. oṇamita.
Oṇamana
Oṇamana (nt.) [fr. oṇamati] bending down, inclining, bowing down to Miln 234.
Oṇamita
Oṇamita [pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam] having bowed down, bowing down Miln 234.
Oṇi
Oṇi (m. or f.) [cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel] charge, only in cpd. oṇi -- rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47, 53 (= āhaṭaŋ bhaṇḍaŋ gopento).
Oṇīta
Oṇīta see onīta.
Oṇojana
Oṇojana (nt.) [fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana] washing off, cleaning, washing one's hands Vin ii.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as "vissajjana" gift, presentation).
Oṇojeti
Oṇojeti (with vowel assimilation o < e for oṇejeti = ava + nejeti, Sk. ˚nejayati fr. nij. Kern, Toev. ii.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj˚< onij˚, like anu˚ BSk. ani˚ (ānisaŋsa < ānuśaŋsā), the further process being onoj˚ for onuj˚. The etym. remains however doubtful] -- 1. to cause to wash off, to wash, cleanse: see oṇojana. -- 2. (fig.) to give as a present, dedicate (with the rite of washing one's hands, i. e. a clean gift) Vin i.39; iv.156; A iv.210 = 214 (oṇojesi aor.); Miln 236.
Otata
Otata [o + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dh 162 (v. l. otthata); Miln 307 (+ vitata); DhA iii.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam -- otata.
Otaraṇa
Otaraṇa (adj.) [fr. otarati] going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107.
Otarati
Otarati [o + tarati] to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be -- take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221. -- aor.
-- 166 --
otari SnA 486 (for avaŋsari); DhA i.19 (cankamanaŋ); PvA 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaŋ), 75. -- inf. otarituŋ Pug 65, 75 (sangamaŋ). -- ger. otaritvā PvA 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato). -- Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to J vi.345. -- pp. otiṇṇa. -- Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati.
Otallaka
Otallaka (adj.) [of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ, or from uttāḷa?] clothed in rags, poor, indigent J iv.380 (= lāmaka olamba -- vilamba -- nantakadharo C.).
Otāpaka
Otāpaka (adj.) [fr. otāpeti] drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food SnA 35 (parivāsika -- bhattaŋ bhuñjati hatthɔotāpakaŋ khādati).
Otāpeti
Otāpeti [o + tāpeti] to dry in the sun Vin ii.113; iv.281; Miln 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaŋ o. fig. applied to mānasa).
Otāra
Otāra [fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is cen- turies later and means ʻ incarnation ʼ] -- 1. descent to, i. e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraŋ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻ gets his chance ʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, M i. 334; S i.122; iv.178, 185; DhA iii.121. (avatāraŋ labhati, Divy 144, 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance, Sn 446. [Fausböll here translates ʻ defect ʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot˚ gavesati to seek an opportunity, DhA iii.21. Otārāpekkha, watching for a chance, S i.122. At one passage, A iii. 67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. ʻ Carelessness ʼ would suit the context. o. gavesati to look for an opportunity DhA iii.21, and otāraŋ labhati to get a chance S i.122; iv.178, 185; M i.334; DhA iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraŋ labhati Divy 144, 145 etc. -- 2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) A iii.67, 259. -- 3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Sn 446 (= randha vivara SnA 393); also in phrase otārâpekkha spying faults S i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322), Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by "watching for access".
Otāreti
Otāreti [Caus. of otarati] to cause to come down, to bring down, take down J i.426; iv.402; Nett 21, 22; DhA ii.81.
Otiṇṇa
Otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as -- ˚ e. g. issâvatiṇṇa J v.98; dukkha˚, soka˚ etc. see below 2] -- 1. (med.) gone down, descended PvA 104 (uddho -- galaŋ na otiṇṇaŋ not gone down further than the throat). -- 2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by M i.460 = A ii.123 (dukkhɔ otiṇṇa) = It 89 (as v. l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa, which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa); M ii.10; S i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (id.); Sn 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd1 414 as "sallena viddho phuṭṭho"); J v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa C.). -- 3. (in special sense) affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha -- citto); A iii.67, 259 (˚citta); SnA 322 (id.). -- Note. otiṇṇa at S v.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa.
Ottappa
Ottappa (nt.) [fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut -- tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya M Vastu iii. 53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll, Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form, as also recently Kern, Toev. s. v.] fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also DhsA 124, 126; Vism 8, 9 and the definition at SnA 181. Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya -- dhanā). Hiri -- ottappa It 36; J i.129; hir -- ottappa at M i.271; S ii.220; v.1; A ii.78; iv.99, 151; v.214; It 34; J i.127, 206; VvA 23. See also hiri. -- Further passages: D iii.212; M i.356; S ii.196, 206, 208; v.89; A i.50, 83, 95; iii.4 sq., 352; iv.11; v.123 sq.; Pug 71; Dhs 147, 277; Nett 39. -- anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality A i.50, 83, 95; iii.421; v.146, 214; Vbh 341, 359, 370, 391; as adj. It 34 (ahirika +). -- gāravatā respect for conscience, A iii.331; iv.29. -- dhana the treasure of (moral) self -- control D iii.163, 251, 282; VvA 113. -- bala the power of a (good) conscience D iii.253; Ps ii.169, 176; Dhs 31, 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame).
Ottappati
Ottappati [ut + tappati1] to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil S i.154; Ps ii.169, 176; Pug 20, 21; Dhs 31; Miln 171.
Ottappin & Ottāpin
Ottappin & Ottāpin (adj.) [fr. ottappa] afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin D iii.252, 282; It 28, 119. -- (b) ottāpin M i.43 sq.; S ii.159 sq., 196, 207; iv.243 sq.; A ii.13 sq.; iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.; v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at S ii.159 sq., 195, 206; iv. 240 sq.; Sn 133 (ahirika +).
Otthaṭa
Otthaṭa [pp. of ottharati] -- 1. spread over, veiled, hidden by ( -- ˚) Miln 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog). -- 2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 ( -- ˚).
Otthata = Otthaṭa
Otthata = Otthaṭa, v. l. at Dh 162 for otata.
Ottharaka
Ottharaka (nt.) [fr. of tharati] a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119.
Ottharaṇa
Ottharaṇa (nt.) [fr. ottharati] spreading over, veiling Miln 299 (mahik˚).
Ottharati
Ottharati [o + tharati, Sk. root str] to spread over, spread out, cover Miln 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati.
Odaka
Odaka (nt.) [compn. form of udaka] water; abs. only at J iii.282. -- an˚ without water, dried up Th 2, 265 (= udaka -- bhasta ThA 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e. g. M i. 376. See udaka. -- antika -- 1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kh viii.1, 3 (gambhīre odakantike, which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets "a deep pit"; see also KhA 217 sq.). -- 2. "water at the end", i. e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21; cp. odak -- antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing J ii.126.
Odagya
Odagya (nt.) [der. fr. udagga] exultation, elation Nd1 3 = Nd2 446 = Dhs 9, 86, 285, 373; DhsA 143 (= udaggasabhāva a "topmost" condition).
Odana
Odana (m. & nt.) [Sk. odana, to Idg. *ud, from which also udaka, q. v. for full etym.] boiled (milk -- )rice, gruel Vin ii.214 (m.); D i.76, 105; S i.82 (nāḷik˚); DhA iv. 17 (id.); A iii.49; iv.231; Sn 18; J iii.425 (til˚ m.); Dhs 646, 740, 875; PvA 73; VvA 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o -- k -- upa -- caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.); also at M i.247.
Odanika
Odanika [fr. odana] a cook J iii.49.
Odaniya
Odaniya (adj.) [fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika] belonging to rice -- gruel, made of rice -- gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen); VvA 73 (˚surā rice -- liquor).
-- 167 --
Odapattakinī
Odapattakinī (f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i. e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water. Thus in enumn. of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (expld. by udakapattaŋ āmasitvā vāseti) = VvA 73.
Odapattiyā
Odapattiyā at Cp. ii.48 = last.
Odarika & ˚ya
Odarika & ˚ya (adj.) [fr. udara] living for one's belly, vor- acious, gluttonous Miln 357; J vi.208 (˚ya); Th 1, 101.
Odarikatta
Odarikatta (nt.) [fr. odarika] stomach -- filling M i.461; Vism 71.
Odahati
Odahati [o + dahati, fr. dhā] -- 1. to put down, to put in, supply M i.117 (okacaraŋ, see under oka); ii.216 (agadɔangāraŋ vaṇa -- mukhe odaheyya); Th 1, 774 (migavo pāsaŋ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); J iii.201 (visaŋ odahi araññe), 272 (passaŋ o. to turn one's flanks towards, dat.); Miln 156 (kāye ojaŋ odahissāma supply the body with strength). -- 2. (fig.) to apply, in phrase sotaŋ odahati to listen D i.230; Dāvs v.68. -- pp. ohita.
Odahana
Odahana (nt.) [fr. odahati] -- 1. putting down, applying, application M ii.216; heaping up, storing DhA iii.118. <-> 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Nett 29.
Odāta
Odāta (adj.) [Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical dā4 to clean, purify] clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions D ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha); iii.268; A iii.239; iv.94, 263, 306, 349; v.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumn. of colours); DA i.219; VvA 111. See also ava˚. -- kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174. -- vaṇṇa of white colour, white M ii.14; Dhs 247. -- vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white D i.7, 76, 104; J iii.425 (+ alla -- kesa). -- vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) D i.211; iii.118, 124 sq., 210; M i.491, ii.23; A i.73; iii.384; iv.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta -- vasana Divy 160].
Odātaka
Odātaka (adj.) [fr. odāta] white, clean, dressed in white S ii.284 (v. l. SS odāta); Th 1, 965 (dhaja).
Odissa
Odissa (adv.) [ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa] only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (?) Miln 156 (should we read anudissa?).
Odissaka
Odissaka (adj.) [fr. odissa] only in adv. expression odis- saka -- vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka -- vasena in general, universally) J i.82; ii.146; VvA 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso.
Odīraka
Odīraka in odīrakajāta S iv.193 should with v. l. be read ocīraka [= ava + cira + ka] "with its bark off", stripped of its bark.
Odumbara
Odumbara (adj.) [fr. udumbara] belonging to the Udum- bara tree Vv 5016; cp. VvA 213.
Odhasta
Odhasta [Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaŋsati: see dhaŋsati] fallen down, scattered M i.124 = S iv.176 (˚patoda; S reads odhasata but has v. l. odhasta).
Odhānīya
Odhānīya (nt.) [fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. a)poqh/kh, see odahati] a place for putting something down or into, a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salākɔodhāniyan ti yattha salākaŋ odahanti taŋ D E). -- Cp. samodhāneti.
Odhi
Odhi [from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā] putting down, fixing, i. e. boundary, limit, extent DhA ii.80 (jaṇṇu -- mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i. e. kneedeep); iv.204 (id.). -- odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vbh 246; Nett 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi M iii. 219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal, general Ps ii. 130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso "piecemeal" Kvu 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271). -- sunka "extent of toll", stake J vi.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaŋ C.).
Odhika
Odhika (adj.) [fr. odhi] "according to limit", i. e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60, cp. Nd2 526; J v.392 (id.).
Odhunāti
Odhunāti [o + dhunāti] to shake off M i.229; S iii.155; A iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (v. l. BB ophun˚, SS otu˚) = PvA 256; Vin ii.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117); Miln 399 (+ vidhunāti).
Onaddha
Onaddha [pp. of onandhati] bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150, 270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha); M ii.64; Dh 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati.
Onandhati
Onandhati [o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form con- structed from naddha after bandhati > baddha; see also apiḷandhati] to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf. onandhituŋ); Miln 261.
Onamaka
Onamaka (adj.) [fr. onamati] bending down, stooping DhA ii.136 (an˚).
Onamati
Onamati [o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D ii. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.). -- pp. oṇata.
Onamana
Onamana (nt.) [abstr. fr. onamati] in compn. with ˚unna- mana lowering & raising, bending down & up DhA i.17.
Onayhati
Onayhati [ava + nayhati] to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud DhsA 378 (megho ākāsaŋ o.) -- pp. onaddha.
Onāha
Onāha [fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over, covering, shrouding D i.246 (spelt onaha); Miln 300; Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaŋ kāyaŋ onayhati).
Onīta
Onīta [in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti] only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta -- patta -- pāṇi "having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl", a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as "onitta˚" (fr. nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i. e. "the hand is taken away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 6624 & cp. apa -- nīta -- pātra at M Vastu iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin "having eaten" and occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin ii.147: D i.109 (= DA i. 277, q. v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above M ii.50, 93; S v.384; A ii.63; Sn p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha SnA 456); VvA 118; PvA 278.
Oneti
Oneti, prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp. onīta.
Onojeti
Onojeti see oṇojeti.
Opakkamika
Opakkamika (adj.) [fr. upakkama] characterising a sensa- tion of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā M i.92, 241; S iv. 230 = A ii.87 = iii.131 = v.110 = Nd2 304ic = Miln 112.
Opakkhin
Opakkhin (adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] "with wings off" i. e. having one's wings clipped, powerless A i.188 (˚ŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiŋ karoti).
Opaguyha
Opaguyha see opavayha.
-- 168 --
Opatati
Opatati [o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) J ii.228 (lokāmisaŋ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā ger.); Miln 368, 396. -- pp. opatita.
Opatita
Opatita [pp. of opatati] falling (down) PvA 29 (udaka; v. l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at PvA 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at KhA 213 reads mahāsobbha -- sannipātehi).
Opatta
Opatta (adj.) [o + patta, Sk. avapattra] with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) J iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita -- patta C.).
Opadhika
Opadhika (adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J. P.T.S. 1885, 38 as "exceedingly great"; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at VvA 154 as "atta -- bhāva -- janaka paṭisandhi -- pavatti -- vipāka -- dāyaka". -- S i.233 = A iv.292 = Vv 3421; It 20 (v. l. osadhika), 78.
Opanayika
Opanayika (adj.) [fr. upaneti, upa + nī] leading to (Nib- bāna) S iv.41 sq., 272, 339; v.343; A i.158; ii.198; D iii.5; Vism 217.
Opapakkhi
Opapakkhi in phrase ˚ŋ karoti at A i.188 read opakkhiŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings, to render powerless.
Opapaccayika
Opapaccayika (adj.) [= opapātika] having the character- istic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna).
Opapātika
Opapātika (adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Av. Ś ii.89; Divy 300, 627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q. v.) D i.27, 55, 156; iii.132, 230 (˚yoni), 265; M i.34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247; S iii.206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; A i.232, 245, 269; ii.5, 89, 186; iv.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; v. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug 16, 62, 63; Vbh 412 sq.; Miln 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DA i.165, 313. The C. on M i.34 explns. by "sesa -- yoni -- paṭikkhepa -- vacanaŋ etaŋ". See also Pug. A 1, § 40.
Opapātin
Opapātin (adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at S v.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.
Opama
Opama at J i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for upama.
Opamma
Opamma (nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor M i.378; Vin v.164; Miln 1, 70, 330; Vism 117, 622; ThA 290.
Oparajja
Oparajja viceroyalty is v. l. for uparajja. Thus at M ii. 76; A iii.154.
Opavayha
Opavayha (adj. n.) [fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati] fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state -- elephant (of the elephant of the king) S v.351 = Nett 136 (v. l. opaguyha; C. explns. by ārohana -- yogga); J ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv. 91 (v. l. ˚guyha); vi.488 (T. opavuyha, v. l. opaguyha; gajuttama opavayha = rāja -- vāhana C.); DA i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v. l. ˚guyha); VvA 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha).
Opasamika
Opasamika (adj.) [fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Av. Ś ii.107; M Vastu ii.41] leading to quiet, allaying, quieting; Ep. of Dhamma D iii.264 sq.; A ii.132.
Opasāyika
Opasāyika (adj.) [fr. upasaya, upa + śī] being near at hand or at one's bidding (?) M i.328.
Opāṭeti
Opāṭeti [ava + Caus. of paṭ, Sk. avapāṭayati] to tear as- under, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviŋ opāṭetvā).
Opāta
Opāta [o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta] -- 1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent J vi.561. -- 2. a pitfall J i.143; DhA iv.211.
Opāteti
Opāteti [o + Caus. of pat] to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i. e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaŋ opāteti to interrupt a conversation M ii.10, 122, 168; A iii.137, 392 sq.; Sn p. 107. -- 2. to drop, to omit (a syllable) Vin iv.15.
Opāna
Opāna (nt.) [o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e. g. Bdhgh. at DA i.298 = udapāna]. Only in phrase opāna -- bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men's wants; expld. as "khata -- pokkharaṇī viya hutvā" DA i. 298 = J v.174. -- Vin i.236; D i.137; M i.379; A iv. 185; Vv 654; Pv iv.160; J iii.142; iv.34; v.172; Vbh 247; Miln 411; Vism 18; VvA 286; DA 1177, 298.
Opārambha
Opārambha (adj.) [fr. upārambha] acting as a support, supporting, helpful M ii.113.
Opiya
Opiya is metric for upiya [upa + ger. of i] undergoing, going into S i.199 = Th 1, 119 (nibbānaŋ hadayasmiŋ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "suffering N. in thy heart to sink", S A. hadayasmiŋ pakkhipitvā.
Opilavati
Opilavati [Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu] to be immersed, to sink down S ii.224. -- Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.).
Opilāpita
Opilāpita [pp. of opilāpeti] immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched J i.212, 214.
Opilāpeti
Opilāpeti [Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati] to im- merse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin i. 157 = 225 = S i.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318); M i.207 = iii.157; DhA iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with vv. ll. for opīḷetvā); J iii.282. -- pp. opilāpita.
Opīḷeti
Opīḷeti in "bhattaŋ pacchiyaŋ opīḷetvā" at DhA ii.3 is with v. l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i. e. dropping the food into the basket.
Opuñchati
Opuñchati is uncertain reading for opuñjeti.
Opuñchana
Opuñchana or Opuñjana (nt.) [fr. opuñjeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA iii.296.
Opuñjeti
Opuñjeti or ˚ati [o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap] to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. "cleanse") Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaŋ); J iv.377 (opuñchetvā T., but v. l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); DhA iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). <-> Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning "to smear" Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; v. l. opuñchāpetvā).
Opunāti
Opunāti also as opuṇāti (Dh) [o + punāti fr. pū] to win- now, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dh 252 (= bhusaŋ opuṇanto viya DhA iii.375); SnA 312. -- Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti M Vastu iii.178] to cause to sift A i.242; J i.447.
Opuppha
Opuppha [o + puppha] bud, young flower J vi.497 (vv. ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta).
Opeti
Opeti [unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o. Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya ("conform with this", see ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl. formation is upamā ("likeness"). Trenckner's expln. of
-- 169 --
ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning] to make go into (c. loc.), to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) S i.236 (SA na . . pakkhipanti) = Th 2, 283 = J v.252 (T. upeti); in which Th 2, 283 has oseti (ThA 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219). -- aor. opi J iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). <-> ger. opitvā (opetvā?) J iv.457 (gloss khipetvā).
Ophuṭa
Ophuṭa [a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava -- vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta = P. apāruta) and ava -- phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances] covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa, ovuta) D i.246 (T. ophuta, vv. ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); M iii.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd1 24 ovuṭa, v. l. SS ophuṭa); Nd2 365 (ophuṭa, v. l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DA i.59 (oputa); SnA 596 (oputa = pariyo -- naddha); Miln 161 (ovuta).
Obandhati
Obandhati [o + bandhati] to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā ger.).
Obhagga
Obhagga [o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna] broken down, broken up, broken S v.96 (˚vibhagga); A iv.435 (obhaggɔobhagga); DhA i.58 (id.); J i.55 (˚sarīra).
Obhañjati
Obhañjati [o + bhañj] to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhañjāpeti J i.499 (dhovāpeti +). See also pp. obhagga.
Obhata
Obhata [pp. of obharati] having taken away or off, only in cpd. ˚cumbaṭā with the "cumbaṭa" taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = VvA 73 (Hardy: "a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head"?).
Obharati
Obharati [ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero] to carry away or off, to take off. -- pp. obhata.
Obhāsa
Obhāsa [from obhāsati] shine, splendour, light, lustre, efful- gence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also "aura" (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. "rays emitted from the body on account of insight") -- D i.220 (effulgence of light); M iii.120, 157; A ii.130, 139; iv.302; It 108 (obhāsakara); Ps i.114, 119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq., 159, 162; Vism 28, 41; PvA 276 (˚ŋ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; SnA 497. See also avabhāsa.
Obhāsati
Obhāsati1 [o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati] to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti PvA 10). -- Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent, to illumine, to fill with light or splendour. -- pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti PvA 176); Miln 336; ppr. obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna PvA 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaŋ karonto PvA 71); ger. obhāsetvā S i.66; Kh v. = Sn p. 46; KhA 116 (= ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaŋ karitvā). -- pp. avabhāsita.
Obhāsati
Obhāsati2 [ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati] to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262; iii.128.
Obhāsana
Obhāsana (nt. -- adj.) [fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana] shining VvA 276 (Hardy: "speaking to someone").
Obhoga
Obhoga [o + bhoga from bhuj to bend] bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaŋ kātabbaŋ).
Oma
Oma (adj.) [Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava] lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā A iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Sn 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954; SnA 347 (= paritta lāmaka). -- More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior, i. e. excellent.
Omaka
Omaka (adj.) [oma + ka] lower in rank, inferior; low, in- significant Nd1 306 (appaka +); J ii.142; DhA i.203.
Omaṭṭha
Omaṭṭha [pp. of omasati] touched S i.13 = 53 = Th 1, 39.
Omaddati
Omaddati [o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133] -- 1. to rub J vi.262 (sarīraŋ omaddanto); Miln 220. -- 2. to crush, oppress M i 87 = Nd2 1996 (abhivaggena); J ii.95.
Omasati
Omasati [o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ] -- 1. (lit.) to touch J v. 446. -- 2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4 sq. -- pp. omaṭṭha.
Omasanā
Omasanā (f.) [fr. omasati] touching, touch Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā).
Omāna
Omāna1 [fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later] disregard, disrespect, contempt DhA ii.52 (+ atimāna). Cp. foll. & see also avamāna.
Omāna
Omāna2 [at J ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻ Oh bird, flying high ʼ. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary] "flying", the v. l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna.
Omissaka
Omissaka (adj.) [o + missaka] mixed, miscellaneous, various J v.37; vi.224 (˚parisā). Cp. vo˚.
Omukka
Omukka (adj.) [fr. + muc] cast off, second hand Vin i.187.
Omuñcati
Omuñcati [o + muc] to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff D i.126 (veṭhanaŋ as form of salute); J ii.326; vi.73 (sāṭakaŋ); Vism 338; PvA 63 (tacaŋ); VvA 75 (ābhāraṇāni). -- Caus. omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273. -- pp. omutta.
Omutta
Omutta [pp. of omuñcati] released, freed, discharged, taken off It 56 (read omuttɔassa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.).
Omutteti
Omutteti [Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine] to discharge urine, pass water M i.79, 127.
Oyācati
Oyācati [o + yāc, opp. āyācati] to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137.
Ora
Ora (adj.) [compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara] below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraŋ the below, the near side, this world Sn 15; VvA 42 (orato abl. from this side). -- Cases adverbially: acc. oraŋ (with abl.) on this side of, below, under, within M ii.142; Sn 804 (oraŋ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraŋ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv i.1012 has uddhaŋ); PvA 154 (dahato); instr. orena J. v.72; abl. orato on this side Miln 210. -- pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Sn 1 (see SnA 13 = Nd2 422b and cp. paroparaŋ); Miln 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean). -- pure (avarapure) below the fortress M i.68 (bahinagare +). -- mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence: trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85, 203 = It 85; D i.3; M i.449; A iv.22; v.157, 164; Vbh 247; Nett 62; DhA i.203; DA i.55.
Oraka
Oraka (adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; M ii.47; Sn 692 (= paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J i.381.
Orata
Orata [o + rata, pp. of ramati] -- 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Miln 210 (cp. abhirata). -- 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA 72 (= virato; cp. uparata).
Orabbhika
Orabbhika [fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning] one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) M i.343, 412; S ii.256; A i.251; ii.207 = Pug 56; iii.303; Th 2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka ThA 204);
-- 170 --
J v.270; vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko).
Oramati
Oramati [Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti] to stay or be on this side, i. e. to stand still, to get no further J i.492 (oramituŋ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema). Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper. of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i. e. let us desist, let us give up, (i. e. we shall not get through to the other side). -- anoramati (neg.) see sep. -- On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq.
Oramāpeti
Oramāpeti (Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from J v.474 (manussa -- maŋsā).
Orambhāgiya
Orambhāgiya (adj.) [ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhā- gīya, e. g. Divy 533] being a share of the lower, i e. this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saŋyojanāni (see also saŋyojana) D i.156; iii.107, 108, 132; M i.432; It 114; Pug 22; Nett 14; SnA 13; DA i.313. -- Note. A curious form of this word is found at Th 2, 166 orambhāga -- manīya, with gloss (ThA 158) oraŋ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted.
Oravitar
Oravitar [ora + n. ag. of vitarati?] doubtful reading at A v.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv. ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi.
Orasa
Orasa (adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one's own breast, self -- begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own M ii.84; iii.29; S ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83; J iii.272; Vv 5022; ThA 236; KhA 248; PvA 62 (urejāta +).
Orima
Orima [superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama] the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder); only in combn. orima -- tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) D i.244; S iv.175 (sakkāyassɔ adhivacanaŋ) = SnA 24; Dhs 597; Vism 512 (˚tīra -- mahɔogha); DhA ii.99.
Oruddha
Oruddha [fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava˚] -- 1. kept back, restrained, subdued A iii.393. -- 2. imprisoned J iv.4. See also ava˚.
Orundhati
Orundhati [cp. Sk. avarundhate] to get, attain, take for a wife. -- ger. orundhiya J iv.480. -- aor. oruddha Th 2, 445. -- pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati.
Orodha
Orodha [fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha] obstruction; con- finement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290; iv.261 (rājɔ orodhā harem -- lady, concubine); J iv.393, 404.
Oropaṇa
Oropaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. oropeti] taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes' oropaṇa hair -- cutting DhA ii. 53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v. l. oropaṇa).
Oropeti
Oropeti [Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati] to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) VvA 64 (bhattabhājanaŋ oropeti) -- ger. oropayitvā Sn 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd2 181; apanetvā SnA 91); J vi.211 (kesamassuŋ).
Orohaṇa
Orohaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. orahati] descent, in udakɔorohaṇâ- nuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i. e. bathing) Pug 55; J i.193; Miln 350.
Orohati
Orohati [o + rohati] to descend, climb down D ii.21; M iii.131; J i.50; Miln 395; PvA 14. -- Caus. oropeti (q. v.).
Olaggeti
Olaggeti [Caus. of o + lag] to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain M ii.178; A iii.384 (vv. ll. oloketi, olabheti, oketi); Th 1, 355.
Olagga
Olagga [Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati] restrained, checked Th 1, 356
Olanghanā
Olanghanā (f.) [fr. olangheti] bending down Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā).
Olangheti
Olangheti [Caus. of ava + langh] to make jump down, in phrase ullangheti olangheti to make dance up & down J v.434 = DhA iv.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol˚; but v. l. ullangheti ol˚).
Olamba
Olamba (adj.) [fr. ava + lamb] hanging down Vin iii.49; J iv.380 (˚vilamba).
Olambaka
Olambaka (adj. -- n.) [see olambati] -- 1. (adj.) hanging down VvA 32 (˚dāma). -- 2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick J iv.40 (hatth˚). -- (b) plumb -- line J vi.392.
Olambati & avalambati
Olambati & avalambati [ava + lamb] to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti PvA 77); ii.102 (= olambanti PvA 142); olambati M iii.164 (+ ajjholambati); J i.194; PvA 46. -- ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva PvA 189) & olambetvā J iii.218. See also olubbha.
Olambanaka
Olambanaka [fr. olambati] an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin ii.142.
Olikhati
Olikhati [o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati] to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) A iii.295 (veṇiŋ olikhituŋ); Th 1, 169 (kese olikhissaŋ); 2, 88.
Oligalla
Oligalla [of unknown etym.: prob. Non -- Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.] a dirty pool near a village M iii.168; S v.361; A i.161; iii.389; Miln 220; Vism 343.
Oliyati
Oliyati [o + līyate from lī] to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to It 43; Nett 174. -- pp. olīna (see avalīna).
Olīna
Olīna [pp. of oliyate] adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated M i.200 (˚vuttika); J vi.569 (anolīna -- mānasa); Vbh 350 (˚vuttikā); Miln 393 (an˚).
Olīyanā
Olīyanā [fr. oliyati] adhering, infatuation Ps i.157; Dhs 1156, 1236.
Olugga
Olugga [pp. of olujjati] breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away M i.80, 245 (olugga -- vilugga), 450 (id.); Vism 107 (id.).
Olujjati
Olujjati [Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj] to break off, go to wreck, fall away S ii.218 (v. l. ull˚). -- pp. olugga.
Olubbha
Olubbha [assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties. See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156] holding on to, leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaŋ olubbha leaning on a stick, e. g. M i.108 (= daṇḍaŋ olambitvā C.; see M i 539); A iii.298; Th 2, 27 (= ālambitvā); VvA 105. In other connections: S i.118; iii.129; J i.265 (āvāṭa -- mukha -- vaṭṭiyaŋ); vi.40 (hatthe); DhA ii.57 (passaŋ; gloss olambi); VvA 217, 219.
Olumpeti
Olumpeti [o + Caus. of lup] to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv. ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump˚, odametvā).
Olokana
Olokana (nt.) [see oloketi] looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhassɔ).
Olokanaka
Olokanaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. oloketi] window Vin ii.267 (olo- kanakena olokenti, adv.).
Oloketi
Oloketi [BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi] to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider J i.85, 108 (nakkhattaŋ); Pv ii.964; DhA i.10, 12, 25, 26; ii.96 (v. l. for T. voloketi); iii.296; PvA 4, 5, 74, 124.
Oḷāra
Oḷāra at PvA 110 is with v. l. BB to be read uḷāra.
Oḷārika
Oḷārika (adj.) [fr. uḷāra] gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) D i.37, 186 sq.
-- 171 --
(attā) 195, 197, 199; M i.48, 139, 247; ii.230; iii.16, 299; S ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opp. sukhuma); iv.382 (id.); v.259 sq.; A iv.309 sq. (nimittaŋ obhāso); J i.67; Dhs 585, 675, 889; Vbh 1, 13, 379; Vism 155 (˚anga), 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450.
Oḷumpika
Oḷumpika (adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍum- pika M Vastu iii.113, 443. In the Śvet -- Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443.
Ovaja
Ovaja at S i.212 read ojava.
Ovaṭa
Ovaṭa [o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ, another form of ovuta = ophuta, q. v.] obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = iv.52 = A iv.277 (v. l. ovāda); also an˚ ibid.
Ovaṭṭika
Ovaṭṭika (nt.) [fr. ava + vṛt] -- 1. girdle, waistband M ii.47; J iii.285 (v. l. ovaddhi˚); Vism 312; DhA ii.37; iv.206; DA i.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag). -- 2. a bracelet Vin ii.106 (= vaḷayaŋ C.). <-> 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv. ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚); J ii.197 (v. l. ovaddhi˚). See also ovaddheyya (ava˚).
Ovadati
Ovadati [o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning] to give advice, to admonish, exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati. -- pres. ovadati Vin iv.52 sq.; DhA i.11, 13; imper. ovadatu M iii.267. -- pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Sn 1051 (= anusāseyya). -- aor. ovadi DhA i.397. -- inf. ovadituŋ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituŋ). -- grd. ovaditabba Vin ii.5; and ovadiya (see sep.). -- Pass. avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pug 64 (+ anusāsiyamāna).
Ovadiya
Ovadiya (adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be ad- vised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 (= ovāda -- vasena vattabbaŋ VvA 345).
Ovaddheyya
Ovaddheyya a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254. See the note at Vin. Texts ii.154; Vin i.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv. ll. are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya˚ ovaṭṭheyya˚.
Ovamati
Ovamati [o + vam] to throw up, vomit Ud 78.
Ovaraka
Ovaraka (nt.) [Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha "lying -- in chamber"] an inner room Vin i.217; M i.253; J i.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jātɔovarake i. e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at VvA 158); Vism 90, 431; VvA 304 (= gabbha).
Ovariyāna
Ovariyāna [ger. of o + vṛ] forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Th 2, 367 (v. l. ovadiyāna, thus also ThA 250 explained "maŋ gacchantiŋ avaditvā gamanaŋ nisedhetvā").
Ovassa & ˚ka
Ovassa & ˚ka see anovassa(ka).
Ovassati
Ovassati [o + vassati] to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121.
Ovahati
Ovahati [o + vahati] to carry down. -- Pass. ovuyhati It 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya).
Ovāda
Ovāda [BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.] advice, instruc- tion, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = ii.228; ii.255 = iv.52; D i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king); J iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA i.13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA 345. -- ovādaŋ deti to give advice PvA 11, 12, 15,
Ovādaka
Ovādaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e. g. Divy 48, 254, 385] admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser M i.145; A i.25; S v.67 = It 107. -- anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible J i.159; iii.256, 304; v.314.
Ovādin
Ovādin (adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda] = ovādaka M i.360 (anovādin).
Ovijjhati
Ovijjhati [ava + vyadh] to pierce through Vism 304.
Ovuta
Ovuta see ophuta.
Ovuyhati
Ovuyhati [Pass. of ovahati] to be carried down (a river) It 114.
Osakkati
Osakkati [o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati] to draw back, move back D i.230; J iv.348 (for apavattati C.); v.295 (an -- osakkitvā). See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60.
Osajjati
Osajjati [o + sṛj] to emit, evacuate PvA 268 (vaccaŋ excrement, + ohanati). -- pp. osaṭṭha.
Osaṭa
Osaṭa [pp. of o + sṛ] having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited M i.176, 469 (padasamācāro sangha -- majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaŋ vass˚āvāsaŋ o.); Miln 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa.
Osaṇheti
Osaṇheti [o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha] to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese); J iv.219 (id.).
Osadha
Osadha (nt.) [Vedic auṣadha] see osadhī.
Osadhika
Osadhika v. l. It 20 for opadhika.
Osadhikā
Osadhikā (f.) [fr. osadha] remedy, esp. poultice, foment- ation J iv.361.
Osadhī
Osadhī (f.) [Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine, whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A iv.100 (bījagāma -- bhūtagāmā . . osadhi -- tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610, with Sn 296 (gāvo . . . yāsu jāyanti osadhā); D i.12, cp. DA i.98; Pv iii.53; PvA 86; J iv.31; vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻ balm of salvation ʼ (amatosadha) Miln 247. Osadhi -- tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, S i.65; It 20 = A v.62; Vv 92; Pv ii.110; cp. PvA 71; Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence; other translators render it ʻ morning star ʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star.
Osanna
Osanna (adj.) [o + pp. of syad to move on] given out, exhausted, weak Miln 250 (˚viriya).
Osappati
Osappati [o + sṛp to creep] to draw back, give way J vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati).
Osaraka
Osaraka (adj.) [fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa] of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over -- hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153. See also osāraka.
Osaraṇa
Osaraṇa (nt.) [fr. avasarati] -- 1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting J i.154 (gāmantaŋ ˚kāle). -- 2. withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Sn 538 (= ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho SnA 434).
Osarati
Osarati [o + sṛ] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M i.176 (gāmaŋ etc.); ii.122. -- pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati.
Osāna
Osāna (nt.) [fr. osāpeti] stopping, ceasing; end, finish, con- clusion S v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Sn 938
-- 172 --
Osāpeti
Osāpeti [With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS. & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of sṛ: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv. ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling] to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide S i.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv. ll. oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ = Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv. ll. obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚; C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); J i.25 (osāpeti, v. l. obhāseti); Nd1 412 (in expln. of osāna); VvA 77 (agghaŋ o. to fix a price; vv. ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = DhA iii.108 (v. l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti.
Osāraka
Osāraka [fr. osarati] shelter, outhouse J iii.446. See also osaraka.
Osāraṇā
Osāraṇā (f.) [fr. osāreti 3] -- 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322; Miln 344. -- 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) DhA ii.1 (T. oss˚).
Osārita
Osārita [pp. of osāreti 3] restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138.
Osāreti
Osāreti [Caus. of o +sṛ to flow] -- 1. (with v. l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) J vi.52, 67 (pattaŋ thavikāya o.). -- 2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Miln 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaŋ), 203 (kāraṇaŋ), 349 (lekhaŋ to compose a letter). -- 3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96, 322, 340; iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti). -- Pass. osāriyati Vin ii.61; pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā).
Osiñcati
Osiñcati [o + siñcati] -- 1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262; M i.87 (telena); Pv i.85 (ppr. osiñcaŋ = āsiñcanto PvA 41). -- 2. to scoop out, empty, drain (water) J v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). <-> pp. avasitta & ositta.
Osita
Osita [pp. of ava + sā] inhabited (by), accessible (to) Sn 937 (an˚). Cp. vy˚.
Ositta
Ositta [pp. of osiñcati] sprinkled, besprinkled J v.400. See also avasitta.
Osīdati
Osīdati [fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) S iv.314 (osīda bho sappi -- tela); Miln 277 (nāvā osīdati). -- ger. osīditvā J ii.293. -- Caus. II. osīdāpeti J iv.139 (nāvaŋ).
Osīdana
Osīdana (nt.) [fr. osīdati] sinking DhsA 363.
Ossa
Ossa see ussa.
Ossakk˚
Ossakk˚ see osakk˚.
Ossagga
Ossagga [fr. ossajati] relaxation, in cpd. sati -- ossagga (for which more common sati -- vossagga) relaxation of memory, inattention, thoughtlessness DhA iii.163 (for pamāda Dh 167). See vossagga.
Ossajjati
Ossajjati [o + sṛj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release D ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Sn 270 = S i.207; Th 1, 321; J iv.260. -- pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati.
Ossajjana
Ossajjana (nt.) [fr. ossajati] release, dismissal, sending off DA i.130.
Ossaṭṭha
Ossaṭṭha [pp. of ossajati] let loose, released, given up, thrown down D ii.106; S iii.241; J i.64; iv.460 (= nissaṭṭha).
Ossanna
Ossanna [pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna] sunk, low down, deficient, lacking J i.336 (opp. ussanna). Hardly to be derived from ava + syad .
Ossavana
Ossavana (nt.) [fr. ava + sru] outflow, running water M i.189 (v. l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp. avassava.
Ohana
Ohana only in cpd. bimbɔohana, see under bimba.
Ohanati
Ohanati [ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of hā, taking it to han instead of the latter] to defecate, to empty the bowels PvA 268 (+ osajjati).
Oharaṇa
Oharaṇa (nt.) [fr. oharati] lit. "taking away", leading astray, side -- track, deviating path J vi.525 (C.: gamana -- magga). Cp. avaharaṇa.
Oharati
Oharati [o + hṛ take] -- 1. to take away, take down, take off S i.27 (ger. ohacca, v. l. ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper. ohara = ohārehi PvA 95); DhA iv.56 (see ohārin). See also ava˚. -- Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II. oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) J vi.52 (kesamassuŋ); DhA ii.53 (cp. oropeti). -- pp. avahaṭa.
Ohāya
Ohāya ger. of ojahāti.
Ohāra
Ohāra see avahāra & cp. vohāra.
Ohāraṇa
Ohāraṇa (nt.) [fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa] taking down, cutting off (hair) J i.64 (kesa -- massu˚).
Ohārin
Ohārin (adj. -- n.) [fr. avaharati] dragging down, weighty, heavy Dh 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti DhA iv.56).
Ohāreti
Ohāreti [Caus. of oharati] -- 1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Sn 64 (= oropeti Nd2 183). -- 2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; PvA 95. -- 3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) It 75 (kesamassuŋ hair & beard, v. l. ohāyāpetvā); Pug 56 (id.).
Ohita
Ohita [pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e. g.) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e. g.)] -- 1. put down into, deposited Dh 150. -- 2. put down, laid down, taken off, relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaŋ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta iii. C.; cp. ˚khandhabhāra DhA iv.168. -- 3. put down in, hidden, put away in ( -- ˚) Sn 1022 = (kosɔohita). -- 4. (fig.) put down to, applied to, in ohita -- sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaŋ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaŋ suṇāti; M i.480; iii.201; S v.96; A iv.391; Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiŋ katvā).
Ohiyyaka
Ohiyyaka (adj. -- n.) [fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati] one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208; iv.94; S i.185 (vihārapāla).
Ohīna
Ohīna [pp. of ojahāti] having left behind J iv.432 (gaṇaŋ).
Ohīyati
Ohīyati (ohiyyati) [ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti] - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340 (avahīyati = ohiyyati C.). -- 2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin iv.229; DhA ii.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka.
Ohīḷanā
Ohīḷanā (f.) [ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ] scorning, scornfulness Vbh 353 (+ ohīḷattaŋ).
-- 173 --
K. Ka˚
Ka˚ (pron. interr.) [Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qṷo besides *qui (see ki˚ & kiŋ) & *qṷu (see ku˚). Cp. Av. ka -- ; Gr. ph=|, pw_s, poi_os, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co -- te; Cymr. pa; Goth. hvas, Ags. hwā (=E. who), Ohg. hwër] who? -- m. ko, f. kā (nt. kiŋ, q. v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt. -- From ka˚ also nt. pl. kāni (Sn 324, 961) & some adv. forms like kathaŋ, kadā, kahaŋ, etc. -- 1. (a) ka˚: nom. m. ko Sn 173, 765, 1024; J i.279; Dh 146; f. kā J vi.364; PvA 41; gen. sg. kassa Miln 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. "why" Sn 883, 885; PvA 4, 13, 63, etc. -- (b) ki˚ (m. & f.; nt. see kiŋ): gen. sg. kissa Dh 237; J ii.104. ko -- nāmo (of) what name Miln 14; DhA ii.92, occurs besides kin -- nāmo Miln 15. -- kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho. -- All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su. e. g. ko su'dha tarati oghaŋ (who then or who possibly) Sn 173; kena ssu nivuto loko "by what then is the world obstructed?" Sn 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti . . . Sn 885. <-> 2. In indef. meaning combd with -- ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling "not anybody"), nt. kiñci (q. v.); e. g. mā jātu koci lokasmiŋ pāpiccho It 85; no yāti koci loke Dh 179; n'âhaŋ bhatako 'smi kassaci Sn 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's trace of action is lost" Sn 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti) (he gives) nothing to anybody VvA 322; PvA 45. -- In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e. g. app' eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh' agaccheyya, "would that some man or other would come here!" PvA 153. <-> Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya˚): yo hi koci gorakkhaŋ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever -- he) Sn 612. See also kad˚.
Kaŋsa
Kaŋsa [cp. Sk. kaŋsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña] 1. bronze Miln 2; magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus J vi.504 (silver) and J i.338; iv.107; vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king. -- 2. a bronze gong Dh 134 (DhA iii.58). -- 3. a bronze dish J i.336; āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet M. i.316. -- 4. a "bronze," i. e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255, 256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22. -- "Golden bronze" in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla VvA 36 as "bells." -- It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaŋsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds. -- upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk -- pail (?) in phrase: dhenusahassāni dukūla -- sandanāni (?) kaŋsūpadhāraṇām D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaŋs'ûpadohana (=Sk. kāŋsy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -- kaṇṭaka metal thorns, bits of sharp metal, nails J v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka) -- kūta cheating with false or spurious metal D i.5 (=DA i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -- tāla bronze gong DhA i.389; DhsA 319 (˚tāḷa); VvA 161 or cymbals J vi.277. 411. -- thāla metal dish, as distinguished from earthenware D i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako=A iii.25) cp. DA i. 217; Vism 283 (in simile); DhA iii.57 (: a gong); DA i.217; DhA iv.67 =J iii.224; reading at Miln 62 to be ˚tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -- pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -- pāti & pātī a bronze bowl, usually for food: M i.25; A iv.393; Sn 14; PvA 274. -- pūra full of metal J iv.107. -- bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135. -- bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -- maya made of bronze Vin i.190; ii.112; -- mallaka metal dish, e. g. of gold J iii.21. -- loha bronze Miln 267.
Kaŋsati
Kaŋsati=kassati, see ava˚.
Kakaca
Kakaca [onomat. to sound root kr̥, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca] a saw Th 1, 445; J iv.30; v.52; vi.261; DA i.212; in simile ˚ -- ūpama ovāda M i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, 281. -- khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw J i.321. -- danta tooth of a saw, DA i.37 (kakaca -- danta -- pantiyaŋ kīḷamāna).
Kakaṇṭaka
Kakaṇṭaka, the chameleon J i.442, 487; ii.63; vi.346; VvA 258.
Kaku
Kaku [Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus] a peak, summit, projecting corner S i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaŋ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa) A iii.34 (=AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 5.
Kakuṭa
Kakuṭa a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.: -- pāda dove -- footed (i. e. having beautiful feet) DhA i.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, J ii.93; DhA i.119; Miln 169.
Kakutthaka
Kakutthaka see ku˚.
Kakudha
Kakudha [cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above] 1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull J ii.225; J vi.340. <-> 2. a cock's comb: see sīsa kakudha. -- 3. a king's symbol or emblem (nt.) J v.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha -- bhaṇḍa. -- 4. a tree, the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28; J vi.519; kakudharukkha DhA iv.153. Note. On pakudha as twin -- form of ka˚ see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108. -- phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -- bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty J i.53; iv.151; v.289 (=sakāyura). The 5 regalia (as mentioned at J v.264) are vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword, canopy, slippers. -- pañcavidha -- k˚ PvA 74.
Kakka
Kakka1 [cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa] a sedi- ment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard -- paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth -- paste, cp. Fuller's earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DA i.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚, used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha -- cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku.
-- 174 --
Kakka
Kakka2 [cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA 111.
Kakkaṭa
Kakkaṭa a large deer (?) J vi.538 (expld as mahāmiga).
Kakkaṭaka
Kakkaṭaka [cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara "hard," kankata "mail"; cp. Gr. karki/nos & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaṭaka hook] a crab S i.123; M i.234; J i.222; Vv 546 (VvA 243, 245); DhA iii.299 (mama . . . kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa. -- nala a kind of sea -- reed of reddish colour, J iv.141; also a name for coral, ibid. -- magga fissures in canals; frequented by crabs, DhsA 270. -- yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs ix.17. -- rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab -- curry, VvA 243.
Kakkara
Kakkara [onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. ke/rkac, kerki/s, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound -- root kr̥, see note on gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J ii.162, purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K˚ -- Jātaka, N˚ 209.
Kakkaratā
Kakkaratā (f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug 19, 23.
Kakkariya
Kakkariya (nt.) harshness, Pug 19, 23.
Kakkaru
Kakkaru a kind of creeper (˚jātāni=valliphalāni) J vi.536.
Kakkasa
Kakkasa (adj.) [Sk. karkaśa to root kr̥ as in kakkaṭaka] rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para -- kaṭukā Dhs 1343), M i.286=Dhs 1343; A v.265=283, 293; DhsA 396. -- akakkasa: smooth Sn 632; J iii.282; v.203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 13); akakkasanga, with smooth limbs, handsome, J v.204.
Kakkassa
Kakkassa roughness Sn 328, Miln 252.
Kakkārika
Kakkārika (and ˚uka) [fr. karkaru] a kind of cucumber Vv 3328=eḷāluka VvA 147.
Kakkāru
Kakkāru (Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin -- gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera J vi.536: kakkārujātāni=valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.). -- 2. a heavenly flower J iii.87, 88=dibbapuppha
Kakkāreti
Kakkāreti [*kaṭ -- kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound -- root kr̥ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa] to make the sound kak, to half choke J ii.105.
Kakku
Kakku [cp. kakka=kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚.
Kakkoṭaka
Kakkoṭaka (?) KhA 38, spelt takk˚ at Vism 258.
Kakkola
Kakkola see takkola.
Kakkhaḷa
Kakkhaḷa [kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara=P. kakkaṭaka] 1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp. muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaŋ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaŋ kharagataŋ kakkhaḷattaŋ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (=thaddha), 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa); DhA ii.95; iv.104; Miln 67, 112; PvA 243 (=asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka); VvA 138 (=pharusa). -- 2. cruel, fierce, pitiless J i.187, 266; ii.204; iv162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh, smooth, pleasant DhsA 397. -- ˚vacata, kind speech, ibid. (=apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚). -- kathā hard speech, cruel words J vi.561. -- kamma cruelty, atrocity J iii.481. -- bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty J iii.480. a˚ absence of hardness or rigidity DhsA 151.
Kakkhaḷatā
Kakkhaḷatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vbh 82; J v.167; DhsA 166. -- akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, 45, 324, 640, 728, 859; DhsA 151; VvA 214 (=saṇha).
Kakkhalatta
Kakkhalatta (nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86; Vbh 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166: kakkhaṭatva.
Kakkhaḷiya
Kakkhaḷiya hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vbh 350.
Kanka
Kanka [Sk. kanka, to sound -- root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala] a heron M i.364, 429; J v.475. -- patta a heron's plume J v.475.
Kankata
Kankata [=kaŋ or kiŋ+kṛta, to kiṇi, "the tinklings"] elephant's trappings VvA 104 (=kappa).
Kankaṇa
Kankaṇa (nt.) [to same root as kanka] a bracelet, orna- ment for the wrist Th 2, 259 (=ThA 211).
Kankala
Kankala [Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa>śṛnga), orig. meaning "chain"] skeleton; only in cpd. atthi˚. Aṭṭhikankal' ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25; M i.130, 364; J v.210; Th 1, 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Th 2, 488 (=ThA 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75): aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi -- puñja aṭṭhi -- rāsi S ii.185= It 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass' aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā PvA 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā J i.433; aṭṭhi -- sanghāṭa Th 1, 60.
Kankuṭṭhaka
Kankuṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha] a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mhvs 32. 6 (see note on p. 355).
Kankhati
Kankhati [Sk. kānkṣ cp. śank, Lat. cunctor] 1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati, with which always combined). Kankhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇesu D i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh's gloss, patthanaŋ uppādati DA i.275, is more edifying than exact.)= Sn 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati S ii.17=iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya S ii.50, 54; iii.122; v.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme˚ sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ A iv.460=v.17=M i.101=Dhs 1004; cp. Dhs. 1118. -- 2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaŋ k. to abide one's time, to wait for death S i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Sn 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); It 69 (id. bhāvitatto). -- J v.411 (=icchati); vi.229 (=oloketi). pp. kankhita S iii.99; Sn 540; (+vicikicchita); inf. kankhituŋ S iv.350=399 (+vicikicchituŋ).
Kankhana
Kankhana (nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; DhsA 259.
Kankhanīya
Kankhanīya [grd. of kankhati] to be doubted S iv.399.
Kankhā
Kankhā (f.) [cp. Sk. kānkṣā] 1. doubt, uncertainty S i.181; iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd2 1); Sn 541, 1149; ˚ŋ vinayati Sn 58, 559, 1025; k. pahīyati Ps ii.62; combd with vimati: D i.105; iii.116; S iv.327; v.161; A ii.79, 160, 185; DA i.274; with vicikicchā: S iv.350; Dhs. 425. Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at D iii.217; 4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; 8 at Nd2 1 & Dhs 1118; 16 at M i.8 & Vism 518. -- 2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in akankha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya S i.181; akhila a. Sn 477, 1059; Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa˚ Sn 514; avitiṇṇa˚ Sn 249, 318, 320 (=ajānaŋ); nikkankha S ii.84 (+nibbicikiccha). -- 3. expectation SA 183. -- On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1. -- cchida removing or destroying doubt Sn 87. -- cchedana the removal of d. J i.98; iv.69. -- ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) D iii.285; A iv.152, 154; v.16; AA 689. -- dhamma a doubting state of mind, doubt D ii.149; S iv.350. -- vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Miln 233; DhsA 352, ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt D iii.288; M i.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -- samangin affected with doubts, having doubts DhsA 259.
-- 175 --
Kankhāyati
Kankhāyati [Denom. fr. kankhā] to doubt, pp. Kankhā- yita Sn 1021.
Kankhāyanā
Kankhāyanā (f.) +kankhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd2 1; Dhs 425, 1004, 1118; DhsA 259.
Kankhin
Kankhin (adj.) [Sk. kānkṣin] 1. doubting, wavering, un- decided, irresolute D ii.241; Sn 1148; Nd2 185; combd with vecikicchin S iii.99; M i.18; A ii.174; Sn 510. -- 2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚). -- akankhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akankha) D ii.241; A ii.175.
Kangu
Kangu (f.) [derivation unknown, prob. non -- Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu] the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet, used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin iv.264; DA i.78. -- Miln 267; Mhvs 32, 30. -- piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of m. meal J vi.581. -- bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile).
Kaca
Kaca [Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51.
Kacavara
Kacavara [to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati) J i.292; iii.163; iv.300; Vism 70; DA i.7; DhA i.52; SnA 311. -- 2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (=pilotikā). -- chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin J i.290. -- chaḍḍanaka a dust pan J i.161 (+ muṭṭhi -- sammjjanī). -- chaḍḍani a dust pan DhA iii.7 (sammajjanī+). -- chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella DhA iv.210.
Kacci & kaccid
Kacci & kaccid (indecl.) [Sk. kaccid=kad+cid, see kad˚] indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense, equivalent to Gr. a)/n, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc., Vin i.158, 350; D i.50 (k. maŋ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; S iii.120, 125; Sn. 335, 354, p. 87; J i.103, 279; v.373; DhA ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā "have you not gone," answer: āma "yes"); PvA 27 (k. tan dānaŋ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piŋḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin. -- Often combd with other indef. particles, e. g. kacci nu Vin i.41; J iii.236; vi.542; k. nu kho "perhaps" (Ger. etwa, doch nicht) J i.279; k. pana J i.103. -- When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi: kaccinnu J ii.133; v.174, 348; vi. 23; kaccissu Sn 1045, 1079 (see Nd2 186).
Kaccikāra
Kaccikāra a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna J vi.535 (should we write with BB kacchi˚?).
Kaccha
Kaccha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.] 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed S i.52 (te hi sotthiŋ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k -- nakha -- lomā with nails and hair like long -- grown grass, cp. same at J iii.315 & Sdhp 104); J v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha -- kacchā tagarā); Sn 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); SnA 33 (pabbata˚ opp. to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (Toev. ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚. -- 2. an arrow (made of reed) M i.429 (kaṇḍo . . . yen' amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaŋ yadi vā ropiman ti).
Kaccha
Kaccha2 (adj.) [ger. of kath] fit to be spoken of A i.197 (Com.=kathetuŋ yutta). akaccha ibid.
Kacchaka
Kacchaka1 a kind of fig -- tree DA i.81. -- 2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35; S v.96; Vism 183.
Kacchati
Kacchati1 Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna A iii.181). -- 2. Pass. of karoti.
Kacchantara
Kacchantara (nt.) [see kacchā2] 1. interior, dwelling, apartment VvA 50 (= nivesa). -- 2. the armpit: see upa˚.
Kacchapa
Kacchapa [Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā] a tortoise, turtle S iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) M iii.169=S v.455; Th 2, 500 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174). -- f. kacchapinī a female t. Miln 67. -- lakkhaṇa "tortoise -- sign," i. e. fortune -- telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna -- vijjā D i.9≈; DA i.94. -- loma "tortoise -- hair," i. e. an impossibility, absurdity J iii.477, cp. sasavisāṇa; ˚maya made of t. hair J iii.478.
Kacchapaka
Kacchapaka see hattha˚.
Kacchapuṭa
Kacchapuṭa [see kaccha1] reed -- basket, sling -- basket, pingo, in -- vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar J i.111.
Kacchā
Kacchā1 (f.) [derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha1] 1. enclosure, denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed, i. e. wall or room: see kacchantara. -- 2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 219=699 (=gīveyyaka VvA); J iv.395 (kacchaŋ nāgānaŋ bandhatha gīveyyaŋ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt, loin -- or waist -- cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319; J v.306 (=saŋvelli); Miln 36; DhA i.389.
Kacchā
Kacchā2 (f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa . . . kacche vīṇaŋ . . . aññissā kacche ālambaraŋ); S i.122=Sn 449 (sokaparetassa vīŋā kacchā abhassatha); It 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J v.434=DhA iv.197 (thanaŋ dasseti k˚ŋ dass˚ nābhiŋ dass˚); J v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha -- kaccha -- nakhaloma means "with long -- grown finger -- nails and long hair in the armpit," e. g. S i.78. -- loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Miln 163 (should probably be read parūḷha -- k. -- nakha -- l., as above).
Kacchikāra
Kacchikāra see kacci˚.
Kacchu
Kacchu [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting] 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin DhA iii.297 (mahā˚ -- phalāni). -- 2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati "to be eaten by itch" (cp. E. itch>eat) Vin i.202, 296; J v.207; Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345; DhA i.299. -- cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens, causing itch DhA iii.297. -- piḷakā scab & boils J v.207.
Kajjala
Kajjala [Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp -- black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).
Kajjopakkamaka
Kajjopakkamaka a kind of gem Miln 118 (vajira k. phus- sarāga lohitanka).
Kañcaka
Kañcaka a kind of tree (dāsima˚) J vi.536 (expld as "dve rukkhajātiyo"). BB have koñcaka.
Kañcana
Kañcana (nt.) [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāñeana, either from khacati (shine=the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk. kāś), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. knhko/s (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical] gold A iii.346= Th 1, 691 (muttaŋ selā va k.); Th 2, 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaŋ va); VvA 4, 9 (=jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds.=of or like gold. -- agghika a golden garland Bu X. 26. -- agghiya id. Bu v.29. -- āveḷā id. J vi.49; Vv 362; Pv ii.127 (thus
-- 176 --
for ˚ācela); iii.93; PvA 157. -- kadalikkhaṇḍa a g. bunch of bananas J vi.13. -- thūpa a gilt stupa DhA iii.483; iv.120. -- patimā a gilt or golden image or statue J vi.553; VvA 168. -- paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet J vi.217. -- patta a g. dish J v.377. -- pallanka a gilt palanquin J i.204. -- bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at VvA 168 by majjita -- kpaṭimā -- sadisa "like a polished golden statue"). -- bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mhvs 34, 74. -- rūpa a g. figure J iii.93. -- latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum J vi.589. -- vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt, shining, bright J v.342 (=paṇḍara). -- velli a g. robe, girdle or waist cloth J v.398 (but expld as "k -- rūpakasadisa -- sarīra "having a body like a g. statue"), cp. J v.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -- sannibha like g., golden -- coloured (cp. k -- vaṇṇa and Sk. kanaka -- varṇa Sp. Av. Ś. i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca "with golden -- coloured skin," Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) D ii.17; iii.143, 159; M ii.136; Miln 75; attr. of a devatā Vv 302, 322; VvA 284; of a bhikkhu Sn 551=Th 1, 821. -- sūci a gold pin, a hair -- pin of gold J vi.242.
Kañcanaka
Kañcanaka (adj.) golden J iv.379 (˚daṇḍa).
Kañcuka
Kañcuka [from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. ka/kala fetter, Sk. kañcuka] 1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306=ii.267; A i.145; DhA iii.295 (paṭa˚ŋ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); PvA 63 (urago tacaŋ kañcukaŋ omuñcanto viya). -- 2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DA i.222. -- 3. armour, coat of mail J v.128 (sannāha˚); DA i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14. -- 4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mhvs i.42.
Kañjaka
Kañjaka N. of a class of Titans PvA 272 (kāḷa -- k˚ -- bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? Cp. Hardy, Manual of Buddhism 59).
Kañjika
Kañjika (nt.) [Sk. kāñjika] sour rice -- gruel J i.238 (udaka˚); Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 (=yāgu VvA 186); DhA i.78, 288; VvA 99 (ācāma -- k˚ -- loṇudaka as expln of loṇa -- sovīraka "salty fluid, i. e. the scum of sour gruel"). Cp. next.
Kañjiya
Kañjiya (nt.)=kañjika; J iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa); DhA ii.3; iv.164. -- teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice -- gruel, used in straightening arrows DhA i.288.
Kaññā
Kaññā (f.) [from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. "newly sprung" from *qen, cp. Gr. kaino/s, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re -- cen(t)s, Ags. hindema "novissimus." See also kaniṭṭha] a young (unmarried) woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111. -- As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya -- kaññā vā . . . pannarasa -- vassuddesikā vā solasa -- vassuddesikā vā . . . M i.88; in combn khattiya -- kaññā, brāhmaṇa -- k˚, etc. A ii.205; iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya -- k˚ J i.60; deva˚ a celestial nymph J i.61. -- dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85.
Kaṭa
Kaṭa1 [Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker -- work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. ka/rtalos, Lat. cratis=E. crate, Goth. haurds, E. hurdle] a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka. -- sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine DhsA 78. -- sāra (DhA i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw -- pine, Pandanus Furcatus J vi.474; v.97; DA i.137; DhA ii.183
Kaṭa
Kaṭa2 another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.: -- aṭṭhika the hip -- bone D ii.296=M i.58, 89=M iii.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at M iii.92 and as v.l. at D ii.296. -- sāṭaka a loin -- cloth J iv.248.
Kaṭa
Kaṭa3=kata [pp. of karoti] in meaning of "original," good (cp. sat); as nt. "the lucky die" in phrase kaṭaggaha (see below). Also in combn with su˚ & duk˚ for sukata & dukkata (e. g. Vin ii.289; DhA iii.486; iv.150), and in meaning of "bad, evil" in kaṭana. Cp. also kali. -- ggaha "he who throws the lucky die," one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase "ubhayattha k." lucky in both worlds, i. e. here & beyond Th 1, 462; J iv.322 (=jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in "ubhayam ettha k." S iv.351 sq. -- Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliŋ gaṇhāti to have bad luck J vi.206 (kaliggaha=parājayasaŋkhāta, i. e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha=jayasankhāta), 228, 282.
Kaṭaka
Kaṭaka (m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet PvA 134.
Kaṭakañcukatā
Kaṭakañcukatā see kaṭu˚.
Kaṭakaṭāyati
Kaṭakaṭāyati=taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34; VvA 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā.
Kaṭacchu
Kaṭacchu [cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163] a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka DhA iv.75, 123; by dabbi PvA 135. Used for butter VvA 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel. -- Vin ii.216; J i.454; iii.277. -- gāha "holding on to one's spoon," i. e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess DhsA 376, cp. Dhs trsl. 300 n2. -- gāhika "spoon in hand," serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna) PvA 135. -- parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118. -- bhikkhā "ladle -- begging," i. e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Th 1, 934; Miln 9; DhA iv.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka -- bhatta) DhA i.379. -- matta (bhatta) "only a spoonful of rice" Miln 8; DhA iv.75.
Kaṭacchuka
Kaṭacchuka (adj.) relating to spoons Vin ii.233.
Kaṭana
Kaṭana (nt.) [from kaṭa, pp. of karoti] an evil deed A iv.172 (v.l.=AA 744 kaṭanaŋ vuccati pāpakammaŋ).
Kaṭallaka
Kaṭallaka [to kaṭa1] a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance J v.16 (dāru˚ expld by dārumaya -- yanta -- rūpaka).
Kaṭasī
Kaṭasī (f.) [prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel -- house, under influence of foll. va(ḍḍh˚), cp. Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse] a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the cemetery" referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana ThA 291. -- vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiŋ ghoraŋ ādiyanti punabbhavaŋ Vin ii.296=A ii.54=Th 1, 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575; Th 2, 502. Also in cpds. ˚vaḍḍhana J i.146; Ud 72=Nett 174; ˚vaḍḍhita S ii.178 sq.= Nd2 664.
Kaṭākaṭa
Kaṭākaṭa see kata i.3.
Kaṭāha
Kaṭāha (m. nt.) [Sk. kaṭāha] a pot [in older texts only as -- ˚]. -- 1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚ Vin ii.122; ghaṭi˚ Vin ii.115; loha˚ Vin ii.170. ayo˚ (in simile "diva -- santatte ayokaṭāhe") M i.453=A iv.138; gūtha˚ Vin iv.265; tumba˚ (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin ii.114; alābu˚ DhsA 405. -- Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mhvs 17, 47; 18, 24. -- 2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚ D ii.297= M i.58; Miln 197.
Kaṭi
Kaṭi [Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. ske/los hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint] hip, waist Vin iii.22, 112; Nd2 659; J iv.32; Miln 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q. v.).
-- 177 --
-- thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back J vi.509. -- padesa the buttocks J iii.37. -- pamāṇa (adj.) as far as the waist J vi.593. -- pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom J ii.275. -- puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips J v.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). -- bhāga the waist J iii.373. -- bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137; iii.49. -- sandhi the joint of the hip Miln 418, Vism 185. -- samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist J v.206. -- sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) PvA 134. -- suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin -- cloth Vin ii.271; also an ornamental waist -- band, girdle Vin ii.107 (see Vin. Texts iii.69, 142, 348).
Kaṭuka
Kaṭuka (adj.) [Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro "cutlet." -- k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha, tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara, opp. madhura, e. g. PvA 119] sharp, bitter, acid, severe. -- 1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc. M i.10=A ii.143; J vi.115; Th 2, 451 (= ThA 281); SA 56. -- painful, terrible, frightful ( -- appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) J iii.519; Pv i.102, 111; iv.18, 76. -- bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Miln 65, 112; J iii.201. -- 2. (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness D ii.349=J i.380; Th 2, 503 (pañca˚); J vi.509. -- Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at VvA 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. J iii.201: tesaŋ taŋ kaṭukaŋ āsi, maraṇaŋ ten' upāgamuŋ. -- udraya causing bitterness or pain J v.241, cp. dukkhudraya J v.119. -- odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159. -- pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dh 324 (=tikhiṇamada DhA iv.13). -- pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant J ii.416=DhA iii.475 (kappūra -- k˚ -- ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka. -- (adj.) of bitter fruit J ii.106 (of the mango); S i.57=J iii.291=Dh 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -- bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices. There are 4 enumd at J iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka, marica, pipphali; 3 at VvA 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp. kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; PvA 135; DhA ii.131. -- bhāva stinginess DhsA 376. -- rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine). -- vipāka (adj.) having a bitter result (of pāpa) Miln 206; compar. ˚tara S ii.128. -- sāsana a harsh command J vi.498.
Kaṭukañcukatā
Kaṭukañcukatā (f.) [der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (DhsA 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vbh we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2. -- Morris' derivation is kaṭa (kar) + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka=kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka "bodice" and meaning "being tightened in by a bodice," i. e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the var. lect. kaṭakuñc˚ is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel -- metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī -- mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is expld by "sankucitaŋ mukhaŋ akāsi" (see kuñcita)] closeness, tightness, close -- fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as "the shrinking up of the heart," which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase "vevicchaŋ kadariyaŋ k. aggahitattaŋ cittassa" in macchariya -- passage at Nd2 614=Dhs 1122 =Pug 19, 23=Vbh 357, 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470.
Kaṭukatta
Kaṭukatta (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Miln 56, 63.
Kaṭumikā
Kaṭumikā (f.) [from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti] artificiality, outward help, suggestion, appld to sati Miln 78, 79 (cp. Miln trsl. i.121 n and MVastu i.477).
Kaṭula
Kaṭula (adj.) [Sk. kaṭura] containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka.
Kaṭuviya
Kaṭuviya (adj.) [kaṭu viya?] impure, defiled, in ˚kata A i.280.
Kaṭerukkha
Kaṭerukkha a kind of creeper J vi.536 (perhaps read as next).
Kaṭeruha
Kaṭeruha a flowering plant J vi.537 (=pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka.
Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha1 [Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha] ploughed, tilled Sn 80; Miln 255; PvA 45, 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well -- ploughed A i.229; Miln 255.
Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha2 (adj.) [Sk. kaṣṭa] bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka. -- anga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) J ii.163= DhA i.144. -- mukha "with the injurious mouth," a kind of snake DhsA 300.
Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha3 (nt.) [Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz] 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood S i.168=Sn 462; M i.234 (+ kaṭhala); PvA 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase "sattussada sa -- tiṇa -- kaṭṭh' odaka sa -- dhañña" (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon's po/lis oi)koume/nh eu)dai/mwn kai\ mega/lh) D i.87, 111, etc. Both sg. (coll.) & pl. as "sticks" D ii.341, esp. in phrase kaṭṭhaŋ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31; Sn p. 104; J ii.144; Pv ii.951 (=PvA 135), or k˚ŋ pāteti (phāṭeti=phāleti? See pāteti) M i.21. Frequent also in similes: M i.241= ii.93=iii.95 (alla k.); M iii.242=S ii.97=iv.215= v.212 (dve k.); A iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa); i.124=Pug 30, 36 (+ kaṭhala). -- 2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) M i.190. <-> 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚ (for scraping) Vin ii.141, 221, and in danta˚ a tooth -- pick VvA 63, etc. (see danta). -- 4. (adj.) in cpds.=of wood, wooden. -- aggi wood -- fire, natural fire A iv.41, 45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -- atthaŋ for the purpose of fuel, in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel A ii.95=S iii.93= It 90=J i.482. -- atthara a mat made of twigs (cp. kaṭasāra) J v.197, also as -- attharika (& ˚kā) J vi.21; DhA i.135; f. at J i.9; iv.329; vi.57. -- kalingara chips and chaff DhA iii.122 (cp. k -- khaṇḍa). -- khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless, trifling DhA i.321 (as expln of niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ); ThA 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraŋ viya). -- tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.162). -- tāḷa a w. gong DhsA 319. -- tumba a w. vessel Vin i.205. -- pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188. -- puñja a heap of w. A iv.72; J ii.327. -- phālaka wood -- cutter Vism 413. -- bhatin a wood -- cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -- mañcaka a wooden bed Miln 366. -- maya wooden Vin i.203; J i.289 = v.435. -- rūpa (& ˚ka) a w. figure, doll J i.287. -- vāha a cartload of fire -- wood S ii.84. -- vāhana riding on a faggot J i.136. -- vipalāvita drifting wood J i.326. -- hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy) DhA i.193. -- hāraka (f. ˚ikā) gathering fire -- wood, an occupation of poor people M i.79; S i.180; J i.134; ii.412; iv. 148; v.417; Miln 331; Vism 120; VvA 173. -- hārin=˚hāraka Vin iii.41; J i.133 (title of J no. 7. referred to at DhA i.349).
Kaṭṭhaka
Kaṭṭhaka1 (m. nt.) [to kaṭṭha3] a kind of reed Dh 164; DhA iii.156 (=velu -- sankhāta -- kaṭṭha).
Kaṭṭhaka
Kaṭṭhaka2 (m. pl.) [to kaṭṭha2] a kind of fairy D ii.261
-- 178 --
Kaṭṭhissa
Kaṭṭhissa (nt.) [Sk.?] a silken coverlet embroidered with gems D i.7=Vin i.192= ii.163; DA i.87=AA 445.
Kaṭhati
Kaṭhati [Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen & Smith) comments on kaṭh with "sosāna -- pākesu." See also kuthati] 1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin i.205, see Vin. Texts ii.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita. Similarly Th 2, 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil. trs. ii.271 "distressed"; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910, 539). -- 2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita (=hot) Miln 323, 325, 357, 397. -- The pp. occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita & ˚kuṭṭhita in cpds uk˚ pa˚ (q. v.). See also kuṭṭhita.
Kaṭhala
Kaṭhala [Sk. kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi] gravel, pebble, potsherd J iii.225; v.417; VvA 157; combd with sakkhara at D i.84=A i.9, and in simile at A i.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at A i.124=Pug 30, 36; A iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261.
Kaṭhalaka
Kaṭhalaka gravel, potsherd J iii.227; Miln 34.
Kaṭhina
Kaṭhina (adj. -- n.) [Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. kratu/s, kratero/s strong, kra/tos strength; Goth. hardus=Ags. heard=E. hard. Cp. also Sk. kṛtsna=P. kasiṇa]. 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff. Cp. ii.2; Dhs 44, 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp. DhsA 151 akaṭhina -- bhāva); PvA 152 (˚dāṭha). -- (fig.) hard, harsh, cruel J i.295=v.448 (=thaddha -- hadaya); adv. ˚ŋ fiercely, violently Miln 273, 274. -- 2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115 -- 117. -- On the k. robe see Vin. i.298 sq.; iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq., 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92. -- attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266; see next. -- atthāra the spreading out, i. e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus. On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin i.254 sq.; Bu ix.7; cp. Vin v.128 sq., 205 -- uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255, 259; iii.262; iv.287, 288; v.177 -- 179, cp. next & Vin. Texts ii.157, 234, 235. -- ubbhāra=˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya "for the suspension of the k. privileges" Vin i.255. -- khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253 -- 267. -- cīvara a k. robe made of k. cloth Bu ix.7. -- dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254. -- maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117. -- rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116. -- sālā=˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116.
Kaṭhinaka
Kaṭhinaka (adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61, 114.
Kaḍḍhati
Kaḍḍhati [dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug -- out. See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv. 1921 p. 465.] 1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug J i.193, 225, 265, 273 (khaggaŋ k. to draw the sword). -- 2. to draw in, suck up (udakaŋ) J iv.141. -- 3. to draw a line, to scratch J. i.78, 111, 123; vi.56 (lekhaŋ).
Kaḍḍhana
Kaḍḍhana (nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Miln 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha's example Mhvs 12, 55.
Kaḍḍhanaka
Kaḍḍhanaka (adj.) pulling, dragging J v.260.
Kaṇa
Kaṇa [Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān= small; Vedic kaṇa] the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder D i.9 (˚homa), expld at DA i.93 by kuṇḍaka. <-> (adj.) made of husk -- powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes J i.423 (k -- pūva=kuṇḍakena pakka -- pūva). -- akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder. characteristic of the best rice Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaŋ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa. -- bhakkha eating husk -- powder, a practice of cert. ascetics D i.166=M i.78=A i.241≈.
Kaṇaya
Kaṇaya [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya=kaṇapa] a sort of spear, lance J i.273; ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird's beak); Miln 339. -- agga the point of a spear J i.329 (like . . ., of a beak).
Kaṇavīra
Kaṇavīra [Sk. karavīra] Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp. Rouse, J. trsl. iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning: diṇṇa -- kalavīla -- dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); DhsA 317; SnA 283; VvA 177; cp. next.
Kaṇavera
Kaṇavera=kaṇavīra J iii.61; iv.191; v.420; vi.406.
Kaṇājaka
Kaṇājaka (nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga -- dutiya; always in this combn except at J v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.9); S i.90, 91; A i.145; iv.392; J i.228; iii.299; DhA iii.10; iv.77; VvA 222, 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at VvA Index p. 364 expl. as "a certain weight"(?)). -- bhatta a meal of k. porridge J v.230.
Kaṇikā
Kaṇikā (f.) [cp. kaṇa] 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) J vi.341, 366 (˚āhi pūvaŋ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in a˚ (adj.) having no moles D i.80, and sa˚ with moles D. i.80 (cp. DA i.223).
Kanikāra
Kanikāra (m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra J iv.440; v.420; the difference stated at J v.422 is kaṇi˚=mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚=khuddakapupphā) [Sk. karṇikāra] -- 1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium J i.40; v.295; vi.269, 537. -- 2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k -- puppha), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at D ii.111 (=pīta)= M ii.14 (ṇṇ)=A v.61 (ṇṇ); DhA i.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) J ii.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256;=golden VvA 65; DhA ii.250 (v. l. ṇṇ). -- makula a k. bud J ii.83.
Kaṇerika
Kaṇerika (nt.) a helmet (?) J vi.397.
Kaṇeru
Kaṇeru (m. f.) [Derivation uncertain, just possibly con- nected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru] a young elephant J ii.342; iv.49; v.39, 50, 416; vi.497; DhA i.196 (v. l.) kareṇukā) -- f. ˚kā M i.178. -- See also kareṇu.
Kaṇṭa
Kaṇṭa (cp. next) a thorn Miln 351.
Kaṇṭaka
Kaṇṭaka [From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka] 1. a thorn Sn 845; Vin i.188; J v.102; vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚. -- 2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. <-> 3. a bone, fish -- bone J i.222; in piṭṭhi˚ a bone of the spine D ii.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); M i.80=245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102. -- 4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance, nuisance ("thorn in my side"); Kvu 572; enemy, infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber D i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp. DA i.296); J i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Th 1, 946; DhA i.177 (akkhimhi); VvA 301. -- 5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions) S iv.189, 195, 198; Ud 24; Kvu 202; cp. sa˚. -- Thus grouped, like saŋyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) A v.134; as "bringing much trouble" J iv.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu -- kaṇṭaka
-- 179 --
stumbling and obstruction A i.35; SnA 334. As abstr. kaṇṭakattaŋ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚). -- akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns J ii.118; v.260. -- 2. (fig.) free from thieves, quiet, peaceful D i.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) A v.135; Vv 187; VvA 96. -- sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) J iv.192, 193. -- 2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous D i.135; thorny, i. e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) S iv.195; Th 2, 352; J v.260. -- Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka. -- âpacita covered with thorns J vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita); -- âpassaya (=kaṇṭak' apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics D i.167=M i.78≈. -- âpassayika (adj. to prec.) "bed -- of -- thorns -- man" D i.167≈. At J i.493 the reading is k -- āpassaya, at iii.74 k -- apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka -- seyyaŋ kappetha (should it be k -- āpassaye seyyaŋ k˚?); D i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā -- passayika. -- ācita covered with thorns J v.167. -- ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge M i.10 (k -- dhāna; for dhāna =ṭhāna see dhāna & cp. rāja -- dhānī); A i.35; Miln 220. -- kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture J iii.41. -- gahana a thorny thicket or jungle S ii.228. -- gumba a th. bush J i.208. -- latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica J v.175. -- vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge M i.448.
Kaṇṭaki
Kaṇṭaki (f.) in cpd. ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154.
Kaṇṭha
Kaṇṭha [*qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus "the turner." Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat, Brh. kaṇṭha] 1. throat A iv.131; J v.448; Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); PvA 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: PvA 99 (k -- oṭṭha -- tālūnaŋ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle's eye, cp. sūcicchidda. v. l. sūcikaṭṭha "whose bones are like needles"), 260 (visukkha -- k -- ṭṭha -- jivhā). -- 2. neck Vin i.15; Dh 307 (kāsāva˚); Vv 6417 (expid at VvA 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi -- ābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e. g. kuṇapaŋ k. āsattaŋ A iv.377; kuṇapaŋ k. baddhaŋ J i.5; k. mālā J i.166, 192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaŋ J iii.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q. v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa -- virala -- mālāya bandhakaṇṭha PvA 4 (cp. AvŚ i.102; ii.182; karavīra -- mālābaddha [sakta ii.182] -- kaṇṭheguṇa). -- kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -- ja produced in the throat, i. e. guttural Sāsv 150. -- suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106.
Kaṇṭhaka
Kaṇṭhaka1 thorn, see kaṇṭaka.
Kaṇṭhaka
Kaṇṭhaka2 N. of Gotama's horse, on which he left his father's palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at J i.54, 62 sq.
Kaṇḍa
Kaṇḍa (m. nt.) [perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. kladaro/s, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa] 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general M i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp. kaṇḍa -- cittaka); J i.150; ii.91; iii.273; v.39; Miln 44, 73; Mhvs 25, 89. As arrow also in the "Tell" story of Culladhanuggaha at J iii.220 & DhA iv.66. <-> 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DA i.12; Pgdp 161. -- 3. a small portion, a bit or lump DhA i.134 (pūva˚); Mhvs 17, 35. -- 4. kaṇḍaŋ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36. -- See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der. upa -- kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī). -- gamana the going of an arrow, i. e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow -- shot J ii.334; cp. kaṇḍu. -- cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa -- citraka) an excellent arrow A ii.202. -- nāḷī a quiver J iii.220. -- pahāra an arrow -- shot, arrow -- wound Miln 16 (ekena k -- paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā "two birds killed with one stone"), 73. -- vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl. to a shield J vi.592 (nt.); a shield J iv.366.
Kaṇḍaka
Kaṇḍaka=kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh.); A iii.383; Bu xiii.29. -- akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure PvA 161.
Kaṇḍarā
Kaṇḍarā (f.) sinew, tendon Vin i.91, 322 (in cpd. kaṇ- ḍara -- cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kvu 23, 31; Vism 253, 254 (where KhA 49 reads miñja).
Kaṇḍita
Kaṇḍita at J i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taŋ kaṇḍinaŋ.
Kaṇḍin
Kaṇḍin (adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) J i.155; (m.) an archer ibid.
Kaṇḍu
Kaṇḍu1 (f.) [perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. knada/ llw to bite, knw/dwn, knw/dalon, etc., Sk. kaṇḍu m. & f.] the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202, 296; J. v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuŋ karoti to make or cause to itch J v.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch J v.199. -- (fig.) worldly attachment, irritation caused by the lusts, in "kaṇḍuŋ saŋhanti" (as result of jhāna) A iv. 437. -- uppala a kind of lotus -- blossom Dāvs iv.48; -- paṭicchādi an "itch -- cloth," i. e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296, 297; iv.171, 172. -- rogin (adj.) suffering from the itch Khus 105.
Kaṇḍu˚
Kaṇḍu˚2 [=kaṇḍa in compn] an arrow -- shot (as measure), in sahassa -- kaṇḍu sata -- bheṇḍu Th 1, 164=J ii.334 (but the latter: sata -- bhedo), expld at Th 1, 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?] -- bhūmako, and at J ii.334 by sahassa -- kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is "sahassa -- kaṇḍagamanaŋ uccaŋ."
Kaṇḍuka
Kaṇḍuka the itch, itchy feeling, irritation J v.198.
Kaṇḍuvati
Kaṇḍuvati (kandūvati) [Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandū- yati] 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205; ii.121; J v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati); DhA iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī). -- 2. to scratch, rub, scrape A ii.207; J vi.413; Pug 56.
Kaṇḍuvana
Kaṇḍuvana (nt.) [fr. kaṇḍūvati] 1. itching, itchy feeling DhA i.440; cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana.<-> 2. scratching, scraping M i.508; J ii.249 (appl. to bad music).
Kaṇḍusa
Kaṇḍusa (nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254, and ˚ka ibid. 290.
Kaṇḍūyana
Kaṇḍūyana (nt.) [See kaṇḍuvana] the itch J v.69.
Kaṇḍolikā
Kaṇḍolikā (f.) a wicker -- basket or stand Vin ii.114, 143 (see Vin. Texts iii.86).
Kaṇṇa
Kaṇṇa [Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi>cakkhu), but as "projection" to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. ko/rus helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus=E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four -- cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer=Gr. a)/kris, a)/kanos, o)cu/s; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa] 1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48, 286; J i.73; iii.42; v.38; vi.519; PvA 74; DhA ii.178; Dāvs ii.111. -- cīvara˚ the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu˚ (catukkaṇṇa) four -- cornered, square, as Ep. of Niraya Nd2 304iii=Pv i.1013 (expld by catu -- koṇa).
-- 180 --
Also of cloth Vin ii.228; J i.426; iv.250. -- 2. the ear Sn 608; J i.146, 194; DhA i.390 (dasā˚). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaŋ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment, e. g. A i.47. -- loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i. e. in a low tone, in a whisper DhA i.166. -- 3. the tip of a spoon J. i.347. -- assakaṇṇa N. of a tree (see under assa3). -- alankāra an ornament for the ear J v.409. -- āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear J ii. 275, 276. -- kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paŋsukita, malaggakita; kita=kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes). -- gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134; Sn 197= J i.146. -- cālana shaking the ears J iii.99. -- cūḷa the root of the ear J vi.488; as ˚cūlikā at J ii.276; Vism 255; DhA iv.13. -- chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci -- chidda eye of the needle) Vin iii.39; J ii.244, 261. -- chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322; Kvu 31. -- cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Miln 197, 290. -- jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98; sa˚ whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -- jappana whispering into the ear D i.11; DA i.97. -- tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil D i.12 (expld at DA i.98, where reading is ˚telanaŋ). -- nāsa ear & nose J ii.117; Miln 5 (˚chinna). -- patta the lobe of the ear J v.463. As ˚panta at ThA 211. -- pāli=˚patta Th 2, 259 (expld by ˚panta). -- piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear DhA i.394. -- puccha the "tail" or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -- bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -- bheri a sort of drum. Cp. ix.24. -- mala "ear -- dirt," ear -- wax, in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. -- mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111. -- muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. PvA 152 chinnakaṇṇa). -- 2. (˚ka) "with blunt corners," N. of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta -- mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at J v.415; Vism 416; DA i.164. -- mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. J i.335; iii.124; loc. fig in a low tone DhA i.173; near, near by DhA ii.8 (mama k.). -- roga a disease of the ear DhsA 340. -- vallī the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -- vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear -- piercing DhA ii.87; cp. mangala. -- vedha (cp. prec.) ear -- piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children J v.167. -- sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear DhA i.148; DhsA 334, in which latter passage ˚ikaŋ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaŋ bhindati (=bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) DhA ii.178 (T. sankhaliŋ, v. l. sakkhaliŋ). -- sankhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it J v.438. -- sandhovika washing the ears A v.202. -- sukha 1. (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable D i.4=M i.179, 268 =A ii.209≈; Miln 1; DA i.75=DhsA 397; -- 2. (nt.) pleasant speech J ii.187; v.167; opp. kaṇṇa -- sūla. -- sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143. -- suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes -- line Vin i.286. -- sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit. stake) in the ear, ear -- ache VvA 243. -- 2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech DhsA 397 (opp. ˚sukha). -- sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika -- sotāni, as ubho sotāni, i. e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) D i.106=Sn p. 108; A iv.86; J ii.359; Miln 286, 357; DhA ii.72.
Kaṇṇaka
Kaṇṇaka (& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having corners or ears ( -- ˚); f. ˚ikā Vin ii.137; J ii.185. -- kāḷa -- kaṇṇika see under kāḷa.
Kaṇṇavant
Kaṇṇavant (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having an (open) ear, i. e. clever, sharp J ii.261 (=kaṇṇachiddaŋ pana na kassaci n'atthi C.).
Kaṇṇikā
Kaṇṇikā (f.) [cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā] 1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa: see below. -- 2. the pericarp of a lotus J i.152, 183; v.416; Miln 361; Vism 124 (paduma˚); VvA 43. -- 3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house -- top J i.201; iii.146, 318, 431, 472; DhA i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚); DA i.43; VvA 304; Bdhd 92. -- 4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle DhA i.98. -- In cpds. kaṇṇika˚. -- baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts DhA i.304. -- maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317; DhA iii.66; vi.178. -- rukkha a tree or log, used to form the top of a house J i.201=DhA i.269. -- lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house -- top D i.9 (=pilandhana -- k˚ pi geha -- k˚ pi vasena DA i.94).
Kaṇṇikāra
Kaṇṇikāra see kaṇikāra.
Kanha
Kanha (adj.) [cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas] dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q. v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k -- sukka dark & bright (about black & white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red -- green and yellow -- blue systems). As such enumd in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at D ii.328=M i.509 sq. =ii.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha). -- II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) J ii.215 (=kāḷa -- sappa C); ˚sappa J i.336; iii.269, 347; v.446; Vism 664 (in simile); Miln 149; PvA 62; ˚sīsā with black heads A iii.241 (kimī). -- 2. of (an abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61, syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. *)apo/llwn *ou)lai_os Samson, etc., see also siniddha -- , nīla -- , kāla -- kesa). sukaṇha -- sīsa with very dark hair J v.205, also as sukaṇha -- kaṇha -- sīsa J v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair J vi.507, cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish J v.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha -- lom' ācitattā). -- 3. of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa -- vartaniŋ agniŋ R. V. viii.23, 19) S i.69=J iii.140 (cp. iii.9); J v.63. <-> 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti "kaṇh -- uttara" black on the surface Vin i.195. -- III. (Applied). 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA 135, cp. Pv iii.64, see also pakkha1 3. -- 2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Māra Sn 355, 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) D i.93 with ref. to the "black -- born" ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dh i.263 kāḷa -- vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory PvA 152. -- 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D iii.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DA i.162; A iii.383 sq. ˚abhijātika "of black birth," of low social grade D iii.251=A. iii.384; Sn 563; cp. Th 1, 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of "evil disposition" at J v.87 (expld as kāḷaka -- sabhāva). -- 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma A v.232=Dh 87; D iii.82; Sn 967; Pug 30; Miln 200, 337; ˚paṭipadā J i.105, and ˚magga the evil way A v.244, 278; ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re -- )birth J iv.9 (+ pāpa -- kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with ˚sukka at A iv. 33; Sn 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚): Miln 37; ˚kamma "black action" M i.39; ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha -- sukka˚, akaṇha -- asukka˚ D
-- 181 --
iii.230=M i.389 sq.=A ii.230 sq.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep. of King Pingala -- netta J ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala -- cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. J v.42; Pv ii.41). -- 2. not evil, i. e. good A ii.230, 231. -- atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7; sukaṇha id. see above ii.2.
Kata
Kata (& sometimes kaṭa) [pp. of karoti] done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaŋ, kusalaŋ, kammaŋ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of "built, prepared, worked out" is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a). I. As verb -- determinant (predicative). -- 1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination "done, made" (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dh 17 (pāpaŋ me kataŋ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaŋ kataŋ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaŋ nagaraŋ kataŋ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ). -- (b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. D i.84=177=M i.40=Sn p. 16 (in formula kataŋ karanīyaŋ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.); Vin iii.72 (kataŋ mayā kalyāṇaŋ akataŋ mayā pāpaŋ); Pv i.55 (amhākaŋ katā pūjā done to us is homage). -- So also in composition (˚ -- ), e. g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) J vi.145; (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him) VvA 24; PvA 4; (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) VvA 331; (tesaŋ) ˚pubba done before D ii.75=A iv.17; (kena) J vi.575; ˚matta (made) drunk Th 1, 199; (cira) ˚saŋsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar J iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj. (med -- passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive: made, or made of; done by= being like, consisting of; or medio -- reflexive: one who has done, having done; also "with" (i. e. this or that action done). -- (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled; kaṭ -- âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa); akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48= ii.209; DA i.78, 98; untrained J iii.57, 58. -- ˚atta selfpossessed, disciplined J vi.296; ˚indiya trained in his senses Th 1, 725; ˚ûpāsana skilled, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62; A ii.48=iv.429; S i.99; J iv.211; Miln 352, ˚kamma practised, skilled J v.243; of a servant S i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief A iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i. e. with) its hood erected, of a snake J vi.166; ˚buddhi of trained mind, clever J iii.58; a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made -- up teeth, an artificial back -- scratcher Vin ii.316; a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106; ˚yogga trained serviceable S i.99; a˚ useless S i.98. ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously J v.317 (expld by ˚jāniya; ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i. e. with) the hair done up into a chignon J v.431; ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62, 98; ii.266; A ii.48; J iv.211,; v.41; vi.448; Miln 353; DhA i.358; a˚ unskilled, awkward S i.98; su˚ well -- trained J v 41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy -- elephant J vi.551. -- (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) J i.167; VvA 252; PvA 10; ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) PvA 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of J iii.400; Mhbv 33; ˚sanketa (one who has made an agreement) J v.436 -- (c) with adverbial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato, puro, atta, sayaŋ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road J vi.293, well built, of a cart Sn 300=304; J iv.395, well done, i. e. good A i.102 (˚kamma -- kārin doing good works). -- dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i. e. evil A i.102 (˚kamma kārin); sukata -- dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) D i.27= 55=S iv.351; Miln 5, 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataŋ that which has been done, the deed. -- (a) absolute: J iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed); v.434 (kataŋ anukaroti he imitates what has been done) kat -- âkataŋ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dh 50. -- (b) with adv. determination (su˚, du˚): sukataŋ goodness (in moral sense) Sn 240; Dh 314; dukkataŋ badness Vin i.76; ii.106; Dh 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Sn 664. II. As noun -- determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings). -- 1. As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i. e. "so and so made or done"; or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be "having become one who has done" (act.: see a), or "to whom has been done" (pass.: see b). -- (a) medio -- active. Temporal: the action being done, i. e. "after." The noun -- determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal -- times, as kat -- anna -- kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta -- kicca after the meal J iv.123; PvA 93; ˚purebhatta -- kicca having finished the duties of the morning DA i.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast J i.227; DhA i.117, a˚ before br. A iv.64; ˚pātarāsa -- bhatta id. J vi.349; ˚ânumodana after thanking (for the meal) J i.304; ˚bhatt'ânumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal PvA 141. In the same application: kat -- okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp. VvA 113); PvA 63; ˚kamma ( -- cora) (a thief) who has just "done the deed," i. e. committed a theft J iii.34; Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their "job" & those who have not); DhA ii.38 (corehi katakammaŋ the job done by the th.), cp. above i.2 a; ˚kāla "done their time," deceased, of Petas J iii.164 (pete kālakate); PvA 29, cp. kāla; ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255, 265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet J iii. 93. ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) VvA 3; ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i. e. after the end was made VvA 250; ˚buddha -- kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha VvA 165, 319; DA i.2; ˚maraṇa after dying, i. e. dead PvA 29; ˚massu -- kamma after having his beard done J v.309 (see note to ii.1 b). -- Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action, i. e. of such habit, or "like, of such character." The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa -- kamma one who has done wrong DhA i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaŋ khīṇ'āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant ii.A) M i.4, 235; It 38; Miln 138; ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava S i.47, 178; Dh 386; Pv ii.615; Th 2, 337, as adj.: kata -- kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Nett 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Miln 339. -- With other determinations: -- āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -- âdhikāra having exerted oneself, one who strives after the right path J i.56; Miln 115. -- âparādha guilty, a transgressor J iii.42. -- âbhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) J i.2; DhA i.135. -- âbhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination J i.110 (& a˚). -- ussāha energetic Sdhp 127. -- kalyāṇa in passage kata -- kalyāno kata -- kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata -- pāpo akata -- luddho (luddo) [: ˚thaddho It] akata -- kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. A ii.174=Vin iii.72=It 25=DhsA 383; PvA 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done J i.137; iii.12; Pv ii.99; akata -- kalyāṇa a man of
-- 182 --
bad actions It 25; Pv ii.79. -- kibbisa a guilty person M i.39; Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77; PvA 59. -- kusala a good man: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- thaddha hard -- hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- nissama untiring, valiant, bold J v.243. -- parappavāda practised in disputing with others DA i.117. -- pāpa an evil -- doer It 25; Pv ii.79 (+ akata -- kalyāṇa); PvA 5; a˚: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- puñña one who has done good deeds, a good man D ii.144; Dh 16, 18, 220; Pv iii.52; Miln 129; PvA 5, 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Miln 250; VvA 94. -- puññatā the fact of having done good deeds D iii.276 (pubbe in former births); A ii.31; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132, 230; J ii.114. -- bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39. -- bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground -- work (of sanctification) Miln 352. -- ludda cruel M iii.165; a˚ gentle Nett 180; cp ˚kalyāṇa. -- vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin J i.467. -- vissāsa trusting, confiding J i.389. -- ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚). -- (b) medio -- passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or "possessed of, afflicted or affected with." In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive. -- Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e. g. kata -- massu -- kamma "having had the beard ( -- doing) done," as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i. e. verb -- derivations). e. g. kat -- âbhiseka "having had the anointing done." -- In this application: ˚citta -- kamma decorated, variegated DhA i.192; ˚daṇḍa -- kamma afflicted with punishment (=daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76; ˚massu -- kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard -- trimming J v.309 (cp. J iii.11 & karana). -- Various combinations: katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Sn 1023; Th 2, 482; J i.17=Bu 24, 27; PvA 50, 141; VvA 78. -- attha one who has received benefits J i.378. -- ânuggaha assisted, aided J ii.449; VvA 102. -- âbhiseka anointed, consecrated Mhvs 26, 6. -- ûpakāra assisted, befriended J i.378; PvA 116. -- okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7; D ii.39, 277; Sn 1030, 1031 (˚âva˚); J v.140; vi.341; Miln 95. -- jātihingulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion J iii.303. -- nāmadheyya having received a name, called J v.492. -- paṭisanthāra having been received kindly J vi.160; DhA i.80. -- pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) PvA 161 (& a˚). -- paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm -- protected Miln 152. -- bhaddaka one to whom good has been done PvA 116. -- sakkāra honoured, revered J v.353; Mhvs 9, 8 (su˚). -- sangaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mhvs 5, 106. -- sannāha clad in armour DhA i.358. -- sikkha (having been) trained Miln 353. -- 2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it, i. e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant, with emphasis of the verb -- notion: "made so & so, used as, reduced to" (garukata=garavita). <-> (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e. g., anabhāva -- kata, kavi˚, kāla -- vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48= ii.209, tāl'āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār'ûpekkhā˚, etc. -- (b) with adjectives, e. g. garu˚, bahu˚. -- (c) with adverbial substitutes, e. g. atta˚, para˚ (paraŋ˚), sacchi˚, sayaŋ, etc.
Kataka
Kataka (nt.) [fr. kantati2] a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129, 143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318.
Kataññu
Kataññu (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtajña] lit. knowing, i. e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i. e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits S ii. 272; A i.87=Pug 26; Vv 8127; Sdhp 509, 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful S i.225; J iii.26 (=kata -- guṇaŋ ajānanto C.), 474; iv.124; PvA 116; Bdhd 81. -- 2. (separate akata -- ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i. e. knowing Nibbāna Dh 97, 383; DhA ii.188; iv.139. -- akataññu -- rūpa (& ˚sambhava) of ungrateful nature J iv.98, 99.
Kataññutā
Kataññutā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness (defined at KhA 144 as katassa jānanatā) Sn 265; J i.122 (T. ˚nā, v. l. ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97; VvA 63; Sdhp 497, 540. In combn with kataveditā S ii.272; A i.61; ii.226, 229. kataññū -- kataveditā J iii.492. -- akataññutā ungratefulness, in combn with akataveditā A i.61; iii.273; J v.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya A ii.226.
Katatta
Katatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaŋ] the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā D ii.213; A i.56; J iii.128; Dhs 431, 654; SnA 356; DhA iii.154; iv.142. Used adverbially in meaning of "owing to, on account of" Miln 275; DhsA 262; Mhvs 3, 40. -- akatattā through non -- performance of, in absence or in default of A. i.56; PvA 69, 154.
Katana
Katana (nt.) [fr. kata] a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) J iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi . . . katanaŋ kataŋ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15.
Katama
Katama (adj.) [cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function=katara, cp. antama > antara, Lat. dextimus>dexter] which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89; M i.7; J i.172; Miln 309; PvA 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e. g. Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); D i.197 (katamo so atta -- paṭilābho?); J i.97; Sn 995; Miln 51. -- instr. katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how? Miln 57, 58.
Katara
Katara (adj.) [Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. po/teros, Lat. uter] which one (of a certain number, usually of two) J i.4; PvA 119. Often only emphatic for ko, e. g. J i.298 (kataraŋ upaddavaŋ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds., as katara -- geha J iii.9; ˚gandhaŋ J vi.336; ˚divasaŋ J ii.251; ˚nagarato (from what city) DhA i.390; ˚nāma (kataraŋnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid. -- katarasmiŋ magge in which way, how? J iv.110.
Katavedin
Katavedin (adj.) [kata + vedin, see kataññu] mindful, grateful S i.225; Pug 26; J i.424; ii.26.
Kataveditā
Kataveditā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness: see katañ- ñutā.
Katāvin
Katāvin (adj. -- n.) [secondary formation fr. kata] one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship S i.14; Miln 264.
Kati
Kati (indecl.) [interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.] how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; S i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments? ), 70; Sn 83, 960, 1018; Ps ii.72; Miln 78; DhA i.7, 188; PvA 74.
Katikā
Katikā (f.) [to katheti or karoti?] 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (T. kātikā), 309; J vi.71; Miln 171, 360. -- 2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp. kathikā & kathā) J ii.449. -- katikaŋ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104, 220, 230; J. i.81; iv.267; DhA i.91; VvA 46. In cpds. katika˚, e. g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ŋ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dh i.8; ˚ŋ bhindati to break an agreement J vi.541; ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76, 208: iii.160.
Katipaya
Katipaya (adj.) [cp. Sk. katipaya] some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) J i.230, 487; iii.280, 419; iv.125; v.162; Pv ii.920 (=appake only a few); DhA i.94 (very
-- 183 --
few); PvA 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (=appikā f.). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns J v.132; vi.52; PvA 135; Mhbv 3.
Katipāhan
Katipāhan (adv.) [katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2] (for) a few days Vin iii.14; J i.152, 298, 466; ii.38; iii.48; iv.147; Mhvs 7, 38; PvA 145, 161; VvA 222. katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mhvs 17, 41; DhA i.344; PvA 13, 161. katipāh'accayena after (the lapse of) a few days J i.245; DhA i.175; PvA 47.
Katima
Katima [num. ord. fr. kati], f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half -- month Vin i.117.
Kativassa
Kativassa (adj.) [kati + vassa] 1. (having) how many years, how old? J v.331. -- 2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu's career) of how many years' seniority? Vin i.86; Ud 59; Miln 28; DhA i.37.
Katividha
Katividha (adj.) [kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā] of how many kinds Vism 84.
Kate
Kate (adv.) [loc. of kata] for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maŋ k. J iv.14; with gen. maŋsassa k. J v.500.
Katta
Katta [pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta] is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari˚.
Kattabba
Kattabba (adj.) [grd. of karoti] 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dh 53; J i.77, 267; v.362. -- 2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Th 1, 330; J ii.154; v.402; DhA i.211. -- akattabba (adj.) not to be done J iii.131; v.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done J v.402. kattabb' âkattabba to be done and not to be done J i.387. kattabba -- yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done DhA i.13. -- 2. (nt.) duty, obligation J iii.9; vi.164; DhA i.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased J i.431. -- Cp. kātabba.
Kattabbaka
Kattabbaka (nt.) [fr. last] task, duty Th 1, 330.
Kattabbatā
Kattabbatā (f.) [fr. kattabba] fitness, duty, that which is to be done J ii. 179 (iti -- ˚āya because I had to do it thus).
Kattar
Kattar [n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ] one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent. Either in verb -- function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e. g. pañhaŋ karoti to put a question, pañhaŋ kattā one who puts a question; or in n. function with gen., e. g. mantānaŋ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja -- kattāro makers of kings. -- II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer: kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words. -- 1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc.) A i.103; ii.67; v.347, 350 sq.; (with gen.) J i.378; iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26, C. akataññū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt!); iv.98 (expld as kata by C); v.258; Miln 25, 296; Bdhd 85 sq. -- 2. an author, maker, creator D i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaŋ); A ii.102; Dh i.111. -- 3. an officer of a king, the king's messenger J v.220 (=225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492. Note. At J v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a -- decl.), cp. also nom. ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla -- katta. -- 4. as t.t.g. N. of the instr. case VvA 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277.
Kattara
Kattara (adj.) (only˚ -- ) [cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning] ˚daṇḍa a walking -- stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188; ii.76=208 sq.; iii.160; J i.9; v.132; vi.52, 56, 520; Vism 91, 125, 181. ˚yaṭṭhi=prec. J ii.441; DA i.207; iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot J iii.299. ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269=DhA i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra -- kūṭe chaḍḍehi).
Kattari & ˚ī
Kattari & ˚ī (f.) [to kantati2] scissors, shears J iii.298, with ref. to the "shears" of a crab, "as with scissors": cp. Vin. Texts iii.138 (see next).
Kattarikā
Kattarikā (f.) [fr. last] scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; J. i.223.
Kattikā
Kattikā (f.) (& ˚kattika) [cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika] N. of a month (Oct. -- Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades. It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika -- puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba -- kattikā, whereas the fifth, K., is also known as pacchima -- kattikā; both are comprised in the term k. -- dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika -- temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k. -- cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k. -- temāsinī; that of Kattika is k. -- cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta. -- Nett 143 (kattiko, v. l. kattikā). -- cātumāsinī see above Vin iii.263. -- coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes, attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -- chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba -- kattikā, and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā J i.433; ii.372; v.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17. -- temāsi ( -- puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261; Mhvs 17, 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī). -- māsa the month K. J ii.372; Mhvs 12, 2 (kattike māse). -- sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mhvs 17, 64.
Kattu˚
Kattu˚ 1. base of inf. kattuŋ (of karoti), in compds ˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vbh 208; Vism 320, 385; DhA iii.289; ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226. ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; VvA 43. -- 2. base of kattar in compn.
Kattha
Kattha (adv.) [der. fr. interr. base ka˚ (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku˚, cp. kuttha] where? where to, whither? Vin i.83, 107; ii.76; D i.223; Sn 487, 1036; J iii.76; Pv ii.916; DhA i.3. -- k. nu kho where then, where I wonder? D i.215 sq., PvA 22 (with Pot.) -- katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other J i.137; v.468; wherever, in whatever place Miln 366; PvA 284; KhA 247; J iii.229; iv.9, 45; as katthacid eva J. iv. 92; PvA 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place J iv.341. -- na k. nowhere M. i.424; Miln 77; VvA 14. -- ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? D ii.241 (corresp. with ettha); J iv.110. -- vāsa in what residence? Sn 412. -- vāsika residing where? J ii.128, 273.
Katthati
Katthati [cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld] to boast Sn 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita.
Katthitar
Katthitar (n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Sn 930.
Katthin
Katthin (adj.) [fr. katth] boasting A v.157 (+ vikatthin).
Katthu
Katthu (?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs J vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚).
Kathaŋ
Kathaŋ (adv.) [cp. Vedic kathaŋ & kathā] dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. PvA 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. J i.222; ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500; PvA 54 (na dassāmi) -- 2. why, for what reason? J iii.81; v.506. Combined with -- ca Vin i.114; ii.83. -- carahi D ii.192. -- nu & -- nu kho Vin ii.26, J iii.99; iv. 339; Nd2 189, see also evaŋ nu kho. -- pana D ii.163. -- su Nd2 189. -- hi J iv.339; DhA i.432. -- hi nāma Vin i.45; ii.105; iii.137; iv.300; all in the same meaning; -- ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Th 1, 456. -- kathā "saying how? how?" i. e. doubt, uncertainty, unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd2 190; D ii.282; Sn 500, 866, 1063, 1088; DhA iv.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. ˚ -- katha, e. g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa -- vicikiccha . . . vesārajjappatta) D i.110=Vin i.12; tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Sn 17, 86, 367. k -- k -- salla "the arrow of doubt" D ii.283
-- 184 --
(vicikicchā +). -- kathin having doubts, unsettled, uncertain D ii.287; M i.8; Nd2 191; DhsA 352; a˚ free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DA i.211: "not saying how and how is this?"); M i.108; It 49; Sn 534, 635, 868, 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa -- vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu D i.71=Pug 59, jhāyī anejo a˚ Dh 414 (: DhA iv.194)=Sn 638. -- kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaŋ no nirayam pateyyaŋ ("ti/ poiw_n maka/rios e)/somai") J iv.339; Sn 376; J iv.75; v.148. -- jīvin leading what kind of life? Sn 181. -- dassin holding what views? Sn 848 (see ˚sīla). -- pakāra of what kind Vin i.358; Sn 241 (:kathappakāra). -- paṭipanna going what way, i. e. how acting? D ii.277, 279, 281. -- bhāvita how cultivated or practised? S v.119. -- bhūta "how being," of what sort, what like D ii.139, 158; -- rūpa of what kind? M i.218; A i.249; iii.35; J iii.525. -- vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? D ii.244. -- vidha what sort of? J v.95, 146; DhsA 305. -- sameta how constituted? Sn 873. -- sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Sn 848 (kathaŋdassī kathaŋsīlo upasanto ti vuccati).
Kathana
Kathana (nt.) [fr. kath, see katheti] 1. conversing, talking J i.299; iii.459; vi.340. -- 2. telling i. e. answering, solving (a question) J v.66 (pañha˚). -- 3. preaching DhA i.7. -- 4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita. -- akathana not talking or telling J i.420; vi.424; not speaking fr. anger J iv.108; DhA i.440. -- ākāra, in ˚ŋ karoti to enter into conversation with J vi.413. -- samattha able to speak (of the tongue) J iii.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiŋ) J vi.340. -- sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous J i.299; a˚ J i.420.
Kathala
Kathala (potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala.
Kathali
Kathali (metri causâ)=next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234
Kathalika
Kathalika (nt.) [der. uncertain], always in combn pād'- odaka pāda -- pīṭha pāda -- k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9, 47; ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At VvA 8 however with pāda -- pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda -- ṭhāpana -- yoggaŋ dārukhaṇḍaŋ āsanaŋ). Bdhgh (on CV ii.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda -- kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaŋsana). the meaning "bowl" seems to be preferable to Bdhgh's forced interpretation as "towel."
Kathā
Kathā (f.) [fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc' âbhilāpa & sallāpa] 1. talk, talking, conversation A i.130; PvA 39. So in antarā˚ D i.179; Sn p. 107, 115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚ low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in, enumd in full at D i.7=178=iii.36 & passim (e. g. S v.419: corr. suddha˚ to yuddha˚!; A v.128=Nd2 192); ref. to at A iii.256; v.185; J i.58; Pug 35. Similarly in gāma˚ Sn 922; viggāhikā k. A iv.87; Sn 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā -- vatthūni) are enumd at M iii.113=A iii.117=iv.357=v.67; Miln 344; similarly dhammī kathā A ii.51; iv.307; v.192; Sn 325; pavattanī k. A i.151; yutta kathāyaŋ Sn 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ŋ k˚ŋ sāraṇīyaŋ vītisāretvā D i.52, 108, etc.; A v.185; Sn 419, pp. 86, 93, 107, 116. -- 2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203, 290 (˚ŋ karoti to discuss); A iii.174; iv. 358. Freq. in anupubbi˚ a sermon in regular succession, graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of "holiness," viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ (see anupubba) Vin i.15; A iii.184; iv.186, 209, 213; DhA i.6; VvA 66. -- 3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚ an account in detail, e. g. PvA 19. bāhira˚ profane story KhA 48. -- 4. word, words, advice: ˚ŋ gaṇhāti to accept an advice J ii.173; iii.424. -- 5. explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚ (q. v.), cp. gati˚ Ps ii.72. -- 6. discussion, in ˚vatthu (see below) Mhvs 5, 138. -- dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk A iii. 181; opp. su˚ A iii.182. -- kathaŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the talk," to dispute sharply J i.404; v.412. ˚ŋ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation J i.119; iv. 73. -- At the end of cpds. (as adj.) ˚kathā e. g. chinna˚ Sn 711; ṭhita˚ DA i.73; madhura˚ J iii.342; vi.255. -- âbhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Miln 78, 79. -- ojja (k˚ -- udya, to vad) a dispute, quarrel Sn 825, 828. -- dhamma a topic of conversation DA i.43. -- nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery J ii.350. -- pavatti the course of a conversation J i.119; DhA i.249; Mhbv 61. -- pābhata subject of a conversation, story J i.252, 364. -- bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity A iv.87. -- magga narrative, account, history J i.2. -- rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Miln 345. -- vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument M i.372; ii.127, 132. There are 10 enumd at A iv.352, 357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa -- mitta, referred to at A v.67, 129; Vism 127; DhA iv.30. Three are given at D iii.220=A i.197. ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion VvA 354. -- 2. N. of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e. g. DA i.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896. -- samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mhvs 5, 138. -- samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation J i.119; iii.278; DhA i.250. -- sampayoga conversational intercourse A i.197. -- sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77; D i.89 sq., 107 sq.; ii.150; M i.178; A ii.197; v.188; Ud 40; J ii.283; Miln 31; DA i.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); DhA ii.91 (˚ŋ karoti) VvA 153.
Kathāpeti
Kathāpeti Caus. ii. of katheti (q. v.).
Kathālikā
Kathālikā(f.) [fr. kuth, to boil] kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (v. l. kathālaka), and meda˚ A iv. 377; DhA ii. 179.
Kathika
Kathika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka] relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta˚ Th 2, 449 (cp. citra -- kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚ A iv.153; dhamma˚ J i.148; iii.342; iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚); as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder A iii.174; Mhvs 14, 64 (mahā˚).
Kathikā
Kathikā (f.) [fr. last?] agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā.
Kathita
Kathita [pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita] said, spoken, related J ii.310; iv.73; v.493. su˚ well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with instr. J iv.72 (tena kathitaŋ the discourse (given) by him).
Kathin
Kathin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. kathika] speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher J i.148 (dhamma -- kathikesu citrakathī); Miln 90, 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaŋ -- kathin.
Katheti
Katheti (v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuŋ & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Miln 22, cp. Trenckner, Notes 122); ppr. Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A. iii.181); grd. kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha, -- 1. to speak, say, tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato PvA 77). mā kathesi (=mā bhaṇi) do not speak PvA 16. -- to tell (a story): J. i.2; iv.137; PvA 12, 13. -- 2. to converse with J. vi.413; PvA 86 (=āmantayi). -- 3. to report, to inform J v.460. -- 4. to recite DhA i.166. -- 5. to expound, explain, preach J i.30; Miln 131; DhA i.88; Nd2 s. v. -- 6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin ii.168. -- 7. to refer to J i.307. -- 8. to answer or solve (a question) J i.165; v.66. -- Caus ii. kathāpeti to make say Mhvs 24, 4 (aor. kathāpayi); DhA ii.35; KhA 118.
Kad˚
Kad˚ [old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiŋ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaŋ =kiŋarthaŋ to what purpose] orig. "what?" used adverbially; then indef. "any kind of," as (na) kac( -- cana) "not at all"; kac -- cid "any kind of; is it anything? what then?" Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚ (in denoting badness or
-- 185 --
smallness, e. g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra & kappaṭa), kiŋ˚, ku.˚ For relation of ku>ka cp. kutra> kattha & kadā. -- anna bad food Kacc 178. -- asana id. Kacc 178. -- dukkha (?) great evil (=death) VvA 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka).
Kadamba
Kadamba (cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange -- coloured, fragrant blossoms) J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206; DhA i.309 (˚puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.).
Kadara
Kadara (adj.) miserable J ii.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira).
Kadariya
Kadariya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (PvA 102; DhA iii.189, 313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka S i.34, 96; A ii.59; iv.79 sq.; Dh 177, 223; J v.273; Sn 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e. g. i.93; ii.77; iv.148; PvA 25, 99, 236. -- (nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Sn 362 (with kodha).
Kadariyatā
Kadariyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] stinginess, niggardliness D ii.243; Miln 180; PvA 45.
Kadala
Kadala (nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335.
Kadalī
Kadalī1 (f.) [Sk. kadalī] -- 1. the plantain, Musa sapien- tium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality, transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: S i.154=Vin ii.188=S ii.241=A ii.73 =DhA iii.156; cp. Miln 166; -- as an image of unsubstantiality, Cp. iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: J i.11; vi.590 (in simile), 592; VvA 31. -- 2. a flag, banner, i. e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners ( -- dhaja) J v.195; vi.412. In cpds. kadali˚. -- khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e. g. M i.233= S iii.141=iv.167; Vism 479; Nd2 680 Aii.; J vi.442; as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs VvA 280; -- taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49; -- toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -- patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from J v.4; DhA i.59; -- phala the fruit of the plantain J v.37.
Kadalī
Kadalī2 (f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga J v.406, 416; vi.539; DA i.87; and ˚pavara -- pacc.<-> attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163, 169; sim. D. ii.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) A i.137=iii.50=iv.394.
Kadā
Kadā (indecl.) [Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th 1, 1091 -- 1106; J ii.212; vi. 46; DhA i.33; PvA 2. -- Combd with -- ssu J v.103, 215; vi.49 sq. -- ci [cid] indef. -- 1. at some time A iv.101. -- 2. sometimes J i.98; PvA 271. -- 3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30. -- 4. perhaps, may be J i.297; vi.364. + eva: kadācideva VvA 213; -- kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then J i.216; iv. 120; DhsA 238; PvA 253. -- kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times A i.179; Miln 73; DhA iii.362. -- na kadāci at no time, never S i.66; J v.434; vi.363; same with mā k˚ J vi.310; Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana. -- kadāc<-> -- uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Miln 114.
Kaddama
Kaddama [Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth Nd2 374 (=panka); J i.100; iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; PvA 189 (=panka), 215; compared with moral impurities J iii.290 & Miln 35. a˚ free from mud or dirt, clean Vin ii.201, of a lake J iii.289; fig. pure of character J iii.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J vi.59 (kilesehi). -- odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -- parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence J vi. 390; -- bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud DhA i.333;
Kanaka
Kanaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. knh_kos yellow; Ags. hunig=E. honey. See also kañcana] gold, usually as uttatta˚ molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu i.59; Pv iii.32; J v.416; PvA 10 suvaṇṇa). -- agga gold -- crested J v.156; -- chavin of golden complexion J vi.13; -- taca (adj.) id. J v.393; -- pabhā golden splendour Bu xxiii.23; -- vimāna a fairy palace of gold VvA 6; PvA 47, 53; -- sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i. e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30.
Kaniṭṭha
Kaniṭṭha (adj.) [Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaññā] younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger); J ii.6; PvA 42, 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, ˚ka) J i.132; DhA i.6, 13; Mhvs. 9, 7; PvA 19, 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder & younger brothers J i.253; sabba -- k. the very youngest J i.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter DhA i.396. -- fig. later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188. -- akaniṭṭha "not the smaller" i. e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) S v.237= 285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487.
Kaniṭṭhaka
Kaniṭṭhaka (adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) A iv.93=J ii.348; DhA i.152; the younger brother Mhvs 5, 33, 8, 10; 35, 49; 36, 116; -- ˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mhvs 1, 49; Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā).
Kaniṭṭhatta
Kaniṭṭhatta (nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) DhA i.152.
Kaniṭṭhī
Kaniṭṭhī (f.) a younger sister Mhvs 7, 67.
Kaniya
Kaniya (adj.) [compar. of kan˚, Sk. kanīyaŋs] younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian's construction, not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā=kaññā).
Kanta
Kanta1 [Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti] -- 1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma, kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form. iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses S i.245; ii.192; iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; M i.85; Sn 759; It 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337; bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Sn 399.<-> D ii.265; iii.227 (ariya˚); J iii.264; v.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kvu 35, 211, PvA 277 (hatthi -- ) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta DhA i.163; of vīṇā J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 2. beloved by, favourite of, charming J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband J vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Miln 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya˚, canda˚ -- kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife J v.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably, with kind words A ii.213; J v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak' ante). -- a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e. g. D ii.192; in other combn J v.295; Vbh 100; Nett 180; PvA 193. -- akantena with unpleasant words A ii.213. -- kantatara compar. J iii.260. -- bhāva the state of being pleasant DA i.76; VvA 323.
Kanta
Kanta2 [pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogy- form. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.] cut, cut out or off Th 2, 223 (˚salla=samucchinna -- rāg' -- ādisalla ThA 179) cp. katta & pari˚.
-- 186 --
Kantati
Kantati1 [Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate] to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaŋ (thread) Vin iv.300; PvA 75; DhA iii.273; kappāsaŋ A iii.295. Cp. pari˚.
Kantati
Kantati2 [Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. kei/rw, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu] to cut, cut off J ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154; DhA iii.152 (+ viddhaŋseti).
Kantāra
Kantāra (adj. n.) [perhaps from kad -- tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra] difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa VvA 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru˚ PvA 99 and marukantāramagga PvA 112; opp. khemantabhūmi. Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated: cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha˚ J i.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd2 630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚, nirudaka˚. The term is used both lit. & fig. (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties, hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas) freq. in Pv (see above), also J i.395. As diṭṭhi˚ in pass. diṭṭhi -- gata, etc. M i.8, 486, Pug 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti). -- addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (fig.)Th 1, 95~D i.73= M i.276; -- paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i. e. a forester J iii.537. -- magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) J ii.294 (lit.); in simile: S ii.118. -- mukha the entrance to a desert J i.99.
Kantāriya
Kantāriya (adj.) [from kantāra] (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (=VvA. 341).
Kantika
Kantika1 (adj.) [to kantati1] spinning PvA 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo).
Kantika
Kantika2=kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (=PvA 193).
Kantita
Kantita1 [Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1] spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300.
Kantita
Kantita2 (adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Miln 240 better as kantita1, i. e. spun.
Kanda
Kanda [Sk. kanda] a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. J i.273; iv.373; vi.516; VvA 335; ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) D i.101; a bulbous root J v.202.
Kandati
Kandati [Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. kale/w, ke/lados, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout] to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dh 371; Vv 8312; J vi.166; Miln 11, 148; freq. of Petas: PvA 43, 160, 262 (cp. rodati). -- In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiŋ k. M. i.86=Nd2 s. v.; A iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iŋ v. l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237; ii.284; J v.267.
Kandana
Kandana (nt.) [Sk. krandana] crying, lamenting PvA 262
Kandara
Kandara [Sk. kandara] -- 1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76, 146; used as a dwelling -- place Th 1, 602; J i.205; iii.172. <-> 2. a glen, defile, gully D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; A iv.437; Miln 36; expld at DA i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. "kaŋ vuccati udakaŋ; tena dāritaŋ"). k -- padarasākhā A i.243=ii.240; PvA 29.
Kandala
Kandala N. of a plant with white flowers J iv.442. -- ma- kuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews).
Kandaḷa
Kandaḷa N. of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb D i.264.
Kandita
Kandita (adj.) [pp. of kandati] weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping J iii.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation J iii.57; Miln 148.
Kanna
Kanna (adj.) [Sk. skanna] trickling down J v.445.
Kannāma
Kannāma=kinnāma J vi.126.
Kapaṇa
Kapaṇa (adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn=E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra] -- 1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq. expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low -- caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv. iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Sn 818; J i.312, 321; iii.199; Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52; DA i.298; DhA i.233; ThA 178. -- 2. small, short, insignificant A i.213; Bdhd 84. (f.) ˚ā a miserable woman J iv.285; -- ˚an (adv.) pitifully, piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. J iii.295; v.499; vi.143; a˚ not poor J iii.199; -- ati˚ very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315. -- addhikā pl. often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa -- k˚ -- vaṇibbaka -- yācakā (e. g. D i.137; PvA 78) beggars and wayfarers, tramps J i.6, 262, DhA i.105, 188 (written k˚ -- andhika); see also DA i.298 and kapaṇikā; -- iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp. Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) D i.137; It 65; DA i.298; -- itthī a poor woman J iii.448; -- jīvikā in ˚aŋ kappeti to make a poor livelihood J i.312; -- bhāva the state of being miserable PvA 274; -- manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -- laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children J vi.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -- visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -- vuttin leading a poor life PvA 175.
Kapaṇikā
Kapaṇikā (f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Th 2, 219; ThA 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā J vi.93.
Kapalla
Kapalla at Vin i.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp -- black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).
Kapalla
Kapalla (nt.) [Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head]<-> 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla. -- 2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes J i.8; vi.66, 75; DhA i.288. -- 3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra -- kapalla) Sn 672. -- kapalla is only a variant of kapāla. -- pāti an earthen pot, a pan J i.347=DhA i.371; -- pūva a pancake J i.345; DhA i.367; VvA 123; Mhvs 35, 67.
Kapallaka
Kapallaka -- 1. a small earthen bowl J vi.59; DhA i.224. -- 2. a frying pan J i.346.
Kapāla
Kapāla (nt.) [Sk. kapāla, see kapalla] -- 1. a tortoise- or turtle -- shell S i.7=Miln 371; S iv.179; as ornament at DA i.89. -- 2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. <-> 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e. g. A iv.70; Nd2 304iii; VvA 335) J ii.352; Vv 845; DhA i.148 (v. l. ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile). -- 4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics S iv.190; v.53, 301; A i.36; iii.225; J i.89; PvA 3. -- 5. a potsherd J ii.301. -- ābhata the food collected in a bowl A i.36; -- khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd J ii.301; -- hattha "with a bowl in his hand," begging, or a beggar, Th 1, 1118; J i.89; iii.32; v.468; PvA 3.
Kapālaka
Kapālaka -- 1. a small vessel, bowl J i.425. -- 2. a beggar's bowl J i.235; DhA ii.26.
Kapāsa
Kapāsa=kappāsa, q. v. Dāvs ii.39.
Kapi
Kapi [Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota] a monkey (freq. in similes) Sn 791; Th 1, 1080; J i.170; iii.148, cp. kavi. -- kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit PvA 86; -- citta "having a monkey's mind," capricious, fickle J iii.148=525; -- naccanā Npl., Pv iv.137; -- niddā "monkey -- sleep," dozing Miln 300.
Kapiñjala
Kapiñjala [Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala] a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kvu 268; J vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara).
-- 187 --
Kapiṭhana
Kapiṭhana the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv. 35.
Kapiṭṭha
Kapiṭṭha and ˚ttha -- 1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood -- apple tree J vi.534; Vism 183 (˚ka); Mhvs 29, 11; -- 2. ˚ŋ (nt.) the wood apple Miln 189; -- 3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in J i.237; kapitthaka S v.96.
Kapitthana
Kapitthana=kapiṭhana J ii.445; vi.529, 550, 553; v. l. at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka.
Kapila
Kapila (adj.) [Sk. kapila, cp. kapi] brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard VvA 222; ˚ā f. a brown cow DhA iv.153.
Kapisīsa
Kapisīsa [Sk. kapiśīrṣa] the lintel of a door D ii.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) -- ˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120, 148 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.106 n3).
Kapota
Kapota [Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi) -- 1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove J i.243; Miln 403; -- 2. (f.) ˚i a female pigeon PvA 47; ˚ka (f. ˚ikā Miln 365) a small pigeon J i.244. -- pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon's foot J i.9.
Kapola
Kapola [Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning "hollow"] the cheek Vism 263, 362; DhA i.194.
Kappa
Kappa (adj. n.) [Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & forma- tion] anything made with a definite object in view, prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper. See also DA i.103 & KhA 115 for var. meanings. -- I Literal Meaning. -- 1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) (=kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Th 1, 251, ˚kovido Mhvs 15, 16; Sn 911; as juice Miln 161. <-> ( -- ˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚); Sn 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Sn 16; Miln 105; -- a˚ incomparable Mhvs 14, 65; -- 2. (nt.) a fitting, i. e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (VvA 104); -- a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255; iv.227, 286: also fig. a making -- up (of a trick): lesa˚ DA i.103; VvA 348. -- II. Applied Meaning. <-> 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice, manner Vin ii.294, 301 (:kappati singiloṇa -- kappo "fit is the rule concerning . . ."); cp. Mhvs 4, 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation, VvA 265; -- 2. (temporal) a "fixed" time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DA i.103 (cp.kappaŋ); as a cycle of time=saŋsāra at Sn 521, 535, 860 (na eti kappaŋ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109; Miln 108; Sdhp 256, 257; PvA 21; It 17=Bdhd 87=S ii.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asankheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā˚ consists of 4 asankheyya -- kappas, viz. saŋvaṭṭa˚ saŋvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ A ii.142; often abbreviated to saŋvaṭṭa -- vivaṭṭa˚ D i.14; It 15; freq. in formula ekampijātiŋ, etc. Vin iii.4=D iii.51, 111= It 99. On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past & future kappas see D i.12 sq. paṭhama -- kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) J i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā -- kappa is understood: DA i.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Sn pp. 18=46~125; Sn 517; also dīgha˚ S ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S ii.181 & DA i.164=PvA 254. -- acc. kappaŋ adv.: for a long time D ii.103=115= Ud 62, quot. at DA i.103; Vin ii.198; It 17; Miln 108; mayi āyukappaŋ J i.119, cp. Miln 141. Cp. sankappa. -- âtīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Sn 373. -- âvasesaŋ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaŋ vā k -- âvasesaŋ vā D ii.117=A iv.309=Ud 62; Miln 140: -- āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs v.87; -- uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -- aggi the fire which destroys the Universe J ii.397; iii.185; iv.498; v.336; vi.554; Vism 304; -- kāla the time of the end of the world J v.244; -- uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world J i.4=Vism 415; -- kata on which a kappa, i. e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; iv.227, 286; DA i.103; -- (ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind, free from saŋsāra, an Arahant Sn 1101 (but expld at Nd2 s. v., see also DA i.103, as free from dve kappā: diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚). -- jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs i.61. -- ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i. e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko + atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202, 206; A iii.402 ~iv.160; It 11~85. -- ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle, of a vimāna Th 1, 1190. -- ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon: kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198=204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254) sālarukkha J v.416; see also ṭhitakappiŋ Pug 13. -- ṭṭhitika id. DhA i.50 (vera); Miln 108 (kammaŋ). ("sabbe pi magga -- samangino puggalā ṭhita -- kappino.") -- ṭṭhiya -- =prec. A v.75; J i.172, 213; v.33; Miln 109, 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet -- tree in the abode of the Asuras J i.202; -- nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) J v.272; -- parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59; -- pādapa= ˚rukkha Mhbv 2; -- rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. J vi.117, 594; Vism 206; PvA 75, 176, 121; VvA 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); DhA iv.208; -- latā a creeper like the kapparukkha VvA 12; -- vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) DhA iii.362; -- samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic J vi.60 (cp. samaṇa -- kappa); -- halāhala "the k -- uproar," the uproar near the end of a kalpa J i.47.
Kappaka
Kappaka [fr. kḷp, kappeti] a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DA i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182; D i.51 (=DA i.157, in list of various occupations); J i.60, 137; iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of "bathed," cp. expl. ad i.106) DhA i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser). -- jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, "black" birth PvA 176.
Kappaṭa
Kappaṭa [kad -- paṭa=ku -- paṭa] a dirty, old rag, torn gar- ment (of a bhikkhu) Th 1,199.
Kappatā
Kappatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kappa] fitness, suitability DA i.207.
Kappati
Kappati [Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate] to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person D ii.162; Vin ii.263, 294; iii.36; Th 1,488; Mhvs 4, 11; 15, 16.
Kappana
Kappana (nt.) [fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana] the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed. 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse's harness, harnessing, saddling J i.62; -- 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) procuring, making: jīvika˚; a livelihood J iii.32; putting into order; danta˚ J i.321; -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) trimmed, arranged with: nānāratana˚ VvA 35.
Kappara
Kappara [cp. Sk. kūrpara] the elbow Vin iii.121=iv.221; J i.293, 297; DhA i.48, 394; VvA 206.
Kappāsa
Kappāsa [cp. Sk. karpāsa] 1. the silk -- cotton tree J iii.286; vi.336. -- 2. cotton D ii.141; A iii.295; S v.284; J i.350; vi.41; comb. w. uṇṇa A iii.37= iv.265=268. -- aṭṭhi a cotton seed DhA iii.71; -- paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -- picu cotton S v.284; J v.110, 343; vi.184: -- maya made of cotton PvA 77.
Kappāsika
Kappāsika (adj.) made of cotton D ii.188, cp. A iv.394; D ii.351; Vin i.58=97= 281; J vi.590; Pv ii.117. (nt) cotton stuff Miln 267. -- paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally
-- 188 --
Vin i.201; -- sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff D ii.188; A iv.394; Miln 105.
Kappāsī
Kappāsī (f.) [=kappāsa] cotton J vi.537; PvA 146.
Kappika
Kappika ( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚ -- kāla the time of thé first Age DA i.247; Vbh 412 (of manussā); VvA 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at J i.222; as noun the men of the first Age J ii.352. -- 2. In cpds. . . . pubbanta˚ and aparanta˚ the ika˚ belongs to the whole cpd. D i.39 sq.; DA i.103. See also kappiya 2.
Kappita
Kappita [pp. of kappeti] 1. prepared, arranged, i. e. har- nessed D i.49; J vi.268; i. e. plaited DA i.274; i. e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu "with hair & beard trimmed" D ii.325; S iv.343; J v.173, 350; vi.268; Vv 731. <-> 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living J v.270; made ready, drawn up (in battle array) D ii.189; <-> 3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247. -- su˚ well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601.
Kappin
Kappin (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Sn 1090; -- 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pug 13; in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DA i.164=PvA 254.
Kappiya
Kappiya (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (PvA 26=anucchavika paṭirūpa) J i.392; DA i.9; PvA 25, 141. -- a˚ not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45, 211; ii.118; iii.20; (nt) that which is proper A i.84; Dhs 1160; -- a˚ ibid; -- kappiyâkappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not J i.316; DA i.78. <-> 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i. e. temporal, of time, subject to saŋsāra; of devamanussā Sn 521; na+of the Muni Sn 914. In another sense ("belonging to an Age") in cpd. paṭhama ˚ -- kāla the time of the first Age J ii.352. -- a˚ delivered from time, free from saŋsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Sn 860; cp. Miln 49, 50. See also kappika. -- ânuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Nett 192. -- kāraka "one who makes it befitting," i. e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206; -- kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra, wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139; ii.159; -- dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DA i.78 (v. l. BB ˚kāraka); -- bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus J i.41; DhA i.412. a˚ thing unauthorised Vin. ii.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192; -- bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi); -- lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one's own purpose VvA 348; -- saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) A i.84; a˚ opp. ibid. -- ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160; a˚ opp. ibid.
Kappu
Kappu (nt.)=kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, D i.54; DA i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332; PvA 254).
Kappūra
Kappūra (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. karpūra] camphor: (a) the plant J vi.537. -- (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala) J ii.416=DhA iii.475; Miln 382; Dāvs v.50.
Kappeti
Kappeti [Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep caus. from. fr. *qṷer=Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti] to cause to fit, to create, build, construct, arrange, prepare, order. I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i. e. harness: J i.62; plait DA i.274, an offering (yaññaŋ) Sn 1043; i. e. to trim etc. M ii.155; J i.223; Mhvs 25, 64. 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc. (=Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaŋ to keep one's composure Th i.570; J v.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaŋ: to lead one's life PvA 3, 4, 13; divāvihāraŋ to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajjaŋ to sit down Vin iii.191; vāsaŋ, saŋvāsaŋ to make one's abode D ii.88; Sn 283; PvA 36, 47; saŋvāsaŋ to have (sexual) intercourse with J iii.448; Mhvs 5, 212; PvA 6; seyyaŋ: to lie down, to make one's bed Pug 55 etc. (acelaka -- passage=D i.166). II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Sn 799; DA i.103; -- 2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine J v.238 (=say vidahati) -- Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e. g. Vin ii.134 (massuŋ k. to get one's beard done); J v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant -- cars); DA i.147 (pañca hatthinikā -- satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass. kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed J i.62.
Kabara
Kabara (adj.) [cp. Sk. kabara] variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) DhA i.71 (˚go -- rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha) J v.106; of a dog (˚vaṇṇa=sabala q. v.) J vi.107; of leprosy J v.69; of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp. sanda˚) M i.75; J iv.152; DhA i.375. -- kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster J i.273; -- kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy J v.69; -- maṇi the cat's eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla, but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat's eye VvA 167, 304.
Kabala
Kabala (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ālopa), 298, 470] a small piece (=ālopa PvA 70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin ii.214; It 18=J iii.409; iv.93; Dh 324; Miln 180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA ii.65; PvA 39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J i.68; Miln 231; -- sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195; -- Sometimes written kabala. -- âvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214; iv.196.
Kabalinkāra
Kabalinkāra (adj.) [kabala in compn form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚] always in combn with āhāra, food "made into a ball," i. e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā . . . at M i.48= S ii.11, 98=D iii.228, 276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, 646 (where fully described), 816; Miln 245; Vism 236, 341, 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DA i.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh. MSS.; s. also Nett 114 -- 118. -- āhāra -- bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food D i.34, 186, 195; -- bhakkha, same A iii.192=v.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DA i.120.
Kabaḷikā
Kabaḷikā (f.) [cp. Sk. kavalikā] a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.58 n4).
Kabba
Kabba (nt.) [cp. Sk. kāvya] a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ŋ karoti to compose a song J vi.410; -- karaṇa making poems DA i.95; and -- kāra a poet Kh 21; J vi.410.
Kabya
Kabya=kabba in cpds. ˚âlankāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ŋ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -- kāraka a poet, ibid.
Kama
Kama [fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama ( -- ˚) step, in uru˚, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505] -- 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth'âvihatakkama "having a course on all sides unobstructed" Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also
-- 189 --
Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚, pahānak˚, desanāk˚) -- 2. oblique cases (late and technical) "by way of going," i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs i.30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaŋ Bdhd 96. -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (= catuppāda) Pv i.113.
Kamaṇa
Kamaṇa a step, stepping, gait J v.155, in expln J v.156 taken to be ppr. med. -- See san˚.
Kamaṇḍalu
Kamaṇḍalu (m., nt.) [etym. uncertain] the waterpot with long spout used by non -- Buddhist ascetics S i.167; J ii.73 (=kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570; Sn p. 80; DhA iii.448 -- adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚?] "with the waterpot" A v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.).
Kamati
Kamati [kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna S i.33; Sn 176; Intens. cankamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn 176; ariye pathe S i.33; ākāse D i.212=M i.69=A iii.17; -- 2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter M ii.18; J vi.107; Pv i.12 (saggaŋ) -- (II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M i.186; J v.198; Miln 198; -- 2. to plunge into, to enter into A ii.144; <-> 3. impers. to come to (c. dat) S iv.283.
Kamatthaŋ
Kamatthaŋ (adv.) [kaŋ atthaŋ] for what purpose, why? J iii.398 (=kimatthaŋ).
Kamanīya
Kamanīya (adj.) [grd of kāmayati] (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely J v.155, 156; Miln 11; (b) pleasant, sweet ( -- sounding) D ii.171; J i.96. -- As nt. a desirable object S i.22.
Kamala
Kamala (nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala J i.146; DA i.40, expld as vārikiñjakkha PvA 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium J i.146; DA i.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; VvA 43, 181, 191; PvA 23, 77; -- At J i.119, 149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at J i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained. -- 2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vin. Texts ii.23 n.) -- 3. f. kamalā a graceful woman J v.160; -- komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus -- like (soft) hands Mhbv 29; -- dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3; Bdhd 19; DhsA 127; VvA 35, 38. -- -- pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190.
Kamalin
Kamalin (adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī -- kāmuka "the lover of lotuses," Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred).
Kampa
Kampa ( -- ˚) [fr. kamp] trembling, shaking; tremor DA i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; a˚ (adj.) not trembling, unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mhvs 15, 175.
Kampaka
Kampaka (adj.) [fr. kampa] shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Miln 343 (paṭhavi˚).
Kampati
Kampati [kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kam- panto, kampaŋ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus. kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs xvii.51; ger. kampayitvāna D ii.108; J v.178] -- to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; J i.23; Sn 268 (expl. KhA 153: calati, vedhati); Bdhd 84; -- Cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚. -- kampamāna (adj.) trembling J iii.161; agitated, troubled (˚citta) J ii.337; a˚ not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast J vi. 293.
Kampana
Kampana [fr. kamp] 1. adj. causing to shake DhA i.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake J i.26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) J iii.163. -- rasa (adj.) "whose essence is to tremble," said of doubt (vicikicchā) DhsA 259.
Kampin
Kampin (adj.) [fr. kampa] see vi˚.
Kampiya
Kampiya (adj.) [grd. of kampati] in a˚ not to be shaken, immovable, strong Th 2, 195; Miln 386; (nt.) firmness, said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DA i.64.
Kampurī
Kampurī (va.) at Th 2, 262 is to be corr. into kambu -- r -- iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76).
Kambala
Kambala (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kambala] 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From J iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras, together w. koseyya & kappāsika at Vin i.58=96, also at A iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e. g. DA i.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Sn 689; Bdhd 1. -- Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281; ii.174; see further J i.43, 178, 322; iv.138; Miln 17, 88, 105; DhA i.226; ii.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair<-> (blankets, i. e.) garments viz. kesa˚ and vāla˚ mentioned Vin i.305=D i.167=A i.240, 295. -- 3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts ii.23); J vi.340; -- 4. a tribe of Nāgas J vi.165. -- kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74; -- kūṭâgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth, used as funeral pile DhA i.69; -- pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190; -- puñja a heap of blankets J i.149; -- maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); -- ratana a precious rug of wool J iv.138; Miln 17 (16 ft. long & 18 ft. wide); -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i. e. red J v.359 (˚maŋsa); -- silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone -- seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka DhA i.17; -- sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff D ii.188=A iv.394; Miln 105; -- sutta a woollen thread J vi.340.
Kambalin
Kambalin (adj.) [fr. kambala] having a woollen garment D i.55; ii.150.
Kambalīya
Kambalīya (nt.) [fr. kambala] (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. PvA 77).
Kambu
Kambu [cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha=śankha; Dhtp. saŋvaraṇe] 1. a conch, a shell: saṇha -- kambu -- r -- iva . . . sobhate su gīvā Th 2, 262 (for kampurī'va); s. cpds. -- 2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) J iv.18, 466 (+kāyūra); Pv ii.127, iii.93 (=PvA 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (=VvA 167 hatth'âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.); -- 3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at VvA 167, so also expl. at J iv.18, 130; J v.400. -- gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i. e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky J iv.130 (=suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1; -- tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck J v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā, expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala -- sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness J v.204, 207; -- pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet VvA 167.
Kambussa
Kambussa [fr. preceding] gold or golden ornament (bracelet) J v.260, 261 (: kambussaŋ vuccati suvaṇṇaŋ).
Kambojaka
Kambojaka (adj.) coming fr. Kamboja J iv.464 (assatara).
Kambojā
Kambojā (f.) N of a country J v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, 334, 336.
-- 190 --
Kamboji
Kamboji (m., nt.) [meaning & etym. unexpld] the plant Cassia tora or alata J iii.223 (˚gumba=elagalāgumba; vv. ll. kammoja˚ & tampo˚ [for kambo˚]).
Kamma
Kamma (nt.) [Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending ˚man=Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman=Gr. dh=ma, Sk. nāman=Lat nomen] the doing, deed, work; orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit. kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ "the intertwining of garlands and creepers"; also in kamma -- kara possibly orig. employed in weaving, i. e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave=Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken, orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the -- a decl., the cons. forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat. kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni. I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense, i. e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā. -- Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expld by navakamma (see below 2a). -- kassa˚ ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚ profession of a potter J vi.372; tunna˚ weaving Vism 122; PvA 161. purohita˚ office of a high -- priest (=abstr. n. porohiccaŋ) SnA 466; vāṇija˚ trade Sāsv. 40. -- kammanā by profession Sn 650, 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Sn 263=Kh v.6 (anavajjāni k.=anākulā kammantā Sn 262). paresaŋ k˚ŋ katvā doing other people's work=being a servant VvA 299; sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations D i.135, cp. attano k˚ -- kubbānaŋ Dh 217. kamma -- karaṇa -- sālā work -- room (here: weaving shed) PvA 120. 2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always -- ˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action, like cīvara˚ mending the cloak VvA 250; uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vbh 422; nava˚ making new, renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119, 159 (˚karoti to make repairs); J i.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15; S i.179; patthita˚ the desired action (i. e. sexual intercourse) DhA ii.49; kammaŋ karoti to be active or in working, to act: nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet M i.414; kata˚ the job done by the thieves DhA ii.38 (corehi), as adj. kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180, also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e. necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaŋ n'atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done ( -- ˚), anything done (in its result), work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending -- ing): apaccakkha˚ not being aware, deception Vbh 85; daḷhī˚ strengthening, increase Vbh 357, Vism 122; citta˚ variegated work, mālā˚ garlands, latā˚ creeper ( -- work) Vism 108; nāma˚ naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, "questionnaire" Vism 6. -- So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚= niṭṭhuriya Vbh 357; nimitta˚= nimitta, obhāsa˚=obhāsa (apparition > appearing) Vbh 353. -- (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process ( -- ˚). Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending -- ion or -- ment, e. g. okāsa˚ opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Sn p. 94; pātu˚ making clear, manifestation DhA iv.198 anāvi˚, anuttāni˚ concealment Vbh 358; kata˚ (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience SnA 355; añjali˚, sāmīci˚ veneration, honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) D iii.83 (≈Vin ii.162, 255); A i.123; ii.180; J. i.218, 219. 3. (Specialised) an "act" in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, 53, 144, 318; ii.70, 93; v.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2). There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312 -- 333 (cp. Vin T. ii.256 -- 285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha˚ tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚, paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚, sammukhākaraṇīya˚. -- In this sense: kammaŋ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49, 143, 317; ii.83, 260; kammaŋ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kammaŋ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145. 4. In cpds.: -- -- âdhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work, inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98; -- âdhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Miln 288; -- ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; -- âraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an "act" Vin iv.153; v.221; -- ārāma (a) delighting in activity D ii.77; A iv.22; It 71, 79; -- ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D ii.78=A iv.22, cp. Vbh 381; A iii.116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163; It 71; âvadāna a tale of heroic deeds J vi.295; -- kara or ˚kāra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dāso+pubbuṭṭhāyī "willing to work" D i.60 et sim. (=DA i.168: analaso). A i.145; ii.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243; D i.141=Pug 56 (also ˚kārā); A ii.208; iii.77, 172; Th 2, 340; J i.57. Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā A iii.37= iv.265, 393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240, 272; ii.154; D iii.191; S i.92; -- a handyman J i.239; Miln 378; (f) -- ī a female servant Vin ii.267; ˚kāra Vin iv.224, kārī Dhs A98=VvA 73 (appl. to a wife); -- karaṇa 1. working, labour, service J iii.219; PvA 120; DA i.168; 2. the effects of karma J i.146; -- karanā and kāraṇā see below; -- kāma liking work, industrious; a˚ lazy A iv.93= J ii.348; -- kāraka a workman, a servant DA i.8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd2 427; a sailor J iv.139; -- garu bent on work Miln 288; -- ccheda the interruption of work J i.149; 246; iii.270; -- jāta sort of action J v.24 (=kammam eva); -- dhura (m. nt.) draught -- work J i.196; -- dheyya work to be performed, duty A iv.285= 325; cp. J vi.297; -- dhoreyya "fit to bear the burden of action" Miln 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -- niketavā having action as one's house or temple ibid.; -- nipphādana accomplishing the business J vi.162; -- ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles. act Vin i.318; v.221; -- bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Miln 7; -- mūla the price of the transaction Miln 334; -- rata delighting in business D ii.78; It 71; -- vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -- vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; iii.174, 176; iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k˚ is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ŋ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207; DhsA 399; -- ˚ŋ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317; -- vossagga difference of occupation J vi.216; -- sajja (a) "ready for action," i. e. for battle J v.232; -- sādutā "agreeableness to work" DhsA 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā); -- sāmin "a master in action," an active man Miln 288; -- sippī an artisan VvA 278; -- sīla one whose habit it is
-- 191 --
to work, energetic, persevering Miln 288; a˚ indolent, lazy J vi.245; a˚ -- ttaŋ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21; -- hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Miln 288. II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i. e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i. e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i. e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a "deed," viz. 1. the deed as expressing the doer's will, i. e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer's habit=his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer's merit and demerit (his "karma"). Thus pāpakamma=a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed=bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer. Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time: as past=done, meaning deed (with kata); or future=to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual "karma," appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i. e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal "karma," appearing in Saŋsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause -- consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time. 1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiŋ kammaŋ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92; tassā katakammaŋ pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA 37, 83, etc. -- with ref. to the Future: k. kātabbaŋ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni D iii.255=A iv.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti "he performs the 4 obligations" (of gahapati) A ii.67. 2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva D i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed D iii.156; dukkaraŋ kamma -- kubbataŋ he who of those who act, acts badly S i.19; abhabbo taŋ kammaŋ kātum incapable of doing that deed S iii.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally M iii.207; A v.292 sq.; pamāṇakataŋ k. D i.251=S iv.322. kataraŋ k˚ŋ karonto ahaŋ nirayaŋ na gaccheyyaŋ? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J iv.340; yaŋ kiñci sithilaŋ k˚ŋ . . . na taŋ hoti mahapphalaŋ . . . S i.49=Dh 312=Th 1, 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action PvA 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā -- caraṇa D iii.156; kāni k˚āni sammā -- niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Sn 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person's habit of acting or character (cp. kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata "endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character": tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto "endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N." A i.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā "bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)" Nd2 112; anavajja kāya -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.69 (cp. A iv.364); kāya -- kammavacī -- kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) "a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech" D i.63; kāya . . . (etc.) -- k˚sam˚ bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) A ii.252 (cp. A i.102, 104); visamena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A i.154=iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.135 -- kammaŋ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaŋ jīvitam uttamaŋ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā S i.34=55; M iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k. is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp. to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Sn 136; 164; 599; nihīna˚ manussā (of bad, wretched character) Sn 661; manāpena bahulaŋ kāya (etc.) -- kammena A ii.87= iii.33, 131; and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā D ii.80; A iii.288; mettena kāya<-> (etc.) -- kammena D ii.144; iii.191; A v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚ -- dvārā), expressions of personality, as by deed, word and thought (kāyena, vācāya, manasā). Kamma kat) e)coxh/n means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Sn 330, 365; later specified by kāya -- kamma, for which kāya -- kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vacī -- k˚ mano -- k˚; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya -- k˚ pi arakkhitaŋ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚) A i.261 sq.; yaŋ nu kho ahaŋ idaŋ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaŋ me kāya -- k˚ attabyādhāya pi saŋvatteyya . . . "whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?" M i.415; kāya -- (vacī -- etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaŋ and a˚) A i.110=iii.150; as anulomika˚ A i.106; sabbaŋ kāya -- k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati "all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha" Nd2 235; yaŋ lobhapakataŋ kammaŋ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaŋ anubhoti . . . Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m˚ dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekūna -- tiŋsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa -- kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa -- kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n'atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato "there is no hiding ( -- place) in this world for him who does evil" A i.149; so p˚ -- o dummedho jānaŋ dukkaṭaŋ attano . . . "he, afflicted with (the result of) evil -- doing . . ." A iii.354; p˚ -- ŋ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaŋ p˚ -- ŋ kataŋ sabban taŋ idha vedanīyaŋ "whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for" A v.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚ -- ŋ vivajjayī "avoid evil acting" Sn 407; nissaŋsayaŋ p˚ -- ŋ . . . "undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv iv.161. -- pāpaŋ kammaŋ: appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataŋ taŋ enaŋ nirayaŋ upaneti "even a small sin brings man to N." A i.249, tayā v'etaŋ p˚ k˚ kataŋ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaŋ paṭisaŋvedissasi "you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences" M iii.180= A i.139, na hi p˚ kataŋ k˚ sajju khīraŋ va muccati Dh 71=Nett 161; yassa p˚ kataŋ k˚ kusalena pithīyati
-- 192 --
so imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104= Dh 173=Th 1, 872; p˚ -- ssa k˚ -- ssa samatikkamo "the overcoming of evil karma" S iv.320; p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya "in the performance of evil" M i.372; p˚āni k˚āni karaŋ bālo na bujjhati "he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds" Dh 136=Th 1, 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaŋ upapajjare "sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N." Dh 307; te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Sn 140. -- pāpakāni kammāni: p˚ānaŋ k˚ānaŋ hetu coraŋ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti "for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished" A i.48; ye loke p˚āni k˚ karonti te vividhā kamma -- kāraṇā karīyanti "those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments" M iii.186=A i.142; k˚ŋ karoti p˚ŋ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Sn 232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn 127; karontā p˚ŋ k˚ŋ yaŋ hoti kaṭukapphalaŋ, "doing evil which is of bitter fruit" Dh 66= S i.57=Nett 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Sn 215. -- In the same sense: na taŋ k˚ŋ kataŋ sādhu yaŋ katvā anutappati "not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse" S i.57=Dh 67 =Nett 132; āveni -- kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha -- bheda) A v.74; adhammikakammāni A i.74; asuci -- k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) A iii.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja > sagga) A ii.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vbh 378. <-> (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) taŋ k˚ŋ katvā kusalaŋ sukhudrayaŋ D iii.157; puñña -- kammo of meritorious (character) S i.143; kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Ps i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vbh 173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala -- k˚ -- paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma, merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA 32 (cp. puññânubhāva -- nissandena "in consequence of their being affected with merit" PvA 58) -- Cp. also cpds.: kamma -- kilesa, k˚ -- ṭṭhāna, k˚ -- patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚ -- samādāna. 3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚ -- or independt; phala: tassa mayhaŋ atīte katassa kammassa phalaŋ "the fruit of a deed done by me in former times" ThA 270; Vv 479 (=VvA 202); desanā . . . k -- phalaŋ paccakkhakāriṇī "an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action" PvA 1; similarly PvA 2; cp. also ibid. 26, 49, 52, 82 (v. l. for kammabala). vipāka : yassa k˚ssa vipākena . . . niraye pacceyyāsi . . . "through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i. e. tortured) in N." M ii.104; tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajji "by the result of that deed he went to Heaven" S i.92; ii.255; k -- vipāka -- kovida "well aware of the fruit of action," i. e. of retribution Sn 653; kissa kvipākena "through the result of what (action)" Pv i.65; inunā asubhena k -- vipākena Nett 160; k -- vipāka with ref. to avyākata -- dhammā: Vbh 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106; k -- vipāka -- ja produced by the maturing of (some evil) action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: A v.110=Nd2 3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps ii.174; -- vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaŋ kammānaŋ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds A iv.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha -- vepakka resulting in pain Sn 537. -- -- phala+vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaŋ kammānaŋ phalaŋ vipāko: D i.55= iii.264=M i.401=S iv.348=A i.268=iv.226= v.265, 286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda -- phalabhūto vipāko ThA 270; tiṇṇaŋ k˚ānaŋ phalaŋ, tiṇṇaŋ k -- ānaŋ vipāko D ii.186 -- (b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaŋ puriso kammaŋ karoti tathā tathā taŋ paṭisaŋvedissati "in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)" A i.249; na vijjati so jagati -- ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa -- kammā "there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil -- doing" Dh 127=Miln 150=PvA 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little A iv.382; the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k -- dāyādā k -- yonī k -- bandhū . . . yaŋ k˚ŋ karonti kalyānaŋ vā pāpakaŋ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti M iii.203=A iii.72 sq.=186=v.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), "being done back with the deed," or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma -- karaṇaŋ kāreti or kārāpeti "he causes the reaction of the deed to take place" and pass, kamma -- karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i. e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaŋ, the usual punishments (beating with whips, etc.) are enumerated passim, e. g. M iii.164, 181; and Nd2 604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. "pain, punishment, " fr. kṝ to tear or injure, "the pains of karma, or torture"; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative -- abstr. fr. karoti presents no difficulty.] -- ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚ -- āni karonti te diṭṭh' eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k -- kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! "Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!" M iii.181; M iii.186=A i.142; sim. k˚ -- kāraṇāni kārenti (v. l. better than text -- reading) S iv.344; Sdhp 7; Nd2 on dukkha. As k -- karaṇaŋ saŋvidahiŋsu J ii.398; kamma -- kāraṇa -- ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and M i.87; A i.47; J v.429; Miln 197. B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence. -- (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataŋ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu A i.223 (kāmadhātu -- vepakkañ ce kammaŋ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h'etaŋ . . . iti kho kammaŋ khettaŋ . . .); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence A iii.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā "by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on" Sn 654; kamma -- paccayā through karma PvA 25 (=Kh 207); k˚ŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa "k. and passions are the cause of saŋsāra (renewed existence)" Nett 113; see on k. as principle: Ps ii.78; 79 (ch. vii., kamma -- kathā) M i.372 sq.; Nett. 161; 180 -- 182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold M iii.215; and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya's or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu, āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vbh 366; Miln 40 sq. as a factor in the five -- fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚ -- niyama DA. on D 11, 12; DhsA. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma) Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚ -- vātā, birth -- pains i. e. the winds resulting from karma (caliŋsu) DhA i.165; DhA ii.262; k˚ -- nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚ -- sambhava Bdhd 66; k˚ -- samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below. -- (b) karma as result or consequence. There are 3 kamma -- nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaŋ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described A i.134=263=iii.338=Nd2 517; so also A v.86; 262; Vbh 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha -- kkhayā kamma -- nidāna -- saŋkhayo A v.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda A i.264,
-- 193 --
and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma -- bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vbh 137=Nd2 471. -- (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like "as the cause, so the result." Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dh 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taŋ pāpakaŋ kammaŋ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt' atthi) -- na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's (trace, result of) action is ever lost" Sn 666; puññâpuñña -- kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti "through the consequence of both merit and demerit" PvA 47; cp. VvA 14; yatth' assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taŋ k˚ŋ vipaccati "wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action" A i.134; -- correspondence between "light" and "dark" deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha -- kamma>kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka, akaṇha -- asukka: D iii.230=M i.389=A ii.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaŋ upapajjati Nd2 304iii; k˚ -- ânubhāva -- ukkhitta "thrown, set into motion, by the power of k." PvA 78; sucarita -- k -- ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni "created by the power of their result of good conduct" VvA 127; k -- ânubhāvena by the working of k. PvA 77; k˚ -- vega -- ukkhittā (same) PvA 284; yathā kamm -- ûpaga "undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaŋ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma J i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k -- sarikkhatā "the karma -- likeness," the correspondence of cause and consequence: taŋ k -- s˚ŋ vibhāventaŋ suvaṇṇamayaŋ ahosi "this, manifesting the karma -- correspondence, was golden" VvA 6; so also k -- sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma -- phalaŋ, the result of action: tassa kamma -- sarikkhakaŋ kammaphalaŋ hoti "for her the fruit of action became like action," i. e. the consequence was according to her deed. PvA 206; 284; 258; as nt.: k -- s˚ŋ pan'assa udapādi "the retribution for him has come" DhA i.128; J iii.203; cp. also Miln 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. -- (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava>purāṇa -- kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe D i.54=S iii.212; as pañca -- kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo . . . purāṇaŋ k˚ŋ abhisankhataŋ ("our body is an accumulation of former karma") S ii.65=Nd2 680 D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71; PvA 1, 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā . . . santo yathā kammaŋ gacchati) PvA 63. -- k˚ -- nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so . . . na tāva kālaŋ karoti yāva na taŋ pāpakammaŋ vyanti hoti "He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted" A i.141≈; nava -- purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚ -- nirodhaŋ k˚ -- nirodha -- gāminiñ ca paṭipadaŋ "the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you, the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k." S iv.132~A iii.410; . . . navānaŋ k˚ānaŋ akaraṇā setughātaŋ; iti k -- kkhayā dukkhakkhayo . . . (end of misery through the end of karma) A i.220=M ii.214; same Ps i.55 -- 57; cp. also A i.263; Nd2 411 (expl. as kamma -- parāyaṇa vipāka -- p˚: "gone beyond karma and its results," i. e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k˚ -- âbhisankhīsa, ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana. -- âdhikata ruled by karma, Miln 67, 68; ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid. -- âdhiggahita gripped by karma Miln 188, 189; -- ânurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one's karma J iii.160; DA i.37; -- âbhisankhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd2 116, 283, 506. -- âbhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Miln 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; -- âraha see I.; -- âyatana 1. work Vbh 324, cp. Miln 78; 2. action=kamma J iii.542; cp. J iv.451, 452. -- âyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; DhsA 267, 268; cp. k˚ŋ āyūhi Miln 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58. -- āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. A iii.436= Pug 13=Vbh 341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚ . .), Kvu 341; Miln 154, 155; Vism 177 (=ānantariya -- kamma); -- ūpaga in yatha kamm -- ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate . . . pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5=D i.82=S ii.122 (214)= v.266=A iv.178= v.13 (35, 200, 340)=Vbh 344; abbreviated in M iii.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Sn 587; Bdhd 111; -- upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156; -- kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps ii.98; -- kāma (adj.) desirous of good karma Th 2, 275; PvA 174; a˚ opp.= inactive, indolent A iv.92, PvA 174; -- kiriyā -- dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. J i.45; -- kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dh 15 (=DhA i.129, expl. kiliṭṭha -- k˚); -- kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at D iii.181=J iii.321, as the non -- performance of sīla 1 -- 4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa -- kāya -- k˚; -- kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k.; its destruction: sabba -- k˚ -- kkhayaŋ patto vimutto upadhi -- sankhaye S i.134; as brought about by neutral, indifferent kamma: D iii.230=A ii.230 sq.; M i.93, DhsA 89; -- ja (3 B) produced by k. J i.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Miln 135; Nd2 3041; appld. to all existence Miln 271; Vism 624 (kammajaŋ āyatanadvāra -- vasena pākaṭaŋ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451, 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) J i.52, DhA i.165; a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Miln 268, 271; -- ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession, said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader, householder and mendicant M ii.197; A v.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna ii.2. c.), kamma -- subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises ("stations of exercise" Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship DhA i.8 (yāva arahattaŋ kamma -- ṭṭhānaŋ kathesi), 96; PvA 98 (catu -- saccakamma -- ṭṭhāna -- bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass'eva arahattaŋ pāpuṇi: J iii.36; Sāsv 49; see also J i.7, 97, 182, 303, 414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at DhsA 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiŋs' ākāra -- k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca -- sandhika at Vism 277; some of them are mentioned at J i.116; DhA i.221, 336; iv.90; -- ˚ŋ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); KhA 40; DhA i.9, 262; iv.106; PvA 42; -- ˚ŋ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ DhA i.8, 248, 336; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ adāsi DhA iv.106; ˚gaṇhāti J iii.246; Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise DhsA 246; ˚dāyaka the giver of a k -- ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q. v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89; Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -- ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, 187, 189; DhA i.335; -- tappana the being depressed on acct. of one's (bad) karma DhA i.150. -- -- dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i. e. inheriting the consequences of one's own deeds M i.390; Miln 65=DhsA 66; -- dvāra "the door of action," i. e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) J iv.14; KvuA 135; DhsA 82; Bdhd 8; -- dhāraya name of a class of noun -- compounds Kacc 166; -- nānatta manifoldness
-- 194 --
of k. DhsA 64 (also -- nānākaraṇa ib.); -- nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass'āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Sn 654; -- nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Miln 268; DhsA 361; -- nimitta the sign, token of k. DhsA 411; -- nirodha the destruction of k. [see 3 B (d)]; -- paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k. J vi.105, Vism 538; (adj.) J v.271, DhsA 304; -- paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector J vi.102; Miln 65; cp. DhsA 66; -- paṭibāḷha strong by k. Miln 301; -- pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (=sīla q. v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚, altogether 10; so at Vin v.138, S ii.168, A v.57, 268; as kus˚ and akus˚ at D iii.71, 269, 290; as 7 only at S ii.167; as akus˚ only at A v.54, 266; Vbh 391; Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, 57. -- phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions J i.350; VvA 39, PvA 1, 26, 52; ˚ -- upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one's labour (ad I) J iv.160; -- 2. living according to the result of former deeds A ii.135; -- bandhu having k. as one's relative, i. e. closely tied to one's karma (see ˚ssaka) Th 1, 496; cp. J vi.100, etc. -- bala the power of k. J vi.108; PvA 82. -- bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vbh 137; DhsA 37; -- bhūmi 1. the place of work J iii.411; 2. the ground of actions, i. e. the field of meritorious deeds Miln 229; -- mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Miln 333, 334, 341; -- mūlaka produced by k. Miln 134; -- yoni having k. for matrix, i. e. as the cause of rebirth Miln 65; DhsA 66. -- lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic A i.102; AA 370; -- vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232 -- 238) A ii.230 sq.; -- vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. DhsA 85; -- vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. S ii.33 sq.; A i.287 (+kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -- vādin believing in k. D i.115; Vin i.71; J vi.60; -- vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one's actions (see above) Vbh 106, 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Miln 189. -- ˚ja produced as a result of k.: D ii.20; Mhbv 78; Ps ii.174, 213; Miln 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A v.110; Miln 134, 135; AA 433, 556. -- visuddhi meritorious karma Dh 16 (=Dh i.132); -- visesa variety or difference of k. DhsA 313; -- vega the impetus of k. PvA 284; -- sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world A ii.232. -- samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one's character, or the incurring of karma, either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm -- ûpaga passage (q. v.): D iii.96; M i.70; iii.178, 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Nett 98; of Buddha's knowledge as regards the quality of a man's character: S v.304; A iii.417 sq.; Ps ii.174; Vbh 338; -- samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists A ii.232; -- samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Miln 127; DhsA 82; Kvn 100; -- sambhava produced by k. Miln 127; -- sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done DhA iii.334 (˚vipāka). -- sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -- sahāya "companion to the deed," said of thought DhsA 323; -- socana sorrowing for one's (bad) deeds DhA i.128. -- (s)saka [3 A (b), q. v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. M iii.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma -- dāyāda, kamma -- bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism 301); J iv.128; Miln 65; DA i.37=who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaŋ gatiŋ gacchanti, n'eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena . . .); der. ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma A iii.186; Dhs 1366; Vbh 324; ˚ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vbh 328.
Kammaka
Kammaka (adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, dependt on karma Miln 137 (a˚).
Kammanīya, ˚iya & kammañña
Kammanīya, ˚iya & kammañña (adj.) "workable," fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta "with active mind" in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta D i.76, etc.=M i.22= Pug 68; S iii.232; v.92, 233; A i.9; DhA i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) A i.257 (reads ˚iyañ)=Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd2 661, cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready for playing A iii.375=Vin i.182. Of the body A iv.335. -- a˚ not ready, sluggish A iv.333; Vism 146. -- kammañña -- bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā, etc., Dhs 326, of citta DhsA 130, see next; a˚ unworkable condition DhsA 130.
Kammaññatā
Kammaññatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adapta- bility, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A i.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaŋ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46, 47=326=641=730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA 136, 151 (=kammasādutā) a˚ unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln 300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs 1156, 1236; DhsA 255; expld as cittagelaññaŋ DhsA 377; as cetaso līnattaŋ Vbh 373.
Kammanta
Kammanta [Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta, cp. anta 14.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Sn 127= Vbh 357; as being punished in Niraya A i.60; S iv.180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: S v.45=135; DhA i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); anākula˚ Sn 262=Kh v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife A iii.37=iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field A iii.77; see also D i.71; M iii.7; S i.204; Miln 9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn p. 13, PvA 62. Phrases: ˚ŋ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business A i.115; PvA 141; jahati give up the occupation S iv.324; PvA 133; ˚ŋ payojeti to do or carry on business D i.71; ii.175; iii.66, 95; A iii.57; ˚ŋ pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA 42 (and vicāreti: PvA 93); ˚ŋ saŋvidahati to provide with work A iv.269=272. Mhvs vi.16. -- 2. deed, action in ethical sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚=kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; iv.161; J vi.104 (opp. puñña˚); as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚ A v.292 sq.; VvA 130 (in parisuddha -- kāya -- kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā M ii.191; ākiṇṇa -- k˚ (evam -- ) of such character S i.204; kurūra -- k˚ (adj.) of cruel character A iii.383=Pug 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚ of right doing, opp. micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to "Magga" (: q. v.) D ii.216; S ii.168; v.1; A iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya -- kamma (=sīla 1 -- 3) at S v.9=Vbh 105; Vbh 235; as kāya -- duccaritehi ārati virati . . . Vbh 106. -- âdhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work DhA i.393; -- ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place J i.57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J iv.306; -- dāsa a farm -- servant J i.468; -- bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business DhA iii.100; -- vipatti "failure of action," evil -- doing A i.270 opp. -- sampadā "perfection of action, right -- doing" A i.271; -- saŋvidhāna the providing of work D iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati).
Kammantika
Kammantika (adj.) [fr. kammanta] 1. a business manager J i.227. -- 2. a labourer, artisan, assistant J i.377.
-- 195 --
Kammāra
Kammāra [Vedic karmāra] a smith, a worker in metals generally D ii.126, A v.263; a silversmith Sn 962= Dh 239; J i.223; a goldsmith J iii.281; v.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black -- , gold -- and silver -- smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e. g. from J iii.282 and VvA 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well -- to -- do as appears from what is said of Cunda at D ii.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike J iii.281. -- uddhana a smith's furnace, a forge J vi.218; -- kula a smithy M i.25; kūṭa a smith's hammer Vism 254; -- gaggarī a smith's bellows S i.106; J vi.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -- putta "son of a smith," i. e. a smith by birth and trade D ii.126; A v.263; as goldsmith J vi.237, Sn 48 (Nd2 ad loc.: k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro); -- bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76; -- sālā a smithy Vism 413; Mhvs 5, 31.
Kammāsa
Kammāsa [Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. kelaino/s to *qel, fr. which also Sk. kāla black -- blue, Gr. khla/s, khli/ s; Lat. cālīgo & callidus] 1. variegated, spotted, blemished J v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy. -- fig. inconsistent, varying A ii.187. -- 2. (nt.) inconsistency, blemish, blot A iv.55; Vism 51. -- a˚ not spotted, i. e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct D ii.80; A ii.52; iii.36, 572; vi.54, 192; Bdhd 89. -- kārin in a˚ not acting inconsistently A ii.187; cp. ibid. 243. -- pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet J v.475; (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i. e. an ogre; also N. of a Yakkha J v.503, 511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.).
Kammika
Kammika (adj. -- n.) [fr. kamma] 1. ( -- ˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character: āya˚ revenue -- overseer, treasurer DhA i.184; sabba˚ (always with ref. to amacca, the king's minister) one who does everything, the king's confidant Vism 130; PvA 81. -- On term ādi˚ beginner (e. g. Vism 241) see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2. -- 2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚ and thalapatha˚ by sea & by land J i.121. -- 3. a superintendent, overseer, manager J ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mhvs 30, 31. -- 4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106.
Kammin
Kammin (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kamma, cp. kammaka] doing, per- forming, practising J vi.105; Sdhp 196, 292.
Kamya
Kamya (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kām] wishing for, desiring DhsA 365 (sādhu˚; v. l. ˚kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next.
Kamyā
Kamyā ( -- ˚) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: S i.143=J iii.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Sn 854, 929.
Kamyatā (˚) & kammatā
Kamyatā ( -- ˚) & kammatā (Nd) [fr. kām] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu˚ VvA 18; muñcitu˚ (+paṭisankhā) Ps i.60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vbh 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚ Vbh 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚ Vbh 351; 361=Dhs 1059; Nd2 s. v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; v. l. pucchañci˚; both Vbh and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚; see detail under puñcikatā); of māna; ketu˚ Nd2 505; Dhs 1116=1233; Vbh 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (v. l. cāṭu˚) Vbh 246= 352. -- As abl. (=kamyā) in dassana˚ S i.193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 121 (expl. as icchāya SnA 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma -- sādutā.
Kaya
Kaya [fr. kri] purchase, buying A iii.226 (+vi˚). -- (a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv i.56 (see also Kh vii.6 and note). -- vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying & selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata D i.5=A ii.209= v.205= Pug 58; D i.64; S v.473; Sn 929; J v.243; Khus 114; DhA i.78; PvA 29 (= KhA 212).
Kayati
Kayati [krī, perhaps connected with kṛ] to buy; Inf. ketuŋ J iii.282; cp. kiṇāti.
Kayika
Kayika [fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505] a buyer, trader, dealer Miln 334.
Kayin
Kayin a buyer J vi.110.
Kara
Kara [fr. kṛ] 1. (adj.) ( -- ˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e. g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaŋ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day -- maker, i. e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a "black" existence (of pāpakamma) J iv.9; padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus PvA 52; vacana˚, etc. <-> 2. (m) "the maker," i. e. the hand Mhvs 5, 255 -- 256; 30, 67. -- atikaraŋ (adv.) doing too much, going too far J i.431; -- dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard, arduous S i.7; iv.260; A i.286; iv.31, 135; v.202; +durabhisambhavo Sn 429 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task A i.286 (cp. iv.31); J i.395; Miln 121, dukkara -- kārikā "doing of a hard task," exertion, austerity M i.93; Nd2 262b. -- sukara easy to do S i.9; ii.181; Dh 163; Ud 61; na sukaraŋ w. inf. it is not easy to . . . D i.250; A iii.52, 184; iv.334. -- kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand -- wheel, i. e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122; cp. Vin. Texts iii.112; -- ja "born of kamma" in karaja -- kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore=the impure, vile, low body A v.300; J i.5; Vism 287, 404; DA i.113, 217, 221; DhA i.10; iii.420; DhsA 403. karaja -- rūpa Vism 326. -- tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34; -- mara "one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy)," but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave J iii.147, 361; iv.220; DhA iii.487; -- ˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin iii.140 (=dhajāhaṭā); -- gāhaŋ gaṇhāti to make prisoner J i.355; iii.361; -- mita "to be measured with (two) hands," in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist J v.219; vi.457.
Karaka
Karaka1 [Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco -- nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. ka/ rua, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism] 1. Water -- pot, drinking -- vessel (=: pānīya -- bhājana PvA 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302. It is called dhammakaraka there, and at ii. 118, 177. This means "regulation waterpot" as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana) to prevent injury to living things. See also Miln 68; Pv iii.224; PvA 185. -- 2. hail (also karakā) J iv. 167; Miln 308; Mhvs xii. 9. -- vassa a shower of hail, hail -- storm J iv.167; Miln 308; DhA i.360.
Karakarā
Karakarā (for kaṭakaṭā, q. v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya), i. e. severely (of biting) J iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā).
-- 196 --
Karañja
Karañja [cp. Sk. karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea] the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201; J vi.518, 519.
Karaṇa
Karaṇa [fr. kṛ, cp. Vedic karaṇa] 1. adj. (f. ī) ( -- ˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) S iv.331; v.97; It 83; and acakkhu˚ etc. S v.97; nāthā ˚ā dhammā A v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ A ii.22; dubbaṇṇa˚ S v.217; see also D i.245; M. i.15; S v.96, 115; A iv.94; v.268; Miln 289. <-> 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (=kamma), as bali˚ offering of food =bali kamma) PvA 81; gabbha˚ Sn 927; pānujja˚ Sn 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing J v.400, vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing, performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ ("commission and omission"); DhA i.214; means of action J iii.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) PvA 33; VvA 25, 53, 162, 174. -- ˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case J iii.98; v.444; PvA 35; VvA 304; DhsA 48; Kacc 157. -- 4. ( -- ˚) state, condition; in noun -- abstract function= ˚ttaŋ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (=nānattaŋ) difference M ii.128; S iv.294; Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing PvA 66; kattabba˚ (=kattabbattaŋ) "what is to be done," i. e. duty PvA 30; pūjā˚ veneration PvA 30. sakkāra˚ reverence, devotion SnA 284. Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ, to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataii 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by J vi.270 where it explains kappita -- kesa -- massu, and J v.309 & DhA i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and J iii.314, where it is represented by massu -- kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DA i.137. a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i. e. the non -- performing J i.131; v.222; Nett 81; PvA 59; DhsA 127; non -- undertaking (of business) J i.229; noncommission M i.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd. -- uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence DhA i.44.
Karaṇīya
Karaṇīya [grd. of karoti] 1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (=kātabbaŋ karaṇârahaŋ KhA 236) Vin i.58; D i.3, cp. Miln 183; A v.210; DA i.7. Often -- ˚ in the sense of "doing, making," as yathā kāma˚ S ii.226; cp. iv.91, 159; "having business" bahu˚ D ii.76; A iii.116; S ii.215; anukampa˚ PvA 61: -- (b) done, in the sense of undoing, i. e. overcome, undone D ii.76 cp. Dial. ii.81 n. -- 2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha J iii.23. -- 3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation; affairs, business D i.85; ii.68, 74 cp. A iv.16; M i.271; S iii.168; iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12; Vin i.139; A i.58; Sn 143; Sn p. 32 (yan te karanīyaŋ taŋ karohi "do what you have to do"); -- ˚ŋ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158; J v.298. Kataŋ ˚ŋ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula "khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ . . ." to mark the attainment of Arahantship D i.84; ii.68=153; Th 2, 223; Vin i.14; Sn p. 16; DA i.226, etc. See Arahant ii.C. <-> There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at A i.229; 3 of a bhikkhu A i.230; -- (b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k˚ S iv.125; cetanāya k˚ A v.2, 312; cp. Miln 5, 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited A i.58; iii.208=DA i.235. -- (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) It 18. -- (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin i.45=216=iii.20; PvA 64. -- (d) not to be "done," i. e. not to be overcome or defeated D ii.76; A iv.113; -- (e) having nothing to do Vin i.154. <-> 2. (nt.) a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 <-> sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155; -- 2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) D ii.143; Th 1, 1045; DA i.9.
Karaṇīyatā
Karaṇīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, 93; sa˚ being left with something to do Miln 140.
Karaṇḍa
Karaṇḍa (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātu- mañjūsā expls k. by "bhājanatthe"] 1. a basket or box of wicker -- work Mhvs 31, 98; Dāvs v.60; DhA iii.18; -- 2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent D i.77 (=DA i.222 ahi -- kañcuka) cp. Dial. i.88.
Karaṇḍaka
Karaṇḍaka [fr. last] a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ M i.215=S v.71=A iv.230 (in simile); S iii.131; v.351 cp. Pug 34; J i 96; iii.527; v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DA i.222 (vilīva˚); SnA 11.
Karamanda
Karamanda [etym.?] a shrub Vism 183 (+kanavīra).
Karati
Karati1 [cp. Sk. kṛntati] to cut, injure, hurt; in "karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato . . ." D i.52=M i.516; S iii.208.
Karati
Karati2 (˚tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang J vi.536 (= rājamāsa).
Karabha
Karabha the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚+ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29.
Karamara
Karamara see Kara.
Karaḷa
Karaḷa (karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) DhA iii.38; DhsA 272.
Karavī
Karavī [cp. Sk. kala -- kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow] the Indian cuckoo J vi.539.
Karavīka
Karavīka same J v.204, 416; Vv 364; Vism 112, 206; VvA 166, 219. -- bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i. e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇas D ii.20=iii.144=173=M ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n. and BSk. kalaviṅka -- manojña -- bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given).
Karavīya
Karavīya (˚iya)=prec. J vi.538.
Karavīra
Karavīra [cp. Sk. karavīra] 1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha) -- 2. a kind of grass J iv.92. -- patta a kind of arrow M i.429.
Karahi
Karahi (Sk. karhi, when? kar=loc. of pron. st. *quo= Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha -- ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci D i.17; ii.139; M i.177, 454; A i.179; iv.101; Miln 73, 76.
Karin
Karin (adj.) [fr. kara] "one who has a hand," an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mhvs 24, 34; 25, 68; Dāvs iv.2. In cpds. kari. -- gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant's trumpeting Dāvs v.56; -- vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143; Dāvs iv.2.
Kariparibandha
Kari -- paribandha (adj.) [=karīsa -- paribaddha] bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Th 1, 1152. Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.).
Karīsa
Karīsa1 (nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa), see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; J i.94, 212; iv.233, 276; VvA 64.
Karīsa
Karīsa2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat. -- cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda] refuse, filth, excrement, dung D ii.293; J i.5; Vism 259, 358 (in detail); PvA 87, 258; KhA 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces A i.139; Sn 835. -- magga the anus J iv.327; -- vāca (nt.) a cesspool J iii.263 (=gūthakūpa); -- vāyin, f. ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement PvA 87.
-- 197 --
Karuṇā
Karuṇā (f.) [cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.] pity, compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto -- vimutti) in the 4 sentiments, viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and SnA 128 (on Sn 73) explains k˚ as "ahita -- dukkh -- âpanaya -- kāmatā," the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one's fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as "hita -- sukh -- ûpanayakāmatā," the desire of bringing (to one's fellow -- men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadayakampanaŋ karotī ti" Bdhd 21; "sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaŋ karuṇā cetovimutti" as expl. of avihiŋsa dhātu Vbh 87; paradukkhāsahana -- rasā Vism 318. K˚ -- sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one's good influence: see cātuddisa "extending over the 4, i. e. all, directions): D i.251; iii.78, 50, 224; S iv.296, 322, 351; v.115; A i.183, 196; ii.129, 184; iii.225; v.300, 345; J ii.129; Nd2 on Sn 73; Vbh 273, 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadaya -- kampanaŋ karoti." Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in "karuṇaŋ cetovimuttiŋ bhāveti" S v.119; A i.38; v.360; in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī -- katā, etc. D iii.248; A iii.291; iv.300; in k˚ -- sahagataŋ saddhindriyaŋ A i.42; unspecified S v.131; A iii.185; Nett 121, 124; Ps i.8; k˚+mettā Nett 25; k˚+muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq., 29; ananta k˚ pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1; karuṇaŋ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā, messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚ great compassion Ps i.126, 133; -- ˚samāpatti a ʻ gest, ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help D ii.237; Ps. 1, 126 f. DhA i.26, 367; PvA 61, 195; -- 3. As adj. only in cpds. (e. g. ˚vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati˚ very merciful J iv.142) and as adv. karuṇaŋ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k˚ paridevati J vi.498, 513, 551; Cp. ix.54; also in abl. karuṇā J vi.466. -- See also kāruñña. -- âdhimutta intent upon compassion D ii.241, 242; -- ânuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46; -- guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -- jala water of c., shower of mercy Miln 22; Mhbv 16; -- jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. D ii.237 -- 39; -- ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. PvA 72; -- para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, 345; -- bala the power of c. Mhvs 15, 61, 130; Sdhp 577; -- brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319. -- bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -- rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -- vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. ˚vihārin); DA i.33; -- sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -- sītala "cool with c." +hadaya, whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DA i.1.
Karuṇāyati
Karuṇāyati [v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105] to feel pity for, to have compassion on Sn 1065 (˚āyamāna; expl. by Nd2 as anuddayamāno anurakkh˚ anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚); Vbh 273; Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vbh 87= 273 (and ˚āyitattaŋ ibid.).
Karumbhaka
Karumbhaka a species of rice -- plant of a ruddy colour Miln 252 (see Mil. trsl. ii.73).
Karumhā
Karumhā (pl.) a class of Devas D ii.260.
Kareṇu
Kareṇu [metathesis for kaṇeru, q. v., cp. Sk. kareṇu] elephant, in cpd. -- lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Th 2, 373.
Kareṇukā
Kareṇukā (f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant J ii.343; DhA i.196 (v. l. for kaṇeru).
Kareri
Kareri in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk -- rose tree or "karer"; Th 1, 1062; Ud 31; J v.405; vi.534.
Karoṭi
Karoṭi1 (f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish J i.243; ii.363; iii.225; iv.67; v.289, 290. -- 2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi. On the form cp. Dial. i.227 n.) J vi.592.
Karoṭi
Karoṭi2 (m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras J i.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As N. of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas) expld as "tesaŋ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaŋ" by C. on J i.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas MVastu i.30.
Karoṭika
Karoṭika [fr. karoṭi1)] 1. a bowl, basin J iv.68; DhA ii.131 (sappi˚). -- 2. the skull J vi.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull.
Karoṭiya
Karoṭiya=karoṭika 2, J vi.593.
Karoti
Karoti v. irreg. [Sk. karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. kar -- man, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p -- addition, as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp=kṛp. Derived are kalpa > kappa, kalpate > kappeti]. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed, found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres. karomi, etc. Sn 78, 216, 512, 666= Dh 306=It 42; Opt. kare Dh 42, 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Sn p. 101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi PvA 11; kareyya Sn 920, 923; kuriyā (=Sk. kuryāt) J vi.206; Ppr. karan Dh 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dh 16, 116. -- 2. Impf. (akara, etc.). -- 3. Aor. (akaŋ) akariŋ, etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Sn 343, 537, 2nd pl. akattha Pv i.112; PvA 45, 75; 3rd pl. akariŋsu; akaŋsu Sn 882; PvA 74; without augment kari DhA ii.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Sn 339, 1068, etc. -- 4. Imper. karohi Sn p. 32; 1062; karotha Sn 223; KhA 168. -- 5. Fut. karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaŋ J iv.286; vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puññaŋ & kusalaŋ poetical only) Pv ii.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Sn 427, 428; Dh 154; 1st pl. kāhāma Pv iv.1011. -- 6. Inf. kātuŋ PvA 4, 61, 69, 115, Kh vi.10, etc.; kattuŋ VvA 13; kātave Mhvs 35, 29; Vv 4415 (=kātuŋ); kātuye Th 2, 418. -- 7. Pp. kata, see sep. -- 8. Ger. katvā Sn 127, 661, 705, etc.; katvāna (poet.) Sn 89, 269, Pv i.13; karitvā see iv. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Sn 168, 811; 3rd pl. kubbanti Sn 794; or 3rd sing. kurute Sn 94, 796, 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Sn 702, 719, 917; It 87; or 3rd sing. kayirā Sn 728= 1051; S i.24; Dh 53, 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dh 25, 117; It 13; Pv i.1111; KhA 224; kubbaye Sn 943. -- Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno, karāno) (a) kubbaŋ Sn 844, 913; (a)kubbanto It 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Sn 777, 778, 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331. -- 2. Impf. (akariŋ, 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318; 1st pl. akaramhase J iii.26, ˚a DhA i.145. -- 3. Aor. (none) -- 4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaŋ, 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaŋ (=Sk. kurutāŋ) J vi.288. -- 5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres. (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dh 292=Th 1, 635; KhA 168; and kīrati Th 1, 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). <-> 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin i.107. -- 3. Grd. karaṇīya (q. v.), (kayya) kātabba DhA i.338. IV. Caus. I. (Denom. to kāra) kārayati=kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule, wield (rajjaŋ): kārehi PvA 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaŋ J v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuŋ Mhvs iv.3; akāresi Mhvs 23, 85;
-- 198 --
kāretuŋ PvA 74; kārayamāna VvA 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaŋ) PvA 162; karitvā Sn 444 (vasiŋ) 674; 680 (vittiŋ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaŋ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti S i.179; PvA 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (=caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mhvs 20, 9; ger. kārāpetvā PvA 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin ii.134. Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mhvs 19, 36; 20, 9 (Caus.). -- 2. to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155; J i.24; ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na . . . I prevent, cp. Lat. facio ne . . .); iii.297; Pv i.88=ii.619; Mhvs 3, 1; 7, 22; -- 3. to produce DhA i.172; -- 4. to write, compose J vi.410; PvA 287; -- 5. to put on, dress Vin ii.277; J i.9; -- 6. to impose (a punishment) Mhvs 4, 14; -- 7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc.) J ii.32; Mhvs 9, 27; -- 8. to use as (with two acc.) J i.113; ii.24; -- 9. to bring into (with loc.) J v.454 <-> 10. to place (with loc.) J v.274; (with acc. of the person) Dh 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e. g. kathaŋ k˚ D ii.98; kodhaŋ k˚ and kopaŋ k˚ to be angry J iv.22; vi.257; cayaŋ k˚ to hoard up; corikaŋ k˚ to steal Vin i.75; taṇhaŋ k˚ (c. loc.) to desire J i.5; sītaŋ k˚ to cool D ii.129. -- It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear D ii.105; pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚, muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q. v.). Cp. the same process in conn. with bhavati. -- The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aŋse k˚ to place on one's shoulder J i.9; antarāyaŋ k˚ to prevent J i.232; ādiŋ k˚ (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaŋ k˚ to give a hint D ii.103; pātarāsaŋ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaŋ k˚ to make up one's mind; mahaŋ k˚ to hold a festival D ii.165; massuŋ k˚ to trim the beard DhA i.253; musāvādaŋ k˚ to tell a lie J vi.401; rajjaŋ k˚ to reign S i.218; vase k˚ to bring into one's power J i.79; sandhiŋ k˚ to make an agreement Mhvs 16; sinehaŋ k˚ to become fond of J i.190. -- Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaŋ k˚ to make much of, i. e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i. e. keep free from PvA 17; Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i. e. to honour Pv iii.71. -- Note phrase kiŋ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht's) D i.120; or what about . . . J i.152.
Kalakala
Kalakala (adj.) [cp. Sk. kala] any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -- mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp. karakarā.
Kalati
Kalati [kal, kālayati] to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Th 1, 22.
Kalanda
Kalanda [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?] heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Miln 292 (sīsa˚).
Kalandaka
Kalandaka 1. a squirrel Miln 368; -- 2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J vi.224; -- nivāpa N. of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels D ii.116; Vin i.137; ii.105, 290, etc.
Kalabha
Kalabha [cp. Sk. kalabha] the young of an elephant: see hatthi˚ and cp. kalāra.
Kalamba
Kalamba (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens] N. of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish J iv.46 (=tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla -- kanda; gloss BB however gives latā -- tanta); vi.578. See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba. -- rukkha the Cadamba tree J vi.290.
Kalambaka
Kalambaka=kalamba, the C. tree J vi.535.
Kalambukā
Kalambukā (f.)=kalambaka D iii.87 (vv. ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. iii.84) has "bamboo."
Kalala
Kalala (m. nt.) 1. mud J i.12, 73; Miln 125, 324, 346; Mhbv 150; PvA 215 (= kaddama); DhA iii.61; iv.25. -- su˚ "well -- muddied" i. e. having soft soil (of a field) Miln 255. -- 2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming J ii.155. -- 3. in Embryology: the "soil," the placenta S i.206=Kvu ii.494; Miln 125. Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda, pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1 -- 5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd1 120; & cp. Miln 40). -- 4. the foetus, appl. to an egg, i. e. the yolk Miln 49. -- In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚. -- gata (a) fallen into the mud Miln 325; -- gahaṇa "mud thicket," dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes J i.329; -- kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (VvA 343); -- bhūta=prec., A i.9, cp. J ii.100; A iii.233; Miln 35; -- makkhita soiled with mud DhA iii.61.
Kalasa
Kalasa (nt.) [cp. Vedic kalaśa] 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar M iii.141; J iv.384; Dāvs iv.49; PvA 162. -- 2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22.
Kalaha
Kalaha [cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal] quarrel, dispute, fight A i.170; iv.196, 401; Sn 862, 863 (+vivāda); J i.483; Nd2 427; DhA iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water); iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ŋ udīreti to quarrel J v.395; karoti id. J i.191, 404; PvA 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise J v.412; DhA iii.255. -- a˚ harmony, accord, agreement S i.224; mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row J iv.88. -- âbhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Sn 276; Th 1, 958. -- ŋkara picking up a quarrel J vi.45; -- karaṇa quarrelling, fighting J v.413; -- kāraka (f. -- ī) quarrelsome, pugnacious A iv.196; Vin i.328; ii.1; -- kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute J iii.151; vi.336; -- jāta "to whom a quarrel has arisen," quarrelling, disputing A i.70; Vin i.341; ii.86, 261; Ud 67; J iii.149; -- pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels, prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) D iii.182=DhsA 380; -- vaḍḍhana (nt.) inciting & incitement to quarrel J v.393, 394; -- sadda brawl, dispute J vi.336.
Kalā
Kalā [Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. ska/llw, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by "sankhyāne."] 1. a small fraction of a whole, generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon's disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see VvA 103; DhA ii.63), in this sense in the expression kalaŋ nâgghati soḷasiŋ "not worth an infinitesimal portion of"=very much inferior to S i.19; iii.156= v.44=It 20; A i.166, 213; iv.252; Ud 11; Dh 70; Vv 437; DhA ii.63 (=koṭṭhāsa) DhA iv.74. -- 2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn) J i.163. -- kalaŋ upeti to be divided or separated Miln 106; DhA i.119; see sakala. -- In cpd. with bhū as kalī -- bhavati to be divided, broken up J i.467 (=bhijjati). Cp. vikala.
Kalāpa
Kalāpa [cp. Sk. kalāpa] 1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch; sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo -- or sugar -- canes, sometimes of hair and feathers S iv.290 (tiṇa˚); J i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚); Miln 33; PvA 257, 260 (ucchu˚), 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora -- piñja˚) -- 2. a quiver Vin ii.192; It 68; J vi.236; Miln 418; PvA 154, 169. -- 3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚) 626 (phassa -- pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚) 78, 120. -- agga (nt.) "the first (of the) bunch," the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms DhA i.98.
-- 199 --
-- sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, 606, 626 sq.
Kalāpaka
Kalāpaka 1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mhvs 30, 67. -- 2. a bundle, group J i.239.
Kalāpin
Kalāpin (adj.) [fr. kalāpa] having a quiver J vi.49 (acc. pl. ˚ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) S iv.201; ii.114 (naḷa˚).
Kalābuka
Kalābuka (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalāpaka] a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, 144, 319;
Kalāya
Kalāya a kind of pea, the chick -- pea M i.245 (kaḷāya); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124; J ii.75 (=varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja -- māsa); J iii.370; DhA i,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at A v.170=S i.150= Sn p. 124 (where the size of an ever -- increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi). -- matta of the size of a chick -- pea S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124 (ḷ); J iii.370; DhA i.319.
Kalāyati
Kalāyati [Denom. fr. kalā] to have a measure, to outstrip J i.163 (taken here as "trick, deceive").
Kalāra
Kalāra in hatthi˚ at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at DhA i.58 which reads kalabha, undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā.
Kali
Kali (m.) [cp. Sk. kali] 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); "the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka . . . An extra seed was called the kali" (Dial. ii.368 n.) D ii.349; J i.380; Dh 252 (= DhA iii.375) at J vi.228, 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q. v. -- 2. (=kaliggaha) an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality, demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliŋ vicināti "gathers up demerit" Sn 658; appamatto kali . . . akkhesu dhanaparājayo . . . mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye S i.149=A ii.3=v.171, 174=Sn 659=Nett 132; cp. M iii.170; A v.324; Dh 202 (=DhA iii.261 aparādha). -- 3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see ˚yuga). -- 4. sinful, a sinner Sn 664 (=pāpaka). <-> 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Th 2, 458, 501; J v.134. -- (g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw; symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly & moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds) M i.403=406; iii.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha; -- devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Miln 191 (see Miln trsl. i.266 n.); -- (p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -- yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -- sāsana (nt.) in ˚ŋ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93, 360.
Kalingara
Kalingara (m. nt.) (BB ḷ) [cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of "log" see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara] 1. a log, a piece of wood M i.449, 451; S ii.268; DhA iii.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q. v.) Dh 41; DhA i.321 (=kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Th 2, 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni DhA ii.142. -- 2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128, cp. sopāna -- kaḷevara. -- ûpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one's head on when sleeping S ii.267; Miln 366; -- kaṇḍa a wooden arrow J iii.273 (acittaŋ k˚: without feeling)
Kalingu
Kalingu (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka] the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel J vi.537.
Kalita
Kalita [pp. of kalati] sounding indistinctly Th 1, 22.
Kalusa
Kalusa [cp. Sk. kaluṣa] muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA i.275.
Kalevara
Kalevara see kaḷebara.
Kalya
Kalya see kalla; -- rūpa pleased, glad Sn 680, 683; a˚ not pleased Sn 691.
Kalyatā
Kalyatā (f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J ii.12. -- 2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a˚ opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; DhsA 377 (=gilānabhāva).
Kalyāṇa
Kalyāṇa (& kallāṇa) [Vedic kalyāṇa] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA 9, 116) and kusala (S ii.118; PvA 9, 122); opp. pāpa (S i.83; M i.43; PvA 101, 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚= katûpakāra PvA 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ D i.62 and ≈; S v.152; Sn p. 103; VvA 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc. -- As m. one who observes the sīlapadaŋ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) A ii.222, cp. k˚ -- mittā=sīlâdīhi adhikā SnA 341. -- S iv.303; v.2, 29, 78; A iii.77; iv.361; Vin ii.8, 95; J i.4; Miln 297; -- kata˚ (opp. kata -- pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. It 25, etc. (see kata ii.1 a). k˚ of kitti ( -- sadda) D i.49 (=DA i.146 seṭṭha); S iv.374; v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte . . . bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin); Sn 338. -- 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin i.117; A iii.109; cp. bhadraŋ. <-> (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action J v.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; -- ˚ŋ karoti to perform good deeds S i.72; A i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; PvA 122. -- (c) kindness, good service J i.378; iii.12 (=upakāra), 68 (˚ŋ karoti). <-> (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni, viz. kesa˚, maŋsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth J i.394; DhA i.387. -- ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA i.9; -- -- âdhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S ii.154, 158; It 70, 78; Vbh 341; -- kāma desiring what is good A iii.109; -- kārin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. pāpa˚) S i.227, cp. J ii.202=iii.158; DhsA 390; (m.) who has rendered a service J vi.182; -- carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vbh 341; -- jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable J iii.82; -- dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Sn 551=Th 1, 821 (+kañcanasannibhattaca); -- dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; iii.133; S v.352; Pug 26; It 96; Pv iv.135; Miln 129; DhA i.380; J ii.65 (=sundara˚), PvA 230 (= sundara -- sīla); sīlavā+k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) M i.334; S iv.303; PvA 13. -- k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous A ii.224. -- (2) the Good Doctrine DhA i.7. -- ˚tā the state of having a virtuous character A ii.36; -- pañña "wise in goodness" possessed of true wisdom Th 1, 506; It 97; -- paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā J iii.342; -- paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply A iii.58, cp. Miln 3; -- pāpaka good and bad J v.238; vi.225; Kvu 45; (nt.) goodness and evil J v.493; -- pīti one who delights in what is good Sn 969; -- bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77; iii.160 (of a householder); -- mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he is said to "have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise"; M i.43 (opp. pāpa˚); S i.83, 87 (do.); A iv.30, 357; Pug 37, 41; J iii.197; Bdhd 90; a˚ not a virtuous friend DhsA 247. -- 2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence, but any other Arahant can act as such S v.3; Vism 89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna -- dāyaka. -- mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous S i.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection S v.3, 32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7
-- 200 --
bojjhangas S v.78=101; A i.16, 83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu D iii.212; A iv.29, 282; Th 2, 213; It 10; Dhs 1328=Pug 24; Vism 107. -- a˚ not having a virtuous friend and good adviser DhsA 247. -- rūpa beautiful, handsome J iii.82; v.204; -- vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly D i.93, 115; A ii.97; iii.114, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; Miln 21; DA i.263 (=madhura -- vacana); a˚ not pronouncing or reciting clearly D i.94. 122; -- ˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address A i.38; -- vāca, usually in form. k˚ k˚ -- vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato D i.114; A ii.97; iii.114, 195, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; DA i.282; -- sadda a lucky word or speech J ii.64; -- sampavanka a good companion A iv.357 (in phrase k˚ -- mitta k˚ -- sahāya k˚ -- s˚); Pug 37; -- ˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend S i.87. -- sahāya a good, virtuous companion A iv.284; 357; Pug 37; cp. prec., -- ˚tā=prec. S i.87; -- sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Th 1, 1008; It 96.
Kalyāṇaka
Kalyāṇaka (adj.) [fr. last] good, virtuous DA i.226; DhsA 32.
Kalyāṇatā
Kalyāṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kalyāṇa] beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚ -- kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20.
Kalyāṇin
Kalyāṇin (adj.) [fr. kalyāṇa] (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5; -- (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper J v.124; Ud 59; -- (c) f. [cp. -- ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman, a belle, usually in janapada˚ D i.193=M ii.40; S ii.234; J i.394; v.154.
Kalla & Kalya
Kalla1 & Kalya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kalya] 1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291. -- 2. clever, able, dexterous Miln 48, 87. -- 3. ready, prepared J ii.12, cp. -- citta. -- 4. fit, proper, right S ii.13 (pañha). -- nt. kallaŋ it is proper, befitting (with inf. or inf. -- substitute): vacanāya proper to say D i.168, 169; A i.144; abhinandituŋ D ii.69; -- kallaŋ nu [kho] is it proper? M iii.19; S iv.346; Miln 25. -- a˚ 1. not well, unfit Th 2, 439, cp. ThA 270. <-> 2. unbecoming, unbefitting D ii.68; J v.394. -- kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291; -- kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) S iii.265; -- citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k˚, mudu -- citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚, etc. D i.110=148=ii.41=A iv.209=Vin i.16=ii.156; VvA 53, 286; Vv 5019 (=kammaniya -- citta "her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma"); PvA 38. -- cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J ii.12 (cp citta -- kalyatā); -- rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Th 1, 212, -- 2. pleased, joyful (kalya˚) Sn 680, 683, 691; -- sarīra having a sound body, healthy J ii.51; a˚ -- tā not being sound in body, ill -- health VvA 243.
Kalla
Kalla2 (m. nt.) ashes J iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚ -- vassa a shower of ashes J iv.389.
Kallaka
Kallaka (adj.) [fr. last] in a˚ unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62; J iii.464; DhsA 377.
Kallatā
Kallatā (f.) see kalyatā; -- a˚ unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd2 290= Dhs 1156=1236=Nett 86; DhsA 378; Nett 26. The reading in Nd2 is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā.
Kallahāra
Kallahāra [cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra > kallahāra] the white esculent water lily J v.37; Dpvs xvi.19.
Kallita
Kallita (nt.) [fr. kalla] pleasantness, agreeableness S iii.270, 273 (samādhismiŋ -- ˚kusala); A iii.311; iv.34 (id.).
Kallola
Kallola [cp. Sk. kallola] a billow, in -- ˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44.
Kaḷāya
Kaḷāya=kalāya.
Kaḷāra
Kaḷāra (adj.) [cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny] always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the "Underworld" PvA 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina -- dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy -- tales) J v.91 (=nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara -- dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (=k˚ -- danto PvA 90).
Kaḷārikā
Kaḷārikā (f.) [fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth] a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v. l. for kāḷ˚). Cp. kalāra.
Kaḷingara
Kaḷingara=kalingara.
Kaḷimb(h)aka
Kaḷimb(h)aka (cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116, 317 (v. l. kaḷimpaka).
Kaḷīra
Kaḷīra the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e. g. coco -- nut tree) which is edible Sn 38 (vaŋsa˚=veḷugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58); Th 1, 72; J i.74, cp. iii.179; vi.26; Miln 201 (vaŋsa˚); Vism 255 (vaŋsa˚ -- cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚; KhA 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra -- daṇḍa). -- (c)chejja (nt.) "the cutting off of the sprout," a kind of torture Miln 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalīccheda.
Kaḷebara
Kaḷebara (: kale˚ and kalevara) (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. kaḍe- bara Av. Ś. ii.26] 1. the body S i.62=A ii.48;=iv.429 =M i.82; J ii.437, iii.96, 244; Vism 49, 230. -- 2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaŋ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, D ii.355= M. i.49=Vbh 137; Th 2, 467; J iii.180, 511; v.459; Mhvs 2010; 3781; PvA 80. Cp. kuṇapa. -- 3. the step in a flight of stairs M ii.92, cp. kalingara.
Kaḷopī
Kaḷopī (=khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi ThA 219; J v.252) M i.77, 342; S i.236=Th 2, 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); J v.252. -- On the form of the word (=karoṭi?) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pug A p. 231 as "ukkhalī, pacchi vā." -- mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel D i.166 =M i.77=342=A i.295= ii.206 (kumbhi -- m˚+kaḷopim˚); -- hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand A iv.376.
Kavaca
Kavaca (nt.) [cp. Sk. kavaca] a mail, a coat of mail, armour D ii.107=Ud 64 (appld to existence); Th 1, 614 (of sīla); J iv.92, 296; Miln 199, 257; Vism 73. -- jālikā a mail -- coat Miln 199.
Kavandha
Kavandha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha] 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107; cp. S ii.260 (asīsaka˚); Miln 292; DhA i.314. -- 2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body J v.424, 427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaŋsa xii.57).
Kavāṭa
Kavāṭa (m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114, 120, 207, 208 (see Vin ii.148 for the description of a door) iv.269, 304 (˚baddha =āvasatha); J i.19; Nd2 2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner). -- 2. dvāra˚ a door -- post J i.63; ii.334; PvA 280. -- 3. a window Mhvs ix.17; -- ˚ŋ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114, 120, 207; ˚ŋ ākoṭeti to knock at the door D i.88 (=DA i.252); Vin ii.208. -- akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, 154 (v. l. for akkavāta Text).
-- 201 --
-- piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door -- posts Vin i.47, 48=ii.208, 218; -- baddha "door -- bound," closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above).
Kavāṭaka
Kavāṭaka=kavāṭa Vin ii.148; DA i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚).
Kavi
Kavi [Vedic kavi] a poet S i.38; ii.267; Dāvs i.10; four classes enumd at A ii.230 & DA i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor. -- kata composed by poets S ii.267; A i.72.
Kavya
Kavya [cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer] poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) J vi.213, 216. -- kāra a poet J vi.216.
Kaviṭṭha
Kaviṭṭha [cp. kapittha] the elephant -- apple tree, Feronia elephantum J v.38 (˚vana).
Kasaka
Kasaka see kassaka.
Kasaṭa
Kasaṭa (metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting A i.72; J ii.96; 159. -- 2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect M i.281; Ps ii.87. -- (b) leavings, dregs VvA 288 (v. l. sakaṭa). -- (c) something bitter or nasty J ii.96; v.18. -- (d) bitter juice J ii.105 (nimba˚). -- sa˚ faulty, wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Miln 119. -- ôdaka insipid, tasteless water J ii.97.
Kasati
Kasati [kṛṣ or karṣ] to till, to plough S i.172, 173=Sn 80; Th i.531; J i.57; ii.165; vi.365. -- kassate (3rd sing. med.) Th 1, 530. -- pp. kattha (q. v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Miln 66, 82; DhA i.224.
Kasana
Kasana (nt.) ploughing, tilling J iv.167; vi.328, 364; Vism 384 (+vapana sowing).
Kasambu
Kasambu [Derivation uncertain] anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions S i.166; Sn 281=Miln 414=A iv.172; Vism 258 (maŋsa˚), 259 (parama˚). -- jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ S iv.181; A ii.240; iv.128, 201; Vin ii.236; Pug 27, 34, 36; Vism 57 (+avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -- jāta ibid. in vv. ll.
Kasā
Kasā (f.) [Vedic kaśā] a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna); M i.87, etc.; Dh 143; Miln 197. -- -- kasāhi tāḷeti to whip, lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kamma -- karaṇā) M i.87=A i.47= ii.122, etc.; PvA 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); DhA ii.39 (id.). -- niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dh 144 (=DhA iii.86); -- pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash J iii.178; -- hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75; 91=322; Sdhp 147.
Kasāya
Kasāya and Kasāva [Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction, distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva] 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151. -- 2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, 277; J v.198. -- 3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Miln 65; DhA ii.31. <-> 4. (of colour) reddish -- yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277. -- 5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa, moha) A i.112; Dh 10; Vbh 368. -- a˚ faultless, flawless, in akasāvattaŋ being without defect A i.112 (of a wheel, with -- sa˚ ibid.); -- sa˚ faulty DhA i.82; -- mahā˚ wicked J iv.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya) -- yoga an astringent remedy J v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.); -- rasa reddishyellow dye J ii.198; (kasāva) -- ôdaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -- gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -- rasa having an astringent taste ibid.; -- vaṇṇa of reddish -- yellow colour ibid.
Kasāyatta
Kasāyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. kasāya] astringency Miln 56.
Kasi
Kasi and Kasī (f.) [fr. kasāti] tilling, ploughing; agricul- ture, cultivation M ii.198; S i.172, 173=Sn 76 sq.; Vin iv.6; Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); PvA 7; Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā); VvA 63. -- ˚ŋ kasati to plough, to till the land J i.277; Vism 284. -- kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture J ii.165, 300; iii.270. -- karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field PvA 66; -- khetta a place for cultivation, a field PvA 8 (kasī˚); -- gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding D i.135; -- bhaṇḍa ploughing implements DhA i.307.
Kasiṇa
Kasiṇa1 [Vedic kṛtsna] (adj.) entire, whole J iv.111, 112.
Kasiṇa
Kasiṇa2 [Deriv. uncertain] (nt.) one of the aids to kam- maṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at A v.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k˚ -- āyatanāni bhāventi]; paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚, odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚ -- that is, earth, water, fire, air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) M ii.14; D iii.268, 290; Nett 89, 112; Dhs 202; Ps i.6, 95; cp. Manual 49 -- 52; Bdhd 4, 90 sq., 95 sq. -- For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚) we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn') ākāsa˚ Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202. -- Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Ps i.49, 143, 149. -- See further J i.313; iii.519; DhsA 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚ -- ânulomaŋ; k˚ -- paṭilomaŋ; k˚ -- ânupaṭilomaŋ; jhānânulomaŋ; jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚ -- ânupaṭi˚; jh˚ -- ukkantikaŋ; k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚ -- ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. <-> Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi -- ) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117. -- Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaŋ, adho, tiriyaŋ, advayaŋ, appamāṇaŋ; M ii.15, etc. -- kasiṇaŋ oloketi to fix one's gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen J v.314; ˚ŋ samannāharati to concentrate one's mind on the k. J iii.519. -- āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) D iii.268; M ii.14; Ps i.28, etc.; -- ārammaṇa=˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚, odāta˚, āloka˚). -- kamma the k. practice J i.141; iv.306; v.162, 193. -- jhāna the k. meditation DhsA 413. -- dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī -- kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours). -- parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. J i.8, 245; iii.13, 526; DhsA 187; -- ˚ŋ katheti to give instructions in these preparations J iii.369; ˚ŋ karoti to perform the k -- preparations J iv.117; v.132, 427; vi.68; -- maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp. Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. J iii.501; DhA iv.208. -- samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd2 4668 (ten such).
Kasita
Kasita (pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -- a˚ un- tilled ibid. 27, 44. -- Cp. vi˚.
Kasira
Kasira (adj.) [Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain] miserable, painful, troubled, wretched A iv.283; Sn 574; J ii.136; iv.113= vi.17; Pv iv.121 (=PvA 229 dukkha). -- adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty J v.435; -- kasirena (instr.) D i.251; M i.104; S i.94; Vin i.195; J i.338; iii.513. a˚ without pain, easy, comfortable J vi.224 (=niddukkha); -- lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī A iv.342) in formula
-- 202 --
akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. M i.33; S ii.278; A i.184; ii.23, 36; iv.106; Ud 36; Pug 11, 12. -- ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth) J v.435; -- vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood A i.107=Pug 51.
Kaseruka
Kaseruka [etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?] a plant, shrub SnA 284 (v. l. kaŋsīruka for kiŋsuka?). See also kaṭeruha.
Kassaka
Kassaka [fr. kasati] a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman D i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi -- vaḍḍhako); A i.241; A. i.229, 239 (the three duties of a farmer); S i.172=Sn 76; iii.155 (v. l. for T. kasaka); iv. 314; Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DA i.170; often in similes, e. g. Pv i.11; ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320. -- vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant S i.115 (of Māra).
Kassati
Kassati [kṛṣ] see ava˚, anu˚ (aor. anvakāsi), pari˚; other- wise kasati; cp. also kissati.
Kassāma
Kassāma fut. of karoti.
Kahaŋ
Kahaŋ [cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.] interr. adv. where? whither? Vin i.217; D i.151; Sn p. 106; J ii.7; iii.76; v.440. -- k -- nu kho where then? D i.92; ii.143, 263.
Kahāpaṇa
Kahāpaṇa [doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper coin M ii.163; A i.250; v.83 sq.; Vin ii.294; iii. 238; DhsA 280 (at this passage included under rajataŋ, silver, together with loha -- māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu -- māsaka); S i.82; A i.250; Vin ii.294; iv.249; J i.478, 483; ii.388; Mhvs 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny, and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin. -- Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (J i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128, 217; PvA 153, 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (DhA iii.239); 80 (PvA 102); 10 or 20 (DhA iv.226); 8 (which is considered, socially, almost the lowest sum J iv.138; i.483). A nominal fine of 1 k. (=a farthing) Miln 193. -- ekaŋ k˚ pi not a single farthing J i.2; similarly eka -- kahāpaṇen' eva Vism 312. -- Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515. Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at DhA iii.254. -- See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100 -- 102, fig. 24; Miln trsl. i.239. -- gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe DhA iv.104; -- vassa a shower of money Dh 186 (=DhA iii.240).
Kahāpaṇaka
Kahāpaṇaka (nt.) N. of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors M i.87=A i.47, ii.122; cp. Miln 97, 290, 358.
Kā
Kā (indecl.) interj. imitating the crow's cry: kā kā J iv.72.
Kā˚
Kā˚ in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa.
Kāka
Kāka [onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S i.124= Sn 448; J i.164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA iii.352; said to have ten bad qualities A v.149; J i.342; iii.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40. -- As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass -- eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Sn 201; PvA 198 (=dhanka); cp. kākoḷa. -- In cpds. often used derisively. -- f. kākī J ii.39, 150; iii.431. -- āmasaka "touching as much as a crow," attr. of a person not enjoying his meals DhA iv.16; DhsA 404; -- uṭṭepaka a crow -- scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371. -- opamā the simile of the crow DhA ii.75. -- orava "crow -- cawing," appld to angry and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -- ôlūka crows and owls J ii.351; DhA i.50; Mhbv 15; -- guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122; -- nīḷa a crow's nest J ii.365; -- paññā "crow -- wisdom," i. e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J v.255, 258; cp. vi.358; -- paṭṭanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by crows J vi. 456; -- pāda crow's foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -- peyya "(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it," full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ "with even banks and drinkable for crows" (i. e. with the water on a level with the land) D i.244; S ii.134 (do.); D ii.89; M i.435; A iii.27; J ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; PvA 202. See also peyya. -- bhatta "a crow's meal," i. e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows J ii.149; -- vaṇṇa "crow -- coloured" N. of a king Mhvs 2211; -- vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17; -- sīsa the head of a crow J ii.351; as adj.: having a crow's head, appld to a fabulous flying horse D ii.174; cp. J ii.129; -- sūra a "crow -- hero," appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh 244; DhA iii.352; -- ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115.
Kākacchati
Kākacchati [derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr. kath; should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?] to snore Vin iv.355; A iii.299; J i.61, 160 (=ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DA i.42 ghurû -- ghurûpassāsī); i.318; vi.57; Miln 85; Vism 311.
Kākaṇa
Kākaṇa (nt.) [kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa=less than a particle] a coin of very small value Sdhp 514.
Kākaṇikā
Kākaṇikā (f.)=prec. J i.120, 419; vi.346; DA i.212; DhA i.391; VvA 77=DhA iii.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa; it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz., kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā "for nothing." -- agghanaka "not even a farthing's worth," worth next to nothing J vi.346.
Kākola
Kākola and Kākoḷa [Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form] a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) J iii.246 (=vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā . . . khādanti naraŋ kibbisakārinaŋ); vi.566. -- gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Sn 675; VV5215 (=VvA 227).
Kāca
Kāca1 [Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non -- Aryan] a glass -- like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; ii.112 (cp. Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock -- crystal). -- a˚ not of glass or quartz, i. e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D ii.244=J ii.418 (= akakkasa) Sn 476. In the same sense also MVastu i.164. -- ambha (nt.) red crystal J vi.268 (=rattamaṇi); -- maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; ii.112.
Kāca
Kāca2 [cp. Sk. kāca & kāja] a pingo, a yoke, a carrying- pole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato -- kājo) with only one basket and "middle" p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; J i.154; v.13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA 168. -- daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DA i.41.
Kācanā
Kācanā (f.) [fr. kāca2] balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vbh 352=Vism 27.
-- 203 --
Kācin
Kācin (adj.) [fr. kāca1], only neg. a˚ free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (=niddosa VvA 253).
Kāja
Kāja=kāca2, i. e. carrying -- pole M iii.148; J i.9; iii.325; v.200; Dpvs xii.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA iv.232. -- koṭi the end of a carrying -- pole J i.9; v.200. -- hāraka a pingo -- bearer DhA iv.128.
Kāṭakoṭacikā
Kāṭa -- koṭacikā [kāṭa + koṭacikā] a low term of abuse, "pudendum virile & muliebre" Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa -- nimittaŋ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89.
Kāṇa
Kāṇa (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāṇa] blind, usually of one eye, occa- sionally of both (see PugA 227) S i.94; Vin ii.90= A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Th 2, 438; J i.222 (one -- eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); DhA iii.71. -- kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -- kacchapa "the blind turtle" in the well -- known parable of a man's chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th 2, 500 (=ThA 290); Miln 204; DhsA 60; cp. M iii.169=S v.455.
Kātabba
Kātabba (adj. -- n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) J i.264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA 30.
Kātuŋ
Kātuŋ and Kātu˚ (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti. -- kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 3734 (a˚). PvA 115; -- kāmatā the desire to do, etc. J iv.253; v.364. See also kattu˚ in same combns.
Kātuye
Kātuye is Vedic inf. of karoti Th 2, 418 (in ThA 268 taken as kātuŋ ayye!).
Kādamba
Kādamba [cp. Sk. kādamba] a kind of goose with grey wings J v.420; VvA 163.
Kādambaka
Kādambaka made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at J v.320.
Kānana
Kānana (nt.) [cp. Sk. kānana] a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Sn 1134 (= Nd2 s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Th 2, 254 (=ThA 210 upavana); J vi.557; Sdhp 574.
Kānāmā
Kānāmā f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272, 273; J vi.338.
Kāpilanī
Kāpilanī patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Th 2, 65.
Kāpilavatthava
Kāpilavatthava (adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. D ii.165, 256; S iv.182.
Kāpurisa
Kāpurisa [kad + purisa] a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188; D iii.279; S i.91, 154; ii.241; v.204; Th 1, 124, 495; J ii.42; vi.437; Pv ii.930 (PvA 125=lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path A iii.24; Th 2, 189.
Kāpotaka
Kāpotaka (adj.) [fr. kapota] pigeon -- coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton D i.55; Dh 149 (=DhA iii.112).
Kāpotikā
Kāpotikā (f.) [of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i. e. fr. kapi] a kind of intoxicating drink, of a reddish colour (like pigeons' fect) Vin iv.109, cp. J i.360 (surā).
Kāma
Kāma (m. nt.) [Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by "icchāyaŋ," cp. Vedic kāma, kam=Idg. *qā] to desire, cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore. -- 1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure -- giving, an object of sensual enjoyment; -- 2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense -- desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense -- desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma -- bhava or -- loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati's) of existence and part of the fifth or deva -- loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd1 1 distinguishes (1) vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i. e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd2 202, quoted DhA ii.162; iii.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (VvA 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi -- visayā. -- 2. chandarāga. -- 3. sabbasmiŋ lobha. -- 4. gāmadhamma. -- 5. hitacchanda. -- 6. serībhāva, i. e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust, (5) effort to do good, (6) self -- determination. In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions, kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k. stands first on the list of the six factors of existence: kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at A iii.410 sq. as regards their origin, difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. <-> Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion), with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. <-> The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma -- cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga, excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst; (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon, or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd2 200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. DhsA 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vbh 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām -- ogha, kāma -- yoga, kām -- upādāna at Nd2 200, cp. Vism 141 (kām -- ogha, ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at D iii.238: kāme avigata -- rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha, ˚taṇha. See also kāma -- chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma -- context are verbs the primary meaning of which is "adhering to" or "grasping," hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira), upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat. torreo= thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix=melting), etc. -- On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati "to be eaten up" pariḍayhati "to be burnt," etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma -- pariyesanāyā ussukko, A i.68; cp. M i.463; iii.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next -- world happiness. Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv, where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha "fully equipped with all objects of pleasure," e. g. Pv i.105; PvA 46. The other -- world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: S v.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiŋ so nâdhigacchati Dh 187; rāgaŋ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Sn 361, see also It 94. -- Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its
-- 204 --
most marked application in the sphere of the sexual: kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla) Pug 38, 39; It 63, etc. itthi -- kāmehi paricāreti "he enjoys himself with the charms of woman" S iv.343. Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Sn 1041. Kāmatthā for sexual amusement A iii.229. Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saŋyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge, right effort and renunciation. "To give up passion" as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaŋ pahānaŋ, kāmasaññānaŋ pariññā, kāma -- pipāsānaŋ -- paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaŋ samugghāto kāma -- pariḷāhānaŋ vūpasamo Vin iii.111; -- kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto "uddhaŋsoto" ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called "one who is above the stream" Dh 218; cp. Th 2, 12; -- tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Sn 771; -- yo kāme parivajjeti Sn 768=Nett 69. -- nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Sn 359; -- ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaŋ A iii.69. -- Kāmānaŋ pariññaŋ paññāpeti Gotamo M i.84; cp. A v.64; kāme pajahati: S i.12=31; Sn 704; kāmānaŋ vippahāna S i.47; -- ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Sn 464; -- kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) A iv.410; kāme panudati Dh 383=S i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaŋ analaŋkaritvā Sn 59; -- kāmesu anapekkhin Sn 166=Ś i.16 (abbrev.); S ii.281; Sn 857; -- cp. rāgaŋ vinayetha . . . Sn 361. vivicc' eva kāmehi, aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna -- exercise. Applications of these expressions: -- kāmesu palāḷita A iii.5; kāmesu mucchita S i.74; kāmālaye asatta S i.33; kāmesu kathaŋ nameyya S i.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin S i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Sn 823 (gadhitā Nd1); -- kāmesu asaññata Sn 243; -- yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 401; -- Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Sn 845; kāmesu giddha D iii.107; Sn 774; kāmesu gedhaŋ āpajjati S i.73; -- na so rajjati kāmesu Sn 161; -- kāmānaŋ vasam upāgamum Sn 315 (=kāmānaŋ āsattataŋ pāpuniŋsu SnA 325); kāme parivajjeti Sn 768, kāme anugijjhati Sn 769. Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. A ii.177), and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says "Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo" (see k -- sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) S i.9, 117; aniccā (transitory) S i.22; kāmā citrā madhurā "pleasures are manifold and sweet" (i. e. tasty) Sn 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. M i.91; see Nd2 71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app' assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at J iv.118. -- atittaŋ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaŋ Dh 48; -- na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito "not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures -- of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand" Dh 186; cp. M i.130; Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224). -- Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaŋ kāmato vippamuttassa n'atthi soko kuto bhayan ti "of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear" Dh 215. <-> Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are: bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha A iv.289; Nd2 p. 62 on Sn 51; same, except salla & gabbha: A iii.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha's discourse on pains of pleasures M i.85 and parallel passages (see e. g. Nd2 199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice, quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness. Kāmānaŋ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) M i.85 sq. =Nd2 199, quot. SnA 114 (on Sn 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaŋ okāraŋ saŋkilesaŋ A iv.186, 209, 439; -- they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Sn 436; -- yo evamvādī . . . n'atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataŋ āpajjati A i.266=M i.305 sq. Similes. -- In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi -- kankhala, a chain of bones; <-> (2) maŋsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; -- (3) tiṇ'ukkā, a torch of grass; (4) angāra -- kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; -- (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings; -- (7) rukkha -- phala, the fruit of a tree; -- (8) asisūna, a slaughter -- house; -- (9) satti -- sūla, a sharp stake; -- (10) sappa -- sira, a snake's head, i. e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25; M i.130; A iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd2 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at D iii.283; A iv.224=v.175; No. 5 at DhA iii.240; No. 8 at M i.144; No. 9 at S i.128=Th 2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaŋ for khandhāsaŋ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Th 2, 451, and several at many other places of the Canon. Cases used adverbially: -- kāmaŋ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaŋ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses S i.227; J i.203; PvA 63, 113, 176; yena kāmaŋ wherever he likes, just as he pleases A iv.194; Vv i.11 (= icchānurūpaŋ VvA 11) -- (b) willingly, gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. S i.222; J i.233; iii.147; iv.273; VvA 95; kāmaŋ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ "willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body" M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28; J i.71, 110; -- kāmasā (instr.) in same sense J iv.320; vi.181; -- kāmena (instr.) do. J v.222, 226; -- kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) J iii.466; iv.285, 365; v.294; vi.563, 589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467. -- akāmā unwillingly D i.94; J vi.506; involuntarily J v.237. ˚kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing, in kāma -- kāma pleasure -- loving Sn 239 (kāme kāmayanto SnA 284); Dh 83 (cp. on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 39 -- 41); same expln as prec. at DhA ii.156; Th 2, 506. -- atthakāma well -- wishing, desirous of good, benevolent J i.241; v.504 (anukampakā +); sic lege for attakāmarūpā, M i.205, iii,155, cf. S i.44 with ib. 75; A ii.21; Pv iv.351; VvA 11 (in quotation); PvA 25, 112; mānakāma proud S i.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish A ii.240; dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212; dhamma˚ Sn 92; pasaŋsa˚ Sn 825. So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to, wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚, dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚, bhojetu˚, etc. -- sakāma ( -- adj.) willing J v.295. -- akāma 1. not desiring, i. e. unwilling: M ii.181; mayhaŋ akāmāya against my wish (=mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, J v.121, 183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless, passionless Sn 445. -- nikkāma same Sn 1131. -- agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment M ii.43; Vv 163 (=VvA 79, attributed to the Paranimmita -- vasavattino -- devā); -- aggi the fire of passion J v.487; -- ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire, No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -- âdhikaraṇa having its cause in desire M i.85; S i.74; -- âdhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A iii.168; J vi.159; -- ânusārin pursuing worldly pleasures J ii.117; -- andha blinded by passion Ud 76=Th 1, 297; -- âbhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D ii.274; -- âbhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA 3; -- âvacara "having its province in kāma," belonging to the
-- 205 --
realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D i.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k˚ -- devapariyāpanna); J i.47; Dhs 1, 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh 324; Vism 88, 372, 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA 138. -- kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma -- worlds Dhs 414, 418, 431; -- devatā PvA 138 (+brahmādevatā) and -- devā the gods of the pleasure -- heavens J i.47; v.5; vi.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara -- devaloka J vi.586, -- bhūmi and -- loka the plane or world of kāma Ps i.83; J vi.99; see also avacara; -- âvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma J vi.99; Sdhp 254 (˚ika); -- assāda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA 262; DA i.89, 311; -- ātura affected by passion, love -- sick J iii.170; -- ārāma pleasure -- loving A iv.438 (gihī k -- bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā); -- ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i. e. kāma -- loka) S i.33=Sn 177; Sn 306; -- āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality J ii.330; -- āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma -- chando, etc. (see above k -- chando) Vbh 364, 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh 373; Dhs 1096, 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi˚) at It 49; Vbh 364; cp. D i.84; ii.81; iii.216; M i.7; -- itthi a pleasure -- woman, a concubine Vin i.36; J i.83; v.490; vi.220; -- upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA 79; -- upādāna clinging to sensuality, arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ D iii.230; M i.51; Vbh 136, 375; Vism 569; -- ûpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita -- kāmā (including mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals), (2) Nimmāna -- ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita -- vasavattino devā D iii.218; It 94. -- ûpasaŋhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā "forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires" D i.245=M i.85; 504; D ii.265; M iii.267; VvA 127. -- esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ D iii.216 270; A ii.42; Vbh 366; It 48; S v.54; -- ogha the flood of sensual desires A iii.69; D iii.230, 276; Vbh 375; Vism 141; DhsA 166; Nd2 178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚). -- kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27; -- kara the fulfilment of one's desires J v.370 (=kāmakiriyā) -- karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M i.173; It 56; -- kalala the mud of passions J iii.293; -- kāra the fulfilment of desires Sn 351=Th 1, 1271; -- kārin acting according to one's own inclination Th 1. 971; or acting willingly DA i.71; -- koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (=kāmaguṇa) J iii.382; v.149; DA i.121; PvA 205; -- kopa the fury of passion Th 1, 671; -- gavesin, pleasure -- seeking Dh 99=Th 1, 992. -- gijjha J i.210 and -- giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love J iii.432; v.256; vi.245; -- giddhimā, same J vi.525. -- giddhin f. ˚inī same Mhvs vi.3. -- guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. A iii.411; D i.245; ii.271; iii.131, 234; Nd2 s. v.; Ps i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DA i.121, where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81. -- In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in "heaven": saggaŋ lokaŋ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k -- guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana S i.5; M i.505; A iii.40, iv.118; in various other connections S iv.202; Vv 307; Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; expl. PvA 205 by kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi); PvA 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma -- kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā) S v.409; A v.272, but the same passage with "dibbehi pañcahi k˚ -- guṇehi samappita . . ." also refers to earthly pleasures, e. g. S i.79, 80 (of kings); S v.342 (of a Cakkavatti); A ii.125; iv.55, 239; v.203; of the soul D i.36; Vbh 379; other passages simply quoting k -- g˚ as worldly pleasures are e. g. S i.16=Sn 171; S i.92; iv.196. 326; A iii.69 (itthirūpasmiŋ); D i.60, 104; Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists, however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection: their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with "pañc' ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā . . ." and is found at various places, e. g. in full at M i.85=Nd2 s. v.; M i.454; ii.42; iii.114; quoted at M i.92; A iii.411; iv.415, 430, 449, 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are: gedho pañcannaŋ k˚ -- guṇānaŋ adhivacanaŋ A iii.312 sq.; asisūnā . . . adhivac˚ M i.144; nivāpo . . . adhivac˚ M. i.155; sāvaṭṭo . . . adhivac˚ It 114. In connection w. rata & giddha PvA 3; pahīna M iii.295; gathita & mucchita M i.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ "Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures" Dh 371; cittassa vossaggo Vbh 370; asantuṭṭha Vbh 350. See also Sn 50, 51, 171, 284, 337. -- guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga S ii.99; J iv.220; Dhs A.371; -- gedha a craving for pleasure S i.100; ThA 225; -- cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Sn 719. -- citta impure thought J ii.214; -- chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) D i.156, 246; iii.234, 278; A i.231; iv.457; A i.134=Sn 1106; S i.99; v.64; Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd2 200, 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saŋyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1 -- 10 at Nd2 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vbh 364; Dhs 1114, 1153; Nd2 ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order: 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at A ii.10; -- as nine (like above, omitting gedha) at Vbh 374; Dhs 1097; -- as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage A ii.10) at M i.241; -- as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at S iv.188; -- as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, 1486. See also D i.246; iii.234, 269; Ps i.103, 108; ii.22, 26, 44, 169; Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -- jāla the net of desires Th 1, 355; -- taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ D iii.216, 275; It 50; Vbh 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaŋyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga -- sahagatā, tatratatr' âbhinandinī at Vin i.10= Vbh 101; as k -- taṇhāhi khajjamāno k -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno M i.504. See also D ii.308; S i.131; A ii.11; Th 2, 140; J ii.311; v.451; Miln 318. -- da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) J vi.498, 525; Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138; -- dada= prec. Pv ii.918; PvA 112; J vi.508; of a stone Miln 243, 252; of Nibbāna Miln 321; Kh viii.10: esa devamanussānaŋ sabbakāmadado nidhi "this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men"; -- dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures J iv.118; -- duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk J v.33; vi.214; f. ˚duhā the cow of plenty J iv.20; -- dhātu "element of desire." i. e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality, extending from the Avīci -- niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita -- vasavatti -- devas S ii.151; Th 1, 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiŋsā˚, nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚, Vbh 86; Nett 97; D iii.215= Vbh 363 (as the first three=akusaladhātus); Vbh 404. See also D iii.275; Th 1, 378; J v.454; Vism 486 (cp.
-- 206 --
Vbh 86). -- nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -- nidānaŋ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, M i.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -- nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion It 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. A iii.245; -- nissita depending on craving Miln 11; -- nīta led by desire J ii.214, 215; -- panka the mire of lusts Sn 945; Th 2, 354; J v.186, 256; vi.230, 505; Mhbv 3; -- paṭisandhi -- sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire M iii.230; -- pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion M i.242, 508; S iv.188; A i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); A ii.11; Vin iii.20; Nd2 374 (comd with ˚palibodha); DhA ii.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -- pāla the guardian of wishes, i. e. benefactor J v.221; -- pipāsā thirst for sensuality M i.242; A ii.11, and under k˚ -- chanda; -- bandha Ud 93, and -- bandhana the bonds of desire J vi.28, also in the sense of k˚ -- guṇā, q. v.; -- bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vbh 137. It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma -- dhātu A i.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36; D iii.216; A iv.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Sn 176, 1059, 1091 (expl. SnA 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61. ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire -- existence Dh 415=Sn 639. -- bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures, gratification of desires S i.74 (sāratta -- ˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Th 2, 464; It 94 ( -- ˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures); J ii.65; -- bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203, 287; ii.136, 149; D iii.124, 125; Miln 243, 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti -- beings It 94; as ten kinds A v.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy S i.78; cp. A iv.281, 438; S iv.333 sq.; A iii.351; Th 2, 486; J iii.154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k -- bhogino (etc.) A ii.6, cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām'ārāmo kāmarato kāma -- sammudita A iv.439; -- ˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) A ii.244; -- bhojin=˚bhogin Ud 65; -- magga the path of sensuous pleasures J v.67; -- matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures J vi.231; -- mucchā sensual stupor or languor S iv.189; A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -- yoga application to sensuous enjoyment, one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) A ii.10; only the first two at It 95; cp. D iii.230, 276; S v.59; DhsA 166; -- rata delighting in pleasures J v.255; -- rati amorous enjoyment (as arati) Th 2, 58 and 141; J i.211; iii.396; iv.107. -- n'atthi nissaraṇaŋ loke kiŋ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī S i.128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaŋ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaŋ sukhan S i.25=Dh 27=Th 1, 884; -- rasa the taste of love J ii.329; iii.170; v.451; -- rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, 1460; Nett 28; M i.433 sq.; D iii.254, 282; S i.22= A iii.411; S i.13, 53; iii.155; Th 2, 68, 77; PvA 6; see also k -- chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Sn 139 (˚ŋ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k -- rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; SnA 205; -- rūpa a form assumed at will VvA 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vbh 426; -- lāpin talking as one likes D i.91 (=DA i.257 yadicchaka -- bhāṇin); -- lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin A iii.353; -- loka the world of pleasures=kāmâvacara, q. v. Sdhp 233, 261; -- vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean J ii.255= iii.409=Vv 33191; J v.157; Vv 163; VvA 80, 143, 146; -- vasika under the influence of passions J ii.215; -- vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiŋsā˚) D iii.215, 226; M i.114; A i.68; J i.63; iii.18, 375; iv.490; vi.29; It 82, 115; Vbh 362; Miln 310; -- vega the impulse of lust J vi.268; -- sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q. v. under sagga J i.105; ii.130; iii.258; iv.490; vi.29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k -- âvacara; -- sankappa-bahula full of aspirations after pleasure A iii.145, 259; D iii.215; -- sanga attachment to passion Ud 75; -- saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) D i.182; iii.215; M ii.262; S i.126; Vbh 363; Th 1, 1039; virata k˚ āya S i.53=Sn 175; -- saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust A iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaŋ virājetvā); -- sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha M i.241; S iv.188; A ii.10); see k -- chanda; -- sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness, valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaŋ ime pañca k -- guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaŋ somanassaŋ idaŋ vuccati k -- sukhaŋ A iv.415; S iv.225; varying with . . . somanassaŋ ayaŋ kāmānaŋ assādo M i.85, 92, etc. -- As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ A i.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ŋ pahāya Dh 346= S i.77; M iii.230; Sn 59 (see Nd2 s. v.). See also S iv.208; M ii.43; Th 2, 483; Vv 617; J ii.140; iii.396; v.428; kāmasukhallik' ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment S iv.330; v.421; Vin i.10; D iii.113; Nett 110; Vism 5, 32; -- sutta N. of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -- seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas D ii.258; -- sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure J ii.180; iii.464; -- sevin adj. to prec. J iv.118; -- hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava -- section, foll. on kāmaguṇā M i.86, etc., of wealth S i.74; -- hetuka caused by passion Th 2, 355=ThA 243; J v.220, 225.
Kāmaka
Kāmaka (adj.) [fr. kāma] only -- ˚ in neg. akāmaka un- willing, undesirous D i.115; M i.163; Vin iii.13; J iv.31; cp. kāmuka.
Kāmaṇḍaluka
Kāmaṇḍaluka (adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q. v.) S iv.312 cp. A v.263.
Kāmatā
Kāmatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kāma] desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚ . . . to be alone PvA 43; anattha˚ J iv.14; with inf. PvA 65 (gahetu˚); J iii.362 (vināsetu˚); Mhvs 5, 260; DhA i.91.
Kāmin
Kāmin (adj.) [fr. kāma] 1. having kāma, i. e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one's own desires in kāma -- kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis, the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 =PvA 16), as a reward for former merit; usually in combn with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as "nandino devalokasmiŋ modanti kkāmino" A ii.62= It 112; Th 1, 242; J iii.154; Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (expl. "as enjoying after their hearts' content all pleasures they can wish for"). -- 2. giving kāma, i. e. benevolent, fulfilling people's wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Sn 986. -- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Sn 1096, syn. of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd2 4).
Kāmuka
Kāmuka (adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. kāmuka] desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover J v.306; Mhbv 3.
Kāmeti
Kāmeti [den. fr. kāma] to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Th 1, 93; J iii.154; iv.167; v.480; -- 2. to desire a woman, to be in love with D i.241; M ii.40; J ii.226; v.425; vi.307, 326, etc. <-> pp. kāmita in kāmita -- vatthu the desired object PvA 119; VvA 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable PvA 16 (v. l. for kañña, better), 73; VvA 127; and kāmetabba J. v.156 (=kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaŋ) kāmayamānassa Sn 766 (=icchamānassa, etc., Nd1); J vi.172=Nett 69.
-- 207 --
Kāya
Kāya [der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya] group, heap, collection, aggregate, body. -- Definitions and synonyms. -- SnA 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn 772), deha, sandeha (Dh 148=Th 1, 20), nāvā (Dh 369), ratha (S iv.292), dhaja, vammīka (M i.144), kuṭikā (Th 1, 1); and at KhA 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraŋ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaŋ vā kesādīnaŋ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. . . . It is equivalent to deha: S i.27; PvA 10; to sarīra KhA 38; PvA 63, to nikāya (deva˚) D iii.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti . . . Nd2 257. Literal meaning. -- 1. mahājana -- kāya a collection of people, a crowd S iv.191; v.170; VvA 78; -- bala˚ a great crowd Sn p. 105; DhA i.193, 398. -- 2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) D i.56=M i.517=S iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana's theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense -- organs, as vedanā -- kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚, phassa˚, etc. S iii.60, 61; D iii.243, 244; taṇhā˚ D iii.244; appl. to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers S i.72. -- A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at J ii.91, viz. camma˚, dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or "bodies" (great masses, substances) of skin, wood, copper, iron, sand, water, and planks. -- Var. other combns: Asura˚ A i.143; D iii.7; Ābhassara˚ ("world of radiance") D i.17=iii.29, 84; Deva˚ S i.27, 30; D iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā A i.143; Tāvatiŋsa˚ D iii.15. Applied meaning. -- I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four "great" elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (D i.55). This "heap," in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements, and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613<-> 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought DhsA. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f. I. (Physical). -- (a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati -- paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection, the recognition of the true character of "body" comes first (see Vbh 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyânupassī . . . contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: "he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth," etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e. g. D ii.293, 294; iii.104, 141; A iii.323=v.109; S iv.111=v.278; Vbh 193, 194; Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī . . . A iii.142 sq.; v.109 (under asubhasaññā); It 81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī S iv.211; and kāyagatā sati. -- This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaŋ . . . kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā -- pettika -- sambhavo odana -- kummās' upacayo, etc. "this body has form (i. e. is material, visible), is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending, to breaking up and decay," etc., with inferences D i.55=S iii.207; S ii.94; iv.194; v.282, 370; D i.76, 209; M i.144, 500; ii.17; A iv.386=S iv.83. (b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) S ii.231; also at Pv i.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra -- ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; A ii.145 (with taṇhā, māna, methuna); as needing attention: see ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness A iv.53= S ii.252=S iii.80, 103, 136, 169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaŋ yadā kāyaŋ jahant' imaŋ S iii.143. As in need of breathing assāsa -- passāsa S v.330, 336; as tired, fatigued (kilanta -- kāya) kilanta -- kāyā kilanta -- cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti "tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly" (D i.20; iii.32≈); in other connection PvA 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto D iii.255 sq.;=A iv.332; S v.317; M i.116; jiṇṇassa me . . . kāyo na paleti Sn 1144; ātura -- kāyo S iii.1 (cittaŋ anāturaŋ); paripuṇṇa -- k˚ suruci sujāto, etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Sn 548= Th 1, 818; cp. mahā -- k˚ (of Brahmins) Sn 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiŋsa mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni . . . Sn p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma -- kāyo "author and speaker of Doctrine," in the same sense Brahma -- kāyo "the best body" (i. e. of Doctrine) D iii.84 (Dial. iii, 81). (c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object. -- kāye anicc' ânupassī S iv.211 (and vay' ânupassī, nirodh' ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī It 81; kāyañ ca bhindantaŋ ñatvā It 69; evaŋdhammo (i. e. a heap of changing elements) A iii.324; aciraŋ vat' ayaŋ kāyo paṭhaviŋ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ Dh 41. pittaŋ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Sn 198. As bahu -- dukkho bahuādīnavo A v.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. M i.500; ii.17; kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā S iv.62; v.320; dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi S ii.94. -- This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: S v.370. Represented as pūti˚ foul S i.131; iii.120. -- Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as "catu -- mahābhūtika pūti -- kāya" (cp. similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo, pūtiko bhavati kāyo). (d) Similes. -- Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) S iv.83=A iv.386; a city (nagara) S iv.194; a cart (ratha) S iv.292; an anthill (vammīka) M i.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā "knowing that the body is like froth" Dh 46; kumbh' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā nagar' ûpamaŋ cittaŋ idaŋ ṭhapetvā Dh 40: the body is as fragile as a water -- pot. (e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā . . ., i. e. after death . . . upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e. g. D i.82, 107, 143, 162, 245, 247, 252; iii.96, 97, 146, 181, 235; M i.22; S i.94; iii.241; Dh 140; It 12, 14; J i.152; PvA 27, etc., etc. Cp. also iv. II. (Psychological). -- As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni). It is ajjhattika as sense (i. e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā) or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e. g. kāya -- viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā D i.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaŋ phusitvā D iii.226, 250, 269; M i.33; ii.42; S iv.104, 112; kāyena phusitvā A v.11; kāyo c' eva phoṭṭhabbā ca D iii.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy;
-- 208 --
the whole being, the "inner sense," or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti -- sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaŋ eva kāyaŋ vivekajena pīti -- sukhena abhisandeti . . . "His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness" D i.73 sq.=M i.277; A ii.41, etc. -- A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i. e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This "peace" of the body (may be translated as "my senses, my spirits" in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaŋ vedeti, sukhino cittaŋ samādhiyati D iii.241, 288; S iv.351; M i.37; A iii.21, 285; iv.176; v.3, 333; Vbh 227. <-> Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚, passadhakāyā sukhaŋ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts ii.224: "all my frame will be at peace," or "individuality"; see note) passaddhakāya -- sankhāra mentioned at A v.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya -- vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi -- analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages: kāya -- chando -- ˚sneho -- ˚anvayatā pahīyati M i.500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaŋ virājaye Sn 203; kāye avigata -- rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) D iii.238=A iii.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo S iii.106; A iii.69. III. (Ethical). -- Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man's personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct. Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action kat) e)coxh/n, character in its pregnant sense. Kāya as one of a triad. -- Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taŋ hi tassa sakaŋ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati S i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaŋsanti pacca sagge pamodati S i.102. -- So also at A i.63; Sn 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena S ii.231=271; iv.112. <-> With su -- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent, e. g. S i.71, 72; M i.22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kāya -- (v˚., m.˚) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. -- k˚. v˚. m˚. hiŋsati S i.165; saŋsappati A v.289 sq.; kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya -- sañcetanā -- hetu uppajjati S ii.39 sq.; The variations of k -- in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'être of kamma: yaŋ . . . etarahi kammaŋ karoti kāyena v. m. idaŋ vuccati navakammaŋ S iv.132. -- Passages with reference to good works are e. g. D iii.245; A i.151; v.302 sq.; (see also Kamma ii.2 b. c.). -- With reference to evil: S iii.241, 247; A i.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m. S ii.151; pāpaŋ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke S i.12=31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n'atthi dukkaṭaŋ saŋvutaŋ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 391=Nett 183. Kāyena saŋvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saŋvaro manasā saŋvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saŋvaro Dh 361=S i.73= Miln 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaŋvutā na te Māravasânugā, na te Mārassa paccagū S i.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaŋvuto kāyena ca akusalaŋ na kayirā Dh 281=Nett 183. Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: S i.172 (˚gutta) M i.461 (rakkhita and a˚); Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k˚ -- vacī -- kamma); PvA 98. Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: A i.54; Dh 259, 391; Sn 206, 407; kāye avītarāgo M i.101; A iii.249; iv.461 sq.; ˚ -- samācāra S v.354; kāyaŋ paṇidhāya Ps i.175; Vbh 244=252; bhāvita˚ and a˚ M i.239; A i.250; iii.106 sq., cp.: kāya -- ppakopaŋ rakkheyya, kāyena saŋvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaŋ hitvā, kāyena sucaritaŋ care Dh 231. Ahiŋsakā ye munayo niccaŋ kāyena saŋvutā Dh 225. Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ . . . S v.74; anikaṭṭha -- kāyo nikaṭṭha -- citto A ii.137; sāraddha -- kāyo sankiliṭṭha -- citto A v.93=95= 97; bhāvita -- kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño S iv.111; A iv.111; v.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaŋ apakassa cittaŋ S ii.198. Kāya -- citta -- passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29 -- 51. In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as=the cetasikas (mental properties, or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya, kilanta -- citta under kilamati. IV. (Various). -- Kāyena (i. e. "visibly") aññamaññaŋ passituŋ A ii.61; as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at A iv.39 =Nd2 570. The relation between rūpa -- kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma -- kāya, the mental compound (=vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps i.183 sq., see also S ii.24. K. is anattā, i. e. k. has no soul A v.109; S iv.166. n'âyaŋ kāyo tumhākaŋ n'āpi paresaŋ, purāṇaŋ idaŋ kammaŋ . . . "neither is this body yours, nor anyone else's: it is (the appearance of) former karma" S ii.64, 65=Nd2 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha -- dissamānena S i.156. <-> Manomaya -- kāya a body made by the mind (cp. VvA 10 and DA i.110, 120, 222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna S v.282 sq.; manomaya pīti -- bhakkha sayaŋpabha D i.17=VvA 10; manomayaŋ kāyaŋ abhinimmināya . . . D i.77; m˚ sabbanga -- paccangī D i.34, 77, 186, 195. -- Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saŋvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i. e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc. (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) S v.265= D i.78=A i.170: see also S v.283, 284. -- In the various stages of Saŋsāra; kāyaŋ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body S iv.60, 400; cp. S iii.241 (ossaṭṭha -- kāya); referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211. -- anga a limb of the body, kāy'angaŋ vāc'angaŋ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) J iii.354; DhsA 93, 240; -- ânupassin in combn kāye kāyânupassī "realizing in the body an aggregate" D ii.94, 100, 291 sq.; D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.56; A i.39, 296; ii.256; iii.449; iv.300, 457 sq.; S iv.211; v.9, 75, 298, 329 sq.; Vbh 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Nett. 123; -- āyatana the sense of touch D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 613, 653, 783; -- indriya same D iii.239; Dhs 585, 613, 972; -- ujjukatā straightness of body (+citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53, 277, 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20. -- ûpaga going to a (new) body S ii.24; -- kamma "bodily action," deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above) D i.250; iii.191, 245, 279; M i.415; iii.206; A i.104; iii.6, 9, 141 sq.; v.289; Th 2, 277; Ps ii.195; Dhs 981, 1006; Vbh 208, 321, 366; Pug 41; Bdhd 69; DhsA 68, 77, 344. -- kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, 277, 326. -- kammanta=˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa A v.292, 294, 297; M i.17. -- kali "the misfortune of having a body"=this miserable body Th 2, 458, 501; ThA 282, 291; -- kasāva bodily impurity or depravity A i.112; -- gata "relating to the body," always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above) S i.188; M. iii.92; A i.44; Sn 340
-- 209 --
(cp. SnA 343); Th 1, 468, 1225; J i.394; Dh 293= Nett 39; Dh 299; Miln 248, 336, 393; Vism 111, 197, 240 sq. -- gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saŋsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ -- saccâbhinivesa D iii.230= S v.59=Dhs 1135=Vbh 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; -- gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Nett 115<-> 119; -- gutta one who guards his body, i. e. controls his action (+vacīgutta) S i.172=Sn 74; -- gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295; J ii.162; -- citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease J iv.166; see other combns above; -- ḍāha fever Vin i.214; -- tapana chastisement of body, curbing one's material desires, asceticism PvA 98. -- thāma physical strength J iii.114; -- daratha bodily distress J v.397; vi.295; -- daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76, 313; -- dukkha bodily pain (+ceto˚) M iii.288; -- duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) D iii.52, 96, 111, 214; A i.48; Dh 231; It 54, 58; Dhs 300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20; -- duṭṭhulla unchastity Th 1, 114; -- dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J i.276; iv.14; VvA 73; DhA iv.85; Bdhd 69; -- dhātu the "element" of body, i. e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kvu 12; -- pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+vacī˚, mano˚) Dh 231=DhA 330; -- pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, "swaggering" Vin ii.213; -- paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S iv.293; attached or bound to the body J iii.377; v.254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123, iv.214; -- payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DA i.72=DhsA 98; -- pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation S v.320=A ii.198; -- parihārika tending or protecting the body D i.71=A ii.209=Pug 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DA i.207; -- pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general DhsA 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -- passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses S iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above); v.66, 104; Dhs 40, 277, 320; DhsA 130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; -- pāgabbhiya "body -- forwardness" immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women J ii.32; v.449; -- pāgabbhiniya same J i.288; -- pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña, apathy Dhs 46, 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- phandita (nt.) bodily activity J iii.25; -- baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA i.207; -- bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46, 51; ii.118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M i.237; -- bala physical strength PvA 30; -- bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action D iii.219; M i.237; cp. Miln 85; -- macchera "body -- selfishness," pampering the body Th 1, 1033; -- mudutā pliability of sense=˚kammaññatā Dhs 44, 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- muni a sage with regard to action It 56; -- moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action It 56; 67; D iii.220; A i.273; Nd2 514; -- ratha the "carriagelike" body J vi.253; -- lahutā buoyancy of sense = ˚muduta, same loci; -- vanka crookedness of action A i.112; -- vikāra change of position of the body J iii.354; -- vijambhana alertness DhA iv.113; -- viññatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one's appearance, appl. chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA 82, 301; Miln 229, 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70; -- viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D iii.243; Dhs 556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln 59; Vbh 180; ˚dhātu element of touch -- consciousness Dhs 560; Vbh 88; Kvu 12; -- viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phoṭṭhabba, see above) D i.245; ii.281; iii.234; M i.85, 144; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; Vbh 14; Kvu 210; Miln 270; -- vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA 323; -- viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J i.289; DhsA 165; -- vūpakāsa= ˚viveka D iii.285 (+citta˚ "singleness" of heart); -- veyyāvacca menial duties J i.12; ˚kara a servant J ii.334; -- veyyāvaṭika same J vi.418; Sn p. 104; DhA i.27; ˚kamma id. J v.317 (=veyyāvacca) DhsA 160; -- saŋsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, 190; J vi.566; -- sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp. ˚anupassin) D iii.105, 254; M i.478=Pug 14, 29; M ii.113; iii.45; A i.74; 118; iv.10, 451; v.23; Ps ii.52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387. -- sankhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; S ii.40; iii.125; iv.293; A i.122; ii.158, 231; Ps i.184, 186; Vism 530. -- sangaha control of body (+citta˚) Nett 91; -- sañcetanā ( -- hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A ii.157; Vism 530 (+vacī˚, mano˚). -- samācāra (good) conduct as regards one's actions D ii.279 (+vacī˚) M i.272 sq.; ii.113; iii.45; S v.354; A iii.186 sq. -- sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29; -- samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) D iii.243; S v.351; Dhs 585, 616, 651, 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility D iii.244; Dhs 445, 558; -- sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.52, 96, 111, 169, 215; It 55, 59, 99, Dhs 1306; -- suci purity of body, i. e. of action (+vacī˚, ceto˚) A i.273; It 55; -- soceyya purification of body (+vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.219; A i.271; v 264, 266; It 55.
Kāyika
Kāyika (adj.) [fr. kāya] 1. belonging to the body, i. e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i. e. done by the body (=acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaŋ physical happiness (opp. cetasika˚) S v.209; A i.81; dukkhaŋ D ii.306; M i.302 (opp. cetasikaŋ); kāyikaŋ (sc. dhammaŋ) sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaŋ) Vin ii.248. In comb. with vācasika also at S i.190; Pug 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); PvA 119 (of saŋyama, control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd2 219=SnA 86. 2. -- ˚ (of devas) belonging to the company of -- : ˚ D i.220; gandhabba˚ PvA 119.
Kāyūra & Kāyura
Kāyūra & Kāyura [see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.] 1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh'âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana J iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106; J iii.437; iv.92; Pv iii.93; Vv 362. -- 2. adj. as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia "regis" J v.289=486.
Kāyūrin
Kāyūrin (adj.) [fr. last] wearing bracelets Pv iii.91.
Kār
Kār -- secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations.
Kāra
Kāra [fr. kār -- , cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ=kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, fr. kṛ] 1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra -- paṇṇaka J vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiŋ āvahati "even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods" PvA 6. -- kāraka one who performs a religious duty D i.61 (=DA i.170). (b) doing, manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaŋ phalaŋ "as you have done so will be the fruit" PvA 45. -- 2. ( -- ˚) (a) the production or application of, i. e. the state or quality of . . .: atta˚ one's own state =ahaŋ kāra, individuality; para˚ the personality of others A iii.337; citti˚ reflection, thought PvA 26; see e. g. andha˚ darkness, sak˚ homage, etc. -- balakkārena forcibly PvA 68. -- (b) as ttg. the item, i. e. particle, letter, sound or word, e. g. ma -- kāra the letter m PvA 52; ca -- kāra the particle ca PvA 15; sa -- kāra the sound sa SnA 23. -- (c) (adj. -- n.) [cp. kara] one who does, handles or deals with: ayakāra iron -- smith Miln 331.
-- 210 --
Kāraka
Kāraka (usually -- ˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu -- capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Sn 445; Bdhd 85 sq.; -- f. kārikā: veyyāvacca˚ a servant PvA 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of ( -- ˚), service: dukkara -- kārikā the performance of evil deeds S i.103; Th 2, 413 (=ThA 267). -- agga -- kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80.
Kāraṇa
Kāraṇa (nt.) [in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2= Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause]. 1. -- (a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma: M iii.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaŋ kārāpeti "he makes somebody perform the task." Pass, kāraṇaŋ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha -- bandhana "the group of five" (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 "inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion"), a means of punishment in Niraya (q. v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln trsl. i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At DhA iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa -- dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning "punishment" also at J iv.87 (tantarajjukaŋ k˚ŋ katvā), whereas at J vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by "maraṇa," as much as "killing." Often spelt karaṇa, q. v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Miln 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaŋ. See karaṇa for further reference. -- Kiŋ kāraṇaŋ ajja kāressati "what task will he impose on me to -- day?" A v.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ A i.141, PvA 251, Nd2 304iii. -- As adj. ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ "being obliged to go through the dreadful trial" PvA 221. -- (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ' âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small DhA i.385. Cp. also kāraṇaŋ karoti to try M i.444. -- (c) a trick (i. e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) J ii.325 (ānañja˚); Miln 201 (ākāsa -- gamana˚). 2. -- (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚ -- bhūta being the cause of . . . PvA 15; -- (b) (intellectual) cause, reason Miln 150; DhA i.389; esp. as -- ˚: arodana˚ the reason for not crying PvA 63; asocana˚ same, ibid. 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81, 106. =pariyatti, DhA. 36.=attha, SA on i.215, SnA. i.238 -- instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs PvA 195; tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40 -- abl. kāranā by means of, through, by (=hetu or nissāya) PvA 27; imasmā k˚ therefore PvA 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha -- kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Sn 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid. -- sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) PvA 109.
Kāraṇika
Kāraṇika [der. fr. prec.] the meaning ought to be "one who is under a certain obligation" or "one who dispenses certain obligations." In usu˚ S ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow -- maker, fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka.
Kāraṇḍava
Kāraṇḍava1 [of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa] chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava˚ A iv.169 (chaff); samaṇa˚ ibid. -- In passage kāraṇḍavaŋ niddhamatha, kasambuŋ apakassatha A iv.172=Sn 281=Miln 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Miln trsl. ii.363 "get rid of filth, put aside rubbish from you," expl. SnA 311 by kacavara (q. v.). Rh. D's note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given.
Kāraṇḍava
Kāraṇḍava2 [cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava] a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose).
Kārā
Kārā (f.) [cp. Sk. kārā] confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75.
Kārāpaka
Kārāpaka [fr. kārāpeti] a schemer, inventor J vi.333.
Kārāpaṇa
Kārāpaṇa see kāreti.
Kārāpita
Kārāpita [pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti] made to do J vi.374.
Kārikā
Kārikā see kāraka
Kāritā
Kāritā = kārikā (performance); see pāripūri˚.
Kārin
Kārin ( -- ˚) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī "as he says so he does" D iii.135, Sn 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚, dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚, sampajāna˚, etc.
Kāriya
Kāriya (adj.) [grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti] to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good It 18.
Kāruñña
Kāruñña (nt.) [fr. karuṇa] compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) S ii.199; A iii.189; Vism 300; PvA 75; Sdhp 509.
Kāruññatā
Kāruññatā (f.) compassionateness S i.138.
Kāruṇika
Kāruṇika (adj.) [fr. karuṇa] compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113; PvA 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚: of great mercy Sdhp 330, 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha "the Saviour of great mercy" in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv.
Kāreti
Kāreti (Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -- kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚) DhA i.416. For details see karoti iv.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita.
Kāla
Kāla (and Kāḷa) -- Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack, misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death, ghosts, etc. -- There are two etymologies suggestible, both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla=Sk. kāla, blue -- black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka, spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. kelaino/s, Mhg. hilwe mist)=Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. khli/s spot, and khla/s dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness. -- (b) see below, under note. -- Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. maúrgins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). -- Note. The definition of colour -- expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour -- sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam > gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of "shining" is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā=Gr. skia/ shadow as against Ags. hāēven "blue" (E. heaven) and Ohg. skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light -- reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (=sukāḷa) may readily be called "brilliant." In the same way kāla, combined with other colour -- words of black connotation does not need to mean "black," but may mean simply a kind of black, i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. śyāma (dark -- grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya. That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour
-- 211 --
belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla=Sk. śāra, mottled, speckled=Lat. caerulus, black -- blue and perhaps caelum "the blue" (cp. heaven)=Gr. khru/los the blue ice -- bird. (On k > s cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilamati > śramati, kilissati > ślis˚, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra. -- The definition of kāḷa as jhām' angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: DhsA 317 and PvA 90. 1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see VvA 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura -- cchavi samano G. "The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin" M i.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at D I.193= M. ii.40; kāḷa -- sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark -- grey. -- Of the dark half of the month: see ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe "on the next new moon day" Vin i.176. -- of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī f.); PvA 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha) PvA 151. -- In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa -- bhūmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin i.48=ii.209. -- añjana black collyrium Vini .203; -- ânusārī black, (polished?) Anusāri ("a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood" Vin. Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; S iii.156= v.44= A v.22; -- ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln trsl. ii.364; cp. blacksmith > silversmith) Miln 414, 415; -- kañjaka a kind of Asuras, Titans D iii.7; J v.187; PvA 272; -- kaṇṇī "black -- cared," as an unlucky quality. Cp. iii.611; J i.239; iv.189; v.134, 211; vi.347; DhA i.307; ii.26; the vision of the "black -- eared" is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e. g. at DhA iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as "witch" PvA 272; DhA iii.38, 181; as k -- k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen J ii.153; -- kaṇṇika= prec.; -- kabara spotted, freckled J vi.540; -- kesa (adj.) with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa -- kesa) rare, e. g. at J vi.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa -- kesa "having an over -- abundance of brilliant hair" said of Gotama. This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash -- Saga, which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (=polished, dark) hair (=rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q. v.) in similar combinations (e. g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā). On this feature of the Sun -- god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33 -- 46. -- The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as eu)plokamo/s or duh˚ in combns like sudubbala PvA 149, sudullabha VvA 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DA i.284= suṭṭhu -- k˚, añjana -- vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh -- añjana J v.155). Cp. also siniddha -- nīla -- mudu -- kuñcita -- keso J i.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha J v.202. -- susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: M ii.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu˚ the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at M i.82=A ii.22 =J ii.57; M i.163=A i.68=S i.9, 117; also in Childers' (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at S iv.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu -- k˚ are D i.115, M i.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909, 212 has both. -- kokila the black (brown) cuckoo VvA 57; -- jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) A i.253; -- daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -- pakkha the dark side, i. e. moonless fortnight of the month A ii.18; -- ˚ cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight PvA 55; -- ˚ ratti a moonless night VvA 167; (opp. dosina r.) -- meyya a sort of bird J vi.539; -- loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Bdhgh. pakati -- loṇa, natural salt); -- loha "black metal," iron ore Miln 267; -- valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, 183. -- sīha a special kind of lion J iv.208. -- sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter's measuring line J ii.405; Miln 413; also N. of a Purgatory (nivaya) J v.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 -- 78; -- hatthin "black elephant," an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195. 2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 (=pāto PvA 128), kālassa in the morning (gen. of time), early VvA 256. Cp. paccūsa -- kāle at dawn DhA iii.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opp. sāyaŋ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd2 631. -- (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time DhA i.319; evaŋ gacchante kāle as time went on PvA 54, 75, 127, etc. -- kālaŋ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaŋ); kañci kālaŋ some time yet VvA 288; ettakaŋ kālaŋ for a long time PvA 102. -- kālena kālaŋ (1) from time to time PvA 151; VvA 255, 276; -- (2) continuously, constantly A iv. 45; Pug 11 (+samayena samayaŋ); D i.74 (: but expld at DA i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of "every fortnight or every ten days"). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. ai)ei/) Sn 73 (expl. in Nd2 by niccakāle under sadā; but at SnA 128 by phāsu -- kālena "in good time"); -- kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly VvA 352. See also cira˚, sabba˚. -- (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time, or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity. Cp. Gr. kairi/s and w(=ra; or (3) time of death, death. <-> (1) Mealtime: PvA 25; VvA 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaŋ bhattaŋ "it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready" D i.119=226; Sn p. 111; and in kālaŋ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner) D i.109, 226; Sn p. 111; PvA 22, 141; VvA 173. -- date: kālato from the date or day of . . ., e. g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day that she first saw her" VvA 206; gihī˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day of being a layman" PvA 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚ favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173; kālaŋ jānāti "he knows the proper time" A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities A ii.140; yassa kālaŋ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i. e. goodbye D i.106, 189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future. -- kāla˚ (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death). -- Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune D i.205; akāla -- cārin going (begging) at the improper time Sn 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Miln 144. -- kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin i.199, 200; J ii.133; Sn 386. akāle in the wrong season VvA 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment A ii.140; Sn 326, 387 (=yutta kālena SnA 374); Pv i.53 (=ṭhitakālena PvA 26); Pug 50; It 42; KhA 144 (=khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day, as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the "last hour," cp. h)mar, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc.) as well, in phrase kālaŋ karoti "he does his time=he has fulfilled his time" Vin iii.80; Sn 343, DhA i.70; and frequently elsewhere; cp. -- kata, -- kiriyā. -- As death in kālaŋ kankhati to await the appointed time S i.187; Sn 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika. -- Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta˚, yañña˚, vappa˚. -- antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while PvA 13; na kālantare at once PvA 19; -- kata (adj.) dead Sn 586, 590; in combn petā kālakatā "the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Sn 807; Pv i.57; i.121. Also as kālankata Pv ii.79; Vv 809; Vism 296.
-- 212 --
-- kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) M ii.108; A i.22, 77, 261 (as bhaddikā, cp. A iii.293); iv.320; Sn 694; Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); DhA ii.36; iv.77. -- gata=˚kata PvA 29, 40. -- ññū knowing the proper time for . . . (c. dat. or loc.) Sn 325; described at A iv.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū, dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) A iii.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (=prec.+atta˚, puggala˚) D iii.252, 283; as quality of the Tathāgata D iii.134=Nd2 276; Pug 50. -- ññutā n. abstr. to prec. A ii.101; -- (p)pavedana announcement of death ( -- time) Th 1, 563=J i.118=Vism 389=DhA i.248. -- bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time S v.470; -- vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha˚ dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: D i.4; iii.175; DA i.76; A ii.22, 209; Pug 58; -- vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It 41. -- sataŋ (˚sahassaŋ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243.
Kālika
Kālika (adj.) [fr. kāla 2] belonging to time, in time, as sabba -- kālika always in time, cp. Gr. w(rai_os Vv 392; with time, i. e. gradual, slowly, delayed S i.117=Nd2 645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika S ii.58; S i.117= iv.41=339=v.343; -- 2. subject to time, i. e. temporal, vanishing PvA 87; -- 3. unusual, out of season Miln 114 (cp. akāla). -- See also tāva -- kālika.
Kālīya
Kālīya a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 (see note on p. 381).
Kālusiya
Kālusiya (and Kālussiya) (nt.) [der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla] darkness, obscurity DA i.95; PvA 124 (cakkhu˚); fig. (dosa˚) VvA 30.
Kāḷa
Kāḷa see kāla 1.
Kāḷaka
Kāḷaka (adj.) [fr. kāḷa] black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe A ii.241; f. kāḷikā VvA 103; -- (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D i.110=A iv.186=210=213; vicita˚ (of rice) "with the black grains removed" D i.105; A iv.231; Miln 16; vigata˚ (same) A iii.49. -- A black spot (of hair) J v.197 (= kaṇha -- r -- iva). -- Fig. of character DhA iv.172.
Kāḷārika
Kāḷārika see kaḷārika.
Kāveyya
Kāveyya (nt.) [grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya] 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations D i.11 (= DA i.95 kabba -- karaṇa) -- 2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) A i.72=iii.107. -- matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming S i.110, 196.
Kāsa
Kāsa1 [cp. Sk. kāśa] a kind of reed, Saccharum sponta- neum S iii.137.
Kāsa
Kāsa2 [cp. Sk. kāsa] cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā A v.110=Nd2 3041.
Kāsāya
Kāsāya and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown=Pāli sāma, with kā=kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown, i. e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla] 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the "homeless state" D i.60, 61, 63, 115; M ii.67; A i.107; ii.208; iv.118, 274, 280; Pug 57; Nd2 172. ˚vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Sn 64; cp. ɔnivattha J iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner: see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya -- nivāsana J iii.41; kāsāviya J iv.447); PvA 20; ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Sn 487. -- 2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287; S iv.190=v.53=301; Dh 9, 10=Th 1, 969, 970=J ii.198 =v.50; Miln 11. ˚kaṇṭhā (pl.) the "yellow necks" those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dh 307 (= DhA iii.480)=It 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vbh 247; Miln 19.
Kāsāvaka
Kāsāvaka [fr. kāsāva] a yellow robe DhA ii.86.
Kāsāviya
Kāsāviya [fr. kāsāva] one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya -- vattha) J iv.447 (=cora -- ghātaka C.).
Kāsika
Kāsika (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha -- kāsika] belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108; J vi.49 (where to be read kāsik' uttama for kāsi -- kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin A i.248; iii.50; Pug 34; Miln 2; DhA i.417; Vism 115.
Kāsu
Kāsu [cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ] a hole; only in cpd. angāra- kāsu a cinderhole, a fire -- pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders J i.232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S iv.56, 188; Sn 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās' ûpamā metaphor A iv.224=v.175; see also kāma.
Ki˚ 2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiŋ & kiŋhi. <-> 2. in nt. kiŋ what? (cp. Gr. ti/, Lat. quid; ending -- m besides -- d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod, id). -- 3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (=Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Lat. quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiŋ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc.
Kiŋ
Kiŋ [nt. of rel. pron. ka] 1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaŋ kiŋ nivāraṇaŋ what is the obstruction? Sn 1032; kiŋ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i. e. what good is your wish? VvA 226; kim idaŋ this is what, that is why, therefore, PvA 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiŋ sū' dha vittaŋ purisassa seṭṭhaŋ what, then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Sn 181; or with nu: kiŋ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaŋ nu kho) Nd2 186. -- Gen. kissa of what? Pv i.91; ii.940 (=kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i. e. why? Sn 1131; Pv ii.81 (=kiŋ nimittaŋ). -- Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Sn 1032. -- Acc. kiŋ: kiŋ kāhasi what will you do? Sn 428; kiŋ āgamma kiŋ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? D i.13, 14, etc.; kiŋ nissita to what purpose Sn 1043. -- Loc., kismiŋ in what or what about: kismiŋ vivādo "what is the quarrel about?" D i.237; or kimhi, e. g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? D ii.241 (corresponds to ettha=in this). The ŋ of kiŋ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes; ki ha=kiŋ ha KhA 78, kissa= kiŋ assa Sn 1032; kīdisa (q. v.)=kiŋ disa; kiñci (see below)=kiŋ cid; kiŋ va a little: see kittaka. -- 2. as interr. particle, introducing a question=Lat. nonne, Gr. a)/n: kiŋ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuŋ? "Will they receive that which is given now?" PvA 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb. with udāhu (whether -- or): kiŋ -- udāhu what (about this) . . . or is it (otherwise), is it so . . . or is it not so? (cp. po/teron -- h)/, Lat. utrum -- an): kim imasmiŋ attabhāve pitaraŋ pucchasi udāhu atīte? "do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one?" PvA 38; kiŋ nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi? "Will you take a holiday or will you work?" VvA 63. -- Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiŋ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Sn 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why, but why, why in the world? D ii.131; J ii.159; DhA
-- 213 --
ii.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? J iii.373; v.479 (=kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana=nonne: kim pana bhante addasa? "Have you not seen?" D ii.132; kim pana tvaŋ maññasi what then do you think=do you not think then, that? . . . J i.171; kim anga how much more or less, i. e. far more, or far less Miln 274 as kim anga pana why then? M iii.181; Miln 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? D ii.74; kin ti te sutaŋ have you not heard? D i.104; kintikaro= kathankaro q. v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci)= num -- que, nonne; is it not that, rather J i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto). -- kiñci in comb. with yaŋ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of . . . Sn 231; n'atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n'atthi loke there is nothing in this world . . . Sn 1122. <-> kiñcâpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti "however much they endeavour in this" Sn 1080; J i.147; It 114; KhA 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (=Lat. quamvis) kiñcâpi hi . . . pana although . . . yet DhA i.391; kiñcâpi with pot. . . . atha kho although -- yet; it may be that -- but S i.72. -- 3. In composition (˚ -- ) often implying doubt, uncertainty ("what is it, that is so & so?"), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e. g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half -- man; kimpakka odd -- looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit; kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiŋsuka. -- akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiŋ vādin saying what? i. e. holding what views? A i.62; -- atthaŋ for what purpose J i.279. -- atthiya to what purpose J iv.239; Miln 19; VvA 230; to any purpose, of any use S v.171; -- abhiñña having what name? J vi.126. -- kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚ -- patissāvin an obedient servant D i.60 (cp. expln at DA i.168) A iii.37; iv.265 sq.; ThA 252; -- karaṇīya business, occupation A iii.113, 116, 258; v.24, 90, 338; -- kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i. e. why? PvA 25; -- kusalagavesin striving after that which is good M i.163=240; -- jacca of what caste? Sn p. 80; -- nāma of what name? Miln 15, 17; DhA iii.397 (both konāma and kiŋnāma). -- pakka strange or unknown (doubtful) fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i. e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) J i.368. -- purisa 1. a wild man of the woods J iv.254; vi.272, 497. -- 2. =kinnara (q. v.) A i.77; J v.42, 416. f. kimpurisī J v.215, 216. -- phala=˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit J i.271. -- rukkha what kind of tree J v.203. -- vādin holding what view? A i.62; -- samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -- sīla of what character Sn 324 (=SnA 331).
Kiŋsuka
Kiŋsuka [kiŋ+su+ka] N. of a tree (creeper), lit. "what- ever -- like," or "what do you call it," i. e. strange tree (see kiŋ su & kiŋ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa S iv.193 (parable of the k.); J ii.265 (˚opama -- jātaka); v.405; vi.536. Perhaps v. l. at SnA 284. -- puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) J i.73 (angārā ashes).
Kikita
Kikita (?) dense, thick (?) SS at S iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat.
Kikī
Kikī [onomat. to sound -- root kṛ (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka -- vāku cock, after the cry of the bird] 1. (m.) the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo). -- 2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaŋ anurakkhamānā); J iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. SnA 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti).
Kinkaṇika
Kinkaṇika (m. nt.) [=kinkiṇika] a small bell J iv.362; VvA 12.
Kinkiṇika
Kinkiṇika (m. nt.) [onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala] a small bell J iv.259, 413; (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 781 (=kinkiṇi VvA 303); Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo). -- jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells D ii.183; J i.32; DhA i.274.
Kicca
Kicca (nt.) [grd. of karoti=Sk. kṛtya] 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt. something to do DhA i.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaŋ, kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti KhA 218; kattabaŋ karaṇīyaŋ DhA iii.452. -- 2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service, attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl. -- adj. ( -- ˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due A ii.67; Dh 276, 293; J iii.26; DhA i.5. -- kattabbak˚ -- karaṇa "the performance of incumbent duties" PvA 30; idaŋ me kiccaŋ akāsi "he has done me this service" PvA 29. -- In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaŋ tava pitu ˚ŋ karomi "I will do the last duty to your father" PvA 274. -- a˚ that which is not (his) duty A ii.67; Dh 292, 293. -- (b) (as philos. term) function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚ -- or sampatti r, function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana˚ f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaŋ kiccaŋ), 547 (tad -- ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh. -- sangaha v.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to DhsA 264); kiccato Vism 581. -- appa˚ having few or no duties Sn 144 (cp. KhA 241. -- ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma J i.38. -- udaka˚ water -- performance, ablution D ii.15. -- kata˚ one who has performed his duties or mission, i. e. an Arahant Sn 1105; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231. -- bahu˚ having many obligations, being very busy A iii.116 sq. -- bhatta˚ meal DA i.45 sq.; PvA 76; freq. in formula kata˚ (see kata), cp. kat -- annakicca Dāvs i.59. -- mata˚ funeral rites PvA 274. -- sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i. e. funeral rites PvA 74). <-> Note. In compn with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk -- kucca (q. v.). -- âkiccā pl. (kicca+kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds, various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu "they shall serve me in all duties" Dh 74 (DhA ii.78=khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu "in small and great duties"); ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid "of all work") VvA 298; ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Sn 298 (but expld at SnA 319 as "zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done," taken as kicca+ akicca cp. akicca); -- âdhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89= iii.164; iii.168; v.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts iii.45; -- kara doing one's duty S i.91; Sn 676; -- karaṇīyāni pl.=kiccākicca, various duties A iv.87; -- kārin=kiccakara A iii.443.
Kiccayatā
Kiccayatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇī- yatā); Miln 42.
Kiccha
Kiccha [see kasira] 1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaŋ idha vutti yaŋ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Sn 676=parihīnattha, in poverty PvA 220 (kicco= kiccho). -- (b) difficult to obtain, hard, troublesome Dh 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, DhA 235=dullabho). -- 2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaŋ āpanno loko D ii.30; S ii.5; ˚ŋ vā so nigacchati "he gets into difficulties (i. e. becomes poor)" J v.330 (=dukkhaŋ nigacchati); Vism 314; DhA i.80. -- Oblique cases used adverbially: instr. kicchena with difficulty J i.147, 191 (paṭijaggita); v.331 (id.) abl. kicchā id. J v.330. -- akiccha (˚ -- ) without
-- 214 --
difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha -- lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+kasira -- lābhin) M i.33, 354=S ii.278 =A ii.23, 36; A iii.31, 114. -- patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (=PvA 199 dukkhappatta) -- vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (=dukkhajīvita).
Kicchati
Kicchati [v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate] to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Th 1, 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Th 1, 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at DhsA 354 as "ārammaṇaŋ nicchetuŋ asakkonto kicchati kilamati" and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaŋ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati.
Kiñcana
Kiñcana (adj. -- nt.) [kiŋ+cana, equal to kiŋ+ci, indef. pron.] only in neg. sentences: something, anything. From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. <-> Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha) at D iii.217; M i.298; S iv.297; Vbh 368; Nd2 206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at DhA iii.258 (on Dh 200). Khīṇa -- saŋsāro na c'atthi kiñcanaŋ "he has destroyed saŋsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)" Th 1, 306. n'āhaŋ kassaci kiñcanaŋ tasmiŋ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaŋ n'atthi "I am not part of anything (i. e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything" A ii.177.<-> akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Miln 220. -- In special sense "being without a moral stain," def. at Nd2 5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: "yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n'atthi kiñcanaŋ akiñcanaŋ anādānaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇan" Dh 421=Sn 645, cf. Th i. 537; kāme akiñcano "not attached to kāma" as Ep. of a khīṇāsava A v.232 sq.=253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dh 421; Sn 620, 645, 1094. -- Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto "having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths" Vin i.36; Sn 176, 1059; -- akiñcanaŋ nânupatanti dukkhā "ill does not befall him who has nothing" S i.23. -- sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Sn 620=DA 246.
Kiñcikkha
Kiñcikkha (nt.) [E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiñcid+ka] a trifle, a small thing: yaŋ vā taŋ vā appamattakaŋ Sn 121; 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa -- kiñcikkha -- hetu "for the sake of a little gain" A i.128=Pug 29; at Pv ii.83 as āmisa -- kiñci -- hetu (but all vv. ll. B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) "for some food" (expld at PvA 107: kiñci āmisaŋ patthento); -- katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at S iv.118 is evidently corrupt (v. l. ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā? ). -- kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Sn 121 (cp. SnA 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya).
Kiñjakkha
Kiñjakkha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht Halāyudha p. 186] a filament, esp. of the lotus S iii.130; J i.60, 183; v.39; Vv 221; -- vāri˚ Pv ii.120 (=kesara PvA 77) in combn with kesara VvA 12, 111, 175.
Kiṭaka
Kiṭaka [doubtful] only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at PvA 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti "they become like (hot) copper plates."
Kiṭika
Kiṭika at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saŋ- saraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176.
Kiṭṭha
Kiṭṭha [cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ] growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield A iii.393 (in simile), cp. S iv.195. -- āda eating corn A iii.393. -- ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield S iv.196. -- sambādha "when the corn is thick," in ˚samaye near harvest -- time M i.115 (in simile); J i.143 (sassa -- samaye+), 338.
Kiṇakiṇāyati
Kiṇakiṇāyati [=kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell] to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati J iii.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one's teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala.
Kiṇāti
Kiṇāti [krī Vedic kriṇāti] to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe J v.375; ger. kiṇitvā M i.384; J i.92, 94; inf. kiṇituŋ J iii.282.
Kiṇi
Kiṇi (indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: "tink" DhA i.339 (v. l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala).
Kiṇṇa
Kiṇṇa1 [cp. Sk. kiṇva] ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; VvA 73.
Kiṇṇa
Kiṇṇa2 [pp. of kirati] strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saŋ˚; see also appa˚.
Kiṇha
Kiṇha (adj.) [see kaṇha; DA i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho] black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā D i.90=116; S iv.117; M i.334; ii.177; in a moral sense=bad, wicked, with nâlam -- ariyā dhammā D i.163.
Kita
Kita [pp. of kṛ, with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane] 1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249. -- 2. soiled, only in cpds. kaṇṇa˚ said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48= ii.209; and paŋsu˚, soiled with dust Vin ii.121, 174.
Kitava & kitavā
Kitava & kitavā [=kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa] one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful S i.24; J v.116; 117 (a˚); -- kitavā at Dh 252 (=DhA iii.375) in combn with saṭha also at J vi.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaŋ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā= like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at DhA iii.375 as taken from fowling: kitavāya attabhāvaŋ paṭicchādeti "he hides himself by means of a pretence" (behind sham branches).
Kittaka
Kittaka (pron. interr.) [fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (MVastu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134] how much? how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297; k˚ŋ antovassaŋ avasiṭṭhaŋ "how much of the rainy season is left?" VvA 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra -- bhikkhū? "How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?" J i.32. -- As indef.: a little; kittakaŋ jīvissāmi, J v.505; kittakaŋ addhānaŋ a short time VvA 117 (=kiŋva ciraŋ).
Kittana
Kittana (nt.) [f. kitteti] praise PvA 31, 107.
Kittāvatā
Kittāvatā (adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti "in what respect is a man a great man?" Nd2 502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? M i.292.
Kitti & Kittī
Kitti & Kittī f. [Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. karkai/rw, Ohg. hruod, hruom=Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet; Gr. kh_ruc herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise. -- The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are saŋsadde & saŋsaddane] fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca S i.25; kittiñ ca sukhañ ca S i.187; yaso kitti sukhañ ca A ii.32 yaso kittī ca "fame and renown" Sn 817 (=Nd1 147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Sn 185 (in the same sense); VvA 68 (bāhira˚ -- bhāva becoming known outside); yaso kitti Sdhp 234. -- sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DA i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaŋ Gotamaŋ evaŋ
-- 215 --
kalyāṇo k˚ -- saddo abbhuggato "the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama": (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc.) D i.49, 87, 115, 116, 236; S iv.323, 374; v.352; A i.57, 180; iii.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Miln 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pug 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: A i.126; iii.269; Pug 36; -- vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise D iii.191; cp. ˚bhatā Nd1 147.
Kittika
Kittika (adj.) [fr. kitti] famous VvA 200.
Kittita
Kittita (pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Sn 1057.
Kittima
Kittima (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful ThA 227; DhA 391 (of nāma); VvA 275 (of ratha: cleverly constructed)]. Cp. also kutta, -- f. kittimā at J iii.70; vi.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima.
Kitteti
Kitteti [v. den. fr. kitti] 1. to praise, extol PvA 124, 162; -- 2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising PvA 159. -- fut. kittayissati in sense of aor. Vv 345 (=katheti VvA 151). -- kittayissāmi I shall relate Sn 1053, 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised PvA 9. -- aor. akittayi Sn 875, 921. -- pp. kittita.
Kinnara
Kinnara [kiŋ+nara, lit. what -- man, see kiŋ 3] a little bird with a head like a man's] J iv.106, 254, 438, v.47, 456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. J i.91, vi.283, vi.74. <-> f. kinnarā Np. of a queen J v. 437 sq., and kinnarī Th 2, 381 (cp. ThA 255), J ii.121 (matta -- kinnarī viya), 230; iv.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa.
Kinnāma
Kinnāma see under kiŋ.
Kipillikā
Kipillikā (f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) [Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108] an ant Sn 602 (kuntha˚); DhA i.360; J iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚ -- ˚āni); Miln 272. -- kipillaka J i.487 (v. l. BB. for pillaka); iv.375 (tamba˚ -- puṭa); DhA iv.134 (v. l. SS. for T. pillaka). -- Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā.
Kibbisa
Kibbisa (nt.) [Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally "stain, dirt." Buddh. Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No. 903] wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ŋ karoti to do wrong Sn 246; Sdhp, 204; J iii.135 or ˚ŋ pasavati A v.75; Vin ii.198. -- kata˚ (adj.) having done wrong in akata -- kalyāṇo, etc. A ii.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a); M i.39; Pv iv.77; PvA 59. -- kāraka1=next J iii.14; -- kārin, doing wrong Sn 665 sq.; PvA 58.
Kibbisaka
Kibbisaka=kibbisa Sdhp 290.
Kimi
Kimi m. [Vedic kṛmi] a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇha- sīsā A iii.241; Miln 272; DA i.199; -- As animal of death and putrefaction M i.507; J i.146; Sn 201; esp. with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31; Th 2, 439; PvA 192; Sdhp 603. As glow -- worm M ii.34; 41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Miln 312. In similes: Th 1, 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, 598. In cpd. kimi -- kula the worm kind (genus worm) Miln 100; Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314.
Kimina
Kimina (adj.) [from kimi] covered with worms J v.270.
Kira
Kira (& Kila) [Vedic kila] adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. dh/) -- 2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.): I should think one would expect. -- 3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. de\, Lat. at, G. aber). <-> kira in continuous story is what "iti" is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed. It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty, to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: "people say" or "I have heard": kirasaddo anussavane: "kira refers to a report by hearsay" PvA 103; kira -- saddo anussav'atthe J i.158; VvA 322 are conventional and one -- sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for J i.158 & ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto). -- 1. mahantaŋ kira Bārāṇasirajjaŋ "the kingdom of B. is truly great" J i.126; attā hi kira duddamo "self is difficult to subdue, we know" Dh 159; amoghaŋ kira me puṭṭhaŋ Sn 356. -- na kira surely not Sn 840; J i.158. -- 2. esā kira Visākhā nāma "that I presume is the Visākhā" (of whom we have heard) DhA i.399; petā hi kira jānanti "the petas, I should say, will know" Pv ii.710; evaŋ kira Uttare? "I suppose this is so, Uttarā" VvA 69. evaŋ kira saggaŋ gamissatha "thus you will surely go to Heaven" Vv 828; "I hear" DhA i.392. -- 3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time . . . PvA 46, etc.; so kira pubbe . . . akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made . . . J i.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her . . . PvA 46; cp. J i.195, etc.
Kiraṇa
Kiraṇa (nt.) 1. [fr. kṛ, karoti to do] an occupation, place of work, workshop J iv.223. Cp. kita & kittima. <-> 2. [fr. kṛ, kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering, effusion (of sun rays), effulgence VvA 169, 199.
Kirati
Kirati [kīr] to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚. See also pp., kiṇṇa2.
Kirāta
Kirāta (& kirāṭa) [prob. dial.] a man of a tribe of jungle- men, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DA i.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati2, okiraṇa. -- A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika).
Kirāsa
Kirāsa (adj.) [a by -- form of kirāṭa] false, fraudulent J iv.223 (=kerāṭika).
Kiriyati
Kiriyati [Pass. of kirati or karoti] to be affected or moved Vism. 318.
Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriyā
Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriyā [abstr. fr. karoti] 1. (n.) -- (a) ( -- ˚) action, performance, deed; the doing=fulfilment; cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) S iii.149; iv.93; Sn 454, 725; -- kāla˚ "fulfilment of one's time" i. e. death S iii.122; Pv i.1012; Sn 694; Pug 17; kusala˚ performance of good actions S i.101; v.456; dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts PvA 123; pāpa˚ commission of sin Pug 19=23; puñña˚ the performance of good works S i.87=89=A iii.48; a˚ PvA 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival PvA 86; massu -- kiriyā the dressing of the beard J iii.314 (cp. m -- karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization, see s. v. -- akiriyā the non -- performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa=veramaṇī) J iii.530; Vbh 285. <-> (b) an act in a special sense=promise, vow, dedication, intention, pledge: PvA 18; justice: Miln 171; kiriyaŋ bhindati to break one's vow Miln 206. -- (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non -- causative, an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā= Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali: n'atthi kammaŋ, n'atthi kiriyaŋ n'atthi viriyan ti= there is no karma, no after -- effect and no vigour in this world A i.286 (different at D i.53); n'atthi kiriyā it does not matter M i.405. -- 2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā
-- 216 --
dhammā Vbh 106, 182=302=Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vbh 268=281; DhsA 388. -- (b) indecisive, in akiriyaŋ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively D i.53 and≈ -- pada (ttg.) the verb (i. e. that which supplies the action) VvA 315; -- vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q. v.) also ˚vādin: D i.115 (of Gotama) A i.62; Vin i.71; a˚<-> denying the difference between merit & demerit A iv.174=Vin i.234; 242, Vin iii.2; A iv.180 sq.; S iii.73. (+natthikavāda); -- vādin adj. to prec. A i.62; -- hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq.
Kiriyatā
Kiriyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] the performance of ( -- ˚), state of, etc. See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚.
Kirīṭin
Kirīṭin (adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (=veṭhitasīsa).
Kila
Kila see kili (the sound click).
Kilañjā
Kilañjā (f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating: tassa gandhabbaŋ kilañjā -- kaṇḍūvanaŋ viya hutvā . . . J ii.249; "his music was like the scraping of a mat"; suvaṇṇa -- kilañjā a gilt mat J iv.212. As a fascine, used in making a road: DhA i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) PvA 127; as faggots: J i.158; Miln 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: M i.228= 374 (soṇḍikā -- kilañjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake: S i.106 (snake=māra).
Kilanta
Kilanta [pp. of kilamati] tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body PvA 43; VvA 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind D i.20= iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta+, of the waning of the gods); or both ˚kāya -- citta Pv iii.23; opp. akilanta -- kāya -- citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind.
Kilama
Kilama [spelt klama, fr. klam] fatigue J v.397 (=kilanta- bhāva).
Kilamati
Kilamati [Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as "sleepy," and Lat. clīnāre, clemens. To k > ś cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilissati > śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase kilam by gilāne.] 1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) DhA ii.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15, 87; iv.23 sq. -- 2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery PvA 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi PvA 76. Cp. pari˚. -- pp. kilanta.
Kilamatha
Kilamatha [fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha] tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion M i.168; A ii.199; S i.136; as kāya˚, citta˚ S v.128; as daratha˚ A iii.238; PvA 23; as niddā˚ A ii.48, 50.
Kilamita
Kilamita [pp. of kilameti] worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83.
Kilameti
Kilameti [denom. fr. kilama] to be tired or fatigued J i.115; ppr. kilamayanto D i.52. -- pp. kilamita.
Kilāsa
Kilāsa [cp. Sk. kilāsa] a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā) together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271; A v.110; Nd2 3041.
Kilāsika & ˚iya
Kilāsika & ˚iya (adj.) [fr. last] afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin i.93; Kvu 31 (˚iya).
Kilāsu
Kilāsu [fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E Müller P. Gr. 38= glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna] exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin iii.8; a˚ untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382.
Kili
Kili (sometimes kila) [onomat. fr. sound -- root k&lcircle;] 1. in- decl. the sound "click," of the noise of a trap when shutting J i.243; ii.363, 397 (as "kilī"). -- Also repeated "kilikilī ti" click, click J i.70. -- 2. as n. f. tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliŋ karoti to tinkle J v.203.
Kilikilāyati
Kilikilāyati [denom. fr. kili with reduplication] to tinkle J v.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā "shouting for joy" AvŚ i.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā "shouting hā -- hā and hail -- hail" ibid. i.67 MVastu iii.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati. Note. -- Kil is one of the variations of the sound -- imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. kel -- ados, L. cal -- are, Ohg. hell -- an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr. kla/zw, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan ("laugh") and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk. ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. o)lolu/zw, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti.
Kilijjati
Kilijjati [med -- pass. of kilid=Sk. klid, to be wet. prob.= śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning "to get wet, to be soiled" only in pp. kilinna. -- The Dhtm (199), however, expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid & kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.] to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Sn 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at SnA 481 by pūti hoti). -- pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to "disinfect").
Kiliṭṭha
Kiliṭṭha [pp of kilissati] 1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs J i.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha, clothes DhA ii.261; of pāvāra -- puppha, mango blossom KhA 58=Vism 258. -- 2. unclean, lustful (morally) bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i. e. cohabitation J iv.190; PvA 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Miln 250.
Kilinna
Kilinna [pp. of kilijjati] 1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; J i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚); DA i.284 (assu˚); VvA 67 (seda˚). -- 2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna -- sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i. e. suffering from a skin -- disease), which is Bdhgh's expln of okilinī: see under okiraṇa.
Kilissati
Kilissati [Sk. kliśyati=kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. lei/mac snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed, with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expln by upatāpe.] 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure It 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva); Th 1, 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps i.130. Kilisseyya Dh 158 (expld as nindaŋ labhati) to do wrong. Cp. pari˚.
Kilissana
Kilissana (nt.) getting dirty, staining J i.8.
Kilesa
Kilesa (and klesa) [from kilissati] 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices, passions. 1. Kilesa as obstacle (see ˚āvaraṇa, ˚ -- sampayutta, ˚ -- vippayutta, ˚pahāna) Ps i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu
-- 217 --
bhinnakileso "one whose passions are broken up" Vḅh 246, PvA 51; upasanta kileso "one whose passions are calmed" PvA 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaŋ vihāne Sn 348; pariyodapeyya attānaŋ cittaklesehi paṇḍito S v.24=A v.232, 253=Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487; kilesa+khandha: Ps i.69<-> 72; ii.36, 140; cp. Vbh 44, 68; kilesa+saŋsāra PvA 7; kammaŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa Nett 113, cp. 191. <-> 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa "clinging to existence, false ideas and lust" (see Nd2 s. v. taṇhā v.). -- 4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz. rāga dosa moha kilesa, i. e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd2 s. v. rāga ii.), cp. Dhs 982, 1006. <-> The grouping as dasa kilesa -- vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaŋ uddhaccaŋ ahirikaŋ anottappaŋ Dhs 1548=Vbh 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Ps i.130. -- These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚ -- vatthūni at Vbh 385. -- As three kilesas (past, present and future) at Ps ii.217. -- 5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil, the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd2 s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Nett 191. -- āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vbh 342 Pug 13; Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā id. A iii.436; -- kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -- paripantha danger of lust J vi.57; -- pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -- puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā, āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni. Nett 113, 114; 116 sq. -- bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Nett 2, 192; there are four mentioned at Nett 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saŋyojana˚, upādāna˚; -- māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire DhA i.317 (in expl. of Māra); -- vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229, 1548; Vism 20. -- vinaya the discipline of lust Nett 22; -- vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -- sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles); Vbh 18=30=44=56, 68, 80, 96, 120, 323.
Kileseti
Kileseti [v. den. fr. kilesa] to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364.
Kiloma
Kiloma [=next?] at J iii.49 taken as syn. of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maŋsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma -- vācā).
Kilomaka
Kilomaka [=Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Greek pleu/mwn, Lat. pulmo] the pleura M i.185 = Kh iii, Nett 77=Vbh 193; J iv.292; Miln 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, 357.
Kisa
Kisa (adj.) [Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim] lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (VvA 103). As Ep. of ascetics Sn 165, Dh 395=Th 1, 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113; Sn 426, 585; Sdhp 101; Miln 303. For phrase kisa -- dhamani -- santhata see the latter.
Kisaka
Kisaka=kisa Vin i.36=J i.83; f. kisikā Th 2, 27.
Kissati
Kissati [den. fr. kisa] 1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry J vi.495 (pret. mā kisittha= C. mā kisā bhava). -- 2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ] see pari˚
Kissava
Kissava in neg. akissava at S i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives "without wisdom." Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required?
Kīṭa
Kīṭa (nt.) [cp. Sk. kīṭa] a general term for insect DhA i.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth?) M iii.168 (with puḷava); Sn 602; J vi.208; Miln 272 (˚vaṇṇa); PvA 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at J v.373 means a kind of shield (= cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa.
Kīṭaka
Kīṭaka (nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188.
Kīta
Kīta [pp. of kiṇāti] bought J i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185.
Kīdisa
Kīdisa (interr. adj.) [cp. Sk. kīdṛś=kiŋ dṛśa] what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Sn 836, 1089 (=kiŋ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63; PvA 50, 51; VvA 76). -- As Np. S iv.193. -- See also Kīrisa.
Kīra
Kīra [cp. Sk. kīra] a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi).
Kīrisa
Kīrisa=kīdisa Th 2, 385 (cp. ThA 256).
Kīla
Kīla=a pin, a stake, see Khīla.
Kīḷati
Kīḷati [Sk. krīḍati] to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 (=indriyāni paricarāmi PvA 77) D ii.196; J v.38; Th 2, 147; PvA 16, 67, 77, 189; -- c. acc. to celebrate: nakkhattaŋ J i.50; VvA 63; PvA 73; ThA 137; chaṇaŋ DhA iii.100. -- pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train J ii.267 (sappaŋ to train or tame a snake).
Kīḷanaka
Kīḷanaka [fr. kīḷati] a plaything, a toy Th 2, 384 (with ref. to the moon).
Kīḷanā
Kīḷanā (f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA 67; DhA iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration).
Kīḷā
Kīḷā f. [fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā] play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaŋ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water PvA 189. -- uyyāna˚ amusement in the park DhA i.220; iv. 3; nakkhatta -- kīḷaŋ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA 109, ThA 137; sāla -- kīḷā sport in the sāla woods J v.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun PvA 215; -- Cp. kīḷikā. -- goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -- goḷaka id. Vism 256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA 255; -- pasuta bent on play J i.58; -- bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Miln 229 (= kīḷāpanaka M i.266); -- maṇḍala play -- circle, children's games, playground J vi.332; DhA iii.146; -- sālā playhouse J vi.332.
Kīḷāpanaka
Kīḷāpanaka 1. (nt.) a plaything, toy M i.266, 384; a list given at A v.203. -- 2. (adj.) one who makes play J iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake -- trainer, cp. sappaŋ kīḷāpeti J ii.267).
Kīḷikā
Kīḷikā (f.) play, sport, amusement; always -- ˚, like kumāra˚ D ii.196; uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden) J iii.275; iv.23, 390; udaka˚ ThA 186.
Kīḷita
Kīḷita [pp. of kīḷati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A iv.55 (hasitalapita˚); PvA 76 (sādhu˚). -- (nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M i.229 (kīḷita -- jātaŋ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaŋsu˚˚; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā.
Kīvant & Kīva
Kīvant & Kīva (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp. rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā "however great the terrors" Sn 959. -- Kīva kaṭuka how painful? PvA 226; k˚ -- ciraŋ how long? Pj and Sn 1004; k˚ -- dīghaŋ same Sn p. 126; k˚ dūre how far? Miln 16; DhA i.386; k˚ -- mahantaŋ how big? DhA i.29; VvA 325; k˚ bahuŋ how much? DhA iv.193.
Kīvatika
Kīvatika (interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus? Vin i.117.
-- 218 --
Ku
Ku (kud -- and kum -- ) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad;=Lat.* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara < (qṷ)uter; cp. also Vedic kū how? Sk. kutra, kutaḥ, kuha, kva) where? when? whither? whence? As adv. in cpds. in disparaging sense of "what of"? i. e. nothing of, bad, wrong, little, e. g. kum -- magga wrong path; kuk -- kucca=kud -- kicca doing wrong, troubling about little=worry. -- kuŋ at PvA 57 (in expl. of kuñjara) is interpreted as paṭhavi. 1. Kuto where from? whence? Dh 62; k˚bhayaŋ whence i. e. why fear? Dh 212 sq.; Sn 270, 862; Pv ii.69; how? J vi.330; with nu whence or why then? Sn 1049 (=kacci ssu Nd2 s. v.). kut -- ettha=kuto ettha J. i.53. -- na kuto from nowhere Sn 35, 919; a -- kuto id. in akutobhaya "with nothing to fear from anywhere" i. e. with no reason for fear S i.192; Th 1, 510; Th 11, 333; Sn 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (id.); kuto -- ja arisen from where? Sn 270; -- ˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Sn 270, 864 sq. 2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pug 27; indef. kudācanaŋ: at any time, na k˚ never Sn 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaŋ SnA 277); Dh 5, 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto k˚ "by walking, the end of the world can never be reached" S i.62. 3. Kuva, kva, where? Sn 970 (kuvaŋ & kuva) indef. kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upamā kvaci "of whom (i. e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere" Sn 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd2 like kuhiñci. kuvaŋ at D iii.183. 4. Kutha (kudha) where? J v.485 (=kuhiŋ). 5. Kuhiŋ (=kuhaŋ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither? Often with fut.: k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Sn 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaŋ ettakaŋ divasaŋ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days? PvA 6; 13; 42; indef. kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚: nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi taṇhā k˚ loke "he has no desire for anything in this world" Sn 496, 783, 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048=kimhici; Dh 180.
Kukutthaka
Kukutthaka (v. l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird J vi.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus.
Kukku
Kukku [cp. Sk. kiṣku?] a measure of length S v.445= A iv.404, and in kukkukata Vin i.255=v.172 (cp. however Vin. Texts i.154, on Bdhgh's note=temporary).
Kukkuka
Kukkuka [fr. kukku] "of the kukku -- measure," to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone -- pillar, 16 k's high S v.445 A iv.404. -- akukkuka -- jāta of enormous height (of a tree) M i.233=S iii.141 (text: akukkajāta) =iv.167; A ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean "grown crooked," a˚ the opposite.
Kukkucca
Kukkucca [kud -- kicca] 1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaŋ kataŋ kukataŋ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaŋ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; -- Various explanations in Nd2 on Sn 1106=Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha -- pada˚) J i.119=DA i.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone J ii.142. -- 2. remorse, scruple, worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q. v.) Vin i.49; iv.70; D i.246; S i.99; M i.437; A i.134=Sn 1106; A i.282; Sn 925; Nd2 379; DhA iii.483; iv.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96. -- na kiñci k˚ŋ na koci vippaṭissāreti "has nobody any remorse?" S iii.120=iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ŋ vinodetuŋ A v.72; k. pahāya D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse M i.108; khīṇāsava k˚ -- vūpasanta S i.167=Sn 82. -- akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Sn 850. Kukkuccaŋ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about J i.377; kariŋsu DhA iv.88; cp. kukkuccaŋ āpajjati (expl. by sankati) J iii.66.
Kukkuccaka
Kukkuccaka (adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, "faith- ful in little" J i.376; VvA 319.
Kukkuccāyati
Kukkuccāyati [denom. fr. kukkucca] to feel remorse, to worry A i.85; Pug 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta=kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160=Nd2 s. v.
Kukkucciya
Kukkucciya=kukkucca Sn 972.
Kukkuṭa
Kukkuṭa (Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic=Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Miln 363; J iv.58; VvA 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen DhA i.48; ThA 255; in simile M i.104=357=A iv.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako). -- aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen's egg Vism 261. -- patta the wing of a cock A iv.47. -- potaka a chicken, in simile M i.104=357=A iv.126=176. -- yuddha a cock fight D i.6; -- lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock D i.9; -- sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) A i.159=D iii.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -- sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs D i.5= A ii.209=Pug 58; D i.141; A ii.42 sq.; It 36.
Kukkura
Kukkura [Sk. kurkura, or is it ku -- krura? Cp. kurūra) a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound A iii.389; v.271; J i.175 sq.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes: S iv.198; M i.364; A iv.377. -- f. kukkurinī Miln 67. -- vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic M i.387 (+dukkara kāraka; also as k˚ -- vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa); D iii.6, 7; Nett 99 (+govatika; -- sangha a pack of hounds A iii.75.
Kukkuḷa
Kukkuḷa [taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory, e. g. MVastu i.6; iii.369, 455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla] hot ashes, embers S iii.177; J ii.134; Kvu 208, cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory S i.209; J v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24. -- vassa a shower of hot ashes J i.73; iv.389 (v. l.).
Kukkusa
Kukkusa 1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaŋ mattikaŋ=kuṇḍakañ c'eva mattikañ ca). -- 2. (adj.) variegated, spotted J vi.539 (=kaḷakabara 540; v. l. B. ukkusa).
Kunkuma
Kunkuma (nt.) [cp. Sk. kunkuma] saffron Miln 382; Vism 241.
Kunkumin
Kunkumin (adj.) fidgety J v.435.
Kunkumiya
Kunkumiya (nt.) noise, tumult J v.437 (=kolāhala).
Kucchi
Kucchi (f.) [Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa] a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227; J v.416; jāla˚ the hollow of the net J i.210. As womb frequent, e. g. mātu˚ J i.149; DA i.224; PvA 19, 63, 111, 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha J i.50; ii.2; vi.482; DhA ii.261. -- ḍāha enteric fever DhA i.182; -- parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly D i.71=Pug 58; -- roga abdominal trouble J i.243; -- vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301; -- vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646=740=875.
Kucchita
Kucchita [Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy] contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms VvA 215; in def. of kāya KhA 38; in def. of kusala DhsA 39; VvA 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paŋsu -- kūla Vism 60.
Kucchimant
Kucchimant (adj.) [fr. kucchi] pregnant J v.181.
Kujati
Kujati [or kujjati? see kujja] in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked?
Kujana
Kujana (adj.) [fr. kujati] only neg. a˚ not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma S i.33.
Kujja
Kujja (adj.) [Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. kufo/s, Mhg. hogger, humpback] lit. "bent," as nt. kujjaŋ in ajjhena -- kujjaŋ Sn 242 crookedness, deceit, fraud (cp. SnA 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚.
-- 219 --
Kujjhati
Kujjhati [cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh] to be angry with (dat.) A i.283=Pug 32, 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataŋ, "don't be angry" S i.240; mā kujjhi J iii.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā PvA 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11
Kujjhana
Kujjhana (adj.) [fr. kujjhati] angry=kodhana VvA 71; Pug A 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation, together with kujjhitattaŋ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060= Pug 18, 22.
Kujjhāpana
Kujjhāpana (nt.) [Caus. formation fr. kujjhati] being angry at DhA iv.182.
Kuñca
Kuñca (nt.) [kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. krw/cw, kraugh/; all of crowing noise; from sound -- root k&rcircle;, see note on gala] a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only). -- kāra cackling (of a hen) ThA 255; -- nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) J iii.114.
Kuñcikā
Kuñcikā (f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148; Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key); DA i.200, 207, 252; DhA ii.143.
Kuñcita
Kuñcita (adj.) [pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent] bent, crooked J i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair); v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102.
Kuñja
Kuñja (m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuñjara at VvA 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati) and PvA 57 (kuŋ pathaviŋ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraŋ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -- nadī˚ a river glen DA i.209.
Kuñjara
Kuñjara (m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant's trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚] an elephant Vin ii.195; M i.229, 375; S i.157; Dh 322, 324, 327; J v.336; Vv 51; Pv i.113; DhA iv.4; ThA 252; Miln 245. -- deva˚ chief of the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; J v.158. -- vara a state elephant VvA 181. -- sālā an elephant's stable DhA iv.203.
Kuṭa
Kuṭa a pitcher Vv 509; J i.120; DhA ii.19, 261; iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at J i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at DhsA 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge -- hammer.
Kuṭaka
Kuṭaka a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka S ii.258.
Kuṭaja
Kuṭaja a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Neri- cum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45).
Kuṭati
Kuṭati see paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa1.
Kuṭava
Kuṭava (v. l. S. kū˚; B. kulāvaka) a nest J iii.74; v. l. at DhA ii.23 (for kuṭikā).
Kuṭikā
Kuṭikā (f.) from kuṭī [B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. ii.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35, 41, 42 =VvA 10; PvA 42, 81; DhA ii.23. Cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña˚ a hut in the woods S i.61; iii.116; iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Th 1, 1. -- As adj. -- ˚, e. g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dh i.313.
Kuṭimbika
Kuṭimbika (also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a land- lord, the head of a family, J i.68, 126, 169, 225; ii.423; PvA 31, 38, 73, 82. Kutumbiya -- putta Np. Vism 48.
Kuṭila
Kuṭila (adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) J iii.112 (=jimha); Miln 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Miln 351. -- a˚ straight Vv 167 ( -- magga). -- bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; PvA 51; VvA 84. -- a˚ uprightness Bdhd 20.
Kuṭilatā
Kuṭilatā (f.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness, falseness, in a˚, up- rightness of character Dhs 50, 51; DhA i.173.
Kuṭī
Kuṭī (kuṭi˚) (f.) any single -- roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa -- kuṭī see vehāsa & Vin iv.46); Sn 18, 19; Pv ii.28; VvA 188, 256 (cīvara˚, a cloak as tent). See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚, vacca˚. -- kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut J ii.282; iii.78. 351; -- dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest DhA ii. 23; -- purisa a "hut man," a peasant Miln 147.
Kuṭukuñcaka
Kuṭukuñcaka see kaṭukañcuka.
Kuṭumba
Kuṭumba (nt.) family property & estates J i.122, 225; rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king's property J i.369, 439. -- kuṭumbaŋ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment J i.225; ii.423; iii.376.
Kuṭumbika
Kuṭumbika see kuṭimbika.
Kuṭṭa
Kuṭṭa1 [cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with koṭṭ by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ of kūṭa1, which is expld as koṭilla] powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205; ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205.
Kuṭṭa
Kuṭṭa2 [of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa -- rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e. g. MVastu i.231] only found in cpds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa -- rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince S iii.156 (v. l. kuḍḍa˚); =v.44 (v. l. kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ J v.102 sq., where expl. pāpa -- rājā, with vv. ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka -- rājā.
Kuṭṭha
Kuṭṭha1 (nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy J v.69, 72, 89; vi.196, 383; Vism 35 (+gaṇḍa); DA i.260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see J v.69, iv.196.
Kuṭṭha
Kuṭṭha2 a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice J vi.537.
Kuṭṭhita
Kuṭṭhita hot, sweltering (of uṇha) S iv.289 (v. l. kikita); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita.
Kuṭṭhin
Kuṭṭhin a leper M i.506 (in simile); Th 1, 1054; J v.413; vi.196; Ud 49; DhA iii.255.
Kuṭṭhilikā
Kuṭṭhilikā the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala˚) VvA 344 (=sipāṭikā).
Kuṭhārī
Kuṭhārī (f.) [cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe=Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc]. An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144; S iv.160, 167; M i.233=S iii.141; A. i.141; ii.201; iv.171; J i.431; DhA iii.59; PvA 277. Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe "when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)" S i.149=Sn 657=A v.174.
Kuḍumalaka
Kuḍumalaka [for kusuma˚] an opening bud A iv.117, 119.
Kuḍḍa
Kuḍḍa [to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa] a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka "a little wattle and daub town" D ii.146, 169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh. Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply -- built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266, viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā˚
-- 220 --
of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is "geha -- bhittiyā etam adhivacanaŋ." Kuḍḍa -- rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaŋ outside the wall M i.34=ii.18; A iv.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh viii1=Pv i.51. -- parakuḍḍaŋ nissāya J ii.431 (near another man's wall) is doubtful; vv. ll. S. kuḍḍhaŋ. B. kuṭaŋ and kuṭṭaŋ. (kuḍḍa -- ) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152. Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa.
Kuḍḍamūla
Kuḍḍa -- mūla a sort of root Vin iii.15.
Kuḍḍaka
Kuḍḍaka in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls J i.92.
Kuṇa
Kuṇa (adj.) [cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend=Gr. kullo/s crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake] distorted, bent, crooked, lame Pv ii.926 (v. l. kuṇḍa; cp. PvA 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an -- ujubhūta); DhA iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame).
Kuṇapa
Kuṇapa [der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa] a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68=M i.73=A iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa˚ pūti˚); A iv.198 sq.; Sn 205; J i.61, 146; PvA 15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5; also Vin iii.68≈. -- The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚, go˚, mahiŋsa˚, manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. Cp. kaḷebara. -- gandha smell of a rotting corpse SnA 286; PvA 32.
Kuṇalin
Kuṇalin in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, con- torted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy's S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), expld PvA 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaŋ (or vikucitaŋ SS.) sakuṇitaŋ (better: sankucitaŋ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink).
Kuṇāla
Kuṇāla N. of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) J v.214 sq. (kuṇāla -- jātaka). Kuṇāla -- daha "cuckoo -- lake," N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416.
Kuṇālaka
Kuṇālaka [fr. kuṇāla] the cuckoo J v.406 (=kokila).
Kuṇi
Kuṇi (adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pug A iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) J i.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha)= DhA i.376; Pug 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja.
Kuṇita
Kuṇita (or kuṇika)=kuṇa PvA 123, 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi˚.
Kuṇṭha
Kuṇṭha [cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) DhA i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pug A i.34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353. -- 2. a cripple J ii.117.
Kuṇṭhita
Kuṇṭhita [a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita] Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita S i.197, both in phrase paŋsu˚, according to Hardy, PvA p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti). The v. l. at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paŋsukuṇṭhita at J vi.559 (=˚makkhita C; v. l. B B. kuṇḍita).
Kuṇḍa
Kuṇḍa (a) bent, crooked DA i.296 (˚daṇḍaka); PvA 181.
Kuṇḍaka
Kuṇḍaka the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151; 280; J ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka)=DhA iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder: DhA ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraŋ makkhetvā). -- sakuṇḍaka ( -- bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder -- cake J v.383. -- angārapūva pancake of rice powder DhA iii.324; -- kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka "the rice -- (cake -- ) belly colt" J ii.288; -- khādaka (a) eating rice -- powder J ii.288; (cp. DhA iii.325); -- dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder, Ep. of the blood J iii.542; -- pūva cake of husk -- powder J i.422 sq.; -- muṭṭhi a handful of rice -- powder VvA 5; DhA i.425; -- yāgu husk -- powder gruel J ii.288.
Kuṇḍala
Kuṇḍala [cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding] a ring esp. earring A i.254= iii.16; J iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings); DhA i.25. Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156; S i.77; M i.366; Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called "lion's mouth" J v.205 (=kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Miln 220=J iii.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaŋ). Cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt VvA 212. -- kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round D ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa).
Kuṇḍalin
Kuṇḍalin1 (adj.) [fr. kuṇḍala] wearing earrings S iv.343; J v.136; vi.478. su˚ Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np. DhA i.25; Pv ii.5.
Kuṇḍalin
Kuṇḍalin2 in kuṇḍalī -- kata contorted Pv ii.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14.
Kuṇḍi
Kuṇḍi (f.) [=kuṇḍikā] a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍi- paddhana giving a pailful of milk J vi.504 (Kern, Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāŋsy'ôpadohana & proposes reading kuṇḍ' opadohana. See also kaŋsupadhāraṇa).
Kuṇḍika
Kuṇḍika [cp. kuṇḍa] bending, in ahi -- kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) J iv.308 (v. l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi; and catu -- kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i. e. walking on all fours M i.79; Pv iii.24 (expl. at PvA 181).
Kuṇḍikā
Kuṇḍikā (f.) a water -- pot J i.8, 9, ii.73 (=kamaṇḍalu), 317; v.390; DhA i.92 (cp. kuṭa).
Kutuka
Kutuka (adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41.
Kutumbaka
Kutumbaka ( -- puppha) N. of a flower J i.60.
Kutūhala
Kutūhala (m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22; DhA iii.194 (v. l. kot˚). a˚ (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming J i.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa -- vaco of straight speech). See also kotūhala. -- mangala a festivity, ceremony, Nd2 in expl. of anekarūpena Sn 1079, 1082; -- sālā a hall for recreation, a common room D i.179=S iv.398=M ii.2, cp. Divy 143.
Kuto
Kuto see under ku˚.
Kutta
Kutta (nt.) [Der. fr. kattā=Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra=P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial=P. kuttima, in caus. -- pass. sense=kappita of kḷp)] "being made up." 1. Work. The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā. The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. D iii.28. -- 2. behaviour, i. e. charming behaviour, coquetry J ii.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) J i.296, 433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) J ii.127; iv.219, 472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ A iv.57=Dhs 633 (expl. at DhsA 321 by kiriyā). -- As adj. in kuttavāla, well arranged, plaited tails D i.105 (expld at DA i.274 as kappita -- vāla; cp. kappita).
Kuttaka
Kuttaka [der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or "woven," with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?] 1. nt. a woollen carpet (DA i.87=as used for dancing -- women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163. -- 2. adj. "made up," pretending, in samaṇa -- k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68 -- 71.
Kuttama
Kuttama in kāsi -- kuttama J vi.49 should be read as kāsik'- uttama.
Kutti
Kutti (f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony); J iii.314 (massu˚ beard -- dressing, expld by
-- 221 --
massu -- kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!); iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā); v.215 (=karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa).
Kutthaka
Kutthaka S i.66 should be replaced by v. l. koṭṭhuka.
Kutha
Kutha see under ku˚.
Kuthati
Kuthati [Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita2] to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v.) J vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita). -- pp. kuthita.
Kuthana
Kuthana (nt.) [fr. kvath=kuth] digestion Vism 345.
Kuthita
Kuthita [pp. of kuthati] 1. boiled, cooked Th 2, 504; KhA 62; Vism 259=KhA 58. Cp. vikkuthita. <-> 2. digested Vism 345. -- 3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati=pūti hoti) Miln 250 (+kiliṭṭha). -- Cp. Vin. Texts ii.57 on Bdhgh's note to MV vi.14, 5.
Kudaṇḍaka
Kudaṇḍaka a throng J iii.204.
Kudassu
Kudassu (kud -- assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) A i.107; Nett 87; SnA 103.
Kudā
Kudā see under ku˚.
Kudāra
Kudāra (ku -- dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147.
Kudārikā
Kudārikā at Pv iv.147 & PvA 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā.
Kudiṭṭhi
Kudiṭṭhi (f.) [ku+diṭṭhi] wrong belief Sdhp 86.
Kuddāla
Kuddāla a spade or a hoe (kanda -- mūla -- phalagahaṇ'- atthaŋ DA i.269) Vin iii.144; J v.45; DhA iv.218. Often in combn kuddāla -- piṭaka "hoe and basket" D i.101; S ii.88; v.53; A i.204; ii.199; J i.225, 336.
Kuddālaka
Kuddālaka=prec. DhA i.266.
Kuddha
Kuddha (adj.) [pp. of kujjhati] angry A iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93); Pv i.77; J ii.352, 353; vi.517; DhA ii.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse It 2=7.
Kudrūsa
Kudrūsa a kind of grain Miln 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264; D iii.71; Nd2 314; DA i.78; DhsA 331.
Kunta
Kunta [cp. Sk. kunta lance?] a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa J iv. 466.
Kuntanī
Kuntanī (f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird J iii.134.
Kuntha
Kuntha, only in combn kuntha -- kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant J i.439; iv.142; Sn 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; KhA 189. Cp. kimi.
Kunda
Kunda (nt.) the jasmine Dāvs v.28.
Kunnadī
Kunnadī (f.) (kuŋ -- nadī) a small river, a rivulet S i.109; ii.32, 118; A iv.100; J iii.221; Vism 231, 416; DA i.58.
Kupatha
Kupatha (kuŋ+patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Miln 390.
Kupita
Kupita (adj.) [pp. of kuppati] -- 1. shaken, disturbed Th 2, 504 (by fire=ThA 292); J iii.344 (˚indriya). <-> 2. offended, angry D iii.238=M i.101=A iv.460= v.18; M. i.27; A iii.196 sq.; Pv i.67. Often combd with anattamana "angry and displeased" Vin ii.189; D i.3, 90 (=DA i.255 kuddha). -- As nt. kupitaŋ disturbance, in paccanta˚ a disturbance on the borderland J iii.497; Miln 314; PvA 20.
Kuppa
Kuppa (adj.) [ger. of kuppati] shaking, unsteady, movable; A iii.128 (˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu); Sn 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaŋ anger Vin ii.133 (karis<-> sāmi I shall pretend to be angry). -- akuppa (adj.) and akuppaŋ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa -- dhammo Pug 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaŋ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251.
Kuppati
Kuppati [Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake= Lat. cupio, cupidus, "to crave with agitation," cp. semantically Lat. tremere>Fr. craindre] to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. <-> aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti A iii.101; Sn. 826, 854; Pug 11, 12, 30. Of the wind Miln 135; of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) J ii.393, 433; paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed J iv.446 (cp. kupita).
Kuppila
Kuppila [?] a kind of flower J vi.218 (C: mantālaka- makula).
Kubbati
Kubbati2 etc. see karoti ii.
Kubbanaka
Kubbanaka [fr. kuŋ -- vana] brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Sn 1134 (expl. Nd2 by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka).
Kubbara
Kubbara the pole of a carriage A iv.191, 193; VvA 269, 271, 275. ratha˚ S i.109, Vv 642 (=vedikā VvA). Der. (vividha -- ) kubbaratā VvA 276.
Kumati
Kumati wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137.
Kumāra
Kumāra [Vedic kumāra] a young boy, son Sn 685 sq. (kuhiŋ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52; PvA 39, 41 (=māṇava); daharo kumāro M ii.24, 44. -- a son of ( -- ˚) rāja˚ PvA 163; khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ J iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84. -- kīḷā the amusement of a boy J i.137; -- pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kh iii.; -- lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+kumāri˚) D i.9.
Kumāraka
Kumāraka 1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls S iii.190. 2. nt. ˚ŋ a childish thing A iii.114. -- f. ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin J i.290, 411; ii.180; iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64; DhA iii.171. -- vāda speech like a young boy's; S ii.219.
Kumārī
Kumārī (f.) a young girl Vin ii.10; v.129 (thulla˚); A iii.76; J iii.395 (daharī k˚); Pug 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā). -- pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit D i.11 (cp. DA i.97).
Kumina
Kumina (nt.) a fish net Vin iii.63; Th 1, 297; J ii.238; ThA 243.
Kumuda
Kumuda (nt.) 1. the white lotus Dh 285; Vv 354 (=VvA 161); J v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174; DA i.139. -- 2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā A v.173=Sn p. 126. -- naḷa a lotus -- stalk J i.223; -- patta ( -- vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals J i.58 (Ep. of sindhavā, steeds); -- bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Miln 292; -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) PvA 74, -- vana a mass of white lotuses J v.37.
Kumbha
Kumbha [for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot (=kulālabhājana earthenware DhA i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: A i.130, 131=Pug 32; A v.337; S ii.83; Miln 414. As uda˚ waterpot Dh 121; J i.20; Pv i.129. -- 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa); VvA 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these). -- ûpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dh 40 (=DhA i.317); of var. kinds of puggalā A ii.104=Pug 45. -- kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D i.51=Miln 331. Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D i.78=M ii.18; Vism 142, 376; Sn 577; DhA i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the
-- 222 --
king's potter J i.121. -- 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA 163. -- Cpds.: ˚antevāsin the potter's apprentice D i.78=M ii.18; -- ˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, 344; S iii.119; ˚pāka the potter's oven S ii.83; A iv.102; ˚ -- putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq.; -- kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -- ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well D i.8=D iii.36=A v.128= S v.419, expld. at DA i.90 by udaka -- ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha -- kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha -- dāsikathā vā; -- thūṇa a sort of drum D i.6 (expl. at DA i.84: caturassara -- ammaṇakatāḷaŋ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke); D iii.183; J v.506 (pāṇissaraŋ+). -- ˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285=302; -- tthenaka of cora, a thief, "who steals by means of a pot" (i. e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin. Texts iii.325 "robber burglars") only in simile Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; -- dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well D i.168; Miln 331; DhA i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā). -- dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Sn 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. -- bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold J v.46; -- matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā J iii.147.
Kumbhaṇḍa
Kumbhaṇḍa 1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras S ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaŋ gacchanto); J i.204; iii.147 (with def.); Miln 267; DhA i.280; Pgdp 60. -- 2. nt. a kind of gourd J i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka -- lābuka˚); DA i.73= DhA i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu+).
Kumbhī
Kumbhī (f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49, 52, 286; ii.142, 210; Th 2, 283. loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Sn 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya PvA 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi˚. -- mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi -- mukha) D i.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328.
Kumbhīla
Kumbhīla (kuŋ+bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) J i.216, 278; DhA i.201; iii.362. -- bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at M i.459 sq.=A ii.123 sq.; Miln 196=Nd2 on bhaya. -- Th 2, 502; -- rājā the king of the crocodiles J ii.159.
Kumbhīlaka
Kumbhīlaka [fr. kumbhīla] a kind of bird ("little croco- dile") J iv.347.
Kumma
Kumma [Vedic kūrma] a tortoise S iv.177 (+kacchapa); M i.143; J v.489; Miln 363, 408 (here as land -- tortoise: cittaka -- dhara˚).
Kummagga
Kummagga (and kumagga) [kuŋ+magga] a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Miln 390 (+kupatha); fig. (=micchāpatha) Dhs 381, 1003; Pug 22. Kummaggaŋ paṭipajjati to lose one's way, to go astray. lit. Pv iv.35; PvA 44 (v. l. SS.); fig. Sn 736; It 117; Th 2, 245.
Kummāsa
Kummāsa [Vedic kulmāṣa] junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) D i.76=M ii.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646, 740, 875. <-> Vin iii.15; J i.228; Vv 146 (=VvA 62 yava˚); VvA 98 (odana˚). In combn with pūva (cake) DhA i.367; PvA 244.
Kummiga
Kummiga (kuŋ+miga] a small or insignificant animal Miln 346.
Kuyyaka
Kuyyaka a kind of flower J i.60 (˚puppha).
Kuraṇḍaka
Kuraṇḍaka [cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth] a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa Npl. Vism 38.
Kurara
Kurara an osprey J iv.295, 397 (=ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (=seta˚).
Kuravaka
Kuravaka [=Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka] N. of a tree, in ratta˚ J i.39 (=bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree).
Kurunga
Kurunga [deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga] a kind of antelope, in -- miga the antelope deer J i.173 (k˚ -- jatāka); ii.153 (do.).
Kuruṭṭharū
Kuruṭṭharū (v. l. kururū) a badly festering sore D ii.242.
Kurundī
Kurundī N. of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts i.258; ii.14).
Kuruvindaka
Kuruvindaka vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath -- powder made from k. J iii.282; and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin ii.315; Vin. Texts iii.67).
Kurūra
Kurūra (adj.) [Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. kre/as (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw] bloody, raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody) occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc.) A iii.383= Pug 56 (expld. Pug A 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at PvA 181).
Kurūrin
Kurūrin=kurūra Pv iii.23.
Kula
Kula (nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv ii.943 [Idg. *qṷel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati] 1. clan, a high social grade, "good family," cp. Gr. (doric) fua/, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; "house" in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric gene/h). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaŋ & upaṭṭhāka -- kulaŋ. -- 1. A ii.249 (on welfare and ill -- luck of clans); Sn 144; 711; It 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dh 193. -- brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family A v.249; J iv.411, etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader J iii.82; kassaka˚ id. of a farmer J ii.109; purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker J vi.364; upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin i.83; sindhava˚ VvA 280. -- uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opp. nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, etc. M ii.152=A i.107=ii.85=iii.385=Pug 51; sadisa˚ a descent of equal standing PvA 82; kula -- rūpa -- sampanna endowed with "race" and beauty PvA 3, 280. -- 2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people DhA i.388; parakulesu among other people Dh 73; parakule do. VvA 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Sn 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd2 on taṇhā iv. -- devakula temple J ii.411; rāja˚ the king's household. palace J i.290; iii.277; vi.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ A iv.278) appapurisāni "communities in which there are many women but few men" Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; ñāti -- kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaŋ sandhāya VvA 171). -- angāra "the charcoal of the family" i. e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer S iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv. ll. show ti as superfluous); printed kulanguro (for kul -- ankuro? v. l. kulangāro) kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp. vv. ll. at J iv.69) dhanavināsako J vi.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo J iv.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta DhA iii.350; Sn A 192 (of a dujjāto putto), and kulagandhana; -- itthi a wife of good descent,
-- 223 --
together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10; A iii.76; Vism 18. -- ûpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner, P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e. g. Vin iii.131, 135; iv.20. -- Vin i.192, 208; iii.84, 237; v.132; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.136, 258 sq.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28; DA i.142 (rāja˚); PvA 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66; -- gandhana at It 64 and kule gandhina at J iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J. -- passages on avajāta -- putta. The It -- MSS. either explain k -- gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv. ll. kuladhaŋsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -- geha clanhouse, i. e. father's house DhA i.49. -- tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi -- rakkhako anujāto putto "one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family" J vi.380; -- dattika (and ˚dattiya) given by the family or clan J iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where DhA i.346 reads ˚santaka), 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati). -- dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10; VvA 196; -- dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Sn 89; DhA ii.109; -- dvāra the door of a family Sn 288; -- dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10; DhA iii.172; VvA 6; PvA 112; -- pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour A i.25, cp. SnA 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; -- putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at D i.93, 94≈; Vin i.15, 43, 185, 288, 350; M i.85≈(in kāmānaŋ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; A ii.249; J i.82; vi.71; It 89; VvA 128; PvA 12, 29; -- macchariya selfishness concerning one's family, touchiness about his clan D iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚; -- vaŋsa lineage, progeny M ii.181; A iii.43; iv.61; DA i.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana D iii.189; PvA 5; nassati or nāseti J iv.69; VvA 149; upacchindati PvA 31, 82; -- santaka belonging to one's family, property of the clan J i.52; DhA i.346 (where J iv.146 reads ˚dattika).
Kulanka
Kulanka -- pādaka "buttresses of timber" (Vin. Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78).
Kulattha
Kulattha a kind of vetch M i.245 (˚yūsa): Miln 267; Vism 256 (˚yūsa).
Kulala
Kulala a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka+k˚ Vin iv.40; Sn 675 (=SnA 250); gijjha+k˚ PvA 198; gijjhā kākā k˚ Vin iii.106; kākā k˚ gijjhā M i.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo M i.364, 429.
Kulāla
Kulāla a potter; only in -- cakka a potter's wheel J i.63; -- bhājana a potter's vessel DhA i.316; PvA 274.
Kulāva
Kulāva 1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaŋ gamenti "don't let anything go to waste." Reading doubtful. -- 2. a cert. bird J vi.538.
Kulāvaka
Kulāvaka (nt.) a nest D i.91 (=DA i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaŋ); S i.8; S i.224=J i.203 (a brood of birds=supaṇṇapotakā); J iii.74 (v. l. BB), 431; vi.344; DhA ii.22.
Kulika
Kulika (adj.) [fr. kula] belonging to a family, in agga˚ coming from a very good family PvA 199.
Kuḷika
Kuḷika (?) in kata˚ -- kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin ii.315 (C.V. v.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka -- sutti.
Kulinka
Kulinka a bird J iii.541 (=sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka.
Kulin
Kulin=kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader, p. 1024).
Kulīna
Kulīna=prec. in abhijāta -- kula -- kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Miln 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family S i.87; M iii.37; VvA 32; nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 462.
Kulīra
Kulīra a crab, in kulīra -- pādaka "a crab -- footer," i. e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149; iv.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal's feet (Vin. Texts iii.164).
Kulīraka
Kulīraka a crab J vi.539 (=kakkaṭaka 540).
Kulunka
Kulunka a cert. small bird J iii.478. Cp. kulinka.
Kulla
Kulla1 a raft (of basket -- work) (orig. meaning "hollow shaft," cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr. kaulo/s, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin i.230; D ii.89 (kullaŋ bandhati); M i.134 (kullūpama dhamma).
Kulla
Kulla2 (adj.) [fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya] be- longing to the family J iv.34 (˚vatta family custom).
Kullaka
Kullaka crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket J vi.64. -- vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern's expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn=kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well -- bred, of good family, gentlemanly. -- saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft J ii.406 -- 408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern, Toev. i.154.
Kuva
Kuva(ŋ) see ku -- .
Kuvalaya
Kuvalaya the (blue) water -- lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q. v. Vv 354; DA i.50; VvA 161, 181; PvA 23, 77.
Kuvilāra
Kuvilāra=koviḷāra J v.69 (v. l. B. ko˚).
Kusa
Kusa 1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) DhA iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraŋ tiṇaŋ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dh 311; J i.190 (=tiṇa); iv.140. -- 2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse "when the lot has been cast" Vin i.299; kusaŋ sankāmetvā "having passed the lot on" Vin iii.58. -- agga the point of a blade of grass PvA 254=DA i.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dh 70; VvA 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -- kaṇṭhaka=prec. Pv iii.228; -- cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305=D i.167 =A i.240, 295=ii.206=Pug 55; -- pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285; -- muṭṭhi a handful of grass A v.234= 249.
Kusaka
Kusaka=prec. Vv 355 (=VvA 162).
Kusala
Kusala (adj.) [cp. Sk. kuśala] 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious M i.226; Dh 44; J i.222. Esp. appl. in moral sense (=puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaŋ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti It 21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Sn 591, cp. 523; Pv i.33 (=nipuṇa). With kamma=a meritorious action, in kammaŋ katvā kusalaŋ D iii.157; Vv iii.27; Pv i.1011 see cpds. -- ācāra -- k˚ good in conduct Dh 376; parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dpvs iv.19; magga˚ (and opp. amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) S iii.108; samāpatti˚, etc. A v.156 sq.; sālittaka -- payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing
-- 224 --
potsherds PvA 282. -- In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita -- salanādi atthena kusalaŋ VvA 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaŋsenti ti kusalā DhsA 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii). -- 2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. DhsA 162, 200, etc.): yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ kusalena pithīyati, so imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104=Dh 173=Th 1, 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Sn 981; Vv 301 (=ārogyaŋ); D i.24; J vi.367; Pv i.13 (=puñña); PvA 75; Miln 25. -- In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaŋ (cp. sīla) M i.47; A v.241, 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase -- kusala -- dhammā Sn 1039, 1078, expld. in extenso Nd2 s. v. See also cpd. ˚dhamma. -- Kusalaŋ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i. e. kāyena, vācāya, manasā It 78; cp. Dh 53; sabba -- pāpassa akaraṇaŋ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaŋ etaŋ Buddhānusāsanaŋ D ii.49=Dh 183; cp. Nett 43, 81, 171, 186. Kusalaŋ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaŋ pajahati to give up wrong habits) A i.58; iv.109 sq.; It 9. -- akusala adj.: improper, wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed D i.37, 163; bālo+akusalo Sn 879, 887;=pāpa PvA 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaŋ & akusalaŋ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara˚ eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452 -- 454. -- kusalâkusala good and bad M i.489; S v.91; Miln 25; Nett 161, 192; Dhs 1124 sq. -- sukusala (dhammānaŋ) highly skilled D i.180 (cp. M. ii.31). -- anuesin striving after righteousness Sn 965; cp. kinkusalānuesin D ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin M i.163 sq.; -- abhisanda overflow of merit (+puñña˚) A ii.54 sq.; iii.51; 337; -- kamma meritorious action, right conduct A i.104; 292 sq.; Ps i.85; ii.72 sq.; PvA 9, 26; -- cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vbh 169 -- 173, 184, 285 sq., 294 sq.; -- cetanā right volition Vbh 135; -- dhammā (pl.) (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character S ii.206; M i.98; A iv.11 sq.; v.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pug 68, 71; Vbh 105; Ps i.101, 132; ii.15, 230; VvA 74, 127; -- pakkha "the side of virtue," all that belongs to good character M iii.77 (and a˚) with adj. ˚pakkhika S v.91; -- macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family) cp. Nd2 on veviccha; -- mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha M i.47, 489=A i.203=Nett 183; D iii.214; Dhs 32, 313, 981; Vbh 169 sq., 210; Nett 126. Cp. ˚paccaya Vbh 169; ˚ropanā Nett 50; -- vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚ D iii.215; It 82; Nett 126; -- vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz. ahetuka & sahetuka). -- vedanā good, pure feeling Vbh 3 sq.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vbh 6 sq.; Nett 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā); -- sīla good, proper conduct of life M ii.25 sq.; adj. ˚sīlin D i.115 (=DA i.286).
Kusalatā
Kusalatā [fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only -- ˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. -- lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs VvA 138; aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities PvA 67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345 -- 348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments; dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D iii.212 and Dhs 1329 -- 1338; cp. A i.84, 94.
Kusi
Kusi (nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287; ii.177; and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh's note in Vin. Texts ii.208.
Kusīta
Kusīta (adj.) [Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja] indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma -- vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo DhA ii.260; by nibbiriyo DhA iii.410; by alaso PvA 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; It 27, 116; Dh 7, 112, 280; Miln 300, 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dh 112; combd with dussīla Miln 300, 396; with duppañña D iii.252=282; A ii.227, 230; iii.7, 183, 433. -- In other connections: M i.43, 471; A iii.7 sq., 127; v.95, 146, 153, 329 sq.; S ii.29, 159, 206; It 71, 102; J iv.131 (nibbiriya+); Vism 132; DhA i.69. The eight kusītavatthūni, occasions of indolence, are enumerated at A iv.332; D iii.255; Vbh 385. -- akusīta alert, mindful, careful Sn 68 (+alīnacitto); Nd2 s. v.; Sdhp 391.
Kusītatā
Kusītatā (f.) [abstr. fr. kusīta] in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness VvA 138.
Kusuma
Kusuma (nt.) any flower J iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37; PvA 157 (=puppha); VvA 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, 595; Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), fig. vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Th 1, 100; Miln 399.
Kusumita
Kusumita (adj.) in flower, blooming VvA 160, 162.
Kusumbha
Kusumbha (nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do); Khus iv.2.
Kussubbha
Kussubbha and kussobbha (nt.) [Sk. kuśvabhra] a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: S ii.32=A i.243=v.114; S ii.118; v.47, 63, 395; A ii.140; iv.100; Sn 720; PvA 29; DA i.58.
Kuha
Kuha (adj.) [Sk. kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Gr. keu/dw; Ags hȳdan, E. hide] deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī A ii.26=Th 1, 959= It 113. -- akuha honest, upright M i.386; Sn 957; Miln 352.
Kuhaka
Kuhaka [der. fr. prec.] deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka D i.8; A iii.111. -- A v.159 sq.; Sn 984, 987; J i.375 (˚tāpasa); DhA iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora); Miln 310, 357; PvA 13; DA i.91.
Kuhanā
Kuhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. adj. kuhana=kuhaka] 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana -- lapana "deceit and talking -- over"=deceitful talk D i.8; A iii.430; DA i.92; Miln 383; Nd2 on avajja. -- M i.465=It 28, 29; S iv.118; A v.159 sq.; Vism 23; Vbh 352; Sdhp 375. -- 2. menacing SnA 582. -- Opp. akuhaka Sn 852. -- Var. commentator's derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaŋ (fr. kuheti), to be found at Vism 26. -- vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd2 on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DA i.91 & SnA 107.
Kuhara
Kuhara (nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hiding- place Dāvs i.62.
Kuhiŋ
Kuhiŋ see under ku˚.
Kuhilikā
Kuhilikā (pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaŋsa 216.
Kuhīyati
Kuhīyati only in pahaŋsīyati+k˚ "he exults and rejoices" at Miln 325 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.220, where printed kuhūyati).
Kuheti
Kuheti [v. denom. fr. kuha] to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving J vi.212.
Kūjati
Kūjati [kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by "avyatte sadde"] to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) J ii.439; iv.296; Dāvs v.51. -- pp. kūjita see abhi˚, upa˚.
-- 225 --
Kūṭa
Kūṭa1 (nt.) [Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl. kuṭ of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. paleu/w to trap birds] a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap J i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaŋsa˚ māna˚ "cheating with weight, coin and measure" (DA i.78=vañcana) D i.5=iii.176=S v.473=M i.180 =A ii.209; v.205=Pug 58. māna˚ PvA 278. -- As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds. -- Note. kūṭe J i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya, cp. ghaṭa). -- aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor J ii.2; DhA i.353; -- jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic J i.375; DhA i.40; -- māna false measure PvA 191; -- vāṇija a false -- trader Pv iii.42; PvA 191; -- vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) PvA 210. -- vedin lier, calumniator J iv.177.
Kūṭa
Kūṭa2 (m. nt.) [Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. kolwno/s kolofw/n; Ags. holm, E. hill] -- (a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha˚ ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 (=sikhara); aŋsa˚ shoulder, clavicle, VvA 121, 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193; J i.73. Cp. koṭa. -- (b) the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A i.261; Vv 784 (=kaṇṇikā VvA 304); gaha˚ Dh 154; PvA 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra. -- (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust -- heap M ii.7; PvA 144. -- (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaŋ gahetvā or desanā kūtaŋ gaṇhanto "leading up to the climax of the instruction" J i.275, 393, 401; v.151; vi.478; VvA 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaŋ gaṇhanto J i.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiŋ ThA 99. -- anga the shoulder Vv 158 (=VvA 123). -- âgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268; S ii.103= v.218; iii.156; iv.186; v.43, 75, 228; A i.101, 261; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21; Pv iii.17; 221; Vv 82 (=ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto VvA 50); VvA 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) v. l. kuṭṭhāgāra; PvA 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit); DhA iv.186. In cpds.: -- ˚ matta as big as an upper chamber J i.273; Miln 67; -- ˚sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DA i.43) Vin iii.15, 68, 87; iv.75; D i.150; S ii.103=v.218; iv.186. -- (n) gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit S ii.263= iii.156=v.43; -- ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable, in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin D i.14=56= S iii.211=M i.517 (expl. DA i.105 by pabbatakūṭaŋ viya ṭhita); -- poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa: see kūṭa4.
Kūṭa
Kūṭa3 (nt.) [*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. kla/w, ko/los, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. kladaro/s. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is "āko ṭane"] a hammer, usually as aya˚ an iron sledge hammer J i.108; or ayo˚ PvA 284; ayomaya˚ Sn 669; kammāra˚ Vism 254.
Kūṭa
Kūṭa4 (adj.) [Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed. The expln of kuṭ as "chede," or "chedane" (cutting) at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa] without horns, i. e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5=J i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point & translates "rascal"). These maimed oxen (cows & calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, 269: kūṭa -- goṇa -- (so read for ˚poṇa) -- yutta -- ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaŋ dhāvati runs the wrong way); kūṭa -- dhenuyā khīraŋ pivitvā kūṭa -- vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post. -- Kūṭa -- danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning "ox -- tooth" (derisively) (D i.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta -- kūṭa (see under danta).
Kūṭeyya
Kūṭeyya (nt.) [der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya] fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya & vankeyya M i.340; A v.167.
Kūpa
Kūpa (m.) [Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior= cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. ku/pellon cup; also Gr. ku/mbh, Sk. kumbha; -- (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi˚ the socket of the eye M i.80, 245; DhsA 306; gūtha˚ a cesspool D ii.324; Sn 279; Pv ii.316; Pug 36; miḷha˚ a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma˚ the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA i.57; Vism 262, 360; also in na loma -- kūpamattaŋ pi not even a hairroot J i.31; iii.55; vacca˚=gūtha˚ Vin ii.141, 222. As a tank or a well: J vi.213; VvA 305. -- 2. the mast of a boat J iii.126; Miln 363, 378. See next. -- khaṇa one who digs a pit J vi.213. -- tala the floor of a pit Vism 362.
Kūpaka
Kūpaka=kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (id.); =kūpa. 2. J ii.112; iv.17.
Kūla
Kūla (nt.) [Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe] a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: S i.143=J iii.361; A i.162; Sn 977; J i.227; Miln 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122; vaccakūpassa k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141. See also paŋsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚, paṭi˚.
Kūra
Kūra (nt.) in sukkha˚ boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86; DhA ii.171.
Keka
Keka [?] N. of a tree J v.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris.
Keṭubha
Keṭubha [deriv. unknown] expld by Buddhaghosa DA i. 247 as "the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion" (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116). In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered D i.88; A i.163, 166; Sn 1020; Miln 10, 178. So in BSk; AvŚ ii.19; Divy 619.
Keṭubhin
Keṭubhin [deriv. unknown] MA 152 (on M i 32) has "trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful, false all through"; iii.6=A iii.199.
Ketaka
Ketaka [etym. uncertain] N. of a flower J iv.482.
Ketana
Ketana sign etc., see saŋ˚.
Ketu
Ketu [Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum (=*caid- lom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E. -- hood, orig. appearance, form, like] -- 1. ray, beam of light, splendour, effulgence Th 1, 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu. -- 2. flag, banner, sign, perhaps as token of splendour Th 1, 64. dhamma -- k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner A i.109=iii.149; dhūma -- k˚ having smoke as its splendour, of fire, J iv.26; VvA 161 in expln of dhūmasikha. -- kamyatā desire for prominence, self -- advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233=Nd2 505; Nd1 on Sn 829 (= uṇṇama); -- mālā "garland of rays" VvA 323.
Ketuŋ
Ketuŋ see kayati.
Ketuvant
Ketuvant (adj.) [fr. ketu] having flags, adorned with flags VvA 50.
Kedāra
Kedāra (m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma "we shall till the fields after watering them" J i.215; as square -- shaped (i. e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Bdhgh on MV viii.12, 1); J iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary ( -- mariyādā) DhA
-- 226 --
iii.6. -- J iv.167; v.35; PvA 7 (=khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 v. l.) see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke -- suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning "water," as also in kebuka, ke -- vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara= ked+dṛ, bursting forth of water=inundation; kebuka =kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa=ked+vṛ, moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. AvŚ Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel). -- koṭi top or corner -- point of a field Vism 180.
Kebuka
Kebuka [on ke -- see note to prec.] water J vi.38 (=42: k. vuccati udakaŋ). As nadī a river at J iii.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189.
Keyūra
Keyūra (nt.) a bracelet, bangle DhA ii.220 (v. l. kāyura).
Keyūrin
Keyūrin (adj.) wearing a bracelet PvA 211 (=kāyūrin).
Keyya
Keyya (ger. of kayati) for sale J vi.180 (=vikkiṇitabba).
Kerāṭika
Kerāṭika (adj.) [fr. kirāṭa] deceitful, false, hypocritic J i.461 (expld by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 (=kirāsa); MA 152; DhA iii.389 (=saṭha). -- a˚ honest, frank J v.117 (=akitava, ajūtakara).
Kerāṭiya
Kerāṭiya=prec. J iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152.
Kelisā
Kelisā at Th 1, 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2).
Keḷanā
Keḷanā (f.) [fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?] desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus "selfishness" Vbh 351=DA i.286 (+paṭikeḷanā). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver, cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela=calane. Another passage is Nd2 585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syn. of vibhūsanā.
Keḷāyati
Keḷāyati [Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning "to amuse oneself with," i. e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of): śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā] to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure, take pride in (gen.) M i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v. l. S. iii.190 & M i.552); S iii.190 (id.); Miln 73. -- pp. keḷāyita.
Keḷāyana
Keḷāyana (nt.) [fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi] playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317.
Keḷāyita
Keḷāyita [pp. of keḷāyati] desired, fondled, made much of J iv.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho).
Keḷāsa
Keḷāsa (cp. Sk. kailāsa] N. of a mountain Bdhd 138.
Keḷi
Keḷi1 (f.) [fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati] 1. play, amusement, sport PvA 265 (=khiḍḍā); parihāsa˚ merry play, fun J i.116. -- 2. playing at dice, gambling, in ˚maṇḍala "circle of the game," draught -- board; ˚ŋ bhindati to break the board, i. e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) J i.379.
Keḷi
Keḷi2 (f.) [either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr. kel, as given under keḷanā] the meaning is not quite defined, it may be taken as "attachment, lust, desire," or "selfishness, deceit" (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or "unsettledness, wavering." -- keḷi -- sīla of unsettled character, unreliable, deceitful PvA 241. ˚sīlaka id. J ii.447. -- pañca citta -- keḷiyo=pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Th 1, 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!). -- citta -- keḷiŋ kīḷantā bahuŋ pāpakammaŋ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart's content J iii.43. Cp. kāmesu a -- ni -- kīḷitāvin unstained by desires S i.9, 117.
Kevaṭṭa
Kevaṭṭa [on ke -- see kedāra] fisherman D i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) A iii.31=342, cp. iv.91; Ud 24 sq.; J i.210; DhA ii.132; iv.41; PvA 178 (˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. J vi.399 N. of a brahmin minister, also D i.411 N. of Kevaḍḍha (?). -- dvāra N. of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; VvA 97.
Kevala
Kevala (adj. -- adv.) [cp. Lat. caelebs=*caivilo -- b˚ to live by oneself, i. e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth. hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole] expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv. altogether or only -- 1. ˚ŋ (adv.) (a) only=just: k. tvaŋ amhākaŋ vacanaŋ karohi "do all we tell you" PvA 4; -- only=but, with this difference: VvA 203, 249; -- k. . . . vippalapati he only talks PvA 93; <-> and yet: "sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituŋ? " is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaŋ mano -- pasāda -- mattena only by purity of mind DhA i.33; kevalaŋ vacchake balava -- piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaŋ gamissāmi VvA 260; -- exclusive Miln 247. -- na k. . . . atha kho not only . . . but also VvA 227. -- 2. whole, entire Sn p. 108; Cp. i.1019; Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95); Vism 528 (=asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95). <-> k.>akevala entire>deficient M i.326. ˚ŋ entirely, thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti VvA 282. -- kappa a whole kappa Sn pp. 18, 45, 125; KhA 115; VvA 124, 255. -- paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DA i.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Nett 10.
Kevalin
Kevalin (adj.) [fr. kevala] one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa. Defn sabbaguṇa -- paripuṇṇa sabba -- yoga -- visaŋyutta Sn A 153. -- ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaŋ tesaŋ natthi paññâpanāya S iii.59 sq., i. e. "those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished . . ."; kevalīnaŋ mahesiŋ khīṇ' āsavaŋ Sn 82=S i.167; -- k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd2 on tiṇṇa=A v.16. -- with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. "perfected in morality" A ii.23. -- As Ep. of "brāhmaṇa" Sn 519=Nd2 s. v.; of dhammacakka A ii.9; see also Sn 490, 595. -- akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Sn 878, 891.
Kesa
Kesa [Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane=Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord=E. hair] the hair of the head S i.115 (haṭa -- haṭa -- k˚, with dishevelled hair); A i.138 (palita -- kesa with grey hair; also at J i.59); Sn 456 (nivutta˚), 608; Th 1, 169; J i.59, 138; iii.393; Miln 26; KhA 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa -- massu); -- dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa -- keso (of Gotama) D i.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; PvA 26. -- The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled PvA 56; Sdhp 103; it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna "covered only with my hair" Pv i.102. -- kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) D i.234; -- kesaŋ oropeti to have one's hair cut Vin ii.133. -- oropaṇa ( -- satthaka) (a) hair -- cutting (knife), i. e. a razor DhA i.431; -- ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -- kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) D i.167=A i.240, 295=ii.206= Vin i.305= M i.78=Pug 55; A i.286. -- kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) D i.55. -- kalāpā (pl.) (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses PvA 46; -- kalyāṇa beauty of hair DhA i.387; -- kārika hairdresser Vv 175; -- dhātu the hair -- relic (of the Buddha) J i.81; -- nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh' eva
-- 227 --
paṭicchādita -- kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita -- k˚ -- m˚ (adj.) with h. and b. dressed D i.104; A iv.94; J vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa -- massuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state," i. e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer D i.60, 115; iii.60, 64, 76; A i.107; iii.386; It 75; Pug 57; similarly A ii.207=Pug 56. -- sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair PvA 46. -- hattha a tuft of hair PvA 157; VvA 167.
Kesayati
Kesayati see kisa.
Kesara
Kesara1 a mane, in -- sīha a maned lion J ii.244; SnA 127.
Kesara
Kesara2 [fr. kesa] filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha PvA 77; VvA 12; 111; -- sa -- kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs VvA 32; nicula -- k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree VvA 134. -- bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) VvA 278.
Kesarin
Kesarin [fr. kesara1] having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle -- array (˚saŋgāmo) Dpvs i.7; cp. AvŚ i.56.
Kesava
Kesava [fr. last] of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62.
Kesika
Kesika (adj.) [fr. kesa] hairy, of mangoes Miln 334.
Ko
Ko see ka.
Koka
Koka1 [not=Sk. koka, cuckoo] a wolf J vi.525; Nd1 13= Nd2 420; Miln 267=J v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf's meal Vin iii.58.
Koka
Koka2 [cp. Sk. koka] N. of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka.
Kokanada
Kokanada (nt.) [cp. Sk. kokanada] the (red) lotus A iii.239=J i.116.
Kokāsika
Kokāsika the red lotus in ˚jāta "like the red lotus," said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree A iv.118.
Kokila
Kokila [cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. ko/kkuc, Lat. cuculus, E. cuckoo] the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at VvA 57: kāḷa˚ and phussa˚ black and speckled k. <-> As citra˚ at J v.416. -- Vv 111, 588; VvA 132, 163.
Koca
Koca [fr. kuc] see saŋ˚.
Koci
Koci see ka.
Koccha
Koccha1 (nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149; iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaŋ nāma vāka -- mayaŋ vā usīra -- mayaŋ vā muñjamayaŋ vā babbaja -- mayaŋ vā anto saŋveṭhetvā baddhaŋ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); J v.407. Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Miln 11.
Koccha
Koccha2 (nt.) a comb (for hair -- dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446 (=VvA 349); Th 2, 254, 411 (=ThA 267). -- kāra a comb -- maker Miln 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at D i.51).
Koja
Koja mail armour J iv.296 (=kavaca).
Kojava
Kojava a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281; DhA i.177; iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36. Often in expln of goṇaka (q. v.) as dīgha -- lomaka mahākojava DA i.86; PvA 157.
Koñca
Koñca1 [cp. Sk. krauñca & kruñc] the heron, often in combn with mayūra (peacock): Th 1, 1113; Vv 111, 358; J v.304; vi.272; or with haŋsa Pv ii.123. -- Expld as sārasa VvA 57; jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dh 155.
Koñca
Koñca2=abbr. of koñca -- nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaŋ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; J vi.497. -- nāda the trumpeting of an elephant ("the heron's cry") [not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuñja=kuñjara, elephant (q. v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at VvA 35, where this connection is quite evident.] J i.50; Miln 76 (in etymol. play with koñca); VvA 35. -- rāva=prec. DhA iv.70. -- vādikā a kind of bird J vi.538.
Koṭa
Koṭa [fr. kūṭa2] belonging to a peak, in cpd. ˚pabbata "peak -- mountain," Npl. Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292.
Koṭacikā
Koṭacikā pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaŋ . . . hīno nāma akkoso).
Koṭi
Koṭi (f.) [cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa2] the end -- (a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at J vi.371): dhanu -- koṭiŋ nissāya "through the (curved) end of my bow," i. e. by means of hunting J ii.200; aṭṭhi -- koṭi the tip of the bone J iii.26; cāpa˚ a bow VvA 261; vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved DhA iii.175; khetta˚ the top (end) of the field SnA 150; cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister J iv.30; PvA 79. -- (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba˚ the past (cp. pubbanta), also as purima˚; and pacchima˚ the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saŋsāra: saŋsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati "the first end, i. e. the beginning of S. is not known" Nd2 664; DhsA 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid. -- anamatagg' âyaŋ saŋsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S's end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting -- point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) S ii.178=iii.149= Nd2 664=Kvu 29=PvA 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati). -- koṭiyaŋ ṭhito bhāvo "my existence in the past" J i.167. -- (c) of number: the "end" of the scale, i. e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd2 664, and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Sn 677; J i.227, 230, 345=DhA i.367 (asīti˚ -- vibhavo); J i.478; PvA 3, 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Miln 6, 18. -- kahāpaṇa -- koṭi -- santhārena "for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas" Vin ii.159= J i.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika). -- gata "gone to the end," having reached the end, i. e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd2 436; -- ppatta=prec. Nd2 436; as "extreme" J i.67. -- simbalī N. of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194.
Koṭika
Koṭika (adj.) [fr. koṭi] 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251. -- 2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320); āpāna˚ lasting till the end of life Miln 397: Vism 10. <-> 3. referring to (both) ends (of saŋsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past & future M i.393 sq.
Koṭin
Koṭin (adj.) [fr. koṭi] aiming for an end or goal J vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2).
Koṭilla
Koṭilla (nt.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472.
Koṭumbara
Koṭumbara (nt.) [cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559] a kind of cloth J vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). -- ˚ka k. -- stuffs Miln 2.
Koṭṭa
Koṭṭa (?) breaking, asi -- k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚.
-- 228 --
Koṭṭana
Koṭṭana [fr. koṭṭeti] 1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) J i.475; ˚pacan' ādi pounding and cooking, etc. DhA ii.261. -- 2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru˚ J ii.18; vi.86 (maŋsa˚, here "beating," T. spells ṭṭh). Cp. adhikuṭṭanā.
Koṭṭita
Koṭṭita (pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255.
Koṭṭima
Koṭṭima a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47.
Koṭṭeti
Koṭṭeti [cp. Sk. kuṭ & kuṭṭa1. Expld one -- sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as "chedane" which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning "beat" is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla "akoṭane." Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti] -- 1. to beat, smash, crush, pound J i.478; vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh); DhA i.25 (suvaṇṇaŋ) 165. -- 2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors); J vi.332. -- 3. to cut, kill SnA 178 (=hanti of Sn 121); DhA i.70 (pharasunā). -- pp. koṭṭita. -- Caus. koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266; J iv.37 (ṭṭ the only v. l. B.; T. has ṭṭh).
Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha1 (m. nt.) [Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. ku/tos cavity, ku/sdos pudendum muliebre, ku/stis bladder = E. cyst, chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle] anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as -- 1. the stomach or abdomen Miln 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257. -- 2. a closet, a monk's cell, a storeroom, M i.332; Th 2, 283 (?)=ThA, 219; J ii.168. <-> 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171. -- aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, 255. -- abbhantara the intestinal canal Miln 67; -- âgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn. with kosa (q. v.) in formula paripuṇṇa -- kosa -- koṭṭhâgāra (adj.) D i.134, expld at DA i.295 as threefold, viz. dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse; PvA 126, 133; -- âgārika a storehouse -- keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; DhA i.101; -- āsa [=koṭṭha +aŋsa] share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: J i.254; 266; vi.368; Miln 324; DhA iv.; 108 (=pada), 154; PvA 58, 111, 205 (kāma˚=kāmaguṇā); VvA 62; anekena k˚ -- ena infinitely PvA 221.
Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha2 a bird J vi.539 (woodpecker?).
Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha3 [cp. Sk. kuṭṭha] N. of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) J v.420.
Koṭṭhaka
Koṭṭhaka1 (nt.) "a kind of koṭṭha," the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store -- room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153, 210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121=142; 220; treasury J i.230; ii.168; -- store -- room J ii.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i. e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291.; -- udaka -- k a bath -- room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Bdhgh's expln at Vin. Texts ii.57); so also nahāna -- k˚ and piṭṭhi -- k˚, bath -- room behind a hermitage J iii.71; DhA ii.19; a gateway, Vin ii.77; usually in cpd. dvāra -- k˚ "door cavity," i. e. room over the gate: gharaŋ satta -- dvāra -- koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaŋ "a mansion adorned with seven gateways" J i.227=230, 290; VvA 322. dvāra -- koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti "they spread mats in the gateways" VvA 6; esp. with bahi: bahi -- dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā "leading him out in front of the gateway" A iv.206; ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway S i.77; M i.161, 382; A iii.30. -- bala -- k. a line of infantry J i.179. -- koṭṭhaka -- kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6; Kern, Toev. s. v. "someone who sweeps away dirt."
Koṭṭhaka
Koṭṭhaka2 [cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika] the paddy -- bird, as rukkha˚ J iii.25; ii.163 (v. l. ṭṭ).
Koṭṭhu
Koṭṭhu see kotthu.
Koṭṭheti
Koṭṭheti at J ii.424 the v. l. khobheti (nāvaŋ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti.
Koṇa
Koṇa [cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa] 1. a corner Vin ii.137; catu˚=catu -- kaṇṇa PvA 52; -- ˚racchā crossroads PvA 24. -- 2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Miln 53.
Koṇṭa
Koṇṭa (v. l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits J ii.209. 210, 212.
Koṇṭha
Koṇṭha a cripple J ii.118.
Koṇḍa
Koṇḍa -- damaka (?) [cp. kuṇḍa] J iv.389; also as v. l. B at J ii.209.
Koṇḍañña
Koṇḍañña a well -- known gotta J ii.360.
Kotūhala
Kotūhala (nt.) [on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala] excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80; esp. in ˚mangalaŋ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of . . . M i.265; A. iii.439; ˚mangalika celebrating feasts, festive A iii.206; J i.373; Miln 94 (cp. Miln trsl. i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika) -- (b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Miln 4; DhA i.330. -- sadda shout of excitement Miln 301.
Kotthalī
Kotthalī (koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189=iv.269.
Kotthu
Kotthu [koṭṭhu J only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś] a jackal D iii.25, 26; M i.334; Nd1 149 (spelt koṭṭhu); J vi.537 (˚sunā: expld by sigāla -- sunakhā, katthu -- soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka)=prec. S i.66 (where text has kutthaka) J ii.108; Miln 23.
Kodaṇḍa
Kodaṇḍa (nt.) [cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa] a cross -- bow M i.429 (opp. to cāpa); Miln 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same J iv.433 (expld by dhanu).
Kodumbara
Kodumbara see koṭumbara.
Kodha
Kodha [Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati] anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060=Nd2 576, both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp. qumo/s, Mhg. toûm=anger). As pair k. and upanāha A i.91, 95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa, etc. Nd2 rāga 1.; Vbh 357 sq.; Vism 53, 107, 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha M i.36; A i.299=iv.148; cp. A iv.456=v.209; v.39, 49 sq., 310, 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060=Nd2 576, cp. Pug 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Sn 245; kadariya Sn 362; pesuniya Sn 928; mosavajja Sn 866, 868 (cp. S i.169). Other passages, e. g. A i.283; S i.240; Sn 537, (lobha˚); Pv ii.37; Dh i.52 (anattha -- janano kodho); PvA 55, 222. -- kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind. -- mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi "let not anger get the better of you" S i.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaŋ, etc. "anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes" S i.169=Nd2 576. -- kodhaŋ chetvā cutting off anger S i.41=47=161=237; kodhaŋ jahe vippajaheyya mānaŋ "give up anger, renounce conceit" J i.23 25=Dh 221; kodhaŋ pajahanti vipassino: "the wise give up anger" It 2=7; panuṇṇa -- kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Sn 469; akkodhena jine kodhaŋ conquer anger by meekness Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69. Yo ye uppatitaŋ kodhaŋ rathaŋ bhantaŋ va dhāraye tam ahaŋ sārathiŋ brūmi -- "He who restrains
-- 229 --
rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner" Dh 222, cp. Sn 1. -- akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation M i.44; S i.240 (with avihiŋsā tenderness, kindness); A i.95; Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69. -- âtimāna anger and conceit Sn 968. -- upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh˚) M i.360, 363; often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. "uddhumāyika" kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaŋ M i.144; "sa -- ummī" It 114; "sobbho papāto" S iii.109; -- garu "having respect for" i. e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) A ii.46 sq., 84; -- paññāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Sn 96 (cp. SnA 170); -- bhakkha feeding on, i. e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha S i.238; -- vinaya the discipline or control of anger A i.91; v.165, 167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya).
Kodhana
Kodhana (adj.) [fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncon- trolled]; usually in combn with upanāhin, e. g. Vin ii.89; D iii.45, 246; A v.156, cp. Sn 116; S ii.206; Pug 18. -- k˚ kodhābhibhūta A iv.94 sq.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī A v.165. -- Used of caṇḍa PvA 83. -- Cp. S iv.240; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; PvA 82. <-> akkodhana friendly, well -- disposed, loving D iii.159; S ii.207; iv.243; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Sn 19, 624, 850, 941; Vv 155; VvA 69.
Konta
Konta a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) J vi.454; DA i.244; SnA 317.
Kontīmant
Kontīmant at J vi.454 is expld by camma -- kāra, thus "worker in leather ( -- shields or armour)," with der. fr. konta ("satthitāya kontāya likhattā . . ."), but reading and meaning are uncertain.
Kopa
Kopa [fr. kup] ill -- temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184=Sn 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) M i.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) "he shows forth ill -- temper, malice and mistrust" (of a "codita" bhikkhu) D iii.159; S iv.305; M i.96 sq., 250, 442; A i.124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J i.301; Sn p. 92. <-> akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Sn 499. -- antara (adj.) one who is under the power of ill-temper S i.24.
Kopaneyya
Kopaneyya (adj.) [fr. kopa] apt to arouse anger J vi.257.
Kopīna
Kopīna (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaupīna] a loin -- cloth J v.404; Pv ii.323; PvA 172; Sdhp 106. -- niddaŋsanin "one who removes the loin -- cloth," i. e. shameless, impure D iii.183.
Kopeti
Kopeti [caus. of kuppati] to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules PvA 161; J ii.366=DhA iv.88; kammaŋ kopetuŋ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision; kāyangaŋ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body: see kāya. Cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saŋ˚.
Komala
Komala see kamala; Mhbv 29.
Komāra
Komāra [fr. kumāra] (adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin A iv.210. -- pati husband of a girl -- wife J ii.120. -- brahmacariyā (˚ŋ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity A iii.224; ThA 99. -- bhacca Np. "master of the k˚ -- science," i. e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin i.269 at Vin. Texts ii.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka D i.47 (as Komārabhacca DA i.132); Vin i.71; J i.116; cp. Sdhp 351.
Komāraka
Komāraka (and ˚ika)=prec. A i.261; J ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree S iv.160. -- f. ˚ikā J iii.266.
Komudī
Komudī (f.) [fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī] moonlight; the full -- moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155, 176, sq.; D i.47 (expld at DA i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya DhA iii.461.
Koraka
Koraka (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. koraka] 1. a bud J ii.265. - 2. a sheath J iii.282.
Korakita
Korakita (adj.) [fr. koraka] full of buds VvA 288.
Korajika
Korajika (adj.) [fr. ku+raj or rañj, cp. rāga] affected, excitable, infatuated Nd1 226=Nd2 342 (v. l. kocaraka)=Vism 26 (v. l. korañjika).
Koraṇḍaka
Koraṇḍaka [=kuraṇḍaka] a shrub and its flower J v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as Npl. in Koraṇḍaka -- vihāra Vism 91.
Korabya
Korabya [Sk. kauravya] Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru J ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya).
Koriyā
Koriyā (f.) a hen v. l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Th 2, 381 for turiyā. See also ThA 255 (=kuñcakārakukkuṭī).
Kola
Kola (m. nt.) [Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of "hog," corrupted fr. kroḍa] the jujube fruit M i.80; A iii.49 (sampanna -- kolakaŋ sūkaramaŋsa "pork with jujube"); J iii.22 (=badara); vi.578. -- mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb. w. kolaṭṭhi -- mattiyo, of boils A v.170=Sn p. 125, cp. S i.150; -- rukkha the j. tree SnA 356; DA i.262; -- sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (=VvA 186).
Kolankola
Kolankola [der. fr. kula] going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saŋsāra: A i.233=Pug 16; S v.205; Nett 189, cp. A iv.381; A v.120.
Kolañña
Kolañña (adj.) [fr. kula] born of (good) family (cp. ku- laja); as -- ˚, belonging to the family of . . . D i.89; DA i.252; Miln 256. -- khīṇa -- kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin i.86.
Kolaṭṭhi
Kolaṭṭhi the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. ˚mattiyo (pl.) S i.150=A v.170= Sn p. 125 (with kolamattiyo), and ˚mattā Th 2, 498=ThA 289; DhA i.319.
Kolaputti
Kolaputti at A i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll. -- vaṇṇa -- pokkharatā, i. e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as "heroncolour," comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd1 80=Nd2 505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaŋ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaŋ.
Kolamba
Kolamba (and koḷamba VvA) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208, 213, 225, 286; J i.33; DA i.58; VvA 36.
Kolāhala
Kolāhala (nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excite- ment about ( -- ˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at KhA 120 sq. viz. kappa˚ (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚ (of a worldking), buddha˚ (of a Buddha), mangala˚ (that a Buddha will pronounce the "eu)agge/lion"), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom, cp. SnA 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā -- )halāhalāni given at J i.48 as kappa -- halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka -- kolāhalaŋ one uproar J iv.404; vi.586; DhA ii.96. See also Vin ii.165, 275, 280; J v.437; DhA i.190; PvA 4; VvA 132.
Koliya
Koliya (adj.) [fr. kola] of the fruit of the jujube tree J iii.22, but wrongly expld as kula -- dattika ph.=given by a man of (good) family.
Kolīniyā
Kolīniyā (f.) well -- bred, of good family J ii.348 (BB koley- yaka).
-- 230 --
Koleyyaka
Koleyyaka (adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs J i.175; iv.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed.
Koḷāpa
Koḷāpa (and kolāpa) (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes S iv.161, 185; M i.242; iii.95; J iii.495; Miln 151; DhA ii.51; iv.166. -- 2. hollow tree Nd2 40; SnA 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara=Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted).
Koḷikā
Koḷikā (or kolika?) (f.) adj.=kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Th 2, 395 (expl. at ThA 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati).
Kovida
Kovida (adj.) [ku+vid.] one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita. S i.146, 194, 196 (ceto -- pariyāya˚); A ii.46; M i.1, 7, 135, 300, 310, 433; Dh 403=Sn 627; Sn 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚); Pv i.1112; Vv 159 (=VvA 73), 6330 (=VvA 269); Miln 344; Sdhp 350. -- akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) S i.162; Sn 763; S iv.287=Nd2 on attānudiṭṭhi.
Koviḷāra
Koviḷāra [cp. Sk. kovidāra] Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k -- blossom, called p. VvA 174) A iv.117 sq.; Sn 44; J iv.29; Vv 381; DhA i.270. -- puppha the flower of the K. tree SnA 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower).
Kosa
Kosa1 (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi=P. kucchi] any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store -- room or storehouse, treasury or granary A iv.95 (rāja˚); Sn 525; J iv.409 (=wealth, stores); J vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd. -- ˚ koṭṭhāgāra, expld at DA i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraŋ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaŋ˚. <-> 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ KhA 46. <-> 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka. -- 4. a cocoon, see -- ˚kāraka; -- 5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium J v.197. The Com. expls by sarīra -- saŋkhāta k˚. See cpd. kosohita. <-> Cp. also kosī. -- ārakkha the keeper of the king's treasury (or granary) A iii.57; -- ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha "having the pudendum in a bag." Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā -- purisa) D iii.143, 161. Applied as to this item, to the Buddha D i.106 (in the Cy DA i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) D ii.17; Sn 1022 pp. 106, 107; Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132 -- 136. -- kāraka the "cocoon -- maker," i. e. the silk -- worm, Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -- koṭṭhāgāra "treasury and granary" usually in phrase paripuṇṇa -- k -- k (adj.) "with stores of treasures and other wealth" Vin i.342; D i.134; S i.89; Miln 2; & passim.
Kosa
Kosa2 at VvA 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in ThA 267 (cp. koccha).
Kosaka
Kosaka [fr. kosa] 1. a sheath for a needle J iii.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food J i.349 (v. l. kesaka); M ii.6, 7, ( -- ˚āhāra adj. living on a bowl -- full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263. -- 3. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251.
Kosajja
Kosajja (nt.) [From kusīta] idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vbh 369. -- Vin ii.2; S v.277 -- 280; A i.11, 16; ii.218; iii.375, 421; v.146 sq.; 159 sq.; A iv.195= Dh 241; Miln 351; Vism 132; Nett 127; DhA iii.347; iv.85; DhsA 146; SnA 21.
Kosamattha
Kosamattha=ka+samattha "who is able," i. e. able, fit DA i.27.
Kosalla
Kosalla (nt.) [der. fr. kusala] proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at D iii.220, Vbh 325 & Vism 439 sq., viz. āya˚, apāya˚ and upāya˚; at Dhs 16=20=292 = 555=Nd2 ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña. See also Pug 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚), 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚); PvA 63, 99 (upāya˚).
Kosātakī
Kosātakī (f.) [cp. Sk. kośātakī] a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, 260, 359; VvA 200; -- bīja the seed of the k. A i.32=v.212.
Kosika
Kosika=kosiya, an owl J v.120.
Kosiya
Kosiya an owl J ii.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana J i.496. Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) J iv.69.
Kosī
Kosī (f.) a sheath D i.77=M ii.17.
Koseyya
Koseyya [der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk -- cloth and P. kosa -- kāraka] silk; silken material Vin i.58=Miln 267; Vin i.192, 281; ii.163, 169; D i.7, cp. A i.181 (see DA i.87); A iv.394; Pv ii.117; J i.43; vi.47. -- pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281; -- vattha a silk garment DhA i.395.
Kohañña
Kohañña (nt.) [fr. kuhana] hypocrisy, deceit J ii.72; iii.268; iv.304; DhA i.141.
Kvaṇ
Kvaṇ (indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound ("sadde") at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173.
Kh. Kha
Kha syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning "void, empty" or as n. meaning "space"; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as "khaŋ saddo pana tucche; tucchaŋ hi ākāsaŋ khan ti vuccati" Vism 494. -- In meaning "space, sky" in cpd. khaga "sky -- goer" (cp. viha -- ga of same meaning), i. e. bird Abhp 624; Bdhd 56.
Khagga
Khagga [Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3] 1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at D i.7 (Dh i.89=asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga -- maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia); -- khaggaŋ bhandati to gird on one's sword PvA 154, khaggaŋ sannayhati id. DhA iii.75; ˚gāhaka a sword -- bearer Miln 114; ˚tala sword -- blade Mhvs 25, 90. -- 2. a rhinoceros J v.406 (=gavaja), 416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In cpd. ˚visāṇā (cp. BSk. khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294=Sn 36) the horn of a rh. (: khagga -- visāṇaŋ nāma khagga -- miga -- singaŋ SnA 65) Sn 35 sq. (N. of Sutta); Nd2 217 (khagga -- visāṇa -- kappa "like the horn of the rh." Ep. of a Paccekabuddha, (cp. Divy 294, 582), also at Vism 234.
Khacita
Khacita [pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by "bandhana"] inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e. g. VvA 14, 277; maṇi -- muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā "bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc." VvA 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta -- khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.). Suvaṇṇa -- khacita -- gajak' attharaṇā "elephants' trappings interwoven with gold" VvA 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls J i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars J i.57.
-- 231 --
Khajja
Khajja (adj. -- nt.) [grd. of khajjati] to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -- bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita, sāyita Pv i.52 (=PvA 25) J i.58; Miln 2. -- bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (=v.204); iv. 38, 155.
Khajjaka
Khajjaka (adj.) [fr. last] eatable, i. e. solid food (as ˚bhoj- janāni opposed to yāgu PvA 23); (nt.) J i.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); i.235 (id.); Miln 294. -- ˚bhājaka= prec.
Khajjati
Khajjati (=khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhak- khaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals: upacikāhi Vin ii.113; suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi J iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two) -- 2. to be itchy, to be irritated by itch (cp. E. "itch"=Intens. of "eat") J v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚) -- 3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed, to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi M. i.504; rūpena S iii.87, 88 (khajjanīya -- pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). <-> ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).
Khajjara
Khajjara caterpillar Pgdp 48.
Khajjopanaka
Khajjopanaka [cp. Sk. khadyota] the fire -- fly M ii.34=41; J ii.415; vi.330, 441; DhA iii.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 59 & 79.
Khañja
Khañja (adj.) [cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gati- vekalye] lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227) Vin ii.90=A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Th 2, 438 (+kāṇa); DhA i.376 (+kuṇi).
Khañjati
Khañjati [fr. khañja] to be lame Pv iii.228.
Khañjana
Khañjana (nt.) hobbling, walking lame PvA 185.
Khaṭakhaṭa
Khaṭakhaṭa (khāṭ -- kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one's throat: -- sadda Vin i.188; DhA iii.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v. l. khaṭkhaṭa) Divy 518=utkāśanaśabda.
Khaṭopikā
Khaṭopikā (f.) [perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain] couch, bedstead M i.450, 451 (vv. ll. ka˚, khajj˚).
Khaṇa
Khaṇa1 (m.) [Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.] 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen' eva "in no time" PvA 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā "let not the slightest time be wasted" Sn 333=Dh 315; cf. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n' atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaŋ (nadī) āramati "there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing" A iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa -- vasena uppād'<-> ādi -- khaṇa -- ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431); J iv.128; aṭṭha -- kkhaṇa -- vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, 16; cp. 45, 46. -- 2. moment as coincidence of two events: "at the same moment," esp. in phrase taŋ khaṇaŋ yeva "all at once," simultaneously, with which syn. ṭhānaso J i.167, 253; iii.276, PvA 19; PvA 27, 35; tasmiŋ khaṇe J ii.154; PvA 67; Sdhp 17. <-> 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp. kairo/s), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action, attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti -- kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vbh 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga˚ Ps ii.3; phala˚ Ps i.26, Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94; citta˚ id. 38, 95. -- khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dh 239 (= okāse okāse DhA iii.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5), Buddhuppāda˚, Th ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -- akkhaṇe at the wrong time, inopportune Pv iv.140 (=akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5. -- âtīta having missed the opportunity Sn 333=Dh 315 (=DhA iii.489); -- ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Sn 325 (cp. SnA 333). -- paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚). -- paritta small as a moment Vism 238.
Khaṇa
Khaṇa2 [fr. khaṇ] digging J ii.296. Cp. atikhaṇa.
Khaṇati
Khaṇati [fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe] 1. to dig (? better "destroy"; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out. uproot Dh 247, 337; Sn p. 101; J ii.295; iv.371, 373: Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp. abhikkhaṇati, palikkhaṇati. -- 2. [= Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaŋ); M i.132 (id.). -- pp. khata & khāta (cp. palikkhata).
Khaṇana
Khaṇana (nt.) [fr. khaṇ] digging Miln 351 (pokkharaṇi˚).
Khaṇika
Khaṇika (adj.) [fr. khaṇa] unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e. g. J i.393; iii.83; PvA 60. -- Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti "momentary joy" is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā, pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, DhsA 115. -- citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289. -- maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -- vassa momentary, i. e. sudden rain ( -- shower) J vi.486.
Khaṇikatta
Khaṇikatta (nt.) [fr. khaṇika] evanescence, momentariness Vism 301.
Khaṇḍa
Khaṇḍa [freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q. v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as "chedana"] 1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Th 2, 260 (=ThA 211); Miln 342; Vism 51. <-> 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122; coḷa˚ a bit of cloth PvA 70; pilotika˚ bits of rags PvA 171; pūva˚ a bit of cake J iii.276; -- akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -- kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla -- precepts Vv 113; cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89. -- âkhaṇḍa (redupl. -- iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. -- âkhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ŋ chindati to break up into fragments A i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā); S ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ŋ chedāpetvā); J v.231 (˚ŋ katvā). -- danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc. "with broken teeth and grey hair" A i.138 and ≈; J i.59, 79 (id.). -- phulla [Bdhgh on Vin ii.160; khaṇḍa =bhinn'okāso, phulla=phalit' okāso.] broken and shattered portions; ˚ŋ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (=navakammaŋ karoti) 286; iii.287; A iii.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. a˚ unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316=Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla)=DhA i.32.
Khaṇḍati
Khaṇḍati to break, DhA iv.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, PvA 158 ( -- kaṇṇo= chinnakaṇṇo).
Khaṇḍikā
Khaṇḍikā (f.) [fr. khaṇḍa] a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 (=ucchu -- yaṭṭhi DhA iii.315).
Khaṇḍicca
Khaṇḍicca (nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) M i.49=D ii.305; A iii.196; Dhs 644=736=869; DhA iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449.
Khaṇḍeti
Khaṇḍeti [v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa] to renounce, to remit, in vetanaŋ ˚etvā J iii.188.
Khata
Khata1 [pp. of khanati] 1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in
-- 232 --
combn with upahata D i.86 (=DA i.237); khataŋ upahataŋ attānaŋ pariharati "he keeps himself uprooted and half -- dead" i. e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas A i.105=ii.4; opp. akkhataŋ anupahataŋ, etc. A i.89.
Khata
Khata2 [pp. of kṣan, to wound] hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya "he grazed his foot" S i.27=Miln 134, 179. -- akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta VvA 351). See also parikkhata.
Khataka
Khataka [fr. khata2] damage, injury VvA 206, khatakaŋ dāsiyā deti "she did harm to the servant, she struck the s." Or is it khalikaŋ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt.
Khatta
Khatta (nt.) [Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. kta/omai, kth_ma, possession] rule, power, possession; only in cpds.: -- dhamma the law of ruling, political science J v.490 (is it khattu˚= khattā˚?) -- vijjā polity D i.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DA i.93 explains it as nīti -- sattha, political science (=˚dhamma), See Rh. D. Dialogues i.18. -- vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks J v.228 (paraphrased: mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti "even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself"), so also J v.240; -- vijjācariya one who practises kh -- ˚vijjā ibid.; -- vida (so read for ˚vidha)=˚vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid. (v. l. ˚vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra -- vidya.
Khattar
Khattar [Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra] attendant, companion, charioteer, the king's minister and adviser (Lat. satelles "satellite" has been compared for etym.) D i.112 (=DA i.280, kh˚ vuccati pucchita -- pucchita -- pañhaŋ vyākaraṇa -- samattho mahāmatto: "kh˚ is called the King's minister who is able to answer all his questions"); Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond=katthā; gādhaŋ k˚ A ii.107=Pug 43 v. l. for kattā (cp. Pug A 225).
Khattiya
Khattiya [der. fr. khatta=kṣatra "having possessions"; Sk. kṣatriya] pl. nom. also khattiyāse J iii.441. A shortened form is khatya J vi.397. -- f. khattiyā A iii.226 -- 229, khattī D. i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha's time is discussed in Dialogues i.97 -- 107; and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiŋ D i.199=ii.97=M i.358=S i.153, ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further M ii.150 -- 157; iii.169; A ii.86; S i.71, 93; Vin iv.6 -- 10. On the religious side of the question D iii.82; 93; M i.149, 177; ii.84; S i.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place. Such are referred to at S i.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas D i.69, 136; iii.44, 46, 61; A i.106; iii.299; iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294, quoted Netti 165. -- âbhiseka the inauguration of a king A i.107, 108 (of the crown -- prince) =A ii.87; -- kaññā a maid of khattiya birth J i.60; iii.394; -- kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. ref. to Gotama's descent); iii.80; -- parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚, samaṇa) at Vin i.227; A ii.133; as the first one of the eight (1 -- 4 as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiŋsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚) at M i.72 =D iii.260; -- mahāsāla "the wealthy khattiya" (see above ii.1) D iii.258, etc.; -- māyā "the magic of the noble" DhA i.166; -- vaŋsa aristocratic descent DA i.267; -- sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) DhA i.5.
Khattiyī
Khattiyī (f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī A iii.229; similarly M ii.33, 40.
˚Khattuŋ
˚Khattuŋ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad] in compn with numerals "times": dvikkhattuŋ, tikkhattuŋ, etc.; twice, three times, etc.
Khadira
Khadira [Sk. khadira; Gr. ki/ssaros, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy] the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -- angārā (pl.) embers of (burnt) acacia -- wood J i.232; PvA 152; -- ghaṭikā a piece of a. -- wood J iv.88; -- tthambha a post of a. -- wood DhA iii.206; -- patta a bowl made of a. -- wood J v.389; -- vana a forest of acacias J ii.162; -- sūla an impaling stake of a. -- wood J iv.29.
Khanati
Khanati see khaṇati.
Khanittī
Khanittī (f.) [to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra] a spade or hoe Vin i.270; J vi.520= V.89 (+ankusa).
Khantar
Khantar [n. agent of khanti] possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant A ii.116=iii.161 sq.
Khanti & Khantī
Khanti & Khantī f. [Sk. kṣānti] patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaŋ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa. Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love) (see below); -- titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaŋ tapo titikkhā nibbānaŋ paramaŋ vadanti Buddhā Dh 184=D ii.49=Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, S i.226; cp. DhA iii.237: titikkhā -- sankhātā khantī; -- avihiŋsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiŋsā, mettatā, anudayatā, S v.169; -- akodhana (forbearing, gentle) VvA 71; -- soraccaŋ (docility, tractableness) D iii.213= A i.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well -- bred horse A iii.248, cp. A ii.113 and khantā; -- sovaccassatā (kind speech) Sn 266 (cp. KhA 148). See also cpds. -- Khantī is one of the ten paramitās J i.22, 23: cp. A iii.254, 255. -- In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta S i.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473; anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) A iii.437, 441; Ps ii.236 sq.; Vbh 340. See also A iii.372; Sn 189, 292, 897, 944. <-> In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2), diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd2 151 and Vbh 325 sq. -- akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (=kopa); Vbh 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q. v. above), 378. -- bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience: . . . aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaŋ balānīkaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 399=Sn 623; -- DhA iv.164; Ps ii.171, 176; -- mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚ -- mettânuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance J i.151, 262; PvA 66 (+yuttakāra); VvA 71 (in expln of akodhana); -- suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Ps ii.183; -- soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance S i.100, 222; A ii.68; J iii.487; DhA i.56; ˚e niviṭṭha "established in forbearance and meekness" A iii.46=D iii.61.
Khantika
Khantika (adj.) [fr. prec.] acquiescing in -- , of such and such a belief, in añña˚ belonging to another faith, combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika D i.187; M i.487.
Khandati
Khandati [skand] to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning "pakkhandana."
Khandha
Khandha [Sk. skandha] -- I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i. e. its back S i.95; vāraṇassa J iii.392; hatthi -- khandha -- vara -- gata on the back of the state elephant J i.325; PvA 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ "to whom has grown bulk=a large back" Sn 53, expl. SnA 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho "well endowed with bulk." <-> (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaŋ
-- 233 --
khandhe karitvā S i.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; DhA iv.168 (ohita˚ -- bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). <-> -- (c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa PvA 114, also as rukkha˚ J i.324; tāla˚ the stem of a palm PvA 56; nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) S i.207=Sn 272; mūlaŋ atikkamma kh˚ ŋ sāraŋ pariyesitabbaŋ "one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness" S iv.94. -- (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature: section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries. See also khandhaka. -- B. More general as denoting bulk ( -- ˚); e. g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire M ii.34, 41; J iv.139; udaka˚ a mass of water (i. e. ocean) A iii.336; S iv.179; J i.324; PvA 62; puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit A iii.336=S v.400; bhoga˚ a store of wealth A v.84; J i.6; maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) J ii.102 sq. - II. Applied meaning. -- A. ( -- ˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense "all that is comprised under"; forming the substance of. <-> (a) dukkha˚ all that is comprised under "dukkha," all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of "ill." Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin & destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda, the chain of causal existence (q. v.) Vin i.1; S ii.95; iii.14; A i.177; v. 184 & passim. Similarly: samudaya Vbh 135 sq. nirodha Nett 64; antakiriyā A i.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaŋ dukkhakkhandhaŋ vyapānudi Th 2, 162. -- (b) lobha˚ dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. "the big bulk or mass of greed" (see also under padāleti), S v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā). -- (c) vayo˚ a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima˚ Nd2 in def. of sadā. -- (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5) groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla -- sampadā, citta˚, paññā˚ D i.172 sq.; see sīla. -- D i.206; Nett 64 sq.; 126. tīhi dhammehi samannāgato "possessed of the three qualities," viz. sīla -- kkhandhesu, etc. It 51; cp. A i.291; v.326. tīhi khandhehi . . . aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito M i.301; sīlakkhandhaŋ, etc. paripūreti "to fulfil the sīla -- group" A i.125; ii.20, iii.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti˚ the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti -- ñāṇa -- dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1 -- 4 only at D iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp. A i.125. As 5 at S i.99=A i.162; S v.162; A iii.134, 271; v.16 (all loc.=S i.99); It 107, 108; Nd2 under sīla. B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent, fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as rāsi, heap, e. g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf. B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚ (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), sankhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness). For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40 -- 56. They are enumerated in a different order at S i.112, viz. rūpaŋ vedayitaŋ saññaŋ viññāṇaŋ yañ ca sankhataŋ n' eso 'ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e. g. S iii.101 (=Vbh 1 -- 61); S iii.47; iii.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚ rūpa˚ arūpa -- dhātu Vbh 404 sq. (a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: "yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaŋ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti" "just as it is by the condition precedent of the co -- existence of its various parts, that the word ʻ chariot ʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻ being ʼ" (Rh. D.) (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) S i.135=Miln 28. Their connotation "khandha" is discussed at S iii.101 =M iii.16: "kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaŋ khandhâdhivacanaŋ? rūpaŋ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaŋ ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaŋ," etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā . . . paccayo rūpa -- khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso . . . vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc.; nāmarūpaŋ . . . viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā, sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (S iii.101); cp. M i.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa -- kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā "the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors" Nett 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu -- pariyāpanno: Vbh 409; the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Ps ii.74, also at Vbh 230, 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna) -- Being the "substantial" factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi -- kkhaṇe; see Ps ii.72 -- 76. Thus the var. phases of life in transmigration are defined as -- ( jāti:) ya tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi satta -- nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo āyatanānaŋ paṭilābho Nd2 on Sn 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti VvA 29; khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo jāti S ii.3; Nett 29; khandhānaŋ nibbatti jāti Vism 199. -- (maraṇaŋ:) yā tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ . . . cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaŋ maccu maraṇaŋ kālakiriyā khandhānaŋ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo M i.49=Vbh 137=S ii.3, 42. -- vivaṭṭa -- kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away), i. e. dead S i.121=iii.123. -- kh˚anaŋ udaya -- vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dh 374=Th 1, 23, 379=It 120=KhA 82; Ps i.54 sq. -- (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaŋ adhikuṭṭanā S i.128=Th 2, 58, 141 (ThA 65: natthi tesaŋ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. S i.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vbh 208. -- (c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i. e. of their cause & removal: yaŋ rūpaŋ, etc. . . . n' etaŋ mama n' eso 'haŋ asmi na m' eso attā ti; evaŋ etaŋ yathābhūtaŋ sammappaññāya passati; evaŋ kho jānato passato . . . ahankāramamankāra -- mānânusayā na hontī ti S iii.103; -- pañca -- kkhandhe pariññāya S iii.83; pañca -- kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Th 2, 106. See also S i.134. -- (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense -- perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuŋ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare S i.134; kh˚ -- dh˚ -- āyatanaŋ sankhataŋ jātimūlaŋ Th 2, 472; dhammaŋ adesesi khandh'<-> āyatana -- dhātuyo Th 2, 43 (cp. ThA 49). Enumerated under sabba -- dhammā Ps i.101= ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara -- kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358, 528, 552. -- khandhānaŋ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo, dhātūnaŋ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Ps i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157. In def. of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Ps i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 on sankhāta -- dhammā ("kh. sankhātā," etc.), on tiṇṇa ("khandha -- (etc.) pariyante thitā"), & passim. -- (e) their valuation & their bearing on the "soul" -- conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaŋ), anattā, aniccaŋ and dukkhaŋ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaŋ
-- 234 --
(etc.) . . . aniccaŋ, dukkhaŋ, n' eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me attā "material qualities (etc. kh. 2 -- 5) are evanescent, bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul" Vin i.14=S iv.382. n' eso 'ham asmi na m' eso attā S i.112; iii.103, 130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaŋ (anattā rūpaŋ) S ii.65; Nd2 680; and rūpaŋ na tumhākaŋ S iii.33 M i.140=Nd2 680. -- rūpaŋ, etc. as anattā: Vin i.13; S iii.78, 132 -- 134; A i.284= ii.171; 202; cp. S iii.101; Vin i.14. -- as aniccaŋ: S iii.41, 52, 102, 122, 132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202 -- 224, 227; A iv.147 (aniccânupassī dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Ps ii.238 sq.; Vbh 324. -- 2. Specified as panc' upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna -- kkhandha, etc.) S iii.47; 86 -- 88; also Vin i.10; S iii.127 sq. Specified S iii.58 iii.100=M iii.16; S iii.114, 158 sq.; v.52, 60; A iv.458; Vism 443 sq. (in ch. xiv: Khandha -- niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato, etc.). -- Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5: Kh iii.; Ps i.22, 122. Enumerated in var. connections S i.112; D iii.233; M i.190; A v.52; Kh iv. (expld KhA 82=A v.52); Miln 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma). -- What is said of the khandhas alone -- see above 1 (a) -- (e) -- is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. <-> (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā "rooted in desire, or in wilful desire" S iii.100; cp. yo kho . . . pañcas' upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taŋ tattha upādānaŋ ti M i.300, 511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann' etaŋ upād˚ ānaŋ adhivacanaŋ M i.144; bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā S iii.26; pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann' . . . adhivacanaŋ S iv.174; pañc' upād˚ . . . sakkāyo vutto M i.299= S iv.259. -- (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaŋ vā attaniyaŋ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu S iii.128; rogato, etc. . . . manasikātabbā pañc˚ S iii.167; pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânupassī "realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment" A v.109; same with udayavyayânupassī S iii.130; A ii.45, 90; iii.32; iv.153; and dhammânupassī M i.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc' . . . khandhānaŋ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. S iii.31, 160 sq.; A ii.45, 90; iv.153; Nd2 under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā "in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain" Vin i.10=M i.48=A i.177=S v.421; Ps i.37, 39; Vbh 101 & passim; cp. katamaŋ dukkham ariyasaccaŋ? pañc'upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaŋ, seyyathīdaŋ . . . S iii.158= v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dh 202 (& expl. DhA iii.261). -- 3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) DhA i.22; viññāṇa -- kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaŋ viññāṇaŋ viññ˚ -- khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd2 on Sn 1142=Dhs 68. -- âdhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above) S iii.101=M iii.16; -- āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (=khandhāvāra?) (1) J iv. 151; v.162; DhA i.193, 199.<-> (2) J i.101, 332; PvA 113; DhA ii.79. Said of a hermitage J v.35. -- fig. in sīla -- khandhāvāraŋ bandhitvā "to settle in the camp of good conduct" DA i.244; -- ja (adj. -- n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i. e. a growth or parasite S i.207=Sn 272, expl. at SnA 304; khandhesu jātā khandha -- jā, pārohānam etaŋ adhivacanaŋ. -- niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -- paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -- paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as N. of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -- bīja "trunk seed" as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132, & D i.5, expld. DA i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam -- ādi. -- rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla˚ khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629=Nd2 540. -- loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu -- and āyatanaloka Ps i.122. -- vibhanga division dealing with the khandhas (i. e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Miln 12. -- santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414.
Khandhaka
Khandhaka [fr. khandha] division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaŋ niṭṭhitaŋ "here ends the chapter of . . ."); in cpd. ˚vatta, i. e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188.
Khandhiman
Khandhiman (adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree A iii.43.
Khama
Khama (adj.) [fr. kṣam] (a) patient, forgiving. (b) en- during, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e. g.), fit for. -- (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaŋ, saddānaŋ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) A iii.113=138; the same applied to the king's horse A iii.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaŋ na paccakosati "not to shout back at him who shouts at you" A ii.152 sq.; cp. Nett 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at D iii.229. In combn. w. vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words S i.63; ii.282; Miln 380; cp. suvaco khamo A v.24 sq., forgiving: Miln 207.<-> (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat A iii.389=v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) A iii.30; ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ M i.385. -- akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata S ii.204 sq.= A ii.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant A iii.156 sq. -- D iii.229; Sdhp 95.
Khamati
Khamati [Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. xqw/n, xamai] 1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and gen. of person): n' âhaŋ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) S i.221, 222; aparādhaŋ kh. to forgive a fault J iii.394. khamatha forgive DhA ii.254; khamatha me pardon me Miln 13; DhA i.40. -- 2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya "as may seem good to you; if you please" D i.60, 108; M i.487. sabbaŋ me na khamati "I do not approve of" M i.497 sq.; na khamati "it is not right" D ii.67. -- 3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaŋ khamanti M i.133, 480; cp. diṭṭhi -- nijjhāna -- kkhanti M i.480 & A i.189. -- ppr. med. khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaŋ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp. Bdhgh. note Vin Texts i.195. -- grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204; D ii.99. -- caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one's pardon, to apologize (to=acc.) J i.267; PvA 123, 195; DhA i.38, 39; ii.75, 254. -- to ask permission or leave (i. e. to say good -- bye) DhA i.14.
Khamana
Khamana (nt.) long -- suffering Miln 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24.
Khamanatā
Khamanatā (f.) forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harsh- ness both as syn. of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342, Vbh 360.
Khamā
Khamā (f.) [fr. ksam] (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) J iv.8 (v. l. B. chamāya).
Khamāpanā
Khamāpanā (f.) [abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] asking for pardon J iv.389.
Khambha
Khambha [Sk. khambha & sthambha] 1. prop, support, in ˚kata "making a prop," i. e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213=iv.188. -- 2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis,
-- 235 --
in ūru˚ "stiffening of the thigh" M i.237 (through pain); J v.23 (through fear). See also chambheti & thambha.
Khambheti
Khambheti [Caus. fr. prec. -- Sk. skambh, skabhnāti] 1. to prop, to support Th 2, 28 (but expl. at ThA 35 by vi˚, obstruct) -- 2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp. khambhita (=vi˚) Nd2 220, where it explains khitta. <-> ger. khambhiya: see vi˚.
Khaya
Khaya [Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. fqi/ sis, fqi/nw, fqi/w wasting. See also khepeti under khipati] waste, destruction, consumption; decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night VvA 52; mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth, e. g. āsavānaŋ kh. It 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaŋ khayā anāsavaŋ cetovimuttiŋ upasampajja A i.107= 221=D iii.78, 108, 132=It 100 and passim. -- rāgassa, dosassa, mohassa kh. M i.5; A i.299, cp. rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, A i.159; dosa˚ S iii.160, 191; iv.250. -- taṇhānaŋ kh. Dh 154; sankhārānaŋ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaŋ, etc. M i.486; āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502. -- yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh' eva khayaŋ attano Sn 626=Dh 402; khayaŋ virāgaŋ amataŋ paṇītaŋ Sn 225. -- In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645=738=872. -- See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚, taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saŋyojana, sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚. -- âtīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon=the new moon) Sn 598; -- ânupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay A iv.146 sq.= v.359 (+vayânupassin); -- ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay M ii.38=Pug 60; in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -- dhamma the law of decay A iii.54; Ps i.53, 76, 78.
Khara
Khara1 [cp. Sk. khara] 1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful D ii.127 (ābādha); J iii.26 (vedanā) Miln 26 (+sakkhara -- kaṭhala -- vālikā), PvA 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara -- loma -- yakkha Vism 208). -- ˚ka= khara rough, stony PvA 265 (=thaṇḍila). -- 2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -- putta, nickname of a horse J iii.278. -- 3. a saw J ii.230 (=kakaca C.); vi.261. -- âjina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Sn 249 (=kharāni ajina -- cammāni Sn A 291); Pug 56; -- gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari -- gata M i.185; Vism 349 (=pharusa). -- mukha a conch J vi.580. -- ssara of rough sound S ii.128.
Khara
Khara2 [Sk. kṣara] water J iii.282.
Kharatta
Kharatta (nt.) [fr. khara] roughness A i.54; PvA 90 (in expln of pharusa).
Khala
Khala [cp. Sk. khala] 1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd2 587; Vism 120; DA i.203 (khalaŋ sodheti). -- 2. threshing, mash, in ekamaŋsa -- khalaŋ karoti "to reduce to one mash of flesh" D i.52=M i.377 (+maŋsa -- puñja; DA i.160=maŋsa -- rāsi). -- agga the best corn for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- kāla the time for threshing DhA iv.98; -- bhaṇḍ'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- bhaṇḍa -- kāla the time for the application of the latter DhA iv.98; -- maṇḍala a threshing -- floor Vism 123; DhA i.266 (˚matta, as large as . . .).
Khalanka
Khalanka in -- pāda at J vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q. v.).
Khalati
Khalati [Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. sfa/ llw to bring to fall, to fail] to stumble; ger. khalitvā Th 1, 45; Miln 187; pp. khalita q. v. Cp. upa˚, pa˚.
Khali
Khali a paste Vin ii.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. vi.3, 1 for madda).
Khalika
Khalika (or khalikā f.) a dice -- board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77) Vin ii.10; cp. D i.6 (in enumn of various amusements; expl. at DA i.85 by jūta -- khalika pāsaka -- kīḷanaŋ). See also kali.
Khalita
Khalita1 [Sk. khalati=Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa] bald -- headed A i.138 (+vilūna); Th 2, 255 (=vilūnakesa ThA 210).
Khalita
Khalita2 [pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala=soceyye] (adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling, wrong -- doing, failure A i.198; Nd1 300; Th 2, 261; DhA iii.196 (of the voice; ThA 211=pakkhalita); J i.78; Miln 94, 408. -- 2. disturbed, treated badly J vi. 375. -- akhalita undisturbed Th 1, 512.
Khalu
Khalu [indecl., usually contracted to kho, q. v.] either positive: indeed, surely, truly D i.87; Sn p. 103; J iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mhvs vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 (=paṭisedhan' atthe nipāto). -- pacchābhattika (adj.)=na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131=193; Pug 69; Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310.
Khalunka
Khalunka [adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation= khalanga>khalanka>khalunka, cp. kulūpaka for kulūpaga] only appld to a horse= shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java A i.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage A iv.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred) A v.166. Three kinds at A i.287 sq.=iv.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at J i.180= sindhavakule ajāto khalunk'asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā J i.184. -- Der. khalunkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness VvA 278.
Khaleti
Khaleti [Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal?] lit. to wash (cp. pakkhā- leti), slang for "to treat badly," "to give a rubbing" or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at J iv.205=382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaŋ "take the rascal by the throat and thrash him" (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraŋ (i. e. a "rub," kind of punishment) pāpetvā niddhamatha=give him a thrashing & throw him out. v. l. at both passages is galayātha).
Khallaka
Khallaka in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel -- coverings (?) Vin i.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts ii.15). <-> Also as khalla -- baddhâdibhedaŋ upāhanaŋ at PvA 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material.
Khallāta
Khallāta [Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita] bald, in -- sīsa a bald head DhA i.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald -- headed Petī PvA 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67.
Khallika
Khallika only at S v.421; cp. S iv.330 (Dhamma- cakka -- p -- Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg, Vin i.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika .
Khaḷopī
Khaḷopī [and khalopi, also kalopī, q. v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly= karoṭi] a pot, usually with kumbhī: D i.167 ( -- mukha+kumbhi -- mukha); Pug 55; Miln 107.
Khāṇu
Khāṇu [also often spelled khānu; prob.=Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6] a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka, thorns A i.35; iii.389; Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ' aggi), 342 (˚magga); SnA 334. -- jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) S iv.193. -- nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DA i.73. Khāṇu -- kondañña N. of a Thera Vism 380; DhA ii.254.
Khāṇuka
Khāṇuka=khāṇu S v.379 (avihata˚): J ii.18, 154; v.45 (loha -- daṇḍa -- kh˚ pins & stakes of brass); Miln 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā . . . khalitvā stumbling over roots & stumps); Vism 381=DhA ii.254 (with ref. to the name
-- 236 --
of Khāṇu -- kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); VvA 338 (in a road=sankuka).
Khāta
Khāta (adj.) [Sk. khāta; pp. of khan] dug DA i.274 (=ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Miln 351 (˚taḷāka). Cp. atikhāta J ii.296.
Khāda
Khāda (nt.) eating, in -- kāraṇa the reason of eating . . . PvA 37.
Khādaka
Khādaka (adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj. -- ˚), an eater J iv.307; PvA 44; lohita -- maŋsa˚ (of Yakkhas) J i.133, 266; camma˚ J i.176; gūtha˚ (of a Peta) PvA 266.
Khādati
Khādati [Dhtp 155 "khāda bhakkhane"; cp. Sk. khā- dati, cp. Gr. knw/dwn the barbed hook of a javelin, i. e. "the biter"; Lith. kándu to bite] to chew, bite, eat, devour (=Ger. fressen); to destroy. -- Pres. Dh 240; J i.152 (sassāni); iii.26; Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī); i.94. -- kaṭṭhaŋ kh˚ to use a toothpick J i.80, 282, <-> dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth J i.161. -- santakaŋ kh˚ to consume one's property DhsA 135. -- of beasts, e. g. Sn 201, 675. -- Pot. khādeyya J iii.26. -- Imper. khāda J i.150 (maŋsaŋ); ii.128 (khādaniyaŋ); vi.367. (pūvaŋ); PvA 39, 78. -- Part. pres. khādanto J i.61; iii.276. -- Fut. khādissati J i.221; ii.129. -- Aor. khādiŋsu PvA 20. -- Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp. khajjati) PvA 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). <-> Inf. khādituŋ J i.222; ii.153; DhA iv.226. -- Ger. khāditvā J i.266, 278 (phalāni); PvA 5, 32 (devour); poetical khādiyā J v.464 (=khāditvā). -- Grd. khāditabba J iii.52, and khādaniya (q .v.). -- Pp. khādita (q. v.). Cp. pali˚.
Khādana
Khādana (nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) PvA 158. -- adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at J ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q. v.). Cp. vi˚.
Khādaniya
Khādaniya [grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya] hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q. v.). So at D ii.127; J i.90, 235; iii.127; Sn. p 110; Miln 9, 11. -- Also in combn anna, pāna, kh˚ Sn 924; ii.49. By itself J iii.276. -- piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248.
Khādā
Khādā (f.) food, in rāja˚ royal food Sn 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho=rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd1 171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout).
Khādāpana
Khādāpana [fr. khādāpeti] causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Miln 197 (sunakhehi).
Khādāpeti
Khādāpeti (Caus. ii. of khādati] to make eat J iii.370; vi.335.
Khādika
Khādika=khādaka, in aññamañña˚ S v.456.
Khādita
Khādita (adj.) [pp. med. & pass. of khādati] eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed J i.223; ii.154; PvA 5. -- A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e. g. Pug 59; Vism 258; PvA 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. PvA 158=khādita). -- Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten J i.176. -- ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding J v.447.
Khādin
Khādin, f. khādinī=khādaka PvA 31.
Khāyati
Khāyati [pass.=Sk. khyāyate, khyā] to seem to be, to appear like (viya) J i.279; aor. khāyiŋsu J i.61; ppr. med. khāyamāna J iv. 140; PvA 251. Cp. pakkhāyati.
Khāyita
Khāyita see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika.
Khāra
Khāra [Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. chro/ s, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear, seresco to dry] any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at S iii.131 ( -- gandha); A i.209. -- Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā. -- âpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var. tortures (under vividha -- kamma -- kāranā kārenti) M i.87= A i.48=ii.122=Nd2 604; J vi.17 (v. l. ˚ṭicch˚; C. has āpatacchika, v. l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Miln 197. Both A & Nd have v. l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -- ôdaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, 420; DhA i.189; PvA 213; cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194.
Khāraka
Khāraka (adj.) [fr. khāra] sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka A iv.117 sq.
Khārī
Khārī (f.) [and khāri -- ] a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): "a khārī -- load." -- kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); J v.204. -- bhaṇḍa DhA iii.243 (:kahaŋ te kh -- bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro); -- bhāra a shoulder -- yoke S i.169; J iii.83; -- vidha=˚kāja S i.78=Ud 65; D i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DA i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi -- kamaṇḍalu -- sūcâdayo tāpasa -- parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaŋ kācam ādāyā ti attho. As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja.
Khārika
Khārika1 [adj. to khāra] alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at S iii 87; Dhs 629 and ≈.
Khārika
Khārika2 [adj. of khārī] of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho A v.173=Sn p. 126.
Khāleti
Khāleti Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti.
Khāhinti
Khāhinti at Th 2, 509 is to be read kāhinti (=karissanti ThA 293).
Khiḍḍā
Khiḍḍā [Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati] play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at A v.203; var. kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at D i.6 under jūta -- pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd2; SnA 86). Expl. as kīḷanā SnA 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) PvA 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi PvA 265. Cp. Sn 926; Pv iv.121. -- dasaka "the decad of play," i. e. the second 10 years of man's life, fr. 11 -- 20 years of age Vism 619. -- padosika corrupted by pleasures D i.19, 20= DA i.113 (v. l. padūsika); -- rati play & enjoyment Sn 41, 59; Vv 1612, 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619.
Khitta
Khitta [pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe] thrown; cast, overthrown Dh 34; rajo paṭivātaŋ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind S i.13, 164=Sn 662=Dh 125= J iii.203; ratti -- khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dh 304=Nett 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Sn 1074 (expld Nd2 220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā); in interpret. of khetta PvA 7 said of sowing: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ. -- akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed, in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto D i.113=Sn p. 115, etc. Cp. vi˚. -- citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged, usually combd with ummattaka, out of one's mind Vin i.131, 321; ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta -- kkhepa.
Khipa
Khipa (nt.) [fr. ksip] a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide D i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (=kumina) eel -- basket A i.33=287; Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika.
Khipati
Khipati [Vedic kṣipati] to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Sn p. 32 (cittaŋ); J i.223 (sīsaŋ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaŋ dalhassa: to pit force against force) -- aor. khipi S iv.2, 3 (khuracakkaŋ); PvA 87 (= atthāresi). -- ger. khipitvā J i.202. -- 1st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put
-- 237 --
in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaŋ khepetvā J i.137; Th 2, 168 (khepeti jātisaŋsāraŋ=pariyosāpeti ThA 159); DhA i.102 (dvenavuti -- kappe khepesuŋ); āyuŋ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life PvA 148; ger. khepayitvāna (saŋsāraŋ) Pv iv.332 (=khepetvā PvA 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi=to cause to waste. See also khepana. -- 2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown J i.202; iv.139 (jalaŋ). Cp also khepa.
Khipana
Khipana (nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown J i.290 (pasaka -- k˚).
Khipanā
Khipanā (f.) [fr. khipati] throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Miln 357; Vbh 352; cp. Vism 29.
Khipita
Khipita (nt.) [pp. of khipati=that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two] sneezing, expectoration Pv ii.23 (expl. PvA 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); DhA i.314 (˚roga+kāsa, coughing). -- sadda the sound of expectorations D i.50; DhA i.250.
Khippa
Khippa (adj.): [Vedic kṣipra to kṣip] 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. "like a shot") Sn 350 (of vacana =lahu SnA). -- 2. a sort of fishing net or eel -- basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) S i.74. -- nt. adv. khippaŋ quickly A ii.118=iii.164; Sn 413, 682, 998; Dh 65, 137, 236, 289; J iv.142; Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pug 32. -- Compar. khippatara Sn p. 126. -- âbhiññā quick intuition (opp. dandh˚) D iii.106; Dhs 177; Nett 7, 24, 50, 77, 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138.
Khippati
Khippati [fr. kṣip] to ill -- treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at VvA 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto.
Khila
Khila (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. khila] waste or fallow land A iii.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto -- khilā enumd in detail at M i.101=A iv.460= D iii.238 (see under ceto); mentioned A v.17; SnA 262. As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at S v.57; also with other qualities at Nd2 9. In combn with paligha S i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ŋ); khilaŋ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one's heart) S i.193; iii.134; Sn 973.<-> akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open -- hearted: cittaŋ susamāhitaŋ . . . akhilaŋ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261; S iv.118; in combn with anāsava Sn 212; with akankha Sn 477, 1059; with vivattacchada Sn 1147; cp. vigatakhila Sn 19.
Khiḷa
Khiḷa [cp. Sk. kiṇa] hard skin, callosity J v.204 (v. l. kiṇa).
Khīṇa
Khīṇa [pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati] destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. ˚ -- often to be translated "without." It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti "destroyed is the possibility of rebirth," in freq. occurring formula "kh. j. vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya," denoting the attainment of Arahantship. (See arahant ii, formula A) Vin i. 35; D i.84, 177, 203; M ii.39; Sn p. 16; Pug 61 etc. See expln at DA i.225= SnA 138. -- khīṇaŋ mayhaŋ kammaŋ J iv.3, similarly khīṇaŋ purāṇaŋ navaŋ natthi sambhavaŋ Sn 235 (khīṇa=samucchinna KhA 194); pāpakamme khīṇe PvA 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Sn 370, cp. 162. -- āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; M i. 145; ii.43; iii.30; D iii.97, 133, 235; It 95; Sn 82, 471, 539, 644; Dh 89, 420; PvA 7 (=arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542. -- The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava -- balāni) discussed at D iii.283; Ps i.35; ten powers at Ps ii.173, 176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -- punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (=khīṇāsava) Sn 514, 656; -- bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (=prec.) Sn 235 (=ucchinna -- bīja KhA 194); -- maccha without fish (of a lake) Dh 155; -- vyappatha without the way of (evil) speech (vyapp˚=vācāya patho; expl. SnA 204 as na pharusavāco) Sn 158; -- sota with the stream gone, i. e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Sn 777.
Khīṇatta
Khīṇatta (nt.) DA i.225 & khīṇatā (f.) DhA iv.228, the fact of being destroyed.
Khīya
Khīya [cp. khīyati2] in -- dhammaŋ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151, 154; A iii.269; iv.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v.
Khīyati
Khīyati [Sk. kṣīyate, pass. to khayati] to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152; J i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Ps i.94, 96; ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80. -- ppr. khīyamāna Sn 434; Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi D iii.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid. see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase "ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati] and the meaning is "to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence"; as evidenced by the combn with quâsi -- synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig. for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim. See ujjhāyati for further refs.
Khīyanaka
Khīyanaka (a) [der. fr. khīya] in combn with pācittiya a "falling away" offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin ii.94, 100; iv.38.
Khīra
Khīra (nt.) [Sk. kṣīra] milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243; ii.301; M i.343 sq.=A ii.207=Pug 56; A ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi -- maṇḍa)= D i.201; DhA i.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646=740=875; -- J iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140; Dh 71=Nett 161; Miln 41; PvA 198 (=sneha, milky juice); VvA 75; DhA i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water). -- duddha -- khīra one who has milked Sn 18. -- ôdaka (nt.) milk -- water or milk & water lit. J ii.104, 106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā "a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend" A i.70; S iv.225=M i.207, 398=A iii.67, 104; -- odana (nt.) milk -- rice (boiled) Vv3324 (=VvA 147). -- gandha the smell of milk J vi.357. -- ghaṭa a pot of milk Miln 48; -- paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dh 284 (v. l. khīra -- pāna); DhA iii.424; -- paṇṇin (m.) N. of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea M i.429; -- matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) S i.108; -- mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk DhA iv.217; -- sāmin master of the milk (+dhīrasāmin) Bdhd 62.
Khīranikā
Khīranikā (f.) a milk -- giving cow S i.174.
Khīla
Khīla [Sk. kīla & khīla] a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaŋ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post); S iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mhvs 29, 49. -- ayo˚ an iron stake A i.141; S v.444; Nd2 304iii; Sn 28 (nikhāta, erected); SnA 479. Cp. inda˚. -- ṭṭhāyi -- ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse) A iv.192, 194.
Khīlaka
Khīlaka (adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed J v.203 (=akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206).
Khīḷana
Khīḷana [der. fr. khīḷeti] scorn Miln 357.
Khīḷeti
Khīḷeti [to kīḷ or to khila?] to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Miln 229, 288; cp. khīḷana.
Khu
Khu ( -- ˚) is doubtful second part of inghāḷa˚ (q. v.).
Khuŋseti
Khuŋseti [kruś? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52
-- 238 --
to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against D i.90, DA i.256 (= ghaṭṭeti); Vin iv.7; SnA 357; DhA iv.38. -- pp. khuŋsita DhA ii.75.
Khujja
Khujja (adj.) [either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum), or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa2] 1. humpbacked J v.426 (+piṭhasappī); DA i.148 (in combn with vāmana & kirāta); f. DhA i.194, 226. -- 2. small, inferior, in kh˚ -- rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453.
Khuṇḍali
Khuṇḍali at PvA 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi.
Khudā
Khudā [Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30] hunger Sn 52 (+pipāsā: Nd2 s. v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966; Pv i.64 (= jighacchā) ii.15 (+taṇhā), 24; PvA 72. See khuppipāsā.
Khudda
Khudda (adj.) [Vedic kṣudra] small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaŋ samācare kiñci "he shall not pursue anything trifling" Sn 145 (=lāmakaŋ KhA 243); kh˚ ca bālaŋ Sn 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā= balavasena nihīnā VvA 136). -- ânukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287=D ii. 154; Vin iv.143; A i.233; cp. Divy 465; -- âvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well -- bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) D i.114, 120, etc. -- desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348.
Khuddaka
Khuddaka=khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka -- majjhima -- mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq. (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below. -- catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Sn 603. Khuddaka (m.) the little one, Miln 40 (mātā ˚assa). -- nadī=kunnadī, a small river PvA 154; -- nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka -- Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka, Sutta -- Nipāta, Vimāna -- Vatthu, Peta -- Vatthu, Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa, Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha -- Vaŋsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh -- N. is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books -- short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35; Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; PvA 2, etc. -- pāṭha N. of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -- mañcaka a small or low bed J i.167; -- rājā an inferior king J v.37 (+mahārājā); SnA 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -- vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird DhA iii.223; -- vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114.
Khuppipāsā
Khuppipāsā [cp. khudā] hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno M i.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Sn 436=Nd2 on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the Petas: Pv i.1110; ii.22, PvA 10, 32, 37, 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, 101, 507.
Khubhati
Khubhati see saŋ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as "khubha= sañcalane."
Khura
Khura1 [Vedic khura] the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse=turagānaŋ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse's hoof VvA 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey's claw Sp. AvŚ i.236. khura -- kāse M i.446, read (with Neumann) for khura -- kāye, "in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ) the hoofs."
Khura
Khura2 [Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whet- stone; cp. Gr. xnau /w scrape, cu/w shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings "chedana & vilekhana"] a razor Vin ii.134; S iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) DhA ii.257. -- agga the hall of tonsure PvA 53; -- appa a kind of arrow D i.96; M i.429 (+vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -- kosa razor -- sheath Vism 251, 255. -- cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor J iv.3; -- dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Sn 674 (+tiṇha<-> dhāra); J v.269; Vism 163. -- 2. the haft of a razor, or its case Sn 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500; DhA ii.257; -- nāsa having a nose like a razor J iv.139; -- pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher -- knife D i.52 (=DA i.160; khura -- nemi khura -- sadisa -- pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka; -- māla N. of an ocean, in ˚samudda J iv.137; -- mālī (f.)= prec. ibid.; -- muṇḍa close -- shaven Vin i.344; VvA 207. Khuramuṇḍaŋ karoti to shave closely D i.98; S iv.344= A ii.241; -- bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura, khura -- silā, khura -- sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249; ii.134, cp. Vin. Texts iii.138; -- silā a whetstone Vin ii.134; -- sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134.
Khulukhulukaṛakaŋ
Khulukhulu -- kaṛakaŋ (nt. adv.) "so as to make the sound khulu, khulu," i.e. clattering or bumping about M ii.138. Cp. ghuru -- ghuru.
Kheṭa
Kheṭa [cp. Sk. kheṭaka] a shield: see kīṭa.
Khetta
Khetta (nt.) [Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling -- place, Gr. kti/ zw, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema "being settled," composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip & trā in his expln at PvA 7: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ tāyati . . . ti khettaŋ] 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, D i.231; S i.134 (bījaŋ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at S iv.315, viz. agga˚, majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile); A i.229=239; iv.237 (do.); Sn 524; J i.153 (sāli -- yava˚); Pv ii.968=DhA iii.220 (khette bījaŋ ropitaŋ); Miln 47; PvA 62; DhA i.98. Often as a mark of wealth=possession, e. g. D iii.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaŋ patī ti khattiya., In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc. D i.5 (expld at DA i.78: khetta nāma yasmiŋ pubbaṇṇaŋ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiŋ aparaṇṇaŋ rūhati, "kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the second." A similar expln at Nd1 248, where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚, godhūma˚, tila˚, i. e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra˚ without ref. to aṇṇa.) S ii.41; Sn 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa) Sn 858; Nd2 on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. -- Kasī˚ a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12, cp. PvA 8; jāti˚ "a region in which a Buddha may be born" (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) PvA 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha -- kkhetta at Vism 414, viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚. -- 2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the "giver" of gifts or the "doer" of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya˚, puñña˚ (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here= virūhana -- ṭṭhāna), brahma˚. -- A i.162, 223 (kammaŋ, khettaŋ, viññāṇaŋ bījaŋ); iv.237; It 98; VvA 113.<-> akhetta barren soil A iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.); PvA 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land S i.21; PvA 137; opp. dukkhetta S v.379. -- ûpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv i.11; -- kammanta work in the field A iii.77; -- gata turned into a field, of puññakamma "good work becoming a field of merit" PvA 136, 191; -- gopaka a field watcher J iii.52; -- ja "born on one's land," one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J i.135. -- jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a "field" Sn 523, 524; -- pāla one who guards a field J iii.54; -- mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) VvA 108; -- rakkhaka the guardian of a field J ii.110; -- vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) D iii.164; S v.473=A ii.209; A v.137; Pug 58; PvA 3; -- sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) PvA 198; VvA 102; see VvA 30, 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚, payoga˚; -- sāmika the owner of the field Miln 47; VvA 311. -- sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) DhA iii.284.
Kheda
Kheda (adj.) [Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo] subject to fatigue, tired VvA 276. -- As noun "fatigue" at Vism 71.
-- 239 --
Khepa
Khepa [cp. khipati] ( -- ˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta -- kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dh 138. Cp. vi˚, saŋ˚.
Khepana
Khepana [cp. khepeti] -- ˚ the passing of, appld to time: āyu˚ VvA 311.
Khepita
Khepita [pp. of khepeti] destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed, destruction, annihilation, DhA ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.).
Khepeti
Khepeti see khipati.
Khema
Khema [Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta] 1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm D i.73 (of a country); S i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i. e. Nibbāna) i.189=Sn 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); M i.227 (vivaṭaŋ amatadvāraŋ khemaŋ nibbānapattiyā "opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna") A iii.354 (of ñāna) It 32; Sn 268 (=abhaya, nirupaddava KhA 153); Dh 189 sq.; Pv iv.33 (of a road=nibbhaya PvA 250); VvA 85. <-> 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general: D i.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Sn 896 (+avivādabhūmi); 953. -- In particular of Nibbāna: S iv.371; A iv.455; Vv 5320 (amataŋ khemaŋ); Ps i.59. See also yoga. Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene S ii.109; Sn 414, 1098; Nd2 s. v. (+tāṇato, etc.). -- atta one who is at peace (+viratta) S i.112 (=khemībhūtaŋ assabhāvaŋ SA). -- anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) D i.73; Nd2 on Satthā; Vism 303. -- ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Th 2, 350 (=Nibbāna ThA 242); -- ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested D i.135; -- dassin looking upon the Serene Sn 809; -- ppatta having attained tranquillity (=abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) M i.72=A ii.9.
Khemin
Khemin (adj.) one who enjoys security or peace S iii.13; Sn 145 (=abhaya KhA 244); Dh 258.
Kheḷa
Kheḷa [Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning "calana." The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa] phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat A i.34; iv.137; Sn 196 (+singh˚); Kh ii.=Miln 26 (cp. Vism 263 in detail, & KhA 66); J i.61; iv.23; vi.367; Vism 259, 343 (+singhāṇikā), 362; DhA iii.181; iv.20, 170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); PvA 80 (=niṭṭhubhana). -- kilinna wet with exudation J i.164; -- mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48; ii.175, 209 sq.; -- singhānikā phlegm & mucus DhA i.50.
Kheḷāpaka
Kheḷāpaka (Vin) & kheḷāsika (DhA) an abusive term "eating phlegm" (?) [Müller, P.G. 30=kheṭâtmaka] Vin ii.188, cp. Vin. Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term "phlegm -- eater," calling one by this name Vin ii.189; DhA 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle -- dribbler; "wind bag."
Kho
Kho [before vowels often khv'; contr. of khalu=Sk. khalu] an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis: indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp. kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār' antara -- nidassan' atthe nipāto KhA 113; as avadhāraṇaŋ (affirmative particle) PvA 11, 18. -- A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin i.17; pasādā kho D ii.155. After pron.: mayhaŋ kho J i.279; ete kho Vin i.10; idaŋ kho ibid.; so ca kho J i.51; yo kho M i.428; -- After a negation: na kho indeed not J ii.111; no ca khv' āssa A v.195; mā kho J i.253; -- Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana "is it then not possible" J i.151; api ca kho pana J i.253; siyā kho pana D ii.154; -- Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaŋ bhante ti kho; evaŋ byā kho Vin iv.134; Dh i.27, etc. -- In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho J i.279; atthi nu kho J iii.52; kahan nu kho J i.255.
Khobha
Khobha (m.) [cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake=Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove] shaking, shock Vism 31, 157; khobhaŋ karoti to shake VvA 35, 36, 278; khobha -- karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474. See also akkhobbha.
Khoma
Khoma [cp. Vedic kṣauma] adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin i.58, 96, 281; A iv.394; v.234=249 (˚yuga); J vi.47, 500; Pv ii.117; DhA i.417. -- pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296.
G. ˚Ga
˚Ga [fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚, hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e. g. in addha˚, anta˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚. -- dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh 327=Miln 379; Pv ii.78 (=duggamana -- ṭṭhāna PvA 102); ii.925; J ii.385.
Gagana
Gagana (nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya J i.149, 212; g˚ tale canda -- maṇḍalaŋ J iii.365; cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito J v.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaŋ viya DhA i.372; g˚ tale puṇṇacanda "the full -- moon in the expanse of the heavens" VvA 3; g˚ talamagga the (moon's) course in the sky PvA 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd2 on Sn 1097. Unspecified: J i.57; Vism 176 (˚tal -- âbhimukhaŋ).
Gaggara
Gaggara [Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. ba/raqron, Lat. gurges, gurgulio, Ohg. querechela "kehle"] 1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith's bellows: kammāra˚, in simile M i.243; S i.106; Vism 287. -- 2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haŋsa˚ the sound of geese J v.96 (expl. by haŋsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as N. of a lake at Vism 208. -- See note on gala.
Gaggaraka
Gaggaraka [fr. gaggara] a whirlpool, eddy J v.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka, Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Miln 197.
Gaggarāyati
Gaggarāyati [v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle] to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Miln 3. -- cp. gaḷagaḷāyati.
Gaccha
Gaccha [not=Sk. kaccha, grass -- land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage J iii.287 stands with gaccha, v. l. kaccha for gaccha at A iv.74; g˚ for k˚ at Sn 20] a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper & rukkha, tree, e. g. Nd2 235, id; J i.73; Miln 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood A iv.74. puppha˚ a flowering shrub J i.120; khuddaka˚ -- vana a wood of small shrubs J v.37. -- PvA 274; VvA 301 ( -- gumba, brushwood, underwood); DhA i.171 ( -- pothana -- ṭṭhāna); iv.78 ( -- mūla).
-- 240 --
Gacchati
Gacchati [Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gṷem "I am intent upon going," i. e. I go, with the foll. bases. -- (1) Future -- present *gṷemskéti> *gaścati>Sk. gacchati=Gr. ba/skw (to bainw). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. ei)=mi "I shall go" & in form also Sk. pṛcchati=Lat. porsco "I want to know," Vedic icchati "to desire." -- (2) Present *gṷemi̯o=Sk. gamati=Gr. bai/nw, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg. koman, E. come; and non -- present formations as Osk. kúmbened, Sk. gata=Lat. ventus; gantu=(ad) ventus. -- (3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk. ágām, Gr. e)/bhn, cp. bh_ma]. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres. gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dh 46, 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (VvA 307; v. l. agañchi). -- (2) gam˚ in three variations; viz. (a) gam˚, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor. 3 sg. agamā (Sn 408, 976; Vv 797; Mhvs vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv ii.86) 1. pl. agamiŋhase (Pv ii.310), pl. agamuŋ (Sn 290), agamaŋsu & gamiŋsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (J v.31); grd. gamanīya (KhA 223). See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin. -- (b) gan˚, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner, Notes, p. 71 sq. -- In n'āgañchi J iii.190 it belongs to ā+gam); pres. -- aor gañchisi (Sn 665); inf. gantuŋ; ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. <-> (c) ga˚, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta. -- 3. gā˚, in pret. agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (=Sk. ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q. v.). Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq. in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaŋ kappeti "to go, to stand, sit down & lie down," to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd2 s. v. gacchati. <-> evaŋ kāle gacchante, as time went on J iii.52, or evaŋ g˚ kāle (PvA 54, 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle DhA i.319; gacchati=paleti PvA 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) DhA iii.176. -- 2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) DhA i.389. -- 3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come, āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maŋ icchati anvetu yo vā n' icchati gacchatu "who wants me may come, who does not may go" Sn 564; āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaŋ n' atthi "there was no end of all who came & went" J ii.133; gacchāma "let us go" J i.263; gaccha dāni go away now! J ii.160; gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then! J i.151, 222; mā gami do not go away! J iv.2; pl. mā gamittha J i.263; gacchanto on his way J i.255, 278; agamaŋsu they went away J iv.3; gantukāma anxious to go J i.222, 292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) DhA iii.173; kahaŋ gacchissatha id. J ii.128; kuhiŋ gamissati where is he going? Sn 411, 412. -- 4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig. to come to know, to experience, to realize. -- (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaŋ gami he went to R. Pv ii.86; Devadaha -- nagaraŋ gantuŋ J i.52; gacchām' ahaŋ Kusināraŋ I shall go to K. D ii.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiŋ gacchanti they intended to go ("were going") to S. J iii.188; migavaŋ g. to go hunting J i.149; janapadaŋ gamissāma J ii.129; paradāraŋ g. to approach another man's wife Dh 246. -- (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaŋ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma DhA iii.172; devāna santike gacche Dh 224 santikaŋ also J i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaŋ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? J i.159; ii.159; tattha agamāsi he went there J ii.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā "going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering" J iv.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (=fut.) on business J ii.133. -- Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. "to go to Heaven," etc.=to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaŋ gamissati J vi.368; saggaŋ lokaŋ g. J i.152; gacche pāram apārato Sn 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd2 223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience. -- Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaŋ saraṇaŋ gacchāmi "I entrust myself to Bh." Vin i.16. -- Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā -- gacchati to come between, to obstruct. -- 5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i. e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien=it is good). Here belongs gati "existence," as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb "to be" (see b). -- (a) sugatiŋ gamissasi you will go to the state of well -- being, i. e. Heaven Vin ii.195; It 77; opp. duggatiŋ gacchanti Dh 317 -- 319; maggaŋ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Sn 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare "they will go where one sorrows not" Sn 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti . . . tañ ca ādāya gacchati "whatever a man does that he will take with him" S i.93. -- (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb): nagaraŋ pattharitvā gaccheyya "would spread through the town" J i.62; pariṇāmaŋ gaccheyya "could be digested" D ii.127; sīhacammaŋ ādāya agamaŋsu "they took the lion's skin away with them" J ii.110; itthiŋ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone J vi.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi "I shall come for it tomorrow" Miln 48.
Gaja
Gaja [Sk. gaja] an elephant J iv.494; Miln 2, 346; DhsA 295 (appld to a kind of thought). -- potaka the young of an elephant PvA 152; -- rājā the king of the elephants Miln 346.
Gajaka
Gajaka=gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant's cover VvA 104.
Gajjati
Gajjati [Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggaj- jati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde] to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) J i.226; ii.412 (mā gajji); Nd1 172 (=abhi˚); J iv.25. -- Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati) It 66.
Gajjitar
Gajjitar [n. agent fr. prec.] one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud A ii.102=Pug 42.
Gaṇa
Gaṇa [Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. a)gei/rw to collect, a)gora/ meeting, Lat. grex, flock, Sk. jarante "conveniunt" (see Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. i.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma] -- 1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three) bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58, 74, 195, 197; ii.170, 171; iv.130, 216, 226, 231, 283, 310, 316, 317; v.123, 167. -- (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds. -- 2. as -- ˚: a collection of, viz., of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass; flock, herd; host, group, cluster. -- (a) deva˚ J i.203; DhA iii.441; PvA 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ S i.33; tidasa˚ Sn 679. -- (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers J i.264; ariya˚ troup of worthies J vi.50; naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Miln 2; dāsi˚ a crowd of servants J ii.127; tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics J i.140 (˚parivuta); bhikkhu˚ J i.212 (˚parivuta). -- (c) dvija˚ J i.152; dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds J i.207; ii.352; go˚, of cows A i.229; v.347, 359; J ii.128; kākola˚, of ravens Sn 675; bhamarā˚, of bees J i.52; miga˚ of beasts J i.150. -- (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees PvA 154; tāra˚, a host of stars A i.215; Pv ii.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93. -- âcariya "a teacher of a crowd," i. e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama:
-- 241 --
D i.116; M ii.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: D i.47, 163; S i.68; iv.398; M i.198, 227, 233; ii.2; Sn p. 91; cp. DA i.143. In general: Miln 4. -- ārāma (adj.) & -- ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataŋ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd A iii.422 sq.; M iii.110=Nd2 on Sn 54. -- gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd2 307. -- (ŋ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin i.185, 187; cp. Vin. Texts ii.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q. v. under aṭala). -- pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143 sq.; -- bandhana in ˚ena dānaŋ datvā to give by co -- operation, to give jointly DhA ii.160; -- bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196; iv. 71; v.128, 135, 205; -- magga in ˚ena gaṇetuŋ to count by way of batches Vin i.117; -- vassika (adj.) through a great many years Sn 279; -- sanganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another DhA i.162.
Gaṇaka
Gaṇaka [fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up] a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at D i.51 (expl. DA i.157 by acchidda -- pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika S iv.376; as an office at the king's court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka -- mahāmatta=a ministerial treasurer) D iii.64, and in same context D iii.148, 153, 169, 171, 177; as overseer Vin iii.43; as accountant Miln 79, 293; VvA 66.
Gaṇakī
Gaṇakī (f.)=gaṇikā Vin iii.135 -- 136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī -- dhītā the daughter of a courtesan.
Gaṇanā
Gaṇanā (f.) counting, i. e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number J i.29; Vism 278 sq.; Miln 79; VvA 194. <-> 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; J i.35; Miln 4 (senā ˚ŋ kāretvā); DhA i.11, 34. -- 3. the art of counting, arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77=iv.129 (˚ŋ sikkhati to study ar.); D i.11 (expl. DA i.95 by acchiddaka -- gaṇanā); M i.85; iii.1 (˚ājīva); DA i.157. -- gaṇana -- patha (time -- ) reckoning, period of time Miln 20, 116.
Gaṇikā
Gaṇikā1 (f.) "one who belongs to the crowd," a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.); ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Miln 122; DhA iii.104; VvA 75 (Sirimā); PvA 195, 199. -- Customs of a gaṇikā J iv.249; v.134. -- Cp. saŋ˚.
Gaṇikā
Gaṇikā2 (f.)=gaṇanā, arithmetic Miln 3.
Gaṇin
Gaṇin1 (adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above). Also in foll.: Sn 955, 957; Dpvs iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī -- bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī D i.112, expld at DA i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa -- sainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin.
Gaṇin
Gaṇin2 a large species of deer J v.406 (=gokaṇṇa).
Gaṇeti
Gaṇeti [denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne] 1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dh 19; J vi.334; Miln 79, 293; pp. gaṇita Sn 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic) gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28; caus. gaṇāpeti M iii.1. -- 2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for J i.300; iv.267.
Gaṇṭhi
Gaṇṭhi (m.) [Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold to- gether, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha] 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) J i.172; DA i.163; DhA i.321 (˚jātaŋ what has be come knotty or hard); -- diṭṭhi -- gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine VvA 297; anta -- gaṇṭh -- ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275. -- 2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood). -- ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i. e. of execution) J iii.538; (reads gaṇṭhi -- gaṇṭi -- ṭṭhāna); Vism 248. -- bhedaka, in ˚cora "the thief who breaks the block" (or rope, knot?) DhA ii.30.
Gaṇṭhikā
Gaṇṭhikā (f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q. v.)=gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DA i.199 (catu -- pañca -- gaṇṭhik'āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi -- gaṇṭhik'<-> āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); DhA i.335 (˚jāta= gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394. -- 2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? +pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts iii.144); v.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaŋ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46= ii.213, 215, trsld at Vin. Texts iii.286 "fasten the block on (to the robe)" but at i.155 "tie the knots." Also in dhamma -- gaṇṭhikā a block for execution J i.150 (v. l. gaṇḍikā). -- 3. N. of a plant PvA 127. -- ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu. -- kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) J iv.446.
Gaṇḍa
Gaṇḍa [a variation of gaṇṭha ( -- i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object, i. e. stem, stalk] -- 1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q. v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya S iv.83=A iv.386, of kāmā A iii.310, iv.289; Nd2 on Sn 51; also Th 2, 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya ThA 288); S iv.64 (=ejā); Sn 51, 61 (v. l. for gaḷa); J i.293; Vism 360 (˚pilakā); DhA iii.297 (gaṇḍ -- ā -- gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175; PvA 55. Cp. Av. S ii.1681. -- 2. a stalk, a shaft, in N. of a plant -- ˚tindu -- rukkha J v.99, and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. S ii.13312. <-> 3.=gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth -- worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha -- mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts iii.172). -- uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth -- worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā & puḷavā at M iii.168; J v.210 (˚pāṇa); DhA iii.361 (˚yoni); SnA 317.
Gaṇḍaka
Gaṇḍaka (adj.) having boils Sdhp 103.
Gaṇḍamba
Gaṇḍamba N. of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq. in phrase gaṇḍamba -- rukkha -- mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaŋ katvā J i.77; iv.263 sq.; DA i.57; PvA 137; Miln 349; Dāvs v.54. Also at DhA iii.207 in play of words with amba -- rukkha.
Gaṇḍikā
Gaṇḍikā (f.) [a -- n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā] -- 1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) J i.474; DhsA 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚ -- ākoṭana -- sadda). -- 2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q. v.). -- 3. N. of a plant Vv 354 (=bandhujīvaka VvA 161). -- âdhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2.
Gaṇḍin
Gaṇḍin [adj. fr. gaṇḍa] -- 1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i. e. breasts J v.159, 202 (thane sandhāyâha 205). -- 2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin & kilāsin) Kvu 31.
Gaṇḍī
Gaṇḍī (f.) [=gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob.=Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2] -- 1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar J i.237. -- 2. a gong DhA i.291 (gaṇḍiŋ paharati to beat the g.); ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiŋ ākoṭetvā KhA 251. Cp. AvS i.258, 264, 272; ii.87, 95 & Divy 335, 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā "sign with the gong" J iv.306. -- 3. the executioner's block (=gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) J iii.41.
Gaṇḍusa
Gaṇḍusa [cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa] a mouthful J i.249 (khīra˚).
-- 242 --
Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti
Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti [Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. xo/rtos enclosure, Lat. hortus, co -- hors (homestead); Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha˚, gihin, geha, ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand]. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1) gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā -- ); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi PvA 87), pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (J i.159; PvA 49=handa) & gaṇhāhi (J i.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor. gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituŋ (J iii.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā. Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti. -- 2. gahe -- (Sk. gṛhī -- ): Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Sn 847; J i.52). Inf. gahetuŋ (J i.190, 222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv ii.3). -- 3. gah -- (Sk. gṛh -- ): Aor. aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Sn 791). Pass. gayhati. Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha. Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp, seize; assume; e. g. ovādaŋ g. to take advice J i.159; khaggaŋ to seize the sword J i.254 -- 255; gocaraŋ to take food J iii.275; jane to seize people J i.253; dhanaŋ to grasp the treasure J i.255; nagaraŋ to occupy the city J i.202; pāde gāḷhaŋ gahetvā holding her feet tight J i.255; macche to catch fish J iii.52; mantaŋ to use a charm J iii.280; rajjaŋ to seize the kingdom J i.263; ii.102; sākhaŋ to take hold of a branch Sn 791; J i.52. Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate PvA 18; paṭisandhiŋ g. to be born J i.149; maraṇaŋ g. to die J i.151; mūlena g. to buy J iii.126; vacanaŋ g. to obey J iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as "with," e. g. tidaṇḍaŋ gahetvā caranto J ii.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi VvA 149. Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni J ii.105; rājānaŋ J i.264. Cp. gāhāpeti.
Gata
Gata [pp. of gacchati in medio -- reflexive function] gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q. v.) viz. 1. literal: gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp. ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going, standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) D i.70; opp. āgata: yassa maggaŋ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Sn 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic (=gacchati 5 b): aṭṭhi paritvā gataŋ "the bone fell down" J iii.26. Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (=aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaŋ . . . saraṇaŋ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dh 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaŋ gato he went to his domicile J i.280; ii.160; nāvā Aggimālaŋ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā J iv.139. <-> 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i. e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz. gone; atthaŋ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat -- addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna˚ having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right) knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e. g. Vism 111, 197, 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view; sankhāra˚, etc. -- Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaŋkata>anabhāvaŋ gacchati; kālagata> kālakata (q. v.). agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ŋ disaŋ (of Nibbāna) Dh 323; purisantaraŋ ˚ŋ mātugāmaŋ "a maid who has not been with a man" J i.290. sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (=sugatiŋ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha: Vin i.35; iii.1; D i.49; S i.192; A ii.147 et passim (see Sugata). -- D i.83; Sn 227 (see expl. KhA 183). duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiŋ gata PvA 33, see gati) Pv i.62; ii.317; duggata -- bhāva (poverty) J vi.366; duggat -- itthi (miserable, poor) J i.290; parama -- duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) PvA 176. -- Compar. duggatatara DhA i.427; ii.135. -- atta (fr. attā) self -- perfected, perfect D i.57 (expl. by koṭippatta -- citto DA i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata M i.82; -- addhin (adj. of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp. addhagata) Dh 90; -- kāle (in gata -- gata -- kāle) whenever he went J iii.188; -- ṭṭhāna place of existence PvA 38; =gamana in āgata -- ṭṭhānaŋ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) J iii.188; -- yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age A i.138; Sn 98=124.
Gataka
Gataka a messenger J i.86.
Gatatta
Gatatta 1.=Sk. gat -- ātman (see prec.). -- 2.=Sk. gatatvaŋ the fact of having gone KhA 183.
Gati
Gati (f.) [fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. ba/sis, Lat. (in -- ) ventio, Goth. (ga -- ) qumps] 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq. of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) D ii.16=Sn p. 106; Sn 1001, or of a gihī arahattaŋ patto Miln 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama J i.56. -- phassâyatanānaŋ gati (course or direction) A ii.161; jagato gati (id.) A ii.15, 17; sakuntānaŋ g. the course, flight of birds Dh 92=Th 1, 92. -- Opp. āgati Pv ii.922. -- tassā gatiŋ jānāti "he knows her going away, i. e. where she has gone" PvA 6. -- 2. going away, passing on (=cuti, opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course, esp after death, destiny, as regards another (future) existence A i.112; D ii.91; M i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (=cutûpapatti), rebirth & death M i.328, 334. In defn of saŋsāra expld as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti=one existence after the other Nd2 664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd2 on dhātu (also as puna -- gati rebirth). -- The Arahant as being beyond Saŋsāra is also beyond gati: yassa gatiŋ na jānanti devā gandhabba -- mānusā Dh 420=Sn 644; yesaŋ gati n' atthi Sn 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaŋ parinibbānaŋ SnA 368. -- attā hi attano gati "everybody is (the maker of) his own future life" Dh 380; esā maccharino gati "this is the fate of the selfish" Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu "all fate be a success to you" J v.393; gato so tassa yā gati "he has gone where he had to go (after death)" Pv i.122. <-> 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence, element, especially characterized as sugati & duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaŋ pavanaŋ, ākāso pakkhīnaŋ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaŋ, nibbānaŋ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149=SnA 346; apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dh 310; duggati J i.28; avijjāy' eva gati the quality of ignorance Sn 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour M i.82; see also defn at Vism 237. <-> 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (=loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (=Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (=Yamaloka, apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world, (4) manussā (m -- loka) human beings, (5) devā gods: M i.73; D iii.234; A iv.459; Nd2 550; cp. S v.474 -- 77; Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v. 514 -- 528) under
-- 243 --
Naraka -- kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚. Of these Nos. 1 -- 3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1 -- 3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā, (6) devā, of which 1 -- 4 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q. v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv iv.11, cp. PvA 103). These six also at D iii.264. -- lokassa gatiŋ pajānāti Bhagavā Sn 377 (gati=nirayādipañcappabhedaŋ SnA 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino D i.228, dve niṭṭhā DA i.249 (q. v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (A i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60). -- gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya) Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26); J ii.1. agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha: there you have no access S i.115. -- 2.=duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life D iii.133; A i.72; ii.18 sq.; iii.274 sq.; J v.510; PvA 161. Technically the four agati -- gamanāni are: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ D iii.228 (see also under chanda). sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e. g. J vi.224) a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp. sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiŋ) & gata "gone to Heaven" Vin ii.195; D ii.202; It 77; PvA 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiŋ, etc. uppajjati) D i.143; A i.97; J i.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā It 24; suggatiŋ gata Dh 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti "bliss is not gained by evil" PvA 87; =sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna PvA 89; sugati -- parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib. duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiŋ gata, reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati D i.82; A i.97, 138 (+vinipātaŋ nirayaŋ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364; Dh 17; Sn 141; SnA 192 (=dukkhappatti); PvA 87. Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiŋ, one's own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dh 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv i.62; ii.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata.
Gatika
Gatika (adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148. -- 2. leading to: yaŋ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) S v.230. -- 3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaŋ˚ D i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DA i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) DhA iii.173.
Gatin
Gatin (adj.=gatika) 1. going, i. e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī "every river flows crooked" J i.289. -- 2. having a certain gati, fated, destined, esp. in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162=J i.219; saggaŋ sugatino yanti "those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens" Dh 126.
Gatimant
Gatimant (adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) M i.82.
Gatta
Gatta (nt.) [Vedic gātra] the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47; S i.169=183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but v. l. analla˚); A i.138; Sn 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna -- pabhinna˚, id.); PvA 56 (=sarīra); 68. -- As limbs: S iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores); M i.506 (id.); M i.80=246; J i.61 (lālākilinna˚); Sn 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv iii.91 (=sarīrâvayavā PvA 211); Miln 357 (arupakkāni).
Gathita
Gathita (adj.) [pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk. grathita] tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to, greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuñjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) "full of greed & blind desire." In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout. With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: D i.245; iii.43; M i.162, 173; S ii.270; iv.332; A v.178, 181 Nd2 on nissita C. -- c. loc.: J iv.371 (gharesu); DA i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaŋ gathitaŋ visajja Sn 794 (cp. Nd1 98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Sn 940. -- J iv.5 (=giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); PvA 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha) -- agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire) without desire, free from the ties of craving (+m˚, a˚) S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339: "without craving, without faintness, without sinking").
Gada
Gada speech, sentence Dh i.66, DA i.66 f.; and on D iii.135 (§ 28); gada at S ii.230 (v. l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s.
Gaddula
Gaddula (and gaddūla) a leather strap S iii.150; J ii.246; iii.204; fig, in taṇhā -- gaddūla "the leash of thirst," Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā)=Dhs 1059=Vbh 361, cp. DhsA 367.
Gaddūhana
Gaddūhana (nt.) [Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna] a small measure of space & time M iii.127; S ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA "pulling just once the cow's teat"); A iv.395; Miln 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh. D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375.
Gaddha
Gaddha [Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha] a vulture; in gaddha- bādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25= iv.218= M i.130; see also Vin. Texts ii.377.
Gadrabha
Gadrabha [Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.] an ass, donkey Vin v.129; M i.334; A i.229; J ii.109, 110; v.453; DA i.163. -- f. gadrabhī J ii.340. -- bhāraka a donkey load J ii.109; DhA i.123; -- bhāva the fact of being an ass J ii.110; -- rava (& -- rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415.
Gadhita
Gadhita see gathita.
Gantar
Gantar [n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future] "goer" in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king's elephant A ii.116=iii.161; v. l. for gatā at M ii.155.
Gantha
Gantha (in BB often misspelt gandha) [fr. ganthati] -- 1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚, see under kāya): S v.59=Dhs 1135; D iii.230; Nd1 98; DhA iii.276; 4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, by&#